Contents - 6 X CU E 5 - LO - EN

TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION
TECHNISCHE DOKUMENTATION
Compact Unit
EDITION / AUSGABE - 19.04.2016
CUSTOMER / KUNDE: Vard Promar SA_Vard Soeviknes

WS-ORDER NO. / WS-BESTELL 1452321099
NR.:
SERIE / SERIE: 0360-140
PROJECT / PROJEKT: EP 10
MODEL / MODELL: 6 x CU E 5 / LO
REVISION / REVISION: 00
engineering for a better world www.gea.com

1452321099 / 00 / 19.04.2016
Die Verfasser freuen sich immer über Kommentare und Ratschläge

diese Dokumentation betreffend. Sie können gesandt werden an
The authors are always for comments and suggestions for

improving the documentation. They can be sent to
© GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH
GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

Werner-Habig-Str. 1, 59302 Oelde, Germany
Tel.: +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
ws.info@gea.com, www.gea.com

1452321099 / 00 / 19.04.2016
CONTENTS / INHALT
COVER SHEET
DECKBLATT
1 SAFETY
SICHERHEIT
1.1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATIONS 9
SICHERHEITSHINWEISE FUER ANLAGEN
1.2 QUALIFICATION PERSONNEL 25
QUALIFIKATION PERSONAL.
1.3 SAFETY 33
SICHERHEIT
2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SYSTEMBESCHREIBUNG
2.1 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 59
INSTALLATIONSRICHTLINIEN
2.2 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE AND PARTS LIST 139
WARTUNGSPLAN U. ERSATZTEILLISTE
3 DOCUMENTS RELATING TO ORDERS
PROJEKTBEZOGENE DOKUMENTE
3.1 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS 245
GRAFIKSYMBOLE
3.2 ORDER INFORMATION SPARE PARTS FOR INSTALLATIONS 257
BESTELLINFO ERSATZTEILE F. ANLAGEN
3.3 EQUIPMENT LIST 263
GERAETELISTE
3.4 DIMENSIONED DRAWING 267
AUFSTELLUNGSPLAN
3.5 DATA SHEET 269
PROZESSDATENBLATT
3.6 INSTALLATION DIAGRAM 271
INSTALLATIONSSCHEMA
4 CONTROL UNIT
STEUER- UND REGELEINRICHTUNG
4.1 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 273
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG

1452321099 / 00 / 19.04.2016
4.2 ADJUSTMENT VALUES AND FAULT SIGNALS 373

EINSTELLWERTE UND BETRIEBSSTOERUNGEN
4.3 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 471
STROMLAUFPLAN
5 CENTRIFUGE
ZENTRIFUGE
5.1 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 575
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
5.2 PARTS CATALOGUE 785
ERSATZTEILKATALOG
ERSATZTEILKATALOG
ERSATZTEILKATALOG
ERSATZTEILKATALOG
ERSATZTEILKATALOG
ERSATZTEILKATALOG
6 PUMP
PUMPE
6.1 DIAPHRAGM PUMP, COMPLETE
MEMBRANPUMPE VOLLST.
P1/PX1 1091
GENERAL 1135
6.2 GEAR PUMP UNIT WITH MOTOR CPL.

ZAHNRADPUMPENAGGREGAT M.MOTOR V.
KF 2,5 - 200 1319
7 FILTER
FILTER
7.1 STRAINER, COMPL.
SCHMUTZFAENGER VOLLST.
BR 1385
BR 1397

1452321099 / 00 / 19.04.2016
8 HEAT EXCHANGER
WAERMETAUSCHER
8.1 ELECTRIC FLOW HEATER
ELEKTR.DURCHLAUFERHITZER
4700_ETU 1403
9 VALVES, FITTINGS, ASSEMBLY

VENTILE, ARMATUREN, ZUBEHÖR
9.1 3/2-WAY PISTON-TYPE CONTR.VALVE CPL
3/2-WEGE-KOLBENSTEUERVENTIL VOLLST.
DN25/PN16 1461
9.2 3/2 WAY SOLENOID VALVE

3/2-WEGE-MAGNETVENTIL
GMV-DIRECT 1497
6014 1513
9.3 SPRING SAFETY VALVE

FEDERSICHERHEITSVENTIL
67.961 1531
9.4 BALL COCK

KUGELHAHN
IM-10-BV 1549
9.5 SOLENOID-VALVE BLOCK, COMPLETE

MAGNETVENTILBLOCK VOLLST.
5281 1577
10168 1583
TFU006 1585
10168 1591
9.6 GATE VALVE

MUFFENSCHIEBER
IM-10-GV 1595
9.7 NON-RETURN VALVE

RUECKSCHLAGVENTIL
RVA 1615
9.8 NON-RETURN VALVE, COMPL.

RUECKSCHLAGVENTIL VOLLST.

1452321099 / 00 / 19.04.2016
IM-10-NRV 1631
9.9 AIR CONTROL ASSY.

WARTUNGSEINHEIT
C 05-6 1651
C05-6 1655
10 MEASUREMENT
MESSTECHNIK
10.1 PRESSURE GAUGE
DRUCKMESSGERAET
RGG-63 1657
R-P-RS-KP 1659
10.2 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

DRUCKTRANSMITTER
8255 1667
8255NAE 1669
10.3 STOP SWITCH

GRENZSCHALTER
LIQUITEC 1673
LIQUITEC 1701
10.4 PROXIMITY SENSOR

NAEHERUNGSINITIATOR
NJ5-11-N-G 1705
10.5 RESISTANCE THERMOMETER

WIDERSTANDSTHERMOMETER
2XPT100 1709
W083 1711
W083 1743
W083 1745
11 MOTOR
MOTOR
11.1 THREE-PHASE AC MOTOR
DREHSTROMMOTOR
IM-133-MOT 1747

1452321099 / 00 / 19.04.2016
11.2 GEAR PUMP UNIT WITH MOTOR CPL.

ZAHNRADPUMPENAGGREGAT M.MOTOR V.
PE 1803

Safety precautions
for plants
No.: 9001
Edition: 0712
Designation: Safety precautions
engineering for a better world GEA Mechanical Equipment

2 9001 / 0712 / Safety precautions / 25.07.2012
ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION
Subject to modification!
The authors are always grateful for comments and suggestions for improving the
documentation. They can be sent to
GEA Mechanical Equipment

Tel.: +49 2522 77-0 · Fax +49 2522 77-2488
ws.info@geagroup.com,· www.westfalia-separator.com
GEA Westfalia Separator Group

9001 / 0712 / Safety precautions / 25.07.2012 3
For your safety

• Strictly adhere to instructions marked with this symbol.
This avoids damage to the plant or plant components.
• Take special care when carrying out operations marked with this
symbol -
otherwise danger to life.
Note: • This symbol is not a safety precaution but rather a reference to infor-
mation which help to better understand the plant components and the
processes.
• Observe the accident prevention regulations!

The local safety and accident prevention regulations apply uncondi-
tionally to the operation of the plant. The plant operator must ensure
compliance with these regulations.
• Follow the instructions in the manual.

Follow only the instructions given in this manual.
Repair and maintenance work that goes beyond the scope described
in this manual may not be carried out.

1 Safety precautions
1.1 Safety markings ....................................................................................... 5

1.1.1 Safety markings and their meaning ......................................................... 5
1.2 Performing work on a plant ...................................................................... 8
1.2.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel ......................... 8
1.2.2 Spare part requirements .......................................................................... 9
1.2.3 Electrical installation ................................................................................ 9
1.2.4 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 10
1.2.5 Start-up .................................................................................................. 11
1.2.6 Shut-down and »Emergency-Off« ......................................................... 13

1.1 Safety markings

The safety markings (adhesives and metal plates) are attached to all plants, on
the hood and frame of the respective plant component in such a way that they
are clearly visible.
All safety markings on the plant, control system and plant components must al-
ways be in perfect condition.
• Clean dirty safety markings.
• Replace damaged safety markings.
1.1.1 Safety markings and their meaning

The following safety markings must be attached to the monitoring system as
adhesive labels:
Be sure to adhere to the plant

documentation!
• Every person who is assigned the
task of installing, operating, main-
taining and repairing the plant must
have read and understood the doc-
umentation.
• The documentation must be com-
plete kept near to the installation
and be readily accessible to the op-
erators. It must be available to the
operators at all times!
Fig. 1
Disconnect power prior to start-

ing work!
Risk of injury due to electrical voltage
and unintended start-up of the plant!
Before carrying out work on the

plant and electrical plant compo-
nents:
• Make sure the plant is at a standstill.
• Switch off all electrical appliances
via the main switch,
• Lock the installation to prevent it
Fig. 2 from being accidentally switched on.

Frequency converter operation!

• When setting the frequency convert-
er, do not exceed the admissible
speed (see nameplate)!
Note:
This adhesive plate is only used for
frequency converter operation.
Fig. 3
Warning of extreme surface

temperatures!
The surfaces of the plant components

can be hot!
Note:
This adhesive plate is only used for hot
operation.
Fig. 4
Danger due to electrical current!

Non-compliance with the protective
measures can result in serious dam-
age to persons or property.
Before working on electrical com-

ponents:
CAUTION:
The parts marked in this way can
carry voltage even when the main
Fig. 5 switch is off!
• Lock the installation to prevent it from being accidentally switched on.

• Take adequate preventive measures according to the national orovisions (in
Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verein
Deutscher Elektriker / Association of German Electrical Engineers) or EVU
(Europäische Vereinigung für Unfallforschung und Unfallanalyse / European
Association for Accident Research and Analysis) institutions.
• The work may only be carried out by competent persons (qualified technical
specialists).

Potential equalisation (protec-

tive-earth terminal)
The grounding protection is a measure
which, in the case of a malfunction,
leads off the touch voltage into the
earth.
Fig. 6

1.2 Performing work on a plant
The plant works reliably, provided that

it is operated and maintained in ac-
cordance with our operating instruc-
tions.
Fig. 7
Special attention must be given to:

• assembly
• electrical installation
• before start-up
• start-up
• shut-down
• maintenance and repair
1.2.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel

Operating, maintaining or repairing the plant requires specialized knowledge!
CAUTION!
Operating, maintenance or repair work by unqualified or unauthorized
personnel can lead to operating, assembly and handling errors and severe
damage to persons and property.
Westfalia Separator accepts no liability for damage caused by unqualified

or unauthorized personnel!
For operation, maintenance and repair work, personnel may only be deployed
who
• have reached a minimum age of 18 years.
• are demonstrably familiar with the state-of-the-art through briefings and train-
ing.
• are adequately qualified for performing the work and checking it.
Electrical work may only be carried out by an authorized electrician!
The operator of the plant

• is responsible for the necessary skills and knowledge of the personnel.
• is responsible for briefing and training the personnel.
• must be sure that the personnel have read and understood the manuals nec-
essary to carry out their work.

Westfalia Separator offers a an extensive range of training and advanced train-

ing courses. You can obtain further information from Westfalia Separator or from
one of the authorized representatives.
1.2.2 Spare part requirements
• Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia

Separator.
The use of non-genuine parts leads to:
– safety risks,
– less durability and availability,
– increased service requirement.
If a safety risk occurs when using non-original
spare parts, this may have legal consequences
Fig. 8 for the responsible persons. In such cases,
Westfalia Separator accepts no liability or war-
ranty claims.
1.2.3 Electrical installation
• Electrical work may only be car-

ried out by an authorized electri-
cian!
• The governing accident prevention
regulations apply for the electrical
appliances and installations.
• Special attention must be paid to the
installation guidelines of Westfalia
Separator.
• The frequency and voltage of the
power supply must correspond to
the machine specifications.
Fig. 9
• Carry out voltage equalization.

• Observe legal regulations; e.g. in the EU:
– Low-voltage guideline 73/23/EWG
– Electro-magnetic compatibility 89/336/EWG.
– Guidelines of the classification societies.

1.2.4 Before start-up
• Check that the lubrication and cool-

ing systems are serviceable.
Fig. 10
• Check whether the supervisory

equipment is operational and the
correct limit values are adjusted.
• When hoods, concentrate collectors
and vessels are pressurized, e.g. by
– inert gas blanketing,
– cooling,
– steam sterilization etc.
the pressures stated on the boiler
plate must not be exceeded.
Fig. 11
• Check that the product lines are set

to operation.
• Regularly check hoses for signs of
ageing.
• Check sight glasses for mechanical
damage.
• Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately by new or reconditioned
parts.
Fig. 12

1.2.5 Start-up
• Wear ear protection.
Fig. 13
In case of frequency converter

operation:
• Do not under any circumstances
manipulate the frequency converter
to exceed the permissible speed
(see nameplate).
• The plant may only be operated with
an independent device for speed
limiting.
Fig. 14
• Do not feed product which is catego-

rised as explosive.
• Do not operate the equipment in ex-
plosion-hazarded areas.
Note:
This is except for plants equipped for
operation in explosion-hazarded areas.
Fig. 15

• The plant may be fed with inflam-

mable product only when being in-
ert-gas blanketed.
• The oxygen level has to be kept be-
low limit of inflammability by means
of an appropriate inert gas.
Fig. 16
• When processing products harmful

to persons, observe the pertinent
safety regulations.
• Refer to the safety data sheet of the
product.
• Wear protective clothing.
Fig. 17
Only in case of hot operation:

• Product-contacting parts such as
– pipes and hoses,
– components,
– vessels
o
reach temperatures over 80 C
o
(176 F).
Fig. 18

1.2.6 Shut-down and »Emergency-Off«
• For shut-down refer to the chapter

"Operation".
Fig. 19

Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Для записей
Muistiinpanot
Σημειώσεις
Notater
Notes
Note


Tel.: +49 2522 77-0 · Fax +49 2522 77-2488
Qualification of staff
Edition: 0712
Designation: Qualification of staff
engineering for a better world GEA Mechanical Equipment

2 0712 / Qualification of staff
ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION
The authors are always grateful for comments and suggestions for improving the
documentation. They can be sent to

Tel.: +49 2522 77-0 · Fax +49 2522 77-2488

0712 / Qualification of staff 3
Qualification of staff
Work on / with separators requires special skills.

• Provide staff with special training / instruction for the following tasks:
– Operation,
– Maintenance,
– Repair.
• Clearly define responsibilities:
– Work performed by authorised persons only.
Type and source of danger:

Storage, transportation, erection, operation and maintenance of the sep-
arator / system by insufficiently trained staff.
Possible consequences of failure to observe:

Danger Incorrect operation, assembly and handling errors can cause serious damage,
injury / death.
Measures to prevent the danger:

– Use Westfalia Separator service.
– Take advantage of training opportunities.
– Read/follow operating manuals / operating instructions.
Westfalia Separator offers a comprehensive range of training measures.
The owner-operator is responsible for the training of staff.
NOTE
Contact Westfalia Separator or your nearest representative for more infor-

mation.
The owner-operator must select staff who, for example, fulfil the following re-
quirements:
• Minimum requirement:
– Read / understand the markings on the separator,
– Read / understand user instructions.
• Further requirements and skills:
– Basic general technical skills.
– Content of the operating manual / operating instruction.
– Measures for the prevention of accidents.
– Planning and implementation of installation.
– Securing of loads.
– Planning and implementation of start-up.
– Operation of the separator / system.
– Cleaning of the separator / system.
– Maintenance of the separator / system.
– Repair of the separator / system.
– Storage in case of extended periods of stoppage.

– Decommissioning of the separator / system.

– Disposal of operating material.
– Disposal of the separator / system.
• Other suitability:
– Only assign tasks to dependable persons.
– Minimum age of 18 years.
• Only employ persons undergoing training / apprenticeship under supervision.
The required skills and knowledge depend on the

tasks assigned.
NOTE
We reserve all rights to these documents. They may only be passed onto third parties after obtaining prior consent from Westfalia Separator Group GmbH.


Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note


Tel.: +49 2522 77-0 · Fax +49 2522 77-2488
Safety Precautions and User Instructions
for
Machine and Plant Components
No. 2058-9601-100
Edition 1110
GEA Mechanical Equipment / GEA Westfalia Separator Group

2 2058-9601-100 / 1110
ORIGINAL INSTRUCTIONS
The authors are always grateful for comments and suggestions for improving
the documentation. They can be addressed to:

Werner-Habig-Str. 1, 59302 Oelde
Tel. +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
ws.info@geagroup.com, www.westfalia-separator.com
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-100 / 1110 3
1 About this document 5
1.1 Scope of application ................................................................................ 6

1.2 Qualification of the personnel .................................................................. 6
1.2.1 Operating personnel ................................................................................ 6
1.2.2 Service and repair personnel ................................................................... 6
1.3 Structure of the documentation................................................................ 7
1.4 Symbols used .......................................................................................... 7
1.5 Warnings .................................................................................................. 8
2 Safety precautions 9
2.1 Intended use .......................................................................................... 10

2.2 Non-compliance with the intended use .................................................. 10
2.3 Residual risk .......................................................................................... 10
2.4 Safety markings ..................................................................................... 11
2.5 Safety instructions for the personnel ..................................................... 12
2.6 Adjustments / commissioning ................................................................ 12
2.7 Maintenance and servicing .................................................................... 12
2.8 Special types of hazard ......................................................................... 12
2.8.1 Electricity................................................................................................ 12
2.9 Oils, greases and other chemical substances ....................................... 13
3 Product overview 15
3.1 Description and operating principles ..................................................... 16

3.2 Operating conditions .............................................................................. 16
3.3 Transport................................................................................................ 16
3.4 Storage .................................................................................................. 16
4 Installation 17
4.1 Measures to be taken prior to installation .............................................. 18

4.2 Mounting ................................................................................................ 18
4.2.1 Fitting with threaded connection ............................................................ 18
4.2.2 Fitting with flange connection ................................................................ 18
4.3 Electrical connection .............................................................................. 19
4.4 Pneumatic connection ........................................................................... 19
4.5 Explosion-hazarded zone ...................................................................... 19
5 Maintenance and servicing 21
5.1 Cleaning and care .................................................................................. 22

5.2 Maintenance .......................................................................................... 22
5.3 Repair .................................................................................................... 22
6 Disposal 23
®
Westfalia Separator
4 2058-9601-100 / 1110
7 Spare parts 23
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-100 / 1110 5
1 About this document
1.1 Scope of application ................................................................................ 6

1.2.1 Operating personnel ................................................................................ 6
1.2.2 Service and repair personnel ................................................................... 6
1.3 Structure of the documentation................................................................ 7
1.4 Symbols used .......................................................................................... 7
1.5 Warnings .................................................................................................. 8
®
Westfalia Separator
6 2058-9601-100 / 1110
1.1 Scope of application

These Safety Precautions and User Instructions provide important support for
– avoiding risks,
– reducing repair cost and down times, and
– extending the life cycle of components
The term “component” will be used in singular although this document is appli-
cable to all components incorporated in the separators/plants.
To ensure perfect operating safety of the component, these safety precautions
and user instructions have to be thoroughly read and understood prior to:
– installation
– transport, storage
– maintenance work (cleaning and care, maintenance, servicing, repair) and
– disposal
For questions that cannot be solved with the aid of this documentation, please
check back with GEA Westfalia Separator Group.
1.2 Qualification of the personnel

Using these safety and user instructions and direct handling of the component
require specialist qualification of the staff. For identifying the qualification level
GEA Westfalia Separator Group uses the following standard terms:
1.2.1 Operating personnel

• Qualified staff have the necessary technical know-how and extensive expe-
rience enabling them to avoid the risks that can arise when handling electrical
or mechanical components. English language skills are prerequisite.
• Trained staff are instructed or supervised by qualified staff to enable them to
avoid the risks that can arise when handling electrical or mechanical compo-
nents.
When installing, operating and testing the equipment, the staff has to adhere to
the safety rules applicable in the respective industry.
1.2.2 Service and repair personnel

Service and repair work require specialist knowledge and skills. Such work may
be carried out only by competent persons in terms of specialist knowledge and
skills. Documents in English are provided for this circle of persons. It is essential
that this circle of persons has an adequate command of English.
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-100 / 1110 7
1.3 Structure of the documentation
• Refer to all the documents listed!

Danger through non-observance of the documentation
– Instruction manuals for separators and/or start-up and shut-down instruc-

WARNING! tions for plants
– Safety and user instructions on machine and plant documentation
• All safety precautions and warning instructions given in the documents have
– Component manual
• Access to the documentation on site must be ensured at all times.

to be adhered to!
The standard documentation for components comprises:
1. Instruction manuals for separators and/or start-up and shut-down instruc-

tions for plants
2. Safety and user instructions on machine and plant documentation (this
document).
3. Reference to component manual and / or technical datasheet of the com-
ponent.
1.4 Symbols used
This symbol gives information for better understanding the compo-

nent and its functions.
• A bullet point used when describing work and/or operation steps.

Be sure to proceed in correct order: from top to bottom.
– The dash (horizontal bar) is used for listing.
®
Westfalia Separator
8 2058-9601-100 / 1110
1.5 Warnings
Hazards are marked as warnings with a signal word reflecting the gravity and
probability and allocated safety colours according to ANSI Z535.
Warning Meaning
Stands for an impending threat of a hazard which will result in

severe physical injury or even death.
DANGER!
Stands for a potentially hazardous situation which could result

in severe physical injury or death.
WARNING!
Stands for a potentially hazardous situation which could result

in minor physical injury. This signal word can also be used for
warnings against damage to assets.
CAUTION!
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-100 / 1110 9
2.1 Intended use .......................................................................................... 10

2.3 Residual risk .......................................................................................... 10
2.4 Safety markings ..................................................................................... 11
2.5 Safety instructions for the personnel ..................................................... 12
2.6 Adjustments / commissioning ................................................................ 12
2.7 Maintenance and servicing .................................................................... 12
2.8 Special types of hazard ......................................................................... 12
2.8.1 Electricity................................................................................................ 12
2.9 Oils, greases and other chemical substances ....................................... 13
®
Westfalia Separator
10 2058-9601-100 / 1110
The machine or plant component is built according to state-of-the-art and to

prevailing safety rules and regulations. However, when using the component,
risks may arise for the user or third party or the component or other assets
might get damaged if it is
– operated by untrained or uninstructed staff,
– incorrectly used,
– inadequately maintained or serviced.
2.1 Intended use

The component is incorporated in machines and plants.
Precise details on the function of the component are found in the component
manufacturer’s manual.
The characteristics of the medium specified in the data sheet and the pressure
and temperature limit values for the medium mentioned in the specification must
be adhered to at all times.
The specific values stated in the documents furnished with the component have
to be observed and adhered to.
Any use in an explosion-hazarded area is not allowed. The only exception: this
is confirmed in the order or is mentioned in the Instruction Manual or in the
manufacturer’s data sheet.
2.2 Non-compliance with the intended use

Any use that deviates from or exceeds the intended use is considered to be
non-compliant. Solely the user of the machine/plant will be responsible for dam-
age resulting from incorrect usage. This also applies to modifications performed
on one’s own.
Non-intended use is the use of
– materials with excessively high temperature
– materials under excessively high pressure
– material containing smouldering, burning, or sticking particles
– highly explosive and pasty materials
– materials chemically reacting with the material of the component
The user is solely responsible for the operation and/or rating of the component.
Incorrect usage of components

Death or severe bodily injury to persons or damage to assets through disre-
garding mechanical, chemical and electrical risks.
• The specific values stated in the documents furnished with the component
WARNING!
have to be observed and adhered to.
2.3 Residual risk

An element of risk will remain when using the components, even when strictly
adhering to all safety rules and regulations.
Any person working with the component has to be aware of these remaining
risks and must follow all the instructions avoiding accidents or damage.
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-100 / 1110 11
Hazardous voltage - danger to life

Risk of death or serious injury through electric shock!
DANGER! • Work on electric apparatus and/or on live component equipment must be
performed by qualified staff only.
• Disconnect the power supply to electric equipment if required.
• Secure against unexpected restarting.
• Apply a warning sign prohibiting switching back on.
Danger when not using personal protective equipment

Risk of lethal injury when not using personal protective equipment (PPE)!
• Operating/maintenance staff must be obliged to wear PPE.
• Wear safety boots, safety goggles, ear protection, etc., depending on tasks
DANGER!
and conditions.
• When surface temperatures of > 50 °C or < 0 °C (> 122 °F or < 32 °F) pr e-
vail, wear temperature-resistant protective gloves when working on compo-
nents.
Danger through lack of attention when working in the area of the compo-
nent
Crushing, cutting and abrasion injuries.
WARNING! • Be sure to work and move carefully in the area around the component.
Risk of eye and/or skin injuries when medium discharges under high
pressure
Abrasive or corrosive substances destroy the component!
• Wear protective goggles or face-mask with eye protection against spouting
WARNING!
medium.
2.4 Safety markings

The following markings (adhesive and metal plates) are fastened to the compo-
nent or its accessories:
Warning of dangerous voltage!
The sign is fastened on the electric terminal box.

The terminal box may only be opened by a qualified electrician.
Nameplate The nameplate contains specific component data.
All safety markings must always be in perfect condition.

• Note the safety marking.
®
Westfalia Separator
12 2058-9601-100 / 1110
2.5 Safety instructions for the personnel

The component must be operated only in perfect condition, for the intended use,
taking into account security rules and being aware of risks, duly adhering to the
documentation.
Any fault – especially those potentially impairing safety - must be remedied im-
mediately!
Clearly define and adhere to responsibilities for operation and maintenance.
This is the only way to avoid errors – especially in dangerous situations.
Do not use the component until all protection and safety devices are installed
and serviceable! Do NOT remove them during operation.
In case of malfunction or safety-relevant change in operational behaviour, shut
down and secure the separator or the plant. Have faults remedied by qualified
staff immediately.
Leaking dangerous material must be discharged so as to avoid danger to the
operator and to the environment.
Do NOT touch damaged, cracked and, especially, live components.
2.6 Adjustments / commissioning

The medium throughput might change or be interrupted while the component is
being commissioned. Prior to commissioning, make sure that there will be no
risk for people or the environment while performing adjustments.
Each adjustment must be followed by a functional check.
Take appropriate measures to prevent crushing injuries by moving adjustment
devices.
2.7 Maintenance and servicing

When carrying out maintenance work, strictly adhere to all rules and regulations
applicable for handling the component or the medium (e.g. protective clothing,
no smoking).
Adhere to the check-up or inspection intervals specified in applicable laws
and/or in the documentation.
Check wires and hoses for damage and replace if necessary, especially on
moving components.
2.8 Special types of hazard
2.8.1 Electricity
Never carry out work on live parts!
Do not change safety-related design parameters! Especially, do NOT restrict
leakage paths, air gaps, and clearances with insulating coatings.
Check wires for damage at regular intervals and replace if necessary.
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-100 / 1110 13
2.9 Oils, greases and other chemical substances

When handling oils, greases, and chemicals, adhere to the applicable rules and
regulations and manufacturers’ data sheets for these materials concerning stor-
age, handling, usage, and disposal!
After eye or skin contact, rinse the affected area immediately with water.
®
Westfalia Separator
14 2058-9601-100 / 1110
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-100 / 1110 15
3 Product overview
3.1 Description and operating principles ..................................................... 16

3.2 Operating conditions .............................................................................. 16
3.3 Transport................................................................................................ 16
3.4 Storage .................................................................................................. 16
®
Westfalia Separator
16 2058-9601-100 / 1110
3.1 Description and operating principles

The detailed description and functional principle of the respective component
are given in the corresponding component manual.
3.2 Operating conditions

Housing and gasket materials are selected in accordance with operating condi-
tions. Operating conditions essentially determine the service live of the compo-
nent.
• Technical characteristics and the essential permissible limit values, especially
for pressure and temperature of the medium, are given in the manufacturer’s
manual.
• Care must be taken that the component is only used where the rating criteria
comply with the values stated on the nameplate. Correct transport and appro-
priate storage are prerequisite.
• Faults arising from moving elements must be prevented by taking appropriate
measures.
3.3 Transport
Be sure to comply with the following:
Danger through contact with substances hazardous to health

During operation the component might have come into contact with substances
that are hazardous to health.
WARNING!
• De-contaminate the component prior to packing and/or transport.
• Use lifting devices to transport heavy components that cannot be moved by

hand.
• Screw eye bolts or lugs into the component and suspend them properly to the
lifting device, and then transport.
• When using lifting straps, place them around the component, provide sharp-
edge protection if required, and watch for proper weight distribution.
• During transport, protect the component against external force (impacts, vi-
bration, etc.).
• Protect the sealing surfaces of connections against damage.
• Do not damage the corrosion-preventive coating.
3.4 Storage
• Protect the component against external impacts and contamination.
– Keep the storage room as dry and dust-free as possible.
– Avoid water condensation.
– Protect open connection ports from dirt.
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-100 / 1110 17
4 Installation
4.1 Measures to be taken prior to installation .............................................. 18

4.2 Mounting ................................................................................................ 18
4.2.1 Fitting with threaded connection ............................................................ 18
4.2.2 Fitting with flange connection ................................................................ 18
4.3 Electrical connection .............................................................................. 19
4.4 Pneumatic connection ........................................................................... 19
4.5 Explosion-hazarded zone ...................................................................... 19
®
Westfalia Separator
18 2058-9601-100 / 1110
• Refer to the component manual for specific information on the component.

• Before installation, read and follow the instructions in the chapter “Safety pre-
cautions”.
4.1 Measures to be taken prior to installation
Packaging damaged during transport and/or storage

Component might not comply with safety rules.
• Check for possible damage prior to installation.
• Do not install any defective component.
CAUTION!
Ta ke th e fo llo win g m e a s u re s p rio r to in s ta lla tio n :

• Check that the line system and the component are perfectly clean.
• Remove protection caps from the connectors directly before installation only.
• Do NOT damage sealing surfaces and threads respectively.
4.2 Mounting
• Remove all packaging material immediately before installation only.
• No dirt particles must seep into the component!
• Bear in mind the flow direction indicated on the component if required.
Afte r in s ta lla tio n

• Check for possible leakage and for proper function.
• Create the specified operating status.
4.2.1 Fitting with threaded connection

• Use appropriate sealing aid.
• Arrange the piping layout so that flux across the component will be avoided.
4.2.2 Fitting with flange connection

• Use the specified screws. Use all the flange bores provided.
• Insert appropriate seals and center them properly between the flanges.
• Tighten the screws evenly and crosswise to prevent warping. Under no cir-
cumstances should the pipeline be pulled against the component.
• Watch for proper location of seals.
• Tighten screws to the specified torques.
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-100 / 1110 19
4.3 Electrical connection

For a component with electric equipment:
Hazardous voltage - danger to life

Risk of death or serious injury through electric shock!
DANGER! • Work on electric apparatus and/or on live component equipment must be per-
formed by qualified staff only.
• Disconnect the power supply to electric equipment.
• Prevent unexpected restarting.
• Apply a warning sign prohibiting switching back on.
• Earth the component according to local rules.
• Take adequate preventive measures according to the provisions of the local
electric power company.
4.4 Pneumatic connection

Actuate only with treated compressed air. If necessary, install a compressed air
control unit upstream-
4.5 Explosion-hazarded zone

Any use in an explosion-hazarded area is not allowed. The only exception: this
is confirmed in the order or is mentioned in the Manual or in the manufacturer’s
data sheet.
®
Westfalia Separator
20 2058-9601-100 / 1110
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-100 / 1110 21
5 Maintenance and servicing
5.1 Cleaning and care .................................................................................. 22

5.2 Maintenance .......................................................................................... 22
5.3 Repair .................................................................................................... 22
®
Westfalia Separator
22 2058-9601-100 / 1110
This chapter comprises: cleaning and servicing, maintenance and repair.

• Before carrying out maintenance and repair, read and follow the instructions
in the chapter “Safety precautions”.
5.1 Cleaning and care
Damage to the component, caused by a layer of dirt

Clogging of functional openings. Impairment of heat dissipation!
• Arrange for efficient covering of the component when carrying out dirty work
CAUTION!
near the separator or the plant (e.g. laying concrete, brickwork, painting, sand-
blasting).
• Clean the component regularly.
Malfunction due to damage to the component

Risk of material damage through inappropriate cleaning!
• When cleaning with aqueous detergents, note the type of protection of electric
CAUTION! components. Do not apply them when in doubt!
• Do not use aggressive cleaning agents. Otherwise metal or plastic surfaces as
well as hose connections might be attacked.
• Never clean sensitive components with hard brushes applying excessive force.
• Use lint-free cleaning rags only.
5.2 Maintenance
• The maintenance intervals have to be re-determined (shortened) by the oper-
ator according to prevailing operating conditions.
• Check or maintain the component for safety reasons. When doing so, observe
the following minimum requirements:
– Check visible condition of the component and its accessories at regular in-
tervals.
– Actuate the component parts on a regular basis to ensure that proper func-
tioning of all moving parts will not be impaired by long-term standstill.
5.3 Repair
Material damage due to mechanical overload on component parts

Impacts by kicks, mechanical stress originating from connected pipelines, ex-
cessive ambient temperatures will destroy the component!
• Install parts without force. Avoid tension and strain.
WARNING!
• Avoid excessive load, e.g. impacts by kicks (wrongfully climbing on the com-
ponent).
• Avoid welding and thermal treatment.
• Avoid working on the components with tools (e.g. drilling).
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-100 / 1110 23
6 Disposal
• Comply with the prevailing statutory regulations to ensure proper, environ-

mentally sound disposal.
Danger through contact with substances hazardous to health

During operation the component might have come into contact with substances
that are hazardous to health.
• Decontaminate prior to disposal.
WARNING!
7 Spare parts
Spare, wear parts and operating materials can cause damage

to persons and assets if they do not meet the requirements.
Genuine spare parts and operating materials from GEA West-
falia Separator Group satisfy all requirements for the operating
• Use only genuine spare parts.

safety of the machine or installation.
• Use only original operating materials.

• Use the spare parts catalogue supplied.
®
Westfalia Separator
24 2058-9601-100 / 1110
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
Werner-Habig-Str. 1, 59302 Oelde (Germany)
Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
Installation Instructions
For Separators
No. 2058-9601-020
Edition 0211

2 2058-9601-020 / 0211
ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION MANUAL


Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 3
Preface
• are part of the overall documentation compiled for the separator.

These installation guidelines
• describe the procedures for constructing, manufacturing and design-

ing separators.
• contain fundamental instructions for installing separator installations.
• contain general guidelines for separator installations.
These guidelines specify the minimum specifications for designing and

constructing frames, tanks, piping and the electrical installation.
Putting together and installing the installation components must be
• Installation diagram and equipment list

carried out in accordance with the order-specific documents:
• Dimensioned drawing (notes on required space for operating and

servicing, minimum clearance from walls/pillars or other machines)
We reserve the right to carry out technical modifications on the

separator!
Attention must be paid to the operating, maintenance and mounting

instruction manuals of all units and fittings.
For your safety

symbol -
otherwise danger to life!

This avoids damage to the separator and other equipment.
mation which help to better understand the separator or plant compo-
nents and the processes.
• Use only genuine spare parts from GEA Westfalia Separator. The origi-
nal spare parts are listed in the spare parts catalog.
– safety risks,
– reduced durability of these parts,
– reduced availability of the separator and
If a safety risk occurs when using non-original spare parts, this may have legal
consequences for the responsible persons. In such cases, GEA Westfalia Sep-
arator accepts no liability or warranty claims.
®
Westfalia Separator
4 2058-9601-020 / 0211
1 General 7
1.1 Safety precautions ................................................................................... 8

1.2 Material .................................................................................................... 8
1.3 Installation ................................................................................................ 8
1.4 Storage .................................................................................................. 10
1.4.1 Installation of controls ............................................................................ 10
1.5 Transport................................................................................................ 12
1.5.1 Transporting the separator .................................................................... 13
1.6 Preservation measures on site .............................................................. 17
2 Separator 19
2.1 Space requirement for separators ......................................................... 20

2.1.1 Separators with belt drive ...................................................................... 20
2.2 Bowl weights .......................................................................................... 22
2.3 Required hoist specifications for separators.......................................... 23
2.4 Ventilating the separator room .............................................................. 23
2.5 Foundations ........................................................................................... 25
2.6 Securing the separators ......................................................................... 27
2.6.1 Separators OTC 2, OTC 3, OSD 2 ........................................................ 27
2.6.2 Separators OSD 6, 18, 35, 60, OSE 5, 10, 20, 40, 80 and
OTC 5, 10, 20 ........................................................................................ 28
2.7 Welding procedure for fastening the foundation frame ......................... 29
2.7.1 Installing the separator .......................................................................... 30
2.8 Vibrations ............................................................................................... 31
2.9 Pipelines on the separator ..................................................................... 32
2.9.1 Product line ............................................................................................ 32
2.9.2 Operating, filling and displacement water lines ..................................... 32
3 Operating, filling and displacement water 33
3.1 Water quality .......................................................................................... 34

3.2 Supply pressure and temperature ......................................................... 34
3.3 Water connection for operating, filling and displacement water ............ 35
3.4 Dimensions and number of consumers ................................................. 35
3.5 Water quantity ........................................................................................ 36
4 Compressed air 37
4.1 Compressed air quality .......................................................................... 38

4.2 Supply pressure ..................................................................................... 38
4.3 Compressed air consumption of the separators OSD, OSE and OTC.. 38
5 Product lines 39
5.1 General .................................................................................................. 40

5.2 Pipe cross-sections ................................................................................ 40
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 5
5.3 Functional description ............................................................................ 40

5.4 Information on pressure monitoring ....................................................... 40
5.5 Piping ..................................................................................................... 42
5.6 Maximum suction head .......................................................................... 43
5.6.1 Pressure line .......................................................................................... 43
5.6.2 Pre-filter ................................................................................................. 44
5.7 Feed pump ............................................................................................. 44
5.8 Oil pre-heater ......................................................................................... 44
5.9 Installation examples ............................................................................. 45
5.9.1 Steam-heated plate heat exchanger with (PI controlled) control valve . 45
5.9.2 Steam-heated tubular heat exchanger with (PI controlled)
control valve ........................................................................................... 46
5.9.3 Thermal oil-heated plate heat exchanger with (PI controlled)
control valve ........................................................................................... 47
5.9.4 Thermal-oil-heated tubular heat exchanger with (PI controlled)
control valve ........................................................................................... 48
5.10 Securing plate heat exchangers ............................................................ 49
5.11 Safety valve ........................................................................................... 50
6 Solids tank 51
6.1 Recommended criteria for solids tank ................................................... 52

6.1.1 Tank vent ............................................................................................... 53
6.1.2 Set-up of the solids tank venting ........................................................... 54
6.2 Solids discharge lines ............................................................................ 55
6.2.1 Solids discharge lines with shut-off flap................................................. 56
6.2.2 Standard installation of shut-off flaps .................................................... 56
6.2.3 Installation recommendation for shut-off flaps ....................................... 57
6.3 Operating and dirty water discharge lines ............................................. 58
6.3.1 Separators OSD, OSE and OTC ........................................................... 58
7 Electrical installation 61
7.1 Control cabinet ....................................................................................... 62

7.1.1 Electrical connection .............................................................................. 64
7.1.2 External voltages ................................................................................... 64
7.1.3 Shipboard operation .............................................................................. 65
7.1.4 Onshore operation ................................................................................. 65
7.2 Electro-magnetically compatible installation .......................................... 66
7.3 Valves .................................................................................................... 67
7.3.1 Solenoid valve block .............................................................................. 67
7.3.2 Terminal box .......................................................................................... 68
7.3.3 Separator with sensor bloc .................................................................... 69
7.4 Dual-purpose thermometer .................................................................... 70
7.5 Electrical installation of transmitters and electric motors ....................... 71
7.6 Electrical execution ................................................................................ 71
7.6.1 Earthing the separator ........................................................................... 72
7.6.2 Voltage equalization of the separator .................................................... 72
7.6.3 Voltage equalization of the electric heater ............................................. 73
7.6.4 Voltage equalization of the foundation frame ........................................ 73
7.6.5 Voltage equalization of the control cabinet ............................................ 74
7.7 Electric motors procured by the customer ............................................. 75
7.8 Installation and operation of control units .............................................. 76
®
Westfalia Separator
6 2058-9601-020 / 0211
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 7
1 General
1.1 Safety precautions ................................................................................... 8

1.2 Material .................................................................................................... 8
1.3 Installation ................................................................................................ 8
1.4 Storage .................................................................................................. 10
1.4.1 Installation of controls ............................................................................ 10
1.5 Transport................................................................................................ 12
1.6 Preservation measures on site .............................................................. 17
®
Westfalia Separator
8 2058-9601-020 / 0211
1.1 Safety precautions

• Pay special attention to the safety precautions contained in the
overall documentation compiled for the separator!
1.2 Material
• The specified material must conform to the standards set out in these installa-
tion guidelines as a minimum requirement.
• All materials used must be new and from the same series.
1.3 Installation
Fig. 1 Installation example
1 Separator: 7 Solids tank venting

2 Separator foundation 8 Crane
3 Control unit 9 Cleaning table
4 Control cabinet 10 Aeration
5 Preheater 11 Venting
6 Solids tank
• The applicable regulations and standards of classification societies or other

authorised bodies must be observed.
• All lubricating points and the gear / drive housing of the separator must be
easily accessible without having to remove pipes or gratings.
• All operating elements must be within comfortable reach of the operator and
at a suitable height.
• Operating elements must not be mounted higher than 1800 mm above the
working platform.
• All units must be arranged so that they do not cramp the working area and so
that they can be safely serviced and operated.
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 9
• All fixed piping and fittings must be safely supported to reduce vibrations and
movement to a minimum.
• Contact points or supports must be fitted so that the pipes are able to move
with changing temperatures without creating tension in the pipes.
• Pipes and pipe connections must be accessible for maintenance.
• Pipes must not be used for supporting distributors or appliances.
• These regulations and standards do not apply to small purpose-built parts
whose durability, accessibility and operation are not influenced. They must be
fitted in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
• No galvanized parts may be fitted in product-carrying lines (e.g. heavy oil,
diesel oil, steam lines and thermal oil lines). This does not apply if type-tested
pipe joints are fitted in pipe trace heating systems.
• Y-strainers should preferably be fitted horizontally with the strainer insert
pointing downwards or to the side (turned through 90°).
If this is not possible for space reasons, the dirt pan can be fitted vertically
with a throughflow from top to bottom. In this case, ensure that the strainer
can be dismantled.
®
Westfalia Separator
10 2058-9601-020 / 0211
1.4 Storage
• Parts may be stored only in original GEA Westfalia Separator transport pack-
aging.
• A storage time of more than 12 months is only possible after consulting the
manufacturer.
• The storage site should be a closed, dry room.
• The storage temperature must not be below 5°C (41 F) and must not exceed
50 °C (122 °F).
• Outdoor exposure is not admissible!

IMPORTANT:
Pay attention to the following points on storage and transport packaging.
• Handle fragile goods with care!
• Protect the goods against moisture and humidity.
• Protect the goods against heat!
• Pay attention when erecting the goods.
1.4.1 Installation of controls

IMPORTANT:
• Select the installation site so that

– the control unit is not exposed to dust and aggressive atmosphere.
– the control unit is not installed in an excessively humid environment or
damp area.
– the sun cannot shine on the control panel or displays making operation and
observation more difficult.
– heating up of the control unit is avoided.
• Where appropriate, check screw-type and plug-type connectors for secure
contact.
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 11
• Connect thermostatically controlled cabinet heating to external voltage and

switch it on.
• The control cabinet heating must switch on before the temperature drops be-
low the dew point.
• Bedewing can occur during the night which is not good for electronic appa-
ratus.
• Check that the line voltage and frequency conform to the connection data of
the control unit (see nameplate).
• Pay attention to admissible installation and operating data:
Voltage fluctuations +/- 10 % of the line voltage

Frequency fluctuations +/- 2 % of the line voltage
Ambient temperatures + 5 to + 45 °C (41 to 113 °F)
Atmospheric humidity max. 50 % at 40 °C (104 °F)
max. 90 % at 20 °C (68 °F)
Installation height above sea level up to 1000 m
Transport temperatures – 25 to + 55 °C ( –13 to 131 °F)
IMPORTANT:
Improper installation and operation discharges the supplier from the warranty
obligation.
®
Westfalia Separator
12 2058-9601-020 / 0211
1.5 Transport
The adjacent packing illustrates a

seaworthy packaging from GEA West-
falia Separator.
Fig. 2
• After removing the side boards and

filling material, the bottom board can
be used as a special pallet for fork
lift trucks.
Fig. 3
• If no forklift trucks are available,

transport the case with the aid of a
crane (see diagram).
• Attach the ropes to the points on the
packing case as marked on the
packing case.
Fig. 4
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 13
• Attach ropes round the case and

hang them into the load hook of the
crane.
• CAUTION!
Wind one piece of rope twice
round the hook to prevent the
ropes from slipping.
Fig. 5
1.5.1 Transporting the separator
• IMPORTANT:
To avoid damage, the bowl must be
removed from the separator before
transport.
• The separator is normally delivered
without installed bowl.
• The OTC 2, OTC 3, OSD 2 and

Exception:
OSE 5 separators are delivered and

transported with installed bowl.
Fig. 6
CAUTION!
Prevent accidents by using suitably rated hoists for transport and installa-
tion.
• When transporting rope, make sure

that one piece of rope is wound
twice round the hook to prevent the
• The rope must be properly attached
to the separator.
• Ensure that no pulling or pushing
forces act on machine parts when
using ropes.
Fig. 7
The following examples show how the transport ropes must be attached on the
different frame designs (see Fig. 8 – Fig. 13).
®
Westfalia Separator
14 2058-9601-020 / 0211
For OSD 6 or 18 and OSE 5, 10 and 20 – separator with belt drive
• Screw double nipple 1 into the hole

in the frame.
Fig. 8
• Attach the transport ropes

– to the machine as illustrated and
– hang them into the load hook of
the hoist as illustrated.
• Make sure that the ropes do not
damage any machine components.
• Do not use the eye bolt of the

motor to suspend the separator.
• Make sure the machine touches
down gently.
Fig. 9
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 15
For OSD 35 and OSE 40 – separator with belt drive
• Screw two eye bolts 1 into the upper

section of the frame.
in the frame.
Fig. 10

– around the double nipple.
– Thread through the eye bolts and

down gently.
Fig. 11
®
Westfalia Separator
16 2058-9601-020 / 0211
For OSD 60, OSE 80 and 120 – separator with belt drive
• Check that
– two eye bolts 1 are screwed into
the upper section of the frame.
– Screw two eye bolts 2 with wash-
ers 3 into the intermediate flange /
frame holes.
Fig. 12

– Thread through the four eye bolts
and

down gently.
Fig. 13
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 17
1.6 Preservation measures on site
After installation until commissioning

• All parts such as tools, spare parts and bowl must be stored in the original
packaging in a suitable place until commissioning.
• The parts must be stored at 5 to 50 °C (41 - 122 °F) in dry, weatherproof
rooms to prevent the packaging from getting damaged.
• The spindle and gear/drive chamber are lubricated at the factory which pro-
tects them for a period of 12 months.
• In the case of a storage and standstill period of longer than 12 months, the
time-dependent maintenance intervals specified in the instruction manual
must be adhered to before putting the machine back into operation.
• After this time (12 months) has expired, it must be checked at 12 monthly in-
tervals that all bearings and the spindle have sufficient lubrication.
• Oil to be used:
– Shell oil S.7294 (SAE 30/SAE 50) for bearings and spindle,
– roller bearing grease for the spindle cap.
®
Westfalia Separator
18 2058-9601-020 / 0211
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 19
2 Separator
2.1 Space requirement for separators ......................................................... 20

2.1.1 Separators with belt drive ...................................................................... 20
2.2 Bowl weights .......................................................................................... 22
2.3 Required hoist specifications for separators.......................................... 23
2.4 Ventilating the separator room .............................................................. 23
2.5 Foundations ........................................................................................... 25
2.6 Securing the separators ......................................................................... 27
2.6.1 Separators OSD 6, 18, 35, 60, OSE 5, 10, 20, 40, 80 and
OTC 5, 10, 20 ........................................................................................ 28
2.7 Welding procedure for fastening the foundation frame ......................... 29
2.8 Vibrations ............................................................................................... 31
2.9 Pipelines on the separator ..................................................................... 32
2.9.1 Product line ............................................................................................ 32
2.9.2 Operating, filling and displacement water lines ..................................... 32
®
Westfalia Separator
20 2058-9601-020 / 0211
2.1 Space requirement for separators

• No piping may be laid in the operating area apart from the feed and discharge
lines for the separator.
2.1.1 Separators with belt drive
• The hatched area represents the operating area.

• See the following table to determine the operating area.
• Before installing the separator, pay special attention to the removal dimension
X for the electric motors!
Front view of separator
Fig. 14
Side view of separator
Fig. 15
Top view of separator
Fig. 16
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 21
Table for determining the operating area for separators with belt drive
Separator Dimensions in mm
model A B D E F G X Y
OTC 2 800 300 800 120 - 280 100 150
OTC 3 800 300 800 120 - 280 100 150
OTC 5 1400 600 1200 400 1250 375 540 150
OTC 10 1400 600 1400 550 1450 540 540 150
OTC 20 1400 600 1400 550 1550 630 630 150
OSD 2 800 300 800 200 - 280 100 150
OSD 6 1400 600 1400 550 1450 540 180 150
OSD 18 1400 600 1400 550 1550 630 180 150
OSD 35 1800 700 1800 650 1950 850 230 200
OSD 60 2000 800 2000 700 2500 1000 300 200
OSE 5 1400 600 1200 400 1250 375 540 150
OSE 10 1400 600 1400 550 1500 540 180 150
OSE 20 1400 600 1400 550 1650 630 180 150
OSE 40 1800 700 1800 650 2080 850 230 200
OSE 80 2000 800 2000 700 2250 1000 300 200
®
Westfalia Separator
22 2058-9601-020 / 0211
2.2 Bowl weights
Fig. 17
Table with data for rating the lifting device

Bowl weight
Separator model b h
[kg]
OSD 6 255 270 42
OSD 18 300 320 72
OSD 35 425 420 190
OSD 60 536 530 360
OTC 5 220 225 25
OTC 10 260 265 40
OTC 20 315 310 52
Bowl weight
Separator model b h
[kg]
OSE 5 220 225 30
OSE 10 260 265 45
OSE 20 315 310 65
OSE 40 440 450 205
OSE 80 560 570 400
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 23
2.3 Required hoist specifications for separators
Flat belt separators

• The hoist must be travel-type or swivel-type.
• The hoist must be arranged so as to enable the following:
– Vertical fitting and removal of the bowl (see section 2.1.1, table - dimension
F).
– Horizontal removal and fitting of the drive motor (see section 2.1.1, table -
dimension X).
2.4 Ventilating the separator room

• Pay attention to the correct arrangement of the air feed and discharge lines so
that
– the separator room is efficiently ventilated,
– the admissible room temperature – normally max. 45 °C (113 °F) – is not
exceeded.
The rating of the electrical apparatus is critical in this respect.
IMPORTANT:
If the admissible temperatures are exceeded, additional measures must be tak-
en. Maintenance intervals and maintenance measures may have to be adjusted
accordingly.
Installation example of a ventilation

system
1 Aeration
2 Venting
Fig. 18
Approximate values for air exchange
-1
For small closed separator rooms 30 - 50 h
-1
For large separator rooms 15 - 20 h
-1
For niches in engine rooms 50 - 70 h
®
Westfalia Separator
24 2058-9601-020 / 0211
Table for air volumes pressed out of the housing
Separator Air volume

model [m³/h]
OTC 2 10
OTC 3 10
OTC 5 10
OTC 10 10
OTC 20 10
OSD 2 10
OSD 6 10
OSD 18 30
OSD 35 100
OSD 60 150
OSE 5 10
OSE 10 10
OSE 20 30
OSE 40 100
OSE 80 150
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 25
2.5 Foundations
• Foundations and foundation frames for separators must not be rigidly con-
In order to avoid the influence of external vibrations,
nected to other foundations.
• If the foundation does not have adequate rigidity and flexural strength, this
IMPORTANT:
may result in loss of warranty.
Installation example for a founda-

tion frame
1 Foundation
Fig. 19
• The foundation frames must be de-

signed so that dimensions a and b in
the table below are adhered to.
• When using other sections, the sec-
tion modulus of the U-sections must
not be lower than the value specified
in DIN 1026.
• The foundation must be rigid with a
maximum admissible deflection of
1:250.
• The separator feet must be fastened
on the neutral axis of the frame.
Fig. 20
®
Westfalia Separator
26 2058-9601-020 / 0211
Table for dimensioning foundation frames
Separator mod- Dimensions in mm

el a b
OTC 2 80 60
OTC 3 80 60
OTC 5 80 60
OTC 10 80 60
OTC 20 80 60
OSD 2 80 60
OSD 6 140 60
OSD 18 140 60
OSD 35 180 70
OSD 60 180 70
OSE 5 140 60
OSE 10 140 60
OSE 20 140 60
OSE 40 180 70
OSE 80 180 70
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 27
2.6 Securing the separators

The following sections show how to secure the different separators:
2.6.1 Separators OTC 2, OTC 3, OSD 2
Assembly of separators with the aid of

rubber-metal cushions on a steel foun-
dation frame.
Fig. 21
• Screw rubber-metal cushions 4 into

foundation 5.
• Screw studs 2 into rubber-metal
cushions 4.
• Place plate 3 over the studs.
• Place the separator on plate 3 and
• bolt tight with hexagon nuts 1.
Fig. 22
ATTENTION!
The tightening torque for the stud screw 2 (M10) must be 30 Nm.
®
Westfalia Separator
28 2058-9601-020 / 0211
2.6.2 Separators OSD 6, 18, 35, 60, OSE 5, 10, 20, 40, 80 and OTC 5, 10, 20
• Align separator 1 with feet 2 and

plates 3 on foundation 4.
• Tack plates 3.
• Unscrew screws 5.
• Lift separator with feet (see section
1.5.1).
• Weld plates 3 to foundation 4.
• Place the separator on plates 3 and
• Screw tight hex head screws 6.
Fig. 23
ATTENTION!
The torque for the hex head screws 6 is specified in the table below.
Separator model Hex head screw Torque
OSD 6
M 12 52 Nm
OSD 18
OSD 35
M 16 100 Nm
OSD 60
OSE 5
OSE 10 M 12 52 Nm
OSE 20
OSE 40
M 16 100 Nm
OSE 80
OTC 5
OTC 10 M 12 52 Nm
OTC 20
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 29
2.7 Welding procedure for fastening the foundation frame

The following sections show the welding procedure for fastening the foundation
frame:
Mounting the separator installations

on board of a ship
• The foundation frame 2 can be di-
rectly welded onto the steel structure
2 from the shipyard.
Fig. 24
Example 1
• The length of the weld seams must
be 100 mm.
• The distance between the weld
seams must be approx. 350 mm.
This means that that there are 3 weld

seams with a length of 100 mm along
a length of one metre.
Example 2
• The foundation frame can likewise
Fig. 25 be welded all the way round.
Detail view
In this view you can see an example
for welding the foundation frame to the
steel structure.
The letter X indicates a fillet weld.
Fig. 26
®
Westfalia Separator
30 2058-9601-020 / 0211
2.7.1 Installing the separator
Mounting the separator installations

on board of a ship
• The frames must be fitted beneath
the separator feet.
• The dimension a for the frame dis-
tance must be observed.
• The position of the separator feet is
given in section 2.1.1.
Fig. 27
• The dimension a for the frame dis-

tance is given in the table below for
the respective separator model.
Fig. 28
Dimension “a”
Separator model
[mm]
OTC 2 452 mm
OTC 3 452 mm
OTC 5 326 mm
OTC 10 350 mm
OTC 20 425 mm
OSD 2 452 mm
OSD 6 350 mm
OSD 18 425 mm
OSD 35 555 mm
OSD 60 700 mm
OSE 5 326 mm
OSE 10 350 mm
OSE 20 425 mm
OSE 40 555 mm
OSE 80 700 mm
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 31
2.8 Vibrations
Fig. 29
Admissible vibra- Limit values for Vibro 1
Tolerable vibration values at the
separator installation surface 
Separator tion value at the with installed vibration
model reference point  sensor 
max. [mm/s]
[mm/s] [mm/s]
OTC 2 1,8 2,8 2,8
OTC 3 1,8 2,8 2,8
OTC 5 2,8 4,5 4,5
OTC 10 2,8 4,5 4,5
OTC 20 2,8 4,5 4,5
OSD 2 1,8 2,8 2,8
OSD 6 2,8 4,5 4,5
OSD 18 2,8 4,5 4,5
OSD 35 2,8 4,5 4,5
OSD 60 2,8 4,5 4,5
OSE 5 3,5 5,5 5,5
OSE 10 2,8 4,5 4,5
OSE 20 2,8 4,5 4,5
OSE 40 2,8 4,5 4,5
OSE 80 2,8 4,5 4,5
 Measured at separator standstill and normal ship operating conditions
 Measured with separators in operation
 The Vibro sensor is attached in this range
®
Westfalia Separator
32 2058-9601-020 / 0211
2.9 Pipelines on the separator

The following sections describe the general set-up of the piping system in the
separator installation:
2.9.1 Product line

• Product lines must be laid
– in accordance with the guidelines of GEA Westfalia Separator or
– in accordance with the requirements of the classification societies.
• Use only genuine parts from GEA Westfalia Separator!
• The lines must be flushed before commissioning to protect the valves and
units.
• The following lines must have no rigid connection with the separator in order
to prevent vibrations:
– Product feed and discharge
– Water connection
– Solids discharge
– Dirty water discharge
– Frame drain
• This can be realised by means of hoses or compensators, whereby there are

special requirements for shockproof separators.
• Hose pipes must be laid so that they cannot be twisted, kinked, clamped or
rubbed.
• Use only hoses from GEA Westfalia Separator!
2.9.2 Operating, filling and displacement water lines

• Water lines must be laid so that they can be completely drained at the lowest
point with no dismantling.
• Y-strainers are fitted horizontally at the factory – with the strainer insert point-
ing downwards. See section 1.3 – Installation.
• The solenoid valves for operating, filling and displacement water to the sepa-
rator are fitted so that the hose between the separator and solenoid valves
cannot empty.
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 33
3 Operating, filling and displacement water
3.1 Water quality .......................................................................................... 34

3.2 Supply pressure and temperature ......................................................... 34
3.3 Water connection for operating, filling and displacement water ............ 35
3.4 Dimensions and number of consumers ................................................. 35
3.5 Water quantity ........................................................................................ 36
®
Westfalia Separator
34 2058-9601-020 / 0211
3.1 Water quality

• The water should be as pure as possible and meet the following standards:
Hardness:
< 12° dH
< 6° dH
– up to 55 °C (131 °F) separating temperature
– above 55 °C (131 °F) separating temperature
Note:
– When using demineralised water or condensate, corrosion must be
reckoned with.
– The use of boiler feed water is not permissible!
– Land water is not recommended because the degrees of hardness are
normally too high.
To convert the hardness values stated, use the following equation:
1° dH = 1,79° fH = 1,25° eH = 17,9 ppm CaCO 3
pH 6,5 – 8,5
Chloride ions < 100 mg/l
max. 50 µm
Suspended matter max. 10 mg/l
Particle size
3.2 Supply pressure and temperature
Fig. 30
Note:
The pressure after the water pressure reducer must not drop below 0.2 Mpa
with open operating water valve.
• The supply pressure and the temperature for the operating, filling and dis-
placement water must meet the following specifications:
Temperature min. 10 °C (50 °F)

max. 85 °C (185 °F)
Supply pressure 0.3 – 1.0 MPa
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 35
3.3 Water connection for operating, filling and displacement water

• Pay special attention to section 2.9.2!
3.4 Dimensions and number of consumers

• Collective lines must be dimensioned so that the separators are always sup-
plied with an adequate water volume to assure perfect functioning.
• Lines must be laid so that manual override of the valves and filter replace-
ment are possible.
• The maximum length between pressure reducer and solenoid valve must not
exceed 5 m.
• In the case of 1 consumer, the col-

lective line must have the same
nominal diameter as the feed lines
to the separator.
• The nominal diameter R is given in
the table below.
Fig. 31
Fig. 32
• the collective line must have a nominal diameter S (see table).

In the case of 2 consumers:
• the supply lines to the separator must have a nominal diameter R (see table).
Note:
When two separators request water at different times, the water supply can be
rated as for one separator.
®
Westfalia Separator
36 2058-9601-020 / 0211
• the collective line must have a nominal diameter of DN 32.

In the case of 3 consumers:
• the supply lines to the separator must have a nominal diameter R (see table).
Table for selecting the nominal diameters “S” and “R”.

Nominal diameter (DN)
Separator model Collective line Supply line
S R
OSD 2 25 20
OSD 6 25 20
OSD 18 25 20
OSD 35 32 20
OSD 60 32 20
OSE 5 25 20
OSE 10 25 20
OSE 20 25 20
OSE 40 32 20
OSE 80 32 20
3.5 Water quantity

For exact program control, with simultaneous actuation of the valves, the follow-
ing water quantities are required:
V2 V2 V3 Total con-
Total consumption
sumption per cycle
Separator Displace- Operating per cycle without
Filling water
model ment water water * filling wa-
ter
l/s l/s l/s Approx. 1
OSD 2 0,25 0,25 0,25 2 1,5
OSD 6 0,1 0,1 0,5 3 2
OSD 18 0,1 0,1 0,8 5 3,5
OSD 35 0,1 0,1 0,8 10 6,5
OSD 60 0,1 0,1 0,8 23 13
OSE 5 0,1 0,1 0,5 1,6 1,1
OSE 10 0,1 0,1 0,5 2,3 1,5
OSE 20 0,1 0,1 0,5 3,2 2,0
OSE 40 0,1 0,1 0,8 11,6 7,6
OSE 80 0,1 0,1 0,8 25,4 15,4
* Ejection cycle = Σ (filling water + displacement water + operating water)
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 37
4 Compressed air
4.1 Compressed air quality .......................................................................... 38

4.2 Supply pressure ..................................................................................... 38
4.3 Compressed air consumption of the separators OSD, OSE and OTC.. 38
®
Westfalia Separator
38 2058-9601-020 / 0211
4.1 Compressed air quality
• The compressed air must be free from impurities and dry.
4.2 Supply pressure

Recommended set-up of compressed air line per treatment system.
1
Fig. 33 OSD separators
• A supply pressure of 0.3 to max. 1.0 MPa is admissible.

• After the reducer station 0.3 MPa must still be available to the consumers.
• Note:
On OSD separators, a compressed air control unit is no longer included in the
standard scope of supply.
• If other pneumatic components are operated, the corresponding instructions
relating to air quality and air lubrication must be observed.
4.3 Compressed air consumption of the separators OSD, OSE and OTC
• The maximum compressed air consumption per separator is approx. 0.01
3
Nm /h.
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 39
5 Product lines
5.1 General .................................................................................................. 40

5.2 Pipe cross-sections ................................................................................ 40
5.3 Functional description ............................................................................ 40
5.4 Information on pressure monitoring ....................................................... 40
5.5 Piping ..................................................................................................... 42
5.6 Maximum suction head .......................................................................... 43
5.6.1 Pressure line .......................................................................................... 43
5.6.2 Pre-filter ................................................................................................. 44
5.7 Feed pump ............................................................................................. 44
5.8 Oil pre-heater ......................................................................................... 44
5.9 Installation examples ............................................................................. 45
5.9.1 Steam-heated plate heat exchanger with (PI controlled) control valve . 45
5.9.2 Steam-heated tubular heat exchanger with (PI controlled)
control valve ........................................................................................... 46
5.9.3 Thermal oil-heated plate heat exchanger with (PI controlled) control
valve....................................................................................................... 47
5.9.4 Thermal-oil-heated tubular heat exchanger with (PI controlled)
control valve ........................................................................................... 48
5.10 Securing plate heat exchangers ............................................................ 49
5.11 Safety valve ........................................................................................... 50
®
Westfalia Separator
40 2058-9601-020 / 0211
5.1 General
• Pay special attention to section 1.3!
• The suction lines should be as short as possible to avoid pressure losses.
• The pipes must be installed with adequate clearance from the electronic
parts.
• Water pockets must be avoided! (water must be able to flow off freely).
• When different products are run through the same separator, it must be en-
sured that the corresponding product lines cannot be interchanged.
5.2 Pipe cross-sections

• All pipes, valves, fittings and instruments must be laid so that an insulation of
40 mm is possible.
• Dimensioning of the pipes is specified on the respective P&ID.
• The pipes can be selected with the aid of the following diagram. The specifi-
cations on the P&IDs have priority!
• Pipe resistances must be kept as low as possible.
• Taking into account the total pressure losses, the flow velocities must be
– between 0.5 m/s and < 1 m/s in suction lines,
– between 1 m/s and 3 m/s in pressure lines.
5.3 Functional description

The liquid is discharged from the separator by means of a pumping device, in
the following referred to as centripetal pump. At small capacities, the discharge
can be without pressure; in the case of larger capacities the centripetal pump
generates the required pressure to convey the liquid out of the separator
through the downstream lines by immersing more deeply into the liquid.
The pressure values can differ significantly. The following rule applies: The val-
ues are lower on small separators than on large separators.
Further influencing factors are capacity, system resistances (valve position, tank
position), product properties and process specifications.
5.4 Information on pressure monitoring

When the liquid is discharged from the separator under pressure, the operator
knows that the separator bowl is hydraulically closed.
A discharge pressure adjusts given a constant capacity or it is adjusted to the
desired value by throttling in the discharge.
In the standard application, the pressure sensor responds to falling discharge
pressure, an alarm is triggered via the control system. The control system can
also evaluate rising pressure and trigger an alarm.
Generally, the discharge pressure is set to 0.1 – 0.2 MPa. The pressure level
can deviate from this when separator size, capacity, product properties and pro-
cess specifications require. (for further information, see the order-specific doc-
umentation)
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 41
• Change in feed capacity

A change in the discharge pressure may be caused by the following factors:
• Change in product data such as temperature, density, viscosity

• Change in discharge resistance
• Leakage at the separator bowl
This represents important information for the operator.
Selection diagram
Fig. 34
Q Flow
v Velocity in m/s
Example:
3
A flow rate of 5 m /h produces a velocity of 1.2 m/s with a nominal diameter of
40.
®
Westfalia Separator
42 2058-9601-020 / 0211
5.5 Piping
Fig. 35 Lubrication oil schematic
1 LO tank
• When separating lube oil, the return line of the 3/2-way valve can be led into
the product discharge line of the separator.
Fig. 36 Diesel oil schematic
1 DO tank
2 Service tank
• When separating diesel oil, the return line of the 3/2-way valve must be led
into the DO tank 1.
WS does not permit leading the return line into the suction side of the
pump!
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 43
Fig. 37 Heavy fuel oil schematic
1 Settling tank
2 Service tank
• When separating heavy oil, the return line of the 3/2-way valve must be led
into the settling tank 1.
5.6 Maximum suction head

• The suction head of the feed pump (gear pump) is max. 0.04 Mpa.
• The suction head of the feed pump (screw pump) is max. 0.05 MPa.
• The viscosity of the oil to be conveyed must be kept < 1 000 cSt, if necessary
by adequate pre-heating and trace heating.
• When dimensioning the suction line, it must be ensured that the total pressure
loss in the pipe does not exceed the maximum suction head of the pump.
• The maximum feed pressure in the suction line must not exceed 0.05 MPa.
5.6.1 Pressure line

• The pressure head of the feed pump is set to approx. 0.3 MPa.
• The pressure line from the feed pump via the pre-set valve, the pre-heater
and the 3/2-way valve to the separator must be kept as short as possible.
• When dimensioning the pressure line, it must be ensured that the total pres-
sure loss in the pipes does not exceed the maximum pressure head of the
pump.
®
Westfalia Separator
44 2058-9601-020 / 0211
5.6.2 Pre-filter
• The pre-filters are fitted in the suction line of the feed pump to protect it from
coarse impurities.
• During the installation, special attention must be paid to the operability.
• Use only strainers with a mesh width

of the strainer insert of 1 to 1.25
mm.
• Pay special attention to section 1.3!
Fig. 38
• Use only pre-strainers with a mesh

width of the strainer insert of 0.63
mm.
Fig. 39
5.7 Feed pump
• a pump post-running time must be programmed for pump units and product
To prevent the pre-heater from overheating,
pre-heating.
5.8 Oil pre-heater

• It must be installed so that there is no heat dissipation to the control cabinet.
To prevent a risk of accidents when venting due to discharging hot va-
• the discharge lines from vent valves must be laid at least to floor plate height.
pours and liquids,
• Discharge lines of safety valves must be laid so that there is no danger

of accident when the valve responds due to discharging liquid.
• The discharge line must be laid so that it can always be observed. It must not
be concealed by pipes, valves or other units!
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 45
• Steam traps
– must be fitted horizontally between two unions.
– should not be insulated to assure correct functioning.
– must be installed so that no condensate accumulation can occur on the pre-
heaters.
5.9 Installation examples

The following sections show installation examples for
– Tubular heat exchanger
– Steam-heated plate heat exchanger with (PI controlled) control valve
– Steam-heated tubular heat exchanger with (PI controlled) control valve
– Thermal oil-heated plate heat exchanger with (PI controlled) control valve
– Thermal-oil-heated tubular heat exchanger with (PI controlled) control valve
5.9.1 Steam-heated plate heat exchanger with (PI controlled) control

valve
Fig. 40
A Oil inlet 0.1 Spring safety valve

B Oil outlet 1.0 Plate heat exchanger
C Steam inlet 1.1 Resistance thermometer (PT 100)
D Condensate outlet 2.1 Strainer
2.2 Motor control valve
2.3 Ball float condensate trap
®
Westfalia Separator
46 2058-9601-020 / 0211
5.9.2 Steam-heated tubular heat exchanger with (PI controlled) control

valve
Fig. 41

B Oil outlet 1.0 Tubular heat exchanger
C Steam inlet 1.1 Resistance thermometer (PT 100)
D Condensate outlet 2.1 Strainer
2.2 Motor control valve
2.3 Ball float condensate trap
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 47
5.9.3 Thermal oil-heated plate heat exchanger with (PI controlled) control
valve
Fig. 42

B Oil outlet 1.0 Plate heat exchanger
C Thermal oil inlet 1.1 Resistance thermometer (PT 100)
D Thermal oil outlet 2.1 Motor control valve
®
Westfalia Separator
48 2058-9601-020 / 0211
5.9.4 Thermal-oil-heated tubular heat exchanger with (PI controlled) con-

trol valve
Fig. 43

B Oil outlet 1.0 Tubular heat exchanger
C Thermal oil inlet 1.1 Resistance thermometer (PT 100)
D Thermal oil outlet 2.1 Motor control valve
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 49
5.10 Securing plate heat exchangers
Assembly instructions for soldered

plate heat exchanger
• Prepare an assembly plate support
and weld it to the foundation.
• Fasten assembly plate 50 with
screws 70 and nuts 80 to the as-
sembly plate support.
The assembly plate must be in-
stalled vertically relative to the pipe
axis.
IMPORTANT:
Welding the assembly plate to the
support is not permitted.
• Fasten heat exchanger with gaskets
40 counterflanges 30, lock washers
20 and screws 10 to the assembly
plate.
• Attach the pipes to the counterflang-
es by tack-welding.
• Dismantle the heat exchanger and
gaskets.
• Completely weld the pipes to the
counterflanges.
• Finally, re-assemble the parts as per
instruction.
Fig. 44
A The illustrated channel steel must be provided by the shipyard.

B GEA Westfalia Separator recommendation as example channel steel ac-
cording to DIN1026-1-50.
IMPORTANT:
Distortion or warping or other stress of the soldered connection points must be
avoided!
Pipelines must be correspondingly arrested.
10 20 30 40 50 70 80
Pos./
type Allen screw Lock Groove- Gasket Plate Hex head Hexagon
washer faced screw nut
flange
ISO 4762 - DIN127 - 1 in - 32.92 x 3.53 352 x 125 x ISO 4017 - ISO 3032 -
M10 x 45 B10 SAE3000P (8 x) 12 M12 x 40 M12
B 10 (16 x) (16 x) SI (1 x) (2 x) (2 x)
(4 x)
ISO 4762 - DIN127 - 2 in - 56.74 x 3.53 563 x 290 x ISO 4017 - ISO 3032 -
M12 x 55 B12 SAE3000P (8 x) 12 M12 x 40 M12
B 45 (16 x) (16 x) SI (1 x) (2 x) (2 x)
(4 x)
®
Westfalia Separator
50 2058-9601-020 / 0211
5.11 Safety valve
Safety valve in vertical fitting posi-

tion
Fig. 45
• The safety valve outlet should be led

via a funnel (pos. “1”).
A discharge line is welded to the
funnel via which the medium can be
discharged.
• Do not use galvanized compo-

IMPORTANT:
nents and hoses.
Fig. 46
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 51
6 Solids tank
6.1 Recommended criteria for solids tank ................................................... 52

6.1.1 Tank vent ............................................................................................... 53
6.1.2 Set-up of the solids tank venting ........................................................... 54
6.2 Solids discharge lines ............................................................................ 55
6.2.1 Solids discharge lines with shut-off flap................................................. 56
6.2.2 Standard installation of shut-off flaps .................................................... 56
6.2.3 Installation recommendation for shut-off flaps ....................................... 57
6.3 Operating and dirty water discharge lines ............................................. 58
6.3.1 Separators of OSD and OSE ................................................................. 58
®
Westfalia Separator
52 2058-9601-020 / 0211
6.1 Recommended criteria for solids tank
Note:
This information does not apply to sludge transfer units on compact units.
• There should always be separate solids tanks for the lube oil and fuel sys-
tems.
• Tank heating should be installed in dependence of the viscosity or ambient
temperature.
• The general designs and constructions are subject to the valid regulations.
1 Monitoring
2 Venting
3 Tank heating
4 Utilizable volume
Fig. 47
Minimum solids tank volume

Volume Maximum utilizable volume
Separator model
[l] [%]
OSD 2 80 60
OSD 6 200 60
OSD 18 200 60
OSD 35 300 60
OSD 60 300 60
OSE 5 80 60
OSE 10 200 60
OSE 20 200 60
OSE 40 300 60
OSE 80 300 60
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 53
6.1.1 Tank vent

• In the case of one or more separators which are connected to a solids tank,
the nominal widths DN to be used are given in the table below:
Note:
Connect the tank vent to the on-board venting system.
Tank vent
Separators DN in mm
per solids tank
OSD 2 OSD 6 OSD 18 OSD 35 OSD 60
1 50 80 80 125 125
2 50 100 100 150 150
≥3 80 125 125 150 150
OSE 5 OSE 10 OSE 20 OSE 40 OSE 80

1 50 80 80 125 125
2 50 100 100 150 150
≥3 80 125 125 150 150
• In the case of a combination of separator models on one solids tank

– the total number of all separators must be taken as a basis
– and the nominal width of the largest model used.
The following criteria must be taken into consideration when venting the tank:
• Installation in accordance with the guidelines of the classification societies
• Controlled discharge of oil vapours
• An uncontrolled discharge of the sludge must be avoided.
• The vent lines must be laid so that a chimney effect develops.
• All possible loops in the vent lines must be stepwise.
®
Westfalia Separator
54 2058-9601-020 / 0211
6.1.2 Set-up of the solids tank venting
Solids tank with one separator

• The nominal width DN is given in the
table above (section 6.1.1).
Fig. 48
Solids tank with several separators

• The nominal width DN is given in the
table above (section 6.1.1).
Fig. 49
Solids tank with wash plates

A solids tank with wash plates is re-
quired when movements of the ship
cause faulty functioning of the level
monitoring.
• When using wash plates, each sec-
tion must be vented.
• The vent lines must be brought to-
gether.
Fig. 50
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 55
6.2 Solids discharge lines
• The solids discharge lines should

always be vertical if possible.
• The solids discharge must always
end 50 – 100 mm below the tank
top.
• The maximum level in the solids
tank must be monitored by means of
a float switch.
• The piping for the solids discharge
should be without reduction and with
vibration compensators.
• The length of 2 m may not be ex-
ceeded without trace heating.
Fig. 51
• If there is a deviation from the verti-

cal, an angle of 45° must not be ex-
ceeded.
Fig. 52
• This piping arrangement is not ad-

IMPORTANT:
missible!
Fig. 53
®
Westfalia Separator
56 2058-9601-020 / 0211
6.2.1 Solids discharge lines with shut-off flap

• A shut-off flap in the solids discharge line prevents the penetration of vapours
into a stationary separator during the desludging of another separator.
• If more than one separator is used for a sludge tank, a shut-off flap must be
installed in the sludge discharge at the shipyard.
• Shut-off flaps are not included in the standard scope of supply of GEA West-
falia Separator but can be ordered from GEA Westfalia Separator.
• CP units or modules equipped with a sludge tank supplied by GEA Westfalia
Separator and equipped with more than one separator are always delivered
with shut-off flaps.
6.2.2 Standard installation of shut-off flaps
Separators of OSD and OSE
Fig. 54
I Solids discharge III Tank vent

II Hood and frame drain IV Shut-off flap
• Discharges I, and III must be configured as illustrated in Fig. 57.

• See section 6.1.1, table for tank vent connection.
ATTENTION!
It must be ensured that the shut-off flaps are open during separator operation.
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 57
6.2.3 Installation recommendation for shut-off flaps
• The solids discharge must always

end below the tank top.
• For dimension X, see section 6.2,
Fig. 51.
I Shut-off flap
II Flange
III Pipe
IV Hose (supplied with separator)
V Solids tank cover
Fig. 55
Fig. 56
®
Westfalia Separator
58 2058-9601-020 / 0211
6.3 Operating and dirty water discharge lines

• The discharges for operating and dirty water can be conveyed into a separate
tank for oily water.
• The piping for the operating and dirty water discharge should be vertical,
without reduction and with vibration compensators. There is no upper length
limit.
IMPORTANT:
Operating and dirty water discharges may not be discharged into public
canals, draining ditches and waters!
6.3.1 Separators OSD, OSE and OTC
• The water discharges must be sub-

merged under all conditions
(roll/pitch).
• Dimension h is:
– min. 50 mm for shipboard opera-
tion,
– min. 20 mm for stationary plants.
I Hood and frame drain

II Solids discharge
III Tank vent
Fig. 57
• When a siphon is installed, the

frame drain need not be submerged
below the minimum level because a
liquid seal is assured.
• Dimension h1 is given in the table
below.
I Solids discharge
II Hood and frame drain
III Tank vent
IV Siphon for hood and
frame drain
Fig. 58
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 59
Table for defining siphon length, dimension “h1”
Siphon length [mm]

Separator model
h1
OSD 6 / OSD 18 500
OSD 35 / OSD 60 800
OSE 5 500
OSE 10 500
OSE 20 500
OSE 40 800
OSE 80 800
OTC 2 –
OTC 3 –
OTC 5 –
OTC 10 –
OTC 20 –
®
Westfalia Separator
60 2058-9601-020 / 0211
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 61
7 Electrical installation
7.1 Control cabinet ....................................................................................... 62

7.1.1 Electrical connection .............................................................................. 64
7.1.2 External voltages ................................................................................... 64
7.1.3 Shipboard operation .............................................................................. 65
7.1.4 Onshore operation ................................................................................. 65
7.2 Electro-magnetically compatible installation .......................................... 66
7.3 Valves .................................................................................................... 67
7.3.2 Terminal box .......................................................................................... 68
7.3.3 Separator with sensor bloc .................................................................... 69
7.4 Dual-purpose thermometer .................................................................... 70
7.5 Electrical installation of transmitters and electric motors ....................... 71
7.6 Electrical execution ................................................................................ 71
7.6.1 Earthing the separator ........................................................................... 72
7.6.2 Voltage equalization of the separator .................................................... 72
7.6.3 Voltage equalization of the electric heater ............................................. 73
7.6.4 Voltage equalization of the foundation frame ........................................ 73
7.6.5 Voltage equalization of the control cabinet ............................................ 74
7.7 Electric motors procured by the customer ............................................. 75
7.8 Installation and operation of control units .............................................. 76
®
Westfalia Separator
62 2058-9601-020 / 0211
7.1 Control cabinet
Control cabinet configuration
1 Lock
2 Control Unit D10
3 OFF/ON keys for separator
4 OFF/ON keys for feed pump
5 HAND/0/AUTOMATIC selector for
solids pump (option)
6 Main switch
Fig. 59 Front view
Fig. 60 Interior view
1 Isolating amplifier for analog output (option)

2 WMS (Water Content Monitoring System) relay, if provided
3 Full-motor-protection module
4 Interface relay
5 Auxiliary contactor
6 Main contactor
7 Current transformer
8 Power supply for PLC (Programmable Logic Control) and valves
9 Terminal Strip
10 Control transformer for heating and venting facilities (option)
11 Main switch
12 Control voltage transformer (option)
13 Motor protection switch
14 Safety outcut
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 63
Mounting example
1 Gasket 10,5x23x5
2 Threaded bolt M 8 (embedded
in the wall)
3 Washer
4 Rear panel of control cabinet
5 Washer
6 Wall
Fig. 61
• The control cabinet

– must be allocated to the corresponding separator by means of its designa-
tion.
– must be mounted on a frame or wall in the vicinity of the separator.
– conforms to enclosure IP 54.
• It must be possible to open the control cabinet door wide so that the door
latch can lock into place.
– it can be easily operated and observed.
– an ambient temperature of 50 °C (122 °F) is not exceeded. If necessary,
make sure there is an adequate supply of fresh air.
• If the control cabinet is mounted on a wall, a wall clearance of 20 m must be

observed to achieve a vibration-free fastening arrangement.
• Although buttons and switches and the electronic control unit are protected
against moisture by protective foil and door seal, the cabinet must neverthe-
less not be installed in an excessively humid environment or damp area.
• To keep the temperature inside the unit constant after commissioning, the
main switch should be kept turned on even when the separator is at a stand-
still.
®
Westfalia Separator
64 2058-9601-020 / 0211
7.1.1 Electrical connection

• The control unit is designed for a connected voltage as indicated on the
nameplate inside the control cabinet.
• In the case of a version without motor starter, the rated connection voltage is
115 VAC or 230 VAC which must be protected by a 6 A slow-blow fuse.
7.1.2 External voltages

• The voltage-free contacts of the output modules
– carry external voltage (even when the main switch is off!).
– can be identified by the orange coloured wiring.

– can be used in external control systems up to 250 VAC.
• A cross-section of 1.5 mm Cu is adequate for all control and interlocking
2
lines.
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 65
7.1.3 Shipboard operation

• For shipboard operation
– Only lines type "MGCH" according to DIN 89 158 may be used.
– All cables must meet the flame test requirements for bunched cables acc.
to IEC 60332-3 / IEEE 45-18.13.
– All cable materials must be free of halogens acc. to IEC 60754-1, no toxicity
acc. to 60754 and no corrosivity acc. to IEC 60754-2.
– All cables must have an approval of the relevant classification society.
– Insulating strength: 0.6/1KV
– GEA WSPN Standard: Nexans MPRX 0.6/1kV
– The standard control cabinets are equipped with plastic non halogen oil res-
ident. WS standart is “Ernst Heinrich GmbH”
– load and control lines can be laid jointly without clearance
• In the case of HFO separators in series operation, the signal exchange be-
tween the control cabinets as per the terminal diagram for the connecting ca-
ble must be taken into account (see section 7.2).
Cable glands for shipboard installation
Female ∅ Cable outer Earthing device +

Cable gland
thread [mm] Inner parts design
M 16 x 1.5 4 – 11 M 24 x 1.5
M 20 x 1.5 8 – 13 M 24 x 1.5
M 25 x 1.5 11 – 17 M 36 x 1.5
M 32 x 1.5 15 – 21 M 36 x 1.5
M 40 x 1.5 19 – 28 M 36 x 1.5
7.1.4 Onshore operation

• The local rules and regulations of the operator must be observed!
• for onshore operation
– Normally, "ölflex" cables are used and "NSSHÖU" for outside installation.
– commercially available cable glands can be used.
– separate cable routing must be used for the load and control lines.
• Cable entries with plastic or metal glands are admissible.
®
Westfalia Separator
66 2058-9601-020 / 0211
7.2 Electro-magnetically compatible installation

• The control cabinet is designed to be electro-magnetically compatible.
• The following must be taken into account with electro-magnetically compatible
installations:
– Earthing straps
– Voltage equalization
– Screening lines
– Separate line routing
– Use of erase elements in case of inductance.
In the case of HFO series operation, proceed in accordance with the following
wiring diagram:
Fig. 62
A Switch ON D Connecting terminals

B Control cabinet HFO No. 1 F Cable type
C Control cabinet HFO No. 2 E Customer shipboard installation
• Use only data cable UNITRONIC-BUS-FD P L2/F.I.P (1 x 2 x 0.25 mm² +

IMPORTANT:
Screen).
• Do not lay data cables directly next to load cables as this can cause prob-
lems with electromagnetic compatibility.
• Pay attention to the different software status on the C7 units:
– 1. unit has the MPI addresses 1 / 2
• Faulty or broken cable connections are displayed with error code no. 551.
• Check all connections.
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 67
7.3 Valves
Only original valves from GEA Westfalia Separator with integrated suppressor
diode and reverse battery protection in the connection head may be used in
filling, displacement and operating water lines.
7.3.1 Solenoid valve block
This diagram shows an original valve

block from GEA Westfalia Separator
which is used in filling, displacement
and operating water lines.
Fig. 63
Connections
A Connecting terminal + 24 V DC
B Connecting terminal + 0 V DC
C Earth
D Status LED
Fig. 64
®
Westfalia Separator
68 2058-9601-020 / 0211
7.3.2 Terminal box
All valves and monitoring instruments

are installed ready-to-connect on a
local terminal box at the separator.
• The connection to the control cabi-
net must be carried out by means of
a joint cable in accordance with the
adjacent connection diagram.
A Control cabinet
B Product discharge pressure
C “Self-Think” system
D Water sensor
E Circuit valve
F Water discharge valve
G Filling, displacement water valve
H Operating water valve
I Circulation valve
J Operating Water
K Filling, displacement water
Fig. 65
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 69
7.3.3 Separator with sensor bloc
Fig. 66
The components on the hood are wired to the terminal box.
®
Westfalia Separator
70 2058-9601-020 / 0211
7.4 Dual-purpose thermometer

• The dual-purpose thermometer is used
– to monitor the temperature of the dirty oil after the pre-heater and
– for local temperature indication.
• The dual-purpose thermometer is used only in conjunction with a C7 control

ATTENTION!
system.
Fig. 67 Fig. 68
• The dual-purpose thermometer must always be fitted before the 3-way piston
control valve.
• All sensors must be installed so that they are continuously flushed with oil.
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 71
7.5 Electrical installation of transmitters and electric motors

• The connection of motors and transmitters by means of cable loop enables
easy replacement and function testing of the components.
Example 1
Fig. 69
Example 2
Fig. 70
7.6 Electrical execution

The electrical execution must be in accordance with the following standards and
recommendations in so far as specifications and standards issued by the classi-
fication societies do not have to be met.
The applicable standards at GEA Westfalia Separator are

– the European standard EN 60 204 – Part 1 or
– VDE 0113 – Part 1
®
Westfalia Separator
72 2058-9601-020 / 0211
7.6.1 Earthing the separator
• The separator must always be

earthed.
The earthing connection A is always

located on the motor side beneath the
motor flange.
Fig. 71
7.6.2 Voltage equalization of the separator
Including the insulated installed sepa-

rator in the voltage equalization of the
installation is done via the voltage
equalization connection on the motor
side. This applies always.
If there is no protective conductor in

multi-core cables and leads (e.g. in the
armoured marine cable), the drive
motor must likewise be included in the
voltage equalization.
The same applies for pump motors
and electric pre-heaters.
Fig. 72
The cross-section of the voltage equal-

ization conductor, normally insulated
green-yellow, is dimensioned to the
largest external conductor on the re-
spective consumer.
In practice, table 1 in EN 60204-1 is

used for this.
GEA Westfalia Separator selects:

2 2
10 mm < S < 25 mm Cu
Fig. 73
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 73
7.6.3 Voltage equalization of the electric heater
Fig. 74
7.6.4 Voltage equalization of the foundation frame
• The foundation frame must be fitted

with a marked connecting bolt for
voltage equalization by the custom-
er.
Fig. 75
Fig. 76
®
Westfalia Separator
74 2058-9601-020 / 0211
7.6.5 Voltage equalization of the control cabinet

• The connection is via the PE-bar or terminal inside the cabinet to the frame
connection.
PE connection
Fig. 77
PE connection
Fig. 78
PE connection
Fig. 79
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 75
7.7 Electric motors procured by the customer

• When the motors are procured by the customer, they must have the following
specifications and comply with the following standards:
Design IM B5* according to IEC 34 – Part 7
Rating Classification according to IEC 72 – Part 2
Enclosure IM B5 according to IEC 34 – Part 5

Quality stage N * / S *according to IEC 34 – Part
Vibration severity 14,
Full key balanced * / Half key balanced *
50 Hz 60 Hz
Synchronous speed
3000 * / 1500 * 3600 * / 1800 *
Type of cooling 1C411 according to IEC 34 – Part 6
Flange dimensions according to IEC 72
Shaft dimensions according to IEC 72
Direction of rotation according to IEC 34 – Part 8
Insulation material class F according to IEC 34 – Part 1
PTC thermistors as full motor protection

• The PTC resistors mist be fitted in the end
Motor protection windings – one per strand.
• PTC resistors – temperature feelers which are
mounted on the winding package from the
outside are not acceptable!
Operating mode SI according to IEC 34 – Part 1
* dependent on separator model
ATTENTION!
Consequential damage on the separator caused by motors procured by
the customer cannot be accepted as a warranty claim by GEA Westfalia
Separator.
®
Westfalia Separator
76 2058-9601-020 / 0211
7.8 Installation and operation of control units

IMPORTANT:

– the control unit is not exposed to dust and aggressive atmosphere.
– the control unit is not installed in an excessively humid environment or
damp area.
– the sun cannot shine on the control panel or displays making operation and
observation more difficult.
– heating up of the control unit is avoided.
• Where appropriate, check screw-type and plug-type connectors for secure

contact.
• Connect thermostatically controlled cabinet heating to external voltage and
switch it on.
• The control cabinet heating must switch on before the temperature drops be-
low the dew point.
• Bedewing can occur during the night which is not good for electronic appa-
ratus.
• Check that the line voltage and frequency conform to the connection data of
the control unit (see nameplate).
• Pay attention to admissible installation and operating data:
Voltage fluctuations +/- 10 % of the line voltage

Frequency fluctuations +/- 2 % of the line voltage
Ambient temperatures + 5 to + 45 °C (41 to 113 °F)
Atmospheric humidity max. 50 % at 40 °C (104 °F)
max. 90 % at 20 °C (68 °F)
Installation height above sea level up to 1000 m
Transport temperatures – 25 to + 55 °C ( –13 to 131 °F)
ATTENTION!
Improper installation and operation discharges the supplier from the war-
ranty obligation.
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 77
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
78 2058-9601-020 / 0211
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
2058-9601-020 / 0211 79
®
Westfalia Separator
Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
Pos : 2 /Anl agen/Standard/00_Titels eitenTitels eite_BAA_Anlagen @ 28\mod_1447331785557_18.doc x @ 1026162 @ @ 1
Maintenance Schedule and Spare Parts List
GEA Westfalia Separator Compact Unit

Modularised Separator Unit
Type CU
No 2023-9101-000
Edition 20.01.2016
engineering for a better world

About this document 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16

The authors are always grateful for remarks and sugges-

tions for improving the documentation. These can be sent
to:

Tel. +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
www.gea.com
©
All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form – by graphic, electronic or mechan-
ical means including all types of photocopying or any other means of duplication – without our prior written con-
sent.
The transmission of originals and reproductions to third parties is prohibited without our prior consent.
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Titelseite ===
2 GEA Westfalia Separator Group

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 About this document
1 About this document 5
1.1 Scope of application .................................................................................. 6

1.2 Other applicable documents ...................................................................... 6
1.3 Structure of safety notices ......................................................................... 6
1.4 Target groups ............................................................................................ 7
1.4.1 Operator ..................................................................................................... 8
1.4.2 Skilled worker ............................................................................................ 8
1.4.3 Trained specialist ....................................................................................... 8
1.5 Additional documentation .......................................................................... 8
2.1 Intended use ............................................................................................ 10

2.2 Reasonably foreseeable misuse ............................................................. 10
2.4 Responsibility of the plant operator ......................................................... 11
2.5 Hazards from products and operating materials ..................................... 12
2.6 Modifications to the system ..................................................................... 12
2.7 Requirements for spare parts and operating materials ........................... 12
2.1 Safety instructions for magnetic coupling systems.................................. 12
2.2 Safety instructions pump ......................................................................... 13
3 Maintenance 15
3.1 Safety information .................................................................................... 16

3.2 Avoiding risks through regular maintenance ........................................... 16
3.3 Maintenance schedule ............................................................................. 17
3.4 Notes on maintenance intervals .............................................................. 18
3.5 Maintaining the gear pump KF ................................................................ 23
3.5.1 Maintenance work on the pump .............................................................. 23
3.5.2 Determine maintenance requirements for the pump ............................... 23
3.6 Maintaining the diaphragm pump T1/P1 ................................................. 25
3.7 Maintaining and cleaning the "CO" heat exchanger ................................ 25
4 Repair 29

4.1.1 Preventing hazards in the case of repair work ........................................ 30
4.1.2 Hazards from electricity ........................................................................... 30
4.1.3 Hazards from mechanical energy ............................................................ 30
4.1.4 Risk from exceeding limit values ............................................................. 30
4.1.5 Safe removal of pumps ............................................................................ 30
4.1.6 Standard tools.......................................................................................... 31
4.1.7 Special tools ............................................................................................ 31
4.2 Repairing the separator ........................................................................... 31
4.3 Replacing the gear pump type KF ........................................................... 31
4.3.1 Dismantling the gear pump...................................................................... 32
4.3.2 Installing the gear pump .......................................................................... 32
4.4 Replacing the diaphragm pump T1/P1 .................................................... 33
4.4.1 Removing the diaphragm pump .............................................................. 33
4.4.2 Dismantling the diaphragm pump ............................................................ 33
4.4.3 Assembling the diaphragm pump ............................................................ 33
4.4.4 Installing the diaphragm pump ................................................................ 33
GEA Westfalia Separator Group 3

4.5 Replacing the pump ................................................................................. 34

4.6 Dismantling pump type CG, K and R....................................................... 34
4.7 Replacing the magnetic coupling on pump unit type K ........................... 34
4.8 Replacing the spindle set on pump type K .............................................. 44
4.9 Replacing the radial packing ring on pump type K .................................. 47
4.10 Replacing the heat exchanger type OC .................................................. 50
4.10.1 Dismantling the heat exchanger .............................................................. 51
4.10.2 Installing the heat exchanger................................................................... 51
5 Spare parts 53
5.1 Original spare parts ................................................................................. 54

5.2 Notes on ordering spare parts ................................................................. 54
5.3 Spare parts .............................................................................................. 56
5.3.1 Measuring instruments and sensors........................................................ 56
5.3.2 Gear pump unit KF .................................................................................. 58
5.3.3 Set of spare parts for pump "K series" .................................................... 62
5.3.4 Set of spare parts for pump "L3NG series" ............................................. 66
5.3.5 Set of spare parts for diaphragm pump "P1, T1" ..................................... 68
5.3.6 Soldered plate heat exchanger type "OC" ............................................... 70
5.3.7 Soldered plate heat exchanger type B .................................................... 72
5.3.8 Tubular heat exchanger type S/L and VW .............................................. 74
5.3.9 Electric preheater 4600/4600-V ............................................................... 76
5.3.10 Electric preheater type 4700 evo ............................................................. 78
5.3.11 Pressure-controlled 3/2-way valve .......................................................... 80
5.3.12 Spare parts for Y-strainer ........................................................................ 82
5.3.13 Strainer .................................................................................................... 84
5.3.14 2/2-way compact ball valve ..................................................................... 86
5.3.15 Control valves with electric actuator ........................................................ 88
5.3.16 Butterfly valve with limit switch ................................................................ 90
5.4.1 Spring-loaded safety valve ...................................................................... 92
5.4.2 Ball float steam trap FT 14-10 ................................................................. 94
5.4.3 Compressed air control unit ..................................................................... 96
5.4.4 Solenoid valves........................................................................................ 98
5.4.5 Replacement gaskets for flange connections ........................................ 100
5.4.6 Fax form for spare parts inquiries and spare parts orders .................... 102
Pos : 5 /BA/Standar d/00_Übersc hriften/Kapi tel/01_Z u_di es em_D okument @ 0\mod_1315832097673_18.doc x @ 409 @ 1 @ 1

1 About this document
1.1 Scope of application .................................................................................. 6

1.2 Other applicable documents ...................................................................... 6
1.3 Structure of safety notices ......................................................................... 6
1.4 Target groups ............................................................................................ 7
1.4.1 Operator ..................................................................................................... 8
1.4.2 Skilled worker ............................................................................................ 8
1.4.3 Trained specialist ....................................................................................... 8
1.5 Additional documentation .......................................................................... 8

Pos : 6 /BA/Standar d/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Geltungs bereic h/Geltungs bereic h_Anl age @ 0\mod_1341824864398_18.doc x @ 171123 @ 2 @ 1
1.1 Scope of application

This document applies for all persons who work with or on the compact unit. It ap-
plies to the plant operator as a basis for compiling standard operating procedures
(SOP) for conduct at the compact unit workplace.
Pos : 7 /Anl agen/Standard/01_Z u diesem D okumentMi tgeltende_D okumente_CU _Wartung_Ersatzteile @ 2\mod_1369818282463_18.doc x @ 254820 @ 2 @ 1
1.2 Other applicable documents

Besides this instruction manual, the following documents included in the overall
plant documentation also apply:
• Safety precautions for the compact unit
• Start-up and shut-down instructions
• Compact unit manual
• Separator manual
• Project-specific documents
• Set of drawings
• Data sheets
• Plans and lists
• P&ID (Piping and Instrumentation Diagram)
• Documentation on the control of the compact unit
• Instruction manuals for components of other manufacturers, such as motors,
heaters, pumps, valves and measuring technology instruments.
Relevant standards and regulations:
• Standards and regulations to be applied as well as test certificates.
Pos : 8 /BA/Standar d/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Sig nal wörter Signalwörter_für _Warnhi nweis e_Anlage @ 20\mod_1432733512549_18.doc x @ 952907 @ 2444 @ 1
1.3 Structure of safety notices

The installation has been designed and built so that it functions and can be operat-
ed safely. This manual will refer to further potential risks by using warning notices
at the relevant points.
A differentiation is made between hazards which result in damage to the plants,
plant components and environment and hazards which lead to possible or probable
injury or loss of life.
Signal words and their meaning
DANGER Denotes impending danger. If the preventive measures are not implemented, death
or serious injury will be the consequence.
WARNING Denotes a potentially dangerous situation. If the preventive measures are not im-
plemented, death or serious injury may be the consequence.
CAUTION Denotes a potentially dangerous situation. If the preventive measures are not im-
plemented, minor injury may be the consequence.
NOTICE Denotes a potentially damaging situation. If the preventive measures are not im-
plemented, the system or something else in its vicinity can get damaged.

Danger signals
This is the danger signal. It warns of injury risks.

 Comply with all measures marked with the danger signal to avoid injury or
death.
Structuring of the safety references according to the 5-point rule

1. Danger signals as a warning of injury risks.
2. Signal words signal the degree of risk.
3. The type and source of the hazard indicate from where the hazard origi-
nates.
4. Explanation of the hazard and consequences in the case of non-
compliance describe the threat and the consequences of human error.
5. Measures give instructions to avoid the hazard.
DANGER Type and source of hazard
Explanation of the hazard and the consequences in the event of non-compliance.

 Measures to avert or minimise the hazard.
WARNING Type and source of hazard

CAUTION Type and source of hazard

NOTICE Type and source of hazard
Pos : 9 /BA/Standar d/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Zielgruppen/Zi elgruppen_Anl age @ 0\mod_1341825848600_18.doc x @ 171224 @ 2 @ 1
1.4 Target groups

The target groups for this documentation are all persons involved in installing, as-
sembling, operating, maintaining and repairing the compact unit.
What work may be carried out by what target group depends on the qualification of
the personnel and on the type of work.
In the tables in the chapters Troubleshooting and Maintenance the responsible
target group as well as the operation is specified.
Pos : 10 /BA/Standard/01_Z u_di es em_D okument/Bedi ener/Bedi ener @ 0\mod_1323773718866_18.doc x @ 10437 @ 3 @ 1

1.4.1 Operator
Abbreviation: Op
The operator is employed by the customer and has been briefed in the following
operations:
• Starting and shutting down the machine.
• Monitoring the machine and process (e.g. by means of indicators).
• Execution of easy re-lubrication and cleaning operations.
When given specific directions, the operator is able to carry out simple modifica-
tions to the process, e.g.:
• Adjusting temperatures, pressures and throughput capacities.
• Dosing additives.
Pos : 11 /BA/Standard/01_Z u_di es em_D okument/Ei ngewiesene_F ac hkraft/Eingewi es ene_Fachkr aft @ 8\mod_1385710880463_18.doc x @ 475310 @ 3 @ 1
1.4.2 Skilled worker

Abbreviation: Skilled
The skilled worker is normally employed by the customer and has been briefed in
the following areas:
• Performing easy assembly work
• Performing routine maintenance work or servicing
• Limited settings and parametrization on the components and control system
The skilled worker has basic technical knowledge. The basic knowledge corre-
sponds to a technical apprenticeship (mechanical or electrical).
The skilled worker is selected and deployed by the employer (plant operator).
GEA Westfalia Separator will carry out the briefing only in specific technical fea-
tures that are part of the supply schedule and and will indicate potential hazards.
This briefing is no substitute for an apprenticeship.
Pos : 12 /BA/Standard/01_Z u_di es em_D okument/Gesc hulte_Fachkr aft/Gesc hul te_F achkr aft @ 0\mod_1323780946726_18.doc x @ 10505 @ 3 @ 1
1.4.3 Trained specialist

Abbreviation: Tspec
The trained specialist normally belongs to the service team of GEA Westfalia Sep-
arator Group.
In exceptional cases, skilled workers employed by the customer can obtain a cor-
responding qualification by attending training courses held by GEA Westfalia Sepa-
rator Group.
Pos : 13 /BA/Standard/01_Z u_di es em_D okument/Zus ätzliche_D okumentati onen/Z usätzliche_Dokumentationen @ 8\mod_1385713605267_18.doc x @ 475588 @ 2 @ 1
1.5 Additional documentation

Request further information and technical documentation from the following places:
• Directly from GEA Westfalia Separator in Oelde.
• From the nearest representative of GEA Westfalia Separator.
• Per Internet under: www.westfalia-separator.com
• Vie e-mail at: wsinfo@gea.com
Pos : 15 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/02_Sicherheits hinweis e @ 0\mod_1315831900616_18.doc x @ 402 @ 1 @ 1

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Safety precautions
2.1 Intended use ............................................................................................ 10

2.2 Reasonably foreseeable misuse ............................................................. 10
2.4 Responsibility of the plant operator ......................................................... 11
2.5 Hazards from products and operating materials ..................................... 12
2.6 Modifications to the system ..................................................................... 12
2.7 Requirements for spare parts and operating materials ........................... 12
2.1 Safety instructions for magnetic coupling systems.................................. 12
2.2 Safety instructions pump ......................................................................... 13

Safety precautions 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
Pos : 16 /BA/Standard/02_Sic her heit/Besti mmungsgemäß e_Verwendung/Besti mmungsgemäß e_Ver wendung _CU @ 2\mod_1369808488816_18.doc x @ 254771 @ 2 @ 1
2.1 Intended use

The modular compact unit serves to treat the specified product streams, generally
fuels or lube oils, by way of centrifugal separation. System components are used
for pre-filtration, conveyance, temperature control and monitoring of the process.
The system is intended exclusively for commercial operation. It is technically de-
signed according to the mode of operation contractually agreed with the manufac-
turer.
It is suitable for the following applications:
• Treatment of residual oil (heavy fuel oil)
• Treatment of distillate fuels (diesel oil)
• Treatment of lube oil
• Treatment of other oils and fluids in as far as this has been agreed with the
manufacturer.
For information on process conditions, operating conditions and environmental
conditions, see:
• System nameplate
• Data sheet
• For other applicable documents, see the chapter "About this document".
The following requirements must be met to ensure that the system is operated
safely at all times:
• Use only genuine spare parts and genuine operating materials.
• Comply with the limit values.
• Do not change or expand the system.
• Use the system only for its intended purpose.
Pos : 17 /BA/Standard/02_Sic her heit/Vorhers ehbar e_Fehlanwendung/Vor hers ehbare_F ehl anwendung_Anl age @ 13\mod_1401717689943_18.doc x @ 799240 @ 2 @ 1
2.2 Reasonably foreseeable misuse

The manual contains instructions for the intended use. Any operation of the system
that does not fall under the intended use constitutes unintended use and is consid-
ered to be misuse.
Reasonably foreseeable misuse includes:
• Use of unsuitable spare parts
• Use of impermissible operating materials
• Exceeding of defined limits
• Modifying or expanding the system
• Changing the process conditions, operating conditions and environmental condi-
tions without the consent of the manufacturer.
• Non-wearing of the prescribed personal protective gear.
Any misuse of the system may cause bodily injury and property damage.
 Use the system only as intended.
Pos : 18 /BA/Standard/02_Sic her heit/Pers onalqualifi kationPersonalqualifi kati on_Anl age @ 20\mod_1432027486900_18.doc x @ 941104 @ 2 @ 1
2.3 Qualification of the personnel

Special expertise is required for working on and with the system. The qualification
of the personnel with this expertise is an important requirement for the operational
reliability. The requirements in respect of qualification levels are set out in the
chapter "About this document / Target groups". They depend on the tasks as-
signed.

Faulty operation, assembly and handling errors can result in danger to life and limb
as well as causing severe damage to property.
The plant operator must implement measures for the qualification of its personnel:
 Assign only reliable individuals to work on the system.
 Allow only authorized personnel to work on the system.
 Give special training and briefings to the personnel for the tasks assigned.
 Clearly define responsibilities.
 Make sure that the authorized persons have read and understood the safety in-
formation before beginning work.
 Make sure that the authorized persons have read and understood all sections of
the instruction manual required for their work before beginning work.
 Give special briefings to persons who cannot read, and monitor their work.
 Persons still undergoing training may only be deployed under supervision.
Pos : 19 /BA/Standard/02_Sic her heit/Verantwortung _Betr eiberVerantwortung_Betrei ber _Anlag e @ 25\mod_1442385992819_18.doc x @ 1013427 @ 2 @ 1
2.4 Responsibility of the plant operator

The operation of a system is subject to rules and regulations for occupational
health and safety.
The order of the rules and regulations listed below is not a reflection of their priori-
ty. The list lays no claim to completeness:
• Regulations relating to safety and health (accident prevention regulations) based
on Article 118a of the treaty establishing the EEC, e.g., RL 89/655/EEC and fol-
low-up versions or corresponding national regulations issued by the country of
operation.
• Regular check of safety devices
• Compliance with the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC or corresponding national
regulations issued by the country of operation when working within the responsi-
bility as manufacturer.
• Compliance with the German Equipment and Product Safety Act or correspond-
ing national regulations issued by the country of operation when working within
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
Only for systems designed according to ATEX and that are used in potentially ex-
plosive areas:
• Compliance with regulations governing health protection and safety of employ-
ees in hazardous areas, e.g., RL 1999/92/EC or corresponding national regula-
tions issued by the country of operation.
• Compliance with ATEX RL 94/9/EC, EMC RL 89/336/EC, Low-Voltage Directive
RL 73/23/EC or corresponding national regulations issued by the country of op-
eration when working within the responsibility of the manufacturer.
The plant operator is responsible for complying with the rules and regulations for
assigned persons working safely and with awareness of the hazards. These inclu-
de the following measures:
 Ensuring that the statutory and other binding regulations on safety, accident pre-
vention and occupational safety are known and complied with.
 Assigning only qualified and authorised staff with technical understanding and
fundamental technical knowledge and skills to work on the control unit.
 Clearly defining and communicating responsibilities for tasks.
 Operating the system only in perfectly functional condition in line with the in-
tended use. For the intended use, refer to the section Intended use.

 Checking all safety devices for proper functioning before each startup.
 Having the system checked regularly by qualified persons for its operational reli-
ability. Having the system checked at least once a year in operational status and
at least every 3 years in dismantled condition.
Pos : 20 /BA/Standard/02_Sic her heit/Gefahr en_Betriebsstoff_Produkt/Gefahren_Produkte_Betriebss toffe_Anl age @ 0\mod_1341828171217_18.doc x @ 171428 @ 2 @ 1
2.5 Hazards from products and operating materials

Hazardous materials are all materials that, on physical contact, represent a hazard
for the persons operating in the environment of the system.
Systems that have been purpose-built for operation with hazardous materials are
marked with safety stickers.
Hazards resulting from the following product characteristics and operating materi-
als are known from product observation:
• Hot products
• Cold products
• Hazardous, chemically critical products
• Hazardous, biologically critical products
• Cleaning agents
Pos : 21 /BA/Standard/02_Sic her heit/Veränder ung en_Maschi ne/Veränder ung en_Anl age @ 0\mod_1341833721900_18.doc x @ 171462 @ 2 @ 1
2.6 Modifications to the system

Modifications to the system are not permitted. They represent an unintended use
and endanger the operational reliability of the system. This may cause bodily injury
and property damage.
 When modifications to the system are necessary, e.g., due to new operational
sequences, contact GEA Westfalia Separator.
 Clarify the planning and the measures for the modifications to the system with
GEA Westfalia Separator.
Pos : 22 /BA/Standard/02_Sic her heit/Ers atz teil e_und_Betri ebs stoffe/Ersatzteile_und_Betriebsstoffe_Anlag e @ 0\mod_1341833967558_18.doc x @ 171496 @ 2 @ 1
2.7 Requirements for spare parts and operating materials

Spare parts, wear parts, and operating materials can cause bodily injury and prop-
erty damage if they do not meet the requirements.
Genuine spare parts and operating materials from GEA Westfalia Separator meet
all requirements for operational reliability of the system.
 Use only genuine spare parts.
 Use only genuine operating materials.
 Use the order-specific spare parts catalog supplied.
 See the chapter "Spare parts" for ordering spare parts and operating materials.
 Comply with the limit values.
Pos : 23 /Anl agen/Standar d/02_Sic herheitSic herheits hinweis e_M agnetkuppl ungss ys teme @ 1\mod_1349186398921_18.doc x @ 185921 @ 2 @ 1
2.1 Safety instructions for magnetic coupling systems

The magnetic fields of magnetic coupling systems (MCS) may affect the function
and operating safety of electrical and electronic devices. It is essential to pay atten-
tion to the safety instructions below.
Additional safety instructions for magnetic coupling systems:
• keep MCS away from cardiac pacemakers. Risk to life!
• Under no circumstances may people with cardiac pacemakers perform assem-
bly, dismantling or maintenance work.

People with cardiac pacemakers must maintain the following safe distances from
MCS:
• 3 m from openly accessible MCS
• 1 m from pump units with MCS fitted
Do not put MCS in the vicinity of PCs, data media and other electronic compo-
nents.
Keep MCS away from clocks, magnetizable tools and measuring equipment and all
magnetizable parts.
Do not bring the two MCS components together, as this can destroy the magnetic
coupling system. Only dismantle drive and take-off side under restraint.
If the magnetic coupling is overloaded, the magnetic field breaks down. Do not al-
low the coupling to continue running. Temperatures above 250 °C may damage the
magnets permanently.
Pos : 24 /Anl agen/Standar d/02_Sic herheitSic herheits hinweis e_Pumpe @ 23\mod_1439542466440_18.doc x @ 1002909 @ 2 @ 1
2.2 Safety instructions pump

The safety instructions for the gear pump in the "General safety instructions" chap-
ter of the manufacturer's instruction manual must be complied with.
The following points must be taken into account when installing, assembling, com-
missioning and repairing the gear pump in the system:
• Only suitable hoists, lifting tackle and sling points should be used for transport-
ing the pump, see the "Transport and storage" chapter. The weights of the pump
can be found in the "Technical data" chapter in this manual or in the pump man-
ufacturer's instruction manual.
• Impermissibly high pressures can result in damage to the pump. Product fluid
can escape and cause injuries.
• For the connection, only use cables which are designed and approved for the
expected pressure, see "Technical data" chapter and the regulations from the
cable manufacturer.
• When carrying out all work on the pump, the cables in the system must be pres-
sureless and the electrical connections deenergized and secured against being
switched on again.
• Rotating machine parts can fly about if the pump is damaged and entangle parts
of clothing, hair or body parts.
• Keep hands away from open, rotating gear wheels during repair work. Fingers
and hands could be pulled in and crushed. Only run the pump if the housing is
closed and the cables connected.
• The surfaces of the pump and connection cables can be hot. Always wear per-
sonal protective equipment in accordance with the operating instructions on site.
Keep protective equipment clean and replace if damaged.
• In the event of injuries caused by product leaking from the pump or connection
cables, follow the safety regulations and instructions for handling the product flu-
ids on site.
Pos : 26 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/11_War tung @ 0\mod_1328017202161_18.doc x @ 14679 @ 1 @ 1


2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Maintenance
3 Maintenance

3.2 Avoiding risks through regular maintenance ........................................... 16
3.3 Maintenance schedule ............................................................................. 17
3.4 Notes on maintenance intervals .............................................................. 18
3.4.1 Checks daily or in accordance with the standard operating
procedure ................................................................................................. 18
3.4.2 After/during 1st start-up or weekly ........................................................... 18
3.4.3 1 month or 1000 operating hours (h) after start-up ................................. 19
3.4.4 After 6 months or 4000 h and subsequently every year or every
8000 h ...................................................................................................... 20
3.4.5 After 1 year or 8000 h and subsequently every 2 years or every
16000 h .................................................................................................... 21
3.4.6 After 2 years or 16000 h and subsequently every 2 years or every
16000 h .................................................................................................... 22
3.4.7 after 6 years or 48,000 operating hours .................................................. 22
3.5 Maintaining the gear pump KF ................................................................ 23
3.5.1 Maintenance work on the pump .............................................................. 23
3.5.2 Determine maintenance requirements for the pump ............................... 23
3.6 Maintaining the diaphragm pump T1/P1 ................................................. 25
3.7 Maintaining and cleaning the "CO" heat exchanger ................................ 25

Maintenance 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
Pos : 27 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/U nter kapitel/Ü-Sic herheit @ 0\mod_1335184514313_18.doc x @ 29760 @ 2 @ 1
3.1 Safety information

Pos : 28 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/11_Wartung/Sic herheit_Wartung/Gefahr en_vermeiden_Wartung_CU @ 2\mod_1369818885690_18.doc x @ 254854 @ 2 @ 1
3.2 Avoiding risks through regular maintenance

Regular maintenance of the compact unit is crucial in terms of service life, safety
and operating readiness. Failure to carry out regular maintenance will result in in-
creased wear, poorer outputs and higher energy consumption. Increased wear
lessens the stability of the components, reduces the availability of the compact unit
and can result in damage to the compact unit. This damage can give rise to danger
to the personnel and damage to property.
Observe the following points during maintenance:
• Keep to the specified maintenance intervals even if the operating hours have not
been reached.
• For the purpose of keeping to the maintenance intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule, read off the total number of operating hours on the operating
hour counter in the control cabinet.
• The maintenance intervals apply for standard applications. In the case of in-
creased stress caused by special operating conditions, shorten the service inter-
vals in consultation with GEA Westfalia Separator service.
• Check safety-relevant components regularly, see "maintenance schedule". Safe-
ty-relevant and highly stressed parts components of the compact unit include, for
example, the separator, pumps and filter.
• If a fault is determined during an inspection, remedy the fault and re-start the
compact unit.
• If damage is detected during an inspection, replace the damaged elements im-
mediately with original spare parts from GEA Westfalia Separator.
• Persons with pacemakers may not carry out work on pumps with magnetic sys-
tem couplings.
• If problems arise during maintenance work, consult GEA Westfalia Separator or
take advantage of the training opportunities. Refer to the chapter "About this
document", section "Qualification of the personnel" and "Service and training".
• When servicing plant components, refer to the manuals of the manufacturers of
the components.
• Refer to the separator manual when carrying out maintenance work on the sepa-
rator.
Pos : 29 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/11_Wartung/Wartungspl an/Wartungs plan_CU @ 2\mod_1362401341545_18.doc x @ 232913 @ 22 @ 1

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Maintenance
3.3 Maintenance schedule
Fig. 1 Compact unit modules
Legend:
Item Designation
10 Separator
20 3/2-way feed assembly
30 Sludge tank
40 Sludge transfer pump
50 Preheater
60 Control valve
70 Safety valve
80 Condensate trap
90, 100 Strainer / pre-strainer
110 Pump unit

Maintenance 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
3.4 Notes on maintenance intervals

The specified maintenance intervals are recommendations which apply only to
normal operating conditions. Different operating conditions can lead to shorter
maintenance intervals, e.g. low-grade fuel, excessively high temperature, exces-
sively high vibrations, frequent start-up and shut-down of the compact unit.
The maintenance schedule of the separate must be observed separately. It is in
the separator manual.
When servicing plant components, always refer to the manuals of the manufactur-
ers of the components.
When unusual pressure differences occur, filters and strainers must be inspected
and cleaned at shorter intervals.
In the case of deteriorating heat transfer efficiency and/or increasing pressure
losses in heat exchangers, they must be inspected and cleaned at shorter inter-
vals.
3.4.1 Checks daily or in accordance with the standard operating procedure

Pos. Plant component Action Target group
• Carry out the following checks: Op
 Check temperatures.
 Check pressures.
Complete compact
 Leakage.
unit
 Vibrations.
 Defective components.
 Increased running noise.
3.4.2 After/during 1st start-up or weekly

Tspec
• Final inspection: In the factory, 1.5-times the maximum oper-
Mechanical com- ating pressure is applied to the complete unit for 30 minutes.
pact unit, pipes  Visual inspection of the unit.
Op
 Eliminate leakage.
Skilled
Electrical compact  Visual check for correct connection, damage Tspec
unit  Check of electronics and safety systems. Tspec
Complete compact Op
 Cleaning the unit
unit

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Maintenance
3.4.3 1 month or 1000 operating hours (h) after start-up

 Check the ball valves for leakage. Skilled
Ball valves
 Replace damaged gaskets, see parts list.
Strainer in the heat-  Dismantle and clean the strainer. Skilled
90 ing medium inlet (if  Replace damaged gaskets, see parts list.
fitted)  Perform next check after 4000 operating hours.
 Dismantle and clean the strainer. Skilled
Strainer in feed
100  Replace damaged gaskets, see parts list.
pump inlet (if fitted)
 Perform next check after 4000 operating hours.
1
 Empty prefilter . Skilled
100 Prefilter (if fitted)  Take out the basket element and clean and check it.
 Check the prefilter again after 4000 hours.
 Check pumps with radial packing ring for leakage. Skilled
1  Check pumps with slide-ring packings for deposits in the
110 Pump unit
leakage space of the slide-ring packings and clean them if
necessary.
1  Dismantle and clean the sensor. Skilled
Level switch
 Check again after 1000 hours.
1) Pay attention to the maintenance instructions in the manual of the manufacturer.

Maintenance 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
3.4.4 After 6 months or 4000 h and subsequently every year or every 8000 h
Ball valves
Strainer in the heat- Skilled
 Dismantle and clean the strainer.
90 ing medium inlet (if
fitted)
Strainer-Y in the Skilled
100 feed pump feed (if
fitted)
 Check basket strainers. Skilled
1
100 Prefilter (if fitted)  Empty the prefilter prior to dismantling.
 Remove and clean the basket strainer.
 Check pumps with radial packing ring for leakage. Skilled
1  Check pumps with slide-ring packings for deposits in the
110 Pump unit
necessary.
 Empty the preheater prior to dismantling. Skilled
Preheater
Cleaning in the form of flushing is possible.
50 (Type plate heat
1  Flush the plate heat exchanger with a suitable cleaning solu-
exchanger)
tion in the reverse normal direction of flow.
Preheater  Empty the preheater prior to dismantling.
50 (Type tubular heat  Dismantle and clean the bank of tubes.
1
exchanger)  Check the pipes for deposits.
Empty the preheater prior to dismantling.
Dismantle and clean the heating element.
Check the protection tubes for deposits.
Preheater
In the case of electric flow heaters in compact plate construc-
50 (type electric flow
1 tion, cleaning can be done in the form of flushing. Flush the
heater)
flow heater with a suitable cleaning solution in the reverse
normal direction of flow.
 Replace damaged components as required, see parts list.

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Maintenance
3.4.5 After 1 year or 8000 h and subsequently every 2 years or every 16000 h
Ball valves
Strainer in the heat-  Dismantle and clean the strainer. Skilled
90 ing medium inlet (if  Replace damaged gaskets, see parts list.
fitted)  Perform next check after 4000 operating hours.
 Dismantle and clean the strainer. Skilled
Strainer in the feed
100  Replace damaged gaskets, see parts list.
pump feed (if fitted)
 Perform next check after 4000 operating hours.
 Check basket strainers. Skilled
1
100 Prefilter (if fitted)  Empty the prefilter prior to dismantling.
 Remove and clean the basket strainer.
1
 Check and service pumps . Skilled
 Replace damaged parts, see parts list.
 Check pumps with radial packing ring for leakage.
110 Pump unit
 Check pumps with slide-ring packings for deposits in the
necessary.
 Empty the preheater prior to dismantling. Skilled
Preheater
Cleaning in the form of flushing is possible.
50 (Type plate heat
exchanger)
Preheater  Empty the preheater prior to dismantling. Skilled
1

Empty the preheater prior to dismantling. Skilled

Dismantle and clean the heating element.

Check the protection tubes for deposits.
Preheater

In the case of electric flow heaters in compact plate construc-
heater)

Maintenance 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
3.4.6 After 2 years or 16000 h and subsequently every 2 years or every 16000 h
Ball valves
Strainer in the heat- Skilled
90 ing medium inlet (if
fitted)
Strainer in the feed  Dismantle and clean the strainer. Skilled
100
pump feed (if fitted)  Replace damaged gaskets, see parts list.
 Remove and clean the basket strainers. Skilled
100 Prefilter (if fitted)
1
 Check and service pumps . Skilled
 Replace damaged parts, see parts list.
 Check pumps with radial packing ring for leakage.
110 Pump unit
 Check pumps with slide-ring packings for deposits in the
necessary.
 Empty the preheater prior to dismantling.
Preheater
Cleaning in the form of flushing is possible. Skilled
50 (Type plate heat
exchanger)
Preheater  Empty the preheater prior to dismantling. Skilled
1
Empty the preheater prior to dismantling.  Skilled
Dismantle and clean the heating element. 
Check the protection tubes for deposits. 
Preheater
In the case of electric flow heaters in compact plate construc- 
heater)
3.4.7 after 6 years or 48,000 operating hours

Complete compact  Inspection of the complete compact unit by a service techni- Tspec
unit cian from GEA Westfalia Separator.
Legend of the target groups:

• Op = Operator
• Skilled = Skilled worker
• Tspec = Trained specialist
For a description of the knowledge and skills required by the respective personnel,
see chapter "About this document", section "Target groups".
Pos : 30 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/11_Wartung/Pumpen/Z ahnr adpumpe_warten/Zahnradpumpe_warten_KF @ 10\mod_1391761798930_18.doc x @ 660820 @ 23 @ 1

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Maintenance
3.5 Maintaining the gear pump KF

Regular maintenance on the pump guarantees a high level of operational reliability
for the system and helps reduce costs.
The scope and time intervals of the maintenance depend on the conditions on-site
and the production process and must be defined by the operator in a correspond-
ing maintenance plan.
During all maintenance work, follow the safety instructions on site and wear protec-
tive clothing.
For further information, see the "Maintenance" chapter in the pump manufacturer's
instruction manual.
3.5.1 Maintenance work on the pump

The following points must be taken into account when checking and maintaining
the pump:
• Unusual noises may indicate that the pump is damaged and must be investigat-
ed.
• Dust deposits on the pump and shaft must be removed regularly. Do not use a
high-pressure cleaner (e.g. a steam jet).
• Static sealings and gaskets which have sprung a leak must be sealed immedi-
ately. If this can not be achieved by tightening the screw connections, the sys-
tem must be shut down to determine the cause.
• Check the radial packing rings regularly to identify any damage caused by the
medium or environmental influences. Small leaks are normal and necessary for
the function of the seal. In the event of excessive leaks, the radial packing ring
must be replaced.
• The coupling must be maintained in accordance with the instructions from the
manufacturer, see the instruction manual for the coupling.
• Check the surface temperature of the pump regularly, it should not be much
more than 10 °C over the medium temperature on the pump inlet. Higher tem-
peratures may be an indication of wear or bearing damage and the pump must
be replaced in this case.
• Bearings, gears and housing wheel chambers are wear parts and must be
checked regularly. Drops in pump output may be a sign of wear. The delivery
volume, pressure, temperature and drive data must therefore be checked regu-
larly. In the event of deviations from the setpoint of more than 10 %, determine
the cause. In the event of a 20 % drop in output from the values measured when
the system was commissioned, the system must be decommissioned and the
causes determined.
Pos : 31 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/11_Wartung/Pumpen/Wartungs bedar f_Pumpe/Wartungsbedarf_Pumpe_CG_K @ 1\mod_1347455611381_18.doc x @ 183503 @ 3 @ 1
3.5.2 Determine maintenance requirements for the pump

The service life of the pump depends heavily on the operating conditions. If the op-
erating limits are complied with, the pump has a service life lasting many years.
Signs of advanced wear on individual pump elements are listed in the following ta-
ble.
If instances of wear appear repeatedly in specific time intervals, the necessary
measures can be found in the maintenance plan for the system.

Maintenance 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
Check table for maintenance

requirements
Findings Cause Remedy
Increased running noise Onsetting bearing da- Replace bearing.
mage
Increased leaking Onsetting seal damage Replace the shaft seal.
Deposits on the seal Semi-volatile media Clean the seal.
Drop in the delivery vol- Advanced wear on spin- Replace the pump.
ume or pressure under dles and housing
constant operating condi-
tions
Carry out a regular visual and acoustic check on the pump every 4 weeks.
Identify signs of wear and remove the cause, see table above.
Slide-ring packing
Slide-ring packings are subject to natural wear, which is heavily dependent on the
relevant usage conditions. It is therefore not possible to make general statements
regarding the service life.
In the event of heavy soiling with stuck-on and/or sticky leak residues, we recom-
mend dismantling the slide-ring packing and cleaning it together with the inner sur-
faces of the flange cover.
Ball bearing
The ball bearings used are lubricated for life. This means that no maintenance
work is required. We recommend replacing the ball bearings after every 20000
hours of operation.
Magnetic coupling
If the magnetic coupling is operated in accordance with the instructions, no
maintenance is required over its lifetime.
It is advisable to inspect the magnetic coupling as part of the system revision and
at the latest after 2.5 years.
Cleaning the vent holes

Deposits may form from the small, normal leak quantities, which can prevent fur-
ther leak fluid from draining off freely over a long period of use. The vent holes
must therefore be checked every four weeks and cleaned if necessary.
CAUTION Damage to bearings due to blocked leakage pipes.
 Check the vent holes regularly for blockages.

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Maintenance
 Unscrew the leakage pipe if connect-

ed.
Check the leakage pipe for blocks:
 Observe the drainage of a small quan-
tity of fluid
or
 carry out a visual check
or
 insert a mandrel made from soft mate-
rial (wood, plastic etc.), see Fig.
 Clean the pipe or vent hole if block-
ages are identified.
 Re-connect the leakage pipe if appli-
cable.
Fig. 2 Cleaning the vent hole
Pos : 32 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/11_Wartung/Pumpen/M embr anpumpe_warten/Membranpumpe_warten_T 1_P1 @ 10\mod_1392128649794_18.doc x @ 664598 @ 2 @ 1
3.6 Maintaining the diaphragm pump T1/P1

The maintenance intervals for the pump vary depending on the strain during opera-
tion and may have to be adapted to the individual conditions.
If the pump has to be cleaned and checked according to a maintenance plan, the
following preparations must be made:
• Stop the system.
• Disconnect the air supply to the pump.
• Loosen the suction line and pressure line where applicable, collect the remaining
fluid and dispose of it in accordance with the local regulations and disconnect
the pipes.
• Replace the following parts with genuine spare parts according to the mainte-
nance plan:
- Diaphragms
- Valve balls
- Valve seat O-rings
- O-rings for the centre block
Pos : 33 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/11_Wartung/Wär metaus cher/Wärmetauscher_warten_r einigen_C O @ 11\mod_1392288997464_18.doc x @ 666615 @ 2 @ 1
3.7 Maintaining and cleaning the "CO" heat exchanger

The heat exchanger must be cleaned if the output on the heat exchanger drops or
when the maintenance interval has expired.
The system must be switched off for this or the heat exchanger switched to
Standby mode.
 Open the exhaust valve and drain the heat exchanger.
 Collect the remaining fluid and dispose of it in accordance with the local regula-
tions if necessary.
 Loosen the flange connection and remove the heat exchanger.
 Cleaning in the form of flushing is possible.
 Flush the heat exchanger with a suitable cleaning solution in the reverse normal
direction of flow.
If chemicals are used for cleaning, it is important to ensure that these chemicals
are suitable for use with stainless steel, copper and nickel. Failure to do so may
destroy the heat exchanger!
 Always follow the safety regulations and recommendations of the cleaning agent
manufacturer.

Maintenance 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
 The cleaning agent should be chosen based on the type of soiling to be re-
moved and the resistance of the heat exchanger plates.
Confirmation should always be obtained from the cleaning agent manufacturer
stating that the cleaning agent will not damage the plate heat exchanger to be
cleaned.
 Clean the heat exchanger in accordance with the work instructions of the clean-
ing agent manufacturer.
 Always rinse the heat exchanger adequately with clean water before installing it
again.
 Install the heat exchanger, ensuring that it is in the correct position.
A blue or red dot on the front side of the heat exchanger marks the primary side.
 Tighten the supply line screw connections.
 Check the heat exchanger for leaks.
 If necessary, check the setting point of the pressure control valve, see mainte-
nance plan.
NOTE: For further information, see the "Corrosion resistance of soldered plate heat
exchangers to substances in water" chapter in the instruction manual for the heat
exchanger.
Pos : 34 /---Notiz en--- @ 10\mod_1391004785960_0.doc x @ 654888 @ @ 1

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Maintenance
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Notizen
Notes
Note
Pos : 36 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/12_Instands etzung @ 0\mod_1328003270613_18.doc x @ 14220 @ 1 @ 1

Maintenance 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Repair
4 Repair

4.1.1 Preventing hazards in the case of repair work ........................................ 30
4.1.2 Hazards from electricity ........................................................................... 30
4.1.3 Hazards from mechanical energy ............................................................ 30
4.1.4 Risk from exceeding limit values ............................................................. 30
4.1.5 Safe removal of pumps ............................................................................ 30
4.1.6 Standard tools.......................................................................................... 31
4.1.7 Special tools ............................................................................................ 31
4.2 Repairing the separator ........................................................................... 31
4.3 Replacing the gear pump type KF ........................................................... 31
4.3.1 Dismantling the gear pump...................................................................... 32
4.3.2 Installing the gear pump .......................................................................... 32
4.4 Replacing the diaphragm pump T1/P1 .................................................... 33
4.4.1 Removing the diaphragm pump .............................................................. 33
4.4.2 Dismantling the diaphragm pump ............................................................ 33
4.4.3 Assembling the diaphragm pump ............................................................ 33
4.4.4 Installing the diaphragm pump ................................................................ 33
4.5 Replacing the pump ................................................................................. 34
4.6 Dismantling pump type CG, K and R....................................................... 34
4.7 Replacing the magnetic coupling on pump unit type K ........................... 34
4.8 Replacing the spindle set on pump type K .............................................. 44
4.9 Replacing the radial packing ring on pump type K .................................. 47
4.10 Replacing the heat exchanger type OC .................................................. 50
4.10.1 Dismantling the heat exchanger .............................................................. 51
4.10.2 Installing the heat exchanger................................................................... 51

Repair 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
Pos : 37 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/U nter kapitel/Ü-Sic herheit @ 0\mod_1335184514313_18.doc x @ 29760 @ 2 @ 1
4.1 Safety information

Pos : 38 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/12_Ins tandsetzung/Sic herheit_Instands etz ung/Gefahr en_vermeiden_Instands etz ung @ 0\mod_1342525918348_18.doc x @ 176100 @ 3 @ 1
4.1.1 Preventing hazards in the case of repair work

Safety and availability of the system are dependent on proper carrying-out of re-
pairs.
Repairs may only be carried out by persons qualified to perform these activities,
e.g., technicians from GEA Westfalia Separator and personnel trained and author-
ized (certified) by GEA Westfalia Separator.
Pos : 39 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/12_Ins tandsetzung/Sic herheit_Instands etz ung/Gefahr _El ektrizität_Anlag e @ 0\mod_1341835669106_18.doc x @ 171632 @ 3 @ 1
4.1.2 Hazards from electricity

The following must be observed for handling of electricity when performing repairs:
• Observe the values for the power supply specified on the system.
• Perform only repair work that is described in the manual.
• Do not touch electrical components with wet hands!
• Before working on electrical components, switch off the power supply and se-
cure it to prevent switch-on.
• Defective cables must be replaced by qualified personnel as soon as possible.
Pos : 40 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/12_Ins tandsetzung/Sic herheit_Instands etz ung/Gefahr _mec hanisc he_Energie_Anlag e @ 0\mod_1341836067724_18.doc x @ 171666 @ 3 @ 1
4.1.3 Hazards from mechanical energy

Parts of the system may be pressurised. Water discharges or unexpected move-
ments of system components may cause injuries or property damage.
 Regularly check the pressure lines.
 Before performing any repair or maintenance work, depressurise the system
completely.
Pos : 41 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/12_Ins tandsetzung/Sic herheit_Instands etz ung/Überschr eiten_der _Gr enz werte_CU @ 0\mod_1342526603984_18.doc x @ 176133 @ 3 @ 1
4.1.4 Risk from exceeding limit values

The system is designed in accordance with regulations and operates at a contrac-
tually-specified throughput for supplying diesel engines. The service life and opera-
tional reliability of the system is designed for this throughput. Changes to the
throughput constitute a use other than the intended use, can destroy the system
and lead to damage to persons and material damage.
 Never manipulate components which change the output, otherwise the system
may exceed the permissible operating data, e.g. the maximum permissible
speed of the centrifuge bowl. For the maximum permissible speed of the bowl,
see the type plate and the "Technical data" chapter. A speed-changing compo-
nent is, for example, the frequency converter.
 When components of the system are replaced, always use spare parts listed in
the spare parts list, in order to adhere to the permissible limits.
Pos : 42 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/12_Ins tandsetzung/Sic herheit_Instands etz ung/Pumpen_sic her_aus bauen @ 1\mod_1347456043766_18.doc x @ 183536 @ 3 @ 1
4.1.5 Safe removal of pumps

If you need to remove the pump, observe the following safety instructions:
• pumps must be removed by authorised staff only.
• Persons with heart pacemakers must not install, maintain and operate pumps
with magnetic system couplings.
• Strong magnetic forces occur on removing the magnetic coupling. The compo-
nents can bounce back into their original positions due to the force of magnets.
To avoid injury and damage, turn in the push-off screws to the extent that a suf-
ficiently large gap is created between the components; this helps to prevent
crushing or trapping of parts of the body.

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Repair
• Shut off the supply lines at the appropriate valves.

• Switch off the motor, and secure against restarting.
• If necessary, call in a qualified electrician to have the electrical wiring discon-
nected from the motor.
• Use the required protective equipment for all work.
• Make sure that the pump is pressureless.
• Before starting work, allow the pump or the pump unit to cool down to room
temperature and disconnect it from the pipe network.
• Safely collect any fluid spillage and dispose of this in an environmentally friendly
way.
• Note the exploded view drawings.
Pos : 43 /BA/Standard/12_Ins tands etz ung/Wer kzeugeStandardwer kz euge @ 20\mod_1432109034940_18.doc x @ 942377 @ 3 @ 1
4.1.6 Standard tools

Commercially available standard tools are not included in the supply schedule.
These include, for example, open-ended wrenches, ring spanners and screwdriv-
ers. These must be provided by the customer.
Pos : 44 /BA/Standard/12_Ins tands etz ung/Wer kzeugeSpezi al wer kz euge @ 20\mod_1432109150973_18.doc x @ 942412 @ 3 @ 1
4.1.7 Special tools

The scope, type and number of the special tools are specified in the order-specific
parts list. Commercially available tools are not supplied.
Pos : 45 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/12_Ins tandsetzung/Separ ator_i nstands etz en/Separ ator_i nstands etz en @ 11\mod_1392820933149_18.doc x @ 669851 @ 2 @ 1
4.2 Repairing the separator

If the separator is not working correctly and an error has been localised with the
help of the "Troubleshooting" chapter, commission an authorized specialist to carry
out the repair work.
If repair work is required, follow the instructions in the "Repair" chapter of the in-
struction manual for the separators in the complete documentation.
 Shut down the system as described in the "Operation" chapter.
 Switch off the system via the main switch and secure against being switched on
again (e.g. with a padlock).
 Close the feed and discharge lines.
 Allow hot pipes and surfaces to cool down.
 Wait for the separator deceleration time to end, see the "Technical data" chapter
in the instruction manual for the separator.
 Ensure that the rotating parts of the machine are at a standstill, see the "Stand-
still check on rotating machine parts" chapter in the instruction manual for the
separator.
Pos : 46 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/12_Ins tandsetzung/Pumpen/Z ahnr adpumpe/Z ahnr adpumpe_austaus chen_KF @ 10\mod_1391610069337_18.doc x @ 658271 @ 233 @ 1
4.3 Replacing the gear pump type KF
If the gear pump or the gear pump unit has to be repaired or replaced, the following
points must be observed and measures implemented:
 Comply with the "Assembly" chapter in the instruction manual of the pump man-
ufacturer.
 Depressurize the system or the connection cables.
 Deenergize the electrical connections and have them disconnected by an au-
thorized specialist.
 Take suitable measures to prevent the system from being switched on again.

Repair 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
 Work on the pump must only be carried out by authorized specialists.

 It is important to maintain cleanliness when working on the pump to ensure that
no foreign bodies can enter the pump or connection cables.
4.3.1 Dismantling the gear pump

 Dismantle the depressurized pipes from the pump.
 Seal the pump connections and pipes to prevent dirt from entering.
 Dismantling the pump
 Remove the coupling hub or drive pinion from the shaft end with a puller.
 For new parts, only use genuine spare parts from GEA Westfalia Separator.
 Clean the pump with suitable agents, replace damaged components or replace
the pump.
4.3.2 Installing the gear pump

 During assembly, make sure that the pump direction of rotation and conveying
direction are correct and follow the instructions in the "Assembly" "Direction of
rotation and conveying direction" chapter in the instruction manual of the pump
manufacturer.
 Take care not to damage the bearings or seals by jamming when dismantling
and assembling the cover or pressure relief valve.
 Do not use sharp-edged tools as a lever in the coupling joint (e.g. do not use a
screwdriver).
 Only tighten the screws to the permissible torque, see the "Assembly" chapter,
table "Tightening torques for fixing screws" in the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
 The connection cables used must be approved for the expected pressures.
• Only use suitable sealants to ensure that no foreign bodies can enter the system
and cause malfunctions.
• The suction line must be designed and installed in accordance with the instruc-
tions and information in the "Assembly/Suction line" chapter of the pump manu-
facturer's installation manual.
• The pressure line must be designed and installed in accordance with the instruc-
tions and information in the "Assembly/Pressure line" chapter of the pump
manufacturer's installation manual.
• When assembling the coupling of the gear pump unit, observe the instructions
and information in the "Assembly / Coupling assembly" chapter in the pump unit
manufacturer's instruction manual.
• When installing the pump or the pump unit, observe the information and instruc-
tions in the "Assembly / Mechanical installation" chapter of the instruction manu-
al from the pump manufacturer or pump unit manufacturer.
• The electrical connection must only be carried out by an authorized specialist
(e.g. electrician). Ensure that the direction of rotation of the pump and motor is
correct.
• The data on the type plate of the pump and motor must correspond to the re-
quired operating data of the system.
• The overload protection must be set to the correct value (e.g. the pressure relief
valve).
Pos : 47 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/12_Ins tandsetzung/Pumpen/M embr anpumpe/M embr anpumpe_austausc hen_T1_P1 @ 10\mod_1392200470767_18.doc x @ 664890 @ 23333 @ 1

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Repair
4.4 Replacing the diaphragm pump T1/P1

If the diaphragm pump has to be repaired or replaced, the following points must be
observed and measures implemented:
 Comply with the "Dismantling and assembling the pump T1" chapter in the in-
struction manual of the pump manufacturer.
 Depressurize the system or the connection cables.
 Work on the pump must only be carried out by authorized specialists.
 It is important to maintain cleanliness when working on the pump to ensure that
no foreign bodies can enter the pump or connection cables.
4.4.1 Removing the diaphragm pump

 Remove the pump pressure connection.
 Dismantle the depressurized pipes for the pressure connection and suction con-
nection from the pump.
 Collect the remaining fluid and dispose of it correctly in accordance with the local
regulations.
 Seal the pump connections and pipes to prevent dirt from entering.
4.4.2 Dismantling the diaphragm pump

 If the pump has to be dismantled for cleaning or repair work, follow the instruc-
tions in the "Dismantling and assembling the pump T1" chapter in the instruction
manual for the diaphragm pump.
 Clean the pump with suitable agents, replace damaged components or replace
the pump.
4.4.3 Assembling the diaphragm pump

 For instructions on assembling the diaphragm pump, see the "Hints & tips for re-
assembly" chapter in the instruction manual for the diaphragm pump.
 Only tighten the screws to the permissible torque, see the "Hints & tips for reas-
sembly/Tightening torques" chapter, in the instruction manual for the diaphragm
pump.
4.4.4 Installing the diaphragm pump

 Check the connection cables for foreign bodies or soiling and clean if necessary.
 If a new pump is being installed, compare the data for the new pump with the
permissible pump data in the "Technical data" chapter.
 When installing the pump, observe the safety instructions in the "CE safety in-
structions / Installing the pump / Commissioning" chapter of the instruction man-
ual for the diaphragm pump or in the "Installation suggestion / Check list prior to
installation" chapter of the pump manual.
 Only tighten the screws with the permissible torque, see the "Technical data"
chapter.
 The connection cables used must be approved for the expected pressures.
• Only use suitable sealants to ensure that no foreign bodies can enter the system
and cause malfunctions.
Pos : 48 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/12_Ins tandsetzung/Pumpen/Pumpe/Pumpe_aus tausc hen/Pumpe_austausc hen_K_GC @ 1\mod_1352814837498_18.doc x @ 194453 @ 2 @ 1

Repair 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
4.5 Replacing the pump

If a pump is faulty, and it needs to be replaced, please observe the following in-
structions.
• Only task authorised staff with replacing the pump.
• If present, the stand-by pump can be switched on, while the defective pump is
being removed.
• There is no stand-by pump, shut down and switch off the system, as described
in the section "Operation - Shutting down the system".
• Use only suitable and sufficiently dimensioned lifting gear for transporting the
pump; see the "Technical data" section, or the pump type plate for weights.
Pos : 49 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/12_Ins tandsetzung/Pumpen/Pumpe/Pumpe_aus bauenPumpe_aus bauen_CG_K_R @ 23\mod_1438681751877_18.doc x @ 1000558 @ 2 @ 1
4.6 Dismantling pump type CG, K and R

Aids:
• Collection vessels for escaping conveyed medium
DANGER Danger to life due to electric shock.
 Ensure that the electricity supply is deenergized.

 Only have the motor disconnected from the electricity supply by an authorised
electrician.
WARNING Risk of injury due to escaping hot, toxic conveyed medium.
 Wear protective equipment for all work.

 Allow the pump to cool down to ambient temperature before starting work.
 Make sure that the pump is pressureless.
 Safely collect any conveyed medium and dispose of it in an environmentally
friendly way.
 Disconnect motor from power supply and secure against being switched on
again.
 Close the shut-off devices on the pressure and suction side.
 Drain the pump at the lowest point via a drain screw and collect the escaping
conveyed medium in a suitable vessel.
 Loosen the connecting flange.
 Loosen the pump unit fastening on the foundation and dismantle the motor and
bellhousing.
Pos : 50 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/12_Ins tandsetzung/Pumpen/Sc hraubenspi ndel pumpe/Pumpe_K/Mag netkupplung_aus tausc hen_Pumpe_K/Mag netkupplung_aus tausc hen_Pumpe_K @ 1\mod_1350552355009_18.doc x @ 188217 @ 2 @ 1
4.7 Replacing the magnetic coupling on pump unit type K

Dismantling the magnetic coupling
Dismantling the outer rotor
 Dismantle the pump as described under “Dismantling the pump”.
WARNING Risk of injury due to the pump/pump unit falling.
 Lift large pumps with a crane.

 Do not stand under suspended loads.

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Repair
 Before dismantling, close the pressure connection and suction connection on the
pump with protective covers.
 Loosen the connecting screws be-

tween the motor (3) and the bellhous-
ing (2) and lift the pump (1) from the
motor with the bellhousing.
Fig. 3
 Loosen the threaded pin (3) or coun-

tersunk-head screw (1) depending on
the motor size.
Fig. 4

Repair 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
 Remove the coupling hub (2) and out-

er rotor (1) from the motor shaft with
assembly levers.
Heating up the coupling hub and outer
rotor (1) to approx. 80 °C makes dismant-
ling easier.
Fig. 5
 Loosen the cylinder head screws (2)

between the coupling hub (3) and the
outer rotor (1).
Fig. 6

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Repair
Dismantling the inner rotor

between the pump and the bellhousing
(1) and remove the bellhousing.
Fig. 7

between the containment shell (2) and
the pump.
 Remove the containment shell (2).
Heating up the containment shell to ap-
prox. 80 °C makes dismantling easier.
Fig. 8

Repair 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
 To replace the inner rotor (2), screw

two screws into the empty tapped
holes on the clamping element (1) as a
twist lock.
 Then loosen the screws on the clamp-
ing element (1) and remove the inner
rotor (2) from the shaft.
Fig. 9

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Repair
Installing the magnetic coupling

Assembling the inner rotor
 Clean the contact surfaces of the inner

rotor (2) carefully, lightly grease the
clamping element (1).
Note: Only use oil with no molybdenum

sulphide additive (e.g. WD-40 multifunc-
tional spray).
 Unscrew the screws from the clamping

element (1) by hand by a few threads.
 Insert the clamping element (1) in the
inner rotor (2).
Fig. 10
 Carefully clean the sealing surfaces.

 Clean and lightly grease the O-ring (3).
 Insert the O-ring (3) and push the
spacer sleeve (2) on to the pump
shaft.
 Position the inner rotor (1) with pre-
mounted clamping element on the
pump shaft and tighten the screws of
the clamping element by hand in a
crosswise sequence.
Heating up the inner rotor to approx. 80
°C makes assembly easier.
Fig. 11

Repair 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
 Check the position of the clamping

element: The clamping element (1)
must lie on the spacer sleeve (3) and
the inner rotor (2).
 If this is not the case, loosen the
screws again and re-align the clamp-
ing element (1).
 If the position is correct, tighten the
screws crosswise with half torque first
of all, see the following table for the
tightening torque.
Fig. 12
Tightening torque for screws of clamping

elements for magnetic couplings
Thread Tightening torque [Nm]
12.9
M3 1.8
M4 4.5
M6 16
M8 37
M10 73
M12 126
 Then tighten crosswise with full tightening torque until none of the screws turn
any more.
NOTE: The screws are only tightened correctly when they no longer turn when
tightened with full torque!

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Repair
 Press the containment shell (1) on to

the pump flange and tighten the con-
necting screws (2).
Fig. 13
 Position the bellhousing (1) on the

pump (3) and tighten the countersunk-
head screws (2) with the specified
tightening torque, see "Technical data"
chapter.
Fig. 14

Repair 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
Assembling the outer rotor
 Clean the outer rotor (1) carefully with

compressed air.
 Tighten the connecting screws (2) on
the outer rotor and coupling hub (3)
with the specified tightening torque,
see "Technical data" chapter.
Fig. 15
 Clean the shaft end of the motor (3)

and apply lubricant.
 Position the coupling hub (2) on the
shaft end of the motor with the outer
rotor (1).
Heating up to approx. 80 °C makes as-
sembly easier.
Fig. 16
 The shaft end of the motor (2) must be

flush with the front surface of the cou-
pling hub (1).
Fig. 17

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Repair
 Tighten the threaded pin (3) or coun-

tersunk-head screw (1) depending on
the motor size.
Fig. 18
 Position the pump (1) with the bell-

housing (2) carefully on the motor.
 Do not use force and ensure that the
outer rotor (3) does not hit on the con-
tainment shell.
 Tighten the connecting screws on the
motor and bellhousing.
 Only remove the protective cover
again just before connecting the pump
to the pipeline system.
Fig. 19
Pos : 51 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/12_Ins tandsetzung/Pumpen/Sc hraubenspi ndel pumpe/Pumpe_K/Spindelsatz_austauschen_Pumpe_K/Spi ndels atz _aus tausc hen_Pumpe_K @ 1\mod_1348814357576_18.doc x @ 185252 @ 2 @ 1

Repair 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
4.8 Replacing the spindle set on pump type K

Dismantling the spindle set
 Remove the countersunk-head screws

(1) and loosen the flange cover (2)
with light knocks (plastic hammer).
 Pull the slide-in unit, consisting of a
main spindle (3), bearing, seal and
flange cover (2), out of the pump hous-
ing (4).
Fig. 20
 Remove the key (5).
For type K 32 – 1700

 Remove the shaft circlip (6) and sup-
port plate (7).
For type K 2200 – 2900:

 Remove the threaded ring (8).
 Drive the main spindle (3) out of the

flange cover (2) with light knocks with
a plastic hammer.
Fig. 21
 Remove the slide ring with spring (1),

support plate (2), shaft circlip (3) and
compensation cylinder (4) from the
main spindle (5).
Fig. 22

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Repair
 Remove the auxiliary spindles (1) from

the pump housing (2).
Fig. 23
 Remove the remains of the flat seal (1)

from the flange cover (2) and remove
the pump housing (3).
Fig. 24
Installing the spindle set
 Clean the fitting surfaces, lightly

grease the O-rings.
 Insert the auxiliary spindles (1) in the
pump housing (2).
Fig. 25

Repair 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
 Carefully clean and grease the main

spindle (5) in the area around the
slide-ring packing.
 Press the compensation cylinder (4)
on the main spindle.
 Mount the shaft circlip (3) and support
plate (2).

Fig. 26
 Position the assembly sleeve (2).

 Push the slide ring with spring (1) onto
the spindle (3) over the assembly
sleeve.
 Remove the assembly sleeve (2).
Fig. 27
 Push the main spindle (3) with mount-

ed slide ring in the flange cover (2).
For types K 32 – 1700:

 Mount the support plate (7) and shaft
circlip (6).
For types K 2200 – 2900:

 Mount the threaded ring (8).
 Mount the key.
Fig. 28
 Mount a new flat seal (15) on the

pump housing (4).
 Push the main spindle (3) with pre-
mounted flange cover (2) into the
pump housing (4) until the main spin-
dle engages with the auxiliary spin-
dles.
 Note the position of the pin (16) and
turn the main spindle.
 Tighten the countersunk-head screws
(1) to the specified torque, see the
"Technical data" chapter.
Fig. 29
Pos : 52 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/12_Ins tandsetzung/Pumpen/Sc hraubenspi ndel pumpe/Pumpe_K/Radial wellendichtring_austausc hen_Pumpe_K/R adi al well endichtringe_aus tausc hen_Pumpe_K @ 1\mod_1348728004654_18.doc x @ 185010 @ 2 @ 1

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Repair
4.9 Replacing the radial packing ring on pump type K

Dismantling the radial packing ring
 Remove the countersunk-head screws

(1) and loosen the flange cover (2)
with light knocks (plastic hammer).
 Pull the slide-in unit, consisting of a
main spindle (3), bearing, seal and
flange cover (2), out of the pump hous-
ing (4).
Fig. 30
 Remove the key (5).
For type K 32 – 1700:

 Remove the shaft circlip (6) and sup-
port plate (7).
For type K 2200 – 2900:

 Remove the threaded ring (8).
 Drive the main spindle (3) out of the

flange cover (2) with light knocks with
a plastic hammer.
Fig. 31
 Remove the shaft circlip (1). Pull the

ball bearing (2) out of the flange cover
with a suitable pulling device, see the
"Replacing ball bearings" chapter.
 Remove the support plate (3*), retain-
ing ring (4) and support plate (5**).
*) not for types K32 – 660

**) only for types K5 - 275
Fig. 32

Repair 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
 Press the radial packing ring (7) out of

the flange cover (6) with a suitable
mounting mandrel (8).
The radial packing ring is usually de-
stroyed during dismantling.
 Remove the remains of the flat seal
from the flange cover and remove the
pump housing.
Fig. 33
Installing the radial packing ring

Aids:
• Liquid thread lock (e.g. Loctite 572)
• Mounting mandrel: The mandrel must lie flat across the support body of the gas-
ket and must have no sharp edges in the area around the sealing lip.
• Assembly sleeve
 Clean the seat area of the radial pack-

ing ring in the flange cover carefully
and apply the liquid thread lock (e.g.
Loctite 572).
The liquid acts as a lubricant when as-
sembling the gasket and as a twist lock
once it has hardened.
Note: The liquid thread lock must not get

on the sealing lip!
 Press the radial packing ring (7) care-
fully into the flange cover (6) using the
mounting mandrel (8).
Fig. 34

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Repair
 Note the assembly direction when

pressing in (see arrow).
 If you encounter excessive resistance,
apply additional liquid thread lock as
lubricant.
Fig. 35
 Mount support plate (5**) and retaining

ring (4).
**) only for types K 5 – 275

Fig. 36
 Lubricate the space in between the

radial packing ring with suitable lubri-
cant.
 Push the main spindle (4) in the flange
cover (6) using an assembly sleeve
(1).
 Remove the assembly sleeve (1).
Fig. 37

Repair 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
 Mount the support plate (3*).

 Press the ball bearing (2) in the flange
cover.
 Mount the shaft circlip (1).
*) not for types K 32 – 660

Fig. 38
 For types K 32 – 1700: Mount the

support plate (7) and shaft circlip (6).
 For types K 2200 – 2900: Mount the
threaded ring (8).
 Mount the key (5).
Fig. 39
 Mount a new flat seal (15) on the

pump housing (4).
 Push the main spindle (3) with pre-
mounted flange cover (2) into the
pump housing (4) until the main spin-
dle engages with the auxiliary spin-
dles. Note the position of the pin (16)
and turn the main spindle (3).
 Tighten the countersunk-head screws
(1) to the specified torque, see the
"Technical data" chapter.
Fig. 40
Pos : 53 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/12_Ins tandsetzung/Wär metauscher/Wärmetauscher _austauschen_OC @ 11\mod_1392215043737_18.doc x @ 664925 @ 233 @ 1
Allow the thread seal to harden for 72 hours before commissioning the pump.
4.10 Replacing the heat exchanger type OC
If the heat exchanger has to be repaired or replaced, the following points must be
observed and measures implemented:
 Refer to the instruction manual of the heat exchanger.
 Shut down the system.
 Depressurize the connection cables.
 Work on the heat exchanger must only be carried out by authorized specialists.
 It is important to maintain cleanliness when working on the heat exchanger to
ensure that no foreign bodies can enter the connection cables.

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Repair
4.10.1 Dismantling the heat exchanger

 Dismantle the depressurized pipes from the heat exchanger.
 Loosen the flange screw connections, catch the remaining fluid and dispose of it
in accordance with local regulations.
 Seal the connection cables and openings of the heat exchanger to prevent dirt
from entering.
 Clean the heat exchanger with suitable agents, replace damaged components or
replace the heat exchanger.
4.10.2 Installing the heat exchanger

When installing a new heat exchanger, it is important to ensure that the connec-
tions are positioned correctly.
1 secondary circuit outlet

2 secondary circuit inlet
3 primary circuit outlet
4 Red or blue dot marks the primary side
5 primary circuit inlet
Fig. 41
 Only tighten the screws to the permissible torque, see the "Assembly position"
chapter, table "Maximum connection forces and torques" in the heat exchanger
manufacturer's instruction manual.
• The data on the type plate of the heat exchanger must correspond to the re-
quired operating data of the system.
• Commission the heat exchanger, see the "Commissioning / Commissioning the
heat exchanger "OC"" chapter.
Pos : 55 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/14_Ersatzteile @ 0\mod_1328016648937_18.doc x @ 14543 @ 1 @ 1

Repair 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts
5 Spare parts
5.1 Original spare parts ................................................................................. 54

5.2 Notes on ordering spare parts ................................................................. 54
5.3 Spare parts .............................................................................................. 56
5.3.1 Measuring instruments and sensors........................................................ 56
5.3.2 Gear pump unit KF .................................................................................. 58
5.3.3 Set of spare parts for pump "K series" .................................................... 62
5.3.4 Set of spare parts for pump "L3NG series" ............................................. 66
5.3.5 Set of spare parts for diaphragm pump "P1, T1" ..................................... 68
5.3.6 Soldered plate heat exchanger type "OC" ............................................... 70
5.3.7 Soldered plate heat exchanger type B .................................................... 72
5.3.8 Tubular heat exchanger type S/L and VW .............................................. 74
5.3.9 Electric preheater 4600/4600-V ............................................................... 76
5.3.10 Electric preheater type 4700 evo ............................................................. 78
5.3.11 Pressure-controlled 3/2-way valve .......................................................... 80
5.3.12 Spare parts for Y-strainer ........................................................................ 82
5.3.13 Strainer .................................................................................................... 84
5.3.14 2/2-way compact ball valve ..................................................................... 86
5.3.15 Control valves with electric actuator ........................................................ 88
5.3.16 Butterfly valve with limit switch ................................................................ 90
5.4.1 Spring-loaded safety valve ...................................................................... 92
5.4.2 Ball float steam trap FT 14-10 ................................................................. 94
5.4.3 Compressed air control unit ..................................................................... 96
5.4.4 Solenoid valves........................................................................................ 98
5.4.5 Replacement gaskets for flange connections ........................................ 100
5.4.6 Fax form for spare parts inquiries and spare parts orders .................... 102

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
Pos : 56 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/14_Ersatzteile/Original _Ers atz teil e_Anl age @ 0\mod_1342777851852_18.doc x @ 177970 @ 2 @ 1
5.1 Original spare parts

All spare parts, wear parts and operating materials are originally packed by GEA
Westfalia Separator. The original packing is provided with one of the markings
shown.
Markings for original spare parts from

GEA Westfalia Separator with national
and international validity.
Fig. 42
Non-original or non-approved spare parts or operating materials can endanger the

operating safety of the unit, shorten the service life of the components and hence
lead to hazards for man and the environment.
If a safety risk occurs when using non-original spare parts, this may have legal
consequences for the responsible persons. In this case, GEA Westfalia Separator
shall assume no liability or warranty.
 To ensure the operating safety and optimum availability of the compact unit, use
only original spare parts from GEA Westfalia Separator.
Pos : 57 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/14_Ersatzteile/Hi nweis e_Ers atz teil bes tell ung _Anlag e @ 0\mod_1342784082324_18.doc x @ 178038 @ 2 @ 1
5.2 Notes on ordering spare parts

Rapid and correct supply of spare parts can only be guaranteed if your order con-
tains the following details:
• Type: see nameplate, e.g. compact unit or BallastMaster....
• Serial-No.: see nameplate, e.g. 9000-223
• Year of construction: see nameplate. e.g. 2006
• Designation: see parts list. e.g. set of gaskets for ball valve - DN25
• Order number: see parts list, e.g. 2020-9777-100
This information is only necessary when ordering spare parts for pumps:
• Type and serial number of the pump: see pump nameplate
The information must be complete to avoid incorrect deliveries.
Which spare parts must be ordered when?

The spare parts or spare part kits must be ordered in accordance with the mainte-
nance schedule of the unit, see chapter "Maintenance", section "Maintenance
schedule".
The maintenance schedule forms the systematic planning basis for the user to be
able to operate the unit safely and economically. The maintenance schedule

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts
makes it possible for the plant operator to integrate the maintenance work required
in the deployment plans for the service personnel.
In addition, the plant operator can order and store the right number and quality of
spare parts in good time for necessary maintenance work to ensure the availability
of the spare parts and spare part kits as well as the operating safety of the unit.
Pos : 58 /---Neue Seite--- @ 0\mod_1317283043850_0.doc x @ 550 @ @ 1

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
Pos : 59 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/14_ErsatzteileErsatzteilliste_CU @ 19\mod_1429259052536_18.doc x @ 932434 @ 233 @ 1
5.3 Spare parts

To assure proper functionality and the immediate replacement of the most im-
portant components of the compact unit, we urgently recommend storing the fol-
lowing spare parts in the recommended number on site, particularly on board.
5.3.1 Measuring instruments and sensors
Fig. 43

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts
Item Designation Quantity Part-No.

Measuring instruments and gauges
10 Resistance thermometer 2xPT100 1 0001-1579-400
20 Pressure gauge valve R ¼ " 1 0018-1549-600
30 Pressure gauge ( -0.1 - +0.5 MPa ) 1 0001-0529-600
40 Flow meter (0 – 1 bar, 0 – 400 l/h, 0 – 100 USgal/h) 1 0001-1347-610

40 Flow meter (0 – 1 bar, 0 – 24000 l/h, 0 – 6340 USgal/h) 0001-1163-610
50 Flow meter, scale 0 - 10 1 0001-1701-600

50 Pressure gauge (0 – 0.6 MPa), connection on rear side 1 0001-0279-600
50 Pressure gauge (0 – 1.0 MPa), connection on rear side 1 0001-1572-600
60 Resistance thermometer 1xPT100 1 0005-1534-400
70 Level switch R 1" 1 0005-1252-020

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
5.3.2 Gear pump unit KF
Fig. 44

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts
Item Designation Quantity Old Part-No. New Part-No.

Set of spare parts (bearing bushes, gaskets, cou-
pling hub) for gear pump unit KF
5 Plain bearing bush 4
6 Radial packing ring 1
8 O-ring seal for pump 1
9 O-ring seal for SAE flange 2
10 Coupling hub 1
Set of spare parts (bearing bushes, gaskets, cou-

pling hub) for gear pump unit KF...
Set of bearing bushes, gaskets, coupling hub for KF 4 1
8072-3254-000
to KF12
Set of bearing bushes, gaskets, coupling hub for KF 16 1
8072-3254-010
to KF25
Set of bearing bushes, gaskets, clutch hub for KF 32 to 1
8072-3254-020
KF80
Set of spare parts (plain bearing bushes) for gear

pump unit KF...
5 Set of plain bearing bushes for KF 4 to KF 25 1 8072-9120-000
5 Set of plain bearing bushes for KF 32 to KF 80 1 8072-9120-010
Set of spare parts (radial packing ring, O-ring seal

for pump, O-ring seal for SAE flange) for gear pump
unit KF...
6,8,9 Set of radial packing rings, O-ring seal for pump, O-ring 1 8072-9125-000
seal for SAE flange for KF 4 to KF 12
Set of gears for gear pumps KF

10 drive shaft 1
20 Driven shaft 1
Set of gears for gear pumps KF...

Set of gears KF 4 1 8072-9415-000
Set of gears KF 5 1 8072-9415-010

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
Item Designation Quantity Old Part-No. New Part-No.

Set of gears KF 6 1 8072-9415-020
Set of gears KF 8 1 8072-9415-030
Set of gears KF 10 1 8072-9415-040
Set of gears KF 12 1 8072-9415-050
Set of gears KF 16 1 8072-9415-060
Set of gears KF 20 1 8072-9415-070
Set of gears KF 25 1 8072-9415-080
Set of gears KF 32 1 8072-9415-090
Set of gears KF 40 1 8072-9415-100
Set of gears KF 50 1 8072-9415-110
Set of gears KF 63 1 8072-9415-120
Set of gears KF 80 1 8072-9415-130
Gear pump unit KF ... complete

KF 4 – 0.55/0.63 kW at 50/60 Hz 1 8072-3250-000 9085-2100-000
KF 5 – 0.55/0.64 kW at 50/60 Hz 1 8072-3250-010 9085-2101-000
KF 6 – 0.55/0.65 kW at 50/60 Hz 1 8072-3250-020 9085-2102-000
KF 8 – 0.55/0.66 kW at 50/60 Hz 1 8072-3250-030 9085-2103-000
KF 10 – 0.55/0.67 kW at 50/60 Hz 1 8072-3250-040 9085-2104-000
KF 12 – 0.55/0.68 kW at 50/60 Hz 1 8072-3250-050 9085-2105-000
KF 16 – 0.55/0.69 kW at 50/60 Hz 1 8072-3250-060 9085-2106-000
KF 20 – 1.1/1.27 kW at 50/60 Hz 1 8072-3250-070 9085-2107-000
KF 25 – 1.1/1.8 kW at 50/60 Hz 1 8072-3250-080 9085-2108-000
KF 32 – 1.1/1.29 kW at 50/60 Hz 1 8072-3250-090 9085-2109-000
KF 40 – 1.5/1.73 kW at 50/60 Hz 1 8072-3250-100 9085-2110-000
KF 50 – 2.2/2.53 kW at 50/60 Hz 1 8072-3250-110 9085-2111-000
KF 63 – 2.2/2.53 kW at 50/60 Hz 1 8072-3250-120 9085-2112-000
KF 80 – 3.0/3.45 kW at 50/60 Hz 1 8072-3250-130 9085-2113-000
KF 3/100 – 4.0/4.6 kW at 50/60 Hz 1 8072-3250-140 9085-2114-000
KF 4/125 – 5.5/6.33 kW at 50/60 Hz 1 8072-3250-150 9085-2115-000

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
5.3.3 Set of spare parts for pump "K series"
Fig. 45

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts
I- Designation Quantity Part-No.

tem
Set of spare parts for pump "K series"
10 Flat gasket 1
20 Flat gasket 2
20* Flat packing* 2*
30 Flat gasket 1
40 Flat gasket 1
50 Grooved ball bearing 1
60 Sealing disk 1
70 Set of seals for slide-ring packing 1
Set of spare parts for pump "K..."

For operation: 1 year or 8000 hours
Set of spare parts for pumps – K5; K7,5; 1 2020-9902-320
K10; K15; K20
Set of spare parts for pump - K32; K42 1 2020-9902-330
Set of spare parts for pump – K55; K74; 1 2020-9902-340
K85; K105; K118
Set of spare parts for pump – K160; K210; 1 2020-9902-350
K235; K275
Set of spare parts for pump – K370; K450 1 2020-9902-360
Set of spare parts for pump – K550; K660 1 2020-9902-370
Screw pump unit KF... complete

KF 5 – 0.25/0.30 kW at 50/60 Hz 9085-2300-000
KF 7 – 0.25/0.30 kW at 50/60 Hz 9085-2301-000
KF 10 – 0.25/0.30 kW at 50/60 Hz 9085-2302-000
KF 15 – 0.37/0.44 kW at 50/60 Hz 9085-2303-000
KF 20 – 0.55/0.66 kW at 50/60 Hz 9085-2304-000
KF 32 – 0.75/0.90 kW at 50/60 Hz 9085-2305-000
KF 42 – 1.10/1.32 kW at 50/60 Hz 9085-2306-000
KF 55 – 0.10/0.32 kW at 50/60 Hz 9085-2307-000
KF 74 – 2.20/2.64 kW at 50/60 Hz 9085-2308-000
KF 85 – 2.20/2.64 kW at 50/60 Hz 9085-2309-000
KF 105 – 2.20/2.64 kW at 50/60 Hz 9085-2310-000
KF 118 – 2.20/2.64 kW at 50/60 Hz 9085-2311-000
KF 160 – 3.00/3.60 kW at 50/60 Hz 9085-2312-000
KF 210 – 4.00/4.80 kW at 50/60 Hz 9085-2313-000
KF 235 – 5.50/6.60 kW at 50/60 Hz 9085-2314-000
KF 275 – 5.50/6.60 kW at 50/60 Hz 9085-2315-000
KF 370 – 7.50/9.00 kW at 50/60 Hz 9085-2316-000

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
*) these gaskets are included only in the set of spare parts for pumps upwards of size K160!
When ordering spare parts, always specify the type and serial number of the pump!

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
5.3.4 Set of spare parts for pump "L3NG series"
Fig. 46

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts

Set of spare parts for pump "L3NG series"
10 Flat gasket 2
20 Grooved ball bearing 1
30 Set of seals for slide-ring packing 1
Spare parts for pump "L3NG-…"

For operation: 1 year or 8000 hours
Set of spare parts for pump – L3NG – 25/35 1 2020-9902-060
When ordering spare parts, always specify the type and serial number of the pump!

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
5.3.5 Set of spare parts for diaphragm pump "P1, T1"
Fig. 47

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts

Set of spare parts for diaphragm pump "P1, T1"
10 Shaft seal 4
20 Diaphragm 2
30 Ball valve (Viton) 4
40 Valve seat 4
50 Valve seat O-ring seal 4
60 Distributor O-ring seal 4
Set of spare parts for diaphragm pump

Diaphragm pump P1, complete 1 8078-9200-110
(also as replacement pump for T1)
Set of spare parts for diaphragm pump T1 or P1 1 8078-9902-010

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
5.3.6 Soldered plate heat exchanger type "OC"
Fig. 48

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts

Set of connecting parts for soldered plate heat exchanger
type OC
10 Pan head screw 16
20 Lock washer 16
30 Grooved flange 4
40 Gasket 8
50 Plate 1
70 Hex head screw 2
80 Hexagon nut 2
Set of connecting parts for plate heat exchanger type OC

Set of connecting parts for plate heat exchanger type OC 4 1 2029-2110-050
Set of connecting parts for plate heat exchanger type OC 7 1 2029-2110-060
O-ring seal for soldered plate heat exchanger type OC

40 O-ring seal for soldered plate heat exchanger type OC 4 4 0007-1852-830
40 O-ring seal for soldered plate heat exchanger type OC 7 4 0007-1874-830
Soldered plate heat exchanger type OC

Soldered plate heat exchanger type OC 4-10 1 9085-1100-000

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
5.3.7 Soldered plate heat exchanger type B
Fig. 49

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts

Set of connecting parts for soldered plate heat exchanger type B
10 Pan head screw 16
20 Lock washer 16
30 Grooved flange 4
40 Gasket 8
50 Plate 1
60 Seal 4
70 Hex head screw 2
80 Hexagon nut 2
Set of connecting parts for plate heat exchanger type B

Set of connecting parts for plate heat exchanger type B10T 1 2029-2110-010
Set of connecting parts for plate heat exchanger type B35 1 2029-2110-020
Set of connecting parts for plate heat exchanger type B120T 1 2029-2110-030
O-ring seal for soldered plate heat exchanger type B

40 O-ring seal for soldered plate heat exchanger type B10T 4 0007-1852-830
40 O-ring seal for soldered plate heat exchanger type B35 and B120T 4 0007-1874-830
60 Flat packing for soldered plate heat exchanger type B10 T 4 0004-5591-910
60 Flat packing for soldered plate heat exchanger type B35 and B120T 4 0004-5593-910
Soldered plate heat exchanger type OC

Soldered plate heat exchanger type B10T / 10 1 9085-0001-001
Soldered plate heat exchanger type B35 / 30 1 9085-0001-008

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
5.3.8 Tubular heat exchanger type S/L and VW
Fig. 50

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts

Tubular heat exchanger type S/L and VW
10 Bank of tubes 1 on request
20 Set of screwed connections 1 on request
30 Set of gaskets for tubular plate exchanger type S/L and VW 1
Set of gaskets for tubular heat exchanger type S/L...

Set of gaskets for S/L-...15 9085-9920-020
Set of gaskets for tubular heat exchanger type VW

Set of gaskets for VW-…-15 9085-9920-060
When ordering spare parts, always specify the type and serial number of the heat exchanger!

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
5.3.9 Electric preheater 4600/4600-V
Fig. 51

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts

Electric preheater 4600/4600-V
10 Flange gasket for electric preheater – 4603/4603-V 2020-9902-500
10 Flange gasket for electric preheater – 4618 2020-9902-530
20 Heating insert, complete 1 on request

(including heating elements, completely wired)
30 Set of replacement heating elements 1 on request

Consisting of:
Heating element 1
Gasket for heating element 2
IMPORTANT! When ordering spare parts, always specify the type and serial
number of the heater!

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
5.3.10 Electric preheater type 4700 evo
Fig. 52

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts

Electric preheater type 4700 evo
10 Resistance thermometer PT100 1 on request
20 Safety temperature limiter 1 on request
30 O-ring seal 2 on request
40 Flat heating element HK 380-400-415 V – 2250 – 1.1 W/cm² * on request
40 Flat heating element HK 440-460-480 V – 2250 – 1.1 W/cm² * on request
50 Screwed gasket 4 on request
*) others on request
IMPORTANT! When ordering spare parts, always specify the type and serial
number of the heater!

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
5.3.11 Pressure-controlled 3/2-way valve
Fig. 53

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts
I- Designation Quantity Part-No.

tem
Spare parts for pressure-controlled 3/2-way valve
1 Transparent cap with gasket 1 0018-7621-940
2 Pilot valve with cable head 1 0018-7621-600
3 Air cylinder 1 0018-7621-930
4 2xPT 100 1 0001-1579-400
5 Screwed socket, complete 1 0018-7621-960
6 Spindle device, complete 1 0018-7621-950
7 O-ring seal 1 0007-2412-830
8 O-ring seal 3 0007-1929-830
9 Nonreturn valve 1 0018-7621-920
Pressure-controlled 3/2-way valve

Pressure-controlled 3/2-way valve, DN 25 1 0018-7621-000
Pressure-controlled 3/2-way valve, DN 50 1 0018-8091-000
Fig. 54

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
5.3.12 Spare parts for Y-strainer
Fig. 55

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts

Spare parts for Y-strainer
10 Gasket for Y-strainer DN 15 1 0018-6124-100
20 Sieve for Y-strainer DN 15, 0,25 mm fineness 1 0018-7337-400


Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
5.3.13 Strainer
Fig. 56

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts

Strainer
Prestrainer, complete DN25 1 8821-2110-100
10 Cover gasket 1 0007-2646-750
30 Flat gasket 2 0004-5454-780
20 Strainer insert 1 8821-2119-000

10 Cover gasket 1 0007-2646-750
30 Flat gasket 2 0004-5454-780

10 Cover gasket 1 0007-2461-750
30 Flat gasket 2 0004-5460-780

10 Cover gasket 1 0007-2461-750
30 Flat gasket 2 0004-5460-780

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
5.3.14 2/2-way compact ball valve
Fig. 57

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts

Set of spare parts for 2/2-way compact ball valve
10 Sealing ball seat 2 on request
20 Housing gasket 1 on request
30 Pressure ring 1 on request
40 Gasket 1 on request
50 Control shaft seal 1 on request
Set of spare parts for 2/2-way compact ball valve

2/2-way compact ball valve, DN 15 1 0018-7273-000

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
5.3.15 Control valves with electric actuator
Fig. 58

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts

Control valves with electric actuator
10 Control valve for steam
1 0018-8150-220
DN 15, kvs 0.4 – with electric actuator 1.6 kN
1 0018-8151-220
1 0018-8152-220
1 0018-8153-220
1 0018-8154-220
1 0018-8155-220
1 0018-8156-220
1 0018-8157-220
DN 25, kvs 10 – with electric actuator 1.6 kN
1 0018-8158-220
1 0018-8159-220
1
20 Control valve for thermal oil
1 0018-8160-220
1 0018-8161-220
1 0018-8162-220
1 0018-8163-220
1 0018-8164-220
1 0018-8165-220
1 0018-8166-220
1 0018-8167-220
1 0018-8168-220
1 0018-8169-220
30 Electric actuator 1.6 kN 1 on request

30 Electric actuator 2.2 kN 1 on request

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
5.3.16 Butterfly valve with limit switch
Fig. 59

Butterfly valve with limit switch
10 Limit switch 1 0018-9607-000
20 Butterfly valve DN 50 with limit switch 1 0018-8040-400


2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
5.3.17 Spring-loaded safety valve
Fig. 60

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts

Spring-loaded safety valve
10 Safety valve ½ ", spring-loaded, opening pressure 0.6 MPa 1 0018-7445-400

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
5.3.18 Ball float steam trap FT 14-10
Fig. 61

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts

Set of connecting parts for ball float steam trap FT 14-10
10 Cover gasket for FT 14 3
Set of connecting parts for FT 14 1 0018-7589-210
Ball float steam trap FT 14-10 Rp 1" 1 0018-7589-200

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
5.3.19 Compressed air control unit
Fig. 62

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts

Compressed air control unit
10 Compressed air control unit with oiler, FRC-1/4"-D-MINI complete 1 0018-6623-280
20 Replacement pressure gauge for FRC-1/4"-D-MINI 1 0018-6623-100
30 Compressed air supply unit without oiler, C 06 K10, complete 1 0018-8303-560
40 Replacement presure gauge for C 06 K10 1 on request

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
5.3.20 Solenoid valves
Fig. 63

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts
Item Designation Quantity Part-No./Drawing No.

Solenoid valves
10 3/2-way solenoid valve 1 0018-7346-840
20 2/2-way solenoid valve 1 0018-3715-680

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
5.3.21 Replacement gaskets for flange connections
Fig. 64

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts

Replacement gaskets for flange connections
10 Flat packing - DN15 1 0004-2187-780
10 Flat packing - DN20 1 0004-2186-780
10 Flat packing - DN25 1 0004-2188-780
10 Flat packing - DN32 1 0004-2213-780
10 Flat packing - DN40 1 0004-2214-780
10 Flat packing - DN50 1 0004-2231-780
10 Flat packing - DN65 1 0004-2232-780
10 Flat packing - DN80 1 0004-2235-780
10 Flat packing - DN100 1 0004-2234-780
10 Flat packing - DN125 1 0004-2236-780

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
Pos : 61 /Anl agen/Indi vi duell/14_Ersatzteile/F axfor mul ar für Ersatzteilanfrag e und Ersatzteilbestellung-HH @ 2\mod_1362996294053_18.doc x @ 233964 @ 4 @ 1
5.3.22 Fax form for spare parts inquiries and spare parts orders
Seite / page: 1-2
Faxformular - Fax Form

(vor Benutzung kopieren! – Copy before use!)
zur / for
CErsatzteilanfrage CErsatzteilbestellung
Spare part inquiries Spare part orders
An / To
Am Neuländer Gewerbepark 6
D-21079 Hamburg (Germany)
Fax-No.: +49 (0) 4058 9650 196
Besteller / Orderer
Firma / Company
Name
Straße, Haus-Nr.
Street, house no.
PLZ, Ort / ZIP, City
Telefon / Phone
Fax
Lieferanschrift (falls abweichend) Rechnungsanschrift (falls abweichend)

Delivery address (if different) Invoice address (if different)
Firma Firma
Company Company
Name Name
Straße, Straße,
Haus-Nr. Haus-Nr.
Street, Street
house no. House no.
PLZ, Ort / PLZ, Ort
ZIP, City ZIP, City
Telefon Telefon
Phone Phone
Fax Fax
Gewünschte Lieferzeit:
Desired delivery time:
Kommentar:
Remarks:
Ort, Datum / Place, Date Firmenstempel, Unterschrift / Company stamp, Signature

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts
Seite / page: 2-2

zur / for
CErsatzteilanfrage CErsatzteilbestellung
IMPORTANT! Bei Anfrage oder Bestellung unbedingt angeben:

IMPORTANT! When submitting your inquiry or order, be sure to state:
WSM-Auftrags-Nr. Serien-Nr.
WSM Order No.: Serial No. Typ Type
Kundenauftrags-Nr.
Customer Order No.
Pos. (falls
vorhanden) Bezeichnung Menge Teilnummer/ Zeichnungs-Nr.
Item (if Description Qty. Part-No. / Drawing-No.
available)

Pos : 62 /---Notiz en--- @ 10\mod_1391004785960_0.doc x @ 654888 @ @ 1

Spare parts 2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Notizen
Notes
Note

2023-9101-000 / 03.02.16 Spare parts
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Inhalt ===

Pos : 65 /BA/Standard/00_Ti tel _Rüc ks eiteR uec ks eite @ 28\mod_1447339274174_18.doc x @ 1026232 @ @ 1
We live our values-

Excellence • Passion • Integrity • Responsibility • GEA-versity
GEA Group is a global engineering company with multi-billion euro sales and operations
in more than 50 countries. Founded in 1881, the company is one of the largest providers of innova-
tive equipment and process technology. GEA Group is listed in the STOXX® Europe 600 Index.

Tel. +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
www.gea.com
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Ruec ks eite ===

How to Order Spare Parts and other consumables for Equipment supplied
by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH
Please contact the local GEA Westfalia Separator Group office closest to your site for
all your support requirements, to place spare parts orders or to request local on-site
support for all of your GEA Westfalia Separator Group equipment needs.
If you do not have the contact information handy, the contact details can easily be
found at:
www.westfalia-separator.com/service/service-contacts-worldwide.html
If you do not have Internet access, please call us and ask us for the local contact
details at our Headquarter in Oelde Germany:
Telephone: +49 2522 77 - 0
To speed up the handling of your request and to ensure that we supply the correct
parts, please include the following information with your requests:
- Machine Model and Serial Number (can be found on the machine ID label)
- Part numbers from the attached spare part list.
- Part description as taken from the spare part list.
- Requested quantity of each part.
- Your requisition number / Purchase Order number.
- Requested date of delivery.
Page 1 / 6 GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

- Your Company Contact details
 Your complete company name
(so we may research your account number)
 Your Billing address (if different from the Delivery address)
 Your requested Delivery address including Postal Zip Codes
The GEA Westfalia Separator Group Service Philosophy
Under the brand name serv&care we offer you as our customer and the operator who
is maintenance responsible of our delivered machine, these added values.
Please contact your local GEA Westfalia Separator Service Center in your area; for
contact information, see the above Internet link. The local serv&care team will be
pleased to provide support for all of your Spare Parts, On-Site Service and Repair
related matters.
The name serv&care combines two aspects of the modern service world
“serv” stands for service, meaning concrete actions to help in any way to maintain
the equipment of our customers. Whether it is for Spare Parts supply, assistance
using our excellent Field Service Engineers or our factory authorized comprehensive
repairs, all are covering the requirements of our customers. The main values of these
services for our customers are speed and quality. Our worldwide service network
serves as a basis to allow us to fulfill your requirement. GEA Westfalia Separator
Group offers on-time delivery of spare parts through our logistic hubs, local stock
levels and a global network of highly trained and experienced Field Service
Engineers and also having the specialized machinery in our Authorized Workshops
for comprehensive and safe repairs that only we can provide.

“care” stands for the driving force of our service organization to be an innovative and
reliable partner. Together with our customers we strive to find optimum solutions that
fulfill and exceed their expectations. We are not only servicing the equipment, we
offer solutions that satisfy the central task of our customers to increase the reliability
of their equipment, operates efficient processes and ensure that the customer meets
his own corporate mandates for total quality. Our motivation is to supply complete
and timely support that is “one step ahead” of your support requirements.
“care-thinking” is the basis of our self-understanding as the market leader and being
recognized as the first choice service provider by our customers.
Our main foundations are:
 Customer Relationships
 Speed
 Quality
 Communication
The serv&care Service Products
Spare Parts
Original Spare Parts from GEA Westfalia Separator Group provide our customers
with the reliability and safety that they need for protecting their investments.
Customers who buy our machines and equipment, decided to rely on the engineering
and quality of products made in Germany, with its strong focus on innovation and on
excellent quality. Why should they be satisfied with less in regard to any spare part?

Field Service
Our customers expect GEA Westfalia Separator Group as a service provider to have
the necessary expertise to carry out all required maintenance measures for their
particular machine and/or process. Services have to be provided world-wide,
irrespective of the market locale in which our customers operate and also irrespective
of where the company creates value.
We are always nearby waiting to assist you, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year!
Repairs
Our repair service reflects the level of care, precision and responsibility as the
manufacturer. Depending on the complexity, we are able to carry out repair work in
our authorized workshops around the world or in our factories. All authorized
workshops are certified in accordance with DIN EN ISO 9001 and follow the same
manufacturing methods and high standard which our company bases its reputation.
Rental Bowls / Exchange Parts
GEA Westfalia Separator Group always aims to keep the availability and security of
your equipment at the highest level. Depending on your particular model machine,
‘Rental Bowls‘, “Trade-In’s” and “Exchange” services are always available to keep
downtime to a minimum. In addition to Bowls and Scroll exchange parts, this is also
available for Decanter Gears, Clutches, Spindles, Hubs and Pistons.
Upgrades / Modernization
Changing market conditions or technological changes often require Upgrades /

Modernization, to increase efficiency, reduce power consumption, extend the life, or
to increase safety.

With an Upgrade / Modernization we replacing existing older parts, modules or
controls components with the latest designed parts and components engineered
specifically for your machine, not just made to work.
Condition Monitoring
By use of the GEA Westfalia Separator wewatch® Condition Monitoring system, a

predictive maintenance approach can be applied. This approach provides an active
enhancement with constant data accumulation of the important parameters of your
machine that have a direct influence on the availability of the equipment. In
conjunction with regular preventive service intervals it ensures a status orientated
maintenance scheme that effectively saves our customers money.
Service Level Agreements
Written agreement between our customer and a GEA Westfalia Separator Group
subsidiary that optimize the support levels we can provide you. We have the
following types of support systems available to you: Preventive, Predictive,
Proactive, Premium or Customized.
Customer Training
The technology behind our machines is becoming more and more complicated. One
technical development is followed by another and another and so on. This is
particularly applicable to leading innovative companies such as ours. This is why we
place great emphasis on modern training approaches with the aim of dealing with
your own practical situations. We work closely with our customers to provide
operators and machinery mechanics with the latest knowledge required for achieving
this high level of added value.

Factory Rebuilt Machines
If our customers are looking for used separators and decanters in not just
reconditioned but in First- Class quality, with high running reliability, an expected long
service life and the know-how of the manufacturer, then they have found the right
partner in us. This level of service is only available within the characteristics of a
market leader with the expert knowledge gained from decades of experience in the
construction of separators and decanters.
Applied Consulting
Service consulting is a fundamental step taken in the direction of optimizing and

adjusting operations to take the next step to using state-of-the-art technology and
become leaders in meeting the requirements of our customers markets and his own
customers.
This is the reason that we bring all the tools along with the latest technical knowledge
and our experience in problem analysis, evaluations and complex problem solving to
help meet the challenges we both face.

Customer: Vard Soeviknes Project-/Order-No.: 30015328 / 1452321096
Location: EP09 / EP10 Project-title: CU E5 - LO

GEA Westfalia Separator
Equipment List
Order-No.: 1452321096
Project - title: CU E5 - LO
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 16.10.2014 Dept.: 2321
Type: CU Corr. Drawing: P1452321096-9913-PID010B Belongs to:
Repl for: --- Repl. by: --- Std. checked: ---
Explanations:
Priority(A): Procurement (B): Scope of supply (C):
N = Obligatory M = Must be obtained from Westfalia L = Scope of supply by WS
E = Recommended K = May be obtained from Westfalia S = Supplied by client
P = Possible Z = Supplied by client F = to be removed
U = --- V = --- W = loose supply
Created Date: 21.02.2014 Checked Date: 21.02.2014 Approved Date: Document No.: Revison: Page:
By: 2321-CE By: 2321-CL By: P1452321096-9913-DVL010B B 1/4
Copyright. © All rights reserved Release: 01.01.00 / 2014-04-24

FilePath:sv42080oel0191\CustomX\Projekte_Compass\30015328_B_LO-ME_13.59.005.393.00.1_03\1\\

Equipment List
ID Quantity Description Size/Type Power Comments Part-No. A B C
Usage Nominal Bore PID Code
10-1-001 1 Pcs Separator OSE 5-91-037/4 --- N M L
10-1-001/M1 1 Pcs Motor Frame size 100/112 N M L
10-3-001 1 Pcs Gear Pump KF 8 9990-0258-839 N M W

DN 20
10-5-001 1 Pcs Electric Preheater 4708 9990-0258-836 N M L
DN25
10-7-003 1 Pcs Safety Valve 67.961/6bar 0018-7445-400 N M L
G1/2"
10-7-005 1 Pcs Throttle Valve belongs to 10-7-006 N M L
DN 25
10-7-006 1 Pcs 3/2-Way Feed Valve Assembly 0018-7621-000 N M L
DN 25
10-8-001 1 Pcs Y-Strainer 0018-6125-210 N M L
DN20
10-9-003 1 Pcs Temperature Limiter TAHH installed in Pre-Heater N M L
10-9-004 1 Pcs Temperature Limiter TC installed in Pre-Heater N M L
10-9-005 1 Pcs Resistance Thermometer TE 0001-1579-400 N M L

1/2"
10-9-006 1 Pcs Resistance Thermometer 2 x PT 100 TE 0001-1579-400 N M L
1/2" belongs to 10-7-006
10-9-009 1 Pcs Flowmeter RgG 63-1 FI 0001-1701-600 N M L


Equipment List
10-9-010 1 Pcs Resistance Thermometer TE installed in Motor N M L
10-9-011 1 Pcs Current Transformer TAI 233 IAL 0005-0624-220 N M L
10-9-014 1 Pcs Pressure Transmitter NAE PT 0005-1529-300 N M L

1/4"
10-9-016 1 Pcs Thermometer 174 TI 0001-1731-600 N M L
10-9-017 1 Pcs Thermometer 174 TI 0001-1731-600 N M L
10-9-023 1 Pcs Speed Control SIS 0005-0868-000 N M L
11-7-001 1 Pcs Non-Return Flap TD 0018-6282-600 N M L

1/2"
11-9-001 1 Pcs Pressure Gauge 213.40 / 0..40bar PI 0001-1572-600 N M L
1/4"
11-9-002 1 Pcs Pressure Transmitter NAE PT 0005-1529-300 N M L
1/4"
12-7-001 1 Pcs Non-Return Flap belongs to 10-7-006 N M L
DN 25
18-7-002 1 Pcs Solenoid Valve 0018-7621-600 N M L
1/4" belongs to 10-7-006
19-7-002 1 Pcs Ball Valve 0018-1763-630 N M L

3/4" belongs to 19-7-003
19-7-003 1 Pcs Solenoid Valve Assembly compl. 0018-7614-000 N M L

3/4"


Equipment List
19-7-004 1 Pcs 2/2-Way Solenoid Valve belongs to 19-7-003 N M L

1/2"
19-7-005 1 Pcs 2/2-Way Solenoid Valve belongs to 19-7-003 N M L
1/4"
19-8-001 1 Pcs Y-Strainer belongs to 19-7-003 N M L
3/4"
19-9-001 1 Pcs Pressure Gauge 213.40 / 0..10bar PI 0001-1572-600 N M L
belongs to 19-7-003
90-9-001 1 Pcs Level Switch Liquitec OL LSHH 0005-1475-010 N M L

R1"
90-9-002 1 Pcs Level Switch Liquitec OL LSHH 0005-1475-010 N M L
R1"
92-3-001 1 Pcs Diaphragm Pump P1/AALLL/BNS/VT/ABN/0246 8078-9200-110 N M L
1/2"
92-7-001 1 Pcs Gate Valve 0018-1408-650 N M L
1/2"
92-7-002 1 Pcs Non-Return Valve TD 0018-6282-600 N M L
1/2"
98-7-001 1 Pcs Compressed Air Control Assembly C06-K10 PCV 0018-8303-560 N M L
1/4"
98-7-002 1 Pcs 3/2-Way Solenoid Valve Type 6014P 0018-7346-840 N M L
1/4"

Customer: Project-/Order-No.:
Vard Soeviknes 30015328 / 1452321096
Location: Project-title:
EP09 / EP10 CU E5 - LO GEA Westfalia Separator
Process Condition Data Sheet
Order overview
Hull No.: IMO No.: Classification: Project No.: Order No.:
Oil to be processed
Application: LO-ME
Viscosity:
Density: g/ml15°C
Inlet temperature: °C
Separating temperature: °C
Effec.throughput capacity: l/h
Separator
Type: OSE 5-91-037/4
Operation mode: none
Ejection method: total
Clean oil discharge: 1 bar g
Finish color:
Total weight: 155 kg
Bowl speed: 12000 rpm
Bowl weight: 30 kg
Separator motor
Type: Frame size 100/112
Output: 4 kW
Speed: 3600 rpm
IP class: 55
Weight: 25 kg
Feed Pump
Kind : geartype
Type:
Rated capacity: l/h
Suction height: 4 mWS (0,39 Bar)
Delivery height: 20 mWS (1,96 Bar)
Output: kW
IP class: 55
Weight: kg
Heating Medium: Electric

Heater type: 4708
Power requirement: 18 kW
Stages: 2x9
IP class: 54
Created Date: Checked Date: Approved Date: Document No.: Revison: Page:
21.02.2014 21.02.2014 P1452321096-9913-PDS010B B 1/2
By: 2321-CE By: 2321-CL By:
Customer: Project-/Order-No.:
Vard Soeviknes 30015328 / 1452321096
Location: Project-title:
EP09 / EP10 CU E5 - LO GEA Westfalia Separator
Process Condition Data Sheet
Ambient Conditions
Ambient temperature: +45°C
Humidity: up to 92%
Atmospheric pressure: up to 1000 m Above Sea Level
Electrical Supply
Control unit type: D10 / Final color:
Infeed voltage: Volt
Frequency: Hz
Valve operating voltage: DC
Control Voltage: Volt
IP class: 54
Weight: See Circuit Diagram - Arrangement drawing
Operating water
Hardness: < 55°C 12° dH
> 55°C 6° dH
Chloride Ions: < 100 mg/l
PH - Value: 6,5 - 7,5
Temperature: +10°C up to +85°C
Feed Pressure: 3 - 10 bar (min.3bar)
Required Capacity: 0,5 l/h
Consumption / Ejection: 3-4l
Compressed Air
Standard operating compressed air pressure: min. 3 bar / max. 10 bar
Temperature: 10°C - 20°C
Consumption: min. 6 Nm³/h
Adjustments and set points

Type P&ID tag no. Set points
Inlet temperature controller TC *0-9-007 °C

Inlet temperature alarm high TAH *0-9-006 10°C
Inlet temperature alarm low TAL *0-9-006 -10°C
Water pressure reducer PCV *9-7-003 3 - 10 bar g
Pressure alarm low PAL (Clean oil discharge) *1-9-002 1 bar
Pressure alarm high PAH (Clean oil discharge) *1-9-002 3 bar
Pressure transmitter PT (Sludge monitoring system) *0-9-014 1 bar
bar
Created Date: Checked Date: Approved Date: Document No.: Revison: Page:
21.02.2014 21.02.2014 P1452321096-9913-PDS010B B 2/2
By: 2321-CE By: 2321-CL By:
Westfalia Separator
Mechanical Separation
Mineraloil Systems GmbH
Division
Instruction Manual
No.: 8555-9001-010
Edition: 1207
Designation: Control system for separators with self-cleaning bowl
Model: D10
Westfalia Separator
2 Mineraloil Systems GmbH
TRANSLATION OF THE ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION MANUAL

the documentation. They can be sent to
Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH
Werner-Habig-Str. 1
D-59302 Oelde
© Westfalia Separator
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
Mineraloil Systems GmbH 3
We s tfa lia S e p a ra to r
Min e ra lo il S ys te m s Gm b H
Mechanical Separation
Division
Type
............................................................................................
Type
Prüf-Nr.
............................................................................................
Control No.
Bemessungsspannung
......... V, 3/AC ................. Hz
Nominal voltage
Steuerspannung
.............. V AC ................. Hz ............... V DC
Control voltage
Volllaststrom
................... A
Full-load current
Bemessungsstrom
(größter Motor/Verbraucher)
................... A
Nominal current
(largest motor/consumer)
Kurzschlussausschaltvermögen Icn
................. kA
Short-circuit breaking capacity
Schaltplan-Nr.
.........................................................................
Wiring diagram No.
Programm-Nr.
.........................................................................
Program No.
Part-No.
.........................................................................
Part No.
A company of GEA Group
Installations- und Schutzmaßnahmen sind nach den Bestimmungen des VDE bzw.
des zuständigen EVU auszuführen.
Installation and protective measures are to be taken in accordance with national and
local electric rules and regulations.
This page must be filled in by the user.

Please enter the data from the nameplate.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
For your safety

This avoids damage to the separator, the control system and other
equipment.
symbol -
mation which help to better understand the separator, the control sys-
tem or plant components and the processes.

tionally to the operation of the separator. The plant operator must en-
sure compliance with these regulations.
• When operating electrical apparatus, certain parts carry danger-

ous voltage.
Before working in electrical components, take adequate preventive
measures according to the national provisions (in Germany in accord-
ance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verein Deutscher El-
ektrotechnik / Association of German Electrical Engineering) or of the
local electric power company.
Non-compliance with the protective measures can result in serious
damage to persons or property.
Any work on electrical components may only be carried out by an au-
thorized electrician.
• Only qualified or authorized specialized staff may operate, main-

tain and repair the separator and the control system.
Corresponding training courses take place in the manufacturer’s plant
or are held on site by the manufacturer.

The instructions in the separator and control system and manuals
must be followed.
Problem-free and safe operation is conditional on correct transport,
storage, installation and assembly as well as careful operation and
maintenance.
in these manuals may not be carried out.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
• Operate the separator only in accordance with agreed process

and operating parameters
• Maintain the separator

as specified in the separator manual.
• Carry out safety checks on the separator,

as described in the chapter "Safety precautions" in the separator man-
ual.
• Liability for the function of the machine passes to the owner.

Liability for the function of the machine passes unconditionally to the
owner or operator irrespective of existing warranty periods in so far as
the machine is improperly maintained or serviced by persons other
than Westfalia Separator service personnel or if the machine is not
applied in accordance with the intended use.
Westfalia Separator shall not be liable for damage which occurs as a
result of non-observance of the above. Warranty and liability condi-
tions in the Conditions of Sale and Delivery of Westfalia Separator are
not extended by the above.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
1.1 Preface................................................................................................... 10
1.2 Correct usage ........................................................................................ 11
1.4 Safety markings ..................................................................................... 13
1.4.1 Safety markings and their meaning ....................................................... 14
1.5 Operations on the control system .......................................................... 16
1.5.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel ....................... 16
1.5.2 Spare part requirements ........................................................................ 17
1.5.3 Electrical installation .............................................................................. 17
1.5.4 Operation ............................................................................................... 18
1.5.5 Shut-down and “Emergency-Off” ........................................................... 19
1.5.6 Maintenance and repair ......................................................................... 20
1.6 Explosion protection .............................................................................. 21
1.6.1 Classification of the centrifuge / plant .................................................... 21
1.6.2 Obligations of the operator .................................................................... 22
1.6.3 Standards and guidelines ...................................................................... 22
1.7 Care instructions .................................................................................... 24
1.8 Storage .................................................................................................. 24
1.8.1 After delivery .......................................................................................... 24
1.9 Disposal ................................................................................................. 24
2 Description 25
2.1 Function ................................................................................................. 26

2.2 Performance features ............................................................................ 27
2.3 Areas of application ............................................................................... 27
2.4 Functional layout diagram...................................................................... 28
2.5 Technical data ....................................................................................... 29
2.5.1 Control Unit D10 .................................................................................... 29
2.5.2 Control cabinet ....................................................................................... 31
2.6 Digital inputs and outputs ...................................................................... 32
2.7 Analog inputs and outputs (4 – 20 mA) ................................................. 33
2.7.1 Special versions ..................................................................................... 33
2.8 Configuration ......................................................................................... 34
2.8.1 Front view .............................................................................................. 34
2.8.2 Interior view............................................................................................ 35
3 Operation 37
3.1 Getting acquainted with the operating elements ................................... 38

3.1.1 Function keys ......................................................................................... 39
3.1.2 System keys........................................................................................... 41
3.1.3 Softkeys F1 – F4 .................................................................................... 41
3.1.4 Parameter entries .................................................................................. 42
3.2 Switching-on the control unit.................................................................. 43
3.3 Password protection .............................................................................. 44
3.4 Program sequence diagram .................................................................. 45
3.5 Process data overview (Home) ............................................................. 46
3.6 User settings .......................................................................................... 50
3.6.1 Calling up user settings ......................................................................... 50
3.6.2 User timings ........................................................................................... 52
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.6.3 Timer lists 1 and 2 ................................................................................. 54

3.6.4 Counters ................................................................................................ 55
3.6.5 Analog inputs (AI) .................................................................................. 59
3.6.6 Analog outputs (AO) .............................................................................. 63
3.6.7 Input list.................................................................................................. 64
3.6.8 Output list ............................................................................................... 64
3.6.9 PID controller ......................................................................................... 65
3.6.10 Time recording ....................................................................................... 68
3.6.11 Alarm counters ....................................................................................... 70
3.6.12 Alarm memory ....................................................................................... 72
3.6.13 Maintenance .......................................................................................... 73
3.6.14 Volume (option) ..................................................................................... 74
3.6.15 Service information ................................................................................ 77
3.6.16 Date and time ........................................................................................ 78
3.6.17 Separator settings .................................................................................. 79
3.6.18 Contrast ................................................................................................. 84
3.6.19 Language ............................................................................................... 84
3.6.20 Speed monitoring (option) ..................................................................... 86
3.7 Changing the Micro Memory Card (MMC) ............................................. 88
3.8 Memory reset ......................................................................................... 89
3.8.1 Setting the jumper .................................................................................. 89
3.8.2 CPU reset .............................................................................................. 90
4 Maintenance and servicing 91
4.1 Accident prevention ............................................................................... 92

4.2 Removing faults ..................................................................................... 93
5 Installation and connection 95
5.1 Installation of the control system ........................................................... 96

5.2 Connecting the control system .............................................................. 97
5.3 Centralised control via potential-free contacts....................................... 98
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
1.1 Preface................................................................................................... 10
1.2 Correct usage ........................................................................................ 11
1.4 Safety markings ..................................................................................... 13
1.5 Operations on the control system .......................................................... 16
1.5.4 Operation ............................................................................................... 18
1.5.5 Shut-down and “Emergency-Off” ........................................................... 19
1.6 Explosion protection .............................................................................. 21
1.6.1 Classification of the centrifuge / plant .................................................... 21
1.6.2 Obligations of the operator .................................................................... 22
1.6.3 Standards and guidelines ...................................................................... 22
1.7 Care instructions .................................................................................... 24
1.8 Storage .................................................................................................. 24
1.8.1 After delivery .......................................................................................... 24
1.9 Disposal ................................................................................................. 24
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
1.1 Preface
Equipment documentation
taining and repairing the control sys-
tem must have read and understood
the documentation.
plete, kept near to the installation
and be readily accessible to the op-
erators. It must be available to the
operators at all times!
Fig. 1
Nameplate (inside the control cabi-

net)
• For possible further inquiries please
state:
– type (1)
– control no. (2)
• To ensure fast and correct pro-
cessing, please state when ordering
spare parts:
– type (1)
– control no. (2)
– circuit-diagram no. (3)
Fig. 2
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
1.2 Correct usage
• is used to ensure automatic ejection and process monitoring of mineral oil

The control system
• is rated in accordance with the method of application of the separator agreed

separators of the OSD and OSE series.
with Westfalia Separator. Refer to the data sheet and contractual agreements.
The electronic control system triggers total ejections of the bowl at adjustable in-
tervals with or without displacement of the liquid from the bowl.
The following ejections can be selected for the separators stated:
– Partial ejections
Partial ejection of the bowl means partial emptying of the solids space of
the bowl. The product feed is shut off during partial ejection.
– Total ejections
In the case of a total ejection, virtually the complete bowl content is emptied
and collected in the solids vessel after closing the product valve and draw-
ing off the residual liquid.
Never initiate a total ejection when the separator is vibrating strongly
(bowl unbalance)!
– Pre-selectable partial ejections followed by a total ejection
For perfect clarifying efficiency and low ejection losses on the separator, the
time-dependent program cycle requires the solids content in the feed material
not to vary too much.
The separators with the UNITROL system have two inbuilt monitoring functions:
– WMS (Water content Monitoring System)
– SMS (Sludge Space Monitoring System)
Separators of the D / E generation can be upgraded for one-stage WMS/SMS
operation.
For details concerning specific functions refer to the corresponding chapters of
this manual.
Intended use involves

• adhering to these safety instructions and to the instruction manuals for the
control system and for the separator
• paying attention to safety markings in/on the control cabinet
• adhering to the data on the nameplate, e.g. the rated voltage
The contractually agreed conditions agreed with Westfalia Separator on the in-
tended use of the control system must be passed on to the operating personnel
by the plant operator.
Any operating mode deviating from this is not intended use and can result
in severe damage to property and persons!
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator

Any use that deviates from the intended use is considered to be non-
compliant.
The control system may not be operated by:

• Persons who have not read and understood these basic safety precautions.
• Persons who have not read and understood the instruction manuals of the
control system and of the separator.
• Persons who have not been briefed on proper and correct operation.
• Persons who have not been adequately trained.
• Persons who have not reached the minimum age of 18 years.
The separator may not be operated:

• while maintenance and repair work is being done on the separator plant
• in case of insufficient air or water supply
• in case of impermissibly low supply voltage
• by persons who are not adequately trained.
• when the control system is operated with spare parts which do not come from
Westfalia Separator.
• can cause severe damage to the control system, the separator and other
Non-compliance with the intended use
• can endanger the operator and other persons!

plant components!
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
1.4 Safety markings

The safety markings (adhesive and plastic labels) are attached to all control sys-
tems on the front panel and inside the corresponding control cabinet in such a
way that they are clearly visible.
All safety markings on the control system and plant components must always be
in perfect condition.
Fig. 3 Safety markings on a control unit (example)
Safety markings
1 Configuration plan plates
2 Electrical markings
3 Warning pictograms
4 Maker's nameplate
5 Nameplate
The texts and part numbers of the safety markings change depending on the
languages required by the customer.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator

The following safety markings are attached inside/onto the control cabinet as
adhesive labels.
Before carrying out work, dis-

connect power to all compo-
nents of the monitoring system!
and unintended start-up of the separa-
tor!

separator and electrical plant com-
ponents:
• Make sure the separator is at a
standstill.
Fig. 4 • Switch off all electrical appliances
from being accidentally switched on.
Danger due to electrical voltage!

Before working on electrical con-

trol/plant components:
via the main switch.
Fig. 5
CAUTION:
Th e p a rts m a rke d in th is wa y c a n c a rry vo lta g e e ve n wh e n th e m a in
s witc h is o ff!
• Lock the separator/plant to prevent it from being accidentally switched on.
• Take adequate preventive measures according to the national provisions (in
Deutscher Elektrotechnik / Association of German Electrical Engineers) or of
the local electric power company.
specialists).
P ic to g ram s with wa rnin g te xt

Pictograms can be meaningfully supplemented as illustrated in the two following
examples:
– with warning text (Voltage is also present . . .),
– with signal word (ATTENTION!) and warning text.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
Be i a u s g e s c h a lte te m S o u s te n s io n m ê m e
Danger through external voltage!
Ha u p ts c h a lte r e n p o s itio n d ’a rrê t d e
u n te r S p a n n u n g ! l’in te rru p te u r p rin c ip a l !
Vo lta g e a ls o p re s e n t Co n e l in te rru p to r
Voltage also present when main switch
wh e n m a in
s witc h is tu rn e d o ff!
p rin c ip a l d e s c o n e c ta d o s e
e n c u e n tra b a jo te n s ió n !
is turned off!
CAUTION:
The circuits marked in this way can
switch is off!
Fig. 6 Example 1
ACHTUNG! Danger through external voltage!

Auc h b e i a us g e s c ha lte te m
Ha up ts c ha lte r kö nne n
o ra ng e fa rb ig e Le itung e n
unte r S p a nnung s te he n.
ATTENTION!
ATTENTION! Also in case of switched off main isola-
Als o in c a s e o f s witc he d o ff
m a in is o la to r o ra ng e c o lo ure d c o re s
tor orange coloured cores can be un-
c a n b e u nd e r vo lta g e . der voltage.
ATTENTION!
Lo rs q ue le c o m m uta te ur p rinc ip a l
e s t é te int le s file s o ra ng e
p e uve nt ê tre s o us te ns io n. CAUTION:
switch is off!
Fig. 7 Example 2
No te :
Orange coloured leads are fitted as standard at Westfalia Separator.
Different colour leads can be fitted if requested by the customer!

earth.
Fig. 8
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
1.5 Operations on the control system
The control system works reliably, pro-

vided that it is operated and main-
tained in accordance with our operat-
ing instructions.
Fig. 9

• Electrical installation
• Operation
• Shut-down and “Emergency-Off”
• Maintenance and repair

Operating, maintaining or repairing the separator, the control system or the sep-
arator plant requires specialized knowledge!
CAUTION!


who
ing.

The operator of the separator, the control system or the separator plant

Westfalia Separator offers an extensive range of training and advanced training

courses. For more in-depth information, please check back with Westfalia Sepa-
rator or one of their authorised agencies.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator

Separator.
– safety risks,
ranty claims.

cian!
Separator.
Fig. 11

– Low-voltage guideline 73/23/EWG
– Electro-magnetic compatibility 89/336/EWG.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
1.5.4 Operation
• Refer to chapter “operation”.

• Note nameplate.
Check the rated and control voltage
for conformity with the connection
data of the control system.
Fig. 12
When unusual noises or vibrations oc-
• Immediately shut down the separa-

cur on the separator:
tor with filled bowl via “emergency-
• Never trigger a bowl ejection!

off”.
• Evacuate the room.

• Do not re-enter the room until the
centrifuge has come to a standstill.
Fig. 13
• The bowl is not allowed to run with-

out liquid supply for more than 15
minutes, as otherwise it would result
in overheating of the bowl material.
• Activate the cooling-water program

For energy plants:
(see section 3.6.17 – Separator set-
• Activate automatic shut-down (see

tings).
section 3.6.17 – Separator settings).

Fig. 14
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
1.5.5 Shut-down and “Emergency-Off”

In order to be able to be switch off all drives in a hazardous situation or in the
case of abnormal operating states, the control cabinet – depending on the ver-
sion – is equipped with:
– an emergency-off switch or
– a min switch with emergency-off function.
The separator is shut down by means of external and internal emergency-off
switches while performing two total ejections.
When the main switch with emergency-off function is activated, power is cut off
to the entire control system. There will be no bowl ejection.
Note:
Provided the separator is equipped accordingly, the shut-down procedure can
be accelerated by a pneumatic brake and safety-water function.
• For shut-down refer to the chapter

"Operation" of the start-up and shut-
down manual.
Fig. 15
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
1.5.6 Maintenance and repair

Timely maintenance of the control system and the replacement of worn or dam-
aged plant components is essential to ensure safe operation.
Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia Separator. Otherwise, safety
risks may arise (see section 1.5.2).
Maintenance and repair work may only be carried out to the extent described in
this instruction manual.
Maintenance and repair work not described in this manual may only be
carried out by the manufacturer or by "repair shops" authorized by the
manufacturer.
We recommend having the control system regularly checked by our specialists.
These checks help to maintain the operating safety and avoid unexpected
downtime.
Before carrying out maintenance

and repair work:
CAUTION! Risk of injury due to

electrical voltage and unintended
start-up of the separator!

standstill!
Possibilities for checking standstill
are described in the separator man-
ual.
Fig. 16
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
1.6 Explosion protection
• Strictly adhere to the prevailing local

rules and regulations for operating in
potentially explosive areas.
An area is "potentially explosive"
when there is (or must be expected)
an explosive atmosphere in such a
volume that specific preventive
measures concerning design, con-
struction, and the use of centrifuges
and control systems are required.
Fig. 17
• The operation of centrifuges / control systems in "zone 0" areas, i.e.

where a dangerous explosive atmosphere is prevailing continuously or
for long periods or frequently, is not permitted!
• Operation of the centrifuges / control systems in
– areas of “zone 1”, i.e. in areas in which dangerous explosive atmosphere is
occasionally present,
– areas of “zone 2”, i.e. in areas in which dangerous explosive atmosphere
are rarely and briefly present,
is only admissible when the centrifuge / control system is equipped for use in
explosion-hazarded areas.
• Centrifuges installed in explosion-hazarded rooms can be operated by means
of a control panel installed in the vicinity of the centrifuge. The control system
is then installed outside the explosion-hazarded room.
• Only units designed for application in "ex" zones are allowed to be operated in
potentially explosive areas.
• All the electrical apparatus of the centrifuge/plant, i.e. motor controls, valve
controls, electric heaters, heater control units, electrically operated valves
must be protected accordingly or, if in standard design, must be installed in a
separate room outside the explosion-hazarded area.
• Supervisory equipment on the centrifuge such as pressure guards or transmit-
ters, flow detectors and temperature switches, pressure switches, must be
connected to intrinsically safe Eex(i) electric circuits.
• In the area close to the centrifuge/control system, take the preventive
measures provided under "primary" explosion protection” (ventilation, etc.).
• Carry out voltage equalization before operating the centrifuge / control sys-
tem.
1.6.1 Classification of the centrifuge / plant

The centrifuge/plant complies with the requirements of Group II, Equipment
Category 3 in accordance with the Directive 94/9/EG. The respective tempera-
ture class is specified in the technical documents.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
1.6.2 Obligations of the operator

The operator
• must assess the explosion risks and carry out the zone classification.
• must ensure that the centrifuge/installation is correctly erected and tested be-
fore commissioning.
• is responsible for the safety aspects of his centrifuge/installation.
The correct and proper condition of the centrifuge/installation must be main-
tained by regular testing and maintenance.
1.6.3 Standards and guidelines

The following standards, guidelines and regulations must be observed when us-
ing equipment in explosion-hazarded areas:
• Directive 94/9/EG (ATEX 95)

Equipment and protective systems for correct usage in explosion-hazarded
areas.
This Directive describes fundamental safety requirements and test proce-
dures for application outside of explosion-hazarded areas, which, however,
with regard to explosion hazards, are necessary for the safe operation of
equipment and safety systems or contribute to it.
• Directive 1999/92/EG (ATEX 137)

Protection of safety and health of the employees when working in explosion-
hazarded areas.
This Directive is directed at the operator and contains, among other things,
the necessary specifications and definitions for zone classification required for
assessment.
• EN 1127-1
Explosive atmospheres – explosion protection – Part 1 Fundamentals and
methodology
• EN 50 014
General provisions
• EN 50018 or IEC 60 079-1

Electrical apparatus for explosion-hazarded areas – flameproof enclosure “d”
Basic principle:
Parts which can ignite an explosive atmosphere are incorporated in a housing
which, in the event of an explosion of an explosive mixture, withstands the
pressure and which prevents transfer of the explosion to the atmosphere sur-
rounding the housing.
Main application:
Switching devices and switchboards, control switches and display units, con-
trol systems, motors, transformers, heating devices, lamps
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
• EN 50019 or IEC 60 079-7

Electrical apparatus for explosion-hazarded areas – type of protection “e”
Basic principle:
Here, additional measures are implemented in order to increase the safety
margin to prevent the possibility of inadmissibly high temperatures and the
occurrence of sparks and arcs in the inside or at the outside of components of
electrical apparatus which do not otherwise occur in normal operation.
Main application:
Terminal and connector boxes, control boxes for fitting ex-components which
have a different type of protection and lamps.
• EN 50020 or IEC 60 079-11

Electrical safety for explosion-hazarded areas – intrinsically safe “i”.
Basic principle:
The apparatus used in explosion-hazarded areas contains only intrinsically
safe circuits. A circuit is intrinsically safe when no spark and no thermal effect
which occur under defined test conditions (which include normal operation
and certain error conditions) can cause ignition of a certain explosive atmos-
phere.
Main application:
Measuring and control technology, communication technology, sensors, actu-
ators.
• EN 60079-10 or VDE 0165 – Part 101

Electrical apparatus for explosion-hazarded areas -
Part 101 “Classification of the explosion-hazarded areas”
• EN 60079-14 or VDE 0165 – Part 1

Electrical installations in explosion-hazarded areas
• EN 60079-17 or VDE 0165 – Part 10

Part 10 “Testing and maintenance of electrical installations in explosion-
hazarded areas”
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
1.7 Care instructions
ATTENTION!
The surface of the control unit (display, keypad) must not be cleaned with ag-
gressive or acidic media (pH 6-8, tenside content < 5 %, aroma-free, ethanol-
free).
1.8 Storage
ATTENTION!
Improper and incorrect storage of the control system can damage or de-
stroy its components.
Store accessories like spare parts and tools properly!
• The control unit and accessories must be stored dry, dust-free, vibration and
frost-free.
IMPORTANT: Outdoor exposure is not admissible!
• Protect from excessive heat!

Recommended storage temperature: + 5 to + 45 °C (41 – 113 °F)
1.8.1 After delivery
• store the control system in its original transport packaging.

If the control system is not installed immediately after arrival,
Recommended storage temperature: + 5 to +50 °C (41 – 122 °F)
IMPORTANT:
A storage time of more than 12 months of the control system is only allowed
after consulting the manufacturer.
1.9 Disposal
When the equipment is no more useful or the control system has reached the
end of its service life, the operator will be responsible for appropriate, envi-
ronmentally friendly disposal of its components and materials such as
– metal,
– caoutchouc and rubber
– plastics,
– glass,
– electric and electronic apparatus.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION!
Be sure to adhere to applicable environmental protection legislation!
More information on disposal matters can be obtained from local authorities.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
2 Description
2.1 Function ................................................................................................. 26

2.2 Performance features ............................................................................ 27
2.3 Areas of application ............................................................................... 27
2.4 Functional layout diagram...................................................................... 28
2.5 Technical data ....................................................................................... 29
2.5.1 Control Unit D10 .................................................................................... 29
2.5.2 Control cabinet ....................................................................................... 31
2.6 Digital inputs and outputs ...................................................................... 32
2.7 Analog inputs and outputs (4 – 20 mA) ................................................. 33
2.7.1 Special versions ..................................................................................... 33
2.8 Configuration ......................................................................................... 34
2.8.1 Front view .............................................................................................. 34
2.8.2 Interior view............................................................................................ 35
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
2.1 Function
The illuminated four-line LC display provides information on the functional condi-
tions or troubles prevailing on the separator and - depending on program ad-
justment - visualises the corresponding process data.
Besides the control cabinet and the control unit, the control system comprises
all complete line fittings which, due to built-in electrically actuated equipment,
are subject to the control or supervision by the control system. These include:
– dirty-oil supply
– water supply
– operating-water connection
With UNITROL, they also include
– circulation and water discharge valve
– water detector (WMS sensor)
– pressure transmitter for the bypass line in SMS mode
On special order (optional):

– PT100 sensor in a two-wire circuit for min./max monitoring in the dirty oil
supply line
– level switch for monitoring the water discharge
– process-dependent control of an external feed pump
– level switch for monitoring the solids vessel
– min./max level switch for controlling a solids pump
– klaxon for audible alarm-signalling
The standard control system is designed for individual control of centrifugal
separators or clarifiers.
If required, in case of two-stage HFO treatment, series operation can be prese-
lected. For this purpose the piping between the separators will have to be laid
out accordingly, in order to connect the MPI interfaces of at least two control
systems.
The control system is built into the door of the control cabinet ready to be
hooked up and programmed for the required control task.
The operator is not authorized to carry out program modifications.
The operator can make the following settings by means of the keypad:
– machine-specific program selection
– timer value settings
– counter value settings
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
2.2 Performance features

The control unit features the following:
– display for machine monitoring and operation
– function keys with LED status signal
– control voltage 24 V
– high operational reliability
– long service life
– user program on Micro Memory Card (MMC)
2.3 Areas of application
Application Description
Single or serial (-91-) The separator is run in single or series opera-
tion (-91-).
Single or series (-01-) The separator is run with activated Water Con-
tent Monitoring System (-01-) (for more details
(Water Content Monitoring
refer to separator manual)
System)
Single or series (-02-) The separator is run in single or series opera-
tion (-01-).
Single or series (-01/36-) The separator is used for heavy fuel oil treat-
ment, with activated Water Content Monitoring
(WMS/SMS - HFO)
System (-01) and Solids Space Monitoring
System (-36-).
Single or series (-01/96-) The separator is used for lube-oil treatment,
with activated Water Content Monitoring Sys-
(WMS/SMS - LO)
tem (-01) and Solids Space Monitoring System
(-96-).
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
2.4 Functional layout diagram
Fig. 18
A Water
B Product discharge
C Product feed
1 Water pressure reducer

2 Feed assembly with solenoid valve for filling-, displacement-, and oper-
ating water
3 Control system and motor starter for separator
- Motor starter for feed pump
- Motor starter for solids pump
4 Terminal box (fitted to separator)
5 Water detector (WMS sensor)
6 Circuit valve
7 Pressure transmitter for solids-space monitoring
8 Water discharge valve
9 Pneumatic 3/2-way valve with manual override and solenoid valve for
control air (built into product feed to separator)
10 Pressure transmitter PSL for product discharge
11 Pressure transmitter PSH for product discharge
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
2.5 Technical data
2.5.1 Control Unit D10
Technical data
Dimensions 215 x 165 x 88 mm
(width x height x depth)
Installation / cutout dimensions 202 x 152 mm (tolerance +1 mm)
Weight 1.35 kg
Display, LED background illumina- LED-backlit 4-line LCD display, each line
tion with 20 digits and 5 mm high
Keypad Foil-protected keyboard,
23 keys with 11 integrated LEDs
Interfaces Standard MPI port for PG and network in-
tegration, P-bus for S7 extension modules
Supply voltage DC 24 V, range DC 20,4; DC 28.8 V
Reverse-polarity protected yes
Voltage cut-off > 20 ms
Current consumption (In) 2.4 A
Integrated RAM 48 kByte
Storage memory Plug-in Micro Memory Card (MMC)
Backup Ensured by Micro Memory Card (MMC) no
battery needed.
Configuration software Step 7, Version 5.1 and later; Service
Pack 4
HMI software Integrated in Step 7
Inputs 24 digital, DC 24 V
4 analog, 4-20 mA / 0-10 V
1 PT 100
Outputs 16 digital, 0.5 A each, sum current 4 A
2 analog, 4-20 mA
Safety standard DIN EN 61131-2/IEC 61131-2
Enclosure Front of unit: IP 65 according to
IEC 60529, NEMA 4X
Housing: IP 20 according to IEC 60529
Electromagnetic compatibility A according to EN 55011
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
Technical data
Climatic conditions Approved according to IEC 60068-2-1,
IEC 60068-2.2
Operation: 0 - 55 °C (32 - 131 °F) for vert i-
cal installation
Storage: -20 °C to +70 °C ( -4 to 158 °F)
Humidity: 5 - 95 % at 25 °C (77 °F)
Mechanical ambient conditions Vibrations during operation: Approved ac-
cording to IEC 60068-2-6, IEC 60068-2.6
Vibrations during storage/transport:
10 to 58 Hz, amplitude 0.075, 5 - 9 Hz
Shocking during operation: Half-sine:
150 m/s2 (15 g), 11 ms, 18 shocks
Shocking during storage/transport:
250 m/s2 (25 g), 6 ms, 1000 shocks
Fire resistance Edge connectors: FV2 according to IEC
60707
Headers: FV0 according to IEC 60707
Approvals CE (EC Directive EMV 89/336/EWG)
UL (Underwriters Laboratories UL 508)
CSA (Canadian Standard Association
C22.2 No.142)
Prototype technical- release tests GL (Germanischer Lloyd)
/ classification societies LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)
DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
BV (Bureau Veritas)
ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
RINA (Registro Italiano Navale)
NK (Nippon Kaigi Kyokai)
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
2.5.2 Control cabinet
Technical data
Connection voltage 115/230 V AC (±10 %) reversible
Frequency 50 to 60 Hz
Max. power consumption 100 VA
Control voltage 24 V DC
Lead-in wire fuse 16 A (slow-blow fuse)
Ambient temperature 0 to 55 °C (32 to 55.00 °C)
Housing Painted sheet steel, RAL 7032
Special design: stainless steel
Enclosure IP 55 (if appropriately fitted according to
chapter 5: "Installation and connection")
Dimensions 380 x 600 x 350 mm
(width x height x depth)
Cable entry from below, through cable glands
Electrical execution according to EN 60204-1 (lead-colour coding optional,
upon agreement)
Ambient conditions. 3C2 according to EN 60721-3-3
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
2.6 Dig ital in p u ts a n d o utpu ts
Designation Connection Function Terminal

Digital inputs DI 0.0 Separator in operation 1X2. 01/02
(DI) DI 0.1 Separator Fault 1X2. 03/04
DI 0.2 Spare –
DI 0.3 Spare –
DI 0.4 Spare –
DI 0.5 WMS-UNITROL 1X2. 11/12
DI 0.6 Spare –
DI 0.7 LSHH – solids vessel 1X2. 15/16
DI 1.0 Feed pump “Operation” 2K2 19/20
DI 1.1 Feed pump “Fault” 2Q2 21/22
DI 1.2 Solids pump “Operation” 5K1 23/24
DI 1.3 Solids pump “Fault” 5Q1 25/26
DI 1.4 LSH Solids vessel, for pump start 1X2. 27/28
DI 1.5 LSL Solids vessel, for pump stop 1X2. 29/30
DI 1.6 Vibration stage 1 1X2. 31/32
DI 1.7 Vibration stage 2 1X2. 33/34
DI 2.0 - DI 2.5 Spare –
DI 2.6 Limit switch, steam valve 1X2. 73/74
DI 2.7 Emergency-Off 3K1
Digital outputs DO 0.0 Product valve 1X2. 41/42
(DO)
DO 0.1 Water valve 1X2. 43/44
DO 0.2 Operating water valve 1X2. 45/46
DO 0.3 Steam valve / heater interlocking (option) 1X2. 47/48
DO 0.4 "UNITROL" circuit valve 1X2. 49/50

DO 0.5 "UNITROL" water discharge valve 1X2. 51/52
DO 0.6 Lamp test (option) –
DO 0.7 Collective alarm 1K11/1X2. 67/68
DO 1.0 Separator “Off” 1K12
DO 1.1 Feed pump “Off” 1K13
DO 1.2 Solids pump “Off” 1K14
DO 1.3 TSL (option) 1K15
DO 1.4 TSH (option) 1K16
DO 1.5 Brake (option) 1K17
DO 1.6 PID – open (option) 1K18
DO 1.7 PID – closed (option) 1K19
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
2.7 An a lo g in p u ts a n d o u tp u ts (4 – 20 m A)
Designation Connection Function Terminal

Analog inputs AI 01 Motor current and ejection monitoring 1U3 6/7
(AI)
AI 02 Clean-oil discharge 1U2 12+/13-
AI 03 SMS transmitter / water discharge 1X2. 61/63/SC
AI 04 PID controller for product temperature 1X2. 76/77
PT 100 PT-100 product temperature 1X2. 78/79
Analog outputs AO 0-I Motor current 1X2. 93/94/SC
(AO)
AO 1-I Temperature 1X2. 91/92/SC
2.7.1 Special versions

Special versions differing from the one described in this manual are available:
– The housing can have other dimensions.
– The housing can be made of stainless steel.
– Individual components of the control system can be integrated in a compact
cabinet (e.g. with separator motor control etc.) or in a central control sys-
tem.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
2.8 Configuration
The construction can vary depending on the delivery scope.
The control system is assembled ready for use, wired ready for hook-up and
conforms to the regulations of EN 60204.
2.8.1 Front view
Fig. 19
1 Lock
2 Control Unit D10
3 OFF/ON keys for separator
4 OFF/ON keys for feed pump
5 HAND/0/AUTOMATIC selector for solids pump (option)
6 Main switch
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
2.8.2 Interior view
Fig. 20
1 Isolating amplifier for analog output (option)

2 WMS (Water Content Monitoring S ystem) relay, if provided
3 Full-motor-protection module
4 Interface relay
5 Auxiliary contactor
6 Main contactor
7 Current transformer
8 Power supply for PLC (Programmable Logic Control) and valves
9 Terminal strip
10 Control transformer for heating and venting facilities (option)
11 Main switch
12 Control voltage transformer (option)
13 Motor protection switch
14 Safety cut-out
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3 Operation
3.1 Getting acquainted with the operating elements ................................... 38

3.1.1 Function keys ......................................................................................... 39
3.1.2 System keys........................................................................................... 41
3.1.3 Softkeys F1 – F4 .................................................................................... 41
3.1.4 Parameter entries .................................................................................. 42
3.2 Switching-on the control unit.................................................................. 43
3.3 Password protection .............................................................................. 44
3.4 Program sequence diagram .................................................................. 45
3.5 Process data overview (Home) ............................................................. 46
3.6 User settings .......................................................................................... 50
3.6.1 Calling up user settings ......................................................................... 50
3.6.2 User timings ........................................................................................... 52
3.6.3 Timer lists 1 and 2 ................................................................................. 54
3.6.4 Counters ................................................................................................ 55
3.6.5 Analog inputs (AI) .................................................................................. 59
3.6.6 Analog outputs (AO) .............................................................................. 63
3.6.7 Input list.................................................................................................. 64
3.6.8 Output list ............................................................................................... 64
3.6.9 PID controller ......................................................................................... 65
3.6.10 Time recording ....................................................................................... 68
3.6.11 Alarm counters ....................................................................................... 70
3.6.12 Alarm memory ....................................................................................... 72
3.6.13 Maintenance .......................................................................................... 73
3.6.14 Volume (option) ..................................................................................... 74
3.6.15 Service information ................................................................................ 77
3.6.16 Date and time ........................................................................................ 78
3.6.17 Separator settings .................................................................................. 79
3.6.18 Contrast ................................................................................................. 84
3.6.19 Language ............................................................................................... 84
3.6.20 Speed monitoring (option) ..................................................................... 86
3.7 Changing the Micro Memory Card (MMC) ............................................. 88
3.8 Memory reset ......................................................................................... 89
3.8.1 Setting the jumper .................................................................................. 89
3.8.2 CPU reset .............................................................................................. 90
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.1 Getting acquainted with the operating elements
6 1 2
Westfalia Separator AG
F1 F2 F3 F4
M
1 2 3 4 5
Process Process SERIES ESC

STOP START 1 2
Help
6 7 8 9 0
PID Home
EDIT ENTER
DIR
5 4 3
Fig. 21
The D10 control unit is built into the door of the control cabinet. The operating
interface consists of:
1 Soft keys F1 – F4 (depending on the current display)
2 Text display
3 System keys
4 Function keys
Numerical values can be entered when the EDIT key is actuated.
5 Status and fault indication
6 Operating mode switch (CPU start/stop)
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.1.1 Function keys

The function keys have a global function: The actions which can be triggered
are independent of the text shown in the display. They each incorporate an LED
which gives information on the state of the respective function.
Key Key designation Description

Separating program “Off” In separation mode, this key closes the feed valve and triggers
a bowl ejection.
On OSC/OSD separators two total ejections are performed au-
tomatically.
The LED lights up when the ejections are being performed.
Separating program “On” This key starts the separating program.
The feed valve is opened when the ejection program has end-
ed.
When the separating temperature falls below its min. level or
when level switch “LSHH solids vessel" responds, no program
start is possible.
The LED lights up when the ejection or separating program is
active.
Lamp test This key launches a function test of the LEDs incorporated in
the keys and of external signal lamps, if provided.
The LEDs for status and fault signalling are not tested.
Series operation When running HFO separators in series, two control systems
can be preselected for this mode within an MPI network. To ac-
tivate series operation, actuate the "SERIES" key on both con-
trol units.
The LED lights up when series operation is active.
Home/DIR 1. Jumping directly to the process page
(see chapter. 3.5 ".Process Data Overview (Home)")
2. Jumping directly to the user settings
(see chapter 3.6 “User settings")
Fault message page This key is to call up the page giving an overview of pending
fault signals, i.e. the alarm memory.
For a pending alarm signal, a remedy catalog can be retrieved
after having acknowledged with the ENTER key.
When the LED is flashing, information on current remedy opera-
tions can be checked by actuating the F1 key.
The LED will flash as long as a fault signal is queued.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator

PID controller Provided the plant is equipped accordingly, product feed and
temperature control can be activated while the “PID controller”
key is switched on.
The LED lights up when the control system is in automatic
mode.
For testing operations, first switch off the control system by
means of the “PID controller” key. In the corresponding screen
menu (see chapter 3.6.9 “PID control”) close/open the motor
control valve by means of soft key F2/F3.
Feed pump status This key has no function. The LED in the key shows the current
feed pump status:
– Continuous light: operation
– Slow flashing: post-running phase
– Quick flashing: motor-protection alarm
Solids pump status This key has no function. The LED in the key shows the current
solids pump status:
– Continuous light: operation
Separator status This key has no function. The LED in the key shows the current
separator status:
– Continuous light: Operation
– Slow flashing: start-up phase
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.1.2 S ys te m ke ys
Arrow up/down/right/left With these keys one can navigate across the menus.
If a menu has input fields the arrow keys are used to navigate
from one field to another. After the last input field only, the next
menu is selected.
The arrow keys allow to navigate throughout the alarms within
the alarm memory or on the signal level.
ESC (cancel) With this key, field entries can be undone as long as they have
not been confirmed with ENTER.
If the ESC key is pressed within a menu, the previous menu or
the signal level is accessed.
From the signal level jumping back is not possible.
ENTER With this key

• one can confirm and finalize an entry
• one can acknowledge an alarm signal
• one passes from the signal level to the image level
EDIT This key allows to modify parameters or timer/counter setpoints.

The LED lights up when the edit mode is active.
3.1.3 S o ftke ys F1 – F4
Softkeys The softkeys have local functions. The actions which can be
triggered depend on the text seen in the display and are at-
tributed to the corresponding images.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.1.4 Parameter entries

Numeric values, e.g. passwords or setpoint updates, are entered by means of
the function keys.
Fig. 22
The corresponding figure (1) is seen right-hand above the function key.
Note:
If, by mistake, you failed to press the EDIT key correctly before entering param-
eters, the function of the respective function key will be active. Then you might
change the current operating mode of the separator.
However, by pressing the mistakenly actuated key again, you return to the origi-
nal mode.
An entry can be made in a menu when the cursor is flashing.

Changing a value:
• Press the EDIT key; the LED in the EDIT key lights up.
• Enter the new value or the password by means of the function keys.
• Finish your entry by pressing the ENTER key.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.2 Switching-on the control unit
When you switch on the control unit

the adjacent initial display appears.
C7-613 Firmw.:V1.01
Bootl.:V1.01
> Startup <
Fig. 23
Required data is loaded from the Micro

Memory Card (MMC).
$ 002 transfer
> Downloading User-<

> Data <
Fig. 24
Then the unit runs up, showing the ad-

jacent display. The run-up time is ap-
Westfalia Separator
• Press the ENTER key.
prox. 3 minutes.
Mineraloil Systems
please press
>> ENTER <<
Fig. 25
An overview of all process data is dis-

played. From this overview the individ-
Step: OFF ual menus can be called up - refer to
Step: actual 0sec chapter 3.5 "Process data overview
Clean oil out 2.0bar (Home)".
Product Temp.: 93°C
Fig. 26
Note:
To avoid long run-up times the control unit should be under voltage even when
the separator is not used.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.3 Password protection

Certain entries and functions require prior entry of a password.
• Company-related basic settings
– Password Level 1
• Service
• Loading CPU data
When selecting these options you are requested to enter the required password.
Note:
You can obtain the passwords from Westfalia Separator.
When requested to enter the password
• Press the EDIT key.

proceed as follows:
Password login:
Level : 0 – The LED in the EDIT key lights
• Enter the password by means of the

Password: ...... up.
function keys.
Fig. 27

The password is accepted.
Password login: – A jump into password level 1 fol-
Level : 1
• Press the ENTER key for the se-
lows.
Password:.......
cond time.
– A jump back into the previous
• Actuate the arrow key, and the first

menu follows.
Fig. 28
password-protected menu appears.
If there is no operation made for two minutes, the program returns to entry level
0 (Logout). For further processing the password has to be re-entered anew.
ATTENTION!
Then, however, the menu then called up is not protected. This means that even
unauthorized persons can carry out changes in this menu.
To protect the control unit against unauthorized access you should return within
the menu until you are in the openly accessible menu area.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.4 P ro g ra m s e q u e n c e diag ra m
Separator has been

switched on
*1
"Bypass operation" "Standby"

Separation process is interrupted by Separator is at operating speed, sepa-
previous ejection program ration process can be started with the
preselected operating mode and/or se-
lected separator.
*1, *2
“Separate status”
Separation is started. The individual
program steps are processed with the
times set, depending on the selected
operating mode.
*1 or through external signal

*2 or through fault
Fig. 29
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.5 Process data overview (Home)

After having switched on the control
unit, acknowledged with the ENTER
Step: OFF
key, and after the run-up process, first
Step: actual 0sec the adjacent general overview ap-
Clean oil out 2.0bar
• The general overview can be ac-
pears.
Product Temp.: 93°C
cessed directly from any other menu
• From the main menu, more program

by means of the "Home" key.
Fig. 30
settings can be called up by means

of the “arrow down” key.
The individual program settings are
described on the following pages.
STATUS-WMS/SMS/PT2
PT2-actual: 4.7bar
PT2-Transm: HIGH
WMS-Sensor: Oil
Fig. 31
Sep-Type:OSD-6
Motor current: 0.0A
Speed: 0rpm
Mode:Single -01/36
Fig. 32
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
Step:
Step: actual 0sec
Clean oil out 2.0bar
Product-Temp.: 93°C
Fig. 33
Firs t m e n u lin e
The current status within the program cycle is displayed.
S e c o n d m e n u lin e
Depending on the selected operating mode or separator, the current program
cycle (“step“) and the respective countdown are shown in the display.
The subsequent display texts can be shown as described in the following table
(also refer to separate documentation “Settings and faults”
Display Meaning
Off Separator is not switched on.
The separator is in its start-up phase; no process
Run-up
start is possible.
Circulation mode: The feed valve is in recircula-
Circulation mode tion mode. The separator is in its run-up or fault
mode, or the process has not been launched.
Waiting The separating process has been launched.
The bowl content is displaced without loss by
Displacement
opening the displacement water valve.
Waiting after displace- Displacement is followed by a 5 seconds’ waiting
ment period.
The solids space of the bowl is emptied by actu-
Total ejection
ating the operating-water valve.
The speed drop occurring during ejection is
Speed recovery
compensated.
The filling operation establishes the required wa-
Filling ter seal in the -96- version of VARIZONE and
UNITROL separators.
The filling cycle is followed by a 5 seconds’ wait-
Waiting after filling
ing period.
Feed - open The separating process is activated.
Sensor test (option) The individual sensors are tested.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
Th ird m e n u lin e
Display Meaning
The current pressure in the clean-oil discharge is
Clean oil discharge
displayed in bar.
Fo u rth m e n u lin e
Display Meaning
The current product-feed temperature is dis-
Product temperature
played in °C.
STATUS-WMS/SMS/PT2
PT2-actual: 4.7bar
PT2-Transm: HIGH
WMS-Sensor: OIL
Fig. 34
The current status for the WMS-SMS-PT2 sensor arrangement is displayed.
Display Meaning
The current pressure on the PT2 sensor is dis-
PT2-actual
played in bar.
The current pressure of the PT2 transmitter is displayed.
PT2-Transmitter: LOW This is displayed when no pressure prevails.
PT2-Transmitter: HIGH This is displayed when pressure prevails.
The current status of the WMS sensor is displayed.
This is displayed when the WMS sensor detects
WMS sensor: OIL
oil.
This is displayed when the WMS sensor detects
WMS sensor: WATER
water.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
• From the main menu, more program

settings can be called up by means
Sep-Type:OSD-6 the “arrow down” key.
Motor curr.: 0.0A
Speed: 0rpm
Mode:Single -01/36
Fig. 35
The currently selected separator type (OSD-X, OSE-X) is displayed. The sepa-
rator type is factory-set.
The current separator amperage is displayed. The amperage values differ in the
start-up, ejection, and operation cycles.
During the run-up phase of the separator the starting-time countdown is dis-
played in seconds. As soon as “0 sec“ appears the separator is ready for opera-
tion. Preselection is done on timer 10.
Display of the preselected separator operating mode. The operating mode of the
separator is factory-set. The following displays are possible:
tion (-91-).
Single or series (-01-) The separator is run with activated Water Con-
tent Monitoring System (-01-) (for more details
(Water Content Monitoring
refer to separator manual).
System)
tion (-01-).
Single or series (-01/36-) The separator is used for heavy fuel oil treat-
ment, with activated Water Content Monitoring
(WMS/SMS -HFO)
System (-01) and Solids Space Monitoring
System (-36-).
Single or series (-01/96-) The separator is used for lube oil treatment,
with activated Water Content Monitoring Sys-
(WMS/SMS -LO)
tem (-01) and Solids Space Monitoring System
(-96-).
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.6 User settings
3.6.1 Calling up user settings
Fig. 36
“User settings” are called up by pressing “Home” key 1 twice.
Six user-setting overviews can be se-

lected by means of the “arrow-down”
F1-User-Time 1/6 key.Call up the desired menu by
F2-Time list 1 means of the corresponding function
F3-Time list 2 key.
F4-Counter
Fig. 37
F1-Analog ON 2/6
F2-Analog OFF
F3-Input list
F4-Output list
Fig. 38
F1-PID-Contr. 3/6
F2-Time recording
F3-Alarm counter
F4-Alarm memory
Fig. 39
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
F1-Maintenance 4/6
F2-Volume
F3-Service Info
F4-Date/Time
Fig. 40
F1-Sep.Settings 5/6
F2-Contrast
F3-Language
F4-Speed monitoring
Fig. 41
F1-Free 6/6
F2-Free
F3-Free
F4-Free
Fig. 42
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.6.2 User timings

Three groups of timer lists are available:
– User timings
– Timer list 1
– Timer list 2
Only in the “User timings“ menu can process-dependent time values be
changed without entering a password. The other two groups are modified by
service staff only.
ATTENTION!
Alter the timer settings only in a passive state. In active state mode, the previ-
ously set time first runs; the time change made does not become effective until
the next activation. All set times run backwards from the entered setpoint and
activate the programmed function when the time has elapsed.
Note:
A user timing is changed only when the product is exposed to varying degrees
of contamination or when the water pressure for displacement and filling water
varies (to be gauged by litre now and then). (The required information can be
found in the Installation Guidelines, chapter “Water quantity”).
All times are preset in the factory under consideration of the respective separa-
tor model and are adapted to the local conditions during commissioning.
• In the “User settings” overview, ac-

tuate the F1 key.
F1-User Time 1/6
F2-Time list 1
F3-Time list 2
F4-Counter
Fig. 43
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
The individual values can be called up

successively by means of the “arrow-
User Timings down” key.

Changing the timer setting:
T20: Separation
• Enter the new timer value by means
P:7200sec A:1234sec The LED in the EDIT key lights up.

of the function keys.
Fig. 44
• Select the next timer value by

The new value is accepted.
means of the arrow keys.
Actual
Timer Meaning Setpoint
value
T20 Separation 7200 s
T01 Displacement
Auto timer value calculated (option)
T02 Filling
Auto timer value calculated (option)
T10 Separator starting 600 s
T11 Alarm bridging 30 s
Note:
In the displayed timer, there is a letter before each value. These letters have the
• P: Preset
following meanings:
• A: Actual
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.6.3 Timer lists 1 and 2

Precise information on the timers can be found in the separate description
“Settings and faults”.
• In the “User settings” overview actu-

ate the F2 or F3 key.
F1-User Time 1/6
F2-Time list 1
F3-Time list 2
F4-Counter
Fig. 45
The timers, except those mentioned in

chapter 3.6.2 “User timings”, are only
Time List 1
• The first timer menu is called up.
accessible by entering a password.
T00:Partial ejection • By means of the arrow keys the in-

P: 1.1sec A: 0sec. dividual timer menus can be subse-
quently browsed through and ad-
justed.
Fig. 46

Changing a timer setting :
• Enter the new value by means of the

The LED in the EDIT key lights up.

function keys.
• Select the next counter value by


A fixed unit is allocated to each timer. If decimal places are specified, the time
can also be entered with this accuracy. The initial setpoints depend on the se-
lected separator type.
Note:
In the displayed timer, there is a letter before each value. These letters have the
• P: Preset
following meanings:
• A: Actual
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.6.4 Counters
tuate the F4 key.
F1-User Time 1/6
F2-Time list 1
F3-Time list 2
F4-Counter
Fig. 47

C1: Flush ejection down” key.

Changing a counter setting:
P: 10
A: 4

function keys.
Fig. 48
• Select the next counter value by

More information on the individual counters (C1 – C5) is found on the following
pages.
Flush ejection:
C1: Flush ejection

P: 10
A: 4
Fig. 49
Actual
Counter Meaning Setpoint P
value A
C1 Flush ejection 10
The number of total ejections to be performed until an automatic flush ejection is

to be triggered is entered in input field P. When operating without flush ejection,
set the counter to “0“.
Upon each total ejection performed, the actual value A is reduced by “one”.
When the “0” value is reached, the next total ejection will be followed by the de-
sired flush ejection.
Note:
The “Flush ejection“ counter generally responds only to total ejections per-
formed. Partial ejections are not taken into account. During flush ejections the
ejection monitoring system is out of action.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
Partial ejection:
C2: Partial ejection

P: 8
A: 2
Fig. 50
Actual
value A
C2 Partial ejection 8
When modifying the operating-water system, partial ejection programs can be

run on OSC and OSD separators as well, if desired.
The number of partial ejections to be performed until a double total ejection is to
be triggered is entered in input field P.
Upon each partial ejection performed, the actual value A is reduced by “one”.
When the “0” value is reached, the next partial ejection will be followed by the
desired double total ejection.
Note:
The partial ejection mode can be switched on/off after having entered the pass-
word as described in chapter 3.6.17 “Separator Settings” Factory setting: Off
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
Filling in SMS mode:
C3: SMS Filling

P: 3
A: 2
Fig. 51
Actual
value A
C3 SMS Filling 3
For LO separation in 01/96 mode, a system check of the SMS function is carried
out by several filling-water injections. The number of filling-water injection inter-
vals is preselected on counter C3. The factory setting is 3 and should be used
for testing purposes only.
The number of filling-water ejections to be performed until the system pressure
detected by the SMS sensor and switching over from SMS to WMS operation is
established, is entered in input field A.
If no pressure is detected after the third filling-water injection, the ejection pro-
gram is triggered.
Sensor check (option):
C4: Sensor check

P: 5
A: 0
Fig. 52
Actual
value A
C4 This is where to define the number of 5
partial ejection intervals prior to an
automatic sensor check.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
Percent (by volume) water
C5:0.5-Vol-% Water
P: 3
A: 0
Fig. 53
Actual
value A
C5 In the separating program, with dis- 3
charge valve closed and T47 started,
the pressure in the bypass line is reg-
istered and reduced by one.
If, within the separating interval, the
“0“ value is reached, the alarm “Cau-
tion, water content > 0.5%” appears.
This alarm is coupled to T17. By
opening of feed valve T17 is activat-
ed, after expiry of T17 the alarm is
still active.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.6.5 Analog inputs (AI)

To adjust the analog inputs perform the following steps.
tuate the F1 key.
F1-Analog ON 2/6
F2-Analog OFF
F3-Input list
F4-Output list
Fig. 54

AI0: Motor current down” key.

1U3 6/7 10.5 A Changing the setting:


function keys.
Fig. 55
• Select the next value by means of

the arrow keys.

Note:
More information on how to adjust the analog inputs is given on the following
pages.
Transformer:
AI0: Motor current

1U3 6/7 10.5 A
Transformer:
F1 Key >1:50<
Fig. 56
Input Function Terminal Value

AI 0.0 Motor current 1U3 6/7 10.5 A
By actuating the “F1” key several times, separator 1:10; 1:25; 1:50;
current transformer adjustment can be selected for 1:100
local motor starters.
Due to the different separator motor ratings, the transmission ratio of the current
transformer can be adjusted when using external motor starters, to ensure that
the display of the control unit indicates the correct motor current of the separa-
tor.
The desired transformer ratio can be selected by actuating the F1 key several
times.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
Ejection monitoring:
Ejection monitoring:
Offset: 2.0A
Bowl monitoring:
Offset: 2.0A
Fig. 57
Function Conditions
Ejection monitoring Just before an ejection the operating current is
read off, and the offset value is added. After
the ejection within the time setting of timer 27,
the operating current has to increase by this
value. The offset value is preset on this page.
While in separating mode, launch a total ejec-
tion by means of the "Start“ key and observe
the ejection current in the corresponding dis-
play. The ejection current is normally higher
than the rated current in the separating pro-
gram. Enter the difference between ejection
current and separating current (e.g. 2.0 A) as
offset value.
The ejection monitoring will be out of service if
0,0 A has been entered as offset value. This,
however, should be done in exceptional cases
only.
Bowl monitoring For bowl monitoring, the cyclical closing-water
impulse for the bowl hydraulics is checked, i.e.:
if the closing-water rate is too high, the bowl is
opened which causes the current to rise and is
monitored as follows:
- 3 seconds before closing-water impulse in-
jection, the actual operating current of the
separator is measured and stored.
- 3 seconds after closing-water injection, the
measuring operation is repeated, and the
value is compared with the previous operat-
ing-current value.
If the value differs from the adjusted bowl-
monitoring offset, a corresponding alarm is
signalled; the separating process is not inter-
rupted.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
Clean oil discharge:
AI1:Cl.oil discharge
Actual: 1.4bar
Min: 1.0 Max: 3.0
PT-Key -F1- 1:16
Fig. 58
Input Function Terminal Setting

AI 0.1 Clean oil discharge 1U2 12+/13- Min: 1.0 bar
By adjusting Min: 1.0 bar and Max: 3.0 bar, the Max: 3.0 bar
product-discharge signal can be called up if these
values are exceeded.
Actual:
In this line the current pressure in the product dis-
charge is displayed.
PT key: 1:6, 1:10, 1:16
The desired transformer ratio can be selected by ac-
tuating the F1 key several times.
PT2 Transmitter:
AI2:PT2 Transmitter
Actual: 1.7bar
Max: 5bar
PT-Key -F1- 1:10
Fig. 59

AI 0.2 PT2 Transmitter 1X2. Max: 6.0bar
61/63/SC
By adjusting Max: 5.0 bar, an alarm signal can be set
if the value is below or above this setting.
The alarm signal depends on the selected process.
Actual:
In this line the current value of the PT2 pressure
transmitter is displayed.
PT key: 1:6, 1:10, 1:16
The desired transformer ratio can be selected by ac-
tuating the F1 key several times.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
PID – temperature control (option):
AI3:PID-Controller
1X2.76/77 95°C
(Option)
Fig. 60

AI 0.3 PID controller 1X2. 76/77
The control-unit software is provided with a PID controller which, in combination

with optional hardware components, allows to control the product temperature.
The PID function is selected by actuating the PID key.
Adjustment of the control mode and/or adaptation of the controller to local condi-
tions is described in chapter 3.6.9 “PID Controller”.
Temperature monitoring (PT100 signal):
PT100 Product-Temp.
1X2.78/79 95°C
Min: 60°C Compens.
Max: 100°C 7°C
Fig. 61

PT100 Product temperature 1X2.78/79 95 °C (203 °F)
Min: 85 °C (185 °F)
Lowest limit value for
separating temperature
monitoring
Max: 105 °C (221 °F)
Highest limit value for
separating temperature
monitoring
The control unit has a direct PT100 input in two-line technology.

When the temperature is below the min. separating temperature, a START of
the separating program is impossible. Mind the corresponding note in the dis-
play.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
PID – temperature control (option):
Temp. registration
Peak: 120°C
Fig. 62
Display Meaning
Temperature regis- The highest temperature occurred is stored for evalua-
tration - peak tion of operating conditions.
3.6.6 Analog outputs (AO)

Process data, e.g. separator current and product temperature, can be forwarded
to a superordinate control system as 4-2 mA (for transmittal an amplifier with
galvanic insulation is provided).
To display the analog outputs perform the following steps.
tuate the F2 key.
F1-Analog ON 2/6
F2-Analog OFF
F3-Input list
F4-Output list
Fig. 63
• The individual values can be called

up successively by means of the “ar-
AO.1: Motor current
• More data can be found in the table
row-down” key.
1X2.93/94/SC 1.9 A
AO.2: Temperature of chapter 2.7 “Analog in-
1X2. 91/92/SC 3.0 A puts/outputs”.
Fig. 64
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.6.7 Input list

For displaying the digital inputs (DI) perform the following steps.
tuate the F3 key.
F1-Analog ON 2/6
F2-Analog OFF
F3-Input list
F4-Output list
Fig. 65

DI0.0:Separator-ON
row-down” key.
>0< 1X2.01/02
DI0.1:Sep.-Fail. of chapter 2.6 "Digital in-
>0< 1X2.03/04 puts/outputs”.
Fig. 66
• 0 = Input signal 24 V DC not available

Status Definition:
• 1 = Input signal 24 V DC available
3.6.8 Output list
For displaying the digital outputs (DO) perform the following steps.
tuate the F4 key.
F1-Analog ON 2/6
F2-Analog OFF
F3-Input list
F4-Output list
Fig. 67

DO0.0:Product valve
row-down” key.
>0< 1X2.41/42
DO0.1:Water valve of chapter 2.6 "Digital in-
>0< 1X2.43/44 puts/outputs”.
Fig. 68
• 0 = Input signal 24 V DC not available

Status Definition:
• 1 = Input signal 24 V DC available
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.6.9 PID controller

tuate the F1 key.
F1-PID-Controller3/6
F2-Time recording
F3-Alarm counter
F4-Alarm memory
Fig. 69

PID-Controller-Hand down” key.
• Open or close the controller by ac-

Valve >Hand < Adjusting the PID controller:
F2-Key Contr. closed
F3-Key Contr. open tuating the F2 or F3 key.

the arrow keys.
Fig. 70


function keys.

the arrow keys.
More information on how to adjust the PID controller is given on the following
pages.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
PID-Controller-Hand
Valve >Hand <
F2-Key Contr. closed
F3-Key Contr. open
Fig. 71
Display Meaning
PID controller – By actuating the PID controller” key, one of the two op-
Hand/Auto- erating modes of the PID controller can be selected:
• Hand: Opening of the valve is done via F3, closing
via F2.
• Auto: Automatic control of the valve by the PID con-
troller, using the preset parameters.
Valve –Hand/Auto- PID controller status display:
• Hand: PID controller in manual operation
• Auto: PID controller in automatic operation
F2 key The valve is closed while the PID controller is in manual
-Controller closed- operation.
F3 key The valve is closed while the PID controller is in auto-
-Controller open- matic operation.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
Setpoint 90°C
Actual 89°C
Kp (P part) 2.00
Fig. 72
Actual
Display Meaning Setpoint
value
Setpoint Entering the desired product
temperature
Actual value Displaying the current product
temperature
Kp (P part) Entering the control mode (pro- 2.00
portional value)
Note:
The control mode (Kp) is factory-set according to general practical experience
and need not be modified under normal conditions.
Adapting the measuring transducer:
AI 0.3PID-controller
1X2. 76/77 89°C
End value: 120°C
Fig. 73
Actual
value
AI 0.3 PID con- Current input value of the
troller 1X2. 76/77 PID controller
End value Setting the end value 120 °C
(248 °F)
In special cases, the 4-20-Ma signal is provided from outside, adaptation to the
local measuring transducer is required.
For this purpose the existing default value is simply overwritten with the desired
value.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.6.10 Time recording

tuate the F2 key.
F1-PIDcontroller 3/6
F2-Time recording
F3-Alarm counter
F4-Alarm memory
Fig. 74

TR1: WMS Time down” key.

Max in 24h 60min Adjusting the time settings:
Act.in 24h 0min
Recent 24h 0min the arrow keys.

Fig. 75

function keys.

the arrow keys.
TR1: WMS Time

Max. in 24h 60min
Act.in 24h 0min
Recent 24h 0min
Fig. 76
Display Meaning
TR1 • During separation the period during which the WMS sensor
detects water is recorded. When TR3 has elapsed the time
recording is reset.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
TR2:Sludge pump time

Max. in 24h 60min
Act.in 24h 0min
Recent 24h 0min
Fig. 77
Display Meaning
TR2 • During separation the running time of the sludge pump is
recorded. When TR3 has elapsed the time recording is re-
set.
TR3: Time Reset

P: 24h
A: 5h
Fig. 78
Display Meaning
TR3 • When the preset “P” time has elapsed, all time records for
TR1 and TR2 are moved to “Last Xh”, and the “Act. in Xh“
value is reset.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.6.11 Alarm counters

For displaying the operation and alarm signal counters perform the following
steps.
tuate the F3 key.
F1-PID-controller3/6
F2-Time recording
F3-Alarm counter
F4-Alarm memory
Fig. 79

Sep. OP data row-down” key.
OP-hrs: 77h
Ejections 44
Starts 37
Fig. 80
Display Meaning
OP-hrs. Display of the number of operating hours of the sepa-
rator. This number is the basic reference for the re-
quired service operations (see separator manual).
Ejections The number of partial ejections performed is displayed
in this line.
Starts The number of complete start-up cycles performed is
displayed in this line.
WMS/ per. Number of WMS functions for each separation cycle.
On a UNITROL separator with WMS system activated,
(periodic)
the number of water removals for each preset separa-
tion cycle is recorded. In case of a manual separation
stoppage the displayed value is set to zero.
WMS/ tot. Number of WMS functions. On a UNITROL separator
with WMS system activated, the number of water re-
(total)
movals is continuously recorded. The displayed value
cannot be reset.
SMS/ per. Number of SMS functions for each separation cycle.
On a UNITROL separator with SMS system activated,
(periodic)
the number of bowl ejections for each preset separa-
tion cycle is recorded. In case of a manual separation
stoppage the displayed value is set to zero.
SMS/ tot. Number of SMS functions. On a UNITROL separator
with SMS system activated, the number of bowl ejec-
(total)
tions is continuously recorded. The displayed value
cannot be reset.
Water removal time The water valve opening time is continuously record-
total ed. The value cannot be reset.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
Display Meaning
Water removal time The water valve opening time is recorded for each
periodic separation interval and is reset when the next ejection
is performed.
PTC-Alarm This alarm is recorded when a switch-off is triggered
by the PCT sensors incorporated in the windings of
the separator motor.
PAL-Alarm This alarm is recorded when the separating process is
cut off by the minimum pressure transmitter installed
in the product discharge line.
PAH-Alarm This alarm is recorded when the separating process is
cut off by the maximum pressure transmitter installed
in the product discharge line
FSH-Alarm This alarm is recorded when the separating process is
cut off by the maximum level switch installed in the
water discharge line (optional, no standard equip-
ment).
LSHH-Alarm LSHH – solids vessel. This alarm is recorded when
the separating process is cut off by the "high/high"
level limit switch installed in the solids vessel.
TSL-Alarm TSL – Product feed temperature. This alarm is record-
ed when the separating process is cut off by the PT
100 temperature sensor installed in the feed line.
TSH-Alarm TSH – Product feed temperature. This alarm is rec-
orded when the separating process is cut off by the PT
100 temperature sensor installed in the feed line.
ISL-Alarm Ejection monitoring. This alarm is recorded when the
ejection program is interrupted because the current
monitoring device responded.
SOLIDS PUMP- Response of the solids-pump motor protection switch
ALARM is recorded.
FEED PUMP Response of the feed-pump motor protection switch is
-ALARM recorded.
Black-outS The number of power failures occurred within the cur-
rent separation program is recorded.
Solids pump counter: The solids pump switch-on intervals of the last 24
recent 24 h hours is recorded.
Water removal alarm The number of continuous water removal cycles
greater than T23 is recorded.
Vibro-1 Alarm Vibration alarm, stage 1
This alarm is recorded when the separating process is
cut off by the (optionally available) vibration sensor in-
stalled on the separator.
Vibro-2 Alarm Vibration alarm, stage 2
This alarm is recorded when the separator is switched
off by the (optionally available) vibration sensor in-
stalled on the separator.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.6.12 Alarm memory

On the control unit, fault messages are registered in the alarm memory. Any
change in status (come/over/acknowledged) of a fault message gives a new en-
try in the alarm memory.
Max. 256 entries are memorized. As soon as the alarm memory cannot take in
more fault messages, the oldest entries are erased automatically.
Note:
Precise descriptions of the fault messages can be found in the separate descrip-
tion “Settings and faults”.

tuate the F4 key.
F1-PID controller3/6
F2-Time recording
F3-Alarm counter
F4-Alarm memory
Fig. 81
• The alarm memory display appears.

– The fault messages are registered
<Fault > K 001/015 in the alarm memory in chronolog-
#009 MOTOR PROTECT.
• Actuate the up/down arrow buttons.
ical order.
on 10.12.02 09:47:48
This is to browse through the alarm
• Press the ESC key.

memory.
Fig. 82 This is to quit the alarm memory.
Legend of the display reading in the example:

Display Meaning
<Fault> A fault message is displayed.
• K = fault message has come

K Status of fault message:
• Q = fault message was acknowledged

• G = fault message is over
001/015 The fault message on display appears in position 1
(latest signal). The alarm memory contains 15 fault
messages. 001 to 256 are possible.
#009 MOTOR Fault no. and plain text of fault message.
PROTECT.
on 10.12.02 09:47:48 Date and time at the moment of change in status
(come/acknowledged/over) of the fault message.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.6.13 Maintenance
tuate the F1 key.
F1-Maintenance 4/6
F2-Volume
F3-Service Info
F4-Date Time
Fig. 83

Maintenance interval
Setting
function keys.
Set: 4000 h
Actual: 2145 h The new value is accepted.
Fig. 84
Under “Set”, a maintenance interval of 4000 h is factory-set as specified in the

separator manual. Under “Actual“, the number of separator operating hours is
displayed.
As soon the number of operating hours is reached, a collective alarm is trig-
gered, and a corresponding warning signal is displayed on the screen. The col-
lective alarm does not interrupt the separating program and has to be acknowl-
edged by means of the ENTER key.
Note:
For setting the maintenance interval refer to the Instruction Manual of the sepa-
rator installed.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.6.14 Volume (option)

For entering data in “Volume info for SMS registration, displacement and filling”
and in “Sensor test”, proceed as follows:
tuate the F2 key.
F1-Maintenance 4/6
F2-Volume
F3-Service Info
F4-Date Time
Fig. 85
Volume info for SMS registration, displacement, and filling:
• Select the value by means of the ar-

row keys.
Volume until SMS
Liters
Volume displacement
Liters function keys.

Fig. 86
Actual
value
Volume until SMS Depending on the size of the
separator, the value for “Volume
in litres until SMS registration” is
entered here according to the
“Bowl Volume” table (see sepa-
rate description “Settings and
trouble shooting”, chapter “Bowl
volume/speed settings”).
Volume Dis- Depending on the size of the
placement separator, the value for “Volume
in litres for displacement” is en-
tered here according to the
“Bowl Volume” table (see sepa-
rate manual “Parameters and
trouble shooting”, chapter “Bowl
volume/speed settings”).
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
Filling water volume

Liters
---->>
Fig. 87
Actual
value
Filling-water vol- Depending on the size of the
ume separator, the value for “Volume
in litres for filling” is entered here
according to the “Bowl Volume”
table (see separate manual “Pa-
rameters and Trouble Shooting”,
chapter “Bowl volume/speed
settings”).
Sensor check:

row keys.
Water impulses for

sensor check The LED in the EDIT key lights up.
T60: Start impulse
P: sec A: sec function keys.

Fig. 88
Actual
Display Meaning Setpoint P
value A
Start impulse After a manual start or when 10.0 s
C4 “Sensor check” has ex-
pired, the filling and displace-
ment water valve is opened for
10 seconds.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
T61: Sensor interval

P: sec A: sec
T62: Sensor impulse
P: sec A: sec
Fig. 89
Actual
Display Meaning Setpoint P
value A
Sensor interval Filling (T60) is followed by a 3 3s
seconds’ pause via T61.
Sensor impulse When the T61 pause has end- 1s
ed, water is injected via T62
for one second, through the fill-
ing and displacement water
valve.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.6.15 Service information

For displaying the separator data and service addresses perform the following
steps:
tuate the F3 key.
F1-Maintenance 4/6
F2-Volume
F3-Service Info
F4-Date Time
Fig. 90

Separator ser. no. down” key.
-> 1234-567 <- The serial number and the commis-

Commissioning date sioning date can be adjusted:
-> 17.11.2002 <-
row keys.

Fig. 91 The LED in the EDIT key lights up.

function keys.
• Select the next value or browse the

menus by means of the arrow keys.
Display Meaning
Separator serial no. Entering the serial number of the separator to
be actuated
Commissioning date Entering the date of commissioning
Prog Displaying the current software number
Version Displaying the current software version
Control Unit Part-No. Part number of the control unit
Date Display of the current date
Time Display of the current time
Service Sep. Operating Displaying the number of operating hours
Hours
Operating time of the separator motor
Service addresses Here all the service addresses can be called
one by one.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.6.16 Date and time

For calling up date and time proceed as follows:
tuate the F4 key.
F1-Maintenance 4/6
F2-Volume
F3-Service Info
F4-Date/Time
Fig. 92
• Actuate the right/left arrow buttons.

Move the cursor to the desired val-
Change date/time
ue.
26. 4. 3 16:13:19
• Adjust the value by means of the


function keys.
Fig. 93 The new selection is accepted.
Note:
The selection is undone by pressing
the ESC key. The current setting is
maintained, and the system jumps
back to the previous menu.
Display Meaning
Date/Time Date and time displays are used to trace alarm sig-
nals accordingly. The date format is language-
dependent.
There is no “leading zero“ shown in the display. In
Fig. 93, the year “03“ is displayed as “3“.
The preset date is memorized for about 6 weeks
when the control unit is switched off.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.6.17 Separator settings

The preselected separator settings are default factory settings.
tuate the F1 key.
F1-Sep.Settings 5/6
F2-Contrast
F3-Language
F4-Speed monitoring
Fig. 94
Separator Selection
F1 Key
Model: OSD -6
Fig. 95
Function Conditions
Selecting the separator type • F1 = OSD-6, OSD-18,
OSD-35, OSD-60,
OSD-80
The control unit is factory-set to the separator type installed; consequently all
corresponding timer settings are loaded automatically. If, for service reasons, al-
location is re-made, the separator type can be selected by actuating the F1 key
several times.
Press the F1 key until the separator type shown in the display changes. To pre-
vent the type from being changed by mistake, selection is delayed by 3 se-
conds.
When exchanging the control unit, the separators of previous OSC, OSB, and
OSA series can be selected as well.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
Process selection
F1 Key
Op.mode: single -02
Fig. 96
Function Conditions
Selecting the separator operating mode • F1 = single -01,
single -02, single -01/36,
single -01/96, single -91
Actuate the F1 key until the desired operating mode of the separator type is dis-
played. An overview of the separator operating modes can be found in chapter
3.5, Process data overview (Home).
Solids selection
F1 key
MODE: LSHH
Fig. 97
Function Conditions
Selecting a level switch for the solids pump • LSHH, LSHH-LSH, LSHH-
when using Compact Units (CUs9: LSH-LSL,
no solids vessel
Press the F1 key until the desired level switches are shown in the display.
By means of the F1 key the CU function is selected, and the sludge pump is
started automatically when bowl ejection is triggered. In addition, the solids
pump is switched off via timer 40, according to solids tank volume and pump
throughput. The timers have to be adapted to local conditions, if required. Dur-
ing separation, pause-and-impulse cycles are performed which can be modified
by means of the T41 (pause) and T40 (operation) keys.
When selecting LSHH, only an alarm is produced via the level switch.
When selecting LSHH-LSH, the sludge pump is automatically started when bowl
ejection takes place. The pump is also turned on via LSH and stopped via T24.
When selecting LSHH-LSH-LSL, the sludge pump is switched on via LSH and
stopped via LSH when T24 has elapsed.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
Sep-off in idle run

F1 Key > OFF <
Sensor Check
F2-Key > OFF <
Fig. 98
Function Conditions
Switch-off of separator in idle run, as soon as a • F1 = ON/OFF
delay period has elapsed.
• Actuate the F1 key to activate automatic separator switch-off when running

idle.
When ON is displayed, the separator is turned off with a preceding bowl ejec-
tion, when no switch-over to separation (process) takes place at the end of the
T39 period..
Idle condition is established when an alarm is given along with feed valve
closing or after start-up. If this condition arises, the corresponding message is
shown in the display, and the alarm system is activated.
By actuating the F1 key again, automatic switch-off of the separator running at
idle is turned off.
Function Conditions
Sensor Check (Option) • F2 = ON/OFF
On UNITROL separators with activated WMS or SMS sensors, one can check
the WMS transmitter and the pressure switch in the bypass line for proper func-
tion by actuating the F2 key.
When starting the ejection program manually or at the end of the C06 counter
setting, the WMS and SMS sensors are checked for proper signal quality by in-
jecting water. Only when proper functioning is confirmed will the separating pro-
cess be released. In case of malfunction the corresponding alarms will be trig-
gered. The testing period for the WMS and SMS sensors can be preselected by
means of T3.
The sensor check is switched off by actuating the F2 key again.
Note:
When activating the sensor check, calculation of the automatic water injection
for displacement and filling is launched as well.
For this purpose, enter the bowl volumes (depending on the separator size) for
the operations "liters up to WMS registration", "liters for displacement" and "li-
ters for filling" from the separate manual "Parameters and troubleshooting" ac-
cording the specified table.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
PSL-Function check
F1 Key > OFF <
Partial ejection:
F2 Key >OFF<
Fig. 99
Function Conditions
PSL function monitoring • F1 = ON/OFF
• Press the F1 key to activate function monitoring of the pressure transmitter in

the product discharge.
With function monitoring switched on, the pressure transmitter in the ejection
program is checked for 0 status. Faulty permanent signal is thus prevented from
being triggered by a defect on the pressure transmitter.
If this fault arises, the corresponding message is shown in the display, and the
alarm system is activated.
Function monitoring is switched off by actuating the F1 key again.
Function Conditions
Partial ejection program selection • F2 = ON/OFF
• Press the F2 key to activate the partial ejection program.

When using OSD separators, partial ejections can be performed if desired, with
the corresponding operating water system. Time-dependent and SMS-
determined bowl ejections are preformed as partial ejections if the current value
on the partial-ejection counter C2 has not returned to zero.
Partial ejections that are launched by means of the "Process stop / start" but-
tons and by zero status of the C2 counter, are generally performed as total ejec-
tions.
The partial ejection program is switched off by actuating the F2 key again.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
Bowl monitoring:
F2 Key >OFF<
Fig. 100
Function Conditions
Bowl monitoring • F2 = ON/OFF
• Press the F2 key to activate separator bowl monitoring.

For bowl monitoring, the cyclical closing-water impulse for the bowl hydraulics is
checked, i.e.: if the closing-water rate is too high, the bowl is opened which
causes the current to rise and/or the bowl speed to fall.
Bowl monitoring is controlled as follows:
– 3 seconds before the closing-water injection impulse, the actual operating
current of the separator is measured and memorized.
– 3 seconds after closing-water injection, the measuring operation is repeat-
ed, and the result is compared with the previously registered current and
speed values.
– If a deviation from the permissible offset value is observed, a corresponding
alarm is triggered.
– The separating process remains uninterrupted.
Bowl monitoring is switched off by actuating the F2 key again.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.6.18 Contrast
For adjusting the display contrast proceed as follows:
tuate the F2 key.
F1-Sep.Settings 5/6
F2-Contrast
F3-Language
F4-Speed monitoring
Fig. 101
• Actuate the up/down arrow button.

Set the contrast to a value between
Display contrast: 0 and 15.
– 0 = lowest contrast

Contrast: 6 – 15 = highest contrast
The new selection is accepted.
Fig. 102 Note:

The selection is undone by pressing
maintained and the system jumps back
to the previous menu.
3.6.19 Language
For language selection proceed as follows:
tuate the F3 key.
F1-Sep. settings 5/6
F2-Contrast
F3-Language
F4-Speed monitoring
Fig. 103
• Actuate the up/down arrow button.

Selecting a new language:
Language selection:
Browse through the languages.
Current: GER
New: ENG The new selection is accepted, the
program re-starts.
Fig. 104
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
Depending on the program version, five languages are available for selection.
Program version Languages Code

D10-0A1-V1.20* German GER
English ENG
French FRA
Italian ITA
Spanish ESP
* The program version can change due to technical progress.
Note:
$ 002 transfer The selection is undone by pressing
maintained and the system jumps back
>Parametrization < to the previous menu.
> running <
Fig. 105
For firmware reasons some system outputs are only available in the languages
of program version D10-0A1-V1.20*. If other languages are selected, the output
will be in English.
Note:
Following a language selection, the new language is transferred from the Micro
Memory Card (MMD) which takes approx. 3 minutes. During this period, no data
is shown on the display; the selection is accepted only after pressing the
ENTER key, and the program re-starts.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.6.20 Speed monitoring (option)

Monitoring of the bowl speed for alarm signalling is pre-set via the min. and
max. values. For adjusting the speed monitoring parameters proceed as follows:
tuate the F4 key.
F1-Sep. settings 5/6
F2-Contrast
F3-Language
F4-Speed monitoring
Fig. 106
• By actuating the F1 key, separator

speed monitoring is activat-
F1-Speed ON/OFF>OFF<
• When the min. – max. values are
ed/deactivated.
Speed max:12000 rpm
Speed min:11000 rpm exceeded, the separator is switched
actual:11500 rpm off automatically.
Setting the speed monitoring parame-
• Select the min. and/or max. value by

Fig. 107 ters:



function keys.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
Offset ejection mon.

270 rpm
Offset bowl monit.
100 rpm
Fig. 108
Function
Offset ejection monitoring
Just before an ejection the bowl speed is read, and the offset value is added.
After bowl ejection within the time setting of timer 27, the speed has to de-
crease by this value.
While in separating mode, launch a total ejection by means of the "Start“ key
and observe the ejection speed in the corresponding display. Normally the
ejection speed is lower than the separating speed. Enter the difference be-
tween ejection speed and separating speed as offset value.
Example:
(speed in separating mode: 10,000 rpm – ejection speed: 9,700 rpm) - 10 %
= offset speed: 270 rpm
The ejection monitoring is not operative if 0 rpm has been entered as offset
value. This, however, should be done in exceptional cases only.
Offset bowl monitoring
For bowl monitoring, the cyclical closing-water impulse for the bowl hydraulics
is checked, i.e.: if the closing-water rate is too high, the bowl is opened which
causes the speed to fall and is monitored as follows:
- 3 seconds before closing-water injection impulse, the actual speed of the
separator is measured and memorized.
- 3 seconds after closing-water injection, the measuring operation is repeat-
ed, and the value is compared with the previous speed value.
If the value differs by more than 100 rpm, a corresponding alarm is signalled;
the separating process is not interrupted.
Impules per rev.

2 Imp.
Fig. 109
Function
Impulses per revolution
• Set a value between 1 and 10.

Number of pulses energizing the bowl sensor per revolution of bowl.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.7 Changing the Micro Memory Card (MMC)

The control program and all setting/adjustment data are stored on the remova-
ble Micro Memory Card (MMC). If required, these data can be downloaded, e.g.
when the Micro Memory Card (MMC) is inserted in a new control unit.
The control unit cannot be used without the Micro Memory Card (MMC) or with
a defective card. In this case the message “CPU is in stop” will be displayed.
Fig. 110
1 "X7 MMC" port

2 Micro Memory Card (MMC)
Make sure that the power supply unit is switched off prior to changing the Micro
Memory Card (MMC).
When a new Micro Memory Card (MMC) has been inserted, the D10 unit is in
STOP mode when being switched on for the first time.
• Switch the voltage supply off and on again. The D10 will then be in RUN
mode.
The Micro Memory Card (MMC) must not be read out using commercially avail-
able card readers. The program may be destroyed.
Only the control unit purchased from Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH can
read the program content on the MMC, and proper operation can be guaran-
teed.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.8 Memory reset
3.8.1 Setting the jumper
Only qualified staff or authorized specialists are allowed to open the control cab-
inet.
Normally the operating modes RUN, STOP, and MRES cannot be changed us-
ing the operating mode selector of the control cabinet. If, however, this is re-
quired for some reason, e.g. to reset the memory, a jumper has to be connected
between the terminals AT1 and AT2 for activating the authorization.
Whenever the operating mode selector switch is pressed, the status of the con-
trol unit is changed.
Fig. 111
1 Power supply connector X1

2 Jumper between AT1 and AT2
The RUN key has to be pressed for at least 500 ms to trigger the status change
and to make the key LED light up. The key LEDs do not indicate the operating
status of the control cabinet but the position of the operating-mode keys.
To continue using the unit the jumper has to be removed.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
3.8.2 CPU reset

Under certain circumstances it might be necessary to reset the CPU of the con-
trol unit.
Resetting the CPU means that the CPU is reinitialised. The program currently
stored in the RAM and all data will be overwritten by the content of the Micro
Memory Card (MMC).
Fig. 112
• Select the operating mode “STOP” by pressing the DOWN key (2):
– the LED "S" lights up,,
– the LED "STOP" lights up,,
• Select the operating mode MRES by pressing the UP (1) and DOWN (2) keys
simultaneously.
– the LED "M" lights up,,
• Keep the keys pressed until the status LED “STOP” lights up a second time
and then remains on (after about 3 seconds).
• Then release the keys.
• You have to press the two keys again within 3 seconds.
• When the LED “STOP” flashes rapidly (at about 2 Hz), you can release the
keys.
When resetting of the CPU is finished the LED “STOP“ stops flashing and
changes into continuous light.
The CPU is now reset, and the program is in STOP mode.
Note:
The steps describe here are only necessary if the user wants to reset the control
unit himself. If the control unit requests to be reset, which is shown by slow
flashing of the “STOP” LED, it will be sufficient to press the UP (1) and DOWN
(2) keys simultaneously in order to start resetting.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
4 Maintenance and servicing
4.1 Accident prevention ............................................................................... 92

4.2 Removing faults ..................................................................................... 93
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
4.1 Accident prevention

Be sure to observe the safety precautions in chapter 1 when carrying out
maintenance and repair work.
To be on the safe side, the most important safety precautions concerning
maintenance and repairs are repeated here.
• Switch off all electrical appliances via the main

Before carrying out maintenance and repair work:
• Lock the installation to prevent it from being ac-

switch,
cidentally switched on.
Fig. 113

Operating, maintaining or repairing the separator, the control system or the sep-
arator plant requires specialized knowledge!
CAUTION!


who
ing.

The operator of the separator, the control system or the separator plant

Westfalia Separator offers a an extensive range of training and advanced train-

ing courses. For more in-depth information, please check back with Westfalia
Separator or one of their authorised agencies.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator

Separator.
– safety risks,
ranty claims.
4.2 Removing faults

To remove faults, refer to the separate documentation “Parameters and Trouble
Shooting”.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
5 Installation and connection
5.1 Installation of the control system ........................................................... 96

5.2 Connecting the control system .............................................................. 97
5.3 Centralised control via potential-free contacts....................................... 98
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
5.1 Installation of the control system
Ge n e ral in s tallatio n in s tru c tio n s

• S p e c ia l a tte n tio n m u s t b e p a id to th e in s ta lla tio n g u id e lin e s o f We s tfa lia
S e p a ra to r.
• Mount the control system in the vicinity of the separator either on a wall or a
frame.
If you mount the control system on a wall, you must ensure a wall clearance
of approximately 20 mm.
• Seal the fastening holes on the rear of the control cabinet by putting seals un-
derneath.
• Take into consideration the following criteria when selecting the installation
site:
– Direct sunlight on the display should be avoided if possible to ensure that
the display can be read.
– Heating up of the device by external heat sources should be largely exclud-
ed.
– The control system should not be mounted in moist environments or wet
areas (see also section “Technical data”).
In the c a s e o f s h ip b o ard o p e ra tio n :

• Fasten the control system in a way to avoid vibrations.
• Do not fit the control system in the vicinity of hot pipes.
• Arrange the air discharge from the ventilator and filter so that adequate venti-
lation is assured.
Hu m id ity / d ew
If there is a risk that the control system is exposed to dew, the supply voltage
should always be switched on to keep the temperature inside the control cabinet
as constant as possible.
If power is supplied via the motor starter, the main switch should remain on.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator

tor!

ponents:
standstill.
5.2 Connecting the control system

• S p e c ia l a tte n tio n m u s t b e p a id to th e in s ta lla tio n g u id e lin e s o f We s tfa lia
S e p a ra to r.
• The inputs and outputs are allocated to the corresponding terminal blocks on
the subplate as specified in the terminal diagrams.
Op e ratin g vo lta g e s
• Connect the control system only to voltages that are specified on the name-
plate inside the control cabinet.
The standard rating for the control voltage for solenoid valves for operating
water and control air is 24 VDC.
Da n g e r th ro u g h e xte rn a l vo lta g e !
Th e vo lta g e -fre e c o n ta c ts o f th e in te rfa c e re la y c a rry e xte rn a l vo lta g e s if
th e y a re , fo r e xa m p le , u s e d a s in te rlo c ks in p u m p c o n tro ls .
The output modules are provided with short-circuit proof transistor outputs.
In s tallatio n re g u latio n s :
• Lay the signal lines separate from lines with high voltages (e.g. power cables,
motor leads etc.).
• Firmly tighten the cable glands for leading in the cables.
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
5.3 Centralised control via potential-free contacts

The integration of local separator control units into the customer's central control
systems requires the communication signals to be discussed when placing the
order.
The control unit can be linked to a cen-

tralised control system via a hardware
signal.
A potential-free contact indicating the

collective alarm can be used for cus-
tomer-side evaluation.
Fig. 116 Wiring diagram (example)
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
8555-9000-010/1207
Westfalia Separator
Mineraloil Systems GmbH
Take the Best - Separate the Rest
A company of GEA Group
Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH ● Werner -Habig-Straße 1 ● D-59302 Oelde (Germany)
Phone.: + +49 (0) 25 22/77-23 94 ●
http://www.westfalia-separator.com/● mailto:info@gea-westfalia.de
Settings and malfunctions
Designation Control unit for OS E separators with self cleaning bowl

Type D 10
No. 8555-9201-010
Edition 1010
GEA Mechanical Equipment / GEA Westfalia Separator

2 8555-9201-010 / 1010
TRANSLATION OF ORIGINAL MANUAL


Tel. +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488

8555-9201-010 / 1010 3
For your safety

symbol -


4 8555-9201-010 / 1010
1 Timer overview 7
1.1 Timerlist OSE 5-…-… .............................................................................. 8

1.2 Timerlist OSE 10-…-… ............................................................................ 9
1.3 Timerlist OSE 20-…-… .......................................................................... 10
1.4 Timerlist OSE 40-…-… .......................................................................... 11
1.5 Timerlist OSE 80-…-… .......................................................................... 12
1.6 Timerlist OSE 120-…-… ........................................................................ 13
1.7 Timer Description - T00 to T62 ............................................................ 14
2 Counter and Time Records 17
2.1 Default settings Counter - Time records ................................................ 18

2.2 Description Counter – Time Records .................................................... 19
2.3 Default settings Temperature - Ejection ................................................ 20
3 Maintenance interval settings 21
3.1 Maintenance interval of the separator ................................................... 22

3.2 Maintenance interval of the Waterdetector (WMS-Sensor) ................... 22
3.3 Waterdetector (WMS Sensor) check ..................................................... 23
4 Program logic 25
4.1 Program Logic - Symbols …- 0136 - … ................................................. 26

4.3 Program Logic - Symbols …- 91 - … ..................................................... 38
5 Trouble Shooting - Operating faults summary 45
5.1 Alarm - Overview ................................................................................... 45

5.2 Alarm #00 - Know-How protection ......................................................... 46
5.3 Alarm #01 - Motor protection ................................................................. 48
5.4 Alarm #05 - TAL product feed ............................................................... 49
5.5 Alarm #06 - TAH product feed ............................................................... 50
5.6 Alarm #07 - Ejection monitoring............................................................. 51
5.7 Alarm #08 - LAHH sludge tank .............................................................. 52
5.8 Alarm #09 - Feed pump fault ................................................................. 53
5.9 Alarm #10 - Sludge pump fault .............................................................. 54
5.10 Alarm #11 - Vibration stage 1 (Option) ................................................ 55
5.12 Alarm #13 - Fault series operation (Option) ........................................ 57
5.13 Alarm #15 - WMS system fault .............................................................. 58
5.14 Alarm #18 - Bowl monitoring.................................................................. 59
5.15 Alarm #19 - Separator motor off ............................................................ 60
5.16 Alarm #21 - WMS sensor fault (Option) ............................................... 61
5.17 Alarm #22 - Excessive running time of sludge pump ............................ 62
5.18 Alarm #23 - WMS activated too often .................................................... 63
5.19 Alarm #27 - Maintenance....................................................................... 64
5.20 Warning #28 Water content ................................................................... 65
5.21 Alarm #33 - Ejection monitoring (Option) ............................................. 66
5.22 Alarm #34 - Bowl monitoring (Option) ................................................. 67
5.23 Alarm #35 - Separator start monitoring (Option) ................................. 68

8555-9201-010 / 1010 5
5.24 Alarm #36 - Belt monitoring (Option) .................................................... 69

5.25 Alarm #37 - Max.- speed monitoring (Option) ..................................... 70
5.26 Alarm #38 - Min.- speed monitoring (Option) ...................................... 71
5.27 Alarm #39 - PT 1 monitoring (Option) ................................................... 72
5.28 Alarm #40 - No water seal ..................................................................... 73
5.29 Alarm #41 - Min. separating time ........................................................... 74
5.30 Alarm #42 - SMS sensor fault (Option) ................................................ 75
5.31 Alarm #43 - PT2 sensor active in Idle run ............................................. 76
5.32 Alarm #44 - PAL 1 clean oil discharge .................................................. 77
5.33 Alarm #45 - PAH 1 clean oil discharge .................................................. 78
5.34 Alarm #46 - Emergency stop ................................................................. 79
5.35 Alarm #48 - Water discharge overflow .................................................. 80
5.36 Alarm #49 - MAINTENANCE required WMS Sensor ............................ 81
6 Alarm Simulation und Test 83
6.1 Alarms #01 - #10 ................................................................................... 84

6.2 Alarms #11 - #20 ................................................................................... 85
6.3 Alarms #21 - #30 ................................................................................... 86
6.4 Alarms #31 - #40 ................................................................................... 87
6.5 Alarms #41 - #50 ................................................................................... 88
7 Ejection monitoring / Bowl monitoring 89
7.1 Graphic description - Ejection monitoring / Bowl monitoring Current: ... 90

7.2 Graphic description - Ejection monitoring / Bowl monitoring Speed: .... 91
8 Bowl volumes / Speed setpoints 93
8.1 Bowl-Volumes ........................................................................................ 94

8.2 Speed setpoints ..................................................................................... 94

6 8555-9201-010 / 1010
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

8555-9201-010 / 1010 7
1 Timer overview
1.1 Timerlist OSE 5-…-… .............................................................................. 8

1.2 Timerlist OSE 10-…-… ............................................................................ 9
1.3 Timerlist OSE 20-…-… .......................................................................... 10
1.4 Timerlist OSE 40-…-… .......................................................................... 11
1.5 Timerlist OSE 80-…-… .......................................................................... 12
1.6 Timerlist OSE 120-…-… ........................................................................ 13
1.7 Timer Description - T00 to T62 ............................................................ 14

8 8555-9201-010 / 1010
1.1 Timerlist OSE 5-…-…

Co n tro l Un it E40 Separator-Type
Timer OSE 5
Tim e r
limits -0136- -0196- -91-

Fu ll Te xt Dis p la y Te xt Min. / Max. HFO LO LO / (M)DO / HFO
(Option)
sec
T00 Partial ejection Partial ejection 1 1 1
T01 Displacement water Displacement 2 8 6 6 6
T02 Filling water Filling 2 8 5 5 5
T03 Waiting Waiting 5 5 5
T04 Total ejection Total ejection 1 1 1
T05 Speed recovery after Total ejection Speed rec.Total 8 8 8
T06 Closing water impulse Closingwater imp 0,08 0,08 0,08
T07 Alarm delay Alarm delay 5 15 10 10 10
T08 Waiting after displacement Wait aft.displac 5 5 5
T09 Waiting after filling Wait aft.filling 5 5 5
T10 Separator starting Separator Start 240 240 240
T11 Alarm bridging Alarm-bridging 15 40 30 30 30
T12 Waiting after 1. ejection Wait aft.1.Eject 10 10 10
T13 Speed recovery after partial ejection Speed rec.part. 8 8 8
T14 Closing water interval Closing Interval 300 1800 600 600 600
T15 Circulation valve close Circ.valve clos 60 0 0
T16 Circulation valve open Circ.valve open 5 0 0
T17 Water content bridging Water content bridg 0 600 0
T18 Sludge tank alarm delay LSHH-Sludgetank 10 10 10
T19 Water impulse by start Wat.Imp.by start 3 3 3
T20 Separation Separation 7 200 7 200 7 200
T21 Min separation time with SMS Min-Sep.-Time 600 0 0
T22 High water content High water cont. 2 30 10 10 0
T23 Feed pump delay Feedpump delay 300 300 300
T24 Sludge pump delay off Sludgep.delay 5 5 5
T25 Vibration 1 delay Vibro 1 180 180 180
T27 SMS low pressure delay SMS PSL delay 5 15 10 0 0
T28 Ejection monitoring Ejection monitor 5 5 5
T29 Brake for separator Brake for Sep. 300 300 300
T30 Cooling Interval Cooling interval - - -
T31 Cooling water Cooling water - - -
T32 WMS-Mode WMS-Mode 0 5 400 0
T33 SMS-Mode SMS-Mode 0 120 0
T34 Circulation valve delay Circ.valve delay 1 20 0 10 0
T35 Water seal broken delay Water.Seal brok. 0 2 0 1 0
T36 SMS pressure check SMS Press.Check 0 1 0
T37 SMS Waiting SMS Waiting 0 3 0
T38 WMS Sensor flushing WMS Sensor flush 0 20 0
T39 Separator off after idle run Separator off 1 800 1 800 1 800
T40 CU-Sludgepump On CU-Sludgepu.On 20 20 20
T41 CU-Sludgepump Off CU-Sludgepu.Off 600 600 600
T42 Free Free - - -
T43 Free Free - - -
T44 SMS-Sensor-Check SMS-Sensor-Check 15 40 25 25 0
T45 Free Free - - -
T46 Free Free - - -
T47 Min.SMS Time Min.SMS Time 1 25 0 20 0
T60 Start Impulse Start Impulse 6 6 0
T61 Sensor interval Sensor interval 2 2 0
T62 Sensor impulse Sensor impulse 1 1 0

8555-9201-010 / 1010 9

Co n tro l Un it E40 Separator-Type
Timer OSE 10
Tim e r
limits -0136- -0196- -91-

(Option)
sec
T42 Free Free - - -
T43 Free Free - - -
T45 Free Free - - -
T46 Free Free - - -

10 8555-9201-010 / 1010

Co n tro l Un it E40 S e p a ra to r-Typ e
Timer OS E 20
Tim e r
limits -0136- -0196- -91-

(Option)
s ec
T42 Free Free - - -
T43 Free Free - - -
T45 Free Free - - -
T46 Free Free - - -

8555-9201-010 / 1010 11

Timer OS E 40
Tim e r
limits -0136- -0196- -91-

(Option)
s ec

T42 Free Free - - -
T43 Free Free - - -
T45 Free Free - - -
T46 Free Free - - -
T47 Min.SMS Time Min.SMS Time 1 9 0 3,5 0

12 8555-9201-010 / 1010

Timer OS E 80
Tim e r
limits -0136- -0196- -91-

(Option)
s ec
T29 Brake for separator Brake for Sep. 1 200 1 200 1 200
T32 WMS-Mode WMS-Mode 0 5400 0
T42 Free Free - - -
T43 Free Free - - -
T45 Free Free - - -
T46 Free Free - - -

8555-9201-010 / 1010 13

Timer OS E 120
Tim e r
limits -0136- -0196- -91-

(Option)
s ec
T06 Closing water impulse Closingwater imp 1 1 1
T42 Free Free - - -
T43 Free Free - - -
T45 Free Free - - -
T46 Free Free - - -

14 8555-9201-010 / 1010
1.7 Timer Description - T00 to T62

Ac tive in
Tim e r De s ig n a tio n Ac tio n De s c rip tio n
-0136- -0196- -91-
Operating water valve V 3 The bowl sludge space is partial emptied by actu-
T00 Partial ejection
opens ating the operating water valve V 3. (Option) X X X
The bowl contents are displaced without loss by

Displacement water valve V 2 opening V 2. If preselected in the program, the
T01 Displacement water
opens setting will be taken from the automatic computing X X X
function during the sensor test.
The filling process creates the required water seal

inside the bowl by opening V 2. If preselected in
the program, the setting will be taken from the
T02 Filling water Filling water valve V 2 opens
automatic computing function during the sensor --- X X
test. Filling water is also active during WMS-
Sensor Check for HFO separators.
Oil feed valve V 1 closes.

After pressing start/stop, the timer is activated
T03 Waiting Clean oil discharge pressure is
before the displacement water function is initiated. X X X
reduced.
Operating water valve V 3 The bowl sludge space is emptied by actuating the
T04 Total ejection
opens operating water valve V 3. X X X
Speed recovery after Timer to compensate a speed drop occured during

T05
Total ejection total ejection. X X X
Closing water impul- Operating water valve V 3 Timer for safety water to keep the bowl closed
T06
se opens during separation. X X X
After timer is expired, product After timer is expired, the standard alarms like
T07 Alarm delay
feed valve V 1 closes. PAL1/PAH1, TAL/TAH, PAH2 ect. will be initiated. X X X
Waiting after dis- Timer to stabilize the system after displacement

T08
placement process. X X X
T09 Waiting after filling Timer to stabilize the system after filling process. --- X X
Start button of motor starter

Timer for monitoring operating speed after motor
T10 Separator starting activated and start-up of sepa-
start. X X X
rator motor.
T11 Alarm Bridging Alarms not activated. Timer to stabilize the process conditions! X X X
Waiting after 1. ejec- Timer to compensate a speed drop occured during

T12
tion 1. ejection. X X X
Speed recovery after Timer to compensate a speed drop occured during

T13
partial ejection partial ejection. (Option) X X X
T14 Closing water interval Time interval between two closing water pulses. X X X
Circulation valve
T15
close
Circulation valve V 5 closes. Timer in which the circulation valve is closed! X --- ---
Circulation valve Circulation valve V 5 opens. Timer in which the circulation valve is opened!
T16
open WMS Sensor is activated. WMS Sensor Signal is checked. X --- ---
Time to prevent wrong indication for Water content

Water content Warning for Water content is
T17
bridging not active
Warning due to high amount of filling water. Active --- X ---
after separation start and after SMS-Mode.
Sludge tank alarm Alarm is activated when timer

T18
delay
Timer delay for sludge tank alarm. X X X
has elapsed. Start of ejection

8555-9201-010 / 1010 15
Ac tive in
-0136- -0196- -91-
program.
Water impulse by Operating water valve V 3 Timer for closing the bowl after separator is on
T19
start opens operating speed. X X X
T20 Separation Product feed valve V 1 opens Timer for adjusting the separating time. X X X
In case of pressure drop (SMS Timer in which a system pressure drop is evaluat-
Min separation time PT 2) during T21 , triggering of ed as an alarm.
T21
with SMS alarm "Minimum separating X --- ---
time during SMS" Timer starts together with timer 20.
Alarm is activated when timer

has elapsed. The water dis-
Timer to trigger the alarm "High water content"
charge valve V 6 is open
only when the WMS sensor senses water during
T22 High water content while T 22 is activated, water
timer T 22. The timer is activated only when SMS X X ---
discharge valve V 6 is then
sensor PT 2 senses pressure.
closed and oil feed valve V 1
goes into circulation mode!
Feed pump is switched off Timer which switches off the feed pump after a
T23 Feed pump delay
after preset delay time of T23. delay time so that the heaters can cool off! X X X
Timer which switches off the sludge pump after a
Sludge pump delay After delay time of T 24,
T24
off sludge pump is switched off.
delay time to ensure that the sludge tank is emp- X X X
tied completely.
After delay time of T 25, an Timer which triggers the alarm "Vibration stage 1"
T25 Vibration 1 delay
ejection is initiated. only when the signal is activated for the time T 25! X X X
After delay time of T 26, the
safety water valve V 2 is
opened and the pneumatic Timer which triggers the alarm "Vibration stage 2"
T26 Vibration 2 delay
brake (option) actuated. The when the signal is activated for the time T 26! X X X
separator motor is shut down
immediately.
After delay time of T 27 within
Timer which triggers the alarm "Min separating
SMS low pressure time T 21 an alarm and ejec-
T27
delay tion is triggered in case of
time" when the signal is activated for the time T X --- ---
27!
pressure drop!
Monitoring of motor current or Timer which triggers the alarm "Ejection monitor-
speed during ejection phase. ing" when the motor current measured during this
T28 Ejection monitoring An ejection is initiated and the time does not exceed the preset offset value or X X X
product feed valve V 1 the speed measured during this time does not
switched to circulation mode. exceed the preset speed offset value.
Brake is actuated for time T Timer which automatically breaks down the sepa-
T29 Brake for separator
29. rator after an alarm "Vibration stage 2". X X X
T30 Free
T31 Free
Water discharge valve V 6
T32 WMS-Mode closes. Timer for process monitoring during separation! --- X ---
Circulation valve V 5 closes.
Water discharge valve V 6 Timer for sludge space monitoring. Only the SMS
T33 SMS-Mode closes. sensor PT 2 is activated. The sludge content of --- X ---
Circulation valve V 5 closes. the bowl is checked.
Circulation valve V 5 closes.
Circulation valve Water discharge valve V 6
T34
delay opens and closes after run-
Timer to flush the WMS sensor. --- X ---
down of the timer.
Circulation valve V 5 opens.
Water discharge valve V 6 Timer which triggers the alarm "Water seal bro-
Water seal broken closes. ken" only when the WMS sensor senses oil for the
T35
delay Triggering of alarm "water time T 35. The timer is activated only when SMS --- X ---
seal broken" after timer run- sensor PT 2 senses pressure.
down.

16 8555-9201-010 / 1010
Ac tive in
-0136- -0196- -91-
Bowl is filled in intervals controlled by T37 with
Filling water valve V 2 opens filling water to check whether the sludge space is
T36 SMS pressure check in intervals until SMS sensor filled with sludge. If the sludge space is not full, X --- ---
PT 2 is activated. the SMS sensor PT 2 must respond to pressure. If
pressure is not increasing, an ejection is triggered.
Timer to set the interval between two filling water
Filling water valve V 2 closes.
T37 SMS Waiting
SMS sensor PT 2 is activated.
pulses for sludge space monitoring! See also X --- ---
SMS pressure check, above.
WMS sensor not activated.
SMS sensor PT 2 not activat- Timer to flush the sensing line after the first pro-
WMS Sensor flush-
T38
ing
ed. gram start so that it is clean and excessive filling --- X ---
Water discharge valve V 6 water is discharged!
opens.
Separator off after After delay T 39, the separa- Timer delay for separator motor stop. Function
T39
idle run tor motor is switched off. must be preselected in the program. X X X
Timer to operate the sludge pump until the sludge
T40 CU-Sludge pump On Sludge pump activated.
tank is completely emptied. X X X
T41 CU-Sludge pump Off Sludge pump not activated. Time interval between two sludge pump starts. X X X
T42 Free
T43 Free
Circulation valve V 5 closes. Timer in which the function of the SMS sensor PT
Water discharge valve V 6 2 is tested. If T44 is elapsed without SMS Sensor
T44 SMS-Sensor-Check
closes. PT 2 Signal, Alarm "SMS sensor failure during X X ---
SMS sensor PT 2 is activated. WMS-SMS check" is triggered.
T45 Free
T46 Free
When SMS Sensor PT 2 is Capacity and machine type-dependent timer
activated while T 47 is run- which determines the increse of water in the lube
ning, the water discharge oil during WMS mode. The pressure increase is
T47 Min.SMS Time
valve V 6 is opened for 3 evaluated as a function of T 47 over several --- X ---
seconds and Counter 5 successive cycles which are defined via counter 5
counts the PT 2 signal. "SMS time interval water content"
Timer to fill filling water into the bowl. This timer
runs before timer T61 and T62. Timer is required
T60 Start Impulse Filling water valve V 2 opens.
for the automatic calculation of timers 01 and 02. X X ---
Timer is protected.
Timer to set the interval between two sensor

T61 Sensor interval Filling water valve V 2 closes. impulses, T62. X X ---
Timer is protected.
Timer to fill filling water into the separator bowl.

This timer operates pulse-wise together with timer
T62 Sensor impulse Filling water valve V 2 opens. T61 after timer T60. Timer is required for the X X ---
automatic calculation of the timers 01 and 02.
Timer is protected.

8555-9201-010 / 1010 17
2 Counter and Time Records
22.1 Default settings Counter - Time records ................................................ 18

2.2 Description Counter – Time Records .................................................... 19
2.3 Default settings Temperature - Ejection ................................................ 20

2.1
18
Te xt Dis p la y Re m a rks OS E OS E OS E OS E OS E OS E
Fu ll Te xt
(P = S e tp oin t; A = a c tu al va lu e ) 5 10 20 40 80 120
Default settings Counter - Time records

Counter
C1 Flushing:
C1 Flushing Flushing counter
P: 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
A: 0
C2 Partial Ejection:
C2 Partial Ejection Partial ejection counter 5 5 5 5 5 5
(Option) P: 5
A: 0
C3 SMS Filling:
C3 SMS-Filling SMS fillng counter
P: 3 5 5 5 5 5 5
A: 0
C4 Sensor Check:
C4 Sensor-Check Sensor check counter 10 10 10 10 10 10
(Option) P: 10
A: 0
C5 Water content
C5 C5 SMS Time interval SMS Time interval counter
P: 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
(Option) Water cont water content Warning

A: 0
Time Record (TR… = Time Record …)

WMS -tim e
Time Record for WMS Time
Max. in 24 h 60 min
TR1 TR1 WMS time during operation in last TR3 40 60 150 150 240 300
(24h) hours. Act. in 24 h 0 min (Act. in = actuel 24h)
Last. in 24 h 0 min (Last in = previous 24h)
S lud g e p .-tim e
Time Record for sludge- Max. in 24 h 30 min
TR2 TR2 Sludgep. time pump time operation in last 30 30 30 40 50 60
TR3 (24h) hours. Act. in 24 h 0 min (Act. in = actuel 24h)
Last. in 24 h 0 min (Last in = previous 24h)
8555-9201-010 / 1010
Tim e Re c o rd re s e t
TR3 Time Records Reset of all Time Records P: 24
TR3 reset after TR3 (24h) hours. A: 0 24 h 24 h 24 h 24 h 24 h 24 h
8555-9201-010 / 1010 19
2.2 Description Counter – Time Records
Active in:
No . Designation: Status: Description:
-0136- -0196- -91-
Co u n te r (C… = Counter …)
Counter after how many ejections a
Flushing
C1 Counter for ejection doubled ejection for flushing the bowl X X X
Counter
will be initiated.
Counter after how many partial ejec-
C2 Counter for partial
Partial Ejection tions a doubled full ejection for flush- X X X
(Op tio n) ejections.
ing the bowl will be initiated.
Counter for Filling-
SMS Filling Counter for amount of fillingwater
C3 water impulse after --- X ---
Counter impulses after SMS Mode T33.
SMS Mode T33.
C4 Sensor Check Counter for Sensor Counter after how many ejections the
X X ---
(Op tio n) Counter check SMS Sensor Check will be initiated.
Counter for counting how many con-
SMS Time inter-
Counter for SMS Sen- secutive times SMS Sensor PT 2 was
C5 val counter for
sor signal during WMS activated shorter than T47. Gives --- X ---
(Op tio n) water content
Mode. warning, if water content in oil is too
warning
high.
Tim e Re c o rd s (TR… = Time Record …)

During operation, the time where the
WMS-Sensor is activated due to water
TR1 WMS-Time indication will be recorded. Time Re- X X ---
cords will be deleted when TR3 is
expired.
Time Records for recording the time
Sludgepump - where the sludge pump is in opera-
TR2 X X X
Time tion. Time Records will be deleted
when TR3 is expired.
When the presetted time is expired all
Time Records Time Records will be transferred to
TR3 X X X
reset the “Last in xh” values and values in
“Act. in xh” will be reset.

2.3
20
Co n tro l Un it E40
Ala rm e Display Text Remarks S e p a ra to r-Typ e
Full Text:
Default settings Temperature - Ejection

Control Unit:
Te m p e ra tu re - OS E
Mo n ito rin g DO MDO LO HFO
Separation Temperature 20 °C 40 °C 95 °C 98 °C
TAH OIL FEED
Temp. > max
TAH OIL FEED Alarm for an increase of the
Temp. > max oil temperature.
Separation-Stop 30 °C 50 °C 105 °C 105 °C
Alarm#06 press
HELP
TAL OIL FEED
Temp. < min
TAL OIL FEED Alarm for a decrease of the
Temp. < min oil temperature.
Separation-Stop 10 °C 30 °C 85 °C 90 °C
Alarm#05 press
HELP
Eje c tio n -
OS E 5 OS E 10 OS E 20 OS E 40 OS E 80 OS E 120
Mo n ito rin g
EJECTION
MONITORING:
Alarm for monitoring the
Eject. current < Value depending on the con-
Ejection monitoring ejection after separation or
Eject. current < Offset after SMS ejection.
Offset ditions of the power supply 0,5 A 0,5 A 0,5 A 3A 5A 8A
Separation-Stop system and the clutch shoes!
Current is monitored.
Alarm#07 press
HELP
EJECTION
8555-9201-010 / 1010
MONITORING:
Alarm for monitoring the
Ejection monitoring Eject. speed < Off- Value depending on the con-
ejection after separation or
Eject. speed < Offset
after SMS ejection.
set ditions of the power supply 100 U/min 100 U/min 100 U/min 100 U/min 100 U/min 100 U/min
(Option) Separation-Stop system and the clutch shoes!
Speed is monitored.
Alarm#33 press
HELP
8555-9201-010 / 1010 21
3 Maintenance interval settings
3.1 Maintenance interval of the separator ................................................... 22

3.2 Maintenance interval of the Waterdetector (WMS-Sensor) ................... 22
3.3 Waterdetector (WMS Sensor) check ..................................................... 23

22 8555-9201-010 / 1010
3.1 Maintenance interval of the separator
Maintenance-Interval:
Adjust operating hours
Set: 4000 h 0m 0s
Actual: 22 h 12 m 46 s
The factory setting for "Set" is a maintenance interval of 4000 hours as specified
in the separator instruction manual. Under "Actual", the operating hours of the
separator are counted.
When the pre-set number of operating hours is reached, a common alarm is ac-
tivated and a corresponding warning appears in the display. A common alarm
does not interrupt the separating program and must be acknowledged using the
ACK key.
Note:
Please take the maintenance interval setting from the instruction manual of the
separator used.
3.2 Maintenance interval of the Waterdetector (WMS-Sensor)
Maintenance-Interval WMS
Adjust operating hours
Set: 168 h 0m 0s
Actual: 22 h 12 m 46 s
Last water signal WMS:

211 h 48 m 21 s
The factory setting for "Set" is a maintenance interval of 168 hours (1 week).
Under "Actual", the operating hours of the WMS-Sensor water signal is counted.
In the case the “Actual” counter came up to the preset operating hours, a
maintenance message will be activated with a corresponding hint that the WMS-
Sensor Check must be done! The message does not interrupt the separation
process and must be acknowledged with the „ACK“button after the WMS Sen-
sor Check. The acknowledgement resets the the “Actual” value.
Under “Last water signal WMS” the operating hours of the WMS Sensor since
the last water indication are counted. Only a water signal resets the operating
hours for “Last water signal WMS”.

8555-9201-010 / 1010 23
3.3 Waterdetector (WMS Sensor) check
In the case the message „Maintenance WMS-Sensor“ occurs in the display, a manual check of the WMS-
Sensor function must be done. Please follow up the described steps!
Step
1 • Stop separation sequence by pushing touch key “Prog. OFF” on the control unit.
2 • Unscrew filling and displacement water

line (1).
3 • Remove the plug of the coupler socket (2).

• Assemble and connect filling and dis-
placement water feed line (1) with coupler
socket (2).

24 8555-9201-010 / 1010
Step
4 • Turn over manual overide (A) of the filling

and displacement water feed valve (right
solenoid valve of the solenoid valve as-
sembly complete) for a maximum time of 5
seconds.
A:
Position 1: closed
Position 2: open
• Check signal input of the waterdetector (WMS-Sensor).

5 At the control unit
• Call up Digital-Input „DI 0.5“.

– DI 0.5 must change from status „0“ to „1“.
• Take note to the chapter „Maintenance schedule“

• Remove waterdetector (WMS-Sensor),
In the case that the signal did not change,
of the instruction manual of the used separator.
clean it and check function.
• Waterdetector (WMS-Sensor) must be

If the malfunction still persists,
exchanged.
6 • Check display „Maintenance-Interval WMS“ at control unit.

– The values for „Actual“ and „Last water signal WMS“ must be set back to 0.
7 • Remove filling and displacement water

line (1) from the coupler socket (2) and re-
connect it with the handle piece.
• Plug oft he coupler socket (2) must be

installed again.
8 Start of the separation process is possible by pushing the touch key „Prig. ON“ at the control unit.

8555-9201-010 / 1010 25
4 Program logic

4.3 Program Logic - Symbols …- 91 - … ..................................................... 38

26 8555-9201-010 / 1010
4.1 Program Logic - Symbols …- 0136 - …
Lo c a tio n : S ym b o l: Na m e o f Co m p o n e n t:
Wa te r fe e d PCV1 Pressure reducing valve

V2 Filling-, Displacement water valve
V3 Operating water valve
Dirty o il fe e d V4 Preset valve

V1 Feed valve
TI Temperature indicator
TT Temperatur Transmitter
Cle a n o il d is c h a rg e PI1 Pressure indicator

PT1 Pressure transmitter
V7 Clean oil discharge valve (option)
Dirty o il re c irc u la tio n - -
S e n s in g lin e V5 Circulation valve

V6 Water discharge valve
WMS Water monitoring sensor
PT2 Presssure transmitter (SMS)
PI2 Pressure indicator (option)
S lu d g e ta n k LSHH Level switch high high

LSH Level switch high
LSL Level switch low

8555-9201-010 / 1010 27
Diagram - 0136 - Chapter “A”
A
A
Power supply
ON
Selftest
Control Unit
Motor Start button activated

Pump Start button activated
Separator Start (T10)
Water impuls by Start (T19)
Closing water program

Closing water interval (T14)
Closing water impuls (T06)
Process
options
activated
D
“Process-Start” key activated
Start of
Sensor Check Sequence
Precondition:
Oil temperature > TSL setpoint
Oil temperature < TSH setpoint
LSHH not activated
Vibro II not activated
B

28 8555-9201-010 / 1010
Diagram - 0136 - Chapter “B”
B
B
Start of
Separation sequence
Process
monitoring
activated
E
Ejection program
Waiting - Start (T03)
Displacement (T01)
Waiting after displacement (T08)
Total ejection (T04)
Waiting after first ejection (T12)
Speed recovery (T05)
Closing water impulse (T06)

Separation (T20)
Bridging after ejection (T11)
SMS Sensor PT 2 activated

Circulation valve closes (T15)
Circulation valve opens (T16)
Stop of separation sequence

C

8555-9201-010 / 1010 29
Diagram - 0136 - Chapter “C”
C
C
“Process-Stop” key activated or

Motor OFF activated or
SMS filling Counter 3 elapsed or
Flushing Counter 1 elapsed
Ejection program
Displacement (T01)
Separator
Ready for operation
A

30 8555-9201-010 / 1010
Diagram - 0136 - Chapter “D”
D
D
Process
options
activated
Separator OFF Motor OFF

mode activated Button activated
Separator OFF mode Motor OFF

Separator OFF (T39) A
Alarm
Separator OFF activated
after (T39)
A

8555-9201-010 / 1010 31
Diagram - 0136 - Chapter “E”
E
E
Process
monitoring
activated
PAL / PAH or LSHH activated LSL / LSH activated

TAL / TAH activated LSHH Sludge tank (T18) Start of Sludge pump
Alarm delay (T07) Total ejection (T04) Sludge pump delay (T24)
Sludge pump OFF
Option CU:
CU-Sludgepump On (T40)
CU-Sludgepump Off (T41)
CU = Com p a c t Un it
Alarm
PAL / PAH
TAL / TAH
LAHH
A

32 8555-9201-010 / 1010


V1 Feed valve

S e n s in g lin e V5 Circulation valve

V6 Water discharge valve
WMS Water monitoring sensor
PT2 Presssure transmitter (SMS)


8555-9201-010 / 1010 33
A
A
Power supply
ON
Selftest
Control Unit


Process
optionens
activated
D
Start of
Sensor Check Sequence
Precondition:
LSHH not activated
B

34 8555-9201-010 / 1010
B
B
Start of
Separation sequence
Process
monitoring
activated
E
Ejection program
Displacement (T01)
Separation program
Filling water (T02)
Waiting after filling (T09)
Separation (T20)
Sensor flushing (T38)
SMS Sensor PT2 not activated

WMS Mode (T32)
SMS Mode (T33)
SMS pressure check (T36)
SMS waiting (T37)

C

8555-9201-010 / 1010 35
C
C
“Prog. OFF” key activated or

SMS filling Counter 3 elapsed or
Flushing counter 1 elapsed
Sensor Check not okay
Ejection program
Displacement (T01)
Separator
Ready for operation
A

36 8555-9201-010 / 1010
D
D
Process
options
activated


Alarm
after (T39)
A

8555-9201-010 / 1010 37
E
E
Process
monitoring
activated

Sludge pump OFF
Option CU:
CU = Com p a c t Un it
Alarm
PAL / PAH
TAL / TAH
LAHH
A

38 8555-9201-010 / 1010


V1 Feed valve

S e n s in g lin e PT2 Presssure transmitter (PAH)



8555-9201-010 / 1010 39
A
A
Power supply
ON
Selftest
Control Unit


Process
optionens
activated
D
Start of
Separation Sequence
Precondition:
LSHH not activated
B

40 8555-9201-010 / 1010
B
B
Start of
Separation sequence
Process
monitoring
activated
E
Ejection program
Displacement (T01)
Separation program
Filling water (T02)
Waiting after filling (T09)
Separation (T20)
SMS Sensor PT2 not activated

Separation (T20)
Stop of Separation sequence

C

8555-9201-010 / 1010 41
C
C
Stop of Separation sequence
“Process-Stop” key activated or

Flushing Counter 1 elapsed
Ejection program
Displacement (T01)
Separator
Ready for operation
A

42 8555-9201-010 / 1010
D
D
Process
options
activated


Alarm
after (T39)
A

8555-9201-010 / 1010 43
E
E
Process
monitoring
activated

Sludge pump OFF
Option CU:
Alarm
PAL / PAH CU = Com p a c t Un it
TAL / TAH
LAHH
A

44 8555-9201-010 / 1010
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

8555-9201-010 / 1010 45
5 Trouble Shooting - Operating faults summary
5.1 Alarm - Overview ................................................................................... 45

5.2 Alarm #00 - Know-How protection ......................................................... 46
5.3 Alarm #01 - Motor protection ................................................................. 48
5.4 Alarm #05 - TAL product feed ............................................................... 49
5.5 Alarm #06 - TAH product feed ............................................................... 50
5.6 Alarm #07 - Ejection monitoring............................................................. 51
5.7 Alarm #08 - LAHH sludge tank .............................................................. 52
5.8 Alarm #09 - Feed pump fault ................................................................. 53
5.9 Alarm #10 - Sludge pump fault .............................................................. 54
5.12 Alarm #13 - Fault series operation (Option) ........................................ 57
5.13 Alarm #15 - WMS system fault .............................................................. 58
5.14 Alarm #18 - Bowl monitoring.................................................................. 59
5.15 Alarm #19 - Separator motor off ............................................................ 60
5.16 Alarm #21 - WMS sensor fault (Option) ............................................... 61
5.17 Alarm #22 - Excessive running time of sludge pump ............................ 62
5.18 Alarm #23 - WMS activated too often .................................................... 63
5.19 Alarm #27 - Maintenance....................................................................... 64
5.20 Warning #28 Water content ................................................................... 65
5.21 Alarm #33 - Ejection monitoring (Option) ............................................. 66
5.22 Alarm #34 - Bowl monitoring (Option) ................................................. 67
5.23 Alarm #35 - Separator start monitoring (Option) ................................. 68
5.24 Alarm #36 - Belt monitoring (Option) .................................................... 69
5.25 Alarm #37 - Max.- speed monitoring (Option) ..................................... 70
5.26 Alarm #38 - Min.- speed monitoring (Option) ...................................... 71
5.27 Alarm #39 - PT 1 monitoring (Option) ................................................... 72
5.28 Alarm #40 - No water seal ..................................................................... 73
5.29 Alarm #41 - Min. separating time ........................................................... 74
5.30 Alarm #42 - SMS sensor fault (Option) ................................................ 75
5.31 Alarm #43 - PT2 sensor active in Idle run ............................................. 76
5.32 Alarm #44 - PAL 1 clean oil discharge .................................................. 77
5.33 Alarm #45 - PAH 1 clean oil discharge .................................................. 78
5.34 Alarm #46 - Emergency stop ................................................................. 79
5.35 Alarm #48 - Water discharge overflow .................................................. 80
5.36 Alarm #49 - MAINTENANCE required WMS Sensor ............................ 81

46 8555-9201-010 / 1010
5.1 Alarm - Overview

Active in
Alarm No. Designation
-0136- -0196- -91-
#00 Know-How Protection X X X
#01 Motor Protection X X X
#05 TAL OIL Feed X X X
#06 TAH OIL Feed X X X
#07 Ejection Monitoring X X X
#08 LAHH Sludge Tank X X X
#09 Feed Pump Fault X X X
#10 Sludge Pump Fault X X X
#11 Vibration Stage 1 X X X
#12 Vibration Stage 2 X X X
#13 Fault Series Operation X --- ---
#15 WMS System Fault X X ---
#18 Bowl Monitoring X X X
#19 Separator Motor Off X X X
#22 Excessive Running Time Of Sludge Pump X X X
#23 WMS Activated Too Often X X ---
#27 Maintenance X X X
#28 Water content --- X ---
#31 TAL Oil Feed Warning X X X
#32 TAH Oil Feed Warning X X X
#33 Ejection Monitoring X X X
#34 Bowl Monitoring speed X X X
#35 Motor Start monitoring X X X
#36 Belt monitoring X X X
#37 Max.- speed monitoring X X X
#38 Min.- speed monitoring X X X
#39 PT 1 Monitoring X X X
#40 No Water Seal --- X ---
#41 Min. Separating Time X --- ---
#42 SMS Sensor Fault X X ---
#43 SMS Sensor Active X X ---
#44 PAL 1 Clean Oil Discharge X X X
#45 PAH 1 Clean Oil Discharge X X X
#46 EMERGENCY STOP X X X
#48 Water discharge overflow --- --- X
#49 MAINTENANCE required WMS Sensor X X ---
5.2 Alarm #00 - Know-How protection

8555-9201-010 / 1010 47
KNOW-HOW PROTECTION
No GEA-specif. device.
No warranty by op.
Alarm#00 press ENTER
Display shows Possible causes Remedy
• Used device is not distributed by Use only devices distributed by GEA-
Westfalia.
• No warranty during use of the de-
GEA-Westfalia.
Contact customer service!
vice in an irregular manner.
Help text – Information on control
ENTER Step 1 Alarm acknowledgement
Press > F1 < button

HELP Step 2 For Help Function
button > HOME < back
KNOW-HOW PROTECTION
No GEA-specific dev.
F1 Page 1 No warranty by op.
Please check: ->
Contact Westfalia
Customer service!
Page 2
->
Page 3
Return with ENTER

48 8555-9201-010 / 1010
5.3 Alarm #01 - Motor protection
MOTOR PROTECTION
Temp. > max temp.
Motor switched off
• No motor protection switch signal Check functionality of motor protection
•
switch
Release brake
•
Brake not released
Check thermistor relay and cabling
•
Thermistor relay has triggered
Check operating water valve V2
•
Operating water valve V2 open
Check drive
•
Drive blocked
Check number of clutch shoes
•
Wrong number of clutch shoes
Check capacity
•
Feed capacity too high
Motor ventilation not adequate Improve motor ventilation
max temp. = see motor plate
Press > F1 < button

Button > HOME < back
MOTOR PROTECTION
Please check:
F1 Page 1
Motor protection
Function ->
Brake
Thermistor relay
Page 2
Operat. water valve
no. of clutch shoes ->
Drive blocked
Feed capacity
Page 3
Motor ventilation
Return with ENTER

8555-9201-010 / 1010 49
5.4 Alarm #05 - TAL product feed

TAL PRODUCT FEED
Temp. < min
Separation - Stop
• Product too cold before pre-heater Check settling tank temperature
• Feed capacity too high

(Settling tank applies to HFO only)
Check feed capacity
• Setting TAL has been set too high Check setting TAL
• Temperature of heating medium is Check temperature of heating medium
• Temperature regulator defective

too low
Check temperature regulator
• E-pre-heater basic load or regulating Check switching stages electrically
• Pre-heater dirty
stage switched
Check pre-heater
• PT100 sensor defective Check sensor
Press > F1 < button

PRODUCT TEMP. MIN.

Please check:
F1 Page 1
Settling tank temp.
Feed capacity ->
Setting TAL
Temp. of heating
Page 2
medium
Temp. regulator ->
Switching stages el.
pre-heater
Page 3
PT 100 sensor
Return with ENTER

50 8555-9201-010 / 1010
5.5 Alarm #06 - TAH product feed

TAH PRODUCT FEED
Temp. > max
Separation - Stop
• Check regulating valve
•
Product too hot
Check feed capacity
•
Feed capacity too low
Check setting TAH
•
Setting TAH too low
E-pre-heater basic load or regulating Check switching stages electrically
• Temperature regulator defective

stages switched
Check temperature regulator
• PT 100 sensor defective Check PT 100 sensor
Press > F1 < button

PRODUCT TEMP. MAX.

Please check:
F1 Page 1
Regulating valve
Feed capacity ->
Setting TAH
Switching stages el.
Page 2
Temp. regulator
PT 100 sensor ->
Page 3
Return with ENTER

8555-9201-010 / 1010 51
5.6 Alarm #07 - Ejection monitoring

EJECTION MONITORING
current < Offset
Separation – Stop
• Operating water valve V3 does not Check function bowl hydraulics with
valve V3
• Connector on valve V3 loose
open
Check connector on V3
• Offset setting for discharge current Check offset setting
• Water quantity at V3 too low

too high
Check water quantity
• Setting of monitoring time for timer Check timer 28
• Current evaluation defective

28 is too short
Check current converter electrically
• Pre-strainer at V3 dirty Check pre-strainer
• Clutch shoes worn or oily Check clutch shoes
Press > F1 < button

EJECTION MONITORING
Please check:
F1 Page 1
Function of bowl
Hydraulics with V3 ->
Connector valve V3
Current offset
Page 2
setting
Water quantity ->
TIMER 28
Current converter
Page 3
Pre-strainer
Return with ENTER

52 8555-9201-010 / 1010
5.7 Alarm #08 - LAHH sludge tank

LAHH SLUDGE TANK
Sludge tank - full
Separation - Stop
• Sludge pump not functioning Check sludge pump
• Bowl is open Check bowl hydraulics
• Product overflow due to excessive Check valves in the clean oil line and
setting V7
• Closing water pulse T06 too long
clean oil discharge pressure
Check closing water pulse T06
• Polyamide sealing ring defective Check polyamide sealing ring
• Sealing rings in the bowl defective Check sealing rings
• Level switch LSHH dirty or defective Check level switch LSHH
Press > F1 < button

LSHH SLUDGE TANK

Please check:
F1 Page 1
Sludge pump
Bowl hydraulics ->
Valves in the
clean oil line
Page 2
Setting V7
Closing water pulse ->
Polyamide
sealing ring
Page 3
Switch LSHH
Return with ENTER

8555-9201-010 / 1010 53
5.8 Alarm #09 - Feed pump fault

FEED PUMP FAULT
Motor protection
Separation - Stop
• Pump overloaded Check protection switch, current of
•
motor circuit breaker
Check pump
•
Pump mechanically blocked
Check valves
•
Valves in the feed line closed
Check feed temperature
•
Feed temperature
Check filter
•
Filter in feed line dirty
Electrical connections wrong Check electrical connections and ca-
bling
Press > F1 < button

FEED PUMP FAULT

Please check:
F1 Page 1
Current consumption
Protection switch ->
Pump
Valves
Page 2
Feed temperature
Filter ->
Electr. connections
Cabling
Page 3
Return with ENTER

54 8555-9201-010 / 1010
5.9 Alarm #10 - Sludge pump fault

SLUDGE PUMP FAULT
Program - stop

• Pump overloaded Check protection switch and current of
•
circuit breaker
Check pump
•
Pump mechanically blocked
Check valves
•
Valves in the discharge line closed
Check pipe work
•
Pipe work dirty
Electrical connections wrong Check electrical connections and ca-
bling
Press > F1 < button

SLUDGE PUMP FAULT

Please check
F1 Page 1
Current consumption
Protection switch ->
Pump
Valves
Page 2
Electrical connection
Pipe work ->
Cabling
Page 3
Return with ENTER

8555-9201-010 / 1010 55
5.10 Alarm #11 - Vibration stage 1 (Option)

VIBRATION STAGE 1:
Motor off after T25

• Limit value 1 longer than T25 Check T25
• Uneven solid deposits in the bowl Check solids holding space and poly-
• Vibrosensor has become detached

amide sealing ring
Check sensor fixing
• Limit value 1 set to low Check setting
• Bowl not properly assembled or Open and clean bowl, assemble in
damaged or wrong parts of other accordance with operating instructions;
bowl use only parts with the same series
• External vibrations
number
Check foundation fixing
Press > F1 < button

VIBRATION STAGE 1
Please check:
F1 Page 1
Solids holding space
TIMER 25 ->
Polyamide sealing
ring
Page 2
Sensor fixing
Limit value 1 ->
Correct bowl parts
Foundation fixing
Page 3
Return with ENTER

56 8555-9201-010 / 1010
5.11 Alarm #12 - Vibration stage 2 (Option)

VIBRATION STAGE 2:
Separator - off

• Setting of limit value 2 is too low Check setting
• Irregular solid deposits in the bowl Check solids holding space and poly-
• Vibrosensor has become detached

amide sealing ring
Check sensor fixing
• Bowl not properly assembled or Open and clean bowl, assemble in
damaged or wrong parts of other accordance with operating instructions;
bowl use only parts with the same series
• External vibrations
number
Check foundation fixing
Press > F1 < button

VIBRATION STAGE 2
Please check:
F1 Page 1
Solids holding space
Limit value 2 ->
Polyamide sealing
ring
Page 2
Sensor fixing
Correct bowl parts ->
Foundation fixing
Page 3
Return with ENTER

8555-9201-010 / 1010 57
5.12 Alarm #13 - Fault series operation (Option)

FAULT SERIES
OPERATION Line or
preselection not OK
• Series key not pressed for both con- Press series key for both controls
• Both separators not ready to operate Check that both separators are ready
trols
• Line (MPI) for series operation de-

to operate
Check line (MPI)
• Micro switch in rwrong position

fective or not present
Check according manual
MPI = Multi Point Interface
Press > F1 < button

FAULT SERIES OPERAT.

Please check:
F1 Page 1
Series key pressed
on both machines ->
Are both separators
ready to operate
Page 2
Line MPI
->
Page 3
Return with ENTER

58 8555-9201-010 / 1010
5.13 Alarm #15 - WMS system fault

WMS SYSTEM FAULT
Too much water
Separation - Stop
• Water content in feed too high Check product feed
• Too much filling water setting of T02 Check T02
• Filling water valve V2 leaking

too long
Check filling water valve V2
• Wrong setting on evaluation relay Check setting on evaluation relay
• Setting of timer T22 too short Check setting
In an emergency, extend T22 during
this phase
Press > F1 < button

WMS SYSTEM FAULT

Please check:
F1 Page 1
Water content
in feed ->
Filling water
quantity
Page 2
Setting T02
Valve V2 ->
Setting on
measuring relay
Page 3
Setting T22
Return with ENTER

8555-9201-010 / 1010 59
5.14 Alarm #18 - Bowl monitoring

BOWL MONITORING
Current too high
during TIMER 06
• T06 closing water pulse too long, Check T06
• Water pressure for hydraulics during

bowl has opened
Check water pressure with open valve
V3
• Valve V3 is dirty, sticks, stays open
T06 too high, bowl has opened
Check valve V3
• New clutch shoes installed

for too long
Check current value
• New belt installed Check current value
In emergency, deselect function
Press > F1 < button

BOWL MONITORING
Please check:
F1 Page 1 TIMER T06
Current value ->
Water pressure
for hydraulic
Page 2 Function V3
->
Page 3
Return with ENTER

60 8555-9201-010 / 1010
5.15 Alarm #19 - Separator motor off

SEPARATOR MOTOR OFF
Sep. in circulation
T 39 expired M. off
• Separator running in circulation T39 Press program start before expiry of
T39
• Setting of T39 too short
has expired
Check T39
In an emergency, deselect function
Press > F1 < button

SEPARATOR MOTOR OFF

Please check:
F1 Page 1 TIMER 39
Expired ->
Page 2
->
Page 3
Return with ENTER

8555-9201-010 / 1010 61
5.16 Alarm #21 - WMS sensor fault (Option)

WMS SENSOR FAULT
during WMS CHECK
during TIMER 45
• WMS sensor dirty Check WMS sensor
• WMS sensor malfunction Check WMS sensor
• Water discharge valve V6 malfunc- Check function V6 or V5
• Insufficient water during T45

tion
• T45 too short Check T45
• T 02 too short (HFO) Check T02 (HFO)
Press > F1 < button

WMS SENSOR FAULT

Please check:
F1 Page 1 WMS sensor
is dirty ->
Function WMS
sensor
Page 2 Function V6/V5
Water quantity ->
Timer 45
Timer 02 (HFO)
Page 3
too short
Return with ENTER

62 8555-9201-010 / 1010
5.17 Alarm #22 - Excessive running time of sludge pump

EXCESSIVE RUNNING
TIME OF SLUDGE PUMP
In TR3 hours
• Setting of TR2 time recording too short Check TR2 time recording
• Bowl leakage Check bowl function/hydraulics
• Excessive water content in feed Dewater product upstream of the separator
• Light product overflow because clean Check setting of pure oil discharge pressure
• Capacity of sludge pumps too low

discharge pressure too high
Check pump function
TR1 = Time record of WMS water sensor during HFO operation, TR1 will
be deleted when TR3 has expired.
TR2 = Time record of sludge pump operation, TR2 will be deleted when
TR3 has expired.
TR3 = Time counter factory setting 24 h
Press > F1 < button

EXCESSIVE RUNNING TIME

OF SLUDGE PUMP
F1 Page 1 Please check:
TR2 time recording ->
Bowl function
Bowl leakage
Page 2 Water content in
Product ->
Pump function
Page 3
Return with ENTER

8555-9201-010 / 1010 63
5.18 Alarm #23 - WMS activated too often

WMS ACTIVATED
TOO OFTEN

• Setting of TR1 time recording too short Check TR1 time recording
• Water content in product too high Dewater product upstream of the separator
• Valve V2 not tight Check V2
TR1 = Time record of WMS water sensor during HFO operation, TR1 will
be deleted when TR3 has expired.
TR2 = Time record of sludge pump operation, TR2 will be deleted when
TR3 has expired.
TR3 = Time counter factory setting 24 h
Press > F1 < button

WMS ACTIVATED
TO OFTEN
TR1 time recording ->
Water content in
product
Page 2 whether water valve
V2 is not tight ->
Page 3
Return with ENTER

64 8555-9201-010 / 1010
5.19 Alarm #27 - Maintenance

Maintenance
required see manual

• Operating hours have reached Carry out maintenance according
• 4000 ; 8000
manual
Use set of spare parts
• 12000 ; 16000 Order spare parts from
• or multiple hours
Westfalia Sep. Mineraloil Systems
Order service from
Westfalia Sep. Mineraloil Systems
Press > F1 < button

MAINTENANCE
required
F1 Page 1 operating hours
have reached ->
4000; 8000
12000; 16000 hours
Page 2 or multiple
carry out ->
Maintenance according
manual
Page 3
Return with ENTER

8555-9201-010 / 1010 65
5.20 Warning #28 Water content

WARNING
WATER CONTENT

• Water content in product increased. Dewater product and check reason
• T47 too long not consistent with Check setting
• Filling water valve V2 not tight

throughput capacity
Check valve V2
Press > F1 < button

button > HOME < back
WARNING
Water content
F1 Page 1
Please check:
Water content in ->
Product
Setting TIMER 47
Page 2 and feed capacity
whether valve V2 ->
is not tight
Page 3
Return with ENTER

66 8555-9201-010 / 1010
5.21 Alarm #33 - Ejection monitoring (Option)

EJECTION MONITORING
Eject. speed < Offset
Separation – Stop
• Operating water valve V3 does not Check function bowl hydraulics with
valve V3
• Connector on valve V3 loose
open
Check connector on V3
• Offset setting for discharge speed Check offset setting
• Water quantity at V3 too low

too high
• Setting of monitoring time for timer Check timer 28
• Speed pick up defective

28 is too short
Check speed pick up
• Pre-strainer at V3 dirty Check pre-strainer
• Clutch shoes worn or oily Check clutch shoes
Alarm#33 only activ if speed pick-up is installed!
Press > F1 < button

EJECTION MONITORING
Please check:
F1 Page 1
Function of bowl
Hydraulics with V3 ->
Connector valve V3
Speed offset
Page 2
Water quantity
T28 ->
Speed pick up
electrically
Page 3
Pre-strainer
Return with ENTER

8555-9201-010 / 1010 67
5.22 Alarm #34 - Bowl monitoring (Option)

BOWL MONITORING
Speed drop too high
during TIMER 06
• T06 closing water pulse too long, Check T06
• Water pressure for hydraulics during

bowl has opened
Check water pressure with open valve
V3
• Valve V3 is dirty, sticks, stays open
T06 too high, bowl has opened
Check valve V3
• New clutch shoes installed

for too long
Check current value
• New belt installed Check current value
Press > F1 < button

BOWL MONITORING
Please check:
F1 Page 1 TIMER T06
Speed value ->
Water pressure
for hydraulic
Page 2 Function V3
->
Page 3
Return with ENTER

68 8555-9201-010 / 1010
5.23 Alarm #35 - Separator start monitoring (Option)

SEPARATOR-START
monitoring
during T10
• Check T10
•
T10 separator start time too short
Check brake
•
Brake not unfastened
•
Clutch shoes worn or oily Check clutch shoes
Check drive belt
•
Drive belt worn or oily
Speed setting for sensor operation- Check speed setting
• Speed pick- up sensor defective

speed too high
Check speed pick- up sensor electri-
• T10 separator start time too short

cally
Check T10
Alarm#35 only active, if speed pick-up is installed!
Press > F1 < button

SPEARATOR- START
Please check:
F1 Page 1 Timer 10
Brake unfastened ->
Clutch shoes oily?
Drive belt oily
Page 2 Speed setting of
operation speed ->
Speed pick-up
defective
Page 3
Return with ENTER

8555-9201-010 / 1010 69
5.24 Alarm #36 - Belt monitoring (Option)

BELT MONITORING
Drive belt broken
during start up
• Check drive belt
•
Drive belt defect
Check motor electrically
•
Motor defect
•
Clutch shoes worn or oily Check clutch shoes
Speed pick- up sensor defective Check speed pick- up sensor electri-
cally
Press > F1 < button

BELT MONITORING
Please check:
F1 Page 1 Drive belt
Motor defect ->
electrically?
Clutch shoes
Page 2 worn or oily
Speed pick- up ->
defective?
Page 3
Return with ENTER

70 8555-9201-010 / 1010
5.25 Alarm #37 - Max.- speed monitoring (Option)

MAX.- SPEED
MONITORING
during operation
• Actual speed higher than permissi- Check speed
• Speed setting for maximum speed

ble speed for operation
Check maximum speed setting
• Frequency unstable
too low
Check frequency
• Drive assembly (50 or 60 Hz) of Check separator configuration for fre-
separator does not fit to existing frequency against existing frequency at
site
quency at site
Check speed pick –up sensor electri-
cally
Press > F1 < button

MAX.- SPEED
MONITORING
Speed in oper. ->
Max.- Speed
setting
Page 2 Freq. unstable
Sep. config. ->
Freq. opp. to
freq. at site
Page 3
Speed pick- up
Return with ENTER

8555-9201-010 / 1010 71
5.26 Alarm #38 - Min.- speed monitoring (Option)

MIN.- SPEED
MONITORING
during operation
• Actual speed lower than permissible Check speed
• Speed setting for minimum speed

speed for operation
Check minimum speed setting
• Frequency unstable
too high
Check frequency
• Drive assembly (50 or 60 Hz) of Check separator configuration for fre-
separator does not fit to existing frequency against existing frequency at
site
quency at site
Check speed pick –up sensor electri-
cally
Press > F1 < button

Min.- SPEED
MONITORING
Speed in operation ->
Min.- Speed
setting
Page 2 Freq. unstable
Sep. config. ->
Freq. opp. to
Frequ. at site
Page 3
Speed pick- up
Return with ENTER

72 8555-9201-010 / 1010
5.27 Alarm #39 - PT 1 monitoring (Option)

PT 1 MONITORING
clean oil discharge
Separation - Stop
• No pressure drop on PT 1 during Check switching function
• PT 1 is dirty, sticks or is defective

discharge
Clean and check PT 1
• Setting of PAL 1 is too low Check setting PAL 1
• No ejection and ejection monitoring Check bowl hydraulics and ejection
monitoring
• Back pressure in system too high
has not responded
Check discharge pressure
Press > F1 < button

PT 1 MONITORING
Please check:
F1 Page 1
Function PT1
PT 1 dirty ->
Setpoint PAL 1
Bowl hydraulics
Page 2
Ejection
monitoring ->
Discharge
pressure
Page 3
Return with ENTER

8555-9201-010 / 1010 73
5.28 Alarm #40 - No water seal

NO WATER SEAL
during TIMER 35
Separation - Stop
• Clean oil discharge pressure too Check clean oil discharge pressure
• Filling water valve V2 does not open

high, valve V7 closed too far
Check function V2
• Filling water quantity too low, e.g. Check filling water quantity
• Filling water valve V2 or filters dirty

other consumers at same time
Check valve V2 and filters
• Water pressure for hydraulics too Check water pressure with open valve
and T06
• Shift of separating zone –product
high or T06 too long
Check temperature and setting of TAL
• Wrong sensing centripetal pump

temperature too low
Check parts in accordance with operat-
ing instruction
• Pressure sensor PT 2 bridged or set
installed
Check setting PT 2
to 0
Press > F1 < button

NO WATER SEAL
Please check:
F1 Page 1
Cl. oil discharge
pressure ->
Function V2
Fill. wat. quant.
Page 2
V2 and filter
Water pressure ->
TIMER T06
Setting TAL
Page 3
Setting PT2
Return with ENTER

74 8555-9201-010 / 1010
5.29 Alarm #41 - Min. separating time

MIN. SEPARATING TIME
< 10 Min
Separation - Stop
• Pressure sensor PT 2 not connect- Check switching function of pressure
sensor PT 2
• Alarm bridging time T11 too short
ed, dirty or defective
Check T11
• Setting PT 2 too high Check setting on pressure sensor PT 2
• Water or solids content in the bowl Pre-dewater oil and/or check solids
content
• To much filling water
too high
Check filling water quantity
• With HFO and parallel operation, Remove screws from separating disk
screws in the separating disk in-
• Filling water valve V2 not tight

stalled
Check filling water valve V2
• Orifice in centripetal pump chamber Check orifice
cover plugged
Press > F1 < button

MIN. SEPARATING TIME

< 10 min
F1 Page 1
Please check:
Function PT2 ->
TIMER T11
Setting PAL2
Page 2
Water content
Valve V2 ->
Screws in
separating disk
Page 3
with HFO operation
Return with ENTER

8555-9201-010 / 1010 75
5.30 Alarm #42 - SMS sensor fault (Option)

SMS SENSOR FAULT
during SMS Check
during TIMER 44
• Check setting PT 2
•
PT 2 no pressure signal
Check function V2
•
Filling water valve V2 no function
Check T44
•
T44 too short
Sludge holding space blocking pres- Clean bowl, check drill hole in centripe-
tal pump chamber lid
• Bowl not closed
sure sensor line to PT 2
Check bowl hydraulics
• Insufficient water quantity during T44 Check water quantity
• Pressure sensor PT 2 defective

(Timer T60 – T62)
Check pressure sensor
• Wrong switching point on PT 2 Check switching point
Press > F1 < button

SMS SENSOR FAULT

Please check:
F1 Page 1 Setting PAL2
Function V2 ->
Timer 44
Solid hold. space
Page 2 Orifice in centrip.
pump cham. cover ->
Bowl hydraulics
Function PT2
Page 3
Return with ENTER

76 8555-9201-010 / 1010
5.31 Alarm #43 - PT2 sensor active in Idle run

PT2 SENSOR ACTIVE
in Idle run

• Pressure sensor PT 2 activated dur- Check pressure sensor PT 2
• Filling water valve V2 leaking

ing idle run conditions?
Check V2
• Product valve V1 does not close Check valve V1
• Non-return valve at V7 open, prod-

properly
Close clean oil discharge valve V7
uct flows back into the bowl under no load
Press > F1 < button

PT2 SENSOR ACTIVE

IN IDLE RUN
Press. sensor PT2 ->
Valve V2 is
not tight
Page 2 Valve V1 closes
not properly ->
Oil flows back
into the bowl
Page 3
Return with ENTER

8555-9201-010 / 1010 77
5.32 Alarm #44 - PAL 1 clean oil discharge

PAL1 CLEAN OIL DISCHARGE
Pressure < setting
Separation - Stop
• Clean oil discharge valve V7 Check valve setting V7
• Feed capacity reduced

opened too wide
Check feed capacity
• Setting PT 1 for PAL 1 too high Check setting PT 1 for PAL 1
• Water pressure for hydraulics too

see also PAH 1 alarm
Check water pressure with opened
valve V3
• Safety pulse T06 too long, bowl has
high during T06, bowl has opened
Check TIMER 06
• Feed pump failure

opened
Check feed pump
• FU speed too low Check pump speed
• Feed valve V1 in circulation position Check compressed air and signal out-
• Breakover to water side

put for solenoid valve on V1
Check quantity of filling water
• Direction of rotation of pump incor- Check direction of rotation
• Bowl gaskets not sealed

rect
Check and where necessary replace
• T07 alarm delay too short

gaskets
Check whether T07 expires before
• T11 alarm bridging too short

pressure builds up
Check TIMER 11 alarm bridging
FU = Frequency transformer
Press > F1 < button

PAL 1 CLEAN OIL

DISCHARGE
F1 Page 1
Please check
Valve setting V7 ->
Feed capacity
Setting PAL1
Page 2
Water pressure for
opened valve V3 ->
Timer 06
T07 alarm delay
Page 3
Quantity of water
Return with ENTER

78 8555-9201-010 / 1010
5.33 Alarm #45 - PAH 1 clean oil discharge

PAH 1 CLEAN OIL DISCHARGE
Pressure > setting
Separation - Stop
• Clean oil discharge valve V7 closed Check valve setting V7
•
too far
Check feed capacity
•
Feed capacity too high
Check setting PT 1 for PAH 1
•
Setting PT1 for PAH1 too low
Check T07
•
T07 alarm delay too short
Check T11 alarm bridging
•
T11 alarm bridging too short
Product temperature too low Check temperature in product feed
Press > F1 < button

PAH1 CLEAN OIL

DISCHARGE
F1 Page 1
Please check:
Valve setting V7 ->
Feed capacity
Setting PAH1
Page 2
T07 alarm delay
T11 alarm ->
bridging
Temperature
Page 3
product feed
Return with ENTER

8555-9201-010 / 1010 79
5.34 Alarm #46 - Emergency stop

EMERGENCY STOP
Button pushed

• Emergency Stop Button was Check reason for pushing Emergency
pushed. Stop button.
Press > F1 < button

EMERGENY STOP
Button pushed
Reason for ->
Pushing of
Emergency Button
Page 2
->
Page 3
Return with ENTER

80 8555-9201-010 / 1010
5.35 Alarm #48 - Water discharge overflow

WATER DISCHARGE:
Overflow
Separation - Stop
• Water content in feed too high Check product feed
• Clean oil discharge pressure too Check clean oil discharge valve V7
• Quantity of filling water too low

high
Check function V2 and quantity of fill-
ing water
• Product temperature too low
Water seal broken
Check product temperature
• Regulating ring too large Install next smaller regulating ring
• Water pressure for hydraulic too Check water pressure with open sole-
noid valve V3, check T 06
• Polyamide sealing ring defective
high or T 06 too long.
Check polyamide sealing ring
• Sealing rings in the bowl defective Check sealing rings
• Pressure sensor PT2 defective Check pressure sensor PT2
Press > F1 < button

WATER DISCHARGE
Overflow
F1 Page 1
Please check:
Position V7 ->
Wat. cont. in Oil
Fill. water quant.
Page 2
Product temp.
Regulating ring ->
Polyamide
sealing ring
Page 3
Function PT2
Return with ENTER

8555-9201-010 / 1010 81
5.36 Alarm #49 - MAINTENANCE required WMS Sensor

MAINTENANCE
required WMS Sensor

• Monitoring time of WMS Sensor WMS Sensor Check must be done
has reached limit without water indica- according to manual.
tion
Press > F1 < button

MAINTENANCE
required WMS Sensor
F1 Page 1
Please check:
Monitoring time of ->
WMS Sensor
has reached limit
Page 2
without water
indication ->
Carry out
maintenance
Page 3
according to manual
Return with ENTER

82 8555-9201-010 / 1010
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

8555-9201-010 / 1010 83
6 Alarm Simulation und Test
6.1 Alarms #01 - #10 ................................................................................... 84

6.2 Alarms #11 - #20 ................................................................................... 85
6.3 Alarms #21 - #30 ................................................................................... 86
6.4 Alarms #31 - #40 ................................................................................... 87
6.5 Alarms #41 - #50 ................................................................................... 88

84 8555-9201-010 / 1010
6.1 Alarms #01 - #10
SIMULATION AND TESTS OF VARIOUS ALARMS

Alarm display Status Mechanical Electrical Action
MOTOR PROTECTION Control Not possible Disconnect PTC sensor • Separation
• V1 in circula-
Temp. > max temp. active stop
Motor switched off
Alarm#01
• Common alarm
tion
Free
Alarm#02
Free
Alarm#03
Free
Alarm#04
TAL PRODUCT FEED Separation Not possible Set setting higher than the • Separation
• V1 in circula-
Temp. < min current temperature stop
Separation - Stop
Alarm#05
• Common alarm
tion
TAH PRODUCT FEED Separation Not possible Set setting lower than the • Separation
• V1 in circula-
Temp. > max current temperature stop
Separation - Stop
Alarm#06 press ENTER tion
• Separation
Common alarm
EJECTION MONITORING Ejection Close manual ball valve Disconnect cable head of V3
• V1 in circula-
Current< Offset which is in front of V3 or increase offset Ejection stop
Separation – Stop shortly before and during current during discharge
ALARM#07 discharge cycle T04. cycle T04. tion
• Separation
Common alarm
LAHH SLUDGE TANK Control Immerse or dampen Disconnect cable head of
• V1 in circula-
Sludge tank - full Active sensor LSHH. LSHH Sensor stop
Separation - Stop
Alarm#08
• Common alarm
tion
FEED PUMP FAULT Control Not possible Trigger motor protection • Separation
• V1 in circula-
Motor protection Active switch stop
Separation - Stop
• Common alarm
tion
SLUDGE PUMP FAULT Control Not possible Trigger motor protection • Separation
• V1 in circula-
Program - stop Active switch stop
Alarm#10 tion
Common alarm

8555-9201-010 / 1010 85
6.2 Alarms #11 - #20

VIBRATION STAGE 1: Separation Not possible Disconnect contact • Separation
• V1 in circula-
Motor off after T25 Stop
Alarm#11
• Ejection
tion
• Motor off aft.
• Common alarm
T26
•
VIBRATION – STAGE 2: Control Not possible Disconnect contact • Separation
• V1 in circula-
Separator - Off Active stop
Alarm#12
• Common alarm
tion
•
FAULT SERIES Control Not possible MPI Leitungsanschluss an • Separation
• V1 in circula-
OPERATION Line or Active der Steuerung abklemmen. stop
preselection not OK
Alarm#13
• Common alarm
tion
•
Free
Alarm#14
WMS SYSTEM FAULT Separation Open valve V2 to add Bridge WMS Sensor and set • Separation
• V1 in circula-
Too much water water into bowl until pressure sensor PT2 switch- stop
Separation - Stop Timer 22 is elapsed. ing point to 0 or bridge.
Alarm#15
• Common alarm
tion
• Ejection
Free
Alarm#16
Free
Alarm#17
• Common alarm
•
BOWL MONITORING Separation Not possible. Extend T06 during separa-
Current too high tion and shorten T14 to
during TIMER 06 300sec.! Wait until T14 is
Alarm#18 elapsed and Alarm appears.
• Common alarm
• Motor off
SEPARATOR MOTOR OFF Circulation Not possible. Set TIMER 39 to 10 seconds
Sep. in circulation and push program stop
T 39 expired M. off button.
Alarm#19
Free
Alarm#20

86 8555-9201-010 / 1010
6.3 Alarms #21 - #30

Free
Alarm#21
EXCESSIVE RUNNING Control Set TR2 to 1 minute and Set TR2 to 1 minute • Common alarm
TIME OF SLUDGE PUMP Active immerse or dampen LSH Trigger testfunction with
In TR3 hours Sensor to start sludge magnet at testpoint of LSH
Alarm#22 pump until Alarm ap- sensor until Alarm appears.
pears.
WMS ACTIVATED Separation Set T22 to 300sec. and Set T22 to 300sec., TR1 to 1 • Common alarm
TOO OFTEN TR1 to 1 minute and minute and bridge WMS
open valve V2 to add sensor until Alarm appears.
Alarm#23 water into bowl until
Alarm appears.
Free •
Alarm#24
Free •
Alarm#25
Free •
Alarm#26
Maintenance Separation Not possible. Set value to actual value • Message in the
required see manual plus 1hour and wait 1hour. display
Alarm#27
WARNING Separation Set T17 to 1s and Set T17 to 1s and • Message in the
• V6 opens
WATER CONTENT set counter 5 to 1 and set counter 5 to 1 and display
T47 to 60sec.than open bridge pressure sensor
Alarm#28 valve V2 for 10sec. to PSL2 or set optional PT2 to
add water into bowl until 0 and 1 in short intervals
warning appears. during T47 for minimum 2
times, so that warning ap-
pears.
Free
Alarm#29
Free
Alarm#30

8555-9201-010 / 1010 87
6.4 Alarms #31 - #40

Free
Alarm#31
Free
Alarm#32
EJECTION MONITORING Ejection Close manual ball valve Disconnect cable head of V3 • Separation
• V1 in circula-
Eject. speed < Offset which is in front of V3 or increase offset Ejection stop
Separation – Stop shortly before and during speed during discharge
Alarm#33 discharge cycle T04. cycle T04.
• Common alarm
tion
• Common alarm
•
BOWL MONITORING Separation Not possible. Extend T06 during separa-
Speed drop too high tion and shorten T14 to
during TIMER 06 300sec.! Wait until T14 is
Alarm#34 elapsed and Alarm appears.
• Motor off
• Message in the
SEPARATOR-START Separator Set Timer 10 to 10 sec. Set setting for min. speed
monitoring Motor Start and press motor start higher than the normal
during T10 button. operating speed.
• Common alarm
display
Alarm#35
• Motor off
• Message in the
BELT MONITORING Separator Not possible. Disconnect speed pick-up
Drive belt broken Motor Start sensor and press motor
during start up start button.
• Common alarm
display
Alarm#36
• Motor off
• Message in the
MAX.- SPEED Separator Not possible. Set setting for Max. Speed
MONITORING Motor Start lower than normal operating
during operation and Separa- speed, during start up or
• Common alarm
display
Alarm#37 tion during operation.
•
• Motor off
• Message in the
MIN.- SPEED Separator Not possible. Set setting for Min. Speed
MONITORING Motor Start higher than normal operat-
during operation and Separa- ing speed,
• Common alarm
display
Alarm#38 tion during start up or during
operation. •
PT 1 MONITORING Ejection Not possible. Set pressure sensor PT1 • Separation
• V1 in circula-
clean oil discharge switching point to 0 while stop
Separation - Stop ejection sequence is run-
Alarm#39 ning.
• Common alarm
tion
•
NO WATER SEAL Separation Reduce T34 and T35 to 5 Set pressure sensor PT2 to • Separation
• V1 in circula-
during TIMER 35 sec. and close hand 0 and disconnect cable of stop
Separation - Stop valve before V2 during WMS sensor.
Alarm#40 T02.
• Common alarm
tion
• Ejection

88 8555-9201-010 / 1010
6.5 Alarms #41 - #50

MIN. SEPARATING TIME Separation Not possible. Disconnect cable head on • Separation
• V1 in circula-
< 10 Min pressure sensor PT2 during stop
Separation - Stop T21.
Alarm#41
• Common alarm
tion
• Ejection
• Common alarm
• Ejection
SMS SENSOR FAULT Sensor Close hand valve at V2 Disconnect cable head on
during SMS Check Check while test is running. pressure sensor PT2 while
during TIMER 44 test is running.
Alarm#42
PT2 SENSOR ACTIVE Circulation Open valve V2 until pres- Set pressure sensor PT2 to • Message in the
• Common alarm
in Idle run sure increase on pres- 0 during idle run. display
sure sensor PT2 during
Alarm#43 idle run. • Ejection
PAL1 CLEAN OIL DISCHARGE Separation Open clean oil discharge Disconnect cable head on • Separation
• V1 in circula-
Pressure < setting valve V7 pressure sensor PT1 stop
Separation - Stop
Alarm#44
• Common alarm
tion
• Ejection
PAH 1 CLEAN OIL DISCHARGE Separation Close clean oil discharge Set pressure sensor PT1 • Separation
• V1 in circula-
Pressure > setting valve V7 switching point to a lower stop
Separation - Stop value than the current value.
Alarm#45
• Common alarm
tion
• Ejection
EMERGENCY STOP Control Not possible. Push emergeny button. • All electric
Button pushed Active components
are shut down
ALARM#46 like Motors,
Control Units
ect!
FREE
ALARM#47
WATER DISCHARGE: Separation Close clean oil discharge Set pressure sensor PT1 • Separation
valve V7. Set optional PAH1
• V1 in circula-
Overflow switching point to 0 while stop
Separation - Stop (PT1) in clean oil discharge separation sequence is
to 10 bar.
Alarm#48 running.
• Common alarm
tion
• Ejection
MAINTENANCE required Circulation Not possible. Set value to actual value • Message in the
WMS Sensor plus 1minute and wait display
1minute. Add extra water to
Alarm#49 get WMS Signal if neces-
sary.
Free
Alarm#50
For a simulation, the function must be activated and must be valid for the product.
ATTENTION:
After the simulation, all changes must be reset to the initial conditions!!!!

8555-9201-010 / 1010 89
7 Ejection monitoring / Bowl monitoring
7.1 Graphic description - Ejection monitoring / Bowl monitoring Current: ... 90

7.2 Graphic description - Ejection monitoring / Bowl monitoring Speed: .... 91

90 8555-9201-010 / 1010
7.1 Graphic description - Ejection monitoring / Bowl monitoring Current:
1: separator motor start
2: feed valve V1 open: sepa-

ration
3: feed valve V1 closed for

ejection
4: operating water valve V3

open for T04: ejection

ration

ration

open for T06: safety water
impuls

closed: separation
5: feed valve V1 closed:

ejection

8555-9201-010 / 1010 91
7.2 Graphic description - Ejection monitoring / Bowl monitoring Speed:

ration
2: feed valve V1 closed for

ejection

open for T04: ejection

ration

ration

open for T06: safety water
impuls

closed: separation

92 8555-9201-010 / 1010
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

8555-9201-010 / 1010 93
8 Bowl volumes / Speed setpoints
8.1 Bowl-Volumes ........................................................................................ 94

8.2 Speed setpoints ..................................................................................... 94

94 8555-9201-010 / 1010
8.1 Bowl-Volumes
Separator type
OSE 5 OSE 10 OSE 20 OSE 40 OSE 80 OSE 120

HFO LO HFO LO HFO LO HFO LO HFO LO HFO LO
3
Volumes in dm
Bowl volume 1,00 1,00 2,00 2,00 3,60 3,60 10,00 10,00 23,00 23,00 40,00 40,00
Sludgespace volume 0,50 0,50 0,90 0,90 1,60 1,60 4,00 4,00 10,00 10,00 14,60 14,60
Fillingwater volume 0,20 0,50 0,30 0,90 0,40 1,60 0,50 4,00 1,00 10,00 3,00 14,60
Displacementwater
volume
0,50 0,50 1,10 1,10 2,00 2,00 6,00 6,00 13,00 13,00 25,40 25,40
8.2 Speed setpoints
Separator type
OSE 5 / OSE 10 / OSE 20 OSE 40 OSE 80 OSE 120
Speed in U/min
Max. Speed 12 200 8 400 7 000 6 100
Min. Speed 11 500 7 800 6 300 5 400
Rated Speed 12 000 8 200 6 800 5 900
Speed -Offset
100 100 100 100
Ejection monitoring
Speed -Offset
100 100 100 100
Bowl monitoring

8555-9201-010 / 1010 95
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

96 8555-9201-010 / 1010
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

Tel. +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Werner-Habig-Str. 1 - 59302 Oelde ( Germany ) - Phone +49 2522 77-0
Kunde : -
Customer
Anlagenbezeichnung : -
Designation of plant
Zeichnungsnummer : 8106-2016-063
Drawing no.
Kommission : -
Internal order no.
Hersteller (Firma) : GEA Westfalia Separator

Manufacturer (company)
Projektname : -
Name of project
Typ : D10 / OSE 5-91
Type
Sprache : de/en
Language
Technische Daten : 690V AC 60 Hz +/-5 % -
Technical data
Erstellt am : 22.11.2013 Bearbeitet am : 27.03.2015 Angewandte Normen IEC 81346

Prepared Processed Applied standards IEC 61355
IEC 60617
GEA Projektsachbearbeiter : C.Teiner Telefon : +49 2522 77-2802 / 7176
GEA project contact Telephone
Date 27.03.2015 Kunde: - GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description: Rev.04 =

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Titel- / Deckblatt
- As built +
Projekt:
Tested 10.06.2014 TE - Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 1
Project: Title- / cover sheet
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 8106-2016-063 & EAA 52 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
Dokumentenart Seite Seitenbeschreibung Anlage Einbauort Datum Bearbeiter
Document type Page Page description Plant Mounting place Date Editor
Titel- / Deckblatt
&EAA 1 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Title- / cover sheet
Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB 2 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Table of contents
Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB 3 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Table of contents
Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB 4 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Table of contents
Revisionsübersicht
&EBH 5 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Revision overview
Strukturkennzeichenübersicht
&EDB 6 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Overview structure indicator
Informations-Blatt
&EDB 7 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Information-sheet
Informations-Blatt
&EDB 8 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Information-sheet
Einspeisung
&EFS 9 =0 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Incoming
Steuerspannung
&EFS 10 =0 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Control voltage
Not-Halt
&EFS 11 =0 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Emergency stop
Separator
&EFS 12 =01 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Separator
Separator
&EFS 13 =01 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Separator
Separator Drehzahlmessung
&EFS 14 =01 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Separator speed measuring
Separator Signale
&EFS 15 =01 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Separator signals
Separator Reserve
&EFS 16 =01 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Separator spare
Separator Ventile
&EFS 17 =01 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Separator valves
Zulaufpumpe
&EFS 18 =11 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Feed pump
Zulaufpumpe
&EFS 19 =11 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Feed pump

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Inhaltsverzeichnis
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Table of contents
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 8106-2016-063 & EAB 52 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
Produkt Temperaturregelung
&EFS 20 =11 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Product temperature control
Schlammpumpe
&EFS 21 =16 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Sludge pump
Signalaustausch
&EFS 22 =100 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Signal exchange
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 23 =00 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
PLC overview
SPS Spannungsversorgung
&EFS 24 =00 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
PLC power supply
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 25 =00 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
PLC overview
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 26 =00 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
PLC overview
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 27 =00 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
PLC overview
Aufbauplan
&ELU 28 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Arrangement drawing
Aufbauplan
&ELU 29 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Arrangement drawing
D10
&ELU 30 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
D10
Not-Halt-Box
&ELU 31 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Energency stop box
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-24M
&EMA 32 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-24M
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-PE
&EMA 33 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-PE
&EMA 34 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-SC
&EMA 35 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-SC
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-X1
&EMA 36 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-X1
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-XQ1
&EMA 37 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-XQ1
&EMA 38 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
- As built +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
&EMA 39 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Klemmenanschlussplan =01+JB-1X10
&EMA 40 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =01+JB-1X10
&EMA 41 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
&EMA 42 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
&EMA 43 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
&EMA 44 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Kabelübersicht
&EMB 45 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Cable layout
Kabelübersicht
&EMB 46 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Cable layout
Hinweise zur Installation
&EMB 47 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Instructions for installation
Potentialausgleich Separator
&EMB 48 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Potential equalization Separator
Stückliste
&EPB 49 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Parts list
Stückliste
&EPB 50 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Parts list
Stückliste
&EPB 51 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Parts list
Stückliste
&EPB 52 27.03.2015 MIL/PLE
Parts list

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
- As built +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Revisionsübersicht
Revision overview
Revisionsname Revisionskommentar Revisionsänderungsgrund Seitenname Ersteller Datum
Revision name Revision comment Revision on the basis of change Page name Author Date
Rev.1 Customer comments included MAR/PLE 24.02.14
Rev.2 As built MIL/PLE 10.06.2014
Schlammklappe entfernt
Rev.3 MAR/PLE 31.07.2014
Sludge flap removed
Programm-Nr. geändert
Rev.4 MIL/PLE 27.03.2015
Program-no. changed

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Revisionsübersicht
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Revision overview
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 8106-2016-063 & EBH 52 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Strukturkennzeichenübersicht
Structure indicator
Vollständige Bezeichnung Beschriftung Strukturbeschreibung Vollständige Bezeichnung Beschriftung Strukturbeschreibung
Complete name Labelling Structure descprition Complete name Labelling Structure descprition
Dokumentenart Deckblatt
&EAA
Document type Cover sheet
Dokumentenart Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB
Document type Table of contents
Dokumentenart Revisionsübersicht
&EBH
Document type Revision overview
Dokumentenart Strukturkennzeichen Übersicht / Vorschriften
&EDB
Document type Structure indentification overview / instructions
Dokumentenart Stromlaufplan
&EFS
Document type Circuit diagram
Dokumentenart Aufbauplan
&ELU
Document type Arrangement drawing
Dokumentenart Klemmenanschlussplan
&EMA
Document type Terminal connecting plan
Dokumentenart Kabelübersicht
&EMB
Document type Cable layout
Dokumentenart Stückliste
&EPB
Document type Parts list
Anlage Einspeisung
=0
Plant Incoming
Anlage Separator
=01
Plant Separator
Anlage Zulaufpumpe
=11
Plant Feed pump
Anlage Schlammpumpe
=16
Plant Sludge pump
Anlage Signalaustausch
=100
Plant Signal exchange
Anlage SPS
=00
Plant PLC
Anlage Zugabe
=Additions
Plant Addition
Anlage Kunde
=Customer
Plant Customer
Anlage
=Heater
Plant
Einbauort Abzweigdose
+JB
Mounting place Junction box
Einbauort Lokal
+L
Mounting place Local

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Strukturkennzeichenübersicht
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Overview structure indicator
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 8106-2016-063 & EDB 52 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Vorschriften / Spezifikation
Instruction / specification
Schaltschrank : Ausführung:
Control cabinet : Version:
Bezeichnung Schaltschrank Aderkennzeichnung
CC Core indentification
YES
Name control cabinet
Schutzart Potentialbezeichnung
Protective rating
IP54 Potential designation
NO
Umgebungstemperatur Halogenfreie Verdrahtung / Kanäle

Ambient temperature
(+5) - (+50) °C Halogen free wiring / channels
NO
Kabelkennzeichnungsschilder
Cable marking plates
YES
Klassifizierung
Classification
DNV
Kennzeichnungsschilder
Marking plates
PLASTIC WHITE, LETTERS BLACK
Schnittstelle:
Interface:
Bus Verbindung zum Kunden PLC
Bus connection to customer PLC
NO
Einspeisung:
Incoming:
Netz-/ Anschlussspannung
Mains- / side voltage
690V AC
Netzfrequenz
Mains frequency
60 Hz
Drehfeld
Rotary field
CLOCKWISE ROTATION
Spannungstoleranz
Voltage tolerance
+/-5 %
Kabeleinführung
Cable inlet
BOTTOM
Einspeisung redundant
Incoming redundant
NO
Steuerspannungen:
Control voltages:
Steuerspannung 1
Control voltage 1
230V AC
Steuerspannung 2
Control voltage 2
24V DC

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Informations-Blatt
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Information-sheet
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Verdrahtung
Wiring
Stromkreise Leiter Farbe Querschnitt Stromkreise Leiter Farbe Querschnitt
Electrical circuits Conductor Colour Cross-section Electrical circuits Conductor Colour Cross-section
Hauptstromkreise 690V AC L1 Schwarz ≥ 1,5mm² Steuerspannung 230V AC L rot ≥ 0,75mm²
Main circuits Black Control voltage Red
L2 Schwarz N rot / weiß
Black " Red / white "
L3 Schwarz
Black "
N Hellblau ≥ 1,5mm²
Light blue
PE Grün / gelb ≥ 2,5mm²
Green / yellow
Steuerspannung 24V DC + dunkelblau ≥ 0,75mm²

Control voltage Dark blue
- blau / weiß
Blue / white "
Analog abgeschirmt L+ weiß ≥ 0,75mm²

Analog screened White
M braun
Brown "
Messleitung weiß ≥ 0,75mm²

Measuring circuit White
Stromwandlerleitungen schwarz ≥ 2,5mm²

Current transformer lines Black
Verriegelungsleitungen (AC/DC) orange ≥ 0,75mm²

Interlocking conductors (AC/DC) Orange

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Informations-Blatt
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Information-sheet
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
690V AC
L1 / 12.0
L2 / 12.0
L3 / 12.0
690V AC
L1.2 / 18.0
L2.2 / 10.0
L3.2 / 10.0
13
21
1
-Q1
14
/22.1 22
13...18A
In: 13A
I> I> I>
2
Daten Einspeisung:
Data incoming:
Min. Querschnitt:
2,5 mm²
Min. Cross-section:
-PE -PE -SC -PE -PE -PE
Vorsicherung:
-
Pre-fuse:
Umgebungstemperatur:
(+5) - (+50) °C
-WD001 Ambient temperature:
_-J
4x2,5 mm² Max. Kabellänge:
50 m
PE
PE
PE
Max. Cable length:
-1M -1T -1G U: 690V AC

PE
L1
L2
L3
Earthing mounting plate 1

f: 60 Hz
Erdung Montageplatte 1
=Customer P: ~5 kW
+L-X
Erdung Gehäuse 1
Earthing cabinet 1
Icn: 4 kA
Earthing screen
Earthing door 1
Erdung Schirm
Erdung Tür 1
Vollaststrom:
~13 A
Einspeisung Full load current:
Incoming
Date 27.03.2015 Kunde: - GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description: Rev.04 = 0

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Einspeisung
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Incoming
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 8106-2016-063 & EFS 52 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
690V AC 690V AC
9.9 / L2.2 L2.2 / 18.0
9.9 / L3.2 L3.2 / 18.0
230V AC
L.A / 12.4
N.A / 11.0
230V AC
L.X / 11.0
5
-F1 N.X / 20.0
0,55...0,8A
EW:0,7A
I> I> I>
2
6
690V AC
690V AC
N/L2
L1
-T1 690 0 -T2
INPUT
400VA 120/230VAC GEA
24VDC/5A power
GND
OFF
ON
230 O
230V AC
230V AC
A
B
OUTPUT
-PE
L+
L+'
PE
M'
M.A / 12.2
-PE
M.K / 23.0
M.R / 13.0
1
-24M
1
-F2
2
C6A
-PE
M.X / 17.0
24V DC
L+.A / 11.7
24V DC
L+.K / 24.0
24V DC
L+.X / 15.0
24V DC
L+.E / 23.0
1
-X1
-PE
-PE
N
L
-M1
M
19/18W 1~
Schaltschranklüfter
PE
Cabinet fan
Steuerspannung AC Steuerspannung DC
Control voltage AC Control voltage DC

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Steuerspannung
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Control voltage
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
230V AC 230V AC
10.9 / L.X L.X / 20.0
230V AC
1L.X / 12.4
230V AC
1L.A / 18.4
7
-X1
24V DC 24V DC
10.9 / L+.A L+.A / 12.2
11
-K1
12
14
/11.6
8
X10
E2.7
/25.4
=00-K1
Separator
Not-Halt
Separator
emergency stop
A1
-K1
A2
10.9 / N.A N.A / 12.4
-PE
Brücke entfernen bei
Anschluß eines
8
externen Not-Halt!
Remove link in case of -X1
an external emergency
stop!
-WG001
.-J
3x1,5 mm²
21
14
PE
11 /11.8
12
-S01
22
Not-Halt extern Not-Halt

Emergency stop external Emergency stop

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Not-Halt
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Emergency stop
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC 24V DC 230V AC

9.9 / L1 11.9 / L+.A L+.A / 13.0 10.9 / L.A
230V AC
9.9 / L2 10.9 / M.A M.A / 14.0 11.9 / 1L.X
9.9 / L3
Strommessung Separator
Current measuring separator
=00-K1
4-20mA = 0-50A
/26.5
AI0-I
X13
13
-F1
14
/12.4
11
1
-Q1 -K1
-T1
2
12
14
/12.8 /13.1
10_9_011
7+
2
S1
Input
8
0-1A
21
-B1
3
Output
9- -S1
S2
50/1A 0/4-20mA
22
/12.8
13
13
-S1 -Q1
14
14
/12.8 /12.8
A1
A1
T1
-F1 M -Q1
T2
A2
A2
11.9 / N.A N.A / 18.4
-PE -PE
1
5
-X1 -X2 -X1
-WD001 -WG003
_-J .-J
Linkslauf 4x2,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm²
Anti-clockwise rotation
W1
U1
V1
PE
13 14 /12.8 1 2 /12.1
M 21 22 /13.2 3 4 /12.1
10_1_001 3~ 5 6 /12.1
13 14 /12.9
4,0kW/4,86A Θ
21 22
T2
T1
33 34 /13.1
43 44 /22.2
Separator PTC-Fühler Reserve

Separator Separator Spare
PTC-feeler Separator Betrieb
separator Separator operation

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Separator
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Separator
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC 24V DC
12.3 / L+.A L+.A / 14.0
33
21
-Q1 -F1
34
22
/12.8 /12.4
2
X11 X11
E0.0 E0.1
/25.5 /25.5
=00-K1 =00-K1
Separator Separator
Betrieb Störung
Separator Separator
operation failure
=00-K1
/26.4
A1.0
X12
9
A1
-K1
A2
10.9 / M.R M.R / 19.0
14
11 /12.8
12
Separator
Start/Stop
Separator
start/stop

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Separator
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Separator
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC 24V DC
13.9 / L+.A L+.A / 19.0
12.3 / M.A
=00-K1
0-12000 r.p.m.
/25.5
E0.3
X11
4
5
6
-T2
8-
24V DC
7+
1+
2-
3+
4-
3
-X2
-WG004
.-J
7x1,5 mm²
/15.1
+JB
-1X10 1 2
+JB-WG101
.-O
2x0,34 mm²
+
10_9_020
SI
-
+ BN = brown
- BU = blue
Drehzahlüberwachung
Speed monitoring device

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Separator Drehzahlmessung
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Separator speed measuring
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K1 =00-K1
4-20mA 4-20mA
/26.5 /26.5
AI1-I AI2-I
X13 X13
=00-K1
5
8
/25.5
E0.5
X11
6
24V DC 24V DC
10.9 / L+.X L+.X / 21.0
-PE
10
5
9
-X2
-WG004
.-J
7x1,5 mm²
/14.1
+JB
L+_1X10 / 16.1
4
-1X10 PE_1X10 / 17.3
+JB-WG102 +JB-WG103
.-O .-O
2x0,34 mm² 2x0,34 mm²
1
11_9_002 I 10_9_014 I
PSL/H P PSH P
4-20mA 4-20mA
Reinoel Wasserablauf Reserve

Ablaufdruck Water discharge Spare
Clean-oil
discharge pressure

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Separator Signale
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Separator signals
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K1
/25.5
E1.7
X11
16
11
-X2
-WG011
.-J
7x1,5 mm²
/17.3
+JB 15.3 / L+_1X10
M_1X10 / 17.3
-1X10 8 9 10 11
Reserve Reserve
Spare Spare

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Separator Reserve
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Separator spare
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1

/26.4 /26.4 /26.4 /26.4 /26.4
A0.0 A0.2 A0.1 A0.4 A0.5
X12 X12 X12 X12 X12
6
10.9 / M.X M.X / 21.0
PE -PE
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
-X2
-WG011
.-J
7x1,5 mm²
/16.4
+JB 16.1 / M_1X10
15.3
PE_1X10
PE
12
13
15
14
16
PE
-1X10 PE
-WG010 +JB-WG105 +JB-WG106

.-J .-J .-J
3x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm²
+
PE
PE
PE
+
18_7_002 19_7_004 19_7_005

-
-
-
Zulaufventil Steuerwasser Verdrängungs- und Reserve Reserve

Feed valve Operating water Füllwasser Spare Spare
Displacem- and
filling water

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Separator Ventile
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Separator valves
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
690V AC 230V AC
9.9 / L1.2 11.9 / 1L.A
10.9 / L2.2
10.9 / L3.2
5
-Q1
17
0,35...1,4A L1 L2 L3
13
21
A1
110-220VAC/DC -Q1
18
/18.2
14
22
A2
/18.9
0,35-1,4A
110-220V DC/AC
Control module
LUCA1XFU
EW:0,96A
21
11
-S1 -K2
22
14
12
/18.7 /19.1
11
13
11
LUA1C20 17 -K1 -S1 =100-K1
97
12
14
14
12
14
/18.7 /18.7 /22.1
18
98
/18.7 /19.2
T1 T2 T3
2
A1
A1
-K1 -Q1
A2
A2
/18.2
12.9 / N.A
-PE
1
-X1
-WD001
_-J
4x2,5 mm²
Rechtslauf
Clockwise rotation Achtung! 14 13 14
W1
11 /18.7
U1
V1
PE
12 21 22
Vor dem Einschalten der Zulaufpumpe 24 17 18 /18.7
10_3_001
M den Leistungsschalter auf Nennstrom 22
21 /19.1
97 98 /19.2
0,66kW 3 des Motors einstellen (s. Typenschild des Motors)
0,93A
Attention!
Before switch-on feed pump, adjust the circuit breaker
to nominal current of the motor (look at motor label)
Zulaufpumpe Zulaufpumpe
Feed pump Feed pump

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Zulaufpumpe
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Feed pump
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
14.9 / L+.A
21
97
-K1 -Q1
22
24
98
/18.7 /18.3
10
9
X11 X11
E1.0 E1.1
/25.5 /25.5
=00-K1 =00-K1
Zulaufpumpe Zulaufpumpe
Betrieb Störung
Feed pump Feed pump
operation failure
=00-K1
/26.4
A1.1
X12
10
A1
-K2
A2
13.9 / M.R M.R / 22.0
14
11 /18.8
12
Zulaufpumpe
Ein / Aus
Feed pump on
/ off

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Zulaufpumpe
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Feed pump
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
230V AC Min / max

11.9 / L.X
10.9 / N.X Temperaturüberwachung
Min / max
temperature monitoring
=00-K1
0-120°C
/26.5 /26.5
AIR-P AIR-N
X13 X13
15
16
-SC
SC
4
4
-X1 -X2
-WG003
.CY-O
4x1,5 mm²
10_9_006
1
3
PT100 PT100
2
4
Reserve Reserve Min / max
Spare Spare Temperaturüberwachung
Min / max
temperature monitoring

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Produkt Temperaturregelung
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Product temperature control
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L INPUT L INPUT L INPUT

LOW 1 LOW 0 LOW 0
HIGH 0 HIGH 1 HIGH 1
ALARM 0
=00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1

/25.5 /25.5 /25.5
E0.7 E1.4 E1.5
X11 X11 X11
13
14
24V DC
15.9 / L+.X
17.9 / M.X
=00-K1
/26.4
A1.2
X12
11
-PE -PE -PE
11
10
12
13
14
2
-X2 -X2
WG001 WG002 -WG005

.-J .-J .-J
4x1,5 mm² 4x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm²
PE
3
+ - PE + - PE 98_7_002
90_9_001 90_9_002
-
Niveauschalter 1 Niveauschalter 2
2
Level switch 1 Level switch 2
LAHH Schlammtank LAHH Schlammtank Reserve Reserve Ventil pneumatische

Füllstand max. / max. Füllstand max. / max. Spare Spare Schlammpumpe
LAHH sludge tank LAHH sludge tank Valve pneumatic sludge
level max. / max. level max. / max. pump

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Schlammpumpe
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Sludge pump
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1

/26.4 /26.4 /26.4 /26.4 /26.4
A0.7 A1.3 A1.4 A1.5 A0.3
X12 X12 X12 X12 X12
8
12
13
14
4
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
-K1 -K2 -K3 -K4 -K5
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
19.9 / M.R
14 14 14 14 14
11 /18.8 11 /22.3 11 /22.4 11 /22.5 11 /22.7
12 12 12 12 12
24
21 /22.0
22
43
12
14
12
14
12
14
12
14
22
24
21
=01-Q1 -K2 -K3 -K4 -K5

-K1 =0-Q1
44
11
11
11
11
/12.8 /22.3 /22.4 /22.6 /22.7
21
22
/22.1 /9.1
PE PE PE PE PE
10
11
12
1
3
4
9
-X2 -X2
-WG001 -WG002 -WG003 -WG004 -WG005
.-J .-J .-J .-J .-J
5x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm²
=Customer+L-X =Heater
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
Kunde +L-X
-X -X -X -X -X -X
Sammelstörung Separator Wasserschlossalarm TAH Temperatur TAL Temperatur Erhitzerfreigabe

Common failure Betrieb Water seal broken alarm Alarm max Alarm min Heater release
Separator TAH temperature TAL temperature
operation alarm max alarm min

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Signalaustausch
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Signal exchange
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1

/25.5 /26.5 /26.5 /26.5 /26.5
E1.6 AI0-C
- AI1-C AI2-C
- AI3-C
X11 X13 X13 X13 X13
15
12
24V DC
10.9 / L+.E
10.9 / M.K M.K / 24.0
Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog

Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator SPS Übersicht
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: PLC overview
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K1
6ES7613-1SB02-0AC0
-X12 -X11
+1.7 16 +1.7 16
+1.6 15 +1.6 15
+1.5 14 +1.5 14
-X7 +1.4 +1.4
Digital Output 24VDC 0,5A

13 13
+1.3 12 +1.3 12
Digital Input 24VDC

MMC
+1.2 11 +1.2 11
+1.1 10 +1.1 10
+1.0 9 +1.0 9
+0.7 8 +0.7 8
+0.6 7 +0.6 7
X5 P-BUS 1L+ = DI +0.0 ... +1.7 +0.5 6 +0.5 6
A 1M = DI +0.0 ... +2.7 +0.4 5 +0.4 5

B 2L+,2M= DO +0.0 ... +0.7 +0.3 4 +0.3 4
SC 3L+,3M= DO +1.0 ... +1.7 +0.2 3 +0.2 3
A +0.1 2 +0.1 2
B +0.0 1 +0.0 1
SC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
-X13
M ana
M ana
AIR-N
AI0-U
AI1-U
AI2-U
AI3-U
AI0-C
AI1-C
AI2-C
AI3-C
AIR-P
AI0-I
AI1-I
AI2-I
AI3-I
Input 24VDC, 4A
X2 MPI
A Analog Input PT100 -X1
B -X14 L+ 4
SC
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
-X10 M 3
+2.0
+2.1
+2.2
+2.3
+2.4
+2.5
+2.6
+2.7
AO0-U
AO1-U
A
M ana
M ana
AT1
AO0-I
AO1-I
2L+
2L+
3L+
3L+
1L+
2
2M
3M
1M
B
SC
AT2 1
Analog Output Digital Input 24VDC DO/DI 24VDC
Pover Supply
2L+ /25.4
3L+ /25.4
1L+ /25.4
2M /25.4
3M /25.4
1M /25.4
AT1
AT2
L+
PE
M
X1:1
X1:2
X1:3
X1:4
X10:9
X10:11
X10:12
X10:14
X10:15
X10:16
X10:PE
10.9 / L+.K
-PE
23.9 / M.K

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator SPS Spannungsversorgung
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: PLC power supply
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K1
X10:1 X11:1 Separator Betrieb

E2.0 E0.0 /13.1 =01-Q1:34
Separator operation
X10:2 X11:2 Separator Störung
E2.1 E0.1 /13.2 =01-F1:22
Separator failure
X10:3 X11:3
E2.2 E0.2
X10:4 X11:4 Drehzahlüberwachung

E2.3 E0.3 /14.2 =01-T2:5
Speed monitoring device
X10:5 X11:5
E2.4 E0.4
X10:6 X11:6 Reserve

E2.5 E0.5 /15.3 =01-X2:10
Spare
X10:7 X11:7
E2.6 E0.6
Separator Not-Halt X10:8 X11:8 LAHH Schlammtank Füllstand max. / max.

=0-K1:14 /11.8 E2.7 E0.7 /21.2 =16-X2:6
Separator emergency stop LAHH sludge tank level max. / max.
X10:9 X11:9 Zulaufpumpe Betrieb

24V /24.5 2L+ E1.0 /19.1 =11-K1:24
Feed pump operation
X10:10 X11:10 Zulaufpumpe Störung
2L+ E1.1 /19.2 =11-Q1:98
Feed pump failure
X10:11 X11:11
0V /24.5 2M E1.2
X10:12 X11:12
24V /24.5 3L+ E1.3
X10:13 X11:13 Reserve

3L+ E1.4 /21.4 =16-X2:8
Spare
0V /24.5 3M E1.5 /21.5 =16-X2:11
Spare
X10:15 X11:15
24V /24.5 1L+ E1.6 /23.1 =0-T2:L+

0V /24.5 1M E1.7 /16.4 =01-X2:11
Spare

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
- As built +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K1
Zulaufventil X12:1 X13:1

=01-X2:12 /17.1 A0.0 V AI0-U
Feed valve
Verdrängungs- und Füllwasser X12:2 X13:2 Strommessung Separator
=01-X2:15 /17.4 A0.1 A AI0-I /12.3 =01-T1:8
Displacem- and filling water Current measuring separator
Steuerwasser X12:3 X13:3 Masse Analog
=01-X2:14 /17.3 A0.2 AI0-C /23.2
Operating water Earth analog
Erhitzerfreigabe X12:4
=100-K5:A1 /22.7 A0.3 X13:4
Heater release V AI1-U
Reserve X12:5
=01-X2:17 /17.5 A0.4 X13:5 Reinoel Ablaufdruck
Spare A AI1-I /15.1 =01-X2:6
Clean-oil discharge pressure
Reserve X12:6 X13:6 Masse Analog
=01-X2:18 /17.6 A0.5 AI1-C /23.3
Spare Earth analog
X12:7
A0.6
X13:7
V AI2-U
Sammelstörung X12:8
=100-K1:A1 /22.1 A0.7
Common failure X13:8 Wasserablauf
A AI2-I /15.2 =01-X2:8
Water discharge
X13:9 Masse Analog
AI2-C /23.4
Earth analog
-
X13:10
V AI3-U
Separator Start/Stop X12:9
=01-K1:A1 /13.1 A1.0 X13:11
Separator start/stop A AI3-I
Zulaufpumpe Ein / Aus X12:10
=11-K2:A1 /19.1 A1.1 X13:12 Masse Analog
Feed pump on / off AI3-C /23.5
Earth analog
Ventil pneumatische Schlammpumpe X12:11
=16-X2:13 /21.7 A1.2
Valve pneumatic sludge pump
Wasserschlossalarm X12:12 X13:13
=100-K2:A1 /22.3 A1.3 MANA
Water seal broken alarm
TAH Temperatur Alarm max X12:13 X13:14
=100-K3:A1 /22.4 A1.4 Mana
TAH temperature alarm max
TAL Temperatur Alarm min X12:14
=100-K4:A1 /22.6 A1.5
TAL temperature alarm min
X12:15 X13:15 Min / max Temperaturüberwachung
A1.6 AIR-P /20.6 =11-X2:3
Min / max temperature monitoring
PT100
X12:16 X13:16 Min / max Temperaturüberwachung
A1.7 AIR-N /20.6 =11-X2:4

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
- As built +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K1
X14:1
AO0-U
X14:2
AO0-I
X14:3
MANA
X14:4
AO1-U
X14:5
AO1-I
X14:6
MANA

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
- As built +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
630 mm 260 mm
600 mm
250 mm
Cabinet
54 mm
LO-ME
=00-K1
=01-S1
=11-S1
800 mm
782 mm
=0-Q1
=0-M1
27
15
=00-K1 Steuergerät Timing unit

=0-M1 Filter / Lüfter Filter / fan
36
54
=0-Q1 Hauptschalter Isolator
=01-S1 Separator Start/Stop Separator start/stop
=11-S1 Zulaufpumpe Start/Stop Feed pump start/stop
Maßstab 1:5 mm 10,2

Scale 1:5 mm
Gewicht: ca. 55kg

Weight: ca. 55kg LO-ME Rev.04 =
Date 27.03.2015 Kunde: - GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description:
Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Aufbauplan
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Arrangement drawing
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 8106-2016-063 & ELU 52 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Mountingplate
25x80
25x80
=0-T1
=100-K1
=11-K1
=100-K2
=100-K3
=100-K4
=100-K5
=01-K1
=11-K2
=0-K1
40x80
=100-X2
=16-X2
=01-F1
=01-T1
=01-T2
=0-24M
PE
25x80
40x80
40x80
Bereich von Kabelverschraubungen
=01-Q1
=01-B1
Range from cable glands
=0-T2
25x80
=0-F1
=0-F2
=0-Q1
=11-Q1
Cable glands Yard cable size WS part-no. 40x80
11x M16 5,0 - 10,0mm 0005-4486-930
7x M20 8,0 - 13,0mm 0005-4487-930
=01-X1
=11-X1
=01-X2
=11-X2
=0-X1
5x M16 Spare 0005-4442-630
2x M20 Spare 0005-4443-630
PE

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Aufbauplan
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Arrangement drawing
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Regelung Gerät D10

Control unit D10
Taste Benennung Symbol
Button Designation Symbol
GEA Westfalia Separator Prozess Stop Process

1
Process stop STOP
Prozess Start Process

2
Process start START
Lampentest
3
R Lamp test LAMPTEST
Serienbetrieb SERIES
4 1 2
Series operation
S
Hilfe
5 HELP
Help
F1 F2 F3 F4 Separator
165
M
6
Separator
Zulauf
7 FEED
Feed
1 2 3 4 5
Schlamm
8 SLUDGE
SF Sludge
DC5V PID
ESC 9 PID
FRCE
RUN
6 7 8 9 0 Zurück HOME
STOP 0
Return DIR
EDIT ENTER
Bestell-nr.
0005-4050-430
215 order no.
Programm-Nr.
8106-0D10-108
program-no.
Ausschnittmass: 202x155mm
cutout dimension:
Tiefe: 88mm
depth:
Gewicht: 1,35kg
weight:

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator D10
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: D10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Not-Halt Gehäuse mit Schutzkragen

Emergency stop cabinet with protective collar
=Additions
71 mm
-S01
Not-Halt-Box
85 mm
54 mm
mm
ø5
85 mm
109 mm
protection class: "IP 65"

61 mm
M20
8-13mm Note: Installation should be carried out by customer!
18 mm

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Not-Halt-Box
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Energency stop box
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
&EFS/10.6
&EFS/10.6
Querverweis
Cross reference
PE
Ziel intern
Target internal
-PE
-T2
Brücken
Bridges
=0+-24M
Klemmennummer
1
Terminal number
Steuerspannung DC
Control voltage DC
=

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-24M
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Terminal connecting plan =0+-24M
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 8106-2016-063 & EMA 52 Bl./Sh.
=0+-PE
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
=Customer+L-X
Editor
&EFS/9.1
Tested
Einspeisung PE
PE
PE
-WD001
PE
PE
Incoming
_-J 4x2,5 mm²
1
-SC
MAR/PLE
Erdung Schirm PE &EFS/9.3
27.03.2015
SC
SC
Earthing screen
10.06.2014 TE
-1M
Erdung Montageplatte 1 PE PE &EFS/9.6
PE
Earthing mounting plate 1 -PE
Kunde:
GN/YE
GN/YE
Project:
Projekt:
Customer:
-
-
-1T
Erdung Tür 1 PE PE &EFS/9.6
PE
-PE
2
Earthing door 1
GN/YE
GN/YE
-1G
Erdung Gehäuse 1 PE PE &EFS/9.6
PE
Earthing cabinet 1 -PE
GN/YE
GN/YE
-PE
Steuerspannung AC PE &EFS/10.2
Control voltage AC -X1 6
3
-M1
= PE &EFS/10.2
PE
L
GN/YE
GN/YE
M
1~
PE N
N
-PE
Steuerspannung DC PE &EFS/10.6
Control voltage DC
© This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved.
&EFS/10.6
4
Separator
= PE
GEA Westfalia
-24M 1
-S01
Not-Halt extern PE PE &EFS/11.1
PE
-WG001
PE
PE
Emergency stop external -PE

.-J 3x1,5 mm²
=01-10_1_001
Separator PE &EFS/12.2
PE
=01-WD001
PE
PE
Separator
_-J 4x2,5 mm²
&EFS/12.3
Benennung/Description:
PTC-Fühler Separator PE
PE
5
=01-WG003
PE
PE
PTC-feeler separator
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
T2 U1
U1
V1
Θ
M
3~
V1
T1 W1

PE
W1
T2
T1
6
=01+JB-1X10 PE
Reserve PE &EFS/15.3
PE:PE
=01-WG004
PE
PE
Spare
PE
.-J 7x1,5 mm²
=01-18_7_002
PE &EFS/17.2
-
Zulaufventil PE
PE
=01-WG010
PE
PE
Feed valve -PE

.-J 3x1,5 mm²
Sprache:
Language:
7
=01+JB-1X10 PE
Verdrängungs- und Füllwasser PE &EFS/17.4
PE:PE
=01-WG011
PE
PE
Displacem- and filling water -PE

PE
.-J 7x1,5 mm²
=11-10_3_001
de/en
Zulaufpumpe PE &EFS/18.1
PE
U1 =11-WD001
PE
PE
Feed pump -PE

_-J 4x2,5 mm²
3
U1
V1
M
W1
Drawing No.:
V1
Zeichnungs Nr.:
PE
8
W1
=16-90_9_001
LAHH Schlammtank Füllstand max. / max. PE PE &EFS/21.1
PE
=16-WG001
PE
PE
LAHH sludge tank level max. / max.

.-J 4x1,5 mm²
8106-2016-063
=Customer+L-X
As built +
Rev.04 =
Separator Betrieb PE &EFS/22.2

PE
DCC
PE
=100-WG001
PE
PE
Separator operation
.-J 5x1,5 mm²
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
52 Bl./Sh.
33
=0+-PE
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
=16-90_9_002
Editor
&EFS/21.3
Tested
LAHH Schlammtank Füllstand max. / max. PE PE
PE
=16-WG002
PE
PE
.-J 4x1,5 mm²
1
=Customer+L-X
MAR/PLE
Wasserschlossalarm PE &EFS/22.3
27.03.2015
PE
PE
=100-WG002
PE
PE
Water seal broken alarm
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
10.06.2014 TE
=16-98_7_002
Ventil pneumatische Schlammpumpe PE PE &EFS/21.8
PE
=16-WG005
PE
PE
Valve pneumatic sludge pump -PE
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
Kunde:
Project:
Projekt:
Customer:
-
-
=Customer+L-X
TAH Temperatur Alarm max PE &EFS/22.5
PE
=100-WG003
PE
PE
2

.-J 3x1,5 mm²
PE
TAL Temperatur Alarm min PE &EFS/22.6
PE
=100-WG004
PE
PE
TAL temperature alarm min

.-J 3x1,5 mm²
-PE
Steuergerät PE &EFS/24.6
Timing unit
=Heater+L-X
Erhitzerfreigabe PE &EFS/22.8
PE
PE
=100-WG005
PE
PE
Heater release
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
3
-PE
Steuerspannung AC PE &EFS/10.1
Control voltage AC
4
Separator
GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description:
5
6
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
de/en Drawing No.:

Zeichnungs Nr.:
8
8106-2016-063
As built +
Rev.04 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
52 Bl./Sh.
34
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
&EFS/20.7
Querverweis
&EFS/9.3
Cross reference
Ziel intern
Target internal
-SC
-SC
Brücken
Bridges
=0+-SC
Klemmennummer
SC
SC
Terminal number
PE SC
PE SC
-PE
=11-X2
Min / max Temperaturüberwachung
Earthing screen
Erdung Schirm

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-SC
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Terminal connecting plan =0+-SC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
&EFS/10.0
&EFS/10.1
&EFS/10.1
&EFS/10.1
&EFS/10.1
&EFS/10.2
&EFS/11.1
&EFS/11.1
&EFS/11.1
Querverweis
Cross reference
4
Ziel intern
=11-X1
=01-X1
Target internal
-F2
-T1
Brücken
Bridges
=0+-X1
Klemmennummer
1
9
Terminal number
RD_U RDWHU GN/YE 1 2
.-J 3x1,5 mm²

-WG001
RD_U RDWHU GN/YE 1 2
L N PE PE 21 22
N
L
21
M
1~
PE
PE
22
-M1
-PE
-S01
Emergency stop external
Steuerspannung AC
Steuerspannung AC
Control voltage AC
Control voltage AC
Not-Halt extern
Reserve
Spare
=

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-X1
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Terminal connecting plan =0+-X1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Querverweis
&EFS/9.1
&EFS/9.1
&EFS/9.1
Cross reference
6
Ziel intern
Target internal
-Q1
-Q1
-Q1
Brücken
Bridges
=0+-XQ1
Klemmennummer
2
Terminal number
1 2 3
_-J 4x2,5 mm²
-WD001
1 2 3
L1 L2 L3
L1
=Customer+L-X
Einspeisung
Incoming
=

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-XQ1
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Terminal connecting plan =0+-XQ1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
&EFS/12.1
&EFS/12.1
&EFS/12.1
&EFS/12.8
&EFS/12.7
Querverweis
Cross reference
13
Ziel intern
=0-X1
Target internal
-Q1
-Q1
-Q1
-F1
Brücken
Bridges
=01+-X1
Klemmennummer
1
Terminal number 5
1 2 3
_-J 4x2,5 mm²
-WD001
1 2 3
U1 V1 W1 T2 T1 PE
W1
U1
V1
PE
M
3~
Θ
T2
T1
-10_1_001
Separator
Separator
Reserve
Spare
=

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
- As built +
Projekt:
=01+-X2
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
-10_1_001
Editor
&EFS/12.3
Tested
PTC-Fühler Separator 1
T1
1
1
PTC-feeler separator -F1 T1
-WG003 &EFS/12.3
= .-J 3x1,5 mm² 2
T2
1
2
2
T2 U1
-F1 T2
MAR/PLE
27.03.2015
U1
V1
Θ
M
3~
10.06.2014 TE
T1 W1
V1
PE
W1
Kunde:
Project:
Projekt:
PE
Customer:
-
-
2
+JB-1X10
Drehzahlüberwachung 3 &EFS/14.2
1
1
1
Speed monitoring device -T2 1+

= 4 &EFS/14.2
2
2
2
-T2 2-
Reinoel Ablaufdruck 5 &EFS/15.1
4
3
3
Clean-oil discharge pressure =0-T2 L+

-WG004 &EFS/15.1
= 6
3
.-J 7x1,5 mm²
4
4
=00-K1 X13:5
Wasserablauf 7 &EFS/15.2
1
Water discharge
3
= 8 &EFS/15.2
6
5
5
=00-K1 X13:8
Reserve 9 &EFS/15.3
Spare =16-X2 1
= 10 &EFS/15.3
=00-K1 X11:6
= 11 &EFS/16.4
10
1
1
-WG011 =00-K1 X11:16

.-J 7x1,5 mm²
-18_7_002
- + &EFS/17.1
4
Separator
Zulaufventil 12
+
1
1
GEA Westfalia
Feed valve =00-K1 X12:1
-WG010 &EFS/17.1
-
= .-J 3x1,5 mm² 13

2
2
=0-24M 1
+JB-1X10
Steuerwasser 14 &EFS/17.3
12
2
2
Operating water =00-K1 X12:3

Verdrängungs- und Füllwasser 15 &EFS/17.4
15
3
3
12
Displacem- and filling water -WG011 =00-K1 X12:2

.-J 7x1,5 mm²
&EFS/17.4
= 16
14
5
4
4
Reserve 17 &EFS/17.5
Spare =00-K1 X12:5
= 18 &EFS/17.6
=00-K1 X12:6

= 19 &EFS/17.7
=16-X2 3
6
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
de/en Drawing No.:

Zeichnungs Nr.:
8
8106-2016-063
As built +
Rev.04 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
52 Bl./Sh.
39
=01+JB-1X10
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
-19_7_004
Editor
&EFS/17.3
Tested
Steuerwasser PE PE
PE
-WG105
PE
PE
Operating water =0-PE PE
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
1
-10_9_020
MAR/PLE
Drehzahlüberwachung - + 1 &EFS/14.2
27.03.2015
Speed monitoring device -X2 3
BN
BN
10.06.2014 TE
-WG101 &EFS/14.2
-
= .-O 2x0,34 mm² 2
-X2 4
BU
-11_9_002 BU
I
1
Kunde:
&EFS/15.1
Project:
Projekt:
Reinoel Ablaufdruck 3
Customer:
-
-
Clean-oil discharge pressure -X2 6
WH
WH
2
-WG102 &EFS/15.1
= 4
1
.-O 2x0,34 mm²
-X2 5
2
BK
BK
P
-10_9_014
I
1 &EFS/15.2
Wasserablauf 5
1
BK
BK
Water discharge
2
-WG103 &EFS/15.2
= 6
2
.-O 2x0,34 mm²
-X2 8
P
WH
WH
Reserve 7 &EFS/15.3
Spare
= 8 &EFS/16.1
3
= 9 &EFS/16.1
= 10 &EFS/16.4
-X2 11
= 11 &EFS/16.4
-19_7_004
Steuerwasser - + 12 &EFS/17.3
+
Operating water -X2 14

BN
BN
-WG105 &EFS/17.3
-
= .-J 3x1,5 mm² 13

BU
BU
4
Separator
GEA Westfalia
-19_7_005
- + &EFS/17.4
-
Verdrängungs- und Füllwasser 14

Displacem- and filling water -X2 16
BU
BU
= 15 &EFS/17.4
+
-X2 15
BN
BN
-WG106 &EFS/17.5
Reserve .-J 3x1,5 mm² 16
Spare
Verdrängungs- und Füllwasser PE PE &EFS/17.4
PE
PE
PE
Displacem- and filling water =0-PE PE
5
Klemmenanschlussplan =01+JB-1X10
Terminal connecting plan =01+JB-1X10
6
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
de/en Drawing No.:

Zeichnungs Nr.:
8
8106-2016-063
As built +
Rev.04 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
52 Bl./Sh.
40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
&EFS/18.1
&EFS/18.1
&EFS/18.1
&EFS/20.1
&EFS/20.1
&EFS/20.1
&EFS/20.1
Querverweis
Cross reference
8
Ziel intern
=0-X1
=0-X1
Target internal
-Q1
-Q1
-Q1
Brücken
Bridges
=11+-X1
Klemmennummer
1
7
Terminal number
1 2 3
_-J 4x2,5 mm²
-WD001
1 2 3
U1 V1 W1 PE
W1
U1
V1
PE
M
3
-10_3_001
Zulaufpumpe
Feed pump
Reserve
Spare
=

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
- As built +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
&EFS/20.5
&EFS/20.5
&EFS/20.6
&EFS/20.6
&EFS/20.7
Querverweis
Cross reference
X13:15
X13:16
SC
Ziel intern
=00-K1
=00-K1
=0-SC
Target internal
Brücken
Bridges
=11+-X2
Klemmennummer
SC
1
Terminal number
1 2 3 4
.CY-O 4x1,5 mm²
-WG003
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1
2
-10_9_006
Min / max Temperaturüberwachung

Reserve
Spare
=

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
- As built +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
&EFS/21.1
&EFS/21.1
&EFS/21.1
&EFS/21.3
&EFS/21.2
&EFS/21.2
&EFS/21.4
&EFS/21.4
&EFS/21.4
&EFS/21.5
&EFS/21.5
&EFS/21.6
&EFS/21.7
&EFS/21.7
Querverweis
Cross reference
19
X11:13
X11:14
X12:11
Ziel intern
=00-K1
=00-K1
=00-K1
=01-X2
Target internal
Brücken
Bridges
=16+-X2
Klemmennummer
10
11
12
13
14
1
9
Terminal number
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2
.-J 4x1,5 mm²
.-J 4x1,5 mm²
.-J 3x1,5 mm²

-WG001
-WG002
-WG005
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2
3 2 1 1 3 2 + -
3
+
+ - + -
-
2
2
-90_9_001
-90_9_002
-98_7_002
LAHH Schlammtank Füllstand max. / max.
Ventil pneumatische Schlammpumpe

Valve pneumatic sludge pump

Reserve
Spare
=

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
- As built +
Projekt:
=100+-X2
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
=Customer+L-X
Editor
&EFS/22.1
Tested
Sammelstörung 1
1
1
Common failure -K1 21
= 2 &EFS/22.1
1
2
2
-K1 24
MAR/PLE
-WG001 &EFS/22.2
Separator Betrieb .-J 5x1,5 mm² 3
27.03.2015
3
3
Separator operation =01-Q1 44
10.06.2014 TE
= 4 &EFS/22.2
4
4
=01-Q1 43
Wasserschlossalarm 5 &EFS/22.3
1
1
Water seal broken alarm -K2 11
Kunde:
-WG002 &EFS/22.3
Project:
Projekt:
= .-J 3x1,5 mm² 6
2
2
Customer:
-
-
-K2 14
TAH Temperatur Alarm max 7 &EFS/22.4
1
1
-K3 11
2

-WG003 &EFS/22.4
= .-J 3x1,5 mm² 8
2
2
-K3 14
TAL Temperatur Alarm min 9 &EFS/22.6
1
1
TAL temperature alarm min -K4 11

-WG004 &EFS/22.6
= .-J 3x1,5 mm² 10
2
2
-K4 14
=Heater+L-X
Erhitzerfreigabe 11 &EFS/22.7
2
2
Heater release -K5 11

3
-WG005 &EFS/22.7
= .-J 3x1,5 mm² 12
2
2
-K5 14
4
Separator
GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description:
5
6
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
de/en Drawing No.:

Zeichnungs Nr.:
8
8106-2016-063
As built +
Rev.04 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
52 Bl./Sh.
44
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Kabelübersicht
Cable layout
Adern
Kabelname /Seite.Pfad Quelle (von) Ziel (bis) Kabeltyp Adern gesamt
verwendet
Querschnitt Länge Verschraubung / Klemmbereich Bemerkung
Cable name /page.path Source (from) Target (to) Cable type Wires total Cross-section Length Cable gland / clamping range Remark
Wires used
=0-WD001 &EFS/9.1 =0-PE;=0-XQ1 =Customer+L-X _-J 4x 4 2,5 mm² M20x1,5 / 8-13mm
=0-WG001 &EFS/11.1 =0-PE;=0-X1 =0-S01 .-J 3x 3 1,5 mm² M16x1,5 / 5-10mm
=01-WD001 &EFS/12.1 =0-PE;=01-X1 =01-10_1_001 _-J 4x 4 2,5 mm² M20x1,5 / 8-13mm
=01-WG003 &EFS/12.3 =0-PE;=01-X2 =01-10_1_001 .-J 3x 3 1,5 mm² M16x1,5 / 5-10mm
=01-WG004 &EFS/15.1 =0-PE;=01-X2 =01+JB-1X10 .-J 7x 6 1,5 mm² M20x1,5 / 8-13mm
=01-WG011 &EFS/16.4 =0-PE;=01-X2 =01+JB-1X10 .-J 7x 5 1,5 mm² M20x1,5 / 8-13mm
=11-WD001 &EFS/18.1 =0-PE;=11-X1 =11-10_3_001 _-J 4x 4 2,5 mm² M20x1,5 / 8-13mm
=11-WG003 &EFS/20.5 =11-X2 =11-10_9_006 .CY-O 4x 4 1,5 mm² M20x1,5 / 8-13mm
=100-WG001 &EFS/22.1 =0-PE;=100-X2 =Customer+L-X .-J 5x 5 1,5 mm² M20x1,5 / 8-13mm
=100-WG005 &EFS/22.7 =0-PE;=100-X2 =Heater+L-X .-J 3x 3 1,5 mm² M16x1,5 / 5-10mm
=01+JB-WG101 &EFS/14.1 =01+JB-1X10 =01-10_9_020 .-O 2x 2 0,34 mm² M12x1,5 / 3-6mm

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Kabelübersicht
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Cable layout
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 8106-2016-063 & EMB 52 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Kabelübersicht
Cable layout
Adern
Kabelname /Seite.Pfad Quelle (von) Ziel (bis) Kabeltyp Adern gesamt
verwendet
Querschnitt Länge Verschraubung / Klemmbereich Bemerkung
Cable name /page.path Source (from) Target (to) Cable type Wires total Cross-section Length Cable gland / clamping range Remark
Wires used
=01+JB-WG105 &EFS/17.3 =01+JB-1X10 =01-19_7_004 .-J 3x 3 1,5 mm² M16x1,5 / 5-10mm
=01+JB-WG106 &EFS/17.4 =01+JB-1X10 =01-19_7_005 .-J 3x 3 1,5 mm² M16x1,5 / 5-10mm

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Kabelübersicht
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Cable layout
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Hinweise zur Installation von Kabeln und Leitungen

Directions for installation from cables and conductors
* Schutzmaßnahmen nach Bestimmungen des VDE bzw. zuständigen EVU ausführen!

All protective measures are to be taken in accordance with electric codes, rules and regulations!
* Generell sind die Vorgaben des lokalen Energieversorgers zwingend einzuhalten
In general the the rules and regulations of the lokal power authorities has to be followed.
* Kabel und Leitungen sind so auszuwählen und zu verlegen, dass eine Gefährdung von Personen und der Umgebung ausgeschlossen ist.
Die angegebenen Kabelquerschnitte sind bezogen auf eine Kabellänge von 50m, Kupfer als Leitematerial, Verlegeart "C" und
eine maximale Umgebungstemperatur von 30°C. Siehe hierzu DIN VDE 0298-4 (Verwendung von Kabeln und isolierten Leitungen für Starkstromanlagen - Teil 4:
Empfohlene Werte für die Strombelastbarkeit von Kabeln und Leitungen für feste Verlegung in und an Gebäuden und von flexiblen Leitungen).
Neben der Strombelastung sind bei der Errichtung von Kabel- und Leitungsanlagen weitere Faktoren zu berücksichtigen.
Siehe hierzu IEC 60364-5-52 (Errichten von Niederspannungsanlagen - Teil 5: Auswahl und Errichtung elektrischer Betriebsmittel - Kapitel 52: Kabel- und Leitungsanlagen)
Cables and lines must be selected and laid in a way to eliminate any risk to persons and the environment.
The cable cross-sections specified in these drawings are based on a max. length of 50m, copper as conducting material,laying version "C" and a maximum ambient temperature of 30°C.
Refer also to DIN VDE 0298-4 (Usage of cables and cords in power installations - Part 4:
Recommended current-carrying capacity for sheathed and nonsheathed cables for fixed wirings in and around buildings and for flexible cables and cords).
Besides the current load are in the erection of wiring systems additional parameters to take into account.
Refer also to IEC 60364-5-52 (Erection of low voltage installations - Part 5: Selection and erection of electrical equipment - Chapter 52: Wiring systems)
* Messleitungen sind grundsätzlich abgeschirmt zu verlegen!
Measuring lines must always be laid shielded!
* WD-Kabel getrennt vom WF-/WG-Kabeln verlegen!
WD-cables to be installed separate from WF-/WG-cable!
* Alle Kabel müssen den Flammentest Anforderungen für gebündelte Kabel nach IEC 60332-3 / IEEE 45-18.13 gerecht werden.
All cables must meet the flame test requirements for bunched cables acc. to IEC 60332-3 / IEEE 45-18.13.
* Das gesamte Kabelmaterial muss halogenfrei nach IEC 60754-1, giftfrei nach IEC 60754 und korrosionsfrei nach IEC 60754-2 sein
All cable materials must be free of halogens acc. to IEC 60754-1, no toxicity acc. to 60754 and no corrosivity acc. to IEC 60754-2.
* Alle Kabel müssen eine Abnahme der relevante Abnahmegesellschaft haben. Isolierungsfestigkeit: 0.6/1KV
All cables must have an approval of the relevant classification society. Insulating strength: 0.6/1KV * GEA WSPN Standard: Nexans MPRX 0.6/1kV.
WD-Kabel Energiekabel < 1kV WE-Kabel Erdungs-/Potentialausgleichsleiterleiter

WD-cable = Energy cable < 1kV WE-cable = Earth-/ Equipotential bonding conductor
WF-Kabel Datenbus WG-Kabel Steuer-/ Messkabel WH-Kabel Lichtwellenleiter
WF-cable = Data bus WG-cable = Control-/measuring cable WH-cable = Optical fibre
* Legende Kabeltypen (Kabelliste)

Legend cable typ (list of cables)
Kabel / Leitung mit Schutzleiter

-J = Cable / conductor with protective conductor FC.CY = Motorkabel FU mit konzentrischem Außenleiter (PE)
Motor cable FC with concentric outer (PE)
Kabel / Leitung ohne Schutzleiter
-O = Cable / conductor without protective conductor PL = Potentialausgleichsleiter
Equipotential bonding conductor
Kabel / Leitung mit Schutzleiter geschirmt
CY-J = Cable / conductor with protective conductor screened Ex-CY = Steuerleitung blau für eigensichere Stromkreise
Control line blue for intrinsically safecircuits
Kabel / Leitung ohne Schutzleiter geschirmt
CY-O = Cable / conductor without protective conductor screened CY-TP = Datenleitung paarverseilt
Data line twisted pair
Motorkabel FU geschirmt mit Schutzleiter
FC.CY-J = Motor cable FC screened with protective conductor

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Hinweise zur Installation
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Instructions for installation
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
FU
FC
=..-U.
Generelle Information zum Potentialausgleich.
Die Informationen auf diesem Blatt sind nicht
kundenspezifisch angepasst.
IP54
General Information for the equipotential bonding system.

≥10 mm²
GN YE Please note, that the information shown on this page are
not customised.
PE-Schiene
protective earth - rail
IDM
≥25 mm²
GN YE
≥10 mm²
GN YE
PA
Potentialausgleichsschiene
equipotential bonding strip
PA7
PA6
PA5
PA4
PA3
PA2
PA1
≥10 mm²
GN YE
equipotential bonding building
Potentialausgleich Gebäude
≥25 mm²
GN YE
Fundamenterder
foundation earth

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Potentialausgleich Separator
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Potential equalization Separator
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stückliste
Parts list
Funktionszeichen /Seite.Pfad WS Teil-Nr Hersteller Bestell-Nr. Bezeichnung Hersteller
Function sign /page.path WS part-no. Manufacturer order no.. Name Manufacturer
=0-Q1 &EFS/9.1 0005-1437-000 GV2P20 Motorschutzschalter GV2-P - 13...18A Groupe Schneider

Motor circuit breaker GV2-P - 13...18A
=0-Q1 &EFS/9.1 0005-1517-000 GVAE11 Hilfsschalter querliegend, 1S+1Ö Groupe Schneider
Auxiliary switch, 1NO+1NC
=0-Q1 &EFS/9.1 0005-1437-230 GV2APN02 Drehantrieb für Türeinbau, abschließbar, rot/gelb Groupe Schneider
Front-rotating drive, red
=0-F1 &EFS/10.1 0005-1872-650 3RV2411-0HA10 Leistungsschalter, 0,55...0,8A, BGR S00, für den Transformatorschutz Siemens
Circuit-breaker, 0,55...0,8A, size S00, transformer protection
=0-F2 &EFS/10.1 0005-1428-000 23732 Sicherungsautomat C 6A, 1 pol, C60N Groupe Schneider
Circuit breaker
=0-M1 &EFS/10.1 0005-1805-030 3238100 Filterlüfter, 55/66 m³/h, 230 V 50/60Hz, RAL 7035 Rittal
Fan-and-filter unit, 55/66 m³/h, 230 V 50/60Hz, RAL 7035
=0-M1 &EFS/10.1 0005-1805-320 3238200 Austrittsfilter RAL 7035 für Filterlüfter 3238.xxx Rittal
Outlet filter RAL 7035 for fan-and-filter units 3238.xxx
=0-24M &EFS/10.6 0005-4708-890 1031400000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 1,5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
Feed-through terminal
=0-T1 &EFS/10.1 734299 734299 Steuerspannungstransformator, Prim.: 690VAC, Sek.: 230V, 400VA Ismet
Control voltage transformer
=0-T2 &EFS/10.5 0005-1407-020 6EP1333-2AA01-0AA0 Einphasennetzgeraet Prim.: 120/230V, 50/60Hz, Sec.: 24VDC, 5A Siemens
Single phase power supply
=0-X1 &EFS/10.0.. 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 2.5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
=0-K1 &EFS/11.6 0005-4033-110 2966207 Relais Einzelkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 1 Wechsler, Phoenix Contakt
Relay single contact
=01-B1 &EFS/12.1 0005-0924-220 TAID10B500 Stromwandler, 50/1A IME
Current transformer
=01-F1 &EFS/12.4 0005-1100-070 3RN1010-1CM00 THERMISTOR-MOTORSCHUTZ, STANDARD-AUSWERTEGERÄT, AUTO, 1S+1OE, AC 230V Siemens
THERMISTOR MOTOR PROTECTION, EVALUATION UNIT, AUTO, 1NO+1NC, AC 230V
=01-Q1 &EFS/12.8 0005-1871-410 3RT2024-1AL20 Schütz, AC-3, 5,5KW/400V, 1S+1OE, AC 230V 50/60HZ, Siemens
Contactor, AC-3, 5.5KW/400V, 1NO+1NC, AC 230V 50/60HZ,
=01-Q1 &EFS/12.8 3RH2911-1HA20 3RH2911-1HA20 Hilfsschalterblock, 2S, für Motorschütze Siemens
Auxiliary switch block, 2NO
=01-Q1 &EFS/12.8 3RT2926-1CD00 3RT2926-1CD00 RC-Glied, AC 127...240V, DC 150...250V Siemens
RC-Element
=01-S1 &EFS/12.8 0005-0082-190 3SB3100-8AC21-BC Doppeldrucktaster komplett, tastend, grün/rot, 1x1NO+1x1NC Siemens
Double push button complete
=01-S1 &EFS/12.8 1027830000 1027830000 Gerätemarkierer, MultiCard, 12.5 x 27 mm, Farbe: grau Weidmueller
Device markers
Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
Separator Stückliste
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Parts list
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 8106-2016-063 & EPB 52 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stückliste
Parts list
=01-T1 &EFS/12.2 0005-3482-070 1073490000 Stromüberwachung, 0...1 A AC/ 0...5 A AC/ 0...10 A AC, 1, 0(4)...20 mA, 0...10 V, 1 Weidmueller
Current monitoring
=01-X1 &EFS/12.1 0005-3504-890 1020100000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 4 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
=01-X1 &EFS/12.7; 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 2.5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
=01-K1 &EFS/13.1 0005-4033-040 2966171 Relais Einzelkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 1 Wechsler, Un=24 Phoenix Contakt
=01-T2 &EFS/14.1 0005-4509-010 7505501 Schaltverstärker Turck
Amplifier
=11-K1 &EFS/18.7 0005-4033-120 2967099 Relais Mehrfachkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 2 Wechsler, Phoenix Contakt
Relay twin-contact
=11-Q1 &EFS/18.0 0005-1730-000 LUB12 Motorabgang Grundgerät - 12A AC-43, 440V Groupe Schneider
Motor outlet of basic unit - 12 A AC-43, 440 V
=11-Q1 &EFS/18.0 0005-1730-110 LUCA1XFU Steuereinheit Standard LUCA, 0,35...1,4A, 110/220VAC/DC, Class 10 Groupe Schneider
Control unit, standard LUCA, 0,35...1,4A, 110/220VAC/DC, Class 10
=11-Q1 &EFS/18.0 0005-1730-310 LUA1C20 Hilfsschaltermodul MSS LUA, 2S Groupe Schneider
Aux. switch module, MSS LUA, 2 NO.
=11-Q1 &EFS/18.0 LU9SP0 LU9SP0 Phasentrenner Groupe Schneider
pase barrier
=11-S1 &EFS/18.7 0005-0082-190 3SB3100-8AC21-BC Doppeldrucktaster komplett, tastend, grün/rot, 1x1NO+1x1NC Siemens
Double push button complete
=11-S1 &EFS/18.7 1027830000 1027830000 Gerätemarkierer, MultiCard, 12.5 x 27 mm, Farbe: grau Weidmueller
Device markers
=100-K1 &EFS/22.1 0005-4033-080 2967060 Relais Mehrfachkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 2 Wechsler, Phoenix Contakt
Relay twin-contact
Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Parts list
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stückliste
Parts list
=00-K1 &EFS/24.1 0005-4050-430 6ES7613-1SB02-0AC0 Komplettgerät GEA, C7-613, 24DE/16DA/5AE/2AA, SIMATIC C7 Siemens
Control system GEA, C7-613, 24DI/16DO/5AI/2AO, SIMATIC C7
-Cabinet &ELU/28.1 0005-0058-500 1058500 Kompakt-Schaltschrank AE, lackiert RAL 7035, mit Montageplatte, eintürig Rittal
Compact enclosure AE, painted RAL 7035, with mount. plate, single door
-Cabinet &ELU/28.1 0005-1412-000 2519000 Türarretierung für das AE Programm Rittal
Door stay for the AE range
-Cabinet &ELU/28.1 2508010 2508010 Wandbefestigungshalter Stahlblech, Wandabstand 10mm Rittal
Wall mounting bracket sheet steel, zinc-plated & passivated wall distance 10 mm
-Cabinet &ELU/28.1 8556-9999-000 KLEINMATERIAL Kleinmaterial Schaltschrank Plenge
Incidentals control cabinet
-Cabinet &ELU/28.1 ADERKENNZEICHNUNG ADERKENNZEICHNUNG Aderkennzeichnung Plenge
Wire marking
-Cabinet_lable &ELU/28.6 1934390000 1934390000 Gerätemarkierer, MultiCard, 30 x 60 mm, Farbe: weiß Weidmueller
Device markers
-Ground_plate &ELU/29.0 0005-4486-930 70-16-060-000-10-041 Verschraubung Polyamid, M16x1,5, RAL 7032, halogenfrei, d=5-10mm Jacob
Screw connection polyamide, M16x1,5, RAL 7032, halogen free, 5-10mm
-Ground_plate &ELU/29.0 0013-0130-630 82-16-02-0-04 Gegenmutter Messing, M16x1,5 Jacob
Counter nut brass nickeled, M16x1,5
-Ground_plate &ELU/29.0 0005-4487-930 70-20-060-000-13-041 Verschraubung Polyamid, M20x1,5, RAL 7032, halogenfrei, d=8-13mm Jacob
-Ground_plate &ELU/29.0 0013-0131-630 82-20-02-0-04 Gegenmutter Messing, M20x1,5 Jacob
-Ground_plate &ELU/29.0 0005-4442-630 81-16-802-0001-04 Blindstopfen Messing, M16x1,5 Jacob
Blanking plug brass nickeled, M16x1,5
-Ground_plate &ELU/29.0 0005-4443-630 81-20-802-0001-04 Blindstopfen Messing, M20x1,5 Jacob
Blanking plug brass nickeled, M20x1,5
=Additions &ELU/29.8 0005-1554-000 1646461044 Kabelbezeichnung, polyamid Weidmueller
Cable designation
=Additions &ELU/29.8 8555-9001-010 8555-9001-010 Betriebsanleitung D10 NewDesign, englisch WS Mineraloil Systems
Instruction manual D10
Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Parts list
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stückliste
Parts list
=Additions-S01 &ELU/31.1 0005-0081-030 3SB3801-0DF3 Pilzdrucktaster Gehäuse, verrastend, mit Schutzkragen, 1NC, 2x M20 Siemens
Mushroom push button box
=Additions-S01 &ELU/31.1 0005-4487-930 70-20-060-000-13-041 Verschraubung Polyamid, M20x1,5, RAL 7032, halogenfrei, d=8-13mm Jacob
=Additions-S01 &ELU/31.1 0013-0131-630 82-20-02-0-04 Gegenmutter Messing, M20x1,5 Jacob

Editor MAR/PLE
Customer:
- As built +
Projekt:
Project: Parts list
Instruction manual
Designation Mineral oil centrifuge with self-cleaning bowl
Type OSE 5-91-037
No. 2066-9001-200
Edition 0410

2 2066-9001-200 / 0410


GEA Westfalia Separator GmbH
Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488

2066-9001-200 / 0410 3
GEA Westfalia Separator Systems GmbH

59302 Oelde, Germany
Type S/N:
Year of manufacture
-1
Max. admissible rated bowl speed in min
3
Max. admissible density in kg/dm of product
Heavy 3
liquid kg/dm
3 Solids kg/dm
3
Min/max throughput m /h
Min/max temp. of product in °C
Min/max housing pressure range in bar
This nameplate must be filled in by the operator.

Please transfer the data from the centrifuge nameplate.

4 2066-9001-200 / 0410
For your safety

symbol -


tionally to the operation of the separator. The plant operator must en-
sure compliance with these regulations.
• When operating electrical apparatus, certain parts carry danger-

ous voltage.
Before working in electrical components, take adequate preventive
measures according to the national provisions (in Germany in accord-
ance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verein Deutscher El-
ektrotechnik / Association of German Electrical Engineering) or of the
Non-compliance with the protective measures can result in serious
damage to persons or property.
Any work on electrical components may only be carried out by an au-
thorized electrician.
• Only qualified or authorized specialized staff may operate, main-

tain and repair the separator.
Corresponding training courses take place in the manufacturer’s plant
or are held on site by the manufacturer.

Follow only the instructions given in this manual.
in this manual may not be carried out.
• Operate the separator only in accordance with agreed process

and operating parameters

2066-9001-200 / 0410 5
• Maintain the separator

as specified in this manual.
• Carry out safety checks on the separator,

as described in chapter "Safety precautions" in this manual
• Liability for the function of the machine passes to the owner.

Liability for the function of the machine passes unconditionally to the
owner or operator irrespective of existing warranty periods in so far as
the machine is improperly maintained or serviced by persons other
than GEA Westfalia Separator service personnel or if the machine is
not applied in accordance with the intended use.
GEA Westfalia Separator shall not be liable for damage which occurs
as a result of non-observance of the above. Warranty and liability con-
ditions in the Conditions of Sale and Delivery of GEA Westfalia Sepa-
rator are not extended by the above.

6 2066-9001-200 / 0410
1.1 Correct usage ........................................................................................ 10

1.3 Safety markings ..................................................................................... 12
1.4 Basic operating principles ...................................................................... 17
1.5 Operations on the separator .................................................................. 18
1.5.3 Assembly ............................................................................................... 19
1.5.5 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 23
1.5.6 Start-up .................................................................................................. 25
1.5.7 Shut-down and “Emergency-Off" ........................................................... 27
1.5.8 Voltage cutoff during operation .............................................................. 28
1.6 Corrosion ............................................................................................... 33
1.7 Erosion ................................................................................................... 34
1.8 The health hazards involved when handling heavy oils and lube oils ... 36
1.8.1 Code of practice and personal protective measures ............................. 36
2 Machine description 37
2.1 Standard dimensioned drawing of the separator ................................... 38

2.2 Section through separator ..................................................................... 40
2.3 General .................................................................................................. 41
2.4 OSE ...-91-... .......................................................................................... 41
2.5 Main components of the separator ........................................................ 44
2.5.1 Centripetal pump ................................................................................... 45
2.5.2 Bowl ....................................................................................................... 46
2.5.3 Bowl hydraulics ...................................................................................... 47
2.5.4 Drive ....................................................................................................... 50
2.6 Regulating ring ....................................................................................... 55
2.6.1 Determination by table ........................................................................... 55
2.6.2 Determination by experiment ................................................................. 56
2.7 Supervisory equipment .......................................................................... 57
2.7.1 Pressure transmitter .............................................................................. 57
2.7.2 Vibration monitoring (Option) ................................................................. 59
2.7.3 Speed monitoring ................................................................................... 60
2.8 Product feed line and product discharge line ........................................ 61
2.8.1 Throughput monitoring (product feed line A) ......................................... 61
2.8.2 Determining the throughput rate (product feed line A) .......................... 62
2.8.3 Pressure monitoring (product discharge line B) .................................... 63
2.9 Technical data ....................................................................................... 64
3 Operation 67
3.1 Technical information ............................................................................. 68

3.1.1 Notes on separation ............................................................................... 68
3.1.2 General information on bowl ejection .................................................... 68

2066-9001-200 / 0410 7
3.2 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 70

3.2.1 Before the first start-up – after maintenance and repair ........................ 70
3.2.2 Before every start-up ............................................................................. 72
3.3 Starting the separator ............................................................................ 73
3.4 Monitoring of operation .......................................................................... 74
3.5 Setting the separation time .................................................................... 76
3.5.1 Mathematical calculation ....................................................................... 76
3.6 Ejecting the bowl .................................................................................... 77
3.7 Shutting down the separator .................................................................. 78
3.7.1 Shut-down “Emergency-Off" .................................................................. 80
3.8 Trouble shooting .................................................................................... 82
3.8.1 Trouble shooting .................................................................................... 82
3.8.2 Bowl faults.............................................................................................. 84
4 Installation - Maintenance - Repair 91
4.1 Installation of the separator ................................................................... 92

4.1.3 Motor ...................................................................................................... 97
4.1.4 Direction of rotation of the bowl ........................................................... 100
4.1.5 Speed and starting time of the bowl .................................................... 101
4.2 Orifice plates and flowmeter ................................................................ 102
4.2.1 Installing the orifice plates ................................................................... 103
4.3 Maintenance and lubrication ................................................................ 105
4.3.1 Maintenance schedule ......................................................................... 105
4.3.2 Hoses and hose pipes ......................................................................... 112
4.3.3 Lubrication ........................................................................................... 113
4.3.4 Lubrication Chart ................................................................................. 116
4.3.5 Table of lubricating oils ........................................................................ 118
4.3.6 Comments on table of lubricating oils for separators from Westfalia
Separator ............................................................................................. 119
4.4 Bowl ..................................................................................................... 120
4.4.1 Dismantling the bowl ............................................................................ 122
4.4.2 Cleaning the bowl ................................................................................ 136
4.4.3 Cleaning the frame .............................................................................. 137
4.4.4 Cleaning the strainer and the operating water feeding system ........... 137
4.4.5 Cleaning the motor .............................................................................. 138
4.4.6 Important instructions for assembling the bowl ................................... 139
4.4.7 Assembling the bowl ............................................................................ 141
4.4.8 Replacing the polyamide gasket (bowl top) ......................................... 155
4.4.10 Reworking the sliding piston ................................................................ 160
4.5 Mounting the hood ............................................................................... 161
4.6 Drive ..................................................................................................... 164
4.6.1 Important instructions for fitting and removing the drive ...................... 166
4.6.2 Removing the drive belt and spindle assembly ................................... 168
4.6.3 Dismantling the spindle assembly ....................................................... 172
4.6.4 Dismantling the centrifugal clutch ........................................................ 174
4.6.5 Fitting the spindle assembly ................................................................ 178
4.6.6 Fitting the centrifugal clutch ................................................................. 180
4.6.7 Fitting the motor ................................................................................... 186
4.7 Height adjustment ................................................................................ 191
4.7.1 Bowl height .......................................................................................... 191
4.7.2 Centripetal pump clearance ................................................................. 192
4.8 Final checks after assembling the separator ....................................... 194
4.9 Before a long-term shut-down of the separator ................................... 194
4.9.1 Preserving the separator ..................................................................... 194

8 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.9.2 Preserving the motor ........................................................................... 195

4.10 Storage ................................................................................................ 196
4.10.1 After delivery ........................................................................................ 196
4.10.2 Separator ............................................................................................. 196
4.10.3 Control system ..................................................................................... 196
4.11 Before restarting .................................................................................. 197
4.12 Disposal ............................................................................................... 198
4.12.1 Gear and lubricating oils ...................................................................... 198
4.12.2 Cleaning liquids ................................................................................... 199
4.12.3 Separator ............................................................................................. 199
4.13 Standard tools ...................................................................................... 200
4.14 Special tools ........................................................................................ 202
5 Spare parts 205
5.1 Spare part requirements ...................................................................... 206

5.2 Guide to ordering spare parts .............................................................. 206

2066-9001-200 / 0410 9
1.1 Correct usage ........................................................................................ 10

1.3 Safety markings ..................................................................................... 12
1.4 Basic operating principles ...................................................................... 17
1.5 Operations on the separator .................................................................. 18
1.5.3 Assembly ............................................................................................... 19
1.5.5 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 23
1.5.6 Start-up .................................................................................................. 25
1.5.7 Shut-down and “Emergency-Off" ........................................................... 27
1.5.8 Voltage cutoff during operation .............................................................. 28
1.6 Corrosion ............................................................................................... 33
1.7 Erosion ................................................................................................... 34
1.8 The health hazards involved when handling heavy oils and lube oils ... 36
1.8.1 Code of practice and personal protective measures ............................. 36

10 2066-9001-200 / 0410
1.1 Correct usage

Centrifugal separators – called separators in short – are used
• for the separation of liquid mixtures which consist of two liquids, with simulta-
neous removal of the solids contained in the liquids.
• for removing (clarifying) solids from a liquid.
The separator is designed

• for a very high bowl speed.
The admissible bowl speed depends on the chemical and physical properties
of the product:
– Temperature
– Density of the fluid and solid components.
• for products which contain no corrosive and erosive components.
The aggressiveness of the product influences the careful selection of the bowl
material.
Only products conforming to the specifications on the nameplate may be pro-
cessed.
• in accordance with the method of application of the separator agreed with
GEA Westfalia Separator. Refer to the data sheet and contractually agree-
ments.
• in accordance with the admissible utilities (cleaning agents, lubricants, operat-
ing liquids etc.) specified in the documentation or on the data sheet.
Intended use involves

• paying attention to the safety precautions, the instruction manual of the sepa-
rator and the safety markings on the separator.
• adhering to the data on the nameplate, e.g. maximum admissible bowl speed.
Further information on the intended use of the separator such as
– agreed areas,
– density of the product
– throughput capacities
– temperatures
– pressures etc.
is given in the documentation or the data sheet furnished with the documenta-
tion.
The contractually agreed conditions agreed with GEA Westfalia Separator on
the intended use of the separator must be passed on to the operating personnel
by the plant operator.
Any operating mode deviating from this is not intended use and can result
in severe damage to property and persons!

2066-9001-200 / 0410 11

Any use that deviates from the intended use is considered to be non-
compliant.
The separator may not be operated by:

• Persons who have not read and understood these basic safety precautions.
• Persons who have not read and understood the instruction manual of the
separator.
• Persons who have not been briefed on proper and correct operation.
• Persons who have not been adequately trained.
• Persons who have not reached the minimum age of 18 years.
The separator may not be operated

• when the product fed does not conform to the specifications on the name-
plate.
– Product with excessively high density
– Solids with excessively high density
– Product with excessively high temperature
• when the max. admissible bowl speed has been exceeded through electrical
or electronic manipulation of the drive.
• in an incomplete state of assembly, e.g.
– required supervisory equipment is not activated or has been switched off.
– the required safety and/or protective covers have not been installed.
• by persons who are not adequately trained.
• when the separator is operated with spare parts which do not come from
Non-compliance with intended use can result in severe damage to proper-

ty and persons!

12 2066-9001-200 / 0410
1.3 Safety markings

The safety markings (adhesive and metal plates) are attached to all separators
on the hood and frame of the respective separator in such a way that they are
clearly visible.
All safety markings on the separator, control system and plant components must
always be in perfect condition.
Fig. 1 Example of markings on a separator
1 Pictograms (safety stickers)

2 Oil quality
3 Plates
4 Nameplate
5 Maker's nameplate
The texts and part numbers of the safety markings change depending on the
languages required by the customer.

2066-9001-200 / 0410 13

The following safety markings must be attached to the separator as adhesive
labels.
Fig. 2
Refer to the machine documen-

tation!
taining and repairing the machine
must have read and understood the
documentation.
plete kept near to the machine and
be readily accessible to the opera-
tors. It must be available to the op-
erators at all times!
Fig. 3

14 2066-9001-200 / 0410

tor!

ponents:
standstill.
Danger to life and limb through

rotating machine parts!
• Do not loosen any part and do not
carry out maintenance or repair
work on the separator before the
separator is at a standstill.
Methods of how to check standstill
are described in the machine docu-
mentation.
Fig. 5
Warning of unusual noises or

vibrations!
When unusual noises or vibrations

occur on the separator:

off”.

centrifuge has come to a standstill.
Fig. 6

2066-9001-200 / 0410 15
Frequency converter operation!

• When setting the frequency convert-
er, do not exceed the admissible
bowl speed (see nameplate)
Note:
This adhesive plate is only used for
frequency converter operation.
Fig. 7
Warning of extreme surface

temperatures!
The surfaces of the separator and

plant components can be hot!
Note:
This adhesive plate is only used for hot
operation.
Fig. 8
Danger due to electrical voltage!

Before working on electrical separa-

tor/plant components:
Fig. 9
CAUTION:
The parts marked in this way can carry voltage even when the main
switch is off!
• Lock the separator/plant to prevent it from being accidentally switched on.
Deutscher Elektriker / Association of German Electrical Engineers) or of the
specialists).

16 2066-9001-200 / 0410
Pictograms with warning text

Pictograms can be meaningfully supplemented as illustrated in the two following
examples:
– With warning text (Voltage is also present . .),
– with signal word (ATTENTION!) and warning text.
Bei ausgeschaltetem Sous tension même

Danger through external voltage!
Hauptschalter en position d’arrêt de
unter Spannung! l’interrupteur principal !
Voltage also present Con el interruptor

Voltage also present when main switch
when main
switch is turned off!
principal desconectado se
encuentra bajo tensión!
is turned off!
CAUTION:
switch is off!
Fig. 10 Example 1
ACHTUNG! Danger through external voltage!

Auch bei ausgeschaltetem
Hauptschalter können
orangefarbige Leitungen
unter Spannung stehen.
ATTENTION!
ATTENTION!
Also in case of switched off main isola-
Also in case of switched off tor orange coloured cores can be un-
main isolator orange coloured cores
can be under voltage. der voltage.
ATTENTION!
Lorsque le commutateur principal
est éteint les files orange
peuvent être sous tension. CAUTION:
switch is off!
Fig. 11 Example 2
No te :
Orange coloured leads are fitted as standard at Westfalia Separator.
Different colour leads can be fitted if requested by the customer!

2066-9001-200 / 0410 17

earth.
Fig. 12
1.4 Basic operating principles

Separators are used for the separation of liquid mixtures or for the separation of
solids out of liquids or liquid mixtures.
High centrifugal forces are produced in

the rotating bowl.
Fig. 13
Under the influence of the centrifugal forces, separation of the liquid mixture
and/or ejection of the solids particles takes place most rapidly.
The specifically heavier components are displaced to the bowl periphery,
whereas the specifically lighter components are displaced towards the centre of
the bowl.
The high centrifugal force is produced by very high bowl speeds. On the one
hand, high bowl speeds signify high efficiency, while on the other hand, they
signify high material stressing of the separator.

18 2066-9001-200 / 0410
1.5 Operations on the separator
The separator works reliably, provided

that it is operated and maintained in
accordance with our operating instruc-
tions.
Fig. 14

• Assembly
• Electrical installation
• Before start-up
• Start-up
• Shut-down
• Maintenance and repair

Operating, maintaining or repairing the separator or the separator plant requires
specialized knowledge.
CAUTION!


who
ing.

The operator of the separator or separator plant


2066-9001-200 / 0410 19
Westfalia Separator offers an extensive range of training and advanced training

courses. You can obtain further information from Westfalia Separator or from
one of the authorized representatives.

Separator. The original spare parts are listed
in the spare parts catalog.
– safety risks,
Fig. 15 If a safety risk occurs when using non-original
for the responsible persons. In such cases,
ranty claims.
1.5.3 Assembly
• If the plant has several centrifuges,

be careful not to interchange parts of
different bowls since each bowl has
been balanced individually.
The bowl parts are marked with the
serial-number of the machine or with
the last three digits of the serial-
number.
Fig. 16

parts.
Fig. 17

20 2066-9001-200 / 0410
• Some bowl parts may be pre-

CAUTION:
assembled and balanced only by

specialists from Westfalia Separa-
tor or in workshops authorized by
Unqualified balancing can lead to
dangerous operating states (vi-
brations) and destruction of the
separator with danger to life.
Fig. 18
• To avoid unbalance, when replacing

some bowl parts like
– Lock ring
– Bowl top
– Distributor
– Bowl bottom
– Water chamber bottom
Westfalia Separator must be con-
sulted.
These parts
– are marked with a footnote in the
separator manual (see section
“Bowl”).
Fig. 19 – are marked in the column “ETS” of
the parts list with a 3 or 4.
• Some bowl parts are arranged in

fixed positions relative to one anoth-
• Locking devices and alignment

er.
marks must be in perfect condition.

The bowl must otherwise not be op-
erated.
Fig. 20
• When transporting and assembling

machine parts, avoid crushing and
shear strain.
Fig. 21

2066-9001-200 / 0410 21
• When assembling the bowl, be sure

to strictly adhere to the assembly in-
structions in order to avoid undue
• Before starting the bowl, be sure to

imbalance.
fit all parts.
Fig. 22
• Tighten the bowl lock ring securely:

the "O" marks on the bowl bottom or
bowl top and on the lock ring must
• Pay attention to the position of the

be in line with each other.
marks!
CAUTION:
A loose lock ring can endanger life!
Fig. 23
• Tighten the spindle screw with the

separator-specific torque (left-hand
thread).
CAUTION:
A loose spindle screw can endanger
life!
Fig. 24
• Tighten the centripetal pump cham-

ber lock ring or cover securely (left-
hand thread).
CAUTION:
A loose lock ring or cover can en-
danger life!
Fig. 25

22 2066-9001-200 / 0410
• Carefully fasten hood 1, feed and

discharge housing 2 and centripetal
pump 3.
Fig. 26
• Check if the machine is completely

assembled and properly installed.
Fig. 27

cian!
Separator.
Fig. 28

– Low-voltage guideline 2006/95/EC,
– Electromagnetic compatibility 2004/108/EC,

2066-9001-200 / 0410 23
1.5.5 Before start-up
• Check that the bowl lock ring has

been firmly tightened.
• The "O" marks on bowl bottom or
bowl top and on the lock ring must
be aligned.
Fig. 29
• The bowl must rotate in clockwise

direction (see arrow on frame or sol-
ids collector).
Fig. 30
• The separator may only be operated

with protection devices conforming
to EN 294.
• Equip solid and liquid discharges
accordingly where appropriate.
Fig. 31

24 2066-9001-200 / 0410
• Check that the lubrication and cool-

ing systems are serviceable.
Fig. 32
• Check whether the supervisory

equipment is operational and the
correct limit values are adjusted.
• When hoods, concentrate collectors
and vessels are pressurized, e.g. by
– inert gas blanketing,
– cooling,
– steam sterilization etc.
the pressures stated on the boiler
plate must not be exceeded.
Fig. 33
• Check that the product lines are set

to operation.
• Regularly check hoses for signs of
ageing.
• Check sight glasses for mechanical
damage.
parts.
Fig. 34

2066-9001-200 / 0410 25
1.5.6 Start-up
• Refer to chapter “operation”.

• Note nameplate. The values for
– bowl speed,
– density of the heavy liquid,
– density of the solids (centrifugally
dry)
are maximum values and must not
be exceeded.
Fig. 35
• Wear ear protection.
Fig. 36

operation:
manipulate the frequency converter
to exceed the permissible bowl
speed (see nameplate).
• The separator may only be operated
with an independent device for
speed limiting.
Fig. 37

26 2066-9001-200 / 0410
• Do not feed product which is catego-

rised as explosive.
• The separator must not be used in
areas where explosion protection is
required.
Fig. 38
• When processing products harmful

to persons, observe the pertinent
safety regulations.
• Refer to the safety data sheet of the
product.
• Use protective gear, e.g.
– Protective clothing
– Eye protection
– Protective mask
Fig. 39


off”.

separator has come to a standstill.
Fig. 40
Only in case of hot operation:

• Product-contacting parts such as
– pipes and hoses,
– hood,
– solids catcher
o
reach temperatures over 80 C .
o
(176 F).
Fig. 41

2066-9001-200 / 0410 27
• The bowl is not allowed to run with-

out liquid supply for more than 15 –
30 minutes, as otherwise it would
result in overheating of the bowl ma-
terial.
Fig. 42
1.5.7 Shut-down and “Emergency-Off"
• For shut-down of the separator refer

to the chapter "Operation" of this
manual and follow the start-up and
shut-down instructions.
Fig. 43

28 2066-9001-200 / 0410
1.5.8 Voltage cutoff during operation

When the voltage is cut off for longer than one second during operation, the
control system switches off automatically and the separating process is aborted.
Important:
– The bowl is not emptied. Product and solids remain in the bowl.
– The separator motor and product feed pump will be switched off.
– The control system switches itself back on automatically when the power
returns.
After the power returns

• Switch on the separator motor and product feed pump.
A closing water pulse after run-up of the separator triggers a total ejection au-
tomatically.


off”.

Fig. 44

2066-9001-200 / 0410 29
1.5.9 Maintenance and repair

Unfavourable operating conditions may require shorter maintenance intervals.
The factors listed below are unfavourable because they either attack the sepa-
rator material directly or impair the lubrication/cooling system:
• Aggressive product (chemical or physical)
• High product temperature
• Product with grease-decaying properties
• Environment: Temperature, dust, vapours
Particularly high-stressed separator

parts like
– Bowl lock ring,
– bowl bottom,
– bowl top and
– other bowl parts with a large outer
diameter
must be checked regularly to assure
safe and efficient operation.
Fig. 45
Timely maintenance of the separator and replacement of worn or damaged ma-

chine parts is essential for safe operation of the machine.
Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia Separator. Otherwise, safety
risks may arise (see section 1.5.2)
Carry out the required cleaning thoroughly.

One-sided solid deposits in the bowl cause severe unbalance!
Maintenance and repair work may only be carried out to the extent described in
this instruction manual.
Maintenance and repair work not described in this manual may only be
carried out by the manufacturer or by "repair shops" authorized by the
manufacturer.
We, therefore, recommend in your own interest to have your separator inspect-
ed by our service engineers at regular intervals. These checks help to maintain
the operating safety and avoid unexpected downtime.

30 2066-9001-200 / 0410

ponents:
standstill.
Fig. 46
• Do not loosen any part and do not

carry out maintenance or repair
work on the separator before the
separator is at a standstill.
The standstill check is described in
the section “bowl”.
Fig. 47
• Do not climb onto or stand on the

machine or parts of the machine.
• Make provision for and use a sturdy
working platform.
Fig. 48
• Place dismantled machine parts on

a suitable base, e.g. rubber mat.
• Secure machine parts from rolling
away and overturning using suitable
aids!
Fig. 49

2066-9001-200 / 0410 31
• Do not heat bowl parts with the

naked flame.
• Bowl parts must never be welded.
This also applies for hood and
solids catcher parts of steam-
sterilizable separators.
• Even during cleaning the bowl parts
the temperature must not exceed
100 °C (212 °F).
Fig. 50
• Load-carrying equipment such as

– lifting devices for bowl or distribu-
tor,
– chains etc.
may only be used for their intended
purpose, i.e. the work routines as
described in this instruction manual.
• Do not use damaged or incomplete
load carrying equipment.
Fig. 51
• All load suspension devices have to be checked for completeness and for
possible damage at least once a year.
• In addition, when using load suspension devices and hoists, the applicable
legislation and safety rules have to be strictly observed.
• Do NOT step under hanging load.

CAUTION: Danger to life when transporting heavy parts!
• Special tools (e.g. compressing, assembly devices, pin spanners) may only
be used for their intended purpose, i.e. the work routines as described in this
instruction manual.
• Before using the standard and special tools supplied, check them for damage
and completeness.
Make sure that
– all moving parts are correctly aligned and not seized.
– that no parts are broken and that there is otherwise no damage which could
affect the operation of the tool.
• Have damaged tools repaired by specialists before using them again.
– Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia Separator. Otherwise, the
safety of the tool can be impaired.
• Keep the tools clean and keep them in a dry, safe place.
Properly maintained and cleaned tools work more precisely and can be
checked better.

32 2066-9001-200 / 0410
• Collect dripping oil to prevent danger

of slipping or product infection.
• When handling waste oils note:
– They can be injurious to health,
depending on their chemical com-
position.
– Waste oil must be disposed of in
accordance with local regulations.
Fig. 52

2066-9001-200 / 0410 33
1.6 Corrosion
Corrosion can also affect bowl parts made of stainless steel. This corrosion can
be flat-spread or pit- or crack-shaped and merits special attention.
Corrosion on stainless steel bowl material should be examined thoroughly and
documented.
Flat-spread corrosion can usually be measured (reduction of wall thickness)
Pit- or crack-shaped corrosion cannot be measured without the risk of damage.
At the initial stage pit-shaped corrosion is generally caused by chlorine ions.
Depending on the stressing of the part, pit-shaped corrosion can result in crack-
shaped corrosion.
Possible formation of pit-shaped cor-

rosion.
Fig. 53
Such pittings can only be investigated by a materials expert.
In case of crack-shaped corrosion attack with or without superposed flat-

spread and pit-shaped corrosion on main bowl components, the machine
must be shut down immediately.
Contact your nearest Westfalia Separator representative for a thorough exami-

nation.
Pittings
Pittings which are close together or
form a linear pattern can signify crack
formation beneath the surface.
Such pittings should be investigated by
a materials expert.
Fig. 54

34 2066-9001-200 / 0410
1.7 Erosion
Erosion is caused by solid particles in the process liquid.
These solid particles grind marks into the surfaces with which they come into
contact.
The following factors favour the occurrence of erosion:
• hard solids particles
• high throughput capacities
The first signs of erosion should be carefully observed and documented. Ero-
sion can deepen rapidly, thereby weakening the bowl material.
Contact your nearest Westfalia Separator representative for a thorough exami-

nation. Information on the nature of the damage can be provided by photos,
plaster casts or lead molds.
Fig. 55
The surfaces most susceptible to erosion are:
1) the bottom of the distributor, the rising channels and the ribs,
2) the centripetal pump (cavitation),
3) all surfaces in the area of the solids discharge ports,
4) the nozzles.

2066-9001-200 / 0410 35
Signs of erosion which you should

immediately report to your nearest
• The bottom of the erosion mark has

Westfalia Separator representative:
a radius smaller than 1 mm (large
• The depth of erosion mark exceeds

notch effect).
1 mm (0.04 inch) at the deepest

point.
Fig. 56

36 2066-9001-200 / 0410
1.8 The health hazards involved when handling heavy oils and lube oils
As a result of the deterioration in quality of fuel oils, the danger has arisen that the heavy oils used on
board contain greater amounts of substances injurious to health. These include:
- polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons,
- lead compounds,
- chemical residues.
An increased amount of polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons is also present in used lube oils (waste oils).
• on the concentrations of the dangerous substances,

The health hazards for the engine room staff depend to a large extent
• the ambient air (inhalation of oil vapours/oil mist),

• the intensity and duration of the contact with the skin or mucous membrane.
• headaches,
Possible short-term effects:
• dizziness,
• nausea,
• itching or burning of the skin,
Possible long-term effects:

• allergic reactions, especially skin allergies,
• festering inflammation of the skin pores (oil-acne),
• damage to the central nervous system after inhalation over a long period,
• skin cancer caused by direct skin contact over a long period,
• Lung cancer or cancer of the digestive organs after inhalation over a long period
(not certain as the causes are difficult to separate from the effects of smoking and alcohol).
1.8.1 Code of practice and personal protective measures
• Avoid skin contact with heavy oils or lube oils if possible!

- Wear suitable protective gloves.
- Apply a protective ointment to the skin (e.g. ointment no. 76), especially if no protective gloves are
• Avoid breathing in oil vapours if possible!

worn!
• If possible, improve the air circulation in the room!
• Wash affected areas of skin frequently and thoroughly!

Fully open the air regulation flaps in the outlets of the air supply ducts in the centrifuge and filter area.
• Personal hygiene is of the utmost importance!

Apply protective ointment to the skin!
• Change dirty overalls regularly!

• Exercise special care when carrying out maintenance work on and cleaning heavy oil and lube oil cen-
trifuges and filters!

2066-9001-200 / 0410 37
2 Machine description
2.1 Standard dimensioned drawing of the separator ................................... 38

2.2 Section through separator ..................................................................... 40
2.3 General .................................................................................................. 41
2.4 OSE ...-91-... .......................................................................................... 41
2.5 Main components of the separator ........................................................ 44
2.5.1 Centripetal pump ................................................................................... 45
2.5.2 Bowl ....................................................................................................... 46
2.5.3 Bowl hydraulics ...................................................................................... 47
2.5.4 Drive ....................................................................................................... 50
2.6 Regulating ring ....................................................................................... 55
2.6.1 Determination by table ........................................................................... 55
2.6.2 Determination by experiment ................................................................. 56
2.7 Supervisory equipment .......................................................................... 57
2.7.1 Pressure transmitter .............................................................................. 57
2.7.2 Vibration monitoring (Option) ................................................................. 59
2.7.3 Speed monitoring ................................................................................... 60
2.8 Product feed line and product discharge line ........................................ 61
2.8.1 Throughput monitoring (product feed line A) ......................................... 61
2.8.2 Determining the throughput rate (product feed line A) .......................... 62
2.8.3 Pressure monitoring (product discharge line B) .................................... 63
2.9 Technical data ....................................................................................... 64

38 2066-9001-200 / 0410
2.1 Standard dimensioned drawing of the separator
• Refer to the installation guidelines for further information.
Centre of gravity
Solids discharge
Water discharge / operating water

discharge
Filling, displacement and operating water

feed
Product discharge
Product feed
Solids discharge
discharge
These dimensions must be adhered to!

Do not discharge residuals into public waters!
Fig. 57 Refer to the project-specific dimensioned drawing!

2066-9001-200 / 0410 39
Pressure transmitter (product discharge)
Pressure transmitter (water discharge)
Centre of gravity
Discharge by the centripetal pump built into

the separator
Connection:
Product discharge
Product feed
Filling, displacement and operating water feed
Product discharge
Product feed
Solids discharge
Terminal box
Solenoid valve block filling, displacement

and operating water with water pressure
reducer
Water discharge
Operating water discharge
The separator foundation must not have contact with the foundations of other units (e.g.
auxiliary diesel engines, pumps) to avoid damage to roller bearings.


40 2066-9001-200 / 0410
2.2 Section through separator
Fig. 59

2066-9001-200 / 0410 41
2.3 General
The machine described in this manual is a high-speed centrifugal separator with
self-cleaning bowl.
"Separation" means the separation of liquid mixtures which consist of two liq-
uids, with simultaneous removal of the solids contained in the liquids.
"Clarification" is the removal of solids from a liquid.
Prerequisite for treatment technology (separation) is that the components of the
product
– can be separated mechanically,
– have different densities and
– do not emulsify.
2.4 OSE ...-91-...
• is equipped with a self-cleaning disk bowl,

The separator OSE ...-91-...
• is used for clarification and separation in fuel and lube oil treatment plants.
• operates with regulating rings (see section 2.6).
• is configured as a purifier bowl at the factory,

The most important part of the separator is the bowl. The bowl
• can – depending on the application – be converted to function as a clarifier or

purifier bowl.
Conversion of the purifier bowl into a clarifier bowl is possible in a few simple
steps (see diagrams).
In the case of the purifier bowl:

• Mount the centripetal pump chamber
cover with bores.
IMPORTANT: All holes of the cen-
tripetal pump chamber cover must
be open!
• Select the regulating ring (see sec-
tion 2.6).
Fig. 60 Centripetal pump chamber cover

with 2 bores (example)

42 2066-9001-200 / 0410
In the case of the clarifier bowl:

• ATTENTION! Mount the centripetal
pump chamber cover (without
bores!) for operation in clarifier
• Request the part number of the cen-

mode.
tripetal pump chamber cover from

the supplier.
Fig. 61 Centripetal pump chamber cover

without bores (example)
Operating principles of the separator
Fig. 62 Example of monitoring
1 Dirty oil feed 11 Separating disk

2 Clean oil discharge 12 Solids holding space
3 Displacement water 13 Dirty water discharge
4 Pressure transmitter (product discharge) 14 Operating water discharge
5 Pressure transmitter (water discharge) 15 Solids discharge
6 Throttle 16 Operating water feed
7 Regulating ring 17 Solenoid valve block
8 Control unit
9 Sensing liquid pump (dirty water)
10 Centripetal pump (clean oil)
The fuel oil or lube oil is conveyed to the separator via a separate pump.
The product is fed in through a closed line system (1).
The dirty water is discharged (13) by sensing liquid pump (9) via a throttle (6).
The clarified clean oil is discharged (2) under pressure by centripetal pump (10).

2066-9001-200 / 0410 43
The bowl is automatically opened and closed for desludging at full bowl speed
by means of a remote controlled solenoid valve (17) in the operating water line.
The opening time of the solenoid valve is up to 3 seconds.
The control and monitoring unit (8) ensures unmanned operation.

44 2066-9001-200 / 0410
2.5 Main components of the separator
Fig. 63
Pos. Designation Function

connection • connects centripetal pump and hood.
• holds the filling and displacement water supply
1 Handle
piece
line.
2 Centripetal pump See section 2.5.1

Sensing liquid pump
• covers the rotating bowl.

• holds the feed and discharges (see section
3 Hood
2.8).
4 Bowl: See section 2.5.2

Bowl hydraulics See section 2.5.3
• contains the drive parts.

• supports motor, bowl and hood.
5 Frame
6 Sight glass allows checking the oil level.
7 Sight glass for checking the drive belt.
8 Solenoid valve block See section 2.5.5
9 Drive See section 2.5.4
10 Motor • accelerates the separator to the required
• is protected against overload during operation.

speed.

2066-9001-200 / 0410 45
2.5.1 Centripetal pump
Fig. 64
• discharges the purified liquid under pressure.

• is firmly connected to hood 2 of the separator.
1 Centripetal pump
• The disk provided with channels

dips into the liquid rotating with the
bowl.
• The liquid
– is pared off by the centripetal
pump and
– flows through its spiral channels
from the outside to the inside.
By this means the kinetic energy is
converted into pressure energy
which makes possible discharging
the liquid under pressure.
3 Sensing liquid pump • operates on the same principle as centripetal
• conveys the sensing liquid to the monitoring

pump 1.
system.

46 2066-9001-200 / 0410
2.5.2 Bowl
Fig. 65

1 Bowl produces high centrifugal forces through rotation
making possible separation and clarification.
2 Distributor base accelerates the product fed in through feed A to
the rotational velocity of the bowl and then con-
veys it into the disk stack.
3 Disk stack • splits the liquid mixture consisting of a light

and heavy phase, e.g. oil-water, into its com-
• consists of a large number of conical disks

ponents.
positioned on top of one another.

Each disk is provided with spacers so that pre-
cisely defined interspaces are formed between
the individual disks.
The smooth disk surfaces facilitate sliding of the
solids and hence self-cleaning of the disks.
Separation chamber The separation space consists of a large number

of parallel chambers of low height. This produc-
es very small radial sedimentation paths for the
product.
Solids collect on the upper wall of each disk interspace

and slide down into the solids holding space.
4 Solids holding space collects the solids separated in the disk stack.

2066-9001-200 / 0410 47
2.5.3 Bowl hydraulics
Fig. 66
A Separation – Bowl closed

B Ejection – Bowl open
1 Operating liquid In the rotating bowl the incoming, rotating oper-

(usually water) ating liquid generates a high centrifugal pres-
sure. This pressure is utilised for actuating the
annular piston and sliding piston which closes
and opens the bowl.
• is inside the bowl bottom,

• rotates with the same angular velocity as the
2 Annular piston
• is axially movable.
other bowl parts,
• is located inside the bowl bottom,

• rotates with the same angular velocity as the
3 Sliding piston
• is axially movable.
other bowl parts,

48 2066-9001-200 / 0410
Closing the bowl (separation)
Fig. 67

After starting the separator the solenoid valve for operating liquid is actuated
with the aid of the control unit, and the bowl is closed as follows:
1 Operating liquid • flows into the injection chamber 4 of bowl
• from there through feed holes into closing

bottom 5 and
chamber 6.
This initiates closing of the bowl.
2 Annular piston • moves into closed position.
3 Sliding piston • is raised due to the hydrostatic pressure in
• is pressed against the gasket 7 of bowl top

closing chamber 6.
• closes the bowl.

due to the hydrostatic pressure and

2066-9001-200 / 0410 49
Opening the bowl (ejection)
Fig. 68

The solenoid valve for operating liquid is opened with the aid of the control unit,
and the ejection cycle is triggered as follows:
• flows first into injection chamber 4 and

• from there into opening chamber 8.
1 Operating liquid
• rises and
• empties closing chamber 6.
2 Annular piston
• moves downwards and

• opens the ejection ports in bowl bottom 5 for
3 Sliding piston
the separated solids 9.

50 2066-9001-200 / 0410
2.5.4 Drive
Fig. 69

1 Drive motor drives the separator.
Power transmission to the bowl spindle is via the
centrifugal clutch to the motor belt pulley and via
the drive belt.
2 Centrifugal clutch • ensures power transmission between motor,
• accelerates the bowl gradually to rated

drive belt and spindle.
• is gentle on the drive belt and motor.

speed;
Important!
– The driving effect of new clutch shoes will
improve after several starts.
– Smoking of the centrifugal clutch during the
first few starts is perfectly normal and will dis-
appear after a short time of operation.
– Wear to the clutch shoes depends on the
number of starts and the ejection frequency
(see section 4.3.1).
3 Drive belt transfers the drive power of the drive motor 1 to

the bowl spindle 4.
Regularly check the seat and condition of the
drive belt. The inspection and replacement inter-
vals are given in the maintenance schedule (see
4.3.1).
4 Bowl spindle supports the bowl.

2066-9001-200 / 0410 51
2.5.5 Solenoid valve block

The solenoid valve block for operating, filling and displacement water consists of
two 2/2-way solenoid valves with servo control. They are equipped with a man-
ual override for testing purposes.
Fig. 70
10 Pressure controller 90 Diaphragm

20 Sleeve-type ball valve 100 Magnet core
30 Pressure gauge 110 Coupler socket
40 Filter insert 130 Hose
70 Magnet coil
80 Housing A Manual override
Manual override A
The manual override can only be

actuated with a screwdriver!
1 closed
2 open
Fig. 71

52 2066-9001-200 / 0410
Adjusting the pressure setpoint

- pressure controller 10
• Correct the pressure setpoint by

If necessary:
turning the setpoint screw 1 (jaw

span 7).
Pressure setpoint correction

• Open the operating water valve
using the manual override (see Fig.
71).
• Increase the pressure setpoint.

Pressure setpoint is too low.
– Turn setpoint screw clockwise.
• Decrease the pressure setpoint.

Pressure setpoint is too high.
– Turn setpoint screw counter-

clockwise.
The adjusted pressure setpoint is indi-

cated on pressure gauge 30.
SW = jaw span
Fig. 72

2066-9001-200 / 0410 53
Technical data
• Note the specifications on the nameplate of the solenoid valve block and
ATTENTION:
• the installation guidelines.
Part-No. see parts list

Operating principles 2/2-way solenoid valve
NC
Material: Gasket EPDM
Housing CuZn
Solenoid
Coil size 32 mm
valves:
Nominal diameter
13 mm
(DN)
Operating voltage: 24 V DC
Rating 8 W (per solenoid valve)
Coupler socket with built-in electronics,
24 V DC, LED and free-wheeling diode
with fitted cable (1.5 m long)
Pressure Medium 0 to 10 bar
Control range 1 to 6 bar
Pressure setpoint 2 bar
with open operating water solenoid
valve
Temperature: Medium -10 to +80 °C (14 – 176 °F)
In case of electrical faults
• Switch off the main switch and lock it.

CAUTION: Danger due to electrical current!
• Close the main valve for operating water, filling and displacement water.
CAUTION: Danger of injury through very hot separator parts!

When carrying out maintenance work, there is a danger of injury through hot
o
separator parts (separating temperatures of 70 to 100 C(158 – 212 °F)).
• Refer to the instruction manual and nameplate of the solenoid valve block.
ATTENTION:
• Direct intervention in the solenoid valve block only by authorised specialists

and with suitable tools!

54 2066-9001-200 / 0410
Problem Cause Action
Solenoid valve does Control unit is defective. Contact service backup

not function. support.
Wire break in the connect- Replace wire.
ing terminal.
Connecting terminal on the Tighten the screw of the
connector block is loose. connecting terminal.
Bad contact on the con- Clean or replace the con-
necting terminal. tact.
Coupler socket loose. Tighten coupler socket.
Magnet coil defective. Replace the solenoid head.
Diaphragm defective. Replace diaphragm.

2066-9001-200 / 0410 55
2.6 Regulating ring

Perfect separation of a liquid mixture is only possible when the bowl has been
correctly adapted to the density difference between the light liquid (e.g. oil) and
the heavy liquid (e.g. water).
To achieve this, select and fit the regu-

lating ring from the set furnished (with
different inner diameters) whose inner
diameter corresponds to the difference
in density between the two liquid com-
ponents.
Fig. 73 Regulating ring (example)
The inner diameter of the regulating ring to be selected can be determined from
• narrow regulating ring for heavy oil

the table or empirically. The general rule of thumb is:
• wide regulating ring for light oil.
2.6.1 Determination by table
Density of the light liquid, Inner diameter

o o
at 15 C (59 F) of the regulating ring
3
kg/dm mm
0,79 – 0,81 76
0,82 – 0,85 73
0,86 – 0,89 70
0,90 – 0,94 68
0,95 – 0,97 64
0,98 – 0,991 62
Density difference of the liquids

3
Min. density difference 0,02 kg/dm
3
Max. density difference 0,21 kg/dm
3
The max. density of the light liquid is 0,991 kg/dm with a density of the heavy
3
liquid of 1.0 kg/dm .
Important!
If light liquid discharges through the heavy liquid discharge, the next smaller
regulating ring must be fitted.

56 2066-9001-200 / 0410
2.6.2 Determination by experiment

(explained using the example of oil purification)
Always try a wide regulating ring and then the next smaller ring.
When the regulating ring is too wide the discharging water contains oil.
When the regulating ring is too narrow the discharging clean oil contains water.
The water may look milky or dirty. The coloration comes from the washing of the
oil.
In the bowl, a separation zone is formed between the light and heavy phases
whose centre is the separating line.
After opening the bowl, the position of the separating zone can be recognised
by the almost always visible separating line between water and oil on the under-
side of the separating disk.
Correctly selected regulating ring

The separating line between water and
variable
oil is at the outer edge of the discs.
Effect:
– The discharging clean oil is free of
water.
– The discharging water is free of oil.
Fig. 74
Regulating ring too wide

The separating line between water and
too wide oil runs
– far outside the discs and
– too close to the outer edge of the
separating disk.
Effect:
– The discharging clean oil is free of
water.
– The discharging water contains oil or
– oil breaks the water seal.
Fig. 75
Regulating ring too narrow

too narrow The separating line between the liquid
components does not pass at the outer
edge of the discs but further inwards.
Effect:
– The discharging clean oil contains
water.
– The discharging water is free of oil.
Fig. 76

2066-9001-200 / 0410 57
2.7 Supervisory equipment

The separating process is monitored and controlled by an automatic control unit.
For further details, refer to the control unit manual.
2.7.1 Pressure transmitter
The pressure transmitters PT1 and

PT2
– are included in the standard scope
of supply,
– serve to register alarms PAH (P res-
sure Alarm High) and P AL (Pres-
sure Alarm Low),
– switch process-specifically n case of
pressure drop or increase,
– can be software-checked for correct
functionality and
can be adjusted to their switching
points,
Fig. 77 – are maintenance-free.
The pressure transmitter
– PT1 is fitted in the product discharge line.
– PT2 is fitted in the water discharge line.
Note:
Refer to the circuit diagram in the control cabinet and the manual of the control
system.
Setting the switching points

The switching points are set at the factory using appropriate software.
Factory settings
Product discharge Water discharge
Pressure transmitter Pressure transmitter
PT1 PT2
PAL PAH PAH
(1) (2)
1.0 bar 3.0 bar 1.0 bar
(1)
The product discharge pressure on the pressure gauge (separator) must be 0.5 to
1 bar above the switching point.
(2)
The product discharge pressure on the pressure gauge (separator) must be 0.5 to
1 bar below the switching point.
• Pay special attention to order-specific settings (see operating data sheet in

IMPORTANT:
the order documentation)!

58 2066-9001-200 / 0410
Technical data
Voltage 24 V DC
Range 0 – 16 bar
Output signal 4 – 20 mA
Pressure connection G 1/4in outer (O-ring seal)
Tightening torque
Pressure connection max. 25 Nm
Connector plug M 12 x 1; 5-pole
Cable PUR-2 core, 1.5 m
Cable box M 12 x 1; 5-pole
Pin1-, white; Pin4+, black
Enclosure IP 67
Working temperature
-40 to +125 °C ( -40 to +257 °F)
Medium temperature

2066-9001-200 / 0410 59
2.7.2 Vibration monitoring (Option)

The separator is protected against inadmissibly high vibrations by means of an
electronic vibration monitoring system.
Fig. 78 Installation example
• is installed at the upper part of the frame.

• converts the separator vibrations into electric
1 Vibration pick-up
signals.
2 Terminal box • is mounted at the lower part of the frame.
Vibration monitoring • is installed in the control cabinet.

• evaluates the signals coming from the vibra-
3
unit
tion pickup.
The evaluation of the signal – depending on the version – takes place

in the control cabinet, on the control unit or directly on the vibration
pickup.
When the limit value or values are exceeded, an alarm and follow-up
measures are triggered and the separator motor switches off automati-
cally.
The operating status can be read off on the control unit.
ATTENTION!
• instruction manual of the vibration monitoring system

Pay attention to the following instructions and plans:
• instruction manual of the control unit

• terminal allocation in the terminal diagram of the control cabinet
• circuit diagram

60 2066-9001-200 / 0410
2.7.3 Speed monitoring

The speed monitoring device
• serves to indicate the bowl speed.
Speed deviations of up to 5 % are permissible.
• monitors the drop in speed and exceeding the speed and starting time.
Fig. 79
1 Spindle • rotates and generates speed pulses at the

proximity switch 2.
2 Proximity switch • transmits the pulses triggered from the spindle

to the control unit 3.
ATTENTION!
Align the proximity switch as illustrated.
The distance X between the spindle and the
proximity switch must be 2.5 mm.
• evaluates the speed pulses.

• triggers an alarm if the bowl speed is too low
3 Control unit
• initiates a shut-down process if the bowl speed

or too high.
• indicates the current bowl speed and

is too low or too high.
• permits setting of limit values.
ATTENTION!
Pay attention to the terminal allocation in the terminal diagram of the
refer to the instruction manual of the control unit.

2066-9001-200 / 0410 61
2.8 Product feed line and product discharge line
The separator is adapted to local con-

ditions for throughput capacity and line
pressure by means of orifice plates
installed in product feed line A and
product discharge line B (see section
4.2).
Fig. 80
2.8.1 Throughput monitoring (product feed line A)

The effective throughput capacity of the separator is stated on the project de-
pendent data sheet.
The inner diameters of the orifice plates required for the different throughput ca-
pacities can be read from the following table:
Flowmeter – Scale: 0 – 10
Inner diameter of orifice
Throughput capacity
plate
[l/h] [mm]
300 – 600 4
600 – 1 000 5
1 000 – 1 400 6
1 400 – 1 800 7
1 800 – 2 300 8
2 300 – 3 500 no orifice plate
• During commissioning mark the respective scale area on flowmeter 2 (see

When using a D10 control unit
Fig. 80 with the sticker supplied.
When using an E10 control unit

The effective throughput capacity is displaced on the control unit.
Throughput values deviating between the actual value and the setpoint value
can be adapted in the control unit.

62 2066-9001-200 / 0410
2.8.2 Determining the throughput rate (product feed line A)
Fig. 81 Diagram for determining the throughput rate
A Inner diameter of orifice plate (mm)

B Throughput capacity (x 1000 l/h)
C Scale area of flowmeter
D no orifice plate
The throughput capacity of the separator (volume of product to be treated fed by

unit of time) can be determined with the aid of the diagram.
Procedure:
• Read the value on the scale of flowmeter 2 (see Fig. 80).
e.g. 3
• From the value read from the scale (e.g. 3) draw a line up to the curve of the
inner diameter of the built-in orifice plate A (e.g. Ø 6).
• Read the throughput rate B appearing vertically below:
e.g. 1.06 (= 1060 l/h)
The precision in throughput determination depends on the following characteris-

tics of the product to be processed:
– Viscosity
– Temperature
– Density
The parameters mentioned here can lead to inexact determination of the
throughput rate.

2066-9001-200 / 0410 63
2.8.3 Pressure monitoring (product discharge line B)

The pressure in the discharge line is displayed on pressure gauge 1 (see Fig.
80).
• Note factory adjusted switch points (see section 2.7.1).
The inner diameters of the orifice plates required for the different throughput ca-
pacities can be read from the following table:
Pressure gauge - Measuring range: 0 – 10 bar

Inner diameter of orifice
Throughput capacity
plate
[l/h] [mm]
300 – 700 4
700 – 1 000 5
1 000 – 1 400 6
1 400 – 1 900 7
1 900 – 2 400 8
2 400 – 3 500 10

64 2066-9001-200 / 0410
2.9 Technical data

The order-specific process data are given on the operating data sheet in-
cluded in the documentation.
Bowl
3
Solids holding space (total) 0.5 dm
–1
Speed 12 000 min
– for densities of the product up to
3 o (see name-plate)
0.991 kg/dm (at 15 C) and
– for densities of the separated solids up to
3
1.4 kg/dm
Speed for higher densities contact the factory
Starting time 2 – 4 min

Run-down time (after switching off the motor
20 min
with drive belt))
Run-down time (without drive belts, i.e. in
the case of torn, jumped off or defective drive 40 min
belt)
Centripetal pump
Output (depending on medium) 3 000 l/h

Pressure head 1 – 2 bar
Operating water
Qty. min. 1 800 l/h

Pressure (with open valve) 2–3 bar
Standard operating water specification
Suspended matter max. 10 mg/l

Particle size max. 50 µm
Hardness:
o o
– up to 55 C separating temperature < 12 dH
o o
– above 55 C separating temperature < 6 dH
To convert the hardness values stated use the following equation:
1° dH = 1.79 ° fH = 1.25 ° eH = 17.9 ppm CaCO3
Chlorine ions < 100 mg/l

pH 6.5 – 7.5

2066-9001-200 / 0410 65
Normal separating temperature of the product
DO 20 °C (68 °F)
MDO 40 °C (104 °F)
LO 90 °C (194 °F)
LO HD 95 °C (203 °F)
HFO 98 °C (208 °F)

Due to the large number of products to be treated, it is not possible
to specify an exact separating temperature of the product in this
manual.
The exact separating temperature of the product (in °C) is stated in
the order-specific data sheet.
Motor
Power rating 50 Hz 4 kW
60 Hz 4.6 kW
Speed 50 Hz 3 000 RPM

60 Hz 3 600 RPM
Design IM V1
Enclosure IP 55
Drive 50/60 Hz
Oil filling approx. 1 l
Oil quality, see section 4.3.3
Product feed pump
Pump unit (gear or screw pump)
Output depending on plant rating
Suction height max. 0.4 bar
Pressure head 2 bar
Weights
Separator (with motor, without bowl) 110 kg

Bowl 30 kg
Motor 47 kg

66 2066-9001-200 / 0410
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

2066-9001-200 / 0410 67
3 Operation
3.1 Technical information ............................................................................. 68

3.1.1 Notes on separation ............................................................................... 68
3.1.2 General information on bowl ejection .................................................... 68
3.2 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 70
3.2.1 Before the first start-up – after maintenance and repair ........................ 70
3.2.2 Before every start-up ............................................................................. 72
3.3 Starting the separator ............................................................................ 73
3.4 Monitoring of operation .......................................................................... 74
3.5 Setting the separation time .................................................................... 76
3.5.1 Mathematical calculation ....................................................................... 76
3.6 Ejecting the bowl .................................................................................... 77
3.7 Shutting down the separator .................................................................. 78
3.7.1 Shut-down “Emergency-Off" .................................................................. 80
3.8 Trouble shooting .................................................................................... 82
3.8.1 Trouble shooting .................................................................................... 82
3.8.2 Bowl faults.............................................................................................. 84

68 2066-9001-200 / 0410
3.1 Technical information

Take note of the following sections:
3.1.1 Notes on separation

The separator is used for clarification and separation in fuel and lube oil treat-
ment plants.
The best separation effect is obtained with low viscosity of the product to be
separated.
The separator operates economically with the separating temperatures and ca-
pacities specified by us. Refer to the data sheet and contractual agreements.
Procedure:
• Select the desired operating mode on the control unit.
• Set the separating time on the control unit.
• Start the separator (see 3.2).
3.1.2 General information on bowl ejection

The bowl is ejected automatically at full speed during the program sequence.
The time at which the ejection is triggered is
• determined by the preset separating time
or
• by the solids level in the bowl,
if:
– SMS was selected on the control unit,
– the sludge space is full before the separating time has elapsed.
For determining the separating time see 3.5.
Sequence of an ejection (example without “Filling”)

1. Separating time has elapsed.
2. Product feed valve is closed.
3. Displacement water displaces the fuel oil to the clean oil side.
4. Operating water opens and closes the bowl hydraulically at full bowl
speed.
5. Waiting time for speed recovery.
6. Product valve is opened.
7. Separating time resumes.
Displacement
• When separating, the loss of feed liquid unavoidable during ejection can be
reduced to a minimum by displacing the feed liquid with water before sludge
ejection takes place (especially important when processing valuable feed liq-
uid).

2066-9001-200 / 0410 69
• The duration of displacement water supply is given in the timer overview (see
control unit manual).
• If the displacement time is too long, water will discharge through the light liq-
uid outlet.
• If the displacement time is too short, part of the product remains in the bowl
and is lost during desludging.
Flush ejection
If the solids cant be completely ejected,
– due to an excessively long dwell time in the bowl or
– are stuck too firmly on the wall of the solids holding space due to the solids
properties,
• either the separating time must be shortened or
• a flush ejection must be carried out after the total ejection by filling the bowl
with water or product and emptying it again.
Program control
• "Displacement", "ejection" and "flush ejections" at precisely defined intervals
are best carried out with the automatic control unit.
• The clean oil discharge and water discharge can be monitored.
• Faults can be signalled visually or audibly.

70 2066-9001-200 / 0410
3.2 Before start-up
Note:
• Safety precautions in chapter 1.
• Instruction manual of the corresponding control unit.
• Instructions “Settings and malfunctions”
• Instruction manuals for other auxiliary equipment
• Process-related deviations are possible
(refer to the order-specific operating data sheet!)
3.2.1 Before the first start-up – after maintenance and repair
ATTENTION!
In order not to endanger the operating safety of the separator, keep
to the recommended maintenance intervals.
If the bowl has been out of operation for longer than 6 months (e.g. due
• check all bowl parts as specified in the maintenance schedule (table

to a long standstill period or storage),
• Replace if necessary.
“Maintenance after 4000 operating hours or after 6 months at the latest”).
If the separator has been out of operation for longer than 12 months (e.g.
• check all separator parts in accordance with the maintenance schedule

due to a long standstill period or storage),
(table “Maintenance after 8000 operating hours or after 1 year at the lat-
est).
Ensure that
• the sight glass in the frame for observing the drive belt is clean.
• the sight glass in the frame for observing the oil level is clean.
• the drive chamber is filled with oil in accordance with section 4.3.3.
• the bowl height is correct (see section 4.7.1).
• the bowl can be rotated by hand.
• the machine is correctly assembled.
– Tighten the bowl top securely (left-hand thread).
– Tighten the centripetal pump lock ring securely (left-hand thread).
• the hood is correctly mounted (see 4.5).
• the handle connection piece is tightly bolted to the centripetal pump (see 4.5).
• the hoses and hose pipes are undamaged and connected (see section 4.3.2).
• the feed and discharge lines are connected (see 4.5).
• the supervisory equipment is complete, mechanically and electrically func-
tional.

2066-9001-200 / 0410 71
• the product and supply lines are ready-for-operation.

– Pay attention to the air and water pressures (see order-specific operating
data sheet).
• the product heating devices are ready for operation (option).
– Pay attention to the volumes, pressure and temperature (see order-specific
operating data sheet).
• the plant components such as valves, water pressure reducer, compressed
air control unit etc. are operational.
• the motor is correctly connected 4.1.3.
• the motor is correctly mounted.
Important!
• Check the remaining plant components such as hose pipes, sight glasses for
signs of aging and mechanical damage.
• Damaged plant components must be replaced immediately by new parts.

72 2066-9001-200 / 0410
3.2.2 Before every start-up
Ensure that
• the sight glass in the frame for observing the drive belt is clean.
• the sight glass in the frame for observing the oil level is clean.
• the drive chamber is filled with oil in accordance with section 4.3.3.
• the machine is correctly assembled.
– Tighten the bowl top securely (left-hand thread).
– Tighten the centripetal pump lock ring securely (left-hand thread).
• the hood is correctly mounted (see 4.5).
• the handle connection piece is tightly bolted to the centripetal pump (see 4.5).
• the hoses and hose pipes are undamaged and connected (see section 4.3.2).
• the feed and discharge lines are connected (see 4.5).
• the supervisory equipment is complete, mechanically and electrically func-
tional.
• the product and supply lines are ready-for-operation.
– Pay attention to the air and water pressures (see order-specific operating
data sheet).
• the product heating devices are ready for operation (option).
– Pay attention to the volumes, pressure and temperature (see order-specific
operating data sheet).
• the plant components such as valves, water pressure reducer, compressed
air control unit etc. are operational.
• the motor is correctly mounted.
Important!
• Check the remaining plant components such as hose pipes, sight glasses for
signs of aging and mechanical damage.

2066-9001-200 / 0410 73
3.3 Starting the separator

• See section 3.2.1 or 3.2.2
• Switch on the control unit.
• Switch on the separator motor.
Compare the starting current and starting time with the diagram (section
4.1.3) until the bowl reaches the speed specified on the separator nameplate.
Note:
The run-up phase of the separator motor is signalled by slow flashing of the
LED in the “Status Separator” key.
ATTENTION! Before the first start-up – after maintenance and repair work
• Check the direction of rotation of the bowl.

on the separator -
The bowl must rotate in clockwise direction when looked at from above.
The direction of rotation of the bowl is

correct when the drive belt rotates
clockwise (check through the sight
glass in the frame).
When the direction of rotation is incor-
rect the motor connections must be
reversed by an authorised specialist.
Fig. 82
• Switch on the product feed pump (option).

– Ensure that the product feed valves to the suction and pressure side are
open!
ATTENTION! Before the first start-up – after maintenance and repair work
• Check the direction of rotation of the product feed pump.

on the product feed pump -
The direction of rotation of the product feed pump is correct when the fan
wheel of the pump motor rotates clockwise.
• Put the preheater in operation (option).
P re -c o n d itio n s :
– Steam or thermal oil feed and discharge valves are open!
– Electric preheater is switched on!
• Open the product discharge valve in the product discharge line (option).

74 2066-9001-200 / 0410
• Open the shut-off flap in the solids

discharge (option).
1 Shut-off flap
2 Solids tank
3 Solids discharge
Fig. 83
• Start the program.

P re -c o n d itio n s :
– Continuous lighting of the LED in the “Status Separator” button.
– The specified separating temperature has been reached.
– The solids tank has been released (level switch LSHH).The solids tank is
empty.
• After the product feed valve has automatically opened.
– Set the backpressure in the product discharge line to approx. 1.5 to 2.5 bar
(see order-specific operating data sheet).
– Adjust the desired throughput capacity; while doing so, maintain the back-
pressure in the product discharge line in the specified area.
• Check the discharges for solids and dirty water; there must be no oil flow
ATTENTION!
during the separating process!
3.4 Monitoring of operation

The machine is monitored largely by the separator control.
Operations to be carried out regularly:

• On your daily round, especially during the first 1500 operating hours, pay at-
tention to the following:
– Oil level
– Temperatures
– Pressures
– Leakage
– Vibrations
– Current consumption
– Starting time
– Hoses and hose pipes
– Pipe joints
• Keep to the maintenance schedule (see 4.3.1)!

2066-9001-200 / 0410 75
• Inspection
We, therefore, recommend in your own interest to have your separator in-
spected by our service engineers once a year. These checks help to
– maintain the operating safety of the machine and
– avoid unscheduled downtime.
Im p o rta n t!
• Regularly check plant components such as hose pipes, sight glasses for signs
of aging and mechanical damage.

76 2066-9001-200 / 0410
3.5 Setting the separation time

When using time-dependent automatic control programs, accurate setting of the
separation time (time between ejection cycles) is only possible if the throughput
capacity and solids loading in the feed remain constant. If this is not the case, it
may be necessary to correct the settings during operation.
• the preselected operating mode (partial or total ejection mode),

The separating time depends on
• the solids loading in the feed,

• the consistency of the solids,
• the effective solids space volume in the bowl,
• the separator throughput.
Given constant conditions, the separating time can be determined by calcula-
tion.
The following times have proven appropriate in practice (examples):
Product Total ejection Partial ejection

HFO max. 2 h max. 1 h
MDO max. 2 h max. 1 h
DO max. 4 h max. 2 h
LO mild max. 4 h max. 2 h
LO HD max. 2 h max. 1 h
3.5.1 Mathematical calculation

Example for mathematical calculation of the separating time:
(1)
Given: Solids content p = 0.05 %
Solids holding space volume V = 0.5 l
Solids holding space given 75 % utilisation V' = 0.375 l
(1) o
Throughput capacity V = 1 000 l/h
Wanted: Separating time t = ? min
The separating time to be set is calculated as follows:
V’ 0.375
t = ——— • 60 • 100 = —————— • 6 000 = 45 min = 0.75 h
V° • p 1 000 • 0.05
(1)
Solids content and throughput capacity must be determined on site or taken from
the order specification.

2066-9001-200 / 0410 77
3.6 Ejecting the bowl
Automatic operation
• Initiate ejection program by pressing the key ”Process START”:

– Product feed is closed.
– Displacement
– Bowl ejection
– Speed recovery
– Filling water (process-dependent)
• The product valve opens again.
Manual operation (in the case of unscheduled shut–down)
• Close the product feed line.

– Close the product feed valve manually.
• Eject the bowl:
– Open the operating liquid valve using the manual override for approx. 2 –
3 seconds.
• Speed recovery
– Wait for approx. 20 – 30 seconds.
• New separating operation
– Open the product feed valve manually.

78 2066-9001-200 / 0410
3.7 Shutting down the separator
Automatic operation
• End the separation program with the key "Process STOP”.

– Two total ejections are performed automatically.
Manual operation (in the case of unscheduled shut–down)
• Switch off the preheater (option).

– Continue to feed product for a few minutes since the preheater continues
to heat for a short time.
• Close the product feed line.
– Close the product feed valve manually.
• Displacement:
– Open the displacement water valve using the manual override.
(The bowl contents are displaced without loss by opening the displace-
ment water valve).
• Eject the bowl:
– Open the operating liquid valve using the manual override for approx. 2 –
3 seconds.
• Speed recovery
– Wait for approx. 20 – 30 seconds.
• Switch off the product feed pump (option).

– The product feed pump continues to run (timer 23)!
– The LED in the “FEED” button shows the post-run phase by slow flashing.
– The control valves for thermal oil and steam preheater close automatically.
ATTENTION!
If the control unit or the control voltage 24 VDC fails, the automatic post-run
phase of the product feed pump is disabled.
The product feed pump may never be switched off to the steam shut-off valve
without a delay time. The pre-heater could get damaged!
All heaters (e.g. steam-fired, thermal oil, electric heaters) must be manually
shut down.
Manual shut-down of the product feed pump must be carried out delayed.
• Close the product feed valve in the suction side of the product feed pump (op-
tion).
• Switch the separator motor off.
• Close the discharges.
• Close the supply lines such as heating steam, water, compressed air lines
with hand valves.
• Do not loosen any part of the separator before the bowl has come to a stand-
CAUTION: Danger to life through high-speed rotating separator parts!
still.
– The run-down time of the bowl is 20 minutes after switching off the motor.
– Bowl standstill is indicated by standstill of the drive belt.

2066-9001-200 / 0410 79
Standstill of drive belt

• Shine a torch through the frame
• Visually check that the drive belt is

sight glass.
no longer moving.
Fig. 84
• Unscrew the sight glass,

When the sight glass is turbid:
• shine a torch through the sight glass opening in the frame!
• Check ONLY visually that the drive belt is no longer moving.

CAUTION: Danger of injury through rotating drive belt!
– Do NOT touch the drive belt through the sight glass opening in the frame!
• Clean the sight glass and screw it back in.
In the case of torn or defective drive belts or if the belts have come off:
• Be sure to observe the run-down time of 40 minutes until dismantling the

still.
separator!
ATTENTION!
• Close the shut-off flap in the solids

Only after standstill of the bowl,
discharge (option).
1 Shut-off flap
2 Solids tank
3 Solids discharge
Fig. 85
Risk of injury due to electrical volt-

age and unintended start-up of the
separator!

ponents:
Fig. 86

80 2066-9001-200 / 0410

o o
separator parts (separating temperatures of 70 to 100 C (158 – 212 F).
3.7.1 Shut-down “Emergency-Off"

In a hazardous situation (unusual noises or vibrations) or in the case of damage
to the separator or plant components (e.g. burst hoses), a manual quick shut-
down of the installation can be carried out.
Depending on the version, the control cabinet is equipped with:
– a main switch (yellow-red) with integrated “Emergency:Off” function and
additional connection for an external “Emergency-Off”-switch (example 1),
– an “Emergency-Off” switch (yellow-red), a main switch (grey-black) and ad-
ditional connection for an external “Emergency-Off”-switch (example 2) or
– an “Emergency-Off” switch (yellow-red), a main switch (grey-black) and ad-
ditional connection, via approved “Emergency-Off” relay for several “Emer-
gency-Off”-switches (example 2).
Main switch (yellow-red) with inte-

grated “Emergency-Off” function
• Actuate the main switch with “Emer-
gency-Off” function.
– The complete control unit is de-
energised.
– No bowl ejection is performed.
• CAUTION! Evacuate the room.

Fig. 87 Example 1
“Emergency-Off”-switch (yellow-
red) and main switch (grey-black)
• Actuate the “Emergency-Off switch.
– The complete drives of the control
unit are de-energised.
– The separator is shut down in a
controlled manner with two total
ejections.
• CAUTION! Evacuate the room.

Fig. 88 Example 2

2066-9001-200 / 0410 81
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

82 2066-9001-200 / 0410
3.8 Trouble shooting

The following tables are an aid for locating and eliminating faults.
If assembly operations have to be carried out refer to the section "Maintenance
and Repair".
3.8.1 Trouble shooting
Failure Possible causes Action

The bowl does not come up Oil has run down the spindle onto the • Clean belt contact surface of the
• Replace the drive belt.

to rated speed or takes too drive belt; the drive belt is slipping on spindle and clutch pulley.
long to do so. the bowl spindle.
Motor is incorrectly connected. • Check connection.

Insufficient number of clutch shoes. • Increase the number of clutch
shoes.
• Make sure that the
clutch shoes are
evenly spaced.
Drive belt has stretched and is slipping • Replace drive belt.

on the bowl spindle.
Drive belt has not been fitted correctly. • Check position of drive belt on cen-
Liquid or dirt has collected in the upper • Check operating water discharge:
trifugal clutch and bowl spindle.
• Clean inside of upper section of

section of frame and is braking the Liquid must flow off freely.
bowl.
• Wipe dry friction surfaces.

frame.
• ATTENTION: Do not use

The bowl speed drops during Friction surfaces of clutch shoes are
operation. oily.
benzene, trichloreth-
ylene or any other sol-
Drive belt has stretched and is slipping • Replace the drive belt.
vent!
on the bowl spindle.

The motor speed drops during opera- • Check motor and line voltage.
tion.
• Reduce the number of clutch shoes.
• Make sure that the
The bowl reaches the rated Too many clutch shoes are used.
speed too fast (in less than 1
minutes). The starting current clutch shoes are
of the motor is hence inad- evenly spaced.
missibly high.(Imax >2 x IN).

2066-9001-200 / 0410 83

Uneven run of the centrifuge. Bowl is out of balance for the following For pos. 1 - 4:
reasons: • Shut down separator.
• Close the product feed and dis-
charge.
• Bowl must not be emptied

CAUTION:
as otherwise the vibrations

occurring during shut-down
will intensify.
If bowl leaks,
• Completely open the water supply.
1. The separated dirt has deposited • Clean bowl.
unevenly in the bowl.
2. Bowl has not been correctly as- • Assemble bowl properly.
sembled or parts of different bowls
(if plant has several separators)
have been interchanged.
3. The tension in the disk stack has
slackened:
– The bowl top is not screwed on CAUTION: A loose bowl
until O mark alignment. top can endanger life!
• The O marks of
the bowl bottom
and the bowl top
must be aligned.
– Insufficient number of disks. • Check number of disks; add a spare
• Send bowl to factory for repair.

disk if necessary.
4. Bowl parts are damaged.
CAUTION: Do not carry out
your own repairs!
Do not weld or solder as this
would weaken the bowl!
Ball bearings are worn. • Replace damaged bearings.
ATTENTION!
Use only the ball bearings
specified in the parts list.

84 2066-9001-200 / 0410
3.8.2 Bowl faults
Fig. 89 Bowl and operating water feeding system
1 Gasket (bowl top) 13 Injection chamber

2 Gasket (bowl top) 14 Closing chamber bottom
3 Gasket (sliding piston) 15 Annular piston
4 Gasket (annular piston) 16 Bowl bottom
5 Gasket (closing chamber bottom) 17 Drain hole
6 Gasket (bowl bottom) 18 Drain hole
7 Gasket (annular piston) 19 Sliding piston
8 Gaskets (closing chamber bottom) 20 Operating water feeding system
9 Gasket (bowl bottom) 21 Bowl top
10 Piston guide ring (bowl bottom) 22 Solenoid valve block
11 Gasket (bowl bottom) 23 Solenoid valve for operating water
12 Gasket (bowl bottom) 24 Solenoid valve for filling and displacement water
25 Filling and displacement water line
26 Strainer
27 Shut-off valve
28 Operating water line

2066-9001-200 / 0410 85
The bowl does not close. Operating water

Control unit is defective or • Check the control unit.
• Check or reset program parameters.
ATTENTION: Control unit is not correctly set.
– Product flows out of the
(See control unit documentation.)
solids discharge.
– Current consumption is too
• Set 0.2 seconds (see also control

high.
Closing water pulse too short.
• Close shut-off cock 27.

unit documentation).
Strainer 26 in the operating, filling and
displacement water line is dirty. • Clean strainer 26 (see 4.4.4).
The operating water capacity is too • Check line pressure, increase if
low. necessary.
Operating water data:

– Pressure 2 – 3 bar (with open valve)
the capacity by litres) ≅ 1.5 l in

– Volume flow min. 1 800 l/h (gauge
• Clean or replace operating water

3 secs
The operating water line 28 has be-
come constricted due to dirt accumula- line 28.
tion or damage. Insufficient operating
water is entering the injection cham-
The operating water solenoid valve 23 • Check solenoid valve 23 and re-
ber.
does not open properly. place if necessary.

Bowl hydraulics
• Remove hood and
• dismantle and clean the bowl (see
Bowl hydraulic system is soiled.
or
• Thoroughly clean all bores.

section 4.4.1 and 4.4.2).
Gaskets and piston guide ring are • Replace all sealing elements.
damaged or Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood“
(see list of spare parts).
Important: Time-consuming instal-
• Change polyamide gasket 3 only

lation!
when it is damaged (see section

4.4.9).
Sealing rim of sliding piston 19 is • Lightly remachine the sealing sur-
damaged. face of the sliding piston – max. 1
• send in the sliding piston for repair.

mm! – see section 4.4.10) or

86 2066-9001-200 / 0410

26 Strainer
27 Shut-off valve

2066-9001-200 / 0410 87
The bowl does not open or Operating water

not properly Control unit is defective or • Check the control unit.
Control unit is not correctly set. • Check or reset program parameters.
• Set 3 – 4 seconds (see also control

(See control unit documentation.)
Time for opening water too short.
• Close shut-off cock 27.

unit documentation).
Strainer 26 in the operating, filling and
displacement water line is dirty. • Clean strainer 26 (see 4.4.4).
The operating water capacity is too • Check line pressure, increase if
low. necessary.


• Clean or replace operating water

3 secs
The operating water line 28 has be-
come constricted due to dirt accumula- line 28.
tion or damage. Insufficient operating
water is entering the injection cham-
The operating water solenoid valve 23 • Check solenoid valve 23 and re-
ber.
does not open properly. place if necessary.

Bowl hydraulics
• Remove hood and
• dismantle and clean the bowl (see
Bowl hydraulic system is soiled.
or
• Thoroughly clean all bores.

section 4.4.1 and 4.4.2).
– Thoroughly check outlet bore 17
• Replace all sealing elements.

and clean if necessary.
Gaskets and piston guide ring are
damaged. Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood“
(see list of spare parts).
Important: Time-consuming instal-
• Change polyamide gasket 3 only

lation!
when it is damaged (see section
• Thoroughly check polyamide gasket

4.4.9).
3 for proper location in its groove.

88 2066-9001-200 / 0410

26 Strainer
27 Shut-off valve

2066-9001-200 / 0410 89

The bowl does not empty The operating water capacity is too • Check line pressure, increase if
completely. Solids remain in low. necessary.
the bowl.

The separating time has been set too • Shorten the separating time (see
3 secs
long with the result that the solids con- section 3.5).
• Readjust the closing water impulse

tent is too high.
The bowl opens during sepa- Closing water pulse is too short.
ration. – Closing water evaporates. (see control unit documentation).
Closing water pulse is too long.
– Closing water impulse opens the
bowl.

90 2066-9001-200 / 0410
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

2066-9001-200 / 0410 91
4 Installation - Maintenance - Repair
4.1 Installation of the separator ................................................................... 92

4.1.3 Motor ...................................................................................................... 97
4.1.4 Direction of rotation of the bowl ........................................................... 100
4.1.5 Speed and starting time of the bowl .................................................... 101
4.2 Orifice plates and flowmeter ................................................................ 102
4.2.1 Installing the orifice plates ................................................................... 103
4.3 Maintenance and lubrication ................................................................ 105
4.3.1 Maintenance schedule ......................................................................... 105
4.3.2 Hoses and hose pipes ......................................................................... 112
4.3.3 Lubrication ........................................................................................... 113
4.3.4 Lubrication Chart ................................................................................. 116
4.3.5 Table of lubricating oils ........................................................................ 118
4.3.6 Comments on table of lubricating oils for separators from Westfalia
Separator ............................................................................................. 119
4.4 Bowl ..................................................................................................... 120
4.4.1 Dismantling the bowl ............................................................................ 122
4.4.2 Cleaning the bowl ................................................................................ 136
4.4.3 Cleaning the frame .............................................................................. 137
4.4.4 Cleaning the strainer and the operating water feeding system ........... 137
4.4.5 Cleaning the motor .............................................................................. 138
4.4.6 Important instructions for assembling the bowl ................................... 139
4.4.7 Assembling the bowl ............................................................................ 141
4.4.10 Reworking the sliding piston ................................................................ 160
4.5 Mounting the hood ............................................................................... 161
4.6 Drive ..................................................................................................... 164
4.6.1 Important instructions for fitting and removing the drive ...................... 166
4.6.2 Removing the drive belt and spindle assembly ................................... 168
4.6.3 Dismantling the spindle assembly ....................................................... 172
4.6.4 Dismantling the centrifugal clutch ........................................................ 174
4.6.5 Fitting the spindle assembly ................................................................ 178
4.6.6 Fitting the centrifugal clutch ................................................................. 180
4.6.7 Fitting the motor ................................................................................... 186
4.7 Height adjustment ................................................................................ 191
4.7.1 Bowl height .......................................................................................... 191
4.7.2 Centripetal pump clearance ................................................................. 192
4.8 Final checks after assembling the separator ....................................... 194
4.9 Before a long-term shut-down of the separator ................................... 194
4.9.1 Preserving the separator ..................................................................... 194
4.9.2 Preserving the motor ........................................................................... 195
4.10 Storage ................................................................................................ 196
4.10.1 After delivery ........................................................................................ 196
4.10.2 Separator ............................................................................................. 196
4.10.3 Control system ..................................................................................... 196
4.11 Before restarting .................................................................................. 197
4.12 Disposal ............................................................................................... 198
4.12.1 Gear and lubricating oils ...................................................................... 198
4.12.2 Cleaning liquids ................................................................................... 199
4.12.3 Separator ............................................................................................. 199
4.13 Standard tools ...................................................................................... 200
4.14 Special tools ........................................................................................ 202

92 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.1 Installation of the separator
• Refer to the installation guidelines for further information.
Centre of gravity
Solids discharge

discharge
Filling, displacement and operating water

feed
Product discharge
Product feed
Solids discharge
discharge


2066-9001-200 / 0410 93
Pressure transmitter (product discharge)
Pressure transmitter (water discharge)
Centre of gravity
Discharge by the centripetal pump built into

the separator
Connection:
Product discharge
Product feed
Filling, displacement and operating water feed
Product discharge
Product feed
Solids discharge
Terminal box
Solenoid valve block filling, displacement

and operating water with water pressure
reducer
Water discharge
Operating water discharge
The separator foundation must not have contact with the foundations of other units (e.g.
auxiliary diesel engines, pumps) to avoid damage to roller bearings.


94 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.1.1 Transporting the separator
• CAUTION: Use appropriate lifting devices to prevent accidents!

– Be sure to use suitably rated, intact hoists for transport and installation.
• CAUTION: Danger to life under hoists!

– Do NOT step under hanging load.
• For special tools, see section 4.14 or parts list.
• Unscrew the screw plug 1 from the

lower part of the frame.
Fig. 94

in the frame.
Fig. 95

2066-9001-200 / 0410 95
CAUTION! Do not use the eye bolt

of the motor to suspend the separa-
tor.
ATTENTION: Avoid damage to the
• Firmly tighten three hexagon nuts 1

three stud bolts of the hood!
with fitted washers 1.
ATTENTION: Do not damage any

machine attachment parts when fas-

tening the ropes.
– to the machine A as illustrated,

– around the double nipple and
ATTENTION: Prevent the ropes from
• Wind one piece of rope twice round

slipping!
the hook (see detail).

down gently.
Fig. 96
• Unscrew double nipple 1
Fig. 97
• Screw in the screw plug 1.
Fig. 98

96 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.1.2 Installing the separator

• Before installing the separator make sure that
– sufficient space is available for operating and dismantling the machine.
– the foundation is not connected to foundations of other vibrating units to
avoid the transfer of vibrations.
• Align separator 1 with feet 2 and

plates 3 on foundation 4.
• Tack plates 3.
• Unscrew screws 5.
• Lift separator with feet (see section
4.1.1).
• Weld plates 3 to foundation 4.
• Place the separator on plates 3 and
• Screw tight hex head screws 6.
Fig. 99

2066-9001-200 / 0410 97
4.1.3 Motor
Fig. 100 Start-up diagram (current and speed characteristics) – example
at
De- Enclo-
50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
sign sure *
rpm min s kW rpm rpm
IP 55
see name- IM V ISO-

2–4 3 4 4.6 3 000 3 600
plate 1 class
F*
* WS standard
The separator is driven by a three-phase AC motor via a centrifugal clutch and
the drive belt.
The specified motor ratings are minimum values which are based on the in-
creased starting current. Since the current consumption of the motor drops after
start-up, overloading of the motor during operation is not possible.
The starting time depends on the
– flywheel effect of the bowl,
– number of clutch shoes used,
– condition of the clutch shoes.
The starting current can peak at about 1.8 - 2 times the rated current (see start-
up diagram). This is to be considered when selecting switches, lead-in wires
and fuses.
The motor
– can be started direct online (WS standard) or via a motor control for star-
delta switching (Ex-zone).

98 2066-9001-200 / 0410
– is protected against overheating by thermal overload releases or a PTC

thermistor as sole protection.
(As WS standard, the motor is protected against overheating by three PTC
thermistors).
– can be equipped with a frequency converter if requested by the customer.
When using thermal overload releases, the motor has to be protected as fol-
lows:
– during operation by a release set to the rated current and
– during start-up by a second release set to 1.8 - 2 times the rated current.
The release set to the rated current must be bridged during start-up.
Note:
• The temperature feelers must be connected to a commercial tripping device.
• External voltage higher than 2.5 volts must not be applied to the connection
terminals of the temperature feelers.
• When testing for continuity, use an ohmmeter and not a test lamp.
CAUTION: Danger to life and limb through electric current!

There might be residual voltage!
In the case of motors with space heaters, residual voltages in the motor
terminal box are possible despite switched off main switch.
• Refer to the motor nameplate.

Prior to working on the motor:
• Refer to the motor instruction manual.

Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Associa-
tion of German Electrical Engineers) or of the local electric power company.
• Any work on the motor may be carried out by an authorized electrician
only.
• Connect the motor.

Refer to the motor instruction manu-
al.
Fig. 101 Connection scematic
The terminal board in the terminal box can be connected in star or delta.
• Check correct switching of the motor (star or delta).
Refer to the motor instruction manual.

2066-9001-200 / 0410 99
Star switching (example)
Fig. 102
Delta switching (example)
Fig. 103
• In the case of additional electrical components, PTC thermistors or space

IMPORTANT:
heaters, refer to the motor manual.
Shipboard operation
• When operating the machine on board of ship, pay attention to the installation
guidelines issued by the respective classification societies.
• When using ship wiring cables, cable entry must be by means of marine-type
glands.

100 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.1.4 Direction of rotation of the bowl
provided that:
– The drive chamber is filled with oil
roughly up to the lower edge of the
charge hole.
• Switch on motor.
Fig. 104
The bowl must rotate in clockwise direction when looked at from above.
The direction of rotation of the bowl is

correct when the drive belt rotates
clockwise (check through the sight
glass in the frame).
When the direction of rotation is incor-
rect the motor connections must be
reversed by an authorised specialist.
Fig. 105

operation:
• Before working on the motor,
note that residual voltage may be
present!
• In this connection:
– Read the documentation supplied
by the frequency converter manu-
facturer.
– Have protective measures imple-
mented by suitably qualified per-
sonnel.
Fig. 106

2066-9001-200 / 0410 101
4.1.5 Speed and starting time of the bowl
Speed see name-plate

– for densities of the product up to
3
max. 0.991 kg/dm and
– for densities of the separated solids up to max.
3
1.4 kg/dm
Starting time 2 – 4 min
The bowl speed has been rated so as to ensure the operating safety of the sep-
arator.
• Check the separator and control for frequency consistency.

CAUTION: Danger to life as a result of an incorrect frequency!
In case of frequency converter operation:

The frequency converter is equipped with a reliable frequency limitation to pre-
vent operation at inadmissibly high bowl speeds.
• Operate the separator with fre-

CAUTION!
quency converter, speed monitor-

ing device and hardware-
controlled speed shut-off device.
manipulate the frequency con-
verter to exceed the permissible
bowl speed (see nameplate)!
• Check from time to time that
– the bowl speed (see nameplate)
and
Fig. 107 – motor frequency (see nameplate
and frequency converter display!)
coincide with the separator speed.

102 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.2 Orifice plates and flowmeter

A set of orifice plates (with different inner diameters) and a set of commissioning
parts are supplied with the separator.
– The set of orifice plates is fastened to the separator hood.
– The set of commissioning parts comprises flowmeter 3.
By installing an orifice plate the separator throughput can be monitored.
Fig. 108
A Product feed line

B Product discharge line
1 Orifice plate
2 Orifice plate
3 Flowmeter
4 3/2-way valve
ATTENTION! Before starting up the separator check that the following

parts are installed:
• Select the orifice plates from the set of plates supplied, according to the re-
Orifice plates 1 and 2
quired throughput capacity (see section 2.8).

• Install orifice plate 1 in product feed line A (see chapter 4.2.1).
• Install orifice plate 2 in product feed line B (see chapter 4.2.1).
• Remove the plug from the corresponding hole of 3/2-way valve 4.

Flowmeter 3
• Secure the thread of flowmeter 3 with Loctite 245.

• Install flowmeter 3 into 3/2-way valve 4.

2066-9001-200 / 0410 103
4.2.1 Installing the orifice plates

Installation of the orifice plates is explained here for product feed line B for ex-
ample.
Required material:
– Open ended wrench
– Lubricating grease
• Unscrew corrugated hose 3.

• Insert the selected orifice plate 2 into
connection piece 1 and press in
evenly, by hand.
Fig. 109
• Slightly grease the threaded area of
• Insert corrugated hose 3 and firmly

connection piece 1
tighten with hexagon nut 2.
Fig. 110

104 2066-9001-200 / 0410
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

2066-9001-200 / 0410 105
4.3 Maintenance and lubrication
• Special care must be taken when performing maintenance and lubrication

operations.
Conscientiously performed maintenance and lubrication operations improve
the service life of the separator.
• In the case of accessories (motor, product pump, preheater, solenoid valve
block etc.) the manufacturer’s maintenance and lubrication instructions must
be observed.
• Maintenance and repair work may be carried out only by persons
– who are demonstrably familiar with the state-of-the-art through briefings
and training.
– who are adequately qualified for performing the work and checking it.
• Electrical work may only be carried out by an authorized electrician!
• Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia Separator.
4.3.1 Maintenance schedule
ATTENTION!
The following maintenance intervals are recommendations which apply only for normal operating
conditions.
Negative operating conditions (e.g. low-grade fuel, excessively high temperature, strong vibrations,
frequent starting and stopping of the separator etc.) can necessitate shorter maintenance intervals.
To assure correct functioning and operating safety,

• in case of non-routine shut-down, see section 3.7 - manual operation.
• Pay attention to the following points during servicing:
– Oil level – Current consumption
– Temperatures – Starting time
– Pressures – Hoses and hose pipes (see 4.3.2)
– Leakage – Pipe joints
– Vibrations
• Before every assembly, grease the main components of the bowl at guide and contact surfaces (see section 4.3.4 -
lubrication schedule).
• in the case of frequent starting and stopping of the separator, shaft-driven alternator operation and in power plants, the
condition of the clutch shoes must be checked more often than stated in this schedule. It is not possible to state a defini-
tive time. We recommend checking the clutch shoes after 1000 operating hours or after 2 months at the latest.
• We recommend having the separator checked by a WS service specialist once a year.

106 2066-9001-200 / 0410
Fig. 111 Set of spare parts „bowl/hood“ (operation: 1 year or 8,000 hours)

2066-9001-200 / 0410 107
Date of commissioning:
(to be filled in by user)
Maintenance work Remark

– After 4000 operating hours – after 6 months at the latest
– After 12,000 operating hours – after 1 ½ years at the latest
Bowl inspection • Dismantle bowl and centripetal pump.
• Clean the bowl and centripetal pump parts and check for
• Clean all holes, nozzles and chambers of the hydraulic

corrosion and erosion.
• The cones of bowl and spindle must be clean and dry

system.
• Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood“

when fitting.
Replace gaskets (see adjacent figure).
(Operation: 1 year or 8000 hours).
See parts list.
Important: Time-consuming installation!
Change polyamide gasket 60 only when it is damaged (see
• See instructions of motor manufacturer

section 4.4.9).
Check the motor.
• See section 4.3.3 - Oil quality and oil change

Re-lubricate motor bearings (if required)
When using mineral oil:
• See section 4.4.4.

Oil change and thorough cleaning of the drive chamber
Clean the strainer and pipe in the operating liquid feed
• See section 4.5.

system on the self-cleaning separator.
Carefully clean the holes in the non-return valve in the
water feed and rinse with water.
Check the functionality of the non-return valve.
Carefully clean the water detector (if provided) with a soft
cloth, use diesel oil if necessary.
Clean the sight glass in the frame for observing the drive
belt.
Check the hoses and hose pipes and replace when neces-
sary.
Clean the filter in the suction line of the product feed pump
(option).

108 2066-9001-200 / 0410

2066-9001-200 / 0410 109

– After 8000 operating hours – after 1 year at the latest
– After 24,000 operating hours – after 3 years at the latest


system.
Replace gaskets and piston guide ring (see adjacent fig- • Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood“
when fitting.
ure). (Operation: 1 year or 8000 hours).

See parts list.
Wichtig: Time-consuming installation!
• Remove bowl.
section 4.4.9).
Clean the inside of the upper section of frame.
Replace gaskets. • Use set of spare parts "drive"
Replace the drive belt. (Operation: 1 year or 8000 hours).
Replace grooved ball bearings and angular contact ball See parts list.
bearings of spindle.
Check grooved ball bearings of centrifugal clutch and re- • Use set of spare parts "drive"
Replace vibration absorber.
place if necessary. (Operation: 2 years or 16,000 hours).

Check thickness of the clutch shoes (1) and replace when See parts list.
h smaller than 18 mm.

New condition of clutch shoes h = 26 mm
Check the motor. Re-lubricate motor bearings (if required)
Oil change and thorough cleaning of the drive chamber When using mineral oil (2)

When using synthetic oil (2)
Check the bowl height.
• Check only after motor or drive replacement.
In case of direct current:
Check the spindle speed (bowl).
Check the starting time. • See section 4.1.5.
Clean the strainer and pipe in the operating liquid feed • See section 4.4.4.
Carefully clean the holes in the non-return valve in the • See section 4.5.
water feed and rinse with water.

belt.
sary.
Check that vibration absorbers are fully functional (option).
(option).
(1) In the case of frequent starting and stopping of the separator, shaft-driven alternator operation and power plants shorter maintenance
intervals are required It is not possible to state a definitive time. We recommend checking the clutch shoes after 1,000 operating
hours or after 2 months at the latest.
(2) See section 4.3.3 - Oil quality and oil change

110 2066-9001-200 / 0410

2066-9001-200 / 0410 111

– After 16 000 operating hours – after 2 years at the latest


system.
Replace gaskets and piston guide ring (see adjacent fig- • Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood“
when fitting.
ure). (Operation: 1 year or 8000 hours).

See parts list.
• Remove bowl.
section 4.4.9).
Clean the inside of the upper section of frame.
Replace gaskets. • Use set of spare parts "drive"
Replace the drive belt. (Operation: 2 years or 16,000 hours).
Replace grooved ball bearings and angular contact ball See parts list.
bearings of spindle.
Replace vibration absorber.
Replace grooved ball bearings of centrifugal clutch.
Check thickness of the clutch shoes (1) and replace when
h smaller than 18 mm.

New condition of clutch shoes h = 26 mm
Check the motor. Re-lubricate motor bearings (if required)
Oil change and thorough cleaning of the drive chamber When using mineral oil (2)

When using synthetic oil (2)
Check the bowl height.
• Check only after motor or drive replacement.
In case of direct current:
• Check only after drive replacement.
In case of three-phase current:
Check the starting time. • See section 4.1.5.
Clean the strainer and pipe in the operating liquid feed • See section 4.4.4.
Carefully clean the holes in the non-return valve in the • See section 4.5.
operating water feed.

belt.
sary.
Check that vibration absorbers are fully functional (option).
(option).
(1) In the case of frequent starting and stopping of the separator, shaft-driven alternator operation and power plants shorter maintenance
intervals are required It is not possible to state a definitive time. We recommend checking the clutch shoes after 1,000 operating
hours or after 2 months at the latest.
(2) See section 4.3.3 - Oil quality and oil change

112 2066-9001-200 / 0410
Maintenance work
Equip the separator with new vibration isolators.

We recommend having the separator checked by a WS service engineer.
4.3.2 Hoses and hose pipes

Replace hose pipes when an inspection reveals one or more of the following de-
fects:
• Damage of the outer layer down to the fabric (e. g. chafe marks, cuts or
cracks).
• Leaky spots.
• Damage to or deformation of the hose fittings.
– Slight surface damage is not a reason for replacement.
• The hose becomes dislodged from the fitting.
• Corrosion of the fitting diminishing function and strength.
Protective hose 1
• Fit the protective hoses at all contact

points to the separator.
• Adapt the length of the protective

hose.
Fig. 114

2066-9001-200 / 0410 113
4.3.3 Lubrication
The spindle bearings are splash-lubricated from a central oil bath.
MOTOR BEARINGS
For re-greasing the motor bearings, refer to the instructions of the motor manu-
facturer.
OIL QUALITY (mineral oil)

The mineral gear oil tested by Westfalia Separator with the designation "Separa-
tor lube oil CLP 100" meets the requirements and should preferably be used.
Designation according to DIN

51502 CLP
100
Designation as per ISO 3498 CC 100
Viscosity class SAE 30
o o 2
Viscosity (at 40 C/104 F) 100 ± 10 mm /s (cSt)
Part Number 0015-0003-080 (2.5 litres)
Dispose of the oil as per instructions of the oil manufacturer.
The viscosity class SAE 30 covers a larger viscosity range than specified here.
However, only oils with the viscosity range specified here may be used.
OIL QUALITY (synthetic oil)

Use the synthetic lube oil tested by Westfalia Separator AG!
Viscosity class (ISO) VG 68

Viscosity
o o 2
– at 40 C (104 F) 65 mm /s
o o 2
– at 100 C (212 F) 10,4 mm /s
Viscosity index (VI) 147
o o
Density (at 15 C/59 F) 0.857 g/ml
based on Polyalphaolefin
Part Number 0015-0020-010 (1 litre)
Dispose of the oil as per instructions of the oil manufacturer.

114 2066-9001-200 / 0410
OIL QUANTITY
ATTENTION: Do not forget to top up the oil in good time!
Filling in oil
Fill the drive with oil before commis-
sioning the separator.
• Unscrew the screw plug and
• fill in oil through the charge hole.
Filling quantity: approx. 1 litres
Fig. 115
Oil level
ATTENTION: Check the oil level only

when the separator is at standstill.
Oil level during operation of the

separator (1):
– Visible oil movement up to middle of
sight glass
Oil level during standstill of the
separator (2):
– Roughly up to the lower edge of the
charge hole
Fig. 116
OIL CHECK
• Check the oil level every week!
• From time to time undo the oil drain screw and check whether there is water
in the oil bath. When the oil exhibits a milky colouring (emulsification), the oil
must be changed immediately.
OIL CHANGE
• Change oil after about
– 4000 operating hours or 6 months at the latest (mineral oil).
– 8000 operating hours or 1 year at the latest (synthetic oil).
• Clean sight glass.

2066-9001-200 / 0410 115
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

116 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.3.4 Lubrication Chart
Fig. 117 Lubrication schedule

2066-9001-200 / 0410 117
Lubricant Lubrication frequency

Lubricat- Amount of
after Lubrication point
ing point lubricant
Designation Designation operating per year
hours
CLP
100
Lube oil DIN 51502 3

4 000 2x 1 000 cm Drive chamber
(mineral)
1
CC 100
ISO 3498
Lube oil 3
ISO VG 68 8 000 1x 1 000 cm Drive chamber
(synthetic)
2 according to instructions of motor manufacturer Motor bearings
Threads and sliding sur-

3 2x
faces of bowl
Lubricating see
as required apply sparingly
grease parts list
4 1x Threads of fittings
• Check oil level regularly through sight glass.

• Manual lubrication
• Refer to lube oil table (see section 4.3.5):

118 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.3.5 Table of lubricating oils
Lubricating oil sorts suggested by some firms
Manufac-
Viscosity
Designation at 40 °C (104 °F)
turer
mm2/s (cSt)
Lubricating oil table
for separators in onshore and shipboard opera- BLASIA 100
tion RADULA 100 100
DIESEL GAMMA 30
Separator Lube oil
ATLANTA MARINE 30
Viscosity 105
(Designation accord-
DISOLA M 3015
ing to DIN 51502)
MONTANOL HK 100 100

Oil filling
Symbol
Kinematic
Type viscosity ENERGOL GR-XP 100 100
at 40 °C ENERGOL DL-MP 30 114
(104 °F)
2
l mm /s (cSt) HYSPIN AWS 100
100
BTC 3 ALPHA ZN 100
CTC 1 MARINE HEAVY 99
CTC 3
MTC 3 1.3 GST OIL 100
100
OTC 2 NL Gear Compound 100
OTC 3 Veritas Marine Oil R&O 30 108
WTC 2 DELO 3000 Marine Oil 30 104
OSE 5 1
ATLANTA MARINE 30
105
CSD 1 DISOLA M 3015
OSD 2 TURBINE T 100 95
SD 1 1.3
SSD 2 EXX-MAR XP 110
TSD 2 NUTO H 100
100
SPARTAN EP 100
ESD 18 GULF HARMONY 100 95

GSC 15 VERITAS 30 110
OSD 6 CLP 90 to 110 0015-0003-080
OSD 18 2.5 100 (2.5 l) HIDRAOIL HD 70 95
WSD 8
WSD 18
OSE 10 MOBILGARD 312 106
OSE 20
GADINIA 30 104
GSC 25 ROTELLA MX SAE 30 105
OSD 20
OSD 25
OSD 30 3.7 HYDRA WAY HMA 100
100
OSD 35 LOAD WAY EP 100
SD 30
WSD 35
OSE 40 DORO AR SAE 30 119
OSD 50 TARO XD SAE 30 105
OSD 60
OSD 80
5.0
SD 50
WSD 60
OSE 80

2066-9001-200 / 0410 119
4.3.6 Comments on table of lubricating oils for separators from Westfalia Separator
Faultless functioning of separators very much depends on the proper type of lubricating oil used, since a
high grade oil, selected to meet all service requirements, will minimize the wear, thus extending the ser-
vice life and increasing the operating safety.
For the lubrication of our separators we recommend to use the oils specified by us since continuous qual-
ity checks are performed by Westfalia Separator. Oils proposed from some firms are not subjected to
these tests.
Therefore, Westfalia Separator cannot give a performance guarantee for those oils.
Be sure to select only high grade solvent refined products.
The specified oil types meet the requirements according to DIN. Under unfavourable operating condi-
tions, e.g. high temperatures, the quality of the oils may be insufficient so that more efficient oils, e.g.
synthetic oils, must be used. If necessary, consult Westfalia Separator.
For the different separator types and oil types the viscosity ranges are specified in the table of lubricating
oils.
The operating temperature of the separator exceeds normally 80 oC (176 oF). At those temperatures
some oils age quickly, so that they have to be changed prematurely.
Be sure not to use lubricating oils with viscosities lower than those specified in the table. Due to the pos-
sibility of the oil film breaking down, oil of too low a viscosity will give insufficient lubrication, resulting in
increased wear. However, oils with a slightly higher viscosity than specified may be used.
Bear in mind that the viscosity groups SAE 30, 40 and 50 (SAE = Society of Automotive Engineers) cov-
er larger viscosity ranges and be sure to select lubricating oils with viscosities not lower than the mini-
mum values of the viscosity ranges restricted for the different separator types.

120 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.4 Bowl
Fig. 118 Exploded view of the bowl and centripetal pump

2066-9001-200 / 0410 121
Pos. Designation Dimensions
470 (1) Bowl bottom

480 Gasket
490 Washer
500 Hex head screw M 8 x 12
510 Gasket
520 Gasket
530 Annular piston
540 Gasket
550 Closing chamber bottom
560 Piston guide ring
570 Gasket
580 Gasket
590 Gasket
600 Sliding piston
610 Gasket
620 Distributor base
630 Gasket
640 Gasket
650 Gasket
660 (1) Bowl top
670 Disk stack

680 Blind disk
690 Threaded pin ISO 4026 - M 10 x 10 -1.4571
700 Gasket
710 Threaded ring
720 Gasket
730 Gasket
740 Gasket
750 Lock ring
760 Centripetal pump chamber
cover
770 Regulating ring
780 Gasket
790 Centripetal pump chamber
cover
801 Centripetal pump
802 Sensing liquid pump
830 Gasket
840 Gasket
(1) ATTENTION: This part can only be replaced by a WS service specialist!

A vibration check must be carried out on the machine by a WS service specialist.

122 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.4.1 Dismantling the bowl

still.


sight glass..
no longer moving.
Fig. 119



still.
separator!

o



Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verband
Deutscher Elektrotechnik/ Association of German Electrical Engineering) or of
only.

2066-9001-200 / 0410 123
• Avoid damage to bowl parts when fitting and removing by

– precise positioning,
– no diagonal pull!
– selecting the low lifting speed of the hoist.
• Use suitably rated, intact hoists.

CAUTION: Use appropriate lifting devices to prevent accidents!

• Use tools only for their intended use!

CAUTION: Avoid accidents by using undamaged, complete tools!
– For special tools, see section 4.14 or spare parts catalog.

– For standard tools, see section 4.13.
• Do not use force when removing or fitting parts.
• Treat all bowl parts

– gently.
– Always set them down on a rubber mat or a wooden pallet.
CAUTION: Danger of imbalance!
• Do not interchange parts from different bowls.

If an installation is equipped with several separators:
The bowl parts are marked with the serial number of the machine or the last
three digits of the serial number.
• Certain bowl parts (see sect. 4.4)

CAUTION:
may be pre-assembled and bal-

anced only by specialists from
Westfalia Separator or in work-
shops authorized by Westfalia
Separator.
Unqualified balancing can lead to
dangerous operating states (vi-
brations) and destruction of the
separator with danger to life.
Fig. 120

124 2066-9001-200 / 0410
Removing the hood
• Unscrew filling and displacement

water line 1.
Fig. 121
• Unscrew handle connection piece 1

by lightly hammering with a mallet
• hold the centripetal pump with offset

(left-hand thread); at the same time
screwdriver 2.
Fig. 122
• Remove handle connection piece 1.
• Take the gaskets out of the handle

If necessary (see section 4.3.1):
connection piece.
Fig. 123

2066-9001-200 / 0410 125
• Disconnect product feed line 1 and

If necessary:
product discharge line 2:

– Unscrew coupling nuts 3.
Note:
The connectors 4 must be glued in
with Loctite 275.
Fig. 124
• Unscrew three hexagon nuts 1 and

• take off three washers 2.
Fig. 125
Required special tools

– Two hex head screws 1
(M 10 x 100)
• Screw in hex head screws 1 and

• force off the hood.
ATTENTION: Do not damage stud

bolts for fastening the hood!
– Do not twist the hood when lifting it
off.
• Lift off the hood.
Fig. 126

• Take gasket 1 out of the upper sec-
tion of the frame.
Fig. 127

126 2066-9001-200 / 0410
Removing the centripetal pump
Required special tool

– Double hook wrench
• Loosen the centripetal pump cham-

ber lock ring using the double hook
wrench (left-hand thread) and re-
move it.
Fig. 128
• Screw handle connection piece into

the centripetal pump (left-hand
thread).
• Remove the complete centripetal
pump together with the centripetal
pump chamber covers.
Fig. 129
• Dismantle the following parts if nec-

essary:
– centripetal pump chamber cover 1
with inserted gasket.
– sensing liquid pump 2 with insert-
ed gaskets,
– regulating ring 3
– centripetal pump chamber cover 5
with gaskets 4 and 6,
– centripetal pump 7 with inserted
gasket.
• Take the gaskets out of these parts.

Fig. 130

2066-9001-200 / 0410 127
Removing the threaded ring

– Socket wrench 1
• Unscrew threaded ring 2 (with in-

serted gasket) with socket wrench
and commercially available ratchet 3
and remove it.
• Take the gasket out of the threaded

ring.
Fig. 131
Lifting off the bowl top
• Unscrew two threaded pins out of

the bowl top with a screwdriver.
Fig. 132

– ring spanner 1
• Remove two hexagon nuts 3 from

hex head screws 2.
Fig. 133

128 2066-9001-200 / 0410
• The O-marks of the bowl top and of

Important:
the bowl bottom must be visible.

– Do NOT hide them under ring
• The arrow and the "open" mark must

spanner 1!
show upwards.
• Bolt ring spanner 1 to the bowl top.

• Screw in two hex head screws 2 of
the ring spanner and tighten firmly.
Fig. 134
CAUTION: Danger of injury through

rotating lever!
– Be careful when working in the area
around the lever.
• Strike open the bowl top with a

hammer (left-hand thread) and un-
screw it.
Fig. 135
• Lift off the bowl top (with fitted gas-

kets) with fitted ring spanner by
• Set down the bowl top with fitted ring

hand.
spanner on a rubber mat or wooden

pallet.
• Take the gaskets out of the bowl

If necessary (see section 4.3.1 ):
top.
Fig. 136

2066-9001-200 / 0410 129
Removing the disk stack
• Take out blind disk 1 and disks 2 out

of the spindle individually or several
at a time.
Fig. 137
Lifting out the bowl

– Eye bolt 1
– Bell-shaped piece 2
• Unscrew hexagon nut 3
Fig. 138
• Assemble eye bolt 1 and bell-

shaped piece 2:
– Screw eye bolt 1 into bell-shaped
piece 2
– Screw eye bolt 1 into hexagon nut
3 by approx. 225 mm.
Fig. 139

130 2066-9001-200 / 0410
• Screw bowl top 1 into bowl bottom 2
• Grease the thread and contact sur-

(left-hand thread).
face of the bell-shaped piece (see
• Mount assembled tool 3 on the bowl

section 4.3.4).
• Screw on centripetal pump chamber

top.
lock ring 4 as far as it will go (left-
• Force the bowl off the spindle with

hand thread).
tool 3.
Fig. 140
CAUTION: Danger to life when

transporting heavy parts!
• Carefully lift the bowl bottom with

fitted parts out of the upper part of
the frame with the aid of the hoist.
• Set the bowl bottom down on a rub-
ber mat or a wooden pallet for fur-
ther dismantling.
Fig. 141
• Remove the hoist.

• Unscrew bowl top 1 (left-hand thread) and lift off by hand.
• Set down the bowl top with fitted ring spanner on a rubber mat or wooden pal-
let.
• Unscrew the centripetal pump chamber lock ring 4.
• Remove and dismantle tool 3.
Removing the distributor base and sliding piston

– Eye bolt 1
– Assembly disk 3
Fig. 142

2066-9001-200 / 0410 131
• Grease the thread of distributor base
• Place assembly disk 3 on the hub of

1 (see section 4.3.4).
• Screw bell-shaped piece 2 into the

the bowl bottom.
• Screw the eye bolt into the bell-

thread of the distributor base.
shaped piece.
Fig. 143
• Force the distributor base off the

bowl bottom by turning the ratchet
extension 1 clockwise.
Fig. 144
• Remove the distributor base togeth-

er with bell-shaped piece and eye
• Remove the bell-shaped piece and

bolt.
the eye bolt.
Fig. 145
• Grease the thread of sliding piston 1

(see chapter 4.3.4).
• Screw bell-shaped piece 2 into the

the bowl bottom.
• Screw the eye bolt into the bell-

thread of the sliding piston.
shaped piece.
Fig. 146

132 2066-9001-200 / 0410
• Force the sliding piston off the bowl

bottom by turning the ratchet exten-
sion 1 clockwise.
Fig. 147
• Remove the sliding piston (with fitted

gasket) with bell-shaped piece and
• Remove the bell-shaped piece and

eye bolt.
the eye bolt.
• Take the gasket out of the sliding

piston groove.
Fig. 148
Removing the annular piston and the closing chamber bottom

– Eye bolt 1
– Assembling device 3
– Assembly disk 4
Fig. 149

2066-9001-200 / 0410 133

shaped piece 2:
piece 2
– Screw eye bolts 1 into hexagon
nut 3 by approx. 225 mm.
Fig. 150

the bowl bottom.
Fig. 151
• Place the bell-shaped piece with
• Fit assembling device 3 onto the

fitted eye bolt into the bowl bottom.
• Loosen three Allen screws 4 using

bell-shaped piece.
the ratchet wrench (with extension
• Slip three disks 5 of the assembling

and socket).
device towards the periphery, under
• Make sure that disks 5 are properly

the rim of annular piston 6.
positioned in the mounting groove of
• Firmly re-tighten Allen screws 4.

Fig. 152
the annular piston.
• Force off annular piston 1 together

with closing chamber bottom by
turning ratchet extension 2 clock-
wise.
Fig. 153

134 2066-9001-200 / 0410
• Remove annular piston 1 and clos-

ing chamber bottom (with fitted gas-
kets) with the bell-shaped piece and
• Remove the bell-shaped piece, eye

eye bolt.
bolt and assembly disk.
Fig. 154
• Separate annular piston 1 from clos-

If necessary:
ing chamber bottom 2 by tapping
• Take the gaskets out of the annular

with a mallet – as illustrated.
piston and closing chamber bottom.
Fig. 155
Dismantling the bowl bottom
• Remove gaskets 1, 2, 4 and piston

If necessary:
guide ring 3.
Fig. 156

2066-9001-200 / 0410 135
• Turn bow bottom through 180 (up-

If necessary:
o
side down).
• Unscrew four hex head screws 1.
• Force off disk 2 with the screwdriver
• Take out gasket 3.

and remove it.
Fig. 157

136 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.4.2 Cleaning the bowl

It is generally not necessary to dismantle self-cleaning bowls for cleaning after
separation unless
– the nature of the product makes it necessary,
– the separator is to be shut down for a lengthy period (see section 4.9).
• Dismantle and clean the bowl for checking from time to time. See section
4.3.1 - Maintenance schedule.
• Use only a cleaning agent that is approved for the field of application!
• Do not use acid or chloric cleaning agents.

Chlorine attacks stainless steel parts.
• Dissolve dried scale with citric acid.
• For cleaning the individual disks and bowl parts

Do not use metal scrapers and metal brushes!
• Take the gaskets out of the bowl

parts.
• Clean the grooves and gaskets to
avoid corrosion in the grooves.
• Replace damaged, very swollen,
hardened or brittle gaskets immedi-
ately.
Fig. 158
• Clean the small holes for the feed and discharge of the operating liquid with
particular care to ensure trouble-free bowl ejections.
• Apply a thin coat of grease to the guide surfaces and threads of the bowl
parts after drying (see 4.3.4 Lubrication schedule).
• Reassemble the bowl immediately after cleaning!

2066-9001-200 / 0410 137
4.4.3 Cleaning the frame
• Never rinse off the motor with a direct water jet.

CAUTION: Danger to life through electrical components!
• Use only a cleaning agent that is approved for the field of application!
• Do not use acid or chloric cleaning agents.

ATTENTION!
Chlorine attacks stainless steel parts.

• Dissolve dried scale with citric acid.
• Clean the inside of the upper section of the frame from time to time:
To do this:
– Refer to the maintenance schedule (section 4.3.1),
– dismantle the bowl (section 4.4.1).
ATTENTION: Escaping cleaning

liquid!
When the bowl has been removed, no
cleaning liquid must spill onto the
drive belt via the spindle.
• Make sure that protective cap 2 and
spindle cap 1 with inserted gasket
are installed.
Fig. 159
4.4.4 Cleaning the strainer and the operating water feeding system
• The strainer and the operating water feeding system must be cleaned de-
pending on the quality of the operating water and overall load. See section
4.3.1 Maintenance schedule
• Use citric acid in case of furring.
• Thoroughly clean the parts with water.
Replacing or cleaning the filter element

CAUTION: Danger due to electrical current!
• Close the main valve for operating water, filling and displacement water.

o
separator parts (separating temperatures of 70 to 100 C (158 – 212 °F) ).

138 2066-9001-200 / 0410
• Undo screw 1 (jaw span 22) with

fitted gasket 2.
• Remove filter element 3.
• Clean or replace filter element 3.
– Use citric acid in case of furring.
– Thoroughly clean the parts with
water.
Fig. 160
• Fit the cleaned or new filter element 3.

IMPORTANT: Cooper strip to the inside!
• Firmly screw in screw 1 with fitted gasket 2 so that it seals well.
4.4.5 Cleaning the motor
• Never rinse off the motor with a direct water jet.

CAUTION: Danger to life through electrical components!
• Keep the motor clean as specified in the manual.

2066-9001-200 / 0410 139
4.4.6 Important instructions for assembling the bowl

When the bowl has not been correctly assembled or is inadequately cleaned,
forces can be produced in the high-speed rotating bowl which endanger the
operating safety of the separator!
Therefore, the cleaning instructions (section 4.4.2) and assembling instructions
(section 4.4.7) must be exactly followed.
P a y p a rtic u lar atte ntio n to th e fo llowin g:
• Before assembling the bowl, check to be sure that the guide and contact sur-
ATTENTION!
faces of the bowl are clean.

• Grease the guide surfaces as specified in the lubrication schedule (see 4.3.4).
• Some bowl parts are arranged in

fixed positions relative to one anoth-
• Locking devices and alignment

er.
marks must be in perfect condition.

IMP ORTANT:
The bowl must otherwise not be op-
erated.
Fig. 161
• When fitting the bowl parts, make

sure that the "O" marks on all parts
are aligned.
(Only then will the parts fit correctly
over arresting pins and guide ribs).
Fig. 162
• Avoid damage to bowl parts when fitting and removing by




140 2066-9001-200 / 0410


• If the plant has several separators,

be sure not to interchange parts of

different bowls.
The parts are marked
– with the serial number or
– the last three digits of the serial
number.
Fig. 163
• Thoroughly clean the gasket

grooves of the individual bowl parts
and apply a thin coat of grease.
• After fitting check that
– the gaskets are not twisted,
– the gaskets are evenly positioned
in the groove.
Fig. 164

2066-9001-200 / 0410 141
4.4.7 Assembling the bowl
• Pay special attention to sections “Safety”, 4.4.2 and 4.4.6.

• For dimensions of the parts see 4.4 - exploded view.
Preparing the bowl bottom
• Turn bow bottom through 180 (up-

If necessary:
o
side down).
• Insert gasket 3 in the bowl bottom.
• Screw in the four hex head screws 1
connecting disk 2 with the bowl bot-
tom tight.
Torque: 25 Nm
• Turn the bowl bottom through 180
o
(fitting position).
Fig. 165
• Fit gaskets 1, 2, 4 and piston guide

ring 3 in the grooves of the bowl bot-
tom.
• Grease guide surfaces as specified

in the lubrication schedule (see
4.3.4).
Fig. 166
Fitting the annular piston
• For replacing the polyamide gasket

1 see section 4.4.9.
• Place gasket 2 into the groove of the
annular piston and press in evenly
and firmly.
4.3.4).
Fig. 167

142 2066-9001-200 / 0410
• Insert annular piston 1 into bowl

bottom 2.
Fig. 168
• Turn sliding piston 1 through 180

o
• Place the sliding piston on annular

(upside down).
piston 2.
Fig. 169

– Eye bolt 1
– ring spanner 3
Fig. 170

2066-9001-200 / 0410 143
• Fit special tools 1, 2 and 3 as shown
• screw in hexagon nut 4 and tighten.

and
• Press the annular piston into the

bowl bottom by turning hexagon nut
6 clockwise with the wrench.
• Remove special tools and sliding

piston 5.
Fig. 171
Fitting the closing chamber bottom and sliding piston
• Insert gaskets 1 and 2 in the

grooves of the closing chamber bot-
tom.
4.3.4).
Fig. 172

144 2066-9001-200 / 0410
• Insert closing chamber bottom 1 into

the annular piston.
Fig. 173
• Make sure that piston guide ring 1 is

firmly located in the groove.
Fig. 174
• Insert the gasket in the groove of the

sliding piston.
4.3.4).
Fig. 175

– Eye bolt 1
– ring spanner 3
Fig. 176

2066-9001-200 / 0410 145
• Grease thread 1 of the sliding piston
• Screw bell-shaped piece 2 onto the

(see chapter 4.3.4).
thread of the sliding piston.
Fig. 177
• Install the sliding piston with fitted

gasket into the bowl bottom, with
screwed-in bell-shaped insert.
Fig. 178
• Fit special tools 1, 3 as shown.

• Screw in hexagon nut 4 and tighten.
• Press the closing chamber bottom

and sliding piston into the bowl bot-
tom as far as they will go by turning
hexagon nut 5 clockwise with a
wrench.
• Remove the special tools.
Fig. 179

146 2066-9001-200 / 0410
Fitting the bowl bottom in the separator
• Clean and wipe dry the spindle

guide with a suitable cloth.
Fig. 180
• Turn bowl bottom with fitted parts

o
through 90 (upside down).
ATTENTION: Do not grease the

bowl hub!
• Clean the bowl hub with a suitable

cloth.
Fig. 181

– ring spanner 1
• Remove two hexagon nuts 3 from

hex head screws 2.
• If threaded pins are screwed into the

Important:
bowl top, undo them with a screw-
• The O mark of the bowl top must be

driver.
visible.
– Do NOT hide them under ring
Fig. 182
• The arrow and the "open" mark must

spanner 1!
show upwards.
• Bolt ring spanner 1 to the bowl top.
– Screw in two hex head screws 2 of the ring spanner and tighten firmly.

2066-9001-200 / 0410 147
CAUTION:
A loose bowl top can endanger life!
• Screw the bowl top by hand into the

bowl bottom (left-hand thread).
– The "O" marks must be aligned.
Fig. 183

– Eye bolt 1
• Unscrew hexagon nut 3.
Fig. 184

shaped piece 2:
piece 2
– Screw eye bolt 1 into hexagon nut
3 by approx. 225 mm.
Fig. 185
• Grease the thread and contact sur-

face of the bell-shaped piece (see
• Mount assembled tool 3 on the bowl

section 4.3.4).
• Screw on centripetal pump chamber

top.
lock ring 4 as far as it will go (left-

hand thread).
Fig. 186

148 2066-9001-200 / 0410
CAUTION: Danger to life when

• Carefully mount the bowl bottom

with fitted parts with the aid of the
hoist.
Fig. 187

• Unscrew bowl top 1 (left-hand
• Set down the bowl top with fitted ring

thread) and lift off by hand.
spanner on a rubber mat or wooden
• Unscrew the centripetal pump

pallet.
• Remove and dismantle tool 3.

chamber lock ring 4.
Fig. 188
Installing the distributor base and the disk stack
• Insert the distributor base in the

bowl bottom.
– Pay attention to correct position-
ing.
Fig. 189

2066-9001-200 / 0410 149
ATTENTION: Pay attention for cor-

rect total number of disks!
It is marked on the blind disk, e.g.
84/1:
– Total number of disks A and B = 84
(number of disks with spacers A +
number of blind disks B)
– Number of blind disks B = 1
Fig. 190
ATTENTION: The last disks must be

properly located in the guide ribs of
the spindle!
• Stack the disks individually or sev-

eral at a time onto the spindle.
Fig. 191
Installing the bowl top
• Thoroughly clean the grooves for

gaskets 1 and 2 in the bowl top.
• Check gaskets 1 and 2:
– replace when damaged,
– install if missing.
• Check the inserted gasket 3.
– replace when damaged,
– For replacing the polyamide gas-
ket 3 see section 4.4.8.
Fig. 192

150 2066-9001-200 / 0410
ATTENTION: Prevent seizing of
• The following parts must be carefully

threads!
cleaned, wiped dry and greased in

accordance with the lubrication
schedule (see 4.3.4).
– threads and guide surfaces of
bowl bottom and bowl top
– contact surfaces of bowl top and
sliding piston
Fig. 193
• Screw the bowl top by hand into the

bowl bottom as far as it will go (left-
hand thread).
Fig. 194
CAUTION: Danger of injury through

rotating lever!
– Be careful when working in the area
around the lever.
CAUTION:
• Strike the bowl top with a hammer

until the "O" mark is reached (left-

hand thread).
Fig. 195
• Screw in two threaded pins using a

screwdriver.
Fig. 196

2066-9001-200 / 0410 151
Fitting the threaded ring

– Socket wrench 1
• Insert the gasket in the groove of the
• Screw in threaded ring 2 with the

threaded ring.
wrench and commercially available

ratchet 3.
Fig. 197
Checking the centric axis
• Check that the spindle and bowl are

centric.
The control dimension B
– is 3.5 ±1.5 mm
– between the bowl and the upper
section of the frame.
• Pay attention to bowl height A (see

section 4.7.1.
Fig. 198

152 2066-9001-200 / 0410
Fitting the centripetal pump
• Insert gasket 1 in the centripetal

pump groove.
• Lightly grease threads and contact
surfaces of the centripetal pump.
• Install centripetal pump 2.
Fig. 199
• Insert gaskets 1 and 2 in the

grooves of the centripetal pump
chamber cover.
Fig. 200

cover with fitted gaskets.
– The “O” marks of the centripetal
pump chamber cover and the
bowl top must be aligned.
Fig. 201

2066-9001-200 / 0410 153
• Mount the regulating ring selected

from the set of regulating rings.
• See section 2.6.
Fig. 202
• Insert gaskets 1 and 2 in the sensing

liquid pump grooves.
• Grease guide surfaces.
• Install sensing liquid pump.
Fig. 203
• Insert gasket 1 in the groove in the

centripetal pump chamber cover.
Fig. 204

cover.
– The “O” marks of the centripetal
pump chamber cover and the
bowl top must be aligned.
Fig. 205

154 2066-9001-200 / 0410

– Double hook wrench
• Grease the threads on the bowl top

and on the centripetal pump cham-
ber lock ring as specified in the Lu-
brication schedule (see 4.3.4).
CAUTION: A loose centripetal pump
chamber lock ring can endanger
• Screw tight the centripetal pump

life!
chamber lock ring using the double

Fig. 206 hook wrench (left-hand thread).
• Pay attention to section 4.7.1

2066-9001-200 / 0410 155
4.4.8 Replacing the polyamide gasket (bowl top)

• For standard tools, see section 4.13.
REMOVAL
ATTENTION: Sensitive bowl part!
– Do NOT damage the bowl top
groove when drilling!
• Drill through the damaged polyam-

ide gasket twice centrically and
vertically.
– with a 2 mm drill bit
– at a distance of approx. 50 to
60 mm.
Fig. 207

– Do NOT damage the bowl top
groove when screwing in!
• Screw two wooden screws in the
holes in the polyamide gasket.
• Force off the old polyamide gasket
• lever it bit by bit out of the groove

with the wood screws and
using a screwdriver.
Fig. 208
Note:
If the polyamide gasket cannot be removed, repeat this procedure.
FITTING
• Thoroughly clean and dry the groove.
• Heat the gasket in approx. 80 C (176 °F) water for 5 minutes.
o
• Wipe dry the gasket.
• Fit the gasket into the groove of the

bowl top (with the narrow side facing
• Place on a smooth wooden block.

the bowl top).
• hammer the gasket evenly into the

groove.
Fig. 209

156 2066-9001-200 / 0410
• The sealing surface of the gasket

must not protrude by more than
1 mm from the surface A of the bowl
top.
Fig. 210

2066-9001-200 / 0410 157
4.4.9 Replacing the polyamide gasket (bowl top)

Change the polyamide gasket only when it is damaged.
• For standard tools, see section 4.13.
REMOVAL

– Do NOT damage the ring piston
groove when drilling!
• Drill through the damaged polyam-

ide gasket twice centrically and
vertically.
– with a 2 mm drill bit
– at a distance of approx. 50 to
60 mm.
Fig. 211

– Do NOT damage the ring piston
groove when screwing in!
• Screw two wooden screws in the
holes in the polyamide gasket.
• Force off the old polyamide gasket
• lever it bit by bit out of the groove

with the wood screws and
using a screwdriver.
Fig. 212
Note:
If the polyamide gasket can’t be removed, repeat this procedure.

158 2066-9001-200 / 0410
FITTING
• Thoroughly clean and dry the

groove.
• Heat the new polyamide gasket in
o
approx. 80 C (176 °F) water for 5
minutes.
• Wipe the gasket dry and press it
evenly and firmly into the groove, at
four opposite points
Fig. 213
• Insert annular piston 1 into bowl

bottom 2.
Fig. 214
• Turn sliding piston 1 through 180

o
• Place the sliding piston on annular

(upside down).
piston 2.
Fig. 215

2066-9001-200 / 0410 159

– Eye bolt 1
– ring spanner 3
• Unscrew hexagon nut 4.
Fig. 216
• Fit special tools 1, 2 and 3 as shown
• Screw in hexagon nut 4 and tighten.

and
• Press in the polyamide gasket of the

annular piston by turning hexagon
nut 6 clockwise with the wrench.
• Remove special tools and sliding

piston 5.
Fig. 217
• By carrying out several measure-

ments around the entire circumfer-
ence of the annular piston, check
that the polyamide gasket is seated
parallel in the groove.
Fig. 218

160 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.4.10 Reworking the sliding piston
• the sealing surface A of the sliding piston (Fig. 219) (Sealing surface A as de-
The bowl seal consists of
• the polyamide gasket B of the bowl top (Fig. 221).

livered 2 mm high) and
When worn, the sealing surface A of

the sliding piston can be remachined
up to max. 0.5 mm several times be-
fore it has to be replaced.
When the first erosion marks (0.2

mm deep) are detected, i.e. as soon
• Remachine the sealing surface of

as the bowl starts to leak:
the sliding piston.
Fig. 219
• When remachining, make sure that

– the sealing surface is machined
cleanly and
– shoulder H at diameter X is still at
least 1.5 mm high.
Fig. 220
Standard parameters for remachining the sealing surface

Surface quality Ra 2 µm (Rz 12.5 µm)
Tool Hard metal steel of ISO quality M 30 or K 20
-1
Speed 55 min
Cutting depth max. 0.15 mm
Forward feed max. 0.1 mm/revolution
• fit a new polymide gasket B into the

After facing
bowl top (see section 4.4.8)!
Fig. 221

2066-9001-200 / 0410 161
4.5 Mounting the hood
If the gasket has been removed to
• Insert new gasket 1 in the groove in

keep to the service intervals:
the upper section of frame.
Fig. 222
ATTENTION: Do not damage stud

bolts 2 for fastening the hood!
– Do not twist the hood when mount-
ing.
• Mount hood 1.
Fig. 223
• Bolt tight the hood with three wash-

ers 2 and three hexagon nuts 1.
Fig. 224

162 2066-9001-200 / 0410
If the gaskets 2 have been removed to
• Provide handle connection piece 1

keep to the service intervals:
with new gaskets 2.
• Apply a thin coat of grease to the

guide surfaces and threads of the
handle connection piece as speci-
fied in the lubrication schedule (see
4.3.4).
Fig. 225

– Offset screwdriver 2
• Introduce handle connection piece 1
• Hold the centripetal pump with the

into the hood.
offset screwdriver and tighten it by

lightly hammering the handle con-
nection piece with a mallet (left-
hand thread).
Fig. 226
• Carefully clean the holes in the non-
• rinse with water.

return valve and
• Check the functionality of the non-

return valve.
Fig. 227
• Assemble the filling and displace-

ment water line 1 and connect it.
Fig. 228

2066-9001-200 / 0410 163
• Connect the following lines if

necessary:
– Product feed line 1.
– Product discharge line 2
• Screw tight coupling nuts 3.
Note:
The connectors 4 must be glued in
with Loctite 275.
Fig. 229

164 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.6 Drive
Fig. 230 Exploded view of the drive

2066-9001-200 / 0410 165
Pos. Designation Dimensions
1 Retaining ring 95 x 3
3 Clutch pulley
4 Grooved ball bearing
5 Spacer bush
8 Clutch driver
9 Clutch shoe
10 Washer 11 x 27 x 4
12 Washer
14 Drive belt
15 Spindle
17 Bearing cover
18 Bearing cover
20 Retaining ring 35 x 1,5
21 Ball bearing protection ring
22 Angular contact ball bearing
23 Bearing sleeve
24 Gasket
25 Rubber-metal cushion
26 Pivoting bearing
28 Gasket
29 Bearing cover
(This hex head screw is glued in with Loctite
275.)
(This hex head screw is glued in with Loc-
tite 275.)
33 Washer
34 Cup spring

166 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.6.1 Important instructions for fitting and removing the drive

still.


sight glass..
no longer moving.
Fig. 231



still.
separator!

o



Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verband
Deutscher Elektrotechnik/ Association of German Electrical Engineering) or of
only.

2066-9001-200 / 0410 167
• Avoid damage to drive parts when fitting and removing by





• Treat all drive parts
– gently.
– Always set them down on a rubber mat or a wooden pallet.
ATTENTION: Before fitting the drive parts

• Thoroughly clean and dry the drive chamber.
Use only a cleaning agent that is approved for the field of application!
• Thoroughly clean the inlet bores of the spindle with a suitable cleaning agent
and brushes.
• Check the ball bearings of the spindle and centrifugal clutch.
Use only the ball bearings specified in the parts list!
• always operate the separator with installed bowl!

ATTENTION: To avoid bearing damage,

168 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.6.2 Removing the drive belt and spindle assembly
• Pay special attention to section 4.6.1.
• Undo the oil drain screw and

• Drain the oil into an oil pan (approx.
1 l).
Fig. 232
• Undo three hex head screws 1.

• Take off cover 2.
Fig. 233
Fig. 234

2066-9001-200 / 0410 169
• Pull the motor out of the flange

guide by means of the hoist (approx.
5 mm).
– Drive belt is slackened!
• Pull the drive belt off the clutch pul-

ATTENTION!
ley (centrifugal clutch) downwards.
Fig. 235
• Lift the motor with centrifugal clutch

out of the lower section of frame.
Fig. 236
Remove the operating water feeding

device in the upper section of
• Undo nut 2.
frame:
• Take off pipe 3.
Fig. 237
• Remove spindle cap 1 with fitted

gasket.
Fig. 238

170 2066-9001-200 / 0410

• Remove ring 2 and protective cap 3
with inserted gasket 4.
Fig. 239
Removing the speed monitoring
• Undo hex head screws 1.

device:
• Take off speed monitoring device 2

and lay it down in the lower section
of frame.
Fig. 240
• Take the drive belt out of the lower

section of frame.
Fig. 241

• Unscrew spindle assembly 2 from
the lower part of the frame.
(For dismantling the spindle assem-
bly, see section 4.6.3.)
Note:
If the vibration absorber is also pulled out
• Loosen it from the spindle assembly by

of the lower section of the frame:
striking the spindle on a wooden base.
Fig. 242

2066-9001-200 / 0410 171
• Remove from the lower part of

frame:
– Gasket 1
– Rubber-metal cushion 2
Fig. 243
If necessary:
• remove bearing cover 2 with sealed
hex head screws, disk and cup
springs 3 from the lower part of the
frame.
Fig. 244
If necessary:
• Take out gasket 1.
Fig. 245

172 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.6.3 Dismantling the spindle assembly
Spindle assembly
Required tools:
– Pulling device
– Open ended wrench
– Pliers with outer snap jaws
Fig. 246
• Detach the bearing sleeve 1 from

the spindle.
Fig. 247

2066-9001-200 / 0410 173
• Pull off from the spindle:

– Angular contact ball bearing 2:
– Ball bearing protection ring 3
Fig. 248
• Remove the retaining ring.
Fig. 249
• Pull off from the spindle:

– Grooved ball bearing 1
– bearing cover 2
– bearing cover 3
Fig. 250

174 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.6.4 Dismantling the centrifugal clutch

• Take off cover 2.
Fig. 251
Fig. 252
• Pull the motor out of the flange

guide by means of the hoist (approx.
5 mm).
– Drive belt is slackened!
• Pull the drive belt off the clutch pul-

ATTENTION!
ley (centrifugal clutch) downwards.
Fig. 253

2066-9001-200 / 0410 175
• CAUTION: Danger to life when

• Lift the motor with fluid clutch out of

the lower section of the frame.
Fig. 254
• Turn the motor together with the

o
centrifugal clutch 90 (upside down)
with the aid of the hoist.
• CAUTION: Secure from rolling
away and overturning using suit-
able aids!
Fig. 255
• Undo retaining ring 1.

• Take off disk 2.
Fig. 256
• Pull the clutch shoes out of the

clutch driver.
Fig. 257

176 2066-9001-200 / 0410
• Arrest the clutch driver 1 with an

open-ended wrench.
• Unscrew hex head screw 2 from the
motor shaft end.
• Take off disk 3.
Fig. 258
Required special tool:

– Allen screw 2 (M 16 x 50)

open-ended wrench.
ATTENTION! For protecting the mo-
• Screw Allen screw 2 into the thread

tor shaft end:
of the motor shaft end.
Fig. 259
Required special tool:

– Eye bolt 1
– Socket wrench 3

• Screw eye bolt 1 into the clutch driv-
er.
• Arrest the clutch driver with an open-
ended wrench.
• Force the centrifugal clutch off the
motor shaft end by turning the eye
bolt clockwise.
Fig. 260
• Remove eye bolt 1 from the clutch

driver and cylindrical screw 2 from
the motor shaft end.
Fig. 261

2066-9001-200 / 0410 177

• Place the clutch pulley and clutch
driver on a wooden base using
transport ropes and hoist.
able aids!
• Take the retaining ring out of the
clutch driver groove.
Fig. 262
• Position wooden block.

• Drive the clutch driver downwards
by means of light hammer blows.
• Loosen the clutch driver from the
seat of the two ball bearings.
Fig. 263
• Turn the clutch pulley through 90

o
(opposite the fitting position) with the

aid of the hoist.

able aids!
• Take the retaining rings out of the

clutch drum grooves.
Fig. 264
Required tools
– Disk (Ø 86 – 94 mm)
– Wooden block
– Hammer
• Turn the clutch pulley through 180

o
• place it on wooden supports as

and
shown.
• Drive the grooved ball bearing and
spacer bush out of the clutch pulley.
Fig. 265

178 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.6.5 Fitting the spindle assembly


If necessary:
lower section of frame.
Fig. 266
If necessary:
ATTENTION: Pay attention to the

correct fitting position of the cup
• Fit bearing cover 1 (with sealed hex

springs 2!
head screws and washer) with cup

springs 2 and bolt tight with three
hex head screws 3.
Fig. 267

correct fitting position of the rub-
ber-metal cushion!
– The two opposite inner holes 2 of
the rubber-metal cushion must be
directed upwards.
• Fit rubber-metal cushion 1.
lower section of frame.
Fig. 268

2066-9001-200 / 0410 179
• Turn spindle through 180 (upside

o
down).

correct fitting position of the bear-
• Mount bearing covers 1 and 2.

ing cover!
• Heat grooved ball bearing 3 in oil up

o o
to 100 C (212 F) and slip it onto
the spindle.
• Insert retaining ring 4 in the spindle
groove.
Fig. 269
• Heat ball bearing protection ring 1

and angular contact ball bearings 2
o o
in oil up to 100 C (212 F).
ATTENTION: Bearing damage is

caused by incorrect fitting!
– When fitting angular contact ball
bearing 2 on the spindle, make sure
that the narrow rim of each ball
bearing inner ring faces upwards.
• Slide ball bearing protection ring 1
and angular contact ball bearings 2
onto the spindle.
Fig. 270
• Heat bearing sleeve 1 in oil up to

o o
100 C (212 F).
• Important! Before fitting bearing
sleeve 1, make sure that the in-
stalled angular contact ball bearing
has cooled down to room tempera-
ture.
• Slide bearing bush 1 over the angu-
lar contact ball bearing and the ball
bearing protection ring.
Fig. 271
• Install the assembled spindle as-

sembly 1 in the lower part of the
frame.
ing!

correct fitting position of the spin-
dle!
– The holes in the bearing cover must
be aligned with the holes in the low-
er section of the frame.
Fig. 272
• Bolt tight spindle with the three hex
head screws 2.

180 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.6.6 Fitting the centrifugal clutch

• Clean the clutch pulley.

• Insert retaining ring 1 in the lower
groove.
• Check that retaining ring 1 is cor-
rectly fitted. .
Fig. 273
Required tools:
– Disk 2 (Ø 86 – 94 mm)
– Wooden block
– Hammer

– Disk 2 may only contact the outer
ring of grooved ball bearing 1!
• Carefully drive the first grooved ball

bearing 1 with disk 2 up to the re-
taining ring.
Fig. 274

2066-9001-200 / 0410 181

– Distance bush 1 may only contact
the inner ring of grooved ball bear-
ing 2!
• Place distance bush on the ball

bearing inner ring.
Fig. 275

– Disk 2 may only contact the outer
ring of grooved ball bearing 1!
• Carefully drive the second grooved

ball bearing 1 with a suitable disk 2
up to the distance sleeve.
Fig. 276
CAUTION: Danger of imbalance by
• Insert retaining ring 2 180 offset

incorrect fitting!
o
relative to retaining ring 1 in the up-

per groove.
Fig. 277

182 2066-9001-200 / 0410
Required tool:
– Disk 1 (Ø 61 – 69 mm)

• Turn clutch pulley with fitted grooved

o
ball bearings through 180 .
Fig. 278
ATTENTION: Bearing damage is caused by incorrect fitting!

– Disk 1 may only contact the inner ring of the grooved ball bearing!
• Place the ball bearing inner ring on disk 1.

correct fitting position of the dis-
tance bush!
– Distance bush 1 must be flush with
the inner rings of the grooved ball
bearings.
Fig. 279
Required tools:
– Wooden block
– Rubber hammer
• Carefully hammer the clutch driver

into the grooved ball bearing with
light blows.
Fig. 280

2066-9001-200 / 0410 183
• Turn the clutch pulley through 180 .

o
• Fit the retaining ring in the groove of

the clutch driver.
Fig. 281

• Turn the motor through 90 with the
o
aid of the hoist.

able aids!
Fig. 282
Required tools:
– ring spanner 2
– Hex head screw 3 (M 10 x 200)
– Hexagon nut 4 (M 10)
• ATTENTION: Pay attention to the

feather key groove.
• Fit the assembled centrifugal clutch
on the motor shaft end.
open-ended wrench.
• Insert ring spanner 2 - as shown -
• Screw hex head screw 3 with hexa-

and
gon nut 4 into the motor shaft end.
Fig. 283

184 2066-9001-200 / 0410
• Pull the centrifugal clutch onto the

motor shaft end as far as it will go,
by turning hexagon nut 4 with a sec-
ond open-ended wrench.
Fig. 284
• Undo hex head screw 3 together
• detach ring spanner 2.

with hexagon nut 4 and
Fig. 285
With driver 1 arrested:

• Provide hex head screw 2
(M 12 x 60) with washer 3 and
thread it into the motor shaft end.
Fig. 286

– Be sure to replace all clutch shoes
simultaneously!
Never replace individual clutch
shoes.
– Make sure that the clutch shoes are
evenly spaced!
• Fit clutch shoes.
Fig. 287

2066-9001-200 / 0410 185
• Insert disk 2.
• Fit the retaining ring 1 in the groove
of the clutch driver.
Fig. 288

186 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.6.7 Fitting the motor
• Carefully place the motor with pre-

assembled centrifugal clutch on
lower section of frame by means of
a hoist.
– Do not yet let the motor flange
lock into the frame opening.
Fig. 289
• Remove the grease from the belt

ATTENTION:
contact surfaces of the spindle and

clutch drum.
• Fit the drive belt:
– through upper section of frame
opening 1 and
– through brake housing opening 2
• Pay attention to correct seating of

(centrifugal clutch).
the drive belt on clutch pulley and

spindle pulley.
Fig. 290
• Unscrew the screw plug 1 from the

lower part of the frame.
Fig. 291

2066-9001-200 / 0410 187
• ATTENTION: To avoid damage to

the grooved ball bearing:
– do not screw in hex head screw 1
all the way.
• Screw hex head screw 1
(M 10 x 200) with hexagon nut 2 and
washer 3 through the frame bore in-
to the taphole of the centrifugal
clutch.
• Tension the drive belt by turning hex
head nut 2 clockwise until the mo-
tor flange locks into the frame open-
Fig. 292 ing.
• Fasten the motor with four hex head

screws 2 (M 12 x 30).
• Unscrew hex head screw 1 (with

hexagon nut and washer) from the
centrifugal clutch.
Fig. 293
• Screw in the screw plug 1.

Fig. 294
Note:
Due to the design concept used, the spindle is at an inclined angle relative to
the opposite side of the motor when the drive belt has not been fitted or ten-
sioned (see Fig. 295, pos. 2).
The spindle is pulled into the centric axis when the belt is tensioned (see Fig.
295, pos 1)!

188 2066-9001-200 / 0410
• Check
– that the spindle 1 can be turned
easily.
– whether the spindle 3 has been
pulled into the centric axis by
tensioning the drive belt 3 (see
Fig. 198.
Fig. 295 Example of a spindle
Installing the speed monitoring de-

vice:
• Place speed monitoring device 2 on
• fasten with hex head screw 1.

the lower section of frame and
Fig. 296
• Align proximity switch 1 as illustrat-

ed.
ATTENTION!
The distance X between the spindle
and the proximity switch must be 2.5
mm.
Fig. 297
• Insert protective cap 3 with fitted
• bolt tight with four hex head screws

gasket 4 and ring 2 and
1 (M 8 x 12).
Fig. 298

2066-9001-200 / 0410 189
• Place spindle cap 1 with fitted gas-

ket on the spindle.
ing!
Fig. 299
Fitting the operating water feeding

device in the upper section of
• Slide nut 2 over pipe 3.

frame:
• Fit pipe with nit into the screwed

connection 1 and slide on as far as it
will go.
ATTENTION: The narrow end of the

pipe must be directed upwards!
• Tighten nut 2 firmly.

Fig. 300
• Fit cover 2 to the lower section of

the frame with three hex head
screws 1 (M 8 x 20).
Fig. 301
• Screw in oil drain screw 1 with fitted

gasket.
• Screw in the sight glass 2.
• Fill in oil as described in section
• Screw in plug 3 with gasket.

4.3.3 and
Fig. 302

190 2066-9001-200 / 0410
• Have the motor connected by an authorized electrician!

Danger to life and limb through electric current!

2066-9001-200 / 0410 191
4.7 Height adjustment
• bowl height
For reasons of operating reliability, adjustment of
• and centripetal pump play

must be performed with particular care.
4.7.1 Bowl height
ATTENTION: The bowl height must not be adjusted on this separator!

The bowl height may only be measured with fitted and tightened drive
belt!
A bowl height check is necessary, e. g.
– after replacing the drive parts,
– after fitting another bowl,
– after fitting a different centripetal pump,
– as soon as the centripetal pump exhibits grinding marks.
CAUTION:
• Tighten the bowl top firmly.

– The O marks of the bowl bottom
and the bowl top must be aligned.
Fig. 303
The control dimension A

– is 51.5 ±2 mm
– between upper edge of bowl top and
upper section of frame.
Fig. 304
If it does prove necessary to readjust the bowl height, consult the factory.

192 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.7.2 Centripetal pump clearance
• Move the centripetal pump axially to

and fro in the centripetal pump
chamber:
– Measure the total clearance A
(approx. 10).
• Close the hood.
• Check:
– Is the hood correctly seated on
the frame rim?
– Are the hood screws tightened
firmly?
Fig. 305
• Lightly apply a thin coat of lubricant

to the threads of the centripetal
pump as specified in the lubrication
schedule.
• Fit handle connection piece 1 into
the centripetal pump.
• hold the centripetal pump with offset
screwdriver 2.
• Screw handle connection piece into
the centripetal pump as far as it will
go (left-hand thread).
Fig. 306
• Hold the handle connection piece 1.

• Turn the offset screwdriver 2 until
the handle connection piece is
raised slightly from the hood (ap-
prox. 0.5 mm).
Fig. 307

2066-9001-200 / 0410 193
• Raise the handle connection piece

to its maximum.
• Measure the axial clearance.
A/2 = 4 – 6 mm
Fig. 308

194 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.8 Final checks after assembling the separator
Before starting the separator

Perform the following checks after assembling and before starting the separator
depending on the scope of the repair work:
Checks Section
1. Bowl height 4.7.1
2. Oil level in drive chamber 4.3.3
3. Direction of rotation of the bowl 4.1.4
4. Bowl speed 4.1.5
5. Starting time of bowl / current consumption 4.1.5
6. Running characteristics of the separator 3.8.1
7. Suction line of the product pump (if installed) for leakage
When starting the separator

Perform the following checks after carrying out repairs:
Checks Section
1. Temperature of product
2. Observe discharges for water, solids and oil to see if the 3.3
bowl is operating correctly.
4.9 Before a long-term shut-down of the separator

• Disconnect all electrical connections.
• Thoroughly clean the separator (see section 4.4.2, 4.4.3 and 4.4.4).
• Dry and grease the clean bowl parts and all unvarnished machine parts to
avoid corrosion damage.
• Store the clean, greased bowl in a dry place until reuse.
• Store the gaskets in a cool, dry, dust-free dark room to prevent them from be-
coming brittle.
• Check if the shut-off valves for water leak.
• If necessary, disconnect the water lines to prevent damage by dripping water.
4.9.1 Preserving the separator

• Drain the lube oil completely.
Observe the local regulations on disposal of the lubricating oil.
• Fill the drive chamber with a slushing oil, e.g. Shell oil S.7294 (SAE 30/SAE
50), to the middle of the sight glass.
• Let the separator run without bowl for approx. 1 minute to make sure that all
drive parts are coated with slushing oil.

2066-9001-200 / 0410 195
CAUTION!
• Keep a safe distance away from the rotating spindle.

Risk of injury through rotating separator parts.
• After switching off the separator, wait until the spindle has stopped rotating.
• Take off the drive belt.
4.9.2 Preserving the motor

• Follow the instructions of the motor manufacturer.

196 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.10 Storage
ATTENTION!
Improper and incorrect storage of the separator and control unit can dam-
age or destroy their components.
Store accessories like spare parts, tools, lubricants properly!
Note:
Gaskets, hoses and hosepipes, for example, change their physical properties in
unfavourable storage conditions. This can result in a shorter service life. They
can be rendered useless due to excessive hardening, softening, permanent de-
formation, flaking, cracks or other surface damage.

IMPORTANT:
4.10.1 After delivery
• store the separator and control unit in the original transport packaging.
If the separator and control unit are not installed immediately after delivery,
Recommended storage temperature: + 5 to +50 °C (41 – 122 °F)
IMPORTANT:
A storage time of more than 12 months of the separator and control unit is only
possible after consulting the manufacturer.
4.10.2 Separator
The following procedure applies
– for storing the separator before commissioning and
– for storing the separator before a prolonged standstill period.
• Store the separator with dismantled bowl!

IMPORTANT:
• Store the clean, greased bowl in a dry place.

• Store the gaskets in a cool, dry, frost-free, dust-free dark room to prevent
them from becoming brittle.
Recommended storage temperature: + 5 to +50 °C (41 - 122 °F)
• The separator with dismantled bowl must be stored dry and free from vibra-
tions.
(Vibrations during standstill can cause bearing damage!).
• Protect the drive spindle and motor from dust.
• Store all other separator parts dry and frost-free.
4.10.3 Control system

• The control unit and accessories must be stored dry, dust-free, vibration and
frost-free.
• Protect from excessive heat!

2066-9001-200 / 0410 197
Recommended storage temperature: + 5 to + 45 °C (41 – 113 °F)
4.11 Before restarting
Before re-starting, the operator must ensure

• that all separators and plant components have been function-checked
by competent personnel (qualified specialists).
• that the maintenance intervals are adhered to.
• that the separator is assembled correctly by competent persons.
Note:
If the bowl has been out of operation for longer than 6 months (e.g. due to a
• check all bowl parts as specified in the maintenance schedule (table “Mainte-
long standstill period or storage),
nance after 4000 operating hours or after 6 months at the latest”).
If the separator has been out of operation for longer than 12 months (e.g. due
• check all separator parts in accordance with the maintenance schedule (table
to a long standstill period or storage),
“Maintenance after 8000 operating hours or after 1 year at the latest).
Procedure:
• Drain the slushing oil.
Observe the local regulations on disposal of the slushing oil.
• Remove the grease from all unpainted machine parts.
• Check gaskets.
Replace damaged, very swollen, hardened or brittle gaskets immediately.
• Assemble the bowl (see section 4.4.7).
• Check the ball bearings of the spindle and centrifugal clutch (if applicable).
When damaged, replace the ball bearings immediately !
• Fit drive belt (see section 4.6.5 or 4.6.7).

When damaged, replace the drive belt immediately !
• Assemble the separator correctly.

• Fill the drive chamber with the specified lube oil as specified in section 4.3.3.

198 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.12 Disposal
When the equipment is no more useful or the separator has reached the end of
its service life, the operator is responsible for appropriate, environmentally
friendly disposal of its components and materials such as
– metal,
– caoutchouc and rubber
– plastics,
– glass,
– gear and lube oils on a mineral-oil basis,
– synthetic gear and lube oils,
– cleaning liquids,
– electric and electronic apparatus.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION!
Be sure to adhere to applicable environment-protection legislation!
More information on disposal matters can be obtained from local authorities.
4.12.1 Gear and lubricating oils
Replacement and disposal of waste

oils recovered during the oil changes
and maintenance work must be carried
• Collect dripping oil to prevent danger

out carefully.
• They can be injurious to health,

of slipping or product infection.
depending on their chemical compo-
• Waste oil must be disposed of in

sition.
accordance with local regulations.
Note:
Fig. 309
Special attention must be paid to
the directive issued by the operator
on handling waste oils and the local
regulations.

2066-9001-200 / 0410 199
4.12.2 Cleaning liquids

Only those cleaning agents may be used that are specified in the overall docu-
mentation (see data sheet).
CAUTION: Danger of chemical burns!

The cleaning agents can be acids and caustics which, if used carelessly,
can cause severe damage to persons.
Note:
Pay particular attention to the directive issued by the operator on handling the
cleaning agents used and the local disposal regulations.
4.12.3 Separator
Before disposing of the separator
• Drain the gear oil and dispose of it properly in accordance with section 4.12.1.
• Dismantle the separator, remove any lubricant sticking to separator parts and
dispose of them separately or recycle them where appropriate.

200 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.13 Standard tools

are commercially available tools to be supplied by the customer.
Fig. 310

2066-9001-200 / 0410 201
Pos. Designation
1 Screwdriver
2 Torque wrench (0 - 100 Nm)
with inserts and extension
3 Caliper gauge
4 Electric oil heater for ball bearings
5 Ratchet
6 Standard hammer and mallet
7 Inner snap pliers with offset jaws
(Ø 40 mm)
8 Outer snap pliers (Ø 35 mm)
9 Hand tachometer
10 Wrench, adjustable
11 Brushes
12 Puller (200 x 200 mm (H x W))
13 Open-ended wrench (jaw widths: 17, 19, 32, 55 mm)
14 Wooden blocks
15 Drill
16 Drill bit (Ø 2 mm)
17 Wooden screws (max. Ø 4 mm x 50 mm length)

202 2066-9001-200 / 0410
4.14 Special tools
Fig. 311

2066-9001-200 / 0410 203
• Special tools are provided by the manufacturer.

• For the delivery of special tools, the packing list supplied with the sepa-
rator is applicable.
Pos. Designation
10 Ring spanner, complete (bowl / centrifugal clutch))
20 Socket wrench (bowl)
30 Assembling device, complete (closing chamber bottom / annular pis-

ton)
40 Bell-shaped piece (bowl)
50 Double hook wrench (centripetal pump chamber lock ring)
60 Eye bolt, complete (bowl / centrifugal clutch))
70 Allen screw M 10 x 20 (centrifugal clutch)
80 Double nipple (transporting the separator)
90 Offset screwdriver (centripetal pump)
110 Hexagon nut M 10 (centrifugal clutch)
120 Disk (centrifugal clutch)
130 Hex head screw M 10 x 200 (centrifugal clutch)
140 Hex head screw M 10 x 100 (hood)
150 Assembly disk (bowl)
160 Disk (centrifugal clutch)

204 2066-9001-200 / 0410
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

2066-9001-200 / 0410 205
5 Spare parts
5.1 Spare part requirements ...................................................................... 206

5.2 Guide to ordering spare parts .............................................................. 206

206 2066-9001-200 / 0410
5.1 Spare part requirements

Separator. The original spare parts are listed
in the spare parts catalog.
– safety risks,
for the responsible persons. In such cases,
ranty claims.
5.2 Guide to ordering spare parts

A rapid and correct supply of spare parts can only be guaranteed if your order
includes the following details:
• Separator model see name-plate

e.g. OSE 5-91-037
• Serial-No. see name-plate

e.g. 9000-223
• Designation see order-specific parts catalog

e.g. frame
• Part Number see order-specific parts catalog

e.g. 2050-1100-020
The part number is also marked on almost all the
individual parts.
Only when ordering spare parts for bowls:

• Bowl S/N If this differs from the serial number.
The bowl serial number is engraved on the bowl
lock ring, bowl bottom and bowl top.
Only required when ordering spare parts for pump and pump connection parts:
• Model and number of see pump nameplate

pump
The information provided must be complete to avoid incorrect deliveries.
Available sets of spare parts

The following sets of spare parts are available depending on the respective
technical maintenance intervals:
– Set of spare parts “bowl and hood” for operation of 1 year or 8000 hours
– Set of spare parts “Drive” for operation of 1 year or 8000 hours
– Set of spare parts “Drive” for operation of 2 years or 16,000 hours
The maintenance schedule forms the systematic maintenance basis for the use
of these sets of spare parts.

2066-9001-200 / 0410 207
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

208 2066-9001-200 / 0410
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

2066-9001-200 / 0410 209

GEA Westfalia Separator GmbH
Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
Ersatzteilkatalog / Spare Parts Catalog
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4
Maschinen-Nr. / Serial number of machine

9074-969
Trommel-Nr. / Serial number of bowl

9074-969
Auftrags-Nr. / Order number

1941321099_22
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016

Werner-Habig-Str. 1, D 59302 Oelde
Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
www.gea.com
ETS Ersatzteilschlüssel / Spare part code
Teil oder Baugruppe lieferbar

Part or assembly available
Teil oder Baugruppe bedingt lieferbar. Rücksprache mit dem Herstellerwerk nehmen.
Part or assembly available to a limited extent. Contact manufacturer.
Teil oder Baugruppe in dieser Fertigungsstufe nicht lieferbar.

Part or assembly not available in this manufacturing stage.
3/52
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
1941321099 SEPARATOR OSE 5-91-037_ 4 5
1941321099_22 SEPARATOR
SEPARATOR OSE 5-91-037_ 4 CENTRIFUGA
SEPARATOR
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n

9074-969
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n

9074-969
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
4/52 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
5/52
9987-0360-141 SEPARATOR OSE 5-91-037_ 4
1941321099 SEPARATOR
0001 2066-0001-000 1 SEPARATOR VOLLST. 7
SEPARATOR
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
SEPARADOR, COMP.
7825 5289-7825-199 1 DREHSTROMMOTOR 33
THREE-PHASE AC MOTOR
MOTOR TRIFÁSICO
9928 2058-9928-060 1 SATZ BORDVERSCHRAUBUNGEN 35
SET OF SHIPBOARD SCREW COUPLINGS
JUEGO RACORES DE TIPO MARINO
3532 0024-3532-010 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
9901 2066-9901-000 1 SATZ WERKZEUGE U.ZUBEHOERTEILE 37
SET OF TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES
JUEGO HERRAMIENTAS Y ACCESORIOS
9769 2066-9769-010 1 SATZ INBETRIEBNAHMETEILE 40
Typ / Model SET OF COMMISSIONING EQUIPMENT
JUEGO PZAS. PUESTA EN FUNCIONAMIENTO
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 9902 2066-9902-510 1 SATZ ERSATZTEILE F. 1 JAHR 42
SET OF SPARE PARTS FOR 1 YEAR
JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE REPUESTO PARA 1 AÑO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 9902 2066-9902-530 1 SATZ ERSATZTEILE F. 2 JAHRE 49
SET OF SPARE PARTS FOR 2 YEARS
9074-969 JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE REPUESTO PARA 2 AÑOS
9601 2058-9601-020 1 INSTALLATIONSRICHTLINIEN EN
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS EN
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n NORMATIVAS DE INSTALACIÓN EN
9001 2066-9001-200 1 BETRIEBSANLEITUNG EN
9074-969 INSTRUCTION MANUAL EN
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES EN
9201 8555-9201-010 1 EINSTELLWERTE U. BETRIEBSSTOERUNGEN EN
Ausgabe / Edition ADJUSTMENT VALUES AND FAULT SIGNALS EN
VALORES AJUSTE Y ANOMALÍAS SERVICIO EN
10.03.2016 9101 2023-9101-000 1 WARTUNGSPLAN U. ERSATZTEILLISTE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE AND PARTS LIST
PLAN MANTEN. Y LISTA PZAS. REPUESTO
Seite/Page
7/52
8/52
9/52
10/52
10 2066-1001-000 1 GESTELLUNTERTEIL
2066-0001-000 LOWER SECTION OF FRAME
SEPARATOR VOLLST. PARTE INFERIOR DEL BASTIDOR
30 0019-6970-400 4 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
35 0026-1371-400 4 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
40 0000-0006-162 1 ENTFAELLT
NOT APPLICABLE
SE SUPRIME
50 2058-3385-010 1 FLIEHKRAFTKUPPLUNG VOLLST. 18
CENTRIFUGAL CLUTCH, COMPL.
EMBRAGUE CENTRÍFUGO, COMP.
60 0026-2418-400 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
Typ / Model HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 2057-3367-000 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0026-6011-170 1 SICHERUNGSRING
SECURING RING
9074-969 ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
100 2058-1015-000 4 FUSS VOLLST. 20
FOOT, COMPL.
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n PIE, COMP.
110 0018-7614-000 1 MAGNETVENTILBLOCK VOLLST. 22
9074-969 SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY, COMPL.
BLOQUE DE ELECTROVÁLVULA, COMP.
120 0018-7943-000 1 NIEDERDRUCKSCHLAUCH VOLLST.
Ausgabe / Edition LOW PRESSURE HOSE, COMPL.
TUBO FLEXIBLE DE BAJA PRESIÓN, COMP.
10.03.2016 130 0018-8012-000 1 NIEDERDRUCKSCHLAUCH VOLLST.
LOW PRESSURE HOSE, COMPL.
Seite/Page
140 0018-3817-300 2 SCHLAUCHSCHELLE
2066-0001-000 HOSE CLIP
SEPARATOR VOLLST. ABRAZADERA DE MANGUERA
150 0018-8262-710 1 SCHLAUCH
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
HOSE
MANGUERA
160 0005-4485-930 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
170 0011-8060-000 1 GELENKLAGER
SPHERICAL PLAIN BEARING
COJINETE ARTICULADO
190 0026-5841-170 1 SICHERUNGSRING
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
200 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
210 2065-3375-000 1 LAGERDECKEL
Typ / Model BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 225 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 230 0019-6933-300 6 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
HEX HEAD SCREW
9074-969 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
240 0005-0868-000 1 NAEHERUNGSINITIATOR
PROXIMITY SWITCH
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n INICIADOR DE APROXIMACIÓN
250 2065-1145-000 1 HALTER
9074-969 HOLDER
SOPORTE
260 0005-1601-700 1 KABELDURCHFUEHRUNGSTUELLE
Ausgabe / Edition CABLE SLEEVE
TUBO DE PROTECCIÓN PARA CABLES
10.03.2016 270 0019-6105-400 2 ZYLINDERSCHRAUBE
ALLEN SCREW
TORNILLO CILÍNDRICO
290 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
RUBBER-METAL BUSH
CASQUILLO ELASTO-METÁLICO
Seite/Page
300 0007-2566-390 1 DICHTRING
2066-0001-000 GASKET
SEPARATOR VOLLST. JUNTA ANULAR
310 2066-1066-000 1 SCHUTZKAPPE
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
PROTECTIVE CAP
TAPA PROTECTORA
320 2058-1089-000 1 RING
RING
ANILLO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
340 2066-3266-000 1 SPINDELKAPPE
SPINDLE CAP
CAPERUZA DEL EJE
350 0007-2730-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
360 0018-3215-030 1 STUTZEN
Typ / Model CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 370 0018-2477-030 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 380 2066-1464-000 1 ROHRSTUECK
LENGTH OF PIPE
9074-969 EMPALME DE TUBOS
390 0019-7625-400 3 STIFTSCHRAUBE
STUD BOLT
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n PRISIONERO
400 0026-1369-300 3 SCHEIBE
9074-969 WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
410 0013-0279-400 3 SECHSKANTMUTTER
Ausgabe / Edition HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
10.03.2016 420 2058-1061-010 1 DECKEL
COVER
TAPA
430 0001-1457-800 2 SCHAUGLAS
SIGHT GLASS
MIRILLA
Seite/Page
440 0019-8899-030 1 VERSCHLUSSSCHRAUBE
2066-0001-000 SCREW PLUG
SEPARATOR VOLLST. TORNILLO DE TOPE
450 0007-1796-550 1 DICHTRING
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
460 0019-1442-900 1 GEWINDESTOPFEN
THREADED PLUG
TAPÓN ROSCADO
565 0007-1780-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
580 0007-2733-600 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
600 2066-6600-510 1 TROMMEL VOLLST. 24
BOWL, COMPL.
TAMBOR, COMP.
700 0007-2932-750 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 710 2066-6464-000 1 GEWINDERING
THREADED RING
ANILLO ROSCADO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 800 2066-2241-000 1 GREIFER VOLLST.
CENTRIPETAL PUMP, COMPL.
9074-969 PINZA, COMP.
801 0007-1936-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n JUNTA ANULAR
802 2168-2337-020 1 STEUERGREIFER
9074-969 SENSING LIQUID PUMP
RODETE DE MANDO
803 0007-1904-750 2 DICHTRING
Ausgabe / Edition GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
10.03.2016 810 2066-8808-000 1 HAUBE
HOOD
CAPÓ
820 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
830 2171-2191-020 1 GRIFFKOERPER
2066-0001-000 HANDLE CONNECTION PIECE
SEPARATOR VOLLST. CUERPO DE LA EMPUÑADURA
840 0013-1006-600 1 UEBERWURFMUTTER
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
COUPLING NUT
TUERCA DE RACOR
850 2058-8839-000 1 RUECKSCHLAGVENTIL
NON-RETURN VALVE
VÁLVULA DE RETENCIÓN
860 0018-6676-030 3 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
870 2066-8829-000 1 SATZ BLENDEN
SET OF ORIFICE PLATES
JUEGO DE PLACAS PERFORADAS
2066-8473-010 2 BLENDE
ORIFICE PLATE
PLACA PERFORADA
2066-8473-020 2 BLENDE
Typ / Model ORIFICE PLATE
PLACA PERFORADA
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 2066-8473-030 2 BLENDE
ORIFICE PLATE
PLACA PERFORADA
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 2066-8473-040 2 BLENDE
ORIFICE PLATE
9074-969 PLACA PERFORADA
2066-8473-050 2 BLENDE
ORIFICE PLATE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n PLACA PERFORADA
2066-8473-060 2 BLENDE
9074-969 ORIFICE PLATE
PLACA PERFORADA
880 0018-6820-100 2 WELLROHRSCHLAUCH VOLLST.
Ausgabe / Edition CORRUGATED TUBE, COMPL.
TUBO FLEXIBLE ONDULADO, COMP.
10.03.2016 0007-2871-830 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
890 0018-5907-000 1 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
Seite/Page
900 0018-6282-600 1 RUECKSCHLAGVENTIL VOLLST.
2066-0001-000 NON-RETURN VALVE, COMPL.
SEPARATOR VOLLST. VÁLVULA DE RETENCIÓN, COMP.
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
HOSE CLIP
ABRAZADERA DE MANGUERA
930 0018-6744-710 1 SCHLAUCH
HOSE
MANGUERA
940 0001-1572-600 1 DRUCKMESSGERAET
PRESSURE GAUGE
TRANSDUCTOR DE PRESIÓN
950 2058-8846-000 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG M.BLENDE
SCREW COUPLING WITH ORIFICE PLATE
UNIÓN ROSCADA CON PLACA PERFORADA
960 0018-6620-030 1 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
970 0005-1529-300 2 DRUCKTRANSMITTER
Typ / Model PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
TRANSMISOR DE PRESIÓN
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 980 0005-1539-280 1 KLEMMENKASTEN
TERMINAL BOX
CAJA DE BORNES
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 990 0019-6110-300 2 ZYLINDERSCHRAUBE
ALLEN SCREW
9074-969 TORNILLO CILÍNDRICO
1000 2066-3060-000 1 SATZ ANTRIEBSTEILE 29
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE ACCIONAMIENTO
1010 0024-4382-010 1 SATZ SCHILDER
9074-969 SET OF PLATES
JUEGO DE RÓTULOS
0024-6327-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
Ausgabe / Edition ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
10.03.2016 0024-6326-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-6426-000 1 SCHILD
PLATE
RÓTULO
Seite/Page
0024-5220-000 1 ABZIEHBILD _PFEIL
2066-0001-000 DECAL _ARROW
SEPARATOR VOLLST. CALCOMANÍA DE «FLECHA»
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-3500-010 1 TYPENSCHILD
TYPE PLATE
PLACA DE CARACTERÍSTICAS
0026-1571-300 4 KERBNAGEL
Typ / Model NOTCHED NAIL
REMACHE ESTRIADO
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 0024-6580-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 0024-5380-000 1 SCHILD
PLATE
9074-969 RÓTULO
2000 0005-1740-808 0.2 m SCHUTZSCHLAUCH
PROTECTIVE HOSE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n MANGUERA PROTECTORA
9074-969 PROTECTIVE HOSE
MANGUERA PROTECTORA
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
18/52
10 2058-3365-000 1 KUPPLUNGSSCHEIBE
2058-3385-010 CLUTCH PULLEY
FLIEHKRAFTKUPPLUNG VOLLST. DISCO DEL EMBRAGUE
20 0011-6012-680 2 RILLENKUGELLAGER
GROOVED BALL BEARING
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
30 0026-2501-400 1 ABSTANDSBUCHSE
DISTANCE SLEEVE
CASQUILLO DE SEPARACIÓN
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
50 2058-3483-000 1 MITNEHMERSCHEIBE MHPA
DRIVER, BALANCED WITH HALF KEY
DISCO ARRASTRADOR EQUILIBRADA CMCH
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-969

9074-969
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
20/52
10 2058-1467-000 4 PLATTE
2058-1015-000 PLATE
FUSS VOLLST. PLACA
20 0021-3308-750 4 MASCHINENFUSS
FOOT, COMPL.
MACHINE FOOT
PIE DE MAQUINA
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-969

9074-969
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
22/52
10 0018-7614-920 1 DRUCKREGLER
0018-7614-000 PRESSURE REGULATOR
MAGNETVENTILBLOCK VOLLST. REGULADOR DE PRESIÓN
20 0018-1763-630 1 KUGELHAHN
SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY, COMPL.
BALL VALVE
VÁLVULA DE BOLA
0018-1763-280 1 GRIFF
HANDLEGRIP
EMPUÑADURA
25 0018-6419-030 2 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
PRESSURE GAUGE
40 0018-7614-900 1 FILTEREINSATZ
FILTER INSERT
CARTUCHO DE FILTRO
70 0018-6654-010 2 MAGNETSPULE
Typ / Model SOLENOID
BOBINA MAGNÉTICA
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 0018-6654-040 2 GEHAEUSE
HOUSING
CARCASA
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0018-5947-820 2 MEMBRANE
DIAPHRAGM
9074-969 MEMBRANA
100 0018-7614-930 2 MAGNETKERN
SOLENOID CORE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n NÚCLEO MAGNÉTICO
110 0018-5118-040 2 GERAETESTECKDOSE
9074-969 COUPLER SOCKET
CONECTOR HEMBRA
130 0018-7614-910 1 SCHLAUCH
Ausgabe / Edition HOSE
MANGUERA
10.03.2016 140 0018-6654-030 1 SATZ DICHTUNGEN
SET OF GASKETS
JUEGO DE JUNTAS
150 0019-6131-300 2 ZYLINDERSCHRAUBE
ALLEN SCREW
Seite/Page
24/52
245 2066-6600-508 1 TROMMEL VORMONTIERT 26
2066-6600-510 BOWL, PRE-ASSEMBLED
TROMMEL VOLLST. TAMBOR PREMONTADO
250 0007-1987-750 1 DICHTRING
BOWL, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
260 0007-1861-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
280 2058-6642-030 1 GREIFERKAMMERDECKEL
CENTRIPETAL PUMP CHAMBER COVER
TAPA DE LA CÁMARA DEL RODETE
290 2066-6691-000 1 SATZ REGULIERSCHEIBEN
SET OF REGULATING RINGS
JUEGO DE DIAFRAGMAS
2059-6726-100 1 REGULIERSCHEIBE
REGULATING RING
DIAFRAGMA DE REGULACIÓN
Typ / Model REGULATING RING
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 2059-6726-150 1 REGULIERSCHEIBE
REGULATING RING
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 2059-6726-160 1 REGULIERSCHEIBE
REGULATING RING
9074-969 DIAFRAGMA DE REGULACIÓN
REGULATING RING
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n DIAFRAGMA DE REGULACIÓN
9074-969 REGULATING RING
300 0007-1997-750 1 DICHTRING
JUNTA ANULAR
10.03.2016 310 2146-6642-010 1 GREIFERKAMMERDECKEL
Seite/Page
26/52
20 0007-2868-750 1 DICHTRING
2066-6600-508 GASKET
TROMMEL VORMONTIERT JUNTA ANULAR
30 2066-6687-000 1 SCHEIBE
BOWL, PRE-ASSEMBLED
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
50 0007-3364-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-2069-720 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 2066-6503-000 1 RINGKOLBEN
ANNULAR PISTON
PISTÓN ANULAR
80 0007-3314-760 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 90 2066-6426-000 1 SCHLIESSKAMMERBODEN
CLOSING CHAMBER BOTTOM
FONDO DE LA CÁMARA DE CIERRE
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 100 0004-3274-810 1 KOLBENFUEHRUNGSRING
PISTON GUIDE RING
9074-969 ANILLO DE GUÍA DE PISTÓN
110 0007-3313-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
120 0007-3678-760 1 DICHTRING
9074-969 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
130 2066-6501-000 1 KOLBENSCHIEBER
Ausgabe / Edition SLIDING PISTON
VÁLVULA DE MANGUITO
10.03.2016 140 0007-3690-840 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
150 2066-6629-010 1 VERTEILERFUSS
DISTRIBUTOR BASE
BASE DEL DISTRIBUIDOR
Seite/Page
160 0007-2927-750 1 DICHTRING
2066-6600-508 GASKET
170 0007-3541-750 1 DICHTRING
BOWL, PRE-ASSEMBLED
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
180 0007-2555-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
190 2066-6611-000 1 TROMMELDECKEL
BOWL TOP
TAPA DEL TAMBOR
200 2066-6663-000 68 TELLER VOLLST.
DISC, COMPL.
PLATO, COMP.
210 2066-6666-010 2 ABSCHLUSSTELLER
BLIND DISC
PLATO DE CIERRE
Typ / Model BLIND DISC
PLATO DE CIERRE
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 230 0019-6324-400 2 GEWINDESTIFT
THREADED PIN
PRISIONERO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 240 0007-1988-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
9074-969 JUNTA ANULAR
270 2168-6631-020 1 VERSCHLUSSRING
LOCK RING
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n ANILLO DE CIERRE
9074-969
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
29/52
10 2066-3429-010 1 SPINDEL VOLLST. 31
2066-3060-000 SPINDLE, COMPL.
SATZ ANTRIEBSTEILE HUSILLO, COMP.
20 0021-3822-900 1 ANTRIEBSRIEMEN
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
DRIVE BELT
CORREA DE TRANSMISIÓN
30 0021-3293-870 2 KUPPLUNGSKLOTZ
CLUTCH SHOE
ZAPATA DEL EMBRAGUE
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-969

9074-969
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
31/52
10 2066-3410-010 1 SPINDEL
2066-3429-010 SPINDLE
SPINDEL VOLLST. HUSILLO
20 2058-3375-000 1 LAGERDECKEL
SPINDLE, COMPL.
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
30 2058-3375-010 1 LAGERDECKEL
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
60 0008-2008-000 1 KUGELLAGERSCHLUSSRING
BALL BEARING PROTECTION RING
ARO PROTECTOR DE RODAMIENTO DE BOLAS
70 0011-7304-250 1 SCHRAEGKUGELLAGER
Typ / Model ANGULAR CONTACT BALL BEARING
BOLAS DE CONTACTO ANGULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 0010-5205-010 1 LAGERHUELSE
BEARING SLEEVE
MANGUITO DE COJINETE
9074-969

9074-969
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
33/52
10 0005-4863-000 1 FLANSCH
5289-7825-199 FLANGE
DREHSTROMMOTOR BRIDA
20 0005-4863-010 1 LAGERSCHILD
END SHIELD
PLATO DE COJINETE
30 0005-4863-020 1 LUEFTER
FAN
VENTILADOR
40 0005-4863-030 1 LUEFTERHAUBE
FAN COVER
TOBERA DEL VENTILADOR
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-969

9074-969
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
35/52
10 0005-4487-930 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
2058-9928-060 SCREW COUPLING
SATZ BORDVERSCHRAUBUNGEN RACOR
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-969

9074-969
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
37/52
10 2066-9943-000 1 RINGSCHLUESSEL VOLLST.
2066-9901-000 ANNULAR WRENCH, COMPL.
SATZ WERKZEUGE U.ZUBEHOERTEILE LLAVE ANULAR, COMP.
20 2066-9894-000 1 STECKSCHLUESSEL
SOCKET WRENCH
LLAVE DE TUBO
30 2066-9860-000 1 MONTAGEVORRICHTUNG VOLLST.
MOUNTING TOOL, COMPL.
DISPOSITIVO DE MONTAJE, COMP.
40 2066-9822-000 1 GLOCKE
BELL-SHAPED PIECE
CAMPANA
50 0003-3685-000 1 DOPPEL-HAKENSCHLUESSEL VOLLST.
DOUBLE HOOK WRENCH, COMPL.
LLAVE DE DOBLE GANCHO, COMP.
0026-1558-300 1 KERBSTIFT
NOTCHED PIN
PASADOR ESTRIADO
0026-1671-300 1 KERBSTIFT
Typ / Model NOTCHED PIN
PASADOR ESTRIADO
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 60 2064-9982-000 1 RINGSCHRAUBE VOLLST.
EYE BOLT, COMPL.
ANILLA, COMP.
ALLEN SCREW
80 0018-2916-050 1 DOPPELNIPPEL
DOUBLE NIPPLE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n BOQUILLA DOBLE
90 0003-3796-320 1 WINKELSCHRAUBENDREHER
9074-969 OFFSET SCREWDRIVER
DESTORNILLADOR ACODADO
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
10.03.2016 120 0026-0356-300 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
Seite/Page
2066-9901-000 HEX HEAD SCREW
SATZ WERKZEUGE U.ZUBEHOERTEILE TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
150 2066-9939-000 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
160 2058-9939-000 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-969

9074-969
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
40/52
10 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
2066-9769-010 GASKET
SATZ INBETRIEBNAHMETEILE JUNTA ANULAR
20 0007-1904-750 2 DICHTRING
SET OF COMMISSIONING EQUIPMENT
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 0007-1997-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
40 0007-1936-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
50 0007-1861-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-1987-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 0007-1988-750 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 0007-2932-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0015-0003-080 1 SCHMIEROEL
LUBRICATING OIL
9074-969 ACEITE LUBRICANTE
DRIVE BELT
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n CORREA DE TRANSMISIÓN
110 0015-0082-000 1 SCHMIERFETT
9074-969 LUBRICATING GREASE
GRASA LUBRICANTE
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
42/52
10 2066-9902-000 1 SATZ ERSATZTEILE TROMMEL _ HAUBE 44
2066-9902-510 SET OF SPARE PARTS BOWL _ HOOD
SATZ ERSATZTEILE F. 1 JAHR JUEGO PIEZAS REPUESTO TAMBOR_CAPÓ
20 2066-9902-020 1 SATZ ERSATZTEILE ANTRIEB 47
SET OF SPARE PARTS FOR DRIVE
JUEGO PIEZAS RECAMBIO ACCIONAMIENTO
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-969

9074-969
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
44/52
30 0007-1904-750 4 DICHTRING
2066-9902-000 GASKET
SATZ ERSATZTEILE TROMMEL _ HAUBE JUNTA ANULAR
40 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
SET OF SPARE PARTS BOWL _ HOOD
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-3690-840 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
300 0007-2566-390 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
350 0007-2730-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
480 0007-2868-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
510 0007-3364-760 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 520 0007-2069-720 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
GASKET
560 0004-3274-810 1 KOLBENFUEHRUNGSRING
PISTON GUIDE RING
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n ANILLO DE GUÍA DE PISTÓN
565 0007-1780-750 4 DICHTRING
9074-969 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
570 0007-3313-760 1 DICHTRING
JUNTA ANULAR
10.03.2016 580 0007-2733-390 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
590 0007-3678-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
610 0007-3690-840 1 DICHTRING
2066-9902-000 GASKET
630 0007-2927-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
640 0007-3541-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
650 0007-2555-830 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
700 0007-2932-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
720 0007-1988-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
730 0007-1987-750 2 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 740 0007-1861-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
GASKET
820 0007-1936-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
900 0015-0082-000 1 SCHMIERFETT
GRASA LUBRICANTE
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
47/52
10 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
2066-9902-020 RUBBER-METAL BUSH
SATZ ERSATZTEILE ANTRIEB CASQUILLO ELASTO-METÁLICO
20 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
25 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
ANGULAR CONTACT BALL BEARING
Typ / Model DRIVE BELT
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-969

9074-969
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
49/52
SATZ ERSATZTEILE F. 2 JAHRE JUEGO PIEZAS REPUESTO TAMBOR_CAPÓ
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-969

9074-969
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
51/52
10 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
20 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
25 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 70 0021-3293-870 2 KUPPLUNGSKLOTZ
CLUTCH SHOE
ZAPATA DEL EMBRAGUE
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 80 0011-6012-680 2 RILLENKUGELLAGER
9074-969 RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO

9074-969
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-958

9074-958

1941321099_32
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016

Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
www.gea.com


3/49
1941321099 SEPARATOR OSE 5-91-037_ 4 5
1941321099_32 SEPARATOR
SEPARATOR
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-958

9074-958
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
5/49
9987-0360-145 SEPARATOR OSE 5-91-037_ 4
SEPARATOR
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
SEPARADOR, COMP.
7825 5289-7825-199 1 DREHSTROMMOTOR 33
MOTOR TRIFÁSICO
3532 0024-3532-010 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
9902 2066-9902-510 1 SATZ ERSATZTEILE F. 1 JAHR 39
Typ / Model SET OF SPARE PARTS FOR 1 YEAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 9902 2066-9902-530 1 SATZ ERSATZTEILE F. 2 JAHRE 46
JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE REPUESTO PARA 2 AÑOS
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 9601 2058-9601-020 1 INSTALLATIONSRICHTLINIEN EN
9074-958 NORMATIVAS DE INSTALACIÓN EN
INSTRUCTION MANUAL EN
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES EN
9074-958 ADJUSTMENT VALUES AND FAULT SIGNALS EN
9101 2023-9101-000 1 WARTUNGSPLAN U. ERSATZTEILLISTE
Ausgabe / Edition MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE AND PARTS LIST
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
7/49
8/49
9/49
10/49
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
35 0026-1371-400 4 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
40 0000-0006-162 1 ENTFAELLT
NOT APPLICABLE
SE SUPRIME
60 0026-2418-400 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 2057-3367-000 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
SECURING RING
100 2058-1015-000 4 FUSS VOLLST. 20
FOOT, COMPL.
Seite/Page
2066-0001-000 HOSE CLIP
150 0018-8262-710 1 SCHLAUCH
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
HOSE
MANGUERA
160 0005-4485-930 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
170 0011-8060-000 1 GELENKLAGER
COJINETE ARTICULADO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
200 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
210 2065-3375-000 1 LAGERDECKEL
TAPA DE COJINETE
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 225 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
HEX HEAD SCREW
PROXIMITY SWITCH
250 2065-1145-000 1 HALTER
9074-958 HOLDER
SOPORTE
ALLEN SCREW
290 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
RUBBER-METAL BUSH
Seite/Page
300 0007-2566-390 1 DICHTRING
2066-0001-000 GASKET
310 2066-1066-000 1 SCHUTZKAPPE
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
PROTECTIVE CAP
TAPA PROTECTORA
320 2058-1089-000 1 RING
RING
ANILLO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
340 2066-3266-000 1 SPINDELKAPPE
SPINDLE CAP
CAPERUZA DEL EJE
350 0007-2730-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
360 0018-3215-030 1 STUTZEN
TUBO DE EMPALME
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
LENGTH OF PIPE
390 0019-7625-400 3 STIFTSCHRAUBE
STUD BOLT
400 0026-1369-300 3 SCHEIBE
ARANDELA _ DISCO
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
10.03.2016 420 2058-1061-010 1 DECKEL
COVER
TAPA
430 0001-1457-800 2 SCHAUGLAS
SIGHT GLASS
MIRILLA
Seite/Page
2066-0001-000 SCREW PLUG
450 0007-1796-550 1 DICHTRING
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
THREADED PLUG
TAPÓN ROSCADO
565 0007-1780-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
580 0007-2733-600 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
600 2066-6600-510 1 TROMMEL VOLLST. 24
BOWL, COMPL.
TAMBOR, COMP.
700 0007-2932-750 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 710 2066-6464-000 1 GEWINDERING
THREADED RING
ANILLO ROSCADO
801 0007-1936-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
802 2168-2337-020 1 STEUERGREIFER
RODETE DE MANDO
803 0007-1904-750 2 DICHTRING
JUNTA ANULAR
10.03.2016 810 2066-8808-000 1 HAUBE
HOOD
CAPÓ
820 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
830 2171-2191-020 1 GRIFFKOERPER
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
COUPLING NUT
TUERCA DE RACOR
NON-RETURN VALVE
860 0018-6676-030 3 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
870 2066-8829-000 1 SATZ BLENDEN
2066-8473-010 2 BLENDE
ORIFICE PLATE
PLACA PERFORADA
2066-8473-020 2 BLENDE
PLACA PERFORADA
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 2066-8473-030 2 BLENDE
ORIFICE PLATE
PLACA PERFORADA
ORIFICE PLATE
2066-8473-050 2 BLENDE
ORIFICE PLATE
2066-8473-060 2 BLENDE
PLACA PERFORADA
10.03.2016 0007-2871-830 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
890 0018-5907-000 1 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
Seite/Page
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
HOSE CLIP
930 0018-6744-710 1 SCHLAUCH
HOSE
MANGUERA
PRESSURE GAUGE
960 0018-6620-030 1 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
TERMINAL BOX
CAJA DE BORNES
ALLEN SCREW
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
1010 0024-4382-010 1 SATZ SCHILDER
JUEGO DE RÓTULOS
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
10.03.2016 0024-6326-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-6426-000 1 SCHILD
PLATE
RÓTULO
Seite/Page
2066-0001-000 DECAL _ARROW
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
TYPE PLATE
0026-1571-300 4 KERBNAGEL
REMACHE ESTRIADO
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 0024-6580-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
PLATE
9074-958 RÓTULO
PROTECTIVE HOSE
MANGUERA PROTECTORA
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
18/49
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
DISTANCE SLEEVE
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-958

9074-958
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
20/49
10 2058-1467-000 4 PLATTE
2058-1015-000 PLATE
FUSS VOLLST. PLACA
FOOT, COMPL.
MACHINE FOOT
PIE DE MAQUINA
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-958

9074-958
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
22/49
10 0018-7614-920 1 DRUCKREGLER
20 0018-1763-630 1 KUGELHAHN
BALL VALVE
VÁLVULA DE BOLA
0018-1763-280 1 GRIFF
HANDLEGRIP
EMPUÑADURA
25 0018-6419-030 2 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
PRESSURE GAUGE
FILTER INSERT
CARTUCHO DE FILTRO
70 0018-6654-010 2 MAGNETSPULE
BOBINA MAGNÉTICA
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 0018-6654-040 2 GEHAEUSE
HOUSING
CARCASA
DIAPHRAGM
9074-958 MEMBRANA
100 0018-7614-930 2 MAGNETKERN
SOLENOID CORE
CONECTOR HEMBRA
130 0018-7614-910 1 SCHLAUCH
MANGUERA
10.03.2016 140 0018-6654-030 1 SATZ DICHTUNGEN
SET OF GASKETS
JUEGO DE JUNTAS
ALLEN SCREW
Seite/Page
24/49
250 0007-1987-750 1 DICHTRING
BOWL, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
260 0007-1861-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
JUEGO DE DIAFRAGMAS
REGULATING RING
REGULATING RING
REGULATING RING
REGULATING RING
300 0007-1997-750 1 DICHTRING
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
26/49
20 0007-2868-750 1 DICHTRING
2066-6600-508 GASKET
30 2066-6687-000 1 SCHEIBE
BOWL, PRE-ASSEMBLED
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
50 0007-3364-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-2069-720 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 2066-6503-000 1 RINGKOLBEN
ANNULAR PISTON
PISTÓN ANULAR
80 0007-3314-760 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
PISTON GUIDE RING
110 0007-3313-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
120 0007-3678-760 1 DICHTRING
9074-958 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
10.03.2016 140 0007-3690-840 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
150 2066-6629-010 1 VERTEILERFUSS
DISTRIBUTOR BASE
Seite/Page
160 0007-2927-750 1 DICHTRING
2066-6600-508 GASKET
170 0007-3541-750 1 DICHTRING
BOWL, PRE-ASSEMBLED
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
180 0007-2555-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
190 2066-6611-000 1 TROMMELDECKEL
BOWL TOP
TAPA DEL TAMBOR
200 2066-6663-000 68 TELLER VOLLST.
DISC, COMPL.
PLATO, COMP.
BLIND DISC
PLATO DE CIERRE
PLATO DE CIERRE
THREADED PIN
PRISIONERO
GASKET
LOCK RING
9074-958
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
29/49
10 2066-3429-010 1 SPINDEL VOLLST. 31
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
DRIVE BELT
CLUTCH SHOE
ZAPATA DEL EMBRAGUE
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-958

9074-958
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
31/49
10 2066-3410-010 1 SPINDEL
2066-3429-010 SPINDLE
20 2058-3375-000 1 LAGERDECKEL
SPINDLE, COMPL.
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
30 2058-3375-010 1 LAGERDECKEL
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 0010-5205-010 1 LAGERHUELSE
BEARING SLEEVE
9074-958

9074-958
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
33/49
10 0005-4863-000 1 FLANSCH
5289-7825-199 FLANGE
20 0005-4863-010 1 LAGERSCHILD
END SHIELD
PLATO DE COJINETE
30 0005-4863-020 1 LUEFTER
FAN
VENTILADOR
40 0005-4863-030 1 LUEFTERHAUBE
FAN COVER
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-958

9074-958
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
35/49
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-958

9074-958
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
37/49
10 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
2066-9769-010 GASKET
20 0007-1904-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 0007-1997-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
40 0007-1936-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
50 0007-1861-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-1987-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 0007-1988-750 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 0007-2932-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
LUBRICATING OIL
DRIVE BELT
110 0015-0082-000 1 SCHMIERFETT
GRASA LUBRICANTE
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
39/49
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-958

9074-958
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
41/49
30 0007-1904-750 4 DICHTRING
2066-9902-000 GASKET
40 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-3690-840 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
300 0007-2566-390 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
350 0007-2730-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
480 0007-2868-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
510 0007-3364-760 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 520 0007-2069-720 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
GASKET
PISTON GUIDE RING
565 0007-1780-750 4 DICHTRING
9074-958 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
570 0007-3313-760 1 DICHTRING
JUNTA ANULAR
10.03.2016 580 0007-2733-390 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
590 0007-3678-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
610 0007-3690-840 1 DICHTRING
2066-9902-000 GASKET
630 0007-2927-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
640 0007-3541-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
650 0007-2555-830 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
700 0007-2932-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
720 0007-1988-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
730 0007-1987-750 2 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 740 0007-1861-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
GASKET
820 0007-1936-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
900 0015-0082-000 1 SCHMIERFETT
GRASA LUBRICANTE
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
44/49
10 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
20 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
25 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-958

9074-958
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
46/49
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-958

9074-958
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
48/49
10 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
20 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
25 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
CLUTCH SHOE
ZAPATA DEL EMBRAGUE

9074-958
Ausgabe / Edition
10.03.2016
Seite/Page
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-964

9074-964

1941321099_42
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016

Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
www.gea.com


3/49
1941321099 SEPARATOR OSE 5-91-037_ 4 5
1941321099_42 SEPARATOR
SEPARATOR
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-964

9074-964
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
5/49
9987-0360-149 SEPARATOR OSE 5-91-037_ 4
SEPARATOR
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
SEPARADOR, COMP.
7825 5289-7825-199 1 DREHSTROMMOTOR 33
MOTOR TRIFÁSICO
3532 0024-3532-010 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
7/49
8/49
9/49
10/49
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
35 0026-1371-400 4 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
40 0000-0006-162 1 ENTFAELLT
NOT APPLICABLE
SE SUPRIME
60 0026-2418-400 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 2057-3367-000 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
SECURING RING
100 2058-1015-000 4 FUSS VOLLST. 20
FOOT, COMPL.
Seite/Page
2066-0001-000 HOSE CLIP
150 0018-8262-710 1 SCHLAUCH
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
HOSE
MANGUERA
160 0005-4485-930 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
170 0011-8060-000 1 GELENKLAGER
COJINETE ARTICULADO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
200 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
210 2065-3375-000 1 LAGERDECKEL
TAPA DE COJINETE
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 225 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
HEX HEAD SCREW
PROXIMITY SWITCH
250 2065-1145-000 1 HALTER
9074-964 HOLDER
SOPORTE
ALLEN SCREW
290 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
RUBBER-METAL BUSH
Seite/Page
300 0007-2566-390 1 DICHTRING
2066-0001-000 GASKET
310 2066-1066-000 1 SCHUTZKAPPE
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
PROTECTIVE CAP
TAPA PROTECTORA
320 2058-1089-000 1 RING
RING
ANILLO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
340 2066-3266-000 1 SPINDELKAPPE
SPINDLE CAP
CAPERUZA DEL EJE
350 0007-2730-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
360 0018-3215-030 1 STUTZEN
TUBO DE EMPALME
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
LENGTH OF PIPE
390 0019-7625-400 3 STIFTSCHRAUBE
STUD BOLT
400 0026-1369-300 3 SCHEIBE
ARANDELA _ DISCO
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
17.03.2016 420 2058-1061-010 1 DECKEL
COVER
TAPA
430 0001-1457-800 2 SCHAUGLAS
SIGHT GLASS
MIRILLA
Seite/Page
2066-0001-000 SCREW PLUG
450 0007-1796-550 1 DICHTRING
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
THREADED PLUG
TAPÓN ROSCADO
565 0007-1780-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
580 0007-2733-600 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
600 2066-6600-510 1 TROMMEL VOLLST. 24
BOWL, COMPL.
TAMBOR, COMP.
700 0007-2932-750 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 710 2066-6464-000 1 GEWINDERING
THREADED RING
ANILLO ROSCADO
801 0007-1936-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
802 2168-2337-020 1 STEUERGREIFER
RODETE DE MANDO
803 0007-1904-750 2 DICHTRING
JUNTA ANULAR
17.03.2016 810 2066-8808-000 1 HAUBE
HOOD
CAPÓ
820 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
830 2171-2191-020 1 GRIFFKOERPER
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
COUPLING NUT
TUERCA DE RACOR
NON-RETURN VALVE
860 0018-6676-030 3 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
870 2066-8829-000 1 SATZ BLENDEN
2066-8473-010 2 BLENDE
ORIFICE PLATE
PLACA PERFORADA
2066-8473-020 2 BLENDE
PLACA PERFORADA
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 2066-8473-030 2 BLENDE
ORIFICE PLATE
PLACA PERFORADA
ORIFICE PLATE
2066-8473-050 2 BLENDE
ORIFICE PLATE
2066-8473-060 2 BLENDE
PLACA PERFORADA
17.03.2016 0007-2871-830 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
890 0018-5907-000 1 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
Seite/Page
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
HOSE CLIP
930 0018-6744-710 1 SCHLAUCH
HOSE
MANGUERA
PRESSURE GAUGE
960 0018-6620-030 1 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
TERMINAL BOX
CAJA DE BORNES
ALLEN SCREW
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
1010 0024-4382-010 1 SATZ SCHILDER
JUEGO DE RÓTULOS
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
17.03.2016 0024-6326-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-6426-000 1 SCHILD
PLATE
RÓTULO
Seite/Page
2066-0001-000 DECAL _ARROW
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
TYPE PLATE
0026-1571-300 4 KERBNAGEL
REMACHE ESTRIADO
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 0024-6580-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
PLATE
9074-964 RÓTULO
PROTECTIVE HOSE
MANGUERA PROTECTORA
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
18/49
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
DISTANCE SLEEVE
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-964

9074-964
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
20/49
10 2058-1467-000 4 PLATTE
2058-1015-000 PLATE
FUSS VOLLST. PLACA
FOOT, COMPL.
MACHINE FOOT
PIE DE MAQUINA
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-964

9074-964
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
22/49
10 0018-7614-920 1 DRUCKREGLER
20 0018-1763-630 1 KUGELHAHN
BALL VALVE
VÁLVULA DE BOLA
0018-1763-280 1 GRIFF
HANDLEGRIP
EMPUÑADURA
25 0018-6419-030 2 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
PRESSURE GAUGE
FILTER INSERT
CARTUCHO DE FILTRO
70 0018-6654-010 2 MAGNETSPULE
BOBINA MAGNÉTICA
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 0018-6654-040 2 GEHAEUSE
HOUSING
CARCASA
DIAPHRAGM
9074-964 MEMBRANA
100 0018-7614-930 2 MAGNETKERN
SOLENOID CORE
CONECTOR HEMBRA
130 0018-7614-910 1 SCHLAUCH
MANGUERA
17.03.2016 140 0018-6654-030 1 SATZ DICHTUNGEN
SET OF GASKETS
JUEGO DE JUNTAS
ALLEN SCREW
Seite/Page
24/49
250 0007-1987-750 1 DICHTRING
BOWL, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
260 0007-1861-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
JUEGO DE DIAFRAGMAS
REGULATING RING
REGULATING RING
REGULATING RING
REGULATING RING
300 0007-1997-750 1 DICHTRING
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
26/49
20 0007-2868-750 1 DICHTRING
2066-6600-508 GASKET
30 2066-6687-000 1 SCHEIBE
BOWL, PRE-ASSEMBLED
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
50 0007-3364-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-2069-720 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 2066-6503-000 1 RINGKOLBEN
ANNULAR PISTON
PISTÓN ANULAR
80 0007-3314-760 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
PISTON GUIDE RING
110 0007-3313-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
120 0007-3678-760 1 DICHTRING
9074-964 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
17.03.2016 140 0007-3690-840 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
150 2066-6629-010 1 VERTEILERFUSS
DISTRIBUTOR BASE
Seite/Page
160 0007-2927-750 1 DICHTRING
2066-6600-508 GASKET
170 0007-3541-750 1 DICHTRING
BOWL, PRE-ASSEMBLED
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
180 0007-2555-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
190 2066-6611-000 1 TROMMELDECKEL
BOWL TOP
TAPA DEL TAMBOR
200 2066-6663-000 68 TELLER VOLLST.
DISC, COMPL.
PLATO, COMP.
BLIND DISC
PLATO DE CIERRE
PLATO DE CIERRE
THREADED PIN
PRISIONERO
GASKET
LOCK RING
9074-964
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
29/49
10 2066-3429-010 1 SPINDEL VOLLST. 31
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
DRIVE BELT
CLUTCH SHOE
ZAPATA DEL EMBRAGUE
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-964

9074-964
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
31/49
10 2066-3410-010 1 SPINDEL
2066-3429-010 SPINDLE
20 2058-3375-000 1 LAGERDECKEL
SPINDLE, COMPL.
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
30 2058-3375-010 1 LAGERDECKEL
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 0010-5205-010 1 LAGERHUELSE
BEARING SLEEVE
9074-964

9074-964
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
33/49
10 0005-4863-000 1 FLANSCH
5289-7825-199 FLANGE
20 0005-4863-010 1 LAGERSCHILD
END SHIELD
PLATO DE COJINETE
30 0005-4863-020 1 LUEFTER
FAN
VENTILADOR
40 0005-4863-030 1 LUEFTERHAUBE
FAN COVER
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-964

9074-964
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
35/49
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-964

9074-964
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
37/49
10 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
2066-9769-010 GASKET
20 0007-1904-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 0007-1997-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
40 0007-1936-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
50 0007-1861-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-1987-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 0007-1988-750 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 0007-2932-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
LUBRICATING OIL
DRIVE BELT
110 0015-0082-000 1 SCHMIERFETT
GRASA LUBRICANTE
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
39/49
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-964

9074-964
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
41/49
30 0007-1904-750 4 DICHTRING
2066-9902-000 GASKET
40 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-3690-840 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
300 0007-2566-390 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
350 0007-2730-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
480 0007-2868-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
510 0007-3364-760 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 520 0007-2069-720 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
GASKET
PISTON GUIDE RING
565 0007-1780-750 4 DICHTRING
9074-964 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
570 0007-3313-760 1 DICHTRING
JUNTA ANULAR
17.03.2016 580 0007-2733-390 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
590 0007-3678-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
610 0007-3690-840 1 DICHTRING
2066-9902-000 GASKET
630 0007-2927-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
640 0007-3541-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
650 0007-2555-830 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
700 0007-2932-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
720 0007-1988-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
730 0007-1987-750 2 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 740 0007-1861-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
GASKET
820 0007-1936-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
900 0015-0082-000 1 SCHMIERFETT
GRASA LUBRICANTE
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
44/49
10 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
20 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
25 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-964

9074-964
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
46/49
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-964

9074-964
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
48/49
10 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
20 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
25 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
CLUTCH SHOE
ZAPATA DEL EMBRAGUE

9074-964
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-965

9074-965

1941321099_52
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016

Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
www.gea.com


3/51
1941321099 SEPARATOR OSE 5-91-037_ 4 5
1941321099_52 SEPARATOR
SEPARATOR
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-965

9074-965
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
5/51
9987-0360-153 SEPARATOR OSE 5-91-037_ 4
SEPARATOR
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
SEPARADOR, COMP.
7825 5289-7825-199 1 DREHSTROMMOTOR 35
MOTOR TRIFÁSICO
3532 0024-3532-010 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
7/51
8/51
9/51
10/51
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
35 0026-1371-400 4 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
40 0000-0006-162 1 ENTFAELLT
NOT APPLICABLE
SE SUPRIME
60 0026-2418-400 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 2057-3367-000 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
SECURING RING
100 2058-1015-000 4 FUSS VOLLST. 21
FOOT, COMPL.
Seite/Page
2066-0001-000 HOSE CLIP
150 0018-8262-710 1 SCHLAUCH
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
HOSE
MANGUERA
160 0005-4485-930 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
170 0011-8060-000 1 GELENKLAGER
COJINETE ARTICULADO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
200 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
210 2065-3375-000 1 LAGERDECKEL
TAPA DE COJINETE
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 225 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
HEX HEAD SCREW
PROXIMITY SWITCH
250 2065-1145-000 1 HALTER
9074-965 HOLDER
SOPORTE
ALLEN SCREW
290 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
RUBBER-METAL BUSH
Seite/Page
300 0007-2566-390 1 DICHTRING
2066-0001-000 GASKET
310 2066-1066-000 1 SCHUTZKAPPE
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
PROTECTIVE CAP
TAPA PROTECTORA
320 2058-1089-000 1 RING
RING
ANILLO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
340 2066-3266-000 1 SPINDELKAPPE
SPINDLE CAP
CAPERUZA DEL EJE
350 0007-2730-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
360 0018-3215-030 1 STUTZEN
TUBO DE EMPALME
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
LENGTH OF PIPE
390 0019-7625-400 3 STIFTSCHRAUBE
STUD BOLT
400 0026-1369-300 3 SCHEIBE
ARANDELA _ DISCO
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
30.03.2016 420 2058-1061-010 1 DECKEL
COVER
TAPA
430 0001-1457-800 2 SCHAUGLAS
SIGHT GLASS
MIRILLA
Seite/Page
2066-0001-000 SCREW PLUG
450 0007-1796-550 1 DICHTRING
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
THREADED PLUG
TAPÓN ROSCADO
565 0007-1780-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
580 0007-2733-600 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
600 2066-6600-510 1 TROMMEL VOLLST. 25
BOWL, COMPL.
TAMBOR, COMP.
700 0007-2932-750 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 710 2066-6464-000 1 GEWINDERING
THREADED RING
ANILLO ROSCADO
0018-0456-400 3 ROHR
PIPE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n TUBO
801 0007-1936-750 1 DICHTRING
9074-965 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
802 2168-2337-020 1 STEUERGREIFER
Ausgabe / Edition SENSING LIQUID PUMP
RODETE DE MANDO
30.03.2016 2168-2337-030 1 STEUERGREIFER
SENSING LIQUID PUMP
RODETE DE MANDO
803 0007-1904-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
810 2066-8808-000 1 HAUBE
2066-0001-000 HOOD
SEPARATOR VOLLST. CAPÓ
820 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
830 2171-2191-020 1 GRIFFKOERPER
HANDLE CONNECTION PIECE
CUERPO DE LA EMPUÑADURA
2171-2459-010 1 GRIFFKOERPER
COUPLING NUT
TUERCA DE RACOR
NON-RETURN VALVE
860 0018-6676-030 3 STUTZEN
TUBO DE EMPALME
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 870 2066-8829-000 1 SATZ BLENDEN
ORIFICE PLATE
2066-8473-020 2 BLENDE
ORIFICE PLATE
2066-8473-030 2 BLENDE
PLACA PERFORADA
2066-8473-040 2 BLENDE
Ausgabe / Edition ORIFICE PLATE
PLACA PERFORADA
30.03.2016 2066-8473-050 2 BLENDE
ORIFICE PLATE
PLACA PERFORADA
2066-8473-060 2 BLENDE
ORIFICE PLATE
PLACA PERFORADA
Seite/Page
2066-0001-000 CORRUGATED TUBE, COMPL.
SEPARATOR VOLLST. TUBO FLEXIBLE ONDULADO, COMP.
0007-2871-830 4 DICHTRING
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
890 0018-5907-000 1 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
NON-RETURN VALVE, COMPL.
VÁLVULA DE RETENCIÓN, COMP.
910 0018-1560-000 1 ROHRSTUECK
LENGTH OF PIPE
EMPALME DE TUBOS
HOSE CLIP
930 0018-6744-710 1 SCHLAUCH
Typ / Model HOSE
MANGUERA
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 940 0001-1572-600 1 DRUCKMESSGERAET
PRESSURE GAUGE
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 950 2058-8846-000 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG M.BLENDE
9074-965 UNIÓN ROSCADA CON PLACA PERFORADA
2179-2021-000 1 BLENDE
ORIFICE PLATE
960 0018-6620-030 1 STUTZEN
9074-965 CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
Ausgabe / Edition PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
30.03.2016 980 0005-1539-280 1 KLEMMENKASTEN
TERMINAL BOX
CAJA DE BORNES
ALLEN SCREW
Seite/Page
2066-0001-000 SET OF DRIVE PARTS
SEPARATOR VOLLST. JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE ACCIONAMIENTO
1010 0024-4382-010 1 SATZ SCHILDER
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
SET OF PLATES
JUEGO DE RÓTULOS
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-6426-000 1 SCHILD
PLATE
RÓTULO
DECAL _ARROW
CALCOMANÍA DE «FLECHA»
Typ / Model ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 0024-6329-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 0024-6328-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
9074-965 RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n RÓTULO ADHESIVO
9074-965 TYPE PLATE
0026-1571-300 4 KERBNAGEL
Ausgabe / Edition NOTCHED NAIL
REMACHE ESTRIADO
30.03.2016 0024-6580-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-5380-000 1 SCHILD
PLATE
RÓTULO
Seite/Page
2066-0001-000 PROTECTIVE HOSE
SEPARATOR VOLLST. MANGUERA PROTECTORA
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
PROTECTIVE HOSE
MANGUERA PROTECTORA
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-965

9074-965
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
19/51
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
DISTANCE SLEEVE
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-965

9074-965
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
21/51
10 2058-1467-000 4 PLATTE
2058-1015-000 PLATE
FUSS VOLLST. PLACA
FOOT, COMPL.
MACHINE FOOT
PIE DE MAQUINA
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-965

9074-965
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
23/51
10 0018-7614-920 1 DRUCKREGLER
20 0018-1763-630 1 KUGELHAHN
BALL VALVE
VÁLVULA DE BOLA
0018-1763-280 1 GRIFF
HANDLEGRIP
EMPUÑADURA
25 0018-6419-030 2 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
PRESSURE GAUGE
FILTER INSERT
CARTUCHO DE FILTRO
70 0018-6654-010 2 MAGNETSPULE
BOBINA MAGNÉTICA
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 0018-6654-040 2 GEHAEUSE
HOUSING
CARCASA
DIAPHRAGM
9074-965 MEMBRANA
100 0018-7614-930 2 MAGNETKERN
SOLENOID CORE
CONECTOR HEMBRA
130 0018-7614-910 1 SCHLAUCH
MANGUERA
30.03.2016 140 0018-6654-030 1 SATZ DICHTUNGEN
SET OF GASKETS
JUEGO DE JUNTAS
ALLEN SCREW
Seite/Page
25/51
250 0007-1987-750 1 DICHTRING
BOWL, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
260 0007-1861-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
JUEGO DE DIAFRAGMAS
REGULATING RING
REGULATING RING
REGULATING RING
REGULATING RING
300 0007-1997-750 1 DICHTRING
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
27/51
10 2066-6601-000 1 TROMMELUNTERTEIL
2066-6600-508 BOWL BOTTOM
TROMMEL VORMONTIERT PARTE INFERIOR DEL TAMBOR
10 2066-6412-003 1 TROMMELUNTERTEIL (HAERTE GEPRUEFT)
BOWL, PRE-ASSEMBLED
BOWL BOTTOM (HARDNESS TESTED)
PARTE INF. TAMBOR (DUREZA CONTRASTADA)
20 0007-2868-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 2066-6687-000 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
50 0007-3364-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-2069-720 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 70 2066-6503-000 1 RINGKOLBEN
ANNULAR PISTON
PISTÓN ANULAR
GASKET
90 2066-6426-000 1 SCHLIESSKAMMERBODEN
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n FONDO DE LA CÁMARA DE CIERRE
9074-965 PISTON GUIDE RING
ANILLO DE GUÍA DE PISTÓN
110 0007-3313-760 1 DICHTRING
JUNTA ANULAR
30.03.2016 120 0007-3678-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
SLIDING PISTON
Seite/Page
10 2066-6415-003 1 KOLBENSCHIEBER (HAERTE GEPRUEFT)
2066-6600-508 SLIDING PISTON (HARDNESS TESTED)
TROMMEL VORMONTIERT PISTÓN DESLIZANTE (DUREZA CONTRASTADA)
140 0007-3690-840 2 DICHTRING
BOWL, PRE-ASSEMBLED
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
150 2066-6629-010 1 VERTEILERFUSS
DISTRIBUTOR BASE
160 0007-2927-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
170 0007-3541-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
180 0007-2555-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
190 2066-6611-000 1 TROMMELDECKEL
Typ / Model BOWL TOP
TAPA DEL TAMBOR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 10 2066-6413-003 1 TROMMELDECKEL (HAERTE GEPRUEFT)
BOWL TOP (HARDNESS TESTED)
TAPA DEL TAMBOR (DUREZA CONTRASTADA)
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 200 2066-6663-000 68 TELLER VOLLST.
DISC, COMPL.
9074-965 PLATO, COMP.
10 0028-0352-303 68 RONDE
CIRCULAR BLANK
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n RODAJA
9074-965 BLIND DISC
PLATO DE CIERRE
Ausgabe / Edition BLIND DISC
PLATO DE CIERRE
30.03.2016 10 0028-0430-403 1 RONDE
CIRCULAR BLANK
RODAJA
230 0019-6324-400 2 GEWINDESTIFT
THREADED PIN
PRISIONERO
Seite/Page
240 0007-1988-750 1 DICHTRING
2066-6600-508 GASKET
BOWL, PRE-ASSEMBLED
LOCK RING
ANILLO DE CIERRE
LOCK RING
ANILLO DE CIERRE
2168-6414-004 1 VERSCHLUSSRING (HAERTE GEPRUEFT)
LOCK RING (HARDNESS-TESTED)
ANILLO DE CIERRE (DUREZA CONTRASTADA)
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-965

9074-965
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
31/51
10 2066-3429-010 1 SPINDEL VOLLST. 33
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
DRIVE BELT
CLUTCH SHOE
ZAPATA DEL EMBRAGUE
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-965

9074-965
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
33/51
10 2066-3410-010 1 SPINDEL
2066-3429-010 SPINDLE
20 2058-3375-000 1 LAGERDECKEL
SPINDLE, COMPL.
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
30 2058-3375-010 1 LAGERDECKEL
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 0010-5205-010 1 LAGERHUELSE
BEARING SLEEVE
9074-965

9074-965
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
35/51
10 0005-4863-000 1 FLANSCH
5289-7825-199 FLANGE
20 0005-4863-010 1 LAGERSCHILD
END SHIELD
PLATO DE COJINETE
30 0005-4863-020 1 LUEFTER
FAN
VENTILADOR
40 0005-4863-030 1 LUEFTERHAUBE
FAN COVER
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-965

9074-965
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
37/51
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-965

9074-965
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
39/51
10 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
2066-9769-010 GASKET
20 0007-1904-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 0007-1997-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
40 0007-1936-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
50 0007-1861-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-1987-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 0007-1988-750 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 0007-2932-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
LUBRICATING OIL
DRIVE BELT
110 0015-0082-000 1 SCHMIERFETT
GRASA LUBRICANTE
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
41/51
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-965

9074-965
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
43/51
30 0007-1904-750 4 DICHTRING
2066-9902-000 GASKET
40 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-3690-840 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
300 0007-2566-390 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
350 0007-2730-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
480 0007-2868-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
510 0007-3364-760 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 520 0007-2069-720 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
GASKET
PISTON GUIDE RING
565 0007-1780-750 4 DICHTRING
9074-965 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
570 0007-3313-760 1 DICHTRING
JUNTA ANULAR
30.03.2016 580 0007-2733-390 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
590 0007-3678-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
610 0007-3690-840 1 DICHTRING
2066-9902-000 GASKET
630 0007-2927-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
640 0007-3541-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
650 0007-2555-830 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
700 0007-2932-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
720 0007-1988-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
730 0007-1987-750 2 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 740 0007-1861-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
GASKET
820 0007-1936-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
900 0015-0082-000 1 SCHMIERFETT
GRASA LUBRICANTE
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
46/51
10 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
20 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
25 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-965

9074-965
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
48/51
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-965

9074-965
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
50/51
10 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
20 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
25 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
CLUTCH SHOE
ZAPATA DEL EMBRAGUE

9074-965
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9075-091

9075-091

1941321099_62
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016

Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
www.gea.com


3/51
1941321099 SEPARATOR OSE 5-91-037_ 4 5
1941321099_62 SEPARATOR
SEPARATOR
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9075-091

9075-091
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
5/51
9987-0360-157 SEPARATOR OSE 5-91-037_ 4
SEPARATOR
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
SEPARADOR, COMP.
7825 5289-7825-199 1 DREHSTROMMOTOR 35
MOTOR TRIFÁSICO
3532 0024-3532-010 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
7/51
8/51
9/51
10/51
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
35 0026-1371-400 4 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
40 0000-0006-162 1 ENTFAELLT
NOT APPLICABLE
SE SUPRIME
60 0026-2418-400 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 2057-3367-000 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
SECURING RING
100 2058-1015-000 4 FUSS VOLLST. 21
FOOT, COMPL.
Seite/Page
2066-0001-000 HOSE CLIP
150 0018-8262-710 1 SCHLAUCH
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
HOSE
MANGUERA
160 0005-4485-930 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
170 0011-8060-000 1 GELENKLAGER
COJINETE ARTICULADO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
200 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
210 2065-3375-000 1 LAGERDECKEL
TAPA DE COJINETE
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 225 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
HEX HEAD SCREW
PROXIMITY SWITCH
250 2065-1145-000 1 HALTER
9075-091 HOLDER
SOPORTE
ALLEN SCREW
290 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
RUBBER-METAL BUSH
Seite/Page
300 0007-2566-390 1 DICHTRING
2066-0001-000 GASKET
310 2066-1066-000 1 SCHUTZKAPPE
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
PROTECTIVE CAP
TAPA PROTECTORA
320 2058-1089-000 1 RING
RING
ANILLO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
340 2066-3266-000 1 SPINDELKAPPE
SPINDLE CAP
CAPERUZA DEL EJE
350 0007-2730-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
360 0018-3215-030 1 STUTZEN
TUBO DE EMPALME
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
LENGTH OF PIPE
390 0019-7625-400 3 STIFTSCHRAUBE
STUD BOLT
400 0026-1369-300 3 SCHEIBE
ARANDELA _ DISCO
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
30.03.2016 420 2058-1061-010 1 DECKEL
COVER
TAPA
430 0001-1457-800 2 SCHAUGLAS
SIGHT GLASS
MIRILLA
Seite/Page
2066-0001-000 SCREW PLUG
450 0007-1796-550 1 DICHTRING
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
THREADED PLUG
TAPÓN ROSCADO
565 0007-1780-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
580 0007-2733-600 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
600 2066-6600-510 1 TROMMEL VOLLST. 25
BOWL, COMPL.
TAMBOR, COMP.
700 0007-2932-750 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 710 2066-6464-000 1 GEWINDERING
THREADED RING
ANILLO ROSCADO
0018-0456-400 3 ROHR
PIPE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n TUBO
801 0007-1936-750 1 DICHTRING
9075-091 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
802 2168-2337-020 1 STEUERGREIFER
Ausgabe / Edition SENSING LIQUID PUMP
RODETE DE MANDO
30.03.2016 2168-2337-030 1 STEUERGREIFER
SENSING LIQUID PUMP
RODETE DE MANDO
803 0007-1904-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
810 2066-8808-000 1 HAUBE
2066-0001-000 HOOD
SEPARATOR VOLLST. CAPÓ
820 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
830 2171-2191-020 1 GRIFFKOERPER
2171-2459-010 1 GRIFFKOERPER
COUPLING NUT
TUERCA DE RACOR
NON-RETURN VALVE
860 0018-6676-030 3 STUTZEN
TUBO DE EMPALME
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 870 2066-8829-000 1 SATZ BLENDEN
ORIFICE PLATE
2066-8473-020 2 BLENDE
ORIFICE PLATE
2066-8473-030 2 BLENDE
PLACA PERFORADA
2066-8473-040 2 BLENDE
Ausgabe / Edition ORIFICE PLATE
PLACA PERFORADA
30.03.2016 2066-8473-050 2 BLENDE
ORIFICE PLATE
PLACA PERFORADA
2066-8473-060 2 BLENDE
ORIFICE PLATE
PLACA PERFORADA
Seite/Page
2066-0001-000 CORRUGATED TUBE, COMPL.
SEPARATOR VOLLST. TUBO FLEXIBLE ONDULADO, COMP.
0007-2871-830 4 DICHTRING
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
890 0018-5907-000 1 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
NON-RETURN VALVE, COMPL.
VÁLVULA DE RETENCIÓN, COMP.
910 0018-1560-000 1 ROHRSTUECK
LENGTH OF PIPE
EMPALME DE TUBOS
HOSE CLIP
930 0018-6744-710 1 SCHLAUCH
Typ / Model HOSE
MANGUERA
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 940 0001-1572-600 1 DRUCKMESSGERAET
PRESSURE GAUGE
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 950 2058-8846-000 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG M.BLENDE
9075-091 UNIÓN ROSCADA CON PLACA PERFORADA
2179-2021-000 1 BLENDE
ORIFICE PLATE
960 0018-6620-030 1 STUTZEN
9075-091 CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
Ausgabe / Edition PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
30.03.2016 980 0005-1539-280 1 KLEMMENKASTEN
TERMINAL BOX
CAJA DE BORNES
ALLEN SCREW
Seite/Page
2066-0001-000 SET OF DRIVE PARTS
SEPARATOR VOLLST. JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE ACCIONAMIENTO
1010 0024-4382-010 1 SATZ SCHILDER
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
SET OF PLATES
JUEGO DE RÓTULOS
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-6426-000 1 SCHILD
PLATE
RÓTULO
DECAL _ARROW
CALCOMANÍA DE «FLECHA»
Typ / Model ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 0024-6329-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 0024-6328-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
9075-091 RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n RÓTULO ADHESIVO
9075-091 TYPE PLATE
0026-1571-300 4 KERBNAGEL
Ausgabe / Edition NOTCHED NAIL
REMACHE ESTRIADO
30.03.2016 0024-6580-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-5380-000 1 SCHILD
PLATE
RÓTULO
Seite/Page
2066-0001-000 PROTECTIVE HOSE
SEPARATOR VOLLST. MANGUERA PROTECTORA
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
PROTECTIVE HOSE
MANGUERA PROTECTORA
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9075-091

9075-091
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
19/51
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
DISTANCE SLEEVE
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9075-091

9075-091
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
21/51
10 2058-1467-000 4 PLATTE
2058-1015-000 PLATE
FUSS VOLLST. PLACA
FOOT, COMPL.
MACHINE FOOT
PIE DE MAQUINA
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9075-091

9075-091
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
23/51
10 0018-7614-920 1 DRUCKREGLER
20 0018-1763-630 1 KUGELHAHN
BALL VALVE
VÁLVULA DE BOLA
0018-1763-280 1 GRIFF
HANDLEGRIP
EMPUÑADURA
25 0018-6419-030 2 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
PRESSURE GAUGE
FILTER INSERT
CARTUCHO DE FILTRO
70 0018-6654-010 2 MAGNETSPULE
BOBINA MAGNÉTICA
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 0018-6654-040 2 GEHAEUSE
HOUSING
CARCASA
DIAPHRAGM
9075-091 MEMBRANA
100 0018-7614-930 2 MAGNETKERN
SOLENOID CORE
CONECTOR HEMBRA
130 0018-7614-910 1 SCHLAUCH
MANGUERA
30.03.2016 140 0018-6654-030 1 SATZ DICHTUNGEN
SET OF GASKETS
JUEGO DE JUNTAS
ALLEN SCREW
Seite/Page
25/51
250 0007-1987-750 1 DICHTRING
BOWL, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
260 0007-1861-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
JUEGO DE DIAFRAGMAS
REGULATING RING
REGULATING RING
REGULATING RING
REGULATING RING
300 0007-1997-750 1 DICHTRING
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
27/51
10 2066-6601-000 1 TROMMELUNTERTEIL
2066-6600-508 BOWL BOTTOM
TROMMEL VORMONTIERT PARTE INFERIOR DEL TAMBOR
10 2066-6412-003 1 TROMMELUNTERTEIL (HAERTE GEPRUEFT)
BOWL, PRE-ASSEMBLED
BOWL BOTTOM (HARDNESS TESTED)
PARTE INF. TAMBOR (DUREZA CONTRASTADA)
20 0007-2868-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 2066-6687-000 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
50 0007-3364-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-2069-720 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 70 2066-6503-000 1 RINGKOLBEN
ANNULAR PISTON
PISTÓN ANULAR
GASKET
90 2066-6426-000 1 SCHLIESSKAMMERBODEN
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n FONDO DE LA CÁMARA DE CIERRE
9075-091 PISTON GUIDE RING
ANILLO DE GUÍA DE PISTÓN
110 0007-3313-760 1 DICHTRING
JUNTA ANULAR
30.03.2016 120 0007-3678-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
SLIDING PISTON
Seite/Page
10 2066-6415-003 1 KOLBENSCHIEBER (HAERTE GEPRUEFT)
2066-6600-508 SLIDING PISTON (HARDNESS TESTED)
TROMMEL VORMONTIERT PISTÓN DESLIZANTE (DUREZA CONTRASTADA)
140 0007-3690-840 2 DICHTRING
BOWL, PRE-ASSEMBLED
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
150 2066-6629-010 1 VERTEILERFUSS
DISTRIBUTOR BASE
160 0007-2927-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
170 0007-3541-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
180 0007-2555-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
190 2066-6611-000 1 TROMMELDECKEL
Typ / Model BOWL TOP
TAPA DEL TAMBOR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 10 2066-6413-003 1 TROMMELDECKEL (HAERTE GEPRUEFT)
BOWL TOP (HARDNESS TESTED)
TAPA DEL TAMBOR (DUREZA CONTRASTADA)
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 200 2066-6663-000 68 TELLER VOLLST.
DISC, COMPL.
9075-091 PLATO, COMP.
10 0028-0352-303 68 RONDE
CIRCULAR BLANK
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n RODAJA
9075-091 BLIND DISC
PLATO DE CIERRE
Ausgabe / Edition BLIND DISC
PLATO DE CIERRE
30.03.2016 10 0028-0430-403 1 RONDE
CIRCULAR BLANK
RODAJA
230 0019-6324-400 2 GEWINDESTIFT
THREADED PIN
PRISIONERO
Seite/Page
240 0007-1988-750 1 DICHTRING
2066-6600-508 GASKET
BOWL, PRE-ASSEMBLED
LOCK RING
ANILLO DE CIERRE
LOCK RING
ANILLO DE CIERRE
2168-6414-004 1 VERSCHLUSSRING (HAERTE GEPRUEFT)
LOCK RING (HARDNESS-TESTED)
ANILLO DE CIERRE (DUREZA CONTRASTADA)
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9075-091

9075-091
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
31/51
10 2066-3429-010 1 SPINDEL VOLLST. 33
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
DRIVE BELT
CLUTCH SHOE
ZAPATA DEL EMBRAGUE
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9075-091

9075-091
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
33/51
10 2066-3410-010 1 SPINDEL
2066-3429-010 SPINDLE
20 2058-3375-000 1 LAGERDECKEL
SPINDLE, COMPL.
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
30 2058-3375-010 1 LAGERDECKEL
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 0010-5205-010 1 LAGERHUELSE
BEARING SLEEVE
9075-091

9075-091
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
35/51
10 0005-4863-000 1 FLANSCH
5289-7825-199 FLANGE
20 0005-4863-010 1 LAGERSCHILD
END SHIELD
PLATO DE COJINETE
30 0005-4863-020 1 LUEFTER
FAN
VENTILADOR
40 0005-4863-030 1 LUEFTERHAUBE
FAN COVER
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9075-091

9075-091
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
37/51
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9075-091

9075-091
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
39/51
10 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
2066-9769-010 GASKET
20 0007-1904-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 0007-1997-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
40 0007-1936-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
50 0007-1861-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-1987-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 0007-1988-750 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 0007-2932-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
LUBRICATING OIL
DRIVE BELT
110 0015-0082-000 1 SCHMIERFETT
GRASA LUBRICANTE
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
41/51
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9075-091

9075-091
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
43/51
30 0007-1904-750 4 DICHTRING
2066-9902-000 GASKET
40 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-3690-840 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
300 0007-2566-390 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
350 0007-2730-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
480 0007-2868-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
510 0007-3364-760 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 520 0007-2069-720 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
GASKET
PISTON GUIDE RING
565 0007-1780-750 4 DICHTRING
9075-091 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
570 0007-3313-760 1 DICHTRING
JUNTA ANULAR
30.03.2016 580 0007-2733-390 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
590 0007-3678-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
610 0007-3690-840 1 DICHTRING
2066-9902-000 GASKET
630 0007-2927-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
640 0007-3541-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
650 0007-2555-830 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
700 0007-2932-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
720 0007-1988-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
730 0007-1987-750 2 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 740 0007-1861-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
GASKET
820 0007-1936-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
900 0015-0082-000 1 SCHMIERFETT
GRASA LUBRICANTE
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
46/51
10 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
20 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
25 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9075-091

9075-091
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
48/51
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9075-091

9075-091
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
50/51
10 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
20 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
25 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
CLUTCH SHOE
ZAPATA DEL EMBRAGUE

9075-091
Ausgabe / Edition
30.03.2016
Seite/Page
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-967

9074-967

1941321099_72
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016

Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
www.gea.com


3/49
1941321099 SEPARATOR OSE 5-91-037_ 4 5
1941321099_72 SEPARATOR
SEPARATOR
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-967

9074-967
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
5/49
9987-0360-161 SEPARATOR OSE 5-91-037_ 4
SEPARATOR
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
SEPARADOR, COMP.
7825 5289-7825-199 1 DREHSTROMMOTOR 33
MOTOR TRIFÁSICO
3532 0024-3532-010 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
7/49
8/49
9/49
10/49
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
35 0026-1371-400 4 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
40 0000-0006-162 1 ENTFAELLT
NOT APPLICABLE
SE SUPRIME
60 0026-2418-400 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 2057-3367-000 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
SECURING RING
100 2058-1015-000 4 FUSS VOLLST. 20
FOOT, COMPL.
Seite/Page
2066-0001-000 HOSE CLIP
150 0018-8262-710 1 SCHLAUCH
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
HOSE
MANGUERA
160 0005-4485-930 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
170 0011-8060-000 1 GELENKLAGER
COJINETE ARTICULADO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
200 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
210 2065-3375-000 1 LAGERDECKEL
TAPA DE COJINETE
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 225 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
HEX HEAD SCREW
PROXIMITY SWITCH
250 2065-1145-000 1 HALTER
9074-967 HOLDER
SOPORTE
ALLEN SCREW
290 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
RUBBER-METAL BUSH
Seite/Page
300 0007-2566-390 1 DICHTRING
2066-0001-000 GASKET
310 2066-1066-000 1 SCHUTZKAPPE
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
PROTECTIVE CAP
TAPA PROTECTORA
320 2058-1089-000 1 RING
RING
ANILLO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
340 2066-3266-000 1 SPINDELKAPPE
SPINDLE CAP
CAPERUZA DEL EJE
350 0007-2730-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
360 0018-3215-030 1 STUTZEN
TUBO DE EMPALME
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
LENGTH OF PIPE
390 0019-7625-400 3 STIFTSCHRAUBE
STUD BOLT
400 0026-1369-300 3 SCHEIBE
ARANDELA _ DISCO
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
17.03.2016 420 2058-1061-010 1 DECKEL
COVER
TAPA
430 0001-1457-800 2 SCHAUGLAS
SIGHT GLASS
MIRILLA
Seite/Page
2066-0001-000 SCREW PLUG
450 0007-1796-550 1 DICHTRING
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
THREADED PLUG
TAPÓN ROSCADO
565 0007-1780-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
580 0007-2733-600 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
600 2066-6600-510 1 TROMMEL VOLLST. 24
BOWL, COMPL.
TAMBOR, COMP.
700 0007-2932-750 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 710 2066-6464-000 1 GEWINDERING
THREADED RING
ANILLO ROSCADO
801 0007-1936-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
802 2168-2337-020 1 STEUERGREIFER
RODETE DE MANDO
803 0007-1904-750 2 DICHTRING
JUNTA ANULAR
17.03.2016 810 2066-8808-000 1 HAUBE
HOOD
CAPÓ
820 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
830 2171-2191-020 1 GRIFFKOERPER
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
COUPLING NUT
TUERCA DE RACOR
NON-RETURN VALVE
860 0018-6676-030 3 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
870 2066-8829-000 1 SATZ BLENDEN
2066-8473-010 2 BLENDE
ORIFICE PLATE
PLACA PERFORADA
2066-8473-020 2 BLENDE
PLACA PERFORADA
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 2066-8473-030 2 BLENDE
ORIFICE PLATE
PLACA PERFORADA
ORIFICE PLATE
2066-8473-050 2 BLENDE
ORIFICE PLATE
2066-8473-060 2 BLENDE
PLACA PERFORADA
17.03.2016 0007-2871-830 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
890 0018-5907-000 1 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
Seite/Page
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
HOSE CLIP
930 0018-6744-710 1 SCHLAUCH
HOSE
MANGUERA
PRESSURE GAUGE
960 0018-6620-030 1 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
TERMINAL BOX
CAJA DE BORNES
ALLEN SCREW
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
1010 0024-4382-010 1 SATZ SCHILDER
JUEGO DE RÓTULOS
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
17.03.2016 0024-6326-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-6426-000 1 SCHILD
PLATE
RÓTULO
Seite/Page
2066-0001-000 DECAL _ARROW
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
TYPE PLATE
0026-1571-300 4 KERBNAGEL
REMACHE ESTRIADO
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 0024-6580-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
PLATE
9074-967 RÓTULO
PROTECTIVE HOSE
MANGUERA PROTECTORA
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
18/49
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
DISTANCE SLEEVE
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-967

9074-967
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
20/49
10 2058-1467-000 4 PLATTE
2058-1015-000 PLATE
FUSS VOLLST. PLACA
FOOT, COMPL.
MACHINE FOOT
PIE DE MAQUINA
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-967

9074-967
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
22/49
10 0018-7614-920 1 DRUCKREGLER
20 0018-1763-630 1 KUGELHAHN
BALL VALVE
VÁLVULA DE BOLA
0018-1763-280 1 GRIFF
HANDLEGRIP
EMPUÑADURA
25 0018-6419-030 2 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
PRESSURE GAUGE
FILTER INSERT
CARTUCHO DE FILTRO
70 0018-6654-010 2 MAGNETSPULE
BOBINA MAGNÉTICA
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 0018-6654-040 2 GEHAEUSE
HOUSING
CARCASA
DIAPHRAGM
9074-967 MEMBRANA
100 0018-7614-930 2 MAGNETKERN
SOLENOID CORE
CONECTOR HEMBRA
130 0018-7614-910 1 SCHLAUCH
MANGUERA
17.03.2016 140 0018-6654-030 1 SATZ DICHTUNGEN
SET OF GASKETS
JUEGO DE JUNTAS
ALLEN SCREW
Seite/Page
24/49
250 0007-1987-750 1 DICHTRING
BOWL, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
260 0007-1861-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
JUEGO DE DIAFRAGMAS
REGULATING RING
REGULATING RING
REGULATING RING
REGULATING RING
300 0007-1997-750 1 DICHTRING
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
26/49
20 0007-2868-750 1 DICHTRING
2066-6600-508 GASKET
30 2066-6687-000 1 SCHEIBE
BOWL, PRE-ASSEMBLED
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
50 0007-3364-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-2069-720 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 2066-6503-000 1 RINGKOLBEN
ANNULAR PISTON
PISTÓN ANULAR
80 0007-3314-760 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
PISTON GUIDE RING
110 0007-3313-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
120 0007-3678-760 1 DICHTRING
9074-967 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
17.03.2016 140 0007-3690-840 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
150 2066-6629-010 1 VERTEILERFUSS
DISTRIBUTOR BASE
Seite/Page
160 0007-2927-750 1 DICHTRING
2066-6600-508 GASKET
170 0007-3541-750 1 DICHTRING
BOWL, PRE-ASSEMBLED
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
180 0007-2555-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
190 2066-6611-000 1 TROMMELDECKEL
BOWL TOP
TAPA DEL TAMBOR
200 2066-6663-000 68 TELLER VOLLST.
DISC, COMPL.
PLATO, COMP.
BLIND DISC
PLATO DE CIERRE
PLATO DE CIERRE
THREADED PIN
PRISIONERO
GASKET
LOCK RING
9074-967
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
29/49
10 2066-3429-010 1 SPINDEL VOLLST. 31
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
DRIVE BELT
CLUTCH SHOE
ZAPATA DEL EMBRAGUE
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-967

9074-967
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
31/49
10 2066-3410-010 1 SPINDEL
2066-3429-010 SPINDLE
20 2058-3375-000 1 LAGERDECKEL
SPINDLE, COMPL.
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
30 2058-3375-010 1 LAGERDECKEL
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 0010-5205-010 1 LAGERHUELSE
BEARING SLEEVE
9074-967

9074-967
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
33/49
10 0005-4863-000 1 FLANSCH
5289-7825-199 FLANGE
20 0005-4863-010 1 LAGERSCHILD
END SHIELD
PLATO DE COJINETE
30 0005-4863-020 1 LUEFTER
FAN
VENTILADOR
40 0005-4863-030 1 LUEFTERHAUBE
FAN COVER
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-967

9074-967
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
35/49
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-967

9074-967
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
37/49
10 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
2066-9769-010 GASKET
20 0007-1904-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 0007-1997-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
40 0007-1936-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
50 0007-1861-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-1987-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 0007-1988-750 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 80 0007-2932-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
LUBRICATING OIL
DRIVE BELT
110 0015-0082-000 1 SCHMIERFETT
GRASA LUBRICANTE
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
39/49
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-967

9074-967
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
41/49
30 0007-1904-750 4 DICHTRING
2066-9902-000 GASKET
40 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-3690-840 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
300 0007-2566-390 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
350 0007-2730-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
480 0007-2868-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
510 0007-3364-760 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 520 0007-2069-720 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
GASKET
PISTON GUIDE RING
565 0007-1780-750 4 DICHTRING
9074-967 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
570 0007-3313-760 1 DICHTRING
JUNTA ANULAR
17.03.2016 580 0007-2733-390 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
590 0007-3678-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
610 0007-3690-840 1 DICHTRING
2066-9902-000 GASKET
630 0007-2927-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
640 0007-3541-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
650 0007-2555-830 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
700 0007-2932-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
720 0007-1988-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
730 0007-1987-750 2 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 4 740 0007-1861-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
GASKET
820 0007-1936-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
900 0015-0082-000 1 SCHMIERFETT
GRASA LUBRICANTE
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
44/49
10 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
20 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
25 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-967

9074-967
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
46/49
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 4

9074-967

9074-967
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
48/49
10 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
20 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
25 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
CLUTCH SHOE
ZAPATA DEL EMBRAGUE

9074-967
Ausgabe / Edition
17.03.2016
Seite/Page
P1/PX1 Engineering
Operation &
Original™ Series METAL Pumps Maintenance
Simplify your process
LISTED
79
WIL-10300-E-15
REPLACES WIL-10300-E-14
TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S
SECTION 1 CAUTIONS—READ FIRST! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
SECTION 2 WILDEN PUMP DESIGNATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
SECTION 3 HOW IT WORKS—PUMP & AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
SECTION 4 DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
SECTION 5 PERFORMANCE
A. P1 Performance Curves
Rubber-Fitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
TPE-Fitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
PTFE-Fitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
B. PX1 Performance
Operating Principal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
How to Use this EMS Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Performance Curves
Rubber-Fitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
TPE-Fitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
PTFE-Fitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
C. Suction Lift Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
SECTION 6 SUGGESTED INSTALLATION, OPERATION & TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . .20
SECTION 7 ASSEMBLY / DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Grounding Strap for CSA Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
SECTION 8 EXPLODED VIEW & PARTS LISTING

P1 Rubber/TPE-Fitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
P1 PTFE-Fitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
PX1 Rubber-Fitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
PX1 PTFE-Fitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
SECTION 9 ELASTOMER OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
II Ozone
I&
ss
N
Cla
NO C
ir A
n A 199
lea nts of
ct 0
es
.
U.S ndme
SEbs
e
Am
nc
ep U
D
ta
leting Su
Section 1
CAUTIONS—READ FIRST!
CAUTION: Do not apply compressed air to the exhaust port CAUTION: The process fluid and cleaning fluids must be
— pump will not function. chemically compatible with all wetted pump components.
Consult Chemical Resistance Guide (E4).
CAUTION: Do not over-lubricate air supply — excess
lubrication will reduce pump performance. Pump is pre-lubed. CAUTION: Do not exceed 82°C (180°F) air inlet temperature
for Pro-Flo X™ models.
CAUTION: Do not under any circumstance loosen the set
screw located at the adjuster dial of the Pro-Flo X™ pump. If CAUTION: Pumps should be thoroughly flushed before
the set screw is loose when the pump is pressurized, it could installing into process lines. FDA and USDA approved pumps
eject and cause injury to anyone in the area. should be cleaned and/or sanitized before being used.
TEMPERATURE LIMITS: CAUTION: Always wear safety glasses when operating

Neoprene –17.7°C to 93.3°C 0°F to 200°F pump. If diaphragm rupture occurs, material being pumped may
Buna-N –12.2°C to 82.2°C 10°F to 180°F be forced out air exhaust.
EPDM –51.1°C to 137.8°C –60°F to 280°F CAUTION: Before any maintenance or repair is attempted,
Viton® –40°C to 176.7°C –40°F to 350°F the compressed air line to the pump should be disconnected
Saniflex™ –28.9°C to 104.4°C –20°F to 220°F and all air pressure allowed to bleed from pump. Disconnect
Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) all intake, discharge and air lines. Drain the pump by turning
4.4°C to 104.4°C 40°F to 220°F it upside down and allowing any fluid to fl ow into a suitable
Polyurethane –12.2°C to 65.6°C 10°F to 150°F container.
Tetra-Flex™ PTFE w/Neoprene Backed CAUTION: Blow out air line for 10 to 20 seconds before
4.4°C to 107.2°C 40°F to 225°F attaching to pump to make sure all pipeline debris is clear. Use
Tetra-Flex™ PTFE w/EPDM Backed an in-line air filter. A 5µ (micron) air filter is recommended.
-10°C to 137°C 14°F to 280°F NOTE: When installing PTFE diaphragms, it is important
to tighten outer pistons simultaneously (turning in opposite
NOTE: Not all materials are available for all models. Refer to directions) to ensure tight fi t. (See torque specifications in
Section 2 for material options for your pump. Section 7.)
NOTE: Canadian Standards Association (CSA) configured NOTE: Cast Iron PTFE-fi tted pumps come standard from the
pumps should not be used in temperatures lower than 0.0ºC to factory with expanded PTFE gaskets installed in the diaphragm
51.6ºC (32ºF to 125ºF). bead of the liquid chamber. PTFE gaskets cannot be re-used.
NOTE: UL listed configured pumps have the following Consult PS-TG for installation instructions during reassembly.
temperature limits: NOTE: Before starting disassembly, mark a line from each
UL 79 Buna- -12.2°C (10°F) to 52°C (125°F) liquid chamber to its corresponding air chamber. This line will
CAUTION: When choosing pump materials, be sure to check assist in proper alignment during reassembly.
the temperature limits for all wetted components. Example: CAUTION: Pro-Flo ® pumps cannot be used in submersible
Viton ® has a maximum limit of 176.7°C (350°F) but polypropylene applications. Pro-Flo X™ is available in both submersible and
has a maximum limit of only 79°C (175°F). non-submersible options. Do not use non-submersible Pro-Flo
CAUTION: Maximum temperature limits are based upon X™ models in submersible applications. Turbo-Flo ® pumps can
mechanical stress only. Certain chemicals will significantly also be used in submersible applications.
reduce maximum safe operating temperatures. Consult CAUTION: Tighten all hardware prior to installation.
Chemical Resistance Guide (E4) for chemical compatibility and
temperature limits.
CAUTION: The gas outlet of CSA configured pumps must be
WARNING: Prevention of static sparking — If static sparking vented to a safe location in accordance with local codes or, in
occurs, fire or explosion could result. Pump, valves, and the absence of local codes, an industry or nationally recognized
containers must be grounded to a proper grounding point when code having jurisdiction over the specified installation.
handling flammable fluids and whenever discharge of static
electricity is a hazard. CAUTION: For U.L. listed pumps, all pipe connections are to be
made using U.L. classified gasoline-resistant pipe compound.
CAUTION: Canadian Standards Association (CSA) configured
pumps must be electrically grounded using the grounding CAUTION: For U.L. listed pumps all installations must conform
location identified. Improper grounding can cause improper to NFPA 30, NFPA 30A, and all other applicable codes.
and dangerous operation.
CAUTION: For U.L. listed pumps, air exhaust port is to be
CAUTION: Do not exceed 8.6 bar (125 psig) air supply connected to pipe or tubing to be routed outdoors or other
pressure. location determined to be equivalent.
CAUTION: Canadian Standards Association (CSA) configured CAUTION: For U.L. listed pumps, pump is to be grounded
pumps should not exceed 6.9 bar (100 psig) sweet gas supply using the jam-nut located at the top of the long vertical carriage
pressure. bolt. The ground connection is marked with a tag having the
grounding symbol.
CAUTION: For U.L. listed pumps, do not exceed 3.4 bar (50
psig) air supply pressure.
Grounding Symbol
WIL-10300-E-15 1 WILDEN PUMP & ENGINEERING, LLC

Section 2
W IL DEN PUMP DESIGN AT ION SYS T EM
P1/PX1 ORIGINAL™ LEGEND xPX1 / X X X X X / XXX / XX / X XX / XXXX

METAL
O-RINGS
13 mm (½") Pump MODEL VALVE SEAT SPECIALTY
CODE
VALVE BALLS
Maximum Flow Rate: ATEX DIAPHRAGMS
AIR VALVE
(if applicable)
62.8 lpm (16.6 gpm) CENTER SECTION

WETTED PARTS & OUTER PISTON
MATERIAL CODES
MODEL AIR VALVE VALVE BALL
®
P1 = Pro-Flo A = ALUMINUM (PX1 only) BN = BUNA-N (Red Dot)
PX1 = Pro-Flo X™ G = CONDUCTIVE ACETAL (P1 FS = SANIFLEX™
®
XPX1 = ATEX Pro-Flo XTM only) [Hytrel (Cream)]
J = CONDUCTIVE PU = POLYURETHANE (Brown)
WETTED PARTS & OUTER PISTON POLYPROPYLENE (P1 only) TF = PTFE (White)
®
AA = ALUMINUM / ALUMINUM L = ACETAL (P1 only) VT = VITON (White Dot)
®
AZ = ALUMINUM / NO PISTON P = POLYPROPYLENE (P1 only) WF = WIL-FLEX™ [Santoprene
SS = STAINLESS STEEL / (Orange Dot)]
STAINLESS STEEL DIAPHRAGMS EP = EPDM (Blue Dot)
SZ = STAINLESS STEEL / XBS = CONDUCTIVE BUNA-N
NO PISTON (Two Red Dots) VALVE SEAT
BNS = BUNA-N (Red Dot) A = ALUMINUM
CENTER SECTION FSS = SANIFLEX™ S = STAINLESS STEEL
® ®
AA = ALUMINUM (PX1 only) [Hytrel (Cream)] V = VITON (White Dot)
GG = CONDUCTIVE ACETAL PUS = POLYURETHANE (Clear)
(P1 only) TEU = PTFE w/EPDM VALVE SEAT O-RING
JJ = CONDUCTIVE BACK-UP (White) BN = BUNA-N
POLYPROPYLENE (P1 only) THU = PTFE W/HIGH-TEMP FS = SANIFLEX™
®
LL = ACETAL (P1 only) BUNA-N BACK-UP (White) [Hytrel (Cream)]
PP = POLYPROPYLENE (P1 only) TNU = PTFE W/NEOPRENE PU = POLYURETHANE (Brown)
BACK-UP (White) TF = PTFE (White)
®
TNL = PTFE W/NEOPRENE WF = WIL-FLEX™ [Santoprene ]
BACK-UP O-RING, EP = EPDM
IPD (White)
®
VTS = VITON (White Dot)
®
WFS = WIL-FLEX™ [Santoprene
(Orange Dot)]
EPS = EPDM (Blue Dot)
SPECIALTY CODES
0023 Wing nuts 0120 Saniflo™ FDA, Wil-Gard II™ 110V
0067 Saniflo™ FDA, Wil-Gard II™ 220V 0206 PFA coated hardware, Wil-Gard II™
0070 Saniflo™ FDA sensor wires ONLY
0079 Tri-clamp fittings, wing nuts 0390 CSA Approved
0080 Tri-clamp fittings ONLY 0495 U.L. Approved
0100 Wil-Gard II™ 110V 0502 PFA coated hardware
0102 Wil-Gard II™ sensor wires ONLY 0603 PFA coated hardware, Wil Gard 110V
0103 Wil-Gard II™ 220V 0608 PFA coated hardware, Wil Gard 220V
NOTE: The Wilden UL 79 Listed products covered by this manual are PX1 models followed by AA or SS, followed by AA, followed by A, followed by
BNS, followed by BN, followed by A or S, followed by BN, followed by 0495. Wilden UL Listed pumps have been evaluated for use at a
25 C (77F) ambient temperature with a maximum inlet pressure of 3.4 Bar (50 PSI)..
WILDEN PUMP & ENGINEERING, LLC 2 WIL-10300-E-15

Section 3
HOW IT WORKS
The Wilden diaphragm pump is an air-operated, positive displacement, self-priming pump. These drawings show the flow pattern
through the pump upon its initial stroke. It is assumed the pump has no fluid in it prior to its initial stroke.
B A B A B A
OPEN
FIGURE 1 The air valve directs pressurized air to FIGURE 2 When the pressurized diaphragm, FIGURE 3 At completion of the stroke, the air valve
the back side of diaphragm A. The compressed air diaphragm A, reaches the limit of its discharge again redirects air to the back side of diaphragm A,
is applied directly to the liquid column separated by stroke, the air valve redirects pressurized air to the which starts diaphragm B on its exhaust stroke. As
elastomeric diaphragms. The diaphragm acts as a back side of diaphragm B. The pressurized air forces the pump reaches its original starting point, each
separation membrane between the compressed air diaphragm B away from the center block while pull- diaphragm has gone through one exhaust and one
and liquid, balancing the load and removing mechan- ing diaphragm A to the center block. Diaphragm B discharge stroke. This constitutes one complete
ical stress from the diaphragm. The compressed air is now on its discharge stroke. Diaphragm B forces pumping cycle. The pump may take several cycles
moves the diaphragm away from the center block of the inlet valve ball onto its seat due to the hydraulic to completely prime depending on the conditions of
the pump. The opposite diaphragm is pulled in by forces developed in the liquid chamber and mani- the application.
the shaft connected to the pressurized diaphragm. fold of the pump. These same hydraulic forces
Diaphragm B is on its suction stroke; air behind the lift the discharge valve ball off its seat, while the
diaphragm has been forced out to the atmosphere opposite discharge valve ball is forced onto its seat,
through the exhaust port of the pump. The move- forcing fluid to flow through the pump discharge.
ment of diaphragm B toward the center block of the The movement of diaphragm A toward the center
pump creates a vacuum within chamber B. Atmo- block of the pump creates a vacuum within liquid
spheric pressure forces fluid into the inlet manifold chamber A. Atmospheric pressure forces fluid into
forcing the inlet valve ball off its seat. Liquid is free the inlet manifold of the pump. The inlet valve ball is
to move past the inlet valve ball and fill the liquid forced off its seat allowing the fluid being pumped
chamber (see shaded area). to fill the liquid chamber.
HOW IT WORKS—AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
The Pro-Flo® patented air distribution system incorporates two

moving parts: the air valve spool and the pilot spool. The heart of
the system is the air valve spool and air valve. This valve design
incorporates an unbalanced spool. The smaller end of the spool
is pressurized continuously, while the large end is alternately
pressurized then exhausted to move the spool. The spool directs
pressurized air to one air chamber while exhausting the other.
The air causes the main shaft/diaphragm assembly to shift to
one side — discharging liquid on that side and pulling liquid in
on the other side. When the shaft reaches the end of its stroke,
the inner piston actuates the pilot spool, which pressurizes and
exhausts the large end of the air valve spool. The repositioning
of the air valve spool routes the air to the other air chamber.

Section 4
DIMENSIONAL DR AWINGS
P1 METAL
DIMENSIONS
ITEM METRIC (mm) STANDARD (inch)
A 208 8.2
B 28 1.1
C 130 5.1
D 198 7.8
E 224 8.8
F 53 2.1
G 114 4.5
H 206 8.1
J 262 10.3
K 130 5.1
L 30 1.2
M 137 5.4
N 109 4.3
P 84 3.3
R 102 4.0
S 8 0.3
T 203 8.0
U 142 5.6
V 112 4.4
BSPT threads available. REV. E
P1 METAL SANIFLO F DA
DIMENSIONS
A 203 8.0
B 53 2.1
C 130 5.1
D 218 8.6
E 257 10.1
F 53 2.1
G 114 4.5
H 114 4.5
J 287 11.3
K 130 5.1
L 84 3.3
M 102 4.0
N 84 3.3
P 142 5.6
R 8 0.3
REV. D

DIMENSIONAL DR AWINGS
PX1 METAL DIMENSIONS

A 208 8.2
B 28 1.1
C 130 5.1
D 198 7.8
E 224 8.8
F 41 1.6
G 132 5.2
H 221 8.7
J 361 14.2
K 132 5.2
L 30 1.2
M 137 5.4
N 109 4.3
P 84 3.3
R 102 4.0
S 8 0.3
T 203 8.0
U 142 5.6
V 112 4.4
BSPT threads available. REV. A
PX1 METAL SANIFLO FDA

DIMENSIONS
A 203 8.0
B 53 2.1
C 130 5.1
D 218 8.6
E 257 10.1
F 41 1.6
G 114 4.5
H 132 5.2
J 386 15.2
K 132 5.2
L 84 3.3
M 102 4.0
N 112 4.4
P 142 5.6
R 8 0.3
REV. D

Section 5A
PERFORMANCE
P1 METAL
RUBBER-FITTED
Height .................................... 224 mm (8.8")
Width ..................................... 208 mm (8.2")
Depth .................................... 206 mm (8.1")
Ship Weight ................. Aluminum 6 kg (13 lbs)
Stainless Steel 9 kg (20 lbs)
Air Inlet ...................................... 6 mm (1/4")
Inlet .........................................13 mm (1/2")
Outlet ...................................... 13 mm (1⁄2")
Suction Lift ........................ 5.8 m Dry (19.0')
9.5 m Wet (31.0')
Displacement per Stroke . .11 l (0.029 gal.)1
Max. Flow Rate ........... 58.67 lpm (15.5 gpm)
Max. Size Solids .................1.59 mm (1/16")
1Displacement per stroke was calculated at 4.8 Bar
(70 psig) air inlet pressure against a 2 Bar (30 psig)
head pressure.
Example: To pump 18.9 lpm (5 gpm) against
a discharge pressure head of 2.7 Bar (40 Flow rates indicated on chart were determined by pumping water.
psig) requires 4 Bar (60 psig) and 5.92 Nm3/h
(3.5 scfm) air consumption. (See dot on For optimum life and performance, pumps should be specified so that daily operation parameters
chart.) will fall in the center of the pump performance curve.
Caution: Do not exceed 8.6 Bar (125 psig) air
supply pressure.
P1 METAL
TPE-FITTED
Height.................................... 224 mm (8.8")
Width ..................................... 208 mm (8.2")
Depth .................................... 206 mm (8.1")
Stainless Steel 9 kg (20 lbs)
Air Inlet ...................................... 6 mm (1/4")
Inlet .........................................13 mm (1/2")
Outlet ......................................13 mm (1/2")
9.5 m Wet (31.0')
(70 psig) air inlet pressure against a 2 Bar (30 psig)
head pressure.
a discharge pressure head of 2.7 Bar (40
psig) requires 4 Bar (60 psig) and 5.92 Nm3/h Flow rates indicated on chart were determined by pumping water.
supply pressure.

PERFORMANCE
P1 METAL
PTFE-FITTED
Height.................................... 224 mm (8.8")
Width ..................................... 208 mm (8.2")
Depth .................................... 206 mm (8.1")
Stainless Steel 9.2 kg (20 lbs)
Air Inlet ...................................... 6 mm (1/4")
Inlet .........................................13 mm (1/2")
Outlet ......................................13 mm (1/2")
9.5 m Wet (31.0')
(70 ) air inlet pressure against a 2 Bar (30 psig)
head pressure.
a discharge pressure head of 2.7 Bar (40 Flow rates indicated on chart were determined by pumping water.
psig) requires 4 Bar (60 psig) and 5.92 Nm3/h
supply pressure.

?
Finding Sleep easier with
ASpares
Nightmare
Spectrom is not your typical after market part
Spectrom
supplier.
supplie We do not simply sell pump parts; we
PRODUCTS: provide
pro value added procurement solutions.
AODDP Our
O unique network enables us to pur-
(Air Operated Double
Diaphragm Pumps) chase
c effectively, resulting in low cost
• Warren-Rupp®
• ARO®
solutions.
so We also know that low purchase
• Other pprice
ric is not enough - quality, integrity and
iinventory
nvento are also important. Spectrom is struc-
turedd to pprovide Pre and Post sales support, giving
ture
our customers
cust value added application and pump
knowledge.
know
P
PUMP PARTS Contact
C us to have a procurement solution
(
(Low Cost)
• Diaphragms
developed
d for you. We don’t just fit you
• Valve balls into
in a generic system, we develop specific
• Valve seats
solutions
so that achieve results.
Spectr
Spectrom will ship your order from
our facility
our fa within 3 working days!
KNOWLEDGE
W
WARNING: These parts may exhibit
& SERVICE
• Competitive pricing
be
better life than OEM parts.
• Delivery
• Service
• Inventory
1-909-512-1261 www.spectromparts.com
PX1
M E T A L
PX1 PERFORMANCE
Section 5B
Pro-Flo XTM Operating Principal

The Pro-Flo X™ air distribution system with the operator can select the optimal balance of flow and
revolutionary Efficiency Management System (EMS) efficiency that best meets the application needs.
offers flexibility never before seen in the world of Pro-Flo X™ provides higher performance, lower
AODD pumps. The operational costs
patent-pending and flexibility that
EMS is simple and exceeds previous
easy to use. With the industry standards.
turn of an integrated
control dial, the
AIR CONSUMPTION
$ $$
Turning the dial Each dial setting Pro-Flo X™ pumps Moving the dial When the air
changes the represents an are shipped from from setting 4 consumption
relationship entirely different the factory on causes a decrease decreases more
between air inlet flow curve setting 4, which in flow and an even than the flow
and exhaust is the highest greater decrease in rate, efficiency
porting. flow rate setting air consumption. is improved and
possible operating costs
are reduced.
WILDEN PUMP & ENGINEERING, LLC 10 PX1 Performance

HOW TO USE THIS EMS CURVE
Example 1
SETTING 4 PERFORMANCE CURVE EMS CURVE
Figure 1 Figure 2
0.58 flow multiplier
Example data point = 8.2 GPM Example data point =
0.48 air multiplier
This is an example showing how to determine flow rate and curve, draw vertical lines downward until
air consumption for your Pro-Flo X™ pump using the Efficien- reaching the bottom scale on the chart. This
cy Management System (EMS) curve and the performance
identifies the flow X Factor (in this case, 0.58)
curve. For this example we will be using 4.1 bar (60 psig) inlet
air pressure and 2.8 bar (40 psig) discharge pressure and EMS and air X Factor (in this case, 0.48).
setting 2.
Step 3: Calculating performance for specific EMS
Step 1: Identifying performance at setting 4. Locate setting. Multiply the flow rate (8.2 gpm)
the curve that represents the flow rate of the obtained in Step 1 by the flow X Factor multi-
pump with 4.1 bar (60 psig) air inlet pressure. plier (0.58) in Step 2 to determine the flow rate
Mark the point where this curve crosses the at EMS setting 2. Multiply the air consump-
horizontal line representing 2.8 bar (40 psig) tion (9.8 scfm) obtained in Step 1 by the air
discharge pressure. (Figure 1). After locating X Factor multiplier (0.48) in Step 2 to deter-
your performance point on the flow curve, mine the air consumption at EMS setting 2
draw a vertical line downward until reaching (Figure 3).
the bottom scale on the chart. Identify the flow
rate (in this case, 8.2 gpm). Observe location 8.2 gpm (flow rate for Setting 4)
of performance point relative to air consump-
tion curves and approximate air consumption
.58 (Flow X Factor setting 2)
value (in this case, 9.8 scfm). 4.8 gpm (Flow rate for setting 2)
Step 2: Determining flow and air X Factors. Locate 9.8 scfm (air consumption for setting 4)
your discharge pressure (40 psig) on the verti-
cal axis of the EMS curve (Figure 2). Follow
.48 (Air X Factor setting 2)
along the 2.8 bar (40 psig) horizontal line until 4.7 scfm (air consumption for setting 2)
intersecting both flow and air curves for your
Figure 3
desired EMS setting (in this case, setting 2).
Mark the points where the EMS curves inter- The flow rate and air consumption at Setting
sect the horizontal discharge pressure line. 2 are found to be 18.2 lpm (4.8 gpm) and 7.9
After locating your EMS points on the EMS Nm3/h (4.7 scfm) respectively.
PX1 Performance 11 WILDEN PUMP & ENGINEERING, LLC

Example 2.1
EMS Flow
Settings 1 & 2
Figure 4 Figure 5
Example data point = 10.2 gpm 0.49 flow multiplier
This is an example showing how to determine the inlet air In our example it is 38.6 lpm (10.2 gpm). This
pressure and the EMS setting for your Pro-Flo X™ pump to is the setting 4 flow rate. Observe the loca-
optimize the pump for a specific application. For this exam- tion of the performance point relative to air
ple we will be using an application requirement of 18.9 lpm
consumption curves and approximate air
(5 gpm) flow rate against 2.8 bar (40 psig) discharge pressure.
This example will illustrate how to calculate the air consump- consumption value. In our example setting
tion that could be expected at this operational point. 4 air consumption is 24 Nm3/h (14 scfm).
See figure 4.
DETERMINE EMS SETTING
Step 3: Determine flow X Factor. Divide the required
Step 1: Establish inlet air pressure. Higher air pres-
flow rate 18.9 lpm (5 gpm) by the setting 4 flow
sures will typically allow the pump to run
rate 38.6 lpm (10.2 gpm) to determine the flow
more efficiently, however, available plant air
X Factor for the application.
pressure can vary greatly. If an operating
pressure of 6.9 bar (100 psig) is chosen when 5 gpm / 10.2 gpm = 0.49 (flow X Factor)
plant air frequently dips to 6.2 bar (90 psig)
pump performance will vary. Choose an oper- Step 4: Determine EMS setting from the flow
ating pressure that is within your compressed X Factor. Plot the point representing the flow
air systems capabilities. For this example we X Factor (0.49) and the application discharge
will choose 4.1 bar (60 psig). pressure 2.8 bar (40 psig) on the EMS curve.
This is done by following the horizontal 2.8
Step 2: Determine performance point at setting 4. For bar (40 psig) psig discharge pressure line until
this example an inlet air pressure of 4.1 bar it crosses the vertical 0.49 X Factor line. Typi-
(60 psig) inlet air pressure has been chosen. cally, this point lies between two flow EMS
Locate the curve that represents the perfor- setting curves (in this case, the point lies be-
mance of the pump with 4.1 bar (60 psig) inlet tween the flow curves for EMS setting 1 and
air pressure. Mark the point where this curve 2). Observe the location of the point relative
crosses the horizontal line representing 2.8 to the two curves it lies between and approxi-
bar (40 psig) discharge pressure. After locat- mate the EMS setting (figure 5). For more pre-
ing this point on the flow curve, draw a verti- cise results you can mathematically interpo-
cal line downward until reaching the bottom late between the two curves to determine the
scale on the chart and identify the flow rate. optimal EMS setting.
For this example the EMS setting is 1.8.
WILDEN PUMP & ENGINEERING, LLC 12 PX1 Performance
Example 2.2
EMS Air
Settings 1 & 2
Figure 6 Figure 7
Example data point = 10.2 gpm Example data point = 0.40 air multiplier
Determine air consumption at a specific Step 2: Determine air consumption. Multiply your
EMS setting. setting 4 air consumption (14 scfm) value by
the air X Factor obtained above (0.40) to deter-
Step 1: Determine air X Factor. In order to determine mine your actual air consumption.
the air X Factor, identify the two air EMS set-
ting curves closest to the EMS setting estab- 14 scfm x 0.40 = 5.6 SCFM
lished in example 2.1 (in this case, the point lies
In summary, for an application requiring 18.9 lpm
between the air curves for EMS setting 1 and
(5 gpm) against 2.8 bar (40 psig) discharge pressure,
2). The point representing your EMS setting
the pump inlet air pressure should be set to 4.1 bar
(1.8) must be approximated and plotted on the
(60 psig) and the EMS dial should be set to 1.8. The
EMS curve along the horizontal line represent-
pump would then consume 9.5 Nm3/h (5.6 scfm) of
ing your discharge pressure (in this case, 40
compressed air.
psig). This air point is different than the flow
point plotted in example 2.1. After estimating
(or interpolating) this point on the curve, draw
a vertical line downward until reaching the
bottom scale on the chart and identify the air
X Factor (figure 7).
For this example the air X Factor is 0.40

WILDEN PUMP & ENGINEERING, LLC
PX1 METAL RUBBER-FITTED

PERFORMANCE
14
TECHNICAL DATA EXAMPLE

The Efficiency Management System (EMS)
Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 mm (8.8”) can be used to optimize the performance of A PX1 metal, Rubber-fitted pump operating at EMS setting 4,
Width. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 mm (8.2”) your Wilden pump for specific applications. achieved a flow rate of 56.8 lpm (15.0 gpm) using 35.7 Nm3/h (21.0
Depth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 mm (8.7”) The pump is delivered with the EMS adjusted scfm) of air when run at 5.5 bar (80 psig) air inlet pressure and 1.4
Ship Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum 6 kg (13 lbs.) to setting 4, which allows maximum flow. bar (20 psig) discharge pressure (See dot on flow chart).
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Stainless Steel 9 kg (20 lbs.)
Air Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 mm (1/2”) The EMS curve allows the pump user to deter- The end user did not require that much flow and wanted to reduce
Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 mm (1/2”) mine flow and air consumption at each EMS air consumption at his facility. He determined that EMS setting
Outlet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 mm (1/2”) setting. For any EMS setting and discharge 2 would meet his needs. At 1.4 bar (20 psig) discharge pressure
Suction Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.9 m Dry (19.3’) pressure, the “X factor” is used as a multi- and EMS setting 2, the flow “X factor” is .66 and the air “X factor”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0 m Wet (26.1’) plier with the original values from the setting is .48.
Disp. Per Stroke. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.09 l (0.023 gal.)1 4 performance curve to calculate the actual Multiplying the original setting 4 values by the “X factors” provides
Max. Flow Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62.5 lpm (16.5 gpm) flow and air consumption values for that spe- the setting 2 flow rate of 37.5 lpm (9.9 gpm) and an air consump-
Max. Size Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 mm (1/16”) cific EMS setting. Note: you can interpolate tion of 17.2 Nm3/h (10.1 scfm). The flow rate was reduced by 34%
PX1 Performance
between the setting curves for operation at while the air consumption was reduced by 52%, thus providing
1Displacement per stroke was calculated at 4.8 intermediate EMS settings.
bar (70 psig) air inlet pressure against a 2 bar increased efficiency.
(30 psig)head pressure. For a detailed example for how to set your EMS, see beginning of
performance curve section.
Caution: Do not exceed 8.6 bar (125 psig) air supply pressure.
PX1 Performance
PX1 METAL TPE-FITTED

PERFORMANCE
15

Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 mm (8.8”) can be used to optimize the performance of A PX1 metal, TPE-fitted pump operating at EMS setting 4, achieved
Width. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 mm (8.2”) your Wilden pump for specific applications. a flow rate of 56.0 lpm (14.8 gpm) using 29.7 Nm3/h (17.5 scfm) of air
Depth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 mm (8.7”) The pump is delivered with the EMS adjusted when run at 4.8 bar (70 psig) air inlet pressure and 0.7 bar (10 psig)
Ship Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum 6 kg (13 lbs.) to setting 4, which allows maximum flow. discharge pressure (See dot on flow chart).
The end user did not require that much flow and wanted to reduce
Air Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 mm (1/2”) The EMS curve allows the pump user to deter-
Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 mm (1/2”) mine flow and air consumption at each EMS air consumption at his facility. He determined that EMS setting
Outlet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 mm (1/2”) setting. For any EMS setting and discharge 1 would meet his needs. At 0.7 bar (10 psig) discharge pressure
Suction Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.7 m Dry (18.7’) pressure, the “X factor” is used as a multi- and EMS setting 1, the flow “X factor” is .32 and the air “X factor”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 m Wet (30.6’) plier with the original values from the setting is .14.
Max. Flow Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62.8 lpm (16.6 gpm) flow and air consumption values for that spe- the setting 1 flow rate of 17.8 lpm (4.7 gpm) and an air consumption
Max. Size Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 mm (1/16”) cific EMS setting. Note: you can interpolate of 4.2 Nm3/h (2.5 scfm). The flow rate was reduced by 68% while
between the setting curves for operation at the air consumption was reduced by 86%, thus providing increased
bar (70 psig) air inlet pressure against a 2 bar efficiency.
PX1 METAL PTFE-FITTED

PERFORMANCE
16

Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 mm (8.8”) can be used to optimize the performance of A PX1 metal, PTFE-fitted pump operating at EMS setting 4, achieved
Width. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 mm (8.2”) your Wilden pump for specific applications. a flow rate of 18.9 lpm (5 gpm) using 8.83 Nm3/h (5.2 SCFM) of air
Depth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 mm (8.7”) The pump is delivered with the EMS adjusted when run at 3.2 bar (47 psig) air inlet pressure and 2.8 bar (40 psig)
Ship Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum 6 kg (13 lbs.) to setting 4, which allows maximum flow. discharge pressure (See dot on flow chart).
Air Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 mm (1/2”) The EMS curve allows the pump user to deter- The end user did not require that much flow and wanted to reduce
Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 mm (1/2”) mine flow and air consumption at each EMS air consumption at his facility. He determined that EMS setting 3
Outlet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 mm (1/2”) setting. For any EMS setting and discharge would meet his needs. At 2.8 bar (40 psig) discharge pressure and
Suction Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.7 m Dry (15.3’) pressure, the “X factor” is used as a multi- EMS setting 3, the flow “X factor” is .86 and the air “X factor” is
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0 m Wet (26.1’) plier with the original values from the setting .76.
Max. Flow Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60.9 lpm (16.1 gpm) flow and air consumption values for that spe- the setting 3 flow rate of 16.3 lpm (4.3 gpm) and an air consumption
Max. Size Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 mm (1/16”) cific EMS setting. Note: you can interpolate of 6.8 Nm3/h (4.0 scfm). The flow rate was reduced by 14% while
PX1 Performance
between the setting curves for operation at the air consumption was reduced by 24%, thus providing increased
bar (70 psig) air inlet pressure against a 2 bar efficiency.
NOTES

Tak
ec
on
tro
l of
yo
u
rp
ro
c
e ss
tod
ay wi
th
22069 Van Buren St. • Grand Terrace, CA 92313-5651

Tel 909-422-1730 • Fax 909-783-3440 • www.wildenx.com
Section 5C
SUCTION LIFT CURVE
P1 METAL
SUCTION LIFT CURVE

PX1 METAL
Suction lift curves are calibrated for pumps operating at 305 charge elbows, viscosity of pumping fluid, elevation (atmo-
m (1,000’) above sea level. This chart is meant to be a guide spheric pressure) and pipe friction loss all affect the amount
only. There are many variables which can affect your pump’s of suction lift your pump will attain.
operating characteristics. The number of intake and dis-

Section 6
SUGGES T ED INS TA L L AT ION
Wilden pumps are designed to meet the performance requirements PIPING: Final determination of the pump site should not be made
of even the most demanding pumping applications. They have until the piping challenges of each possible location have been
been designed and manufactured to the highest standards and are evaluated. The impact of current and future installations should be
available in a variety of liquid path materials to meet your chemical considered ahead of time to make sure that inadvertent restrictions
resistance needs. Refer to the performance section of this manual are not created for any remaining sites.
for an in-depth analysis of the performance characteristics of your
For U.L. listed pumps, all installation must conform with NFPA 30,
pump. Wilden offers the widest variety of elastomer options in the
NFPA 30A, and other applicable codes. All pipe connections are
industry to satisfy temperature, chemical compatibility, abrasion
to be made using U.L. classified gasoline-resistant pipe compound.
resistance and flex concerns.
Exhaust port is to be connected to pipe or tubing to be routed
The suction pipe size should be at least the equivalent or larger outdoors or other location determined to be equivalent.
than the diameter size of the suction inlet on your Wilden pump.
The best choice possible will be a site involving the shortest and
The suction hose must be non-collapsible, reinforced type as these
straightest hook-up of suction and discharge piping. Unnecessary
pumps are capable of pulling a high vacuum. Discharge piping
elbows, bends, and fittings should be avoided. Pipe sizes should
should also be the equivalent or larger than the diameter of the
be selected to keep friction losses within practical limits. All piping
pump discharge which will help reduce friction losses. It is critical
should be supported independently of the pump. In addition, the
that all fittings and connections are airtight or a reduction or loss of
piping should be aligned to avoid placing stress on the pump
pump suction capability will result.
fittings.
INSTALLATION: Months of careful planning, study, and selection
Flexible hose can be installed to aid in absorbing the forces created
efforts can result in unsatisfactory pump performance if installation
by the natural reciprocating action of the pump. If the pump is to be
details are left to chance.
bolted down to a solid location, a mounting pad placed between the
Premature failure and long term dissatisfaction can be avoided if pump and the foundation will assist in minimizing pump vibration.
reasonable care is exercised throughout the installation process. Flexible connections between the pump and rigid piping will also
assist in minimizing pump vibration. If quick-closing valves are
LOCATION: Noise, safety, and other logistical factors usually dictate
installed at any point in the discharge system, or if pulsation within
where equipment will be situated on the production floor. Multiple
a system becomes a problem, a surge suppressor (SD Equalizer®)
installations with conflicting requirements can result in congestion
should be installed to protect the pump, piping and gauges from
of utility areas, leaving few choices for additional pumps.
surges and water hammer.
Within the framework of these and other existing conditions, every
If the pump is to be used in a self-priming application, make sure
pump should be located in such a way that six key factors are
that all connections are airtight and that the suction lift is within
balanced against each other to maximum advantage.
the model’s ability. Note: Materials of construction and elastomer
ACCESS: First of all, the location should be accessible. If it’s easy material have an effect on suction lift parameters. Please refer to the
to reach the pump, maintenance personnel will have an easier time performance section for specifics.
carrying out routine inspections and adjustments. Should major
When pumps are installed in applications involving flooded suction
repairs become necessary, ease of access can play a key role in
or suction head pressures, a gate valve should be installed in the
speeding the repair process and reducing total downtime.
suction line to permit closing of the line for pump service.
AIR SUPPLY: Every pump location should have an air line large
Pumps in service with a positive suction head are most efficient
enough to supply the volume of air necessary to achieve the desired
when inlet pressure is limited to 0.5–0.7 bar (7–10 psig). Premature
pumping rate. Use air pressure up to a maximum of 8.6 bar (125
diaphragm failure may occur if positive suction is 0.7 bar (10 psig)
psig) depending on pumping requirements.
and higher.
For best results, the pumps should use a 5µ (micron) air filter,
SUBMERSIBLE APPLICATIONS: Pro-Flo X™ pumps can
needle valve and regulator. The use of an air filter before the pump
be used for submersible applications, when using the
will ensure that the majority of any pipeline contaminants will be
Pro-Flo X™ submersible option. Turbo-Flo™ pumps can also be
eliminated.
used for submersible applications.
NOTE: Canadian Standards Association (CSA) configured pumps
NOTE: Pro-Flo® and Accu-Flo™ pumps are not submersible.
should not exceed 6.9 bar (100 psig) sweet gas supply pressure.
ONLY CSA configured pumps should be operated using gas. ALL WILDEN PUMPS ARE CAPABLE OF PASSING SOLIDS. A
STRAINER SHOULD BE USED ON THE PUMP INTAKE TO ENSURE
SOLENOID OPERATION: When operation is controlled by a solenoid
THAT THE PUMP'S RATED SOLIDS CAPACITY IS NOT EXCEEDED.
valve in the air line, three-way valves should be used. This valve
allows trapped air between the valve and the pump to bleed off CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED 8.6 BAR (125 PSIG) AIR SUPPLY
which improves pump performance. Pumping volume can be PRESSURE.
estimated by counting the number of strokes per minute and then
CAUTION: CANADIAN STANDARDS ASSOCIATION (CSA)
multiplying the figure by the displacement per stroke.
CONFIGURED PUMPS SHOULD NOT EXCEED 6.9 BAR (100 PSIG)
MUFFLER: Sound levels are reduced below OSHA specifications SWEET GAS SUPPLY PRESSURE.
using the standard Wilden muffler. Other mufflers can be used
CAUTION: FOR U.L. LISTED PUMPS, DO NOT EXCEED 3.4 BAR (50
to further reduce sound levels, but they usually reduce pump
PSIG) AIR SUPPLY PRESSURE.
performance.
ELEVATION: Selecting a site that is well within the pump’s dynamic
lift capability will assure that loss-of-prime issues will be eliminated.
In addition, pump efficiency can be adversely affected if proper
attention is not given to site location.

S U G G E S T E D I N S TA L L AT I O N
This illustration is a generic
representation of an air-operated
double-diaphragm pump.
NOTE: In the event of a power failure, the shut off valve shut off valve (user supplied) installed in the air supply
should be closed, if the restarting of the pump is not line. A properly functioning valve will stop the air supply
desirable once power is regained. to the pump, therefore stopping output. This shut off
valve should be located far enough away from the
AIR OPERATED PUMPS: To stop the pump from pumping equipment such that it can be reached safely
operating in an emergency situation, simply close the in an emergency situation.

S U G G E S T E D O P E R AT I O N & M A I N T E N A N C E
OPERATION: P1 and PX1 pumps are pre-lubricated, and The P1 and PX1 pumps run solely on compressed air
do not require in-line lubrication. Additional lubrication and do not generate heat, therefore your process fluid
will not damage the pump, however if the pump is temperature will not be affected.
heavily lubricated by an external source, the pump’s NOTE: Canadian StandardsAssociation (CSA) configured
internal lubrication may be washed away. If the pump is pumps run solely on gas and do not generate heat.
then moved to a non-lubricated location, it may need to
be disassembled and re-lubricated as described in the MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTIONS: Since each
ASSEMBLY/DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS. application is unique, maintenance schedules may be
different for every pump. Frequency of use, line pressure,
Pump discharge rate can be controlled by limiting the viscosity and abrasiveness of process fluid all affect
volume and/or pressure of the air supply to the pump. A the parts life of a Wilden pump. Periodic inspections
regulator is used to control air pressure while a needle have been found to offer the best means for preventing
valve is used to control volume. Pump discharge rate unscheduled pump downtime. Personnel familiar with
can also be controlled by throttling the pump discharge the pump’s construction and service should be informed
by partially closing a valve in the discharge line of the of any abnormalities that are detected during operation.
pump. This action increases friction loss which reduces
flow rate. (See Section 5.) This is useful when the need RECORDS: When service is required, a record should be
exists to control the pump from a remote location. made of all necessary repairs and replacements. Over
When the pump discharge pressure equals or exceeds a period of time, such records can become a valuable
the air supply pressure, the pump will stop; no bypass tool for predicting and preventing future maintenance
or pressure relief valve is needed, and pump damage problems and unscheduled downtime. In addition,
will not occur. The pump has reached a “deadhead” accurate records make it possible to identify pumps
situation and can be restarted by reducing the fluid that are poorly suited to their applications.
discharge pressure or increasing the air inlet pressure.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Pump will not run or runs slowly. 2. Verify that vacuum required to lift liquid is not
greater than the vapor pressure of the material
1. Ensure that the air inlet pressure is at least 0.3 Bar
being pumped (cavitation).
(5 psig) above startup pressure and that the differential
pressure (the difference between air inlet and liquid 3. Check for sticking ball check valves. If material being
discharge pressures) is not less than 0.7 Bar (10 psig). pumped is not compatible with pump elastomers,
swelling may occur. Replace ball check valves and
2. Check air inlet filter for debris (see recommended
seats with proper elastomers. Also, as the check
installation).
valve balls wear out, they become smaller and can
3. Check for extreme air leakage (blow by) which become stuck in the seats. In this case, replace balls
would indicate worn seals/bores in the air valve, and seats.
pilot spool, main shaft.
Pump air valve freezes.
4. Disassemble pump and check for obstructions
in the air passageways or objects which would 1. Check for excessive moisture in compressed
obstruct the movement of internal parts. air. Either install a dryer or hot air generator for
compressed air. Alternatively, a coalescing filter may
5. Check for sticking ball check valves. If material being be used to remove the water from the compressed
pumped is not compatible with pump elastomers, air in some applications.
swelling may occur. Replace ball check valves and
seals with proper elastomers. Also, as the check Air bubbles in pump discharge.
valve balls wear out, they become smaller and can 1. Check for ruptured diaphragm.
become stuck in the seats. In this case, replace balls
and seats. 2. Check tightness of outer pistons (refer to Section 7).
6. Check for broken inner piston which will cause the 3. Check tightness of fasteners and integrity of
air valve spool to be unable to shift. o-rings and seals, especially at intake manifold.
7. Remove plug from pilot spool exhaust. 4. Ensure pipe connections are airtight.
Pump runs but little or no product flows. Product comes out air exhaust.
1. Check for pump cavitation; slow pump speed down 1. Check for diaphragm rupture.
to allow thick material to flow into liquid chambers. 2. Check tightness of outer pistons to shaft.
Section 7
P U M P DIS A S SE M BLY
P1 METAL
TOOLS REQUIRED: CAUTION: Before any maintenance or repair is attempted, the compressed air line
• 3/8" Box Wrench to the pump should be disconnected and all air pressure allowed to bleed from the
• 7/16" Wrench pump. Disconnect all intake, discharge, and air lines. Drain the pump by turning it
• Adjustable Wrench upside down and allowing any fluid to flow into a suitable container. Be aware of
• Vise equipped with soft any hazardous effects of contact with your process fluid.
jaws (such as plywood, NOTE: The model photographed for these instructions is a Pro-FloX™ version and
plastic or other suitable incorporates rubber diaphragms, balls, and seats.
material)
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3

Prior to disassembly, alignment Using a 7/16” box wrench, remove Next, remove the discharge
marks should be placed on the the nuts that connect the inlet and manifold from the pump.
liquid chambers and air chamber to discharge manifolds to the center
assist with proper alignment during section assembly.
reassembly.

P U M P D I S A S S E M B LY

Remove the discharge valve ball, Now the center section assembly Remove the inlet valve ball, valve
valve seat and valve seat o-ring can be removed from the inlet seat and valve seat o-ring and
and inspect for signs of wear and manifold. inspect for signs of wear and/
replace if necessary. or chemical attack. Replace if
necessary.

Using a 3/8” wrench, remove the Remove the tee section o-rings Using a 7/16” box end wrench,
small clamp band that connects the and inspect for signs of wear and/ remove the large clamp bands.
manifold elbows to the tee section. or chemical attack. Replace if With the clamp bands removed, lift
necessary. the liquid chamber away from the
center section.

P U M P D I S A S S E M B LY
Step 10 Step 11A Step 11B
Using an adjustable wrench or Due to varying torque values, one B) The diaphragm assembly and
rotating the diaphragm by hand, of the two situations will occur: shaft remain connected leaving the
remove the diaphragm assembly opposite side diaphragm assembly
A) The outer piston, diaphragm and
from the center section. within the opposite side of the
inner piston will separate from the
center section assembly.
shaft which remains connected
to the opposite side diaphragm
assembly.
GROUNDING STRAP FOR CSA PX1 PUMPS
Figure 1 Figure 2
Step 13
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) configured pumps must be
To remove the diaphragm assembly electrically grounded using the grounding strap provided (Figure 1).
from the shaft, secure shaft with Improper grounding can cause improper and dangerous operation.
soft jaws (a vise fitted with plywood To properly attach the grounding strap to a CSA configured PX1 pump,
or other suitable material) to ensure identify the designated grounding location on the muffler plate; using the
shaft is not nicked, scratched, provided self-tapping screw and grounding wire, thread the grounding
or gouged. Using an adjustable screw through the grounding wire lug, into the muffler plate and tighten
wrench, remove the diaphragm securely (figure 2). Completion of the pump grounding procedure must
assembly from shaft. Inspect all be done in accordance with local codes, or in the absence of local codes,
parts for wear and replace with an industrial or nationally recognized code having jurisdiction over the
genuine Wilden parts if necessary. specified installation.

A I R VA LV E / C E N T E R S E C T I O N D I S A S S E M B LY
TOOLS REQUIRED: CAUTION: Before any maintenance or repair is attempted, the compressed air line
to the pump should be disconnected and all air pressure allowed to bleed from the
• 3/16" Hex Head Wrench pump. Disconnect all intake, discharge, and air lines. Drain the pump by turning it
• 7/32" Hex Head Wrench upside down and allowing any fluid to flow into a suitable container. Be aware of
• Snap Ring Pliers hazardous effects of contact with your process fluid.
• O-Ring Pick

Using a 3/16” hex head wrench, Remove the air valve and muffler Remove the air valve gasket
loosen the air valve bolts. plate from the center section. and inspet for nicks, gouges
and chemical attack. Replace if
necessary with genuine Wilden
parts. Note: When installing the air
valve gasket onto the center section
assembly, position gasket with the
grooved side facing away from the
center section.


Remove muffler plate gasket and Remove air valve end cap to expose Remove air valve spool from air
inspect. Replace if necessary. air valve spool. NOTE: The end cap valve body by threading one air valve
cannot be removed until removing bolt into the end of the spool and
air valve bolts. gently sliding the spool out of the air
valve body. Inspect seals for signs of
wear and replace entire assembly if
necessary. Use caution when handling
air valve spool to prevent damaging
seals. NOTE: Seals should not be
removed from assembly. Seals are not
sold separately.

Remove pilot spool retaining snap Remove pilot spool assembly from Using an o-ring pick, gently
ring on both sides of center section center section. remove the pilot spool retaining
with snap ring pliers. o-ring from the opposite side of the notched end
of the spool. Gently remove the pilot spool from
pilot spool sleeve and inspect for nicks, gouges
and other signs of wear. Replace pilot spool
assembly or outer sleeve o-rings if necessary.
During re-assembly never insert the pilot spool
into the sleeve with the “notched” end side
first, this end incorporates the urethane o-ring
and will be damaged as it slides over the ports
cut in the pilot spool sleeve.
Step 10
Check center section shaft seals

for signs of wear. If necessary,
remove the shaft seals with an
o-ring pick and replace.
SUBMERSIBLE PRO-FLO X™
Non-Submersible Submersible
Step 1 Step 2
Install a 1/4" NPT pipe plug (00- Next, install an optional submersible air valve gasket (01-2621-
7010-08) into the pilot spool bleed 52). The submersible air valve gasket can be purchased as a
port located at the front of the spare part or included with the purchase of a new Pro-Flo X™
center section. pump.

R E A S S E M B LY H I N T & T I P S
ASSEMBLY:
Upon performing applicable maintenance to the air distribu- • Level the water chamber side of the intake/discharge
tion system, the pump can now be reassembled. Please manifold to ensure a proper sealing surface. This is most
refer to the disassembly instructions for photos and parts easily accomplished by placing them on a flat surface
placement. To reassemble the pump, follow the disassembly prior to tightening their clamp bands to the desired torque
instructions in reverse order. The air distribution system needs (see this page for torque specs).
to be assembled first, then the diaphragms and finally the • Be sure to tighten outer pistons simultaneously on PTFE-
wetted path. Please find the applicable torque specifications
fitted pumps to ensure proper torque values.
on this page. The following tips will assist in the assembly
process. • Ensure proper mating of liquid chambers to manifolds
prior to tightening vertical bolts. Overhang should be
• Clean the inside of the center section shaft bore to ensure equal on both sides.
no damage is done to new seals. • Apply a small amount of Loctite 242 to the shaft interval
• Stainless bolts should be lubed to reduce the possibility of threads before the diaphragm assembly.
seizing during tightening. • Concave side of disc spring in diaphragm assembly faces
toward shaft.
PRO-FLO® MAXIMUM TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS PRO-FLO X™ MAXIMUM TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Description of Part Maximum Torque Description of Part Maximum Torque
Air Valve, Pro-Flo® 3.1 N•m (27 in-lbs.) Air Valve, Pro-Flo X™ 11.3 N•m (100 in-lbs.)
Outer Piston 14.1 N•m (125 in) Outer Piston 14.1 N•m (125 in)
Small Clamp Band 1.7 N•m (15 in) Small Clamp Band 1.7 N•m (15 in)
Large Clamp Band (Rubber/TPE-Fitted) 9.0 N•m (80 in) Large Clamp Band (Rubber/TPE-Fitted) 9.0 N•m (80 in)
Large Clamp Band (PTFE-Fitted) 13.6 N•m (120 in) Large Clamp Band (PTFE-Fitted) 13.6 N•m (120 in)
Vertical Bolts 14.1 N•m (125 in) Vertical Bolts 14.1 N•m (125 in)
E L A S T O M E R K I T S
Program Details:
• Elastomer & ADS Repair Kits • Eliminates Order Errors

• All Sizes Available • Reduces Re-Build Time
• PTFE, Rubber & TPE Elastomers • Rejuvenates Your Pump
• One Part Number Simplifies Inventory
NOTE: See Section 9.

Section 8
E XPLODED VIE W & PARTS LISTING
P1 METAL RUBBER/ TPE-FITTED EXPLODED VIEW

P1 METAL RUBBER/ TPE-FITTED PA R T S L I S T I N G
Qty. Per P1/APPP P1/SPPP P1/SPPP/070

Item Part Description Pump P/N P/N P/N
1 Pro-Flo™ Air Valve Assembly 1
1 01-2010-20 01-2010-20 01-2010-20
2 End Cap 1 01-2332-20 01-2332-20 01-2332-20
3 O-Ring (-126), End Cap (Ø.1.362 x Ø.103) 1 01-2395-52 01-2395-52 01-2395-52
4 Gasket, Air Valve 1 01-2615-52 01-2615-52 01-2615-52
5 Screw, HSHC, Air Valve (1/4"-20 x 3") 4 01-6001-03 01-6001-03 01-6001-03
6 Nut, Hex, (1/4”-20) 4 04-6400-03 04-6400-03 04-6400-03
7 Center Section Assembly 1 01-3140-20 01-3140-20 01-3140-20
8 Bushing, Reducer 1 01-6950-20 01-6950-20 01-6950-20
9 Removable Pilot Sleeve Assembly 1 01-3880-99 01-3880-99 01-3880-99
10 Shaft Seal 2 01-3220-55 01-3220-55 01-3220-55
11 Retaining Ring 2 00-2650-03 00-2650-03 00-2650-03
12 Muffler Plate 1 01-3181-20 01-3181-20 01-3181-20
13 Gasket, Muffler Plate 1 01-3505-52 01-3505-52 01-3505-52
14 Muffler 1 02-3510-99 02-3510-99 02-3510-99
15 Shaft, Pro-Flo™ 1 01-3810-03 01-3810-03 01-3810-03
16 Disc Spring 2 01-6802-08 01-6802-08 01-6802-08
17 Inner Piston 2 01-3711-08 01-3711-08 01-3711-08
18 Outer Piston 2 01-4570-01 01-4570-03 01-4570-03
19 Liquid Chamber 2 01-5000-01 01-5000-03 01-5000-03
20 Manifold Tee Section 2 01-5160-01 01-5160-03 01-5160-03-70
21 Inlet Manifold Elbow 2 01-5220-01 01-5220-03 01-5220-03
22 Discharge Manifold Elbow 2 01-5230-01 01-5230-03 01-5230-03
23 Screw, SHCS (Chamber Bolt) (1/4"-20 x 7 3/8) 4 01-6080-03 01-6080-03 01-6080-03
24 Vertical Bolt Washer (.2811.D. x .6250.D. x .065THR) 4 01-6730-03 01-6730-03 01-6730-03
25 Vertical Bolt Nut (1/4"-20) 4 04-6400-03 04-6400-03 04-6650-03-70
26 Diaphragm 2 * * 01-1010-56
27 Valve Ball 4 * * 01-1080-56
28 Valve Seat 4 01-1120-01 01-1120-03 01-1120-03P
29 Valve Seat O-Ring 4 * * 01-1200-56
30 Manifold O-Ring (Ø.987 x Ø.103) 4 * * 01-1300-56
31 Small Clamp Band Assy. 4 01-7100-03 01-7100-03 01-7100-03P
32 Small Clamp Band Bolt 8 01-6101-03 01-6101-03 01-6101-03
33 Small Clamp Band Nut (#10-24) 8 01-6400-03 01-6400-03 01-6400-03
34 Large Clamp Band Assy. 2 01-7300-03 01-7300-03 01-7300-03
35 Large Clamp Band Bolt (1/4"-20 x 2 1/4") 4 01-6070-03 01-6070-03 01-6070-03
36 Large Clamp Band Nut (1/4"-20) 4 04-6400-03 04-6400-03 04-6650-03-70
Wing Nut (Not Shown) 4 N/A N/A 04-6651-10
1
Air Valve Assembly includes items 2 and 3.
*Refer to corresponding elastomer chart in Section 10.
070 Specialty Code = SanifloFDA
All boldface items are primary wear parts.

P1 METAL PTFE-FITTED EXPLODED VIEW

P1 METAL PTFE-FITTED PA R T S L I S T I N G
Qty Per. P1/APPP P1/SPPP P1/SPPP/070

Item Part Description Pump P/N P/N P/N
1 Pro-Flo™ Air Valve Assembly 1
1 01-2010-20 01-2010-20 01-2010-20
2 End Cap 1 01-2332-20 01-2332-20 01-2332-20
3 O-Ring (-126) (Ø.1.362 x Ø.103), End Cap 1 01-2395-52 01-2395-52 01-2395-52
4 Gasket, Air Valve 1 01-2615-52 01-2615-52 01-2615-52
5 Screw, HSHC, Air Valve (1⁄4-20 x 3") 4 01-6001-03 01-6001-03 01-6001-03
6 Nut, Hex, (1/4”-20) 4 04-6400-03 04-6400-03 04-6400-03
7 Center Section Assembly 1 01-3140-20 01-3140-20 01-3140-20
8 Bushing, Reducer 1 01-6950-20 01-6950-20 01-6950-20
9 Removable Pilot Sleeve Assembly 1 01-3880-99 01-3880-99 01-3880-99
10 Shaft Seal 2 01-3220-55 01-3220-55 01-3220-55
11 Retaining Ring 2 00-2650-03 00-2650-03 00-2650-03
12 Muffler Plate 1 01-3181-20 01-3181-20 01-3181-20
13 Gasket, Muffler Plate 1 01-3505-52 01-3505-52 01-3505-52
14 Muffler 1 02-3510-99 02-3510-99 01-3510-99
15 Shaft, Pro-Flo™ 1 01-3810-03 01-3810-03 01-3810-03
16 Disc Spring (Belleville Washer) 2 01-6802-08 01-6802-08 01-6802-08
17 Inner Piston 2 01-3711-08 01-3711-08 01-3711-08
18 Outer Piston 2 01-4570-01 01-4570-03 01-4570-03
19 Liquid Chamber 2 01-5000-01 01-5000-03 01-5000-03
20 Manifold Tee Section 2 01-5160-01 01-5160-03 01-5160-03-70
21 Inlet Manifold Elbow 2 01-5220-01 01-5220-03 01-5220-03
22 Discharge Manifold Elbow 2 01-5230-01 01-5230-03 01-5230-03
23 Screw, SHCS (Chamber Bolt) (1/4"-20 x 7 3/8) 4 01-6080-03 01-6080-03 01-6080-03
24 Vertical Bolt Washer (.2811.D. x .6250.D. x .065THR) 4 01-6730-03 01-6730-03 01-6730-03
25 Vertical Bolt Nut (1/4"-20) 4 04-6400-03 04-6400-03 04-6650-03-70
26 PTFE Primary Diaphragm 2 01-1010-55 01-1010-55 01-1010-55
27 Neoprene Backup Diaphragm 2 01-1060-51 01-1060-51 01-1060-51
28 Valve Ball 4 01-1080-55 01-1080-55 01-1080-55
29 Valve Seat 4 01-1120-01 01-1120-03 01-1120-03P
30 Valve Seat (-119) O-Ring (Ø.924 x Ø.103) 4 01-1200-55 01-1200-55 01-1200-55
31 Manifold (-120) O-Ring (Ø.987 x Ø.103) 4 01-1300-55 01-1300-55 01-1300-55
32 Small Clamp Band Assy. 4 01-7100-03 01-7100-03 01-7100-03
33 Small Clamp Band Bolt (#10-24 x 1") 8 01-6101-03 01-6101-03 01-6101-03
34 Small Clamp Band Nut (#10-24) 8 01-6400-03 01-6400-03 01-6400-03
35 Large Clamp Band Assy. 2 01-7300-03 01-7300-03 01-7300-03
36 Large Clamp Band Bolt (1/4"-20 x 2 1/4") 4 01-6070-03 01-6070-03 01-6070-03
37 Large Clamp Band Nut (1/4"-20) 4 04-6400-03 04-6400-03 04-6650-03-70
Wing Nut 4 N/A N/A 04-6651-10
1
Air Valve Assembly includes items 2 and 3.
*Refer to corresponding elastomer chart in Section 10.
All boldface items are primary wear parts.

Section 9D
PX1 METAL RUBBER-FITTED EXPLODED VIEW
ALL CIRCLED PART IDENTIFIERS ARE INCLUDED IN REPAIR KITS.

PX1 METAL RUBBER-FITTED PA R T S L I S T I N G
PX1/AAAAA PX1/SSAAA PX1/SSAAA/0070

No. Part Description Qty P/N P/N P/N
1 Pro-Flo X® Air Valve Assembly1 1 01-2030-01 01-2030-01 01-2030-01
2 End Cap 1 01-2340-01 01-2340-01 01-2340-01
3 O-Ring (-126), End Cap (Ø1.362 x Ø.103) 1 01-2395-52 01-2395-52 01-2395-52
4 Gasket, Air Valve, Pro-Flo X® 1 01-2620-52 01-2620-52 01-2620-52
5 Gasket, Muffler Plate, Pro-Flo X® 1 01-3502-52 01-3502-52 01-3502-52
6 Muffler Plate, Pro-Flo X® 1 01-3185-01 01-3185-01 01-3185-01
7 Screw, SHC, Air Valve (1/4”-20 x 3”) 4 01-6001-03 01-6001-03 01-6001-03
8 Muffler* 1 02-3512-99 02-3512-99 02-3512-99
9 Center Section Assembly, Pro-Flo X® 2 1 01-3147-01 01-3147-01 01-3147-01
10 O-Ring (-206), Air Adjustment Pin (Ø.484 x Ø.139) 1 00-1300-52 00-1300-52 00-1300-52
11 Screw, 10-32 x .50 Self-Tapping Grounding 1 04-6345-08 04-6345-08 04-6345-08
12 Shaft Seal 2 01-3220-55 01-3220-55 01-3220-55
13 Pilot Sleeve Assembly 1 01-3880-99 01-3880-99 01-3880-99
14 Pilot Spool Retaining O-Ring 2 04-2650-49-700 04-2650-49-700 04-2650-49-700
15 Retaining Ring 1 00-2650-03 00-2650-03 00-2650-03
16 Shaft 1 01-3810-03 01-3810-03 01-3810-03
17 Stud, 5/16”-18 x 1 3/8” (not shown) 2 N/A N/A 01-6150-03
18 Disc Spring 2 01-6802-08 01-6802-08 01-6802-08
19 Inner Piston 2 01-3711-08 01-3711-08 01-3711-08
20 Diaphragm 2 * * 01-1010-56
21 Outer Piston 1 01-4570-01 01-4570-03 01-4570-03P
22 Liquid Chamber 2 01-5000-01 01-5000-03 01-5000-03P
23 Inlet Manifold Elbow 2 01-5220-01 01-5220-03 01-5220-03P
24 Manifold Tee Section 2 01-5160-01 01-5160-03 01-5160-03-70P
25 Discharge Manifold Elbow 2 01-5230-01 01-5230-03 01-5230-03P
26 Ball, Valve 4 * * 01-1080-56
27 Seat, Valve 4 01-1120-01 01-1120-03 01-1120-03P
28 Valve Seat (-119) O-Ring (Ø.924 x Ø.103) 4 * * 01-1200-56
29 Bolt, Carriage (1/4”-20 x 7-3/8”) 4 01-6080-03 01-6080-03 01-6080-03
30 Washer (1/4”) 4 01-6730-03 01-6730-03 01-6730-03
31 Hex Nut (1/4”-20) 4 04-6400-03 04-6400-03 04-6651-10
32 O-Ring (-120), Manifold (Ø.987 x Ø.103) 4 * * 01-1300-56
33 Large Clamp Band 4 01-7300-03 01-7300-03 01-7300-03
34 Bolt, Carriage (1/4”-20 x 2 1/4”) 4 01-6070-03 01-6070-03 01-6070-03
35 Hex Nut (1/4”-20) 4 04-6400-03 04-6400-03 N/A
36 Small Clamp Band 8 01-7100-03 01-7100-03 01-7100-03
37 Screw, HHC (#10-24 x 1”) 8 01-6101-03 01-6101-03 01-6101-03
38 Hex Nut (#10-24) 8 01-6400-03 01-6400-03 01-6400-03
39 Grounding Strap, CSA3 1 01-8303-99 01-8303-99 N/A
Wing Nut (not shown) 4 N/A N/A 04-6651-10
1Air Valve Assembly includeds item numbers 2 and 3.
2Center Section Assembly includes items 6, 10 and 12.
3CSA pumps to use grounding strap.
For submersible Pro-Flo X™ pump, use air valve gasket 01-2621-52 and pipe plug 00-7010-08 or 00-7010-03.
0070 Specialty Code = SanifloFDAv
All boldface items are primary wear items
*NOTE: Muffler should not be used with Canadian Standards Association (CSA) pumps. The gas outlet of CSA configured
pumps must be vented to a safe location in accordance with local or, in the Absence of local codes, an industry or
nationally recognized code having jurisdiction over the specified installation.

PX1 METAL PTFE-FITTED EXPLODED VIEW
ALL CIRCLED PART IDENTIFIERS ARE INCLUDED IN REPAIR KITS.

PX1 METAL PTFE-FITTED PA R T S L I S T I N G
PX1/AAAAA PX1/SSAAA PX1/SSAAA/0070

No. Part Description Qty P/N P/N P/N
1 Pro-Flo X® Air Valve Assembly1 1 01-2030-01 01-2030-01 01-2030-01
2 End Cap 1 01-2340-01 01-2340-01 01-2340-01
3 O-Ring (-126), End Cap (Ø1.362 x Ø.103) 1 01-2395-52 01-2395-52 01-2395-52
4 Gasket, Air Valve, Pro-Flo X® 1 01-2620-52 01-2620-52 01-2620-52
5 Gasket, Muffler Plate, Pro-Flo X® 1 01-3502-52 01-3502-52 01-3502-52
6 Muffler Plate, Pro-Flo X® 1 01-3185-01 01-3185-01 01-3185-01
7 Screw, SHC, Air Valve (1/4”-20 x 3”) 4 01-6001-03 01-6001-03 01-6001-03
8 Muffler* 1 02-3512-99 02-3512-99 02-3512-99
9 Center Section Assembly, Pro-Flo X® 2 1 01-3147-01 01-3147-01 01-3147-01
10 O-Ring (-206), Air Adjustment Pin (Ø.484 x Ø.139) 1 00-1300-52 00-1300-52 00-1300-52
11 Screw, 10-32 x .50 Self-Tapping Grounding 1 04-6345-08 04-6345-08 04-6345-08
12 Shaft Seal 2 01-3220-55 01-3220-55 01-3220-55
13 Pilot Sleeve Assembly 1 01-3880-99 01-3880-99 01-3880-99
14 Pilot Spool Retaining O-Ring 2 04-2650-49-700 04-2650-49-700 04-2650-49-700
15 Retaining Ring 1 00-2650-03 00-2650-03 00-2650-03
16 Shaft 1 01-3810-03 01-3810-03 01-3810-03
17 Stud, 5/16” x 18 x 1 3/8” (not shown) 2 N/A N/A 01-6150-03
18 Disc Spring 2 01-6802-08 01-6802-08 01-6802-08
19 Inner Piston 2 01-3711-08 01-3711-08 01-3711-08
20 Diaphragm, Backup 2 01-1060-51 01-1060-51 01-1060-51
21 Diaphragm, Primary 2 01-1010-55 01-1010-55 01-1010-55
22 Outer Piston 1 01-4570-01 01-4570-03 01-4570-03P
23 Liquid Chamber 2 01-5000-01 01-5000-03 01-5000-03P
24 Inlet Manifold Elbow 2 01-5220-01 01-5220-03 01-5220-03P
25 Manifold Tee Section 2 01-5160-01 01-5160-03 01-5160-03-70P
26 Discharge Manifold Elbow 2 01-5230-01 01-5230-03 01-5230-03P
27 Ball, Valve 4 01-1080-56 01-1080-56 01-1080-56
28 Seat, Valve 4 01-1120-01 01-1120-03 01-1120-03P
29 Valve Seat (-119) O-Ring (Ø.924 x Ø.103) 4 01-1200-55 01-1200-55 01-1200-55
30 Bolt, Carriage (1/4”-20 x 7-3/8”) 4 01-6080-03 01-6080-03 01-6080-03
31 Washer (1/4”) 4 01-6730-03 01-6730-03 01-6730-03
32 Hex Nut (1/4”-20) 4 04-6400-03 04-6400-03 04-6651-10
33 O-Ring (-120), Manifold (Ø.987 x Ø.103) 4 01-1300-55 01-1300-55 01-1300-55
34 Large Clamp Band 4 01-7300-03 01-7300-03 01-7300-03
35 Bolt, Carriage (1/4”-20 x 2 1/4”) 4 01-6070-03 01-6070-03 01-6070-03
36 Hex Nut (1/4”-20) 4 04-6400-03 04-6400-03 N/A
37 Small Clamp Band 8 01-7100-03 01-7100-03 01-7100-03
38 Screw, HHC (#10-24 x 1”) 8 01-6101-03 01-6101-03 01-6101-03
39 Hex Nut (#10-24) 8 01-6400-03 01-6400-03 01-6400-03
40 Grounding Stap, CSA3 1 01-8303-99 01-8303-99 N/A
Wing Nut (not shown) 4 N/A N/A 04-6651-10
1
Air Valve Assembly includeds item numbers 2 and 3.
2 Center Section Assembly includes items 6, 10 and 12.
3
CSA pumps to use grounding strap.
For submersible Pro-Flo X™ pump, use air valve gasket 01-2621-52 and pipe plug 00-7010-08 or 00-7010-03.
All boldface items are primary wear items
*NOTE: Muffler should not be used with Canadian Standards Association (CSA) pumps. The gas outlet of CSA configured
pumps must be vented to a safe location in accordance with local or, in the Absence of local codes, an industry or
nationally recognized code having jurisdiction over the specified installation.

Section 9
ELASTOMER OPTIONS
P1 & PX1 Metal Pumps

Diaphragm VALVE BALL VALVE SEAT O-RING MANIFOLD O-RING
MATERIAL P/N P/N P/N P/N
Polyurethane 01-1010-50 01-1080-50 01-1200-50 01-1300-50
Buna-N 01-1010-52 01-1080-52 00-1260-52 01-1300-52
Viton® 01-1010-53 01-1080-53 N/A N/A
Wil-Flex™ 01-1010-58 01-1080-58 00-1260-58 00-1260-58
Saniflex™ 01-1010-56 01-1080-56 01-1200-56 01-1300-56
PTFE** 01-1010-55 01-1080-55 01-1200-55 01-1300-55
EPDM 01-1010-54 01-1080-54 00-1260-54 01-1300-54
**NOTE: An integral piston PTFE diaphragm is also available. To order this diaphragm, use part number 01-1030-55.
When using this diaphragm, no inner pistons are needed. The inner piston is integrated into the diaphragm design.

NOTES
NOTES
WARR ANT Y
Each and every product manufactured by Wilden Pump and Engineering, LLC is built to meet the highest
standards of quality. Every pump is functionally tested to insure integrity of operation.
Wilden Pump and Engineering, LLC warrants that pumps, accessories and parts manufactured or supplied by
it to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of five (5) years from date of installation or
six (6) years from date of manufacture, whichever comes first. Failure due to normal wear, misapplication, or
abuse is, of course, excluded from this warranty.
Since the use of Wilden pumps and parts is beyond our control, we cannot guarantee the suitability of any pump
or part for a particular application and Wilden Pump and Engineering, LLC shall not be liable for any consequential
damage or expense arising from the use or misuse of its products on any application. Responsibility is limited
solely to replacement or repair of defective Wilden pumps and parts.
All decisions as to the cause of failure are the sole determination of Wilden Pump and Engineering, LLC.
Prior approval must be obtained from Wilden for return of any items for warranty consideration and must be
accompanied by the appropriate MSDS for the product(s) involved. A Return Goods Tag, obtained from an
authorized Wilden distributor, must be included with the items which must be shipped freight prepaid.
The foregoing warranty is exclusive and in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied (whether written or oral)
including all implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for any particular purpose. No distributor or other
person is authorized to assume any liability or obligation for Wilden Pump and Engineering, LLC other than expressly
provided herein.
PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE AND FAX TO WILDEN
P U M P I N F O R M AT I O N
Item # Serial #
Company Where Purchased
Y O U R I N F O R M AT I O N
Company Name
Industry
Name Title
Street Address
City State Postal Code Country
Telephone Fax E-mail Web Address
Number of pumps in facility? Number of Wilden pumps?
Types of pumps in facility (check all that apply): Diaphragm Centrifugal Gear Submersible Lobe
Other
Media being pumped?
How did you hear of Wilden Pump? Trade Journal Trade Show Internet/E-mail Distributor
Other
ONCE COMPLETE, FAX TO (909) 783-3440

NOTE: WARRANTY VOID IF PAGE IS NOT FAXED TO WILDEN
In troduc tion
PUMP USER'S GUIDE II
Wilden’s Pump User’s Guide II (PUG II) was designed to familiarize

you with the operation and mechanics of Wilden air-operated double
diaphragm pumps and accessories. This guide is to be used as a
supplement to your pump’s Engineering, Operation and Maintenance
manual (EOM). The PUG II is a resource for the following: pump operation
principles, application alternatives, air distribution systems, elastomers,
pump selection, pump designation system, pump performance, pump
installation, pump operation, troubleshooting, and pump maintenance.
In addition, a list of applicable pump accessories, pump warranty, and
safety precautions are discussed.
For best results, this guide should be used in conjunction with the EOM
manual specific to your pump model.
TT4946 Pump User’s Guide II 5/06 Wilden Pump & Engineering, LLC
Table of Con ten t s
1 The Wilden Pump Total Dynamic

Air-Operated Head Calculation.......................74
Double-Diaphragm Pump ............2 Chemical Compatibility ................74
How It Works .................................3 Temperature Limitations ..............75
Pump Availability Charts ................6 Abrasion Resistance ....................75
Why Buy a Wilden .......................12 Cavitation .....................................76
2 Site Selection Total Dynamic Head Worksheet ..77
Self-Priming ..................................15 Pump Designation System ...........78
Positive Suction Head ..................15 8 Installation
Submerged ...................................15 Pre-Installation Checklist .............83
3 Air Distribution Systems Suggested Installation .................84
Turbo-Flo™....................................17 Electrical Hazards.........................86
Pro-Flo® .........................................19 Temperature Hazards ...................86
Accu-Flo™ ....................................20 Hazards Generated by Noise .......86
Solenoid Coil Options...................21 Hazardous Materials ....................87
Uni-Flo™ .......................................22 Chemical Compatibility ................87
Pro-Flo V™ ....................................23 Accu-Flo™ Installation .................87
4 Elastomers 9 Maintenance
Rubber Compounds ......................25 Disassembly/Reassembly ............91
Ultra-Flex™ Diaphragms ...........26 Inspection .....................................92
Thermoplastic Compounds...........27 Mean Time to Failure ...................92
PTFE ..............................................28 Seal Replacement .......................92
Specialty Diaphragms ..................28 Disassembly Overview .................93
5 Torque / Shaft Specs 10 Wilden Accessories
Accu-Flo™ ....................................31 SD Equalizer®
High Pressure ...............................37 Surge Dampener .......................97
Pro-Flo® .........................................38 Flow Control System II™ ..............98
Pro-Flo V™ ....................................50 Solenoid Pump Controller I™ .......99
Turbo-Flo™....................................56 Wil-Gard II™...............................100
Drum Pump Kit ...........................100
6 Diaphragm Assembly
Automatic Powder Valve ............101
Introduction ..................................63
2 for 1 System ............................101
Rubber/TPE Fitted Pumps ...........64
Air-Tech™ Pneumatic
Ultra-Flex™ Fitted Pumps.............64
Pump Controllers ....................101
PTFE-Fitted Pumps........................65
11 Troubleshooting......................105
7 Pump Selection
Pump Selection Charts .................67 12 Chemical Resistance Guide..109
Pump Size .....................................72 13 Warranty ...................................179
Solids Handling Capability ...........72 14 Safety Supplement ................181
Suction Lift ...................................72
Performance Curves .....................72
TT4946 Pump User’s Guide II 5/06 Wilden Pump & Engineering, LLC
PUMP USER'S GUIDE
The
Wilden
Pump
1
Sec tion 1 The Wilden Pump
Jim Wilden invented the first air-operated double-diaphragm pump in

1955. Wilden pumps are designed for demanding applications that
require a robust design. They are extremely reliable, easy to maintain
and offered in a variety of configurations and materials to meet your
pumping needs.
On the following pages you will learn the basic components that make
up a Wilden pump. You will also become familiar with the dynamics
of how a pump works. Included at the end of this section are pump
availability charts that categorize the Wilden pump offering. These
availability charts will assist you in picking the correct Wilden pump
for your application. For best results, this guide should be used in
conjunction with the EOM manual specific to your pump model.
TT4946 Pump User’s Guide II 5/06 1 Wilden Pump & Engineering, LLC
1 The Wilden Pump
Air-Operated Double-Diaphragm Pump
1 8
6
10
1 Air Chamber (Qty. 2) The air chamber is the chamber that houses the
air which powers the diaphragms.
2 Air Distribution System The air distribution system is the heart of
the pump. The air distribution system is the mechanism that
shifts the pump in order to create suction and discharge strokes.
Wilden Pump & Engineering, LLC 2 TT4946 Pump User’s Guide II 5/06
The Wilden Pump 1
Wilden offers Accu-Flo™, Pro-Flo®, Pro-Flo V™, and Turbo-Flo™ air

distribution systems for your specific pumping needs. Refer to the
Air Distribution Systems section for more details.
3 Outer Diaphragm Piston (Qty. 2) The outer diaphragm pistons provide
a means to connect the diaphragms to the reciprocating common
shaft and to seal the liquid side from the air side of the diaphragm.
4 Inner Diaphragm Piston (Qty. 2) The inner piston is located on the air
side of the pump and does not come into contact with the process
fluid.
5 Valve Ball (Qty. 4) Wilden air-operated pumps use suction and
discharge check valves to produce directional flow of process fluid
in the liquid chamber. The check valve balls seal and release on the
check valve seats allowing for discharge and suction of process fluid
to occur.
6 Valve Seat (Qty. 4) The removable seats provide the ball valves a site
to check.
7 Discharge Manifold Process fluid exits the pump from the discharge
port located on the discharge manifold at the top of the pump.
8 Liquid Chamber The liquid chamber is filled with the process fluid
during the suction stroke and -is emptied during the discharge
stroke. It is separated from the compressed air by the diaphragms.
9 Diaphragm The diaphragm membrane provides for separation of the
process fluid and the compressed air power source. To perform
adequately, diaphragms should be of sufficient thickness and of
appropriate material to prevent degradation or permeation in specific
process fluid applications. Wilden offers a variety of diaphragm
materials for your specific application requirements. Turn to the
elastomers section for more details.
10 Inlet Manifold Process fluid enters the pump from the intake port
located on the inlet manifold at the bottom of the pump.
1 The Wilden Pump
How It Works
The Wilden air-operated pump is a reciprocating double-diaphragm, positive
displacement type. The pump displaces fluid from one of its two liquid
chambers upon each stroke completion. The following drawings and
paragraphs detail the liquid flow pattern through the pump from its initial
unprimed position.
There are a few wetted parts (parts that contact the fluid) which are dynamic:
The two diaphragms which are connected by a common shaft, the two
inlet valve balls and the two discharge valve balls. The diaphragms act as a
separation membrane between the compressed air supply and the liquid.
Driving the diaphragms with compressed air instead of the shaft balances
the load on the diaphragm which removes mechanical stress and therefore
extends diaphragm life. The valve balls open and close on the valve seats to
direct liquid flow.
FIGURE 1 The air distribution system directs the air supply to the right air
chamber and therefore, the back side of diaphragm A. The compressed
air moves diaphragm A away from the center block toward the liquid
chamber. The opposite diaphragm
DISCHARGE
(diaphragm B) is pulled inward by the shaft
connected to the pressurized dia-phragm
(diaphragm A). Diaphragm B is now on its
suction stroke; air behind the diaphragm
has been forced out to atmosphere
through the exhaust port of the pump.
Diaphragm A is currently working against
atmospheric pressure. The movement of
diaphragm B toward the center block of
the pump creates a vacuum within liquid
chamber B. Atmospheric pressure forces INLET
fluid into the inlet manifold forcing the inlet
valve ball off its seat. Liquid is now free to B
A
move past the inlet valve ball (lower left) and
fill the liquid chamber. Figure 1 Right Stroke
The Wilden Pump 1
FIGURES 2 & 3 When the pressurized

DISCHARGE
diaphragm (diaphragm A) reaches the limit
of its discharge stroke, the air valve redirects
the compressed air supply to the back
side of diaphragm B. The pressurized air
forces diaphragm B away from the center
block while the shaft pulls diaphragm A
toward the center block. The air chamber
on side A exhausts its air to atmosphere
through the exhaust port of the pump.
Diaphragm B is now on its discharge stroke
while diaphragm A is on its suction stroke.
Diaphragm B forces the inlet valve ball INLET
(lower left) onto its seat due to the hydraulic B A
forces developed in the liquid chamber
and manifold of the pump. These same
hydraulic forces lift the discharge valve ball Figure 2 Midstroke
off its seat, while the opposite discharge
valve ball is forced onto its seat, forcing DISCHARGE
fluid to flow through the left side of the
pump and out the discharge manifold. The
movement of diaphragm A to the center
block of the pump creates a vacuum within
liquid chamber A. Atmospheric pressure
forces fluid into the inlet manifold of the
pump. The inlet valve ball (lower right) is
forced off its seat allowing the fluid to enter
the right liquid chamber.
As the pump reaches its original starting
point, each diaphragm has gone through INLET
one suction and one discharge stroke.
This movement constitutes one pumping B A
cycle. The pump will take several cycles
to completely prime depending on the Figure 3 Left Stroke
application variables.
1 The Wilden Pump
Pump Availability Charts

Original Series Pumps
Wilden’s legendary Original™ Series pumps were designed for
demanding utilitarian type of applications that require a robust design.
The clamped configuration is a classic design that evolved from 1955
with the invention of Jim Wilden’s first air operated double diaphragm
pump. The Original™ Series pumps ensure reliability without sacrificing
ease of maintenance. Wilden’s metal pump line lends itself to various
processes and waste applications. Wilden also offers a multitude of
elastomer options including PTFE, to meet your abrasion, temperature,
and chemical compatibility concerns.
®
Accu-Flo™ Pro-Flo Pro-Flo V™ Turbo-Flo™
Pump Size Plastic Metal Plastic Metal Plastic Metal Plastic Metal
6 mm (1/4") • • • •
13 mm (1/2") • • • • • •
25 mm (1") • • • • • •
38 mm (1-1/2") • • • • • • •
51 mm (2") • • • • • • •
76 mm (3") • • • • • • •
102 mm (4") • •
NOTE: Wilden Original™ Series pumps are available with polypropylene, PVDF, aluminum, cast iron and stainless
steel wetted components.
The Wilden Pump 1
Advanced Series Pumps

Wilden’s revolutionary Advanced™ Series pumps were specifically
designed for maximum performance and efficiency. The bolted
configuration of these pumps ensures product containment while the
redesigned liquid path reduces internal friction to maximize output
and efficiency. A variety of elastomer options, including PTFE, are
available to meet abrasion, temperature, and chemical compatibility
concerns. The Advanced™ Series metal pumps are offered in die cast
aluminum, stainless steel and alloy C. Advanced™ Series plastic pumps
are offered in polypropylene, PVDF and PFA. A variety of options such
as ANSI and DIN flanges and specialized air distribution systems are
available to meet your specific application requirements
®
Accu-Flo™ Pro-Flo Pro-Flo V™
Pump Size Plastic Metal Plastic Metal Plastic Metal
6 mm (1/4") • • • •
10 mm (3/8") • •
13 mm (1/2") • • • •
25 mm (1") • • • • •
38 mm (1-1/2") • • • •
51 mm (2") • • • •
76 mm (3") • • •
NOTE: Wilden Advanced™ pumps are available with polypropylene, PVDF, PFA, aluminum, stainless steel and
alloy C wetted components.
1 The Wilden Pump
Saniflo™ Series Pump

The Saniflo™ Series pump line is specifically designed to meet the
strict guidelines established for sanitary process applications. Saniflo™
pumps incorporate a straight flow-through design, large solids passage
and efficiencies to insure process success. Saniflo™ pumps have a
shear sensitive operation, Tri-clamp® style fittings and are offered in
various surface finishes. The Saniflo™ pump line also offers pumps that
are CIP (clean in place) and COP (clean on of plate) for ease of use and
maintenance. Wilden is consistently meeting and exceeding industry
standards by having the certifications needed (FDA, USDA, 3A) in order
to help refine your process.
Vacuum
FDA USDA 3A
Controlled
Pump Size Metal
13 mm (1/2") •
25 mm (1") • •
38 mm (1-1/2") •
51 mm (2") • •
76 mm (3") •
102 mm (4") •
152 mm (6") •
203 mm (8") •
NOTE: Saniflo™ Series vacuum controlled pumps are available with 304 stainless steel and 316 stainless steel
wetted components.
The Wilden Pump 1
Tha BioPharm™ Series Pump

The BioPharm™ Series pump line offers high purity process pumps
that improve your process efficiencies to meet the ever-increasing
demands put on your systems. CFR 21 certified materials with
complete tractability available specific request, so you can feel secure
in your decision to rely on Wilden pharmaceutical pumps. With factory
staff that is trained and certified in the construction of pharmaceutical
and waste processing pumps, you can feel confident your products
are safe with us. Our quality programs ensure safe and reliable Wilden
pumps that will serve you well for years to come.
®
Accu-Flo™ Pro-Flo Pro-Flo V™ Turbo-Flo™
Pump Size Metal
13 mm (1/2") • • •
25 mm (1") • • •
38 mm (1-1/2") • • •
51 mm (2") • • •
76 mm (3") • • •
NOTE: Wilden BioPharm™ Series pumps are available with stainless steel or alloy C wetted components.
1 The Wilden Pump
UNITEC™ Series Pump

The UNITEC™ series includes a complete line of versatile pumps made
for nearly any process and waste application. With their machined
sealing surfaces and superior product containment, the UNITEC™
pumps will exceed your expectations about how an air-operated double-
diaphragm pump should perform. Put the latest Wilden technology to
the test. By adding new materials to Wilden’s already extensive line of
products, the PTFE and polyethylene pumps in the UNITEC™ series
extend the application limits where an air-operated double-diaphragm
pump (AODDP) can be used. The conductive plastic pumps in the
UNITEC™ series are designed to safely discharge static electricity
when hazardous static build-up is present in a process system. The
pump’s ability to safely discharge this static electricity also meets the
ATEX 100 directive standards for Europe.
UA UB UC UH UU XUX
Pump Size Plastic Metal Plastic Metal Plastic Metal Plastic Metal Plastic Metal Plastic Metal
6 mm (1/4") •
10 mm (3/8") • • •
13 mm (1/2") • • • • • •
19 mm (3/4") •
25 mm (1") • • • • • •
32 mm (1-1/4") • •
38 mm (1-1/2") • • •
51 mm (2") •
NOTE: Wilden Unitec™ Series pumps are available with polyethylene, conductive polyethylene, conductive PTFE,
ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene, stainless steel and PTFE.
The Wilden Pump 1
Wilden Specialty Pumps

Wilden Specialty pumps are designed with unique features and
benefits for specialized applications. Wilden has the infrastructure and
intellectual capital to solve your application problems with knowledge,
service and products. If your application requires a pump or a feature
not presented on this site, please contact us at (909) 422-1730 to
discuss its feasibility. Wilden has many resources available to solve
your application challenges and is ready to meet your toughest
pumping needs.
®
High Pressure Stallion
Pump Size H25/H38 H400S H800 UH Turbo-Flo™
6 mm (1/4") •
10 mm (3/8") •
13 mm (1/2") •
25 mm (1") •
38 mm (1-1/2") • • •
51 mm (2") • •
76 mm (3") •
NOTE: The Rhino™ high pressure pump is available with aluminum wetted components and reaches discharge
pressures up to 221 bar (3,200 psi). The H400 high pressure pump is available with aluminum and stainless steel
wetted components and reaches discharge pressure up to 17.2 bar (250 psi). The H800 high pressure pump is avail-
able with stainless steel wetted components and reaches discharge pressure up to 17.2 bar (250 psi).
UH high pressure pumps are available with ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene and reach discharge pres-
sures up to 16 bar (230 psi). Stallion® pumps are available with aluminum wetted components and passes solids
up to 25.4 mm (1").
1 The Wilden Pump
Why Buy a Wilden Pump?

Since 1955 Wilden has been the market leader in AODDPs. Wilden
is deeply committed to the pursuit of excellence, research &
development, customer satisfaction and market knowledge. As a
premiere organization, Wilden has the infrastructure, knowledge base
and intellectual capital to exceed customer expectations worldwide.
Wilden pumps are self-priming, can handle viscous and abrasive
products, can run dry without damage and are capable of passing up
to 152 mm (6") solids. Wilden pumps do not employ costly motors,
variable speed drives, by-pass plumbing or mechanical trip rods. Please
see the matrix below for a comparison of the Wilden AODDP versus
Rotary and Centrifugal pumps:
Feature
Viscous Fluids Handling

Abrasives Handling
Maintenance Costs
Shear Sensitivity
Solids Handling
A = Excellent
Solid Passage
Dry Priming
B = Good
C = Fair
D = Poor
Wilden Pumps A A A A A A A
Vane Pumps D D D A B C C
Internal Gear Pumps D D B B C A D
Pump Type
External Gear Pumps D D D B C A D

Lobe Pumps A C B C C A D
Centrifugal Pumps D D B B C D B
Progressive Cavity Pumps D C A B A A D
Piston/Plunger Pumps C D B C A A D
PUMP USER'S GUIDE
Site
Selection
2
Sec tion 2 Site Selection
Self-Priming
The Wilden pump is capable of pulling high vacuum.
Design characteristics enable the pump to run dry
without damage to create a pressure
differential. This pressure differential
creates suction lift up to 9.5 m (31.2’) of
water. Suction lift capability is dependent
on pump size and operating conditions (see
the Suction Lift Curves
and Data Section of
your EOM).
Positive Suction Head

The pumping system can be
designed so that a positive
suction head condition is
created. This condition is
experienced when it is necessary
to draw off the bottom of holding
tanks, mixing tanks, clarifiers, etc. Pumps operate
most efficiently and parts life is maximized when
inlet pressure is limited to .68 bar (10 psig).
Submerged
Many Wilden pumps can be
completely submerged. The pump’s
materials of construction must be
chemically compatible with the
process fluid and the air exhaust
must be plumbed to atmosphere.
PUMP USER'S GUIDE
Air
Distribution
Systems
3
Sec tion 3 Air Distribution Systems
The following section represents a quick overview of the heart of the

pump: the air distribution system. The pump’s air distribution system
alternately routes air supply from one side of the pump to the next,
shifting the pump. Wilden Pump offers five different air distribution
systems to meet your specific pumping needs: Turbo-Flo™, Pro-Flo®,
Accu-Flo™, Uni-Flo™ and Pro-Flo V™.
Turbo-Flo™
The patented Wilden Turbo-Flo™
air distribution system consists
of a ported air valve body which
houses a piston. This piston is the
only moving component of the air
distribution system. The system
utilizes differential pressure only to
shift the pump. There are no mechanical trip rods, bearings, or springs
to repair due to wear. The air valve attaches to a center block which has
matching ports. As air is supplied to the air valve, differential pressure
causes the piston to move vertically. The vertical movement alternately
supplies the power ports with pressurized air. The ports then direct the
air to the back side of the diaphragms. Air valve tolerances allow for
the passage of some moisture and air line particulates allowing free
movement of the piston. The Turbo-Flo™ air distribution system utilizes
Glyd™ rings. Glyd™ rings are PTFE composite seals that offer long-
lasting chemically resistant center block seals. The Turbo-Flo™ straight
shaft used in conjunction with the Glyd™ rings enhances sealing
characteristics and improves pump life. The anodized hollow aluminum
piston provides a clean crisp shift. All air valve components can be
inspected without disassembling the pump.
3 Air Distribution Systems
Turbo-Flo™ cont'd
1 3 6 8
ENHANCED SHAFT ENHANCED CONFIGURATION
Shaft and Glyd™ ring configuration for the T1 and T2 pumps. 1, 3, 6, and
8 are seal grooves while 4 and 5 are air bleed grooves.
Shaft and Glyd™ ring configuration for the T4, T8, T15, and T20 pumps.
1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, and 11 are seal grooves while 3, 5, 7, and 9 are air
channeling grooves.
Air Distribution Systems 3
Pro-Flo®
The Pro-Flo® patented air distribution
system incorporates two moving
parts: the air valve spool, the pilot
spool and the main shaft/diaphragm
assembly. The heart of the system
is the air valve spool and air valve.
This valve design incorporates an
unbalanced spool. The smaller
end of the spool is pressurized
continuously, while the large end is alternately pressurized then
exhausted to move the spool. The spool directs pressurized air
to one air chamber while exhausting the other. The air causes the
main shaft/diaphragm assembly to shift to one side — discharging
liquid on that side and pulling liquid in on the other side. When the
shaft reaches the end of its stroke, the inner piston actuates the
pilot spool, which pressurizes and exhausts the large end of the air
valve spool. The repositioning of the air valve spool routes the air to
the other air chamber.
The Pro-Flo® air distribution system provides superior on/off reliability
in industrial processing applications where the pump is critical to
process integrity. Seal technology and porting tolerance diminish blow-
by in dead head conditions. Freezing is diminished due to the Pro-Flo®
porting and muffler design. Mating parts and seal configuration have a
low coefficient of friction, allowing the pump to operate without in-line
lubricants.
NOTE: Pro-Flo® pumps utilize a unique Pro-Flo® straight shaft.
NOTE: Pro-Flo® pumps require a 5 micron air filter.
Accu-Flo™
Wilden Accu-Flo™ pumps use electrical impulses
to stroke the pump instead of differential pressure.
The solenoid air valve is a two position, four-way
solenoid valve that has a single operator and
spring return. The valve is internally air piloted for
long coil and operator life. When the solenoid is
unpowered, one air chamber within the pump is
pressurized with air, while the opposite chamber
is exhausted. When electric power is applied, the
solenoid shifts and the pressurized air chamber
is exhausted while the opposite chamber is pressurized. By alternately applying
and removing power, the Accu-Flo™ pump runs like a standard Wilden Pump.
Wilden’s Accu-Flo™ pumps interface directly with electronic devices, need no
lubrication and offer On/Off reliability. Three coil voltage options are available in
both Nema 4 and Nema 7 ratings. One coil allows for 110 V AC operation. The
second coil option allows for 24 V DC operation and the third option allows for
either 24 V AC or 12 V DC operation at 60 Hz.
NOTE: Accu-Flo™ pumps are not submersible.
Shaft and Glyd™ ring configuration for the A.025, A1 and A2 pumps.
1 3 6 8
ENHANCED SHAFT ENHANCED CONFIGURATION
1, 3, 6, and 8 are seal grooves.
Shaft and Glyd™ ring configuration for the A4, A8, A15, and A20
pumps. 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, and 11 are seal grooves.
Accu-Flo™ Solenoid Coil Options

Nema 4 UL CSA Approved
Voltage ±10% Current (A)
Coil Part Power (W) Resistivity
AC AC
Number ±10% DC (Ω)
DC 60 Hz 50 Hz Inrush Holding
00-2110-99-150 24 48 44 4.8 .20 .20 .20 121
00-2110-99-151 12 24 22 4.8 .40 .40 .40 32
00-2110-99-155 60 120 110 4.8 .08 .08 .06 840
Nema 7 UL CSA Approved
00-2110-99-153 12 24 22 7 .60 .55 .32 19
00-2110-99-154 24 48 44 7 .30 .30 .18 75
00-2110-99-156 60 120 110 7 .12 .13 .06 475
International Explosion Proof / Cenelec / PTB file # EX-91.C.2027
00-2110-99-157 24 VDC 3.3 .135 .135 177
Uni-Flo™
The Uni-Flo™ air distribution system, the
driving force behind Unitec™ pumps,
is assembled inside the center section
of the pump between the reciprocating
diaphragms. The Uni-Flo™ system uses
a main air valve body and mechanically
actuated pilot spool mechanism to direct
inlet air pressure alternately behind
each diaphragm while at the same time
exhausting the air behind the opposite
diaphragm to atmosphere. Air inlet pressure has a direct relation to
the fluid discharge pressure that the pump can develop (head), while
the volume of air has a direct relation to how quickly the pump will
reciprocate (flow).
Pro-Flo V™
The Pro-Flo V™ patent pending air
distribution system incorporates two
moving parts: the air valve spool
and the pilot spool. The heart of the
system is the air valve and air valve
spool. The smaller end of the spool is
pressurized continuously, while the
large end is alternately pressurized
then exhausted to move the spool.
The spool directs pressurized air to
one air chamber while exhausting the other. The air causes the main
shaft/diaphragm assembly to shift to one side – discharging liquid
on that side and pulling liquid in on the other side. When the shaft
reaches the end of its stroke, the inner piston actuates the pilot spool,
which pressurizes and exhausts the large end of the air valve spool.
The repositioning of the air valve spool routes the air to the other air
chamber.
The Pro-Flo V™ air distribution system offers durable aluminum
construction and the same reliable operation as the traditional Pro-Flo®.
The design features unique parts (center block, air chambers and air
valve assembly) that improve performance, provide superior resistance
to freezing, excellent flow rates and efficiencies. Pro-Flo V™ operates
lube free and has the longest mean time between failures (MTBF).
Retrofit kits are available to easily convert your Turbo-Flo™ or Pro-Flo®
pump to Pro-Flo V™ pump.
PUMP USER'S GUIDE
Elastomers
4
Sec tion 4 Elastomers
Diaphragms, valve balls, valve seats and o-rings are collectively known
as pump elastomers. Wilden diaphragm pumps can be fitted with a
wide range of elastomer compounds to meet virtually any application
requirement.
Considerations for specifying elastomers include: temperature
limitations, chemical compatibility, flex-life, abrasion resistance, initial
investment, suction lift capabilities and sanitary standards.
There are 3 types of elastomers: Rubber compounds, Thermoplastics,
and PTFE. Please see Elastomer Options for a comprehensive guide of
material availability for each pump type and size.
CAUTION: Verify the chemical compatibility of the process
and cleaning fluid to the pump’s component materials in the
Chemical Resistance Guide (Section 12.)
Rubber Compounds
These compounds consist of natural rubber and manmade additives to
increase their resistance to specific types of fluids. Diaphragms made
of these compounds utilize a nylon fabric mesh. The fabric mesh is
centered within the diaphragm during the molding process. The fabric
mesh lends dimensional stability and strength to the compound.
Elastomer: Neoprene
Usage: An excellent general purpose elastomer for use
in non-aggressive applications.
Temperature Limits: –18°C to +93°C
0°F to +200°F
4 Elastomers
Elastomer: Buna-N
Usage: Excellent for applications involving petroleum/oil-
based fluids.
Temperature Limits: -12°C to +82°C
+10°F to +180°F
Elastomer: EPDM
Usage: Excellent for use in applications requiring
extremely cold temperatures. May also be used
as a low cost alternative when pumping dilute
acids or caustics. Not oil resistant.
Temperature Limits: -51°C to +138°C
-60°F to +280°F
Elastomer: Viton®
Usage: Excellent for use in applications requiring
extremely hot temperatures. May also be used
with aggressive fluids such as aromatic or
chlorinated hydrocarbons and acids.
Temperature Limits: -40°C to +175.7°C
-40°F to +350°F
Ultra-Flex™ Diaphragms
Wilden developed Ultra-Flex™ technology to make it the longest-
lasting rubber compound diaphragms in the industry. Ultra-Flex™
technology incorporates revolutionary design concepts, which reduce
internal stress. The reduction of stress is the key to long diaphragm
life. The patented Ultra-Flex™ diaphragm technology is guaranteed
to deliver longer life than pie-shaped, dome shaped or any other
competitive diaphragm technology. The Ultra-Flex™ diaphragm is ideal
for applications where the pump runs many hours per day or where
greater flex life is needed. Field test results also show the Ultra-Flex™
diaphragm to be an excellent choice for powder transfer applications.
Elastomers 4
Thermoplastic Compounds
These compounds are made up entirely of manmade elements.
Diaphragms made of these compounds require no fabric reinforcement
due to the dimensional stability and tensile strength inherent in TPE
(Thermoplastic Elastomers) compounds.
Elastomer: Polyurethane
Usage: A general purpose diaphragm for use in non-
aggressive and/or highly abrasive applications.
+10°F to +150°F
Elastomer: Saniflex™ (Hytrel®)
Usage: Excellent abrasion resistance, flex life and
durability. This material is FDA approved for food
processing applications. An outstanding general
purpose diaphragm. Good for oil and coolants.
-20°F to +220°F
Elastomer: Wil-Flex™ (Santoprene®)
Usage: A lot cost alternative to PTFE in many acidic and
caustic applications. Exhibits excellent abrasion
resistance and flex life.
Temperature Limits: -40°C to 107.2°C
-40°F to 225°F
4 Elastomers
PTFE (Polytetrafluoroethylene)
PTFE is one of the most chemically inert manmade compounds
known. Wilden engineers were the first to discover that by reinforcing a
molded PTFE diaphragm with concentric ribs they could control the flex
pattern of the diaphragm. Wilden’s patented ribbed design extends
flex life 5 to 10 times longer than that of any other diaphragm.
This innovation made the use of PTFE elastomers in diaphragm
pumps cost effective, greatly expanding the range of applications
for diaphragm pumps. PTFE is not an elastic material, therefore
when utilizing PTFE diaphragms, a backup diaphragm is required to
provide flexibility and memory in every size except A.025 and P.025.
Material options for backup diaphragms are Neoprene, Saniflex™
and high temperature Buna-N. When using PTFE diaphragms, see
Section 5 of EOM manual for PTFE flow curve. Typically, PTFE flow
rates are different than TPE and rubber. This is due to the inability
of PTFE to flex as far as rubber diaphragms, thus decreasing the
displacement of process fluid per stroke.
Elastomer: PTFE
Usage: Excellent choice when pumping highly
aggressive fluids such as aromatic or chlorinated
hydrocarbons, acids, caustics, ketones and
acetates.
Temperature Limits: +4°C to +104°C
+40°F to +220°F
For T1, A1, P1
+4°C to +142°C
+40°F to +300°F
Specialty Diaphragms
Wilden offers a variety of specialty diaphragms such as the IPD
(Integral Piston Diaphragm) for the 6 mm (1/4"), 10 mm (3/8") and
25 mm (1") pumps.
PUMP USER'S GUIDE
Torque/
Shaft Specs
5
Sec tion 5 Torque / Shaft Specs
Accu-Flo™
A.025 PLASTIC
Description of Part Torque Value
Air Valve, Turbo-Flo™ Version 2.3 N•m (20 in-lbs)
Air Valve, Pro-Flo® Version 3.1 N•m (27 in-lbs)
TORQUE
Outer Piston, Rubber & TPE fitted 5.6 N•m (50 in-lbs)
Top & Bottom Retainer, Polypropylene 5.6 N•m (50 in-lbs)
Top & Bottom Retainer, PVDF 6.2 N•m (55 in-lbs)
Top & Bottom Retainer,
6.2 N•m (55 in-lbs)
Carbon Filled Acetal
Large Clamp Bands 2.3 N•m (20 in-lbs)
Diaphragm Material Part Number Dimensions

SHAFTS
Turbo-Flo™ Version, All Diaphragms 00-3800-03 2.013" L x 0.372" O.D.

Pro-Flo® Version, All Diaphragms 00-3800-99-700 2.015" L x 0.496" O.D.
Turbo-Flo™ Pro-Flo®
A.025 METAL
Air Valve, Turbo-Flo™ Version 2.3 N•m (20 in-lbs)
TORQUE
Air Valve, Pro-Flo® Version 3.1 N•m (27 in-lbs)

Outer Piston 5.6 N•m (50 in-lbs)
Vertical Bolts 5.6 N•m (50 in-lbs)
Large Clamp Bands 2.3 N•m (20 in-lbs)

SHAFTS
Turbo-Flo™ Version, All Diaphragms 00-3800-03 2.013" L x 0.372" O.D.

Pro-Flo® Version, All Diaphragms 00-3800-99-700 2.015" L x 0.496" O.D.
5 Torque / Shaft Specs
Accu-Flo™ cont'd
A1 PLASTIC
Air Valve, Turbo-Flo™ Version 2.3 N·m (20 in-lbs)
Air Valve, Pro-Flo® Version 3.1 N·m (27 in-lbs)
Outer Piston, Rubber, All Diaphragms 14.1 N·m (125 in-lbs)
Vertical Bolts, Rubber-fitted,
TORQUE
9.0 N·m (80 in-lbs)

Polypropylene
Vertical Bolts, Rubber-fitted, PVDF 5.6 N·m (50 in-lbs)
Vertical Bolts, PTFE-fitted Polypropylene 9.0 N·m (80 in-lbs)
Vertical Bolts, PTFE-fitted PVDF & PFA 2.8 N·m (25 in-lbs)
Small Clamp Bands 1.7 N·m (15 in-lbs)
Large Clamp Bands, Rubber & TPE fitted 7.3 N·m (65 in-lbs)
Large Clamp Bands, PTFE fitted 9.6 N·m (85 in-lbs)

SHAFTS
Turbo-Flo™ Version, All Diaphragms 01-3800-03-07 3.350” L x 0.622” O.D.

Pro-Flo® Version, All Diaphragms 01-3810-03 3.350” L x 0.622” O.D.
A1 METAL
Outer Piston, Rubber, TPE & PTFE w/
TORQUE
14.1 N·m (125 in-lbs)

Neoprene fitted
Outer Piston, PTFE w/EPDM fitted 24.4 N·m (18 ft-lbs)
Vertical Bolts 14.1 N·m (125 in-lbs)

SHAFTS

Torque / Shaft Specs 5
Accu-Flo™ cont'd
A2 PLASTIC
TORQUE

Outer Piston, All Diaphragms 27.1 N·m (20 ft-lbs)
Top & Bottom Retainers 14.1 N·m (125 in-lbs)
Large Clamp Band, Rubber & TPE fitted 10.7 N·m (95 in-lbs)
Large Clamp Band, PTFE fitted 14.1 N·m (125 in-lbs)

SHAFTS

A2 METAL
TORQUE

Vertical Bolts 31.2 N·m (23 ft-lbs)
*Vertical Bolts 13.0 N·m (115 in-lbs)
*Liquid Chamber to Air Chamber 13.0 N·m (115 in-lbs)

SHAFTS

*Pro-Flo® Hybrid Bolted Pump only.
Accu-Flo™ cont'd
A4 PLASTIC
Air Valve 3.4 N·m (30 in-lbs)
TORQUE

Small Clamp Band 9.6 N·m (85 in-lbs)

SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 08-3840-09 5.875” L x 0.872” O.D.

PTFE 04-3820-03-700 4.940” L x 0.872” O.D
Ultra-Flex™ 04-3835-03 5.375” L x 0.872” O.D
A4 METAL
Outer Piston, Rubber & TPE fitted 34.2 N·m (40 ft-lbs)
TORQUE
Outer Piston, PTFE fitted 34.2 N·m (40 ft-lbs)

Outer Piston, Ultra-Flex™ fitted 47.5 N·m (35 ft-lbs)
Air Chamber to Center Block 13.0 N·m (115 in-lbs)

SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 08-3840-09 5.875” L x 0.872” O.D.

PTFE 04-3820-03-700 4.940” L x 0.872” O.D
Ultra-Flex™ 04-3835-03 5.375” L x 0.872” O.D
Accu-Flo™ cont'd
A8 PLASTIC
TORQUE

Air Chamber to Center Block 27.1 N·m (20 ft-lbs)

SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 08-3805-09 10.000” L x 0.872” O.D.

PTFE 08-3840-09 5.875” L x 0.872” O.D
Ultra-Flex™ 08-3841-03 5.875” L x 0.872” O.D
A8 METAL
TORQUE
Outer Piston, Ultra-Flex 74.6 N·m (55 ft-lbs)

Outer Piston, Rubber & TPE fitted w/
115.2 N·m (85 ft-lbs)
stainless steel inner piston

SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 08-3805-09 10.000” L x 0.872” O.D.

PTFE 08-3840-09 5.875” L x 0.872” O.D
Ultra-Flex™ 08-3841-03 5.875” L x 0.872” O.D
Accu-Flo™ cont'd
A15 METAL
TORQUE

Inner Piston Ring 18.9 N·m (14 ft-lbs)
Large Clamp Band, Rubber & TPE fitted 61.0 N·m (45 ft-lbs)
Large Clamp Band, PTFE fitted 61.0 N·m (45 ft-lbs)
SHAFTS

All 15-3800-09-07 11.625” L x 0.995” O.D.
HIGH PRESSURE
H400S METAL
SHAFTS
TPE & Aluminum Wetted Components 04-3845-08 8.400” L x 0.995” O.D.

TPE & Stainless Steel Wetted
04-3846-08 8.210” L x 0.995” O.D.
Components

TORQUE

Outer Piston, TPE 105.8 N·m (78 ft-lbs)
H800 METAL
SHAFTS

TPE 08-3800-03-60 6.099” L x 1.000” O.D.

TORQUE
Outer Piston, TPE fitted 139.6 N·m (103 ft-lbs)

Inner Piston 58.3 N·m (43 ft-lbs)
Center Section Cover Bolts 88.1 N·m (65 ft-lbs)
Top & Bottom Manifolds 17.6 N·m (13 ft-lbs)
Liquid Chamber 58.3 N·m (43 ft-lbs)
Pro-Flo®
P.025 PLASTIC
Outer Piston, Rubber & TPE fitted 5.6 N·m (50 in-lbs)
TORQUE
Top & Bottom Retainer, Polypropylene 5.6 N·m (50 in-lbs)

Top & Bottom Retainer, PVDF 6.2 N·m (55 in-lbs)
Top & Bottom Retainer, Carbon Filled
6.2 N·m (55 in-lbs)
Acetal
Large Clamp Bands 2.3 N·m (20 in-lbs)
SHAFTS

All 00-3800-99-700 2.015” L x 0.496” O.D.
P.025 METAL
TORQUE

Outer Piston 5.6 N·m (50 in-lbs)
Large Clamp Bands 2.3 N·m (20 in-lbs)
SHAFTS

All 00-3800-99-700 2.015” L x 0.496” O.D.
Pro-Flo® Cont'd
P25 PLASTIC
TORQUE

Top & Bottom Manifolds 6.2 N·m (55 in-lbs)
Liquid Chamber to Center Section 6.2 N·m (55 in-lbs)
SHAFTS

All 00-3800-99-700 2.015” L x 0.496” O.D.
P38 PLASTIC
TORQUE

Liquid Chamber to Center Section 6.2 N·m (55 in-lbs)
SHAFTS

All 00-3800-99-700 2.015” L x 0.496” O.D.
Pro-Flo® Cont'd
P1 PLASTIC
Outer Piston, Rubber, All Diaphragms 14.1 N·m (125 in-lbs)
9.0 N·m (80 in-lbs)
TORQUE
Polypropylene
SHAFTS

All 01-3810-03 3.350” L x 0.622” O.D.
P1 METAL
14.1 N·m (125 in-lbs)
TORQUE
Neoprene fitted
SHAFTS

All 01-3810-03 3.350” L x 0.622” O.D.
Pro-Flo® Cont'd
P100 PLASTIC
TORQUE

Outer Piston, All Diaphragms 10.2 N·m (90 in-lbs)
Liquid Chamber to Air Chamber 5.6 N·m (50 in-lbs)
SHAFTS

All 01-3810-03 3.350” L x 0.622” O.D.
Pro-Flo® Cont'd
P2 PLASTIC
TORQUE


SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 02-3810-03 5.000” L x 0.750” O.D.

PTFE 02-3840-03 4.687” L x 0.750” O.D
P2 METAL
TORQUE

*Vertical Bolts 13.0 N·m (115 in-lbs)
*Liquid Chamber to Air Chamber 13.0 N·m (115 in-lbs)

SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 02-3810-03 5.000” L x 0.750” O.D.

PTFE 02-3840-03 4.687” L x 0.750” O.D
*Hybrid Bolted Pump only.
Pro-Flo® Cont'd
P200 PLASTIC
TORQUE
Top & Bottom Manifolds, Polyporpylene

5.6 N·m (50 in-lbs)
& PVDF
Top & Bottom Manifolds, PFA 3.4 N·m (30 in-lbs)
Liquid Chamber, Polypropylene & PVDF 8.5 N·m (75 in-lbs)
Liquid Chamber, PFA 5.6 N·m (50 in-lbs)

SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 02-3810-03 5.000” L x 0.750” O.D.

PTFE 02-3840-03 4.687” L x 0.750” O.D.
P200 METAL
TORQUE

Liquid Chamber 8.5 N·m (75 in-lbs)

SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 02-3810-03 5.000” L x 0.750” O.D.

PTFE 02-3840-03 4.687” L x 0.750” O.D.
Pro-Flo® Cont'd
P4 PLASTIC
TORQUE

Large Clamp Band Rubber,
18.6 N·m (165 in-lbs)
TPE & PTFE fitted

SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 04-3800-03-700 5.531” L x 0.872” O.D.

PTFE 04-3820-03-700 4.940” L x 0.872” O.D
Ultra-Flex™ 04-3830-03-700 5.170” L x 0.872” O.D
P4 METAL
Outer Piston, Rubber, TPE & PTFE 54.2 N·m (40 ft-lbs)
Outer Piston, Rubber, TPE & PTFE
TORQUE
54.2 N·m (40 ft-lbs)

w/Stainless Steel Inner Piston
Large Clamp Band Rubber & TPE fitted 10.7 N·m (95 in-lbs)
Large Clamp Band PTFE fitted 13.6 N·m (120 in-lbs)

SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 04-3800-03-700 5.531” L x 0.872” O.D.

PTFE 04-3820-03-700 4.940” L x 0.872” O.D
Ultra-Flex™ 04-3830-03-700 5.170” L x 0.872” O.D
Pro-Flo® Cont'd
P400 PLASTIC
TORQUE


SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 04-3811-03 6.439” L x 0.872” O.D.

PTFE 04-3842-03 5.848” L x 0.872” O.D.
P400 METAL
TORQUE
Outer Piston, Rubber, TPE & PTFE fitted 54.2 N·m (40 ft-lbs)
Liquid Chamber, Stainless Steel Only 17.6 N·m (13 ft-lbs)

SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 04-3811-03 6.439” L x 0.872” O.D.

PTFE 04-3842-03 5.848” L x 0.872” O.D.
Pro-Flo® Cont'd
P8 PLASTIC
TORQUE


SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 08-3810-09 9.860” L x 0.872” O.D.

PTFE 08-3840-09 5.875” L x 0.872” O.D
Ultra-Flex™ 08-3841-03 6.875” L x 0.872” O.D
P8 METAL
Outer Piston, Rubber & TPE fitted
108.5 N·m (80 ft-lbs)
Excluding Stainless Steel Inner Piston
TORQUE

115.2 N·m (85 ft-lbs)
Including Stainless Steel Inner Piston

SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 08-3810-09 9.860” L x 0.872” O.D.

PTFE 08-3840-09 5.875” L x 0.872” O.D
Ultra-Flex™ 08-3841-03 6.875” L x 0.872” O.D
Pro-Flo® Cont'd
P800 PLASTIC
TORQUE

SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 08-3811-09 10.500” L x 0.872” O.D.

PTFE 08-3842-03 6.750” L x 0.872” O.D.
Ultra-Flex™ 08-3843-03 7.500” L x 0.872” O.D.
P800 METAL
Outer Piston, Rubber, TPE & PTFE fitted,
108.5 N·m (80 ft-lbs)
TORQUE
w/Stainless Steel Inner Pistons

115.2 N·m (85 ft-lbs)
Excluding Stainless Steel Inner Pistons
Liquid Chamber, Aluminum Only 27.1 N·m (20 ft-lbs)

SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 08-3811-09 10.500” L x 0.872” O.D.

PTFE 08-3842-03 6.750” L x 0.872” O.D.
Ultra-Flex™ 08-3843-03 7.500” L x 0.872” O.D.
Pro-Flo® Cont'd
P15 METAL
TORQUE

Small Clamp Band 15.5 N·m 137 in-lbs)
Large Clamp Band, Rubber & TPE fitted 61.0 N·m 45 ft-lbs)
Large Clamp Band, PTFE fitted 61.0 N·m 45 ft-lbs)
SHAFTS

All 15-3805-09 11.625” L x .995” O.D.
Pro-Flo® Cont'd
P1500 PLASTIC
TORQUE

SHAFTS

PTFE 15-3842-03 15.900” L x 0.995” O.D.
P1500 METAL
TORQUE

SHAFTS

All Diaphragms 15-3805-09 11.625” L x 0.995” O.D.
Pro-Flo V™
PV4 METAL
Outer Piston, Rubber, TPE & PTFE 54.2 N·m (40 ft-lbs)
TORQUE
Outer Piston, Ultra-Flex™ 54.2 N·m (40 ft-lbs)

Large Clamp Band Rubber & TPE fitted 10.7 N·m (95 in-lbs)
Large Clamp Band PTFE fitted 13.6 N·m (120 in-lbs)

SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 04-3800-03-700 5.531” L x 0.872” O.D.

PTFE 04-3820-03-700 4.940” L x 0.872” O.D
Ultra-Flex™ 04-3830-03-700 5.170” L x 0.872” O.D
Pro-Flo V™ Cont'd
PV400 PLASTIC
TORQUE


SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 04-3811-03 6.439” L x 0. 0.872” O.D.

PTFE 04-3842-03 5.848” L x 0. 0.872” O.D.
PV400 METAL
TORQUE
Liquid Chamber, Stainless Steel Only 17.6 N·m (13 ft-lbs)

SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 04-3811-03 6.439” L x 0. 0.872” O.D.

PTFE 04-3842-03 5.848” L x 0. 0.872” O.D.
Pro-Flo V™ Cont'd
PV8 METAL
Outer Piston, Rubber & TPE fitted,
105.7 N·m (78 ft-lbs)
TORQUE

115.2 N·m (85 ft-lbs)

SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 08-3810-09 9.860” L x 0.872” O.D.

PTFE 08-3840-09 5.875” L x 0.872” O.D
Ultra-Flex™ 08-3841-03 6.875” L x 0.872” O.D
Pro-Flo V™ Cont'd
PV800 PLASTIC
TORQUE

SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 08-3811-09 10.500” L x 0.872” O.D.

PTFE 08-3842-03 6.750” L x 0.872” O.D.
Ultra-Flex™ 08-3843-03 7.500” L x 0.872” O.D.
PV800 METAL
115.2 N·m (85 ft-lbs)
TORQUE
w/Stainless Steel Inner Pistons

108.5 N·m (80 ft-lbs)
Excluding Stainless Steel Inner Pistons
Liquid Chamber, Aluminum Only 27.1 N·m (20 ft-lbs)

SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 08-3811-09 10.500” L x 0.872” O.D.

PTFE 08-3842-03 6.750” L x 0.872” O.D.
Ultra-Flex™ 08-3843-03 7.500” L x 0.872” O.D.
Pro-Flo V™ Cont'd
PV15 METAL
TORQUE

Outer Piston Ring 18.9 N·m (14 ft-lbs)
SHAFTS

All 15-3805-09 11.625” L x 0.995” O.D.
Pro-Flo V™ Cont'd
PV1500 ALUMINUM
TORQUE

SHAFTS
PV1500 STAINLESS STEEL

TORQUE

Liquid Chamber to Air Chamber 67.8 N·m (50 ft-lbs)
SHAFTS
Turbo-Flo™
T1 PLASTIC
10.2 N·m (90 in-lbs)
Neoprene fitted
9.0 N·m (80 in-lbs)
TORQUE
Polypropylene
SHAFTS

All 01-3800-03-07 3.350” L x 0.622” O.D.
T1 METAL
14.1 N·m (125 in-lbs)
Neoprene fitted
TORQUE

SHAFTS

All 01-3800-03-07 3.350” L x 0.622” O.D.
Turbo-Flo™ Cont'd
T2 PLASTIC
TORQUE


SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 02-3800-03-07 4.937” L x 0.750” O.D.

PTFE 02-3820-03-07 4.687” L x 0.750” O.D
T2 METAL
TORQUE


SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 02-3800-03-07 4.937” L x 0.750” O.D.

PTFE 02-3820-03-07 4.687” L x 0.750” O.D
Turbo-Flo™ Cont'd
T4 PLASTIC
TORQUE


SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 04-3800-03-07 5.875” L x 0.872” O.D.

PTFE 04-3820-03-07 5.375” L x 0.872” O.D
Ultra-Flex™ 04-3830-03-07 5.375” L x 0.872” O.D
T4 METAL
TORQUE

Air Chamber to Center Block 8.5 N·m (75 in-lbs)

SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 04-3800-03-07 5.875” L x 0.872” O.D.

PTFE 04-3820-03-07 5.375” L x 0.872” O.D
Ultra-Flex™ 04-3830-03-07 5.375” L x 0.872” O.D
Turbo-Flo™ Cont'd
T8 PLASTIC
TORQUE


SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 08-3810-09 9.860” L x 0.872” O.D.

PTFE 08-3820-03-07 5.875” L x 0.872” O.D
Ultra-Flex™ 08-3820-03-07 5.875” L x 0.872” O.D
T8 METAL
108.5 N·m (80 ft-lbs)
TORQUE

115.2 N·m (85 ft-lbs)

SHAFTS
Rubber/TPE 08-3810-09 9.860” L x 0.872” O.D.

PTFE 08-3820-03-07 5.875” L x 0.872” O.D
Ultra-Flex™ 08-3820-03-07 5.875” L x 0.872” O.D
Turbo-Flo™ Cont'd
T15 METAL
TORQUE

SHAFTS

All 15-3800-09-07 11.625” L x 0.995” O.D.
Turbo-Flo™ Cont'd
T20 METAL
TORQUE

Small & Medium Clamp Bands 17.6 N·m (156 in-lbs)
U-Bolt 44.7 N·m (33 ft-lbs)
Drain Plug 105.8 N·m (78 ft-lbs)

SHAFTS
Rubber, TPE & PTFE 20-3800-09-07 9.875” L x 0.995” O.D.

Ultra-Flex™ 20-3830-09-07 10.375” L x 0.995” O.D.
PUMP USER'S GUIDE
Diaphragm
Assembly
6
Sec tion 6 Diaphragm Assembly
Wilden has refined diaphragm technology and innovated major

technological advancements through modern techniques, destructive
testing, and critical analysis.
Rubber Diaphragms
Rubber diaphragms are molded with natural rubber and man-made
additives to increase the diaphragms chemical resistance and/or flexing
characteristics. A nylon fabric mesh is positioned within the rubber
diaphragms during the molding process to strengthen the diaphragm
while dispersing stress.
Thermoplastic (TPE) Diaphragms

Thermoplastic (TPE) diaphragms are manufactured by molding man-
made compounds into net shaped parts. These TPE diaphragms have
inherent tensile strength and do not need fabric reinforcement.
PTFE Diaphragms
PTFE is one of the most inert man-made compounds known. Wilden
engineers patented PTFE diaphragms with concentric ribs to control
the flex pattern of the diaphragm to extend life. This innovation made
the use of PTFE diaphragms cost effective, greatly expanding the range
of applications for diaphragm pumps. PTFE is not elastic and has no
memory; therefore a back-up diaphragm is used to provide support
and lengthen life. Wilden prides itself in having the longest lasting PTFE
diaphragm in the industry.
Please verify the chemical resistance capability and temperature

limitations of diaphragms and all other pump components prior to
pump installation.
6 Diaphragm Assembly
The following drawings represent generic diaphragm assemblies

for a Wilden pump. Your specific diaphragm configuration might
be different. Please consult your EOM for your pump’s specific
diaphragm assembly.
Rubber/TPE (Thermoplastic
Elastomer) fitted pumps: Ultra-Flex™-fitted pumps:
3 4
3 5
1 2 4
1 2
1. Main shaft 1. Main shaft

2. Inner piston 2. Spacer
3. Primary diaphragm in contact 3. Inner piston
with the process fluid 4. Primary diaphragm —
4. Outer piston holds the Ultra-Flex™
diaphragm to the shaft (in 5. Outer piston
contact with process fluid)
Diaphragm Assembly 6
PTFE-fitted pumps PTFE-fitted A.025 and P.025

(except A.025 and P.025): pumps diaphragm assembly:
3 4
1 2 5
1. Main shaft 1. Main shaft

2. Inner piston 2. Bellville washer
3. Back-up diaphragm not 3. Back-up o-ring not in contact
in contact with process with process fluid (employed
fluid (employed with PTFE with PTFE primary
primary diaphragms, except diaphragms only)
1⁄4" pumps) 4. PTFE diaphragm
4. Primary PTFE diaphragm in
contact with process fluid
on the outer piston side
5. Outer piston holds the
diaphragm to the shaft (in
contact with process fluid)
Note: Pro-Flo® (P4 & P8) models fitted with Ultra-Flex™ diaphragms do
not use a spacer.
Note: 6 mm (1⁄4"), 13 mm (1⁄2"), and 25 mm (1") pump shaft assemblies
utilize Bellville washers, installed between the shaft and inner
piston and 242 Loctite.
PUMP USER'S GUIDE
Pump
Selection
7
Sec tion 7 Pump Selection
The following pump selection portion of this manual will assist you
in choosing the right pump for your specific pumping needs. This
section will address pump size, flow rates, solids handling capability,
chemical compatibility, temperature limitations and many other key
factors. This section also includes pump selection charts that provide
a quick reference defining the capabilities of the many different
Wilden pump types.
Pump Selection Charts

Advanced™ Series
Model Material Inlet Discharge Max. Solids Max. Flow
P25 Plastic 6 mm (1/4”) 6 mm (1/4”) 1.6 mm (1/16”) 16.7 lpm (4.4 gpm)
P38 Plastic 10 mm (3/8”) 10 mm (3/8”) 2.4 mm (3/32”) 25.4 lpm (6.7 gpm)
P100 Plastic 13 mm (1/2") 13 mm (1/2") 1.6 mm (1/16") 58.7 lpm (15.5 gpm)
Plastic 4.8 mm (3/16") 220 lpm (58 gpm)
P200 25 mm (1") 25 mm (1")
Metal 6.4 mm (1/4") 212 lpm (56 gpm)
P400 38 mm (1-1/2") 38 mm (1-1/2")
Metal 8.0 mm (5/16") 408 lpm (108 gpm)
Plastic 625 lpm (165 gpm)
P800 51 mm (2") 51 mm (2") 6.4 mm (1/4")
Metal 591 lpm (156 gpm)
P1500 76 mm (3") 76 mm (3") 12.7 mm (1/2")
PV400 38 mm (1-1/2") 38 mm (1-1/2")
Metal 8.0 mm (5/16") 443 lpm (117 gpm)
PV800 51 mm (2") 51 mm (2")
Metal 6.4 mm (1/4") 674 lpm (178 gpm)
PV1500 Metal 76 mm (3") 76 mm (3") 12.7 mm (1/2") 999 lpm (264 gpm)
T810 Metal 51 mm (2") 51 mm (2") 51 mm (2") 628 lpm (166 gpm)
7 Pump Selection
Original™ Series
Plastic 12.4 lpm (3.2 gpm)
A.025 6 mm (1/4") 6 mm (1/4") 0.4 mm (1/64")
Metal 16.3 lpm (4.3 gpm)
P.025 6 mm (1/4") 6 mm (1/4") 0.4 mm (1/64")
A1 13 mm (1/2") 13 mm (1/2") 1.6 mm (1/16")
P1 13 mm (1/2") 13 mm (1/2") 1.6 mm (1/16")
T1 13 mm (1/2") 13 mm (1/2") 1.6 mm (1/16")
A2 25 mm (1") 19 mm (3/4") 3.2 mm (1/8")
P2 25 mm (1") 19 mm (3/4") 3.2 mm (1/8")
Plastic 25 mm (1") 19 mm (3/4") 3.2 mm (1/8") 114 lpm (30 gpm)
T2 Metal 25 mm (1") 19 mm (3/4") 3.2 mm (1/8") 133 lpm (35 gpm)
Plastic 38 mm (1-1/2") 6.4 mm (1/4") 235 lpm (62 gpm)
A4 38 mm (1-1/2")
Metal 32 mm (1-1/4") 4.8 mm (3/16") 197 lpm (52 gpm)
Plastic 38 mm (1-1/2") 352 lpm (93 gpm)
P4 38 mm (1-1/2") 4.8 mm (3/16")
Metal 32 mm (1-1/4") 307 lpm (81 gpm)
PV4 Metal 38 mm (1-1/2") 32 mm (1-1/4") 4.8 mm (3/16") 337 lpm (89 gpm)
Plastic 38 mm (1-1/2") 220 lpm (58 gpm)
T4 38 mm (1-1/2") 4.8 mm (3/16")
Metal 32 mm (1-1/4") 307 lpm (81 gpm)
A8 51 mm (2") 51 mm (2") 6.4 mm (1/4")
P8 51 mm (2") 51 mm (2") 6.4 mm (1/4")
T8 51 mm (2") 51 mm (2") 6.4 mm (1/4")
A15 Metal 76 mm (3") 76 mm (3") 9.5 mm (3/8") 640 lpm (169 gpm)
P15 Metal 76 mm (3") 76 mm (3") 9.5 mm (3/8") 920 lpm (243 gpm)
T15 Metal 76 mm (3") 76 mm (3") 9.5 mm (3/8") 878 lpm (232 gpm)
T20 Metal 102 mm (4") 102 mm (4") 34.9 mm (1-3/8") 1,041 lpm (275 gpm)
Pump Selection 7
Saniflo™ Series
P1 Metal 38 mm (1-1/2") 38 mm (1-1/2") 1.6 mm (1/16") 58.7 lpm (15.5 gpm)
T1 Metal 38 mm (1-1/2") 38 mm (1-1/2") 1.6 mm (1/16") 54.9 lpm (14.5 gpm)
P2 Metal 38 mm (1-1/2") 38 mm (1-1/2") 3.2 mm (1/8") 170 lpm (45 gpm)
P2-3A Metal 38 mm (1-1/2") 38 mm (1-1/2") 6.4 mm (1/4") 133 lpm (35 gpm)
T2 Metal 38 mm (1-1/2") 38 mm (1-1/2") 3.2 mm (1/8") 133 lpm (35 gpm)
PV8 Metal 51 mm (2") 51 mm (2") 76 mm (3") 848 lpm (224 gpm)
LSH
T8 Metal 51 mm (2") 51 mm (2") 19 mm (3/4") 579 lpm (153 gpm)
USDA
PV15 Metal 76 mm (3") 76 mm (3") 76 mm (3") 931 lpm (246 gpm)
LSH
VC4 Metal 76 mm (3") 76 mm (3") 76 mm (3") 155 lpm (41 gpm)
NOTE: All Wilden Saniflo pumps have Tri-Clamp® style inlet and discharge connections.
7 Pump Selection
BioPharm™ Series
A1 Metal 13 mm (1/2") 13 mm (1/2") 1.6 mm (1/16") 35.6 lpm (9.4 gpm)
P1 Metal 13 mm (1/2") 13 mm (1/2") 1.6 mm (1/16") 58.7 lpm (15.5 gpm)
T1 Metal 13 mm (1/2") 13 mm (1/2") 1.6 mm (1/16") 54.9 lpm (14.5 gpm)
A2 Metal 25 mm (1") 25 mm (1") 3.2 mm (1/8") 130.2 lpm (34.4 gpm)
Unitec™ Series
UA.025 Plastic 6 mm (1/4") 6 mm (1/4") 1.9 mm (5/64") 9.8 lpm (2.6 gpm)
UA.038 Plastic 10 mm (3/8") 10 mm (3/8") 3.2 mm (1/8") 20.1 lpm (5.3 gpm)
UA.050 Plastic 13 mm (1/2") 13 mm (1/2") 3.9 mm 5/32") 49.9 lpm (13.2 gpm)
UA2 Plastic 25 mm (1") 25 mm (1") 6.4 mm (1/4") 98 lpm (26 gpm)
UA4 Plastic 38 mm (1-1/2") 38 mm (1-1/2") 8.7 mm (11/32") 299 lpm (79 gpm)
UA8 Plastic 51 mm (2") 51 mm (2") 11.1 mm (7/16") 530 lpm (140 gpm)
UB2 Metal 25 mm (1") 25 mm (1") 3.2 mm (1/8") 58 lpm (15.4 gpm)
UH.050 Plastic 13 mm (1/2") 13 mm (1/2") 3.9 mm (5/32") 70.0 lpm (18.5 gpm)
UH2 Plastic 25 mm (1") 25 mm (1") 4.7 mm (3/16") 182 lpm (48 gpm)
UH4 Plastic 38 mm (1-1/2") 38 mm (1-1/2") 7.9 mm (5/16") 329 lpm (87 gpm)
UU.038 Plastic 10 mm (3/8") 10 mm (3/8") N/A 9.8 lpm (2.6 gpm)
Plastic N/A
UU1 13 mm (1/2") 13 mm (1/2") 20.1 lpm (5.3 gpm)
Metal N/A
Plastic N/A
UU2 25 mm (1") 25 mm (1") 49 lpm (13 gpm)
Metal N/A
UU3 Plastic 32 mm (1-1/4") 32 mm (1-1/4") N/A 98 lpm (26 gpm)
UU4 Plastic 38 mm (1-1/2") 38 mm (1-1/2") N/A 197 lpm (52 gpm)
Pump Selection 7
Specialty Pumps
H25 1600S Metal 6 mm (1/4") 6 mm (1/4") N/A 4.1 lpm (1.1 gpm)
H38 3200D Metal 10 mm (3/8") 10 mm (3/8") N/A 7.6 lpm (2.0 gpm)
H400S Metal 38 mm (1-1/2") 38 mm (1-1/2") 7.9 mm (5/16") 242 lpm (64 gpm)
H800 Metal 51 mm (2") 51 mm (2") 12.7 mm (1/2") 360 lpm (95 gpm)
T4 Stallion® Metal 38 mm (1-1/2") 38 mm (1-1/2") 12.7 mm (1/2") 216 lpm (57 gpm)
T8 Stallion® Metal 51 mm (2") 51 mm (2") 19.1 mm (3/4") 568 lpm (150 gpm)
T15 Metal 76 mm (3") 76 mm (3") 25.4 mm (1") 692 lpm (183 gpm)
Stallion®
7 Pump Selection
Pump Size
A pump’s critical dimensions must be checked against existing piping
to eliminate the need for costly re-plumbing. Please refer to Section 4
of your EOM manual for details.
Solids Handling Capability

Maximum slurry particle size must not be greater than the pump’s solids
passage capability. A strainer may be placed on the inlet line to eliminate
particles larger than the pump’s capability. Please refer to Section 5 of
your EOM manual for your pump’s specific solids passage capabilities.
Suction Lift
An application’s suction lift requirements must not be greater than
the pump’s suction lift capabilities. Suction lift will vary depending
on the number of inlet and discharge elbows, the viscosity of the
process fluid, elevation (atmospheric pressure) and pipe friction loss.
Wilden suction lift curves are calibrated for pumps operating at 305m
(1,000’) above sea level pumping water. When reading suction lift
curves, locate the curve on the chart that represents your pump (PTFE,
TPE, Ultra-Flex™ or Rubber fitted). On the Inlet Air Pressure axis, locate
the amount of air pressure you are running to the pump, follow that point
straight up until you locate the curve. Once you locate the curve, trace
that point to the left until you locate the Dry Vacuum vertical axis. The
point you reach corresponds to the dry vacuum or suction lift your pump
will achieve at that specific inlet air pressure. Please refer to Section 6 of
your EOM for your pump’s specific suction lift capabilities.
Performance Curves
Pump performance capabilities must be matched with flow rate
requirements. Please consult Section 5 of your EOM for your pump’s
performance curve.
• Discharge head (vertical axis).
• Required flow rate (horizontal axis).
Pump Selection 7
A pump should be selected which will operate between the 25 and 75

percentile range of capacity.
For optimum life and performance, pumps should be specified so
that daily operation parameters will fall in the middle of the pump
performance curve. Wilden publishes 4 different performance curves
for most metal and plastic pump models. These performance curves are
unique due to the different stroke lengths of the diaphragm assemblies.
The four classifications are: 1) Rubber-fitted pumps; 2) Ultra-Flex™-
fitted pumps; 3) Thermoplastic (TPE)-fitted pumps; and 4) PTFE-fitted
pumps. When applicable, all four of these curves are included in the
Engineering, Operation, and Maintenance manuals (EOM’s).
BAR FEET PSIG

300
(10) [17]
120 (20) [34]
(30) [52]
8 (40) [68] AIR CONSUMPTION
3
250 (50) [85] (SCFM) [Nm /h]
7 100 (60) [102]
6 200
80
5
150 120
4 60 AIR INLET
100 PRESSURE (PSIG)
3 100 80
40
2 60
50 20 40
1
20
0 0
GPM 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
[LPM] [38] [76] [114] [151] [189] [227] [265] [303] [340]
Water Discharge Flow Rates
How to read a Wilden performance curve: Determine the flow rate your
application requires and calculate the Total Discharge Head (page 15).
Plot the intersection of the discharge head on the vertical axis to the
flow rate on the horizontal axis. Now the air supply pressure and air
supply volume can be extracted from the curve. Simply locate the solid
black line closest to this intersection and follow it to the vertical axis
to the left. This is the air supply pressure needed to provide the flow
rate you require at the given discharge head. Next locate the closest
7 Pump Selection
gray line to the intersection and follow it up to where the numbers are
provided. These numbers indicate the air supply volume needed to
provide the flow rate you require at the given discharge head.
To pump 151 lpm (40 gpm) against a discharge pressure head of 2.7
Bar (40 psig) requires 4.1 bar (60 psig) and 30.6 Nm3/h (18 scfm) air
consumption. Dot on chart represents the plotted intersection and the
circled numbers are the air pressure and volume figures.
Total Dynamic Head Calculation

Please refer to the example on page 71 for calculating your TDH (Total
Dynamic Head). Wilden publishes a Pump Viscosity and Cavitation Chart
(E6) that needs to be used in accordance with the boxed worksheet to
obtain the Total Dynamic Head. Process fluid viscosity plays an integral
part in calculating TDH. The more viscous a product, the more head
a pump has to overcome to move that product. Please contact your
authorized Wilden distributor for more information.
Chemical Compatibility
Wilden’s Chemical Resistance Guide (E4) should be used in conjunction
with personal experience to select wetted pump construction and
elastomers for chemical compatibility with the process fluid.
Pump Selection 7
Temperature Limitations
Temperature limitations are based on mechanical stress only. Certain
chemicals will significantly reduce the maximum safe operating
temperatures. Consult Wilden’s Chemical Resistance Guide (E4) for
chemical compatibility and temperature limits for specific fluids. Process
fluid and environmental temperatures must be considered. Temperature
limits for materials of construction and elastomers are listed below.
Additionally, temperature limitations are listed in Section 1 of your EOM.
Temperature Limits:
Polypropylene 0°C to 79°C 32°F to 175°F
PVDF -12°C to 107°C 10°F to 225°F
PFA 7°C to 143°C 20°F to 300°F
Neoprene -18°C to 93.3°C 0°F to 200°F
Buna-N -12°C to 82.2°C 10°F to 180°F
EPDM -51°C to 137.8°C -60°F to 280°F
Viton® -40°C to 176.7°C -40°F to 350°F
Wil-Flex™ -40°C to 107.2°C -40°F to 225°F
Saniflex™ -29°C to 104.4°C -20°F to 220°F
Polyurethane -12°C to 65.6°C 10°F to 150°F
PTFE 4°C to 104.4°C 40°F to 220°F
Abrasion Resistance
When a highly abrasive fluid is pumped, damage can occur to the
pump’s internals if the given internals do not exhibit the abrasion
resistance needed. Certain powders as well as, slurries containing
rocks, metal fines, or sand, tend to be highly abrasive, “scratching”
the pump’s internals as they go through the pump. Pump internals
most likely to get damaged are a pump’s ball cages and elastomers:
diaphragms, balls, and seats. If the given elastomers do not exhibit
the abrasion resistance required, they will wear prematurely. This
premature wear will affect the pump’s performance.
Note: When pumping highly abrasive substances, it is suggested to
install an oversize pump in order to reduce the velocity of the process
7 Pump Selection
fluid and hence reduce elastomer abrasion. Ultra-Flex™ diaphragms

exhibit exceptional abrasion resistance given special fabric placement
that allows for more sacrificial rubber. In addition, Wilden Pump &
Engineering, LLC offers a complete line of abrasion resistant materials
to revolutionize the way you solve your toughest pumping problems.
Cavitation
Cavitation is a hydraulic condition which can exist in any type of pump. It
is primarily a situation in which the pump is discharging less liquid than
its rated capacity due to reduction or lack of fluid supply to the pump.
Common causes of cavitation are excessive suction lift, insufficient Net
Positive Suction Head (NPSH), or operation at too high a speed. Pitting,
vibration, and noise are common troubles stemming from cavitation.
While severe cavitation is usually accompanied by excessive noise,
mild cavitation may produce nothing more than a small reduction in
pump efficiency and moderate wear of pump parts. You should:
• Slow pump down
• Reduce suction lift
• Increase positive head pressure
• Use a larger pump if you are not getting the required flow rates
• Consult Wilden’s Cavitation and Pump Friction Guide
(E6) for more details
Pump Selection 7
Total Dynamic Head Worksheet

Need to Know: G.P.M. Specific Gravity (s.g., γ) Pipe Size (φ) Viscosity (µ)
Need to Have: Wilden Cavitation/Pipe Friction Chart
and Viscosity Chart (RBG-E6)
TOTAL DYNAMIC HEAD = +/- TOTAL SUCTION LIFT + TOTAL DISCHARGE HEAD
I. Static Suction Head/Lift Static Discharge Head
Static Lift (head) = vertical distance from Discharge Head = vertical distance
liquid surface to center line from center line of pump to point
of pump of free discharge
___ (Vertical feet) x___ s.g.=___ feet ___ (Vertical feet) x ___ s.g. = ___ feet
___ feet x .433 (or Divide by 2.31)=___ PSIG ___ feet x .433 (or Divide by 2.31) = ___ PSIG
II. Dynamic Suction Dynamic Discharge
(A) Pipe Diameter ___ (inches) (A) Pipe Diameter ___ (inches)
(B) Viscosity ___ (ssu) (B) Viscosity ___ (ssu)
(C) Pipe ___ (C) Pipe ___
+ elbows* ___ + elbows* ___
= total pipe ___ (feet) = total pipe ___ (feet)
Viscosity Chart Figure ___ (PSIG loss/100 ft) Viscosity Chart Figure ______(PSIG loss/100 ft)
____ x ____ s.g. x ____ total pipe= ____ PSIG ____ x ____ s.g. x ____ total pipe= ____ PSIG
(PSIG loss 100) (PSIG loss 100)
II. Total Suction Lift/Head Total Discharge Head

___ (PSIG figure from calculation I) ____ (PSIG figure from calculation I)
+ ___ (PSIG figure from calculation II) + ____ (PSIG figure from calculation II)
= ___ PSIG = ____ PSIG
+/- ___ Total Suction Lift

___ Total Discharge Head
= ___ PSIG Total Dynamic Head
* Assume 10 ft loss for every 90° elbow.
7 Pump Selection
Pump Designation System

The following is a generic pump designation system to familiarize
you with Wilden’s nomenclature. Please refer to Section 2 of your
Engineering, Operation & Maintenance manual for the Material Code
designation system for your pump size and type. Your specific pump
model is located on your pump’s serial tag. Please note, some model
descriptions include a three digit specialty code at the end of the serial
number. This specialty code signifies an additional feature for the specific
pump. See your authorized Wilden Distributor for additional information.
A, P, PV or T /XXXXX / XXX / XX / XXX/ XXXX

O-RINGS
MODEL VALVE SEAT
VALVE BALLS
DIAPHRAGMS
AIR VALVE SPECIALTY
CENTER BLOCK OR CENTER SECTION CODE
AIR CHAMBERS OR CENTER SECTION (if applicable)
WETTED PARTS/OUTER PISTON
Pump Model — Inlet Wetted Parts & Outer Piston

A or P.025 = 1/4" AA = Aluminum / Aluminum
P25 = 1/4" AM = Aluminum / Mild Steel
P38 = 3/8" AS = Aluminum /
A, T, or P1 = 1/2" Stainless Steel
P100 = 1/2" AZ = Aluminum /
A, T, P or PV4 = 1 1/2" No Outer Piston
P or PV400 = 1 1/2" DZ = Conductive Polyethylene /
A, T, P or PV8 = 2" No Outer Piston
P or PV800 = 2" EZ = Polyethylene /
A, T, P or PV15 = 3" No Outer Piston
P or PV1500 = 3"
FZ = Conductive PTFE /
A, T or PV20 = 4"
No Outer Piston
Pump Selection 7
Wetted Parts & Outer Piston (Cont.) Center Block

HH = Alloy C / Alloy C A = Aluminum
HZ = Alloy C / No Outer Piston C = PTFE-Coated
KK = PVDF / PVDF K = PVDF
KZ = PVDF / No Outer Piston L = Virgin Acetal
PP = Polypropylene / N = Nickel-Plated
Polypropylene P = Polypropylene
PK = Polypropylene / PVDF S = Stainless Steel
PZ = Polypropylene / Y = Nylon
No Outer Piston Air Valve
TT = PTFE / PTFE A = Aluminum
TZ = PTFE / No Outer Piston B = Brass
SS = Stainless Steel / C = PTFE-Coated
Stainless Steel D = Brass w/Oil Btl.
SZ = Stainless Steel / L = Virgin Acetal
No Outer Piston N = Nickel-Plated
WW = Ductile Iron / Ductile Iron P = Polypropylene
WM = Ductile Iron / Mild Steel S = Stainless Steel
WS = Cast Iron / Mild Steel
Diaphragms
WZ = Ductile Iron / AWS = Wil-Flex™, Soft Shore
No Outer Piston BNL = Buna-N, IPD (Red Dot)
Air Chambers BNS = Buna-N (Red Dot)
A = Aluminum BNU = Buna-N, Ultra-Flex™
C = PTFE-Coated (Red Dot)
L = Virgin Acetal EPL = EPDM, IPD (Blue Dot)
M = Mild Steel (A4, T4) EPS = EPDM (Blue Dot)
N = Nickel-Plated EPU = EPDM, Ultra-Flex™
P = Polypropylene (Blue Dot)
S = Stainless Steel FBS = Sanitary Buna-N
V = Halar-Coated (Two Yellow Dots)
W = Cast Iron FES = Sanitary EPDM (Two Blue
Y = Nylon Dots)
FNS = Sanitary Neoprene
FSS = Saniflex™ (Cream)
FVS = Sanitary Viton® (Two
White Dots)
FWS = Sanitary Wil-Flex™
7 Pump Selection
Diaphragms (Cont.) Valve Ball

LEL = PTFE EPDM Backed, IPD BN = Buna-N
(White) FS = Saniflex™
LNL = PTFE Neoprene Backed, FV = Food Grade Viton®
IPD (White) EP = EPDM
NES = Neoprene (Green Dot) NE = Neoprene
NEU = Neoprene, Ultra-Flex™ PU = Polyurethane
(Green Dot) SS = Stainless Steel
PEL = Polyethylene, IPD TF = PTFE
PUS = Polyurethane (Clear) VT = Viton®
TEL = PTFE w/EPDM Back-Up WF = Wil-Flex™
O-Ring, IPD (White)
TEU = PTFE w/EPDM Back-Up Valve Seat
(White) A = Aluminum
TFL = PTFE, IPD, No Back-Up BN = Buna-N
(White) FS = Saniflex™
THU = PTFE w/High Temp H = Alloy C
Buna-N BACK-UP (White) K = PVDF
TNL = PTFE w/Neoprene Back- M = Mild Steel
Up O-Ring, IPD (White) EP = EPDM
TNU = PTFE w/Neoprene Back- NE = Neoprene
Up (White) P = Polypropylene
TSU = PTFE w/Saniflex™ Back- PU = Polyurethane
Up (White) S = Stainless Steel
®
TVL = PTFE w/Viton Back-Up T = PFA
O-Ring, IPD (White) VT = Viton
®
®
TVU = PTFE w/Viton Back-Up WF = Wil-Flex™
(White)
®
VTS = Viton (White Dot) Valve Seat O-ring
®
VTU = Viton , Ultra-Flex™ BN = Buna-N
(White Dot) CR = Chemraz (UP)
WFS = Wil-Flex™ (Orange Dot) FS = Saniflex™
XBS = Conductive Buna-N (Two FS = Fluoro-Seal (Metal)
Red Dots) EP = EPDM
XES = Conductive EPDM (Two PU = Polyurethane
Blue Dots) TF = PTFE (Metal)
XNS = Conductive Neoprene TV = Encap. Viton®
(Two Green Dots) WF = Wil-Flex™
XVS = Conductive Viton® (Two
White Dots)
PUMP USER'S GUIDE
Installation
8
Sec tion 8 Installation
Diagrams
Typical Suggested Installation Accu-Flo™ Plumbing Connections
FLUID OUTLET
COMBINATION FILTER AND REGULATOR
FLEXIBLE CONNECTION
AIR SUPPLY AIR INLET
DISCHARGE DISCHARGE LINE

FLEXIBLE SHUTOFF VALVE
CONNECTION
SUCTION LINE INTAKE FLUID INLET

SHUTOFF VALVE
FLEXIBLE
CONNECTION
Accu-Flo™ Electrical Connections
Preset Stroke Interval (sec.)
Stroke Counter Totalizer

Coil Status
Preset Energized
Selector De-energized
Leak Detect
Increase Decrease
Pump Speed Pump Speed
Power Start
On/Off Stop
*POWER *COMMON
CONNECTION
AIR OPERATED DOUBLE DIAPHRAGM PUMPS
*FLICKER MODE RELAY OR BATCH CONTROLLER
*SWITCHED (CONTROL) CONNECTION

* GROUND (SAFETY) CONNECTION
Pre-Installation Checklist:
Cautions
• Verify pump model received against purchase order or spec sheet.
• Re-torque all bolts to specifications on torque table.
• Remove shipping plugs.
• Pumps that need to be submersed must have both wetted and non-
wetted parts compatible with material being pumped.
• Submersed pumps must have a hose attached to pump’s air exhaust
and to he exhaust air piped above liquid level.
• Pumps should be thoroughly flushed with water before installation.
• FDA, USDA, and 3A pumps should be sanitized prior to usage.
• Do not exceed 8.6 bar (125 psig) air supply pressure 50 psig
on UL models).
• Blow out air line for 10 to 20 seconds before attaching to pump to
make sure all pipe line debris is clear.
8 Installation
Suggested Installation
The suction pipe should be at least the diameter of the pump’s
inlet manifold connection or larger if highly viscous material is being
pumped. The suction hose must be non-collapsible, reinforced type as
Wilden pumps are capable of pulling a high vacuum. Discharge piping
should be at least the diameter of the pump’s discharge manifold
connection; larger piping can be used to reduce friction losses. It is
critical that all fittings and connections are airtight or a reduction or loss
of pump suction capability will result. The pump should not be used as
a support mechanism for the piping system. Wilden suggests the use
of flexible connections for inlet/outlet ports and air line (see diagrams).
Due to the reciprocating action of the pump, lateral instabilities can
occur during normal operation, thus footed pumps should be bolted to
the ground and pads should be used. Ensure the operating surface is
level and flat.
Most Wilden pumps can be used in submersible applications only
when both wetted and non-wetted portions are compatible with the
material being pumped. If the pump is to be used in a submersible
application, a hose should be attached to the pump’s air exhaust and
the exhaust air piped above the liquid level.
NOTE: Pro-Flo® and Accu-Flo™ pumps cannot be submerged.
If the pump is to be used in a self-priming application, be sure that all
connections are airtight and that the suction lift is within the pump’s
ability. Note: Materials of construction and elastomer material have an
effect on suction lift parameters. Refer to the performance section of
your EOM for your pump’s specific suction lift capability.
Installation 8
Pumps in service with a positive suction head are most efficient when
inlet pressure is limited to 0.5–0.7 bar (7–10 psig). Premature diaphragm
failure may occur if positive suction head is 0.8 bar (11 psig) and higher,
particularly when using PTFE and Thermoplastic diaphragms. All
positive suction head applications should include a “check valve” at the
pump liquid inlet to allow for the pump to be disconnected.
Each Wilden pump has a specific maximum solids capability. Whenever
the possibility exists that larger solid objects may be sucked into the
pump, a strainer should be used on the suction line. (See page 13 for
maximum solids passage.)
CAUTION: Do NOT exceed 8.6 bar (125 psig) air supply pressure.
50 psig (3.4 bar) for UL-listed and 5.9 bar (85 psi) for H800.
CAUTION: Blow out air line for 10 to 20 seconds before attaching
to pump to make sure all pipe line debris is clear. Use a 5µ
(micron) air filter on all Pro-Flo® and Wil-Flo™ models.
NOTICE: All fasteners should be checked to match the pump’s given
torque specifications listed in of the EOM.
CAUTION: Ensure proper ventilation of tanks/vessels that
house liquid supply. Due to the pump’s high vacuum ability,
improper ventilation of these supply tanks can lead to
implosion of tanks when fluid is completely evacuated.
CAUTION: Thermal expansion: Some liquids present in piping
may expand at elevated temperatures, resulting in pipe and/
or pump damage and subsequent risk to operator.
8 Installation
Electrical Hazards
Static Spark can cause explosion resulting in severe injury or death.
Electrostatic hazard is eliminated by properly grounding the pump and
the pumping system. For some applications the A.025, P.025, T1 and
A1 Carbon Filled Acetal (CFA) pumps will provide a more adequate
dispersal of static electricity. Consult local building codes and electrical
codes for specific grounding requirements.
Conductivity: Certain Wilden pumps provide for safe transfer of flammable
materials. UL 79, Carbon-filled Acetal pumps (CFA), and Nema 7 coils
are available to meet your specific conductivity needs.
Temperature Hazards
Fluid being pumped should be compatible with the pump’s material of
construction and temperature limits as stated in the Wilden Chemical
Resistance Guide (E4).
Hazards Generated By Noise

Pump noise can be excessive under certain operating
conditions, e.g. high air pressure supply and little or no
discharge head. Extended periods of operation under such
conditions can create a hazard to operators working in
proximity to the pumps. Ways to avoid this hazard are listed as follows:
• Use proper hearing protection devices.
• Use mufflers on the pump’s air exhaust.
• Plumb the pump’s exhaust air to an area not in proximity
of plant workers.
• Use elastomeric valve balls in lieu of PTFE valve balls since soft balls
reduce noise. (Ensure proper chemical resistance of ball elastomer
used)
Installation 8
Hazardous Materials
Handler should obtain Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) from the
chemical supplier for all materials being pumped for appropriate
handling instructions.
When pumping hazardous fluids, Wilden pumps should be fitted
with the Wil-Gard II™ diaphragm monitoring system, which will
detect a diaphragm failure before hazardous material exits the pump.
Wil-Gard™ II diaphragm monitoring system is only available with
PTFE fitted pumps.
In case of diaphragm failure, material being pumped may exit pump
via air exhaust, in which case contact with the hazardous material is
possible.
Chemical Compatibility
When selecting a pump for a particular application, pump wetted
materials of construction and elastomer materials must be
compatible with the material being pumped. Please consult Wilden
Chemical Resistance Guide (E4) or your local authorized distributor
for more information.
CAUTION: Some materials such as halogenated solvents
should not be pumped with an aluminum construction pump
due to a possible explosive reaction. Consult your chemical
supplier.
Accu-Flo™ Installation
All wiring used to operate the pumps should be placed and connected
according to the proper electrical codes. It is important that the wiring
is of adequate gauge to carry the current required to operate the
pump. In addition, it is necessary that the electrical power supply is
large enough to supply the current required to operate the pump.
Wiring should be above ground level if possible (in case of fluid spill or
leakage), and all wiring and connections which could become wet or
damp should be made watertight.
8 Installation
The solenoid valve is rated for continuous duty; however, stopping

an even number stroke count insures that the electrical power
is off when the pump is stopped. This practice is safer and also
eliminates unwanted strokes when the system is shut down and
electrical power is off.
Solenoid valve fitted pumps should not be used in an area where
explosion proof equipment is required unless an explosion proof
coil is utilized. Nema 7 explosion proof coils are available for all
Accu-Flo™ pumps.
PUMP USER'S GUIDE
Maintenance
9
Sec tion 9 Maintenance
Directions for Disassembly/Reassembly

The following are generic directions for disassembly/reassembly of
the Wilden pump. Please refer to your EOM for detailed disassembly/
reassembly instructions and photographs pertaining to your specific
pump.
CAUTION: Before any maintenance or repair is attempted, the
compressed air line to the pump should be disconnected and
all air pressure allowed to bleed from the pump. Disconnect
all intake, discharge and air lines. Drain the pump by turning
it upside down and allowing any fluid to flow into a suitable
container. Wear safety glasses. When diaphragm failure occurs,
material being pumped may be forced out the air exhaust.
NOTE: Before starting disassembly, mark a line from each liquid
chamber to its corresponding air chamber. This line will assist in proper
alignment during reassembly.
Before you disassemble the pump:
• Wear safety glasses
• Shut off main air supply
• Disconnect air hose from air valve to drain air pressure in hose
• Isolate pump using isolation valves to avoid product spillage
from pipe
• Turn pump upside down to drain all liquid trapped by valve balls
• Mark a line from each liquid chamber to its corresponding air
chamber to assist in proper alignment during reassembly
9 Maintenance
Inspection
Air Valve Piston/Spool and Casing
• Ensure piston/spool can move freely
• Clean out debris
Diaphragms
• Make sure no swelling, cracking, or other damage
is apparent
Balls/Seats/O-rings
• Make sure no swelling, cracking, or other damage
is apparent
• Lubricate shaft if needed
Mean Time to Failure

A Preventative Maintenance Schedule (PMS) should be set up for the
following parts to ensure pump is serviced prior to part wear
• Diaphragms • Valve Seats
• Valve Balls • O-Rings
Seal Replacement
Proper seal installation is critical to pump performance when employing
AODDPs in your application. Great care must be taken to ensure
that seals are placed in the proper grooves and not damaged during
installation. Incorrect seal location will render the pump inoperable.
Damaged seals may cause decreased performance and shorter seal
life. The Ringer™ seal installation kit, containing an installation tool and
locator bushings, simplifies seal installation on Turbo-Flo™ pumps.
Maintenance 9
Disassembly Overview
The following instructions are to be used as a reference for disassembly/
reassembly of your Wilden pump. These instructions are meant
solely to give you an idea on how to disassemble/reassemble a
Wilden pump. Your pump size and build may vary substantially.
Please refer to your EOM for specific detailed instructions on
disassembly / reassembly of your Wilden pump.
Before starting disassembly, mark a line from each liquid chamber to
its corresponding air chamber. This line will assist in proper alignment
during reassembly.
Remove the fasteners that connect the discharge manifold to the liquid
chambers. Remove the discharge manifold to expose the valve balls
and valve seats. Inspect the ball cage area of the manifold for excessive
wear or damage. Remove the discharge valve balls, seats and o-rings
from the discharge manifold and inspect for nicks, gouges, chemical
attack and/or abrasive wear. Replace worn parts with genuine Wilden
parts to ensure reliable performance.
Remove the fasteners that connect the inlet manifold to the liquid
chambers. Lift the intake manifold away to expose the valve balls and
seats. Inspect intake valve ball cage for excessive wear or damage.
Remove the intake valve balls, seats and o-rings from the discharge
manifold and inspect for nicks, gouges, chemical attack and/or abrasive
wear. Replace worn parts with genuine Wilden parts to ensure reliable
performance.
9 Maintenance
Remove the fasteners that connect the liquid chamber to the center
section assembly. Lift liquid chamber away from the center section
assembly to expose the diaphragm and outer piston. Using an adjustable
wrench, remove the diaphragm assembly. Inspect diaphragm assembly
and shaft for signs of wear or chemical attack. Repeat disassembly
instructions for opposite liquid chamber.
See your Engineering, Operation & Maintenance manual (EOM) for
detailed disassembly/reassembly instructions of your pump’s air
distribution system.
PUMP USER'S GUIDE
Wilden
Accessories
10
Sec tion 10 Wilden Accessories
SD Equalizer® Surge Dampener

An inherent characteristic of reciprocating
pumps is the pressure change between
each pump stroke. The Equalizer® can be
used to provide a supplementary pumping
action between pump strokes, thus
minimizing pressure fluctuation while offering protection to your
pumping system. The Equalizer® reduces water hammer, absorbs
acceleration head, lowers system maintenance costs and minimizes
pipe strain protecting in-line equipment. Sizes available are SD1⁄2 13
mm (1⁄2") inlet/discharge, SD1 25 mm (1") inlet/discharge, SD2 51 mm
(2") inlet/discharge and SD3 76 mm (3") inlet/discharge.
Materials of Construction Available
SD1⁄2 SD1 SD2 SD3
Aluminum • • •
316 Stainless Steel • • • •
Cast Iron • •
Polypropylene • • •
PVDF • • •
Carbon-filled Acetal •
PTFE • •
10 Wilden Accessories
Adjustable
• Self-relieving regulator
• Permanent air supply
• Easy adjustment of internal air pressure
• Inlet & discharge for constant pressure systems
Automatic
• Automatic valve
• Permanent air supply
• Self-adjusting
• Discharge siding on varying pressure systems
Flow Control System II™

The Flow Control System II™ (FCS-II) counts the
strokes of the Wilden pump and controls the
pump so that specific repeatable quantities can
be batched. The system has manual entry screens
which allow the user to customize the data based
on specific application calculations. Once the unit
is programmed, the data is held in memory even
when the unit is off or disconnected. To aid the
user, the FCSII provides help screens where additional information
concerning every system setup is displayed at the touch of a
button. The FCSII can be used with either standard Wilden air-
shifted pumps or Wilden Accu-Flo™ pumps. Three separate batch
quantities can be programmed.
Wilden Accessories 10
Solenoid Pump Controller I™

The Solenoid Pump Controller I™ (SPC-I) is designed
to provide an intuitive interface between you and
your Accu-Flo™ pump. The SPC-I energizes and
de-energizes the solenoid coil at a programmed
rate to control Wilden Accu-Flo™ pumps. The pump
speed can be easily adjusted by simply pushing the
appropriate (increase or decrease) buttons on the
keypad. To expedite your pump speed selection,
three programmable presets are available. The LCD screen and LED’s
(light emitting diodes) display operational status which allows you
to operate the pump from a remote location. The preset number,
the stroke interval in seconds (pump speed), the stroke counter and
stroke totalizer are indicated on the LCD screen. The leak detection
LED informs you of the optional Wil-Gard II™ leak detection device
status. The SPC-I will stop pump operation if a leak is detected by
the Wil-Gard™ diaphragm monitoring system. An external input can
be utilized to remotely start and stop the pump to customize the
application. Liquid level controllers, proximity switches, temperature
switches, etc. can easily interface with the SPC-I by simply wiring the
external component to the terminal strip and selecting the external
input mode. The SPC-I can be powered by three different voltages:
110V AC, 220V AC and 12V DC. The output voltage of the SPC-I
is 12V DC which must be used with Wilden’s Nema 4 or Nema 7 12V
DC Accu-Flo™ pumps.
10 Wilden Accessories
Wil-Gard II™
The Wil-Gard II™ diaphragm monitoring
system will sense the presence of fluid
between the primary PTFE diaphragm and
back-up diaphragm once installed on a
PTFE-fitted pump. Upon sensing the fluid,
a high brightness LED and an internal relay are activated while the
back-up diaphragm offers product containment. The sensor cables
are engineered to withstand millions of pump cycles while detecting
conductive fluids. The Wil-Gard II™ can be factory installed on Wilden
PTFE-fitted pumps and can be purchased as an accessory to an existing
pump. The Wil-Gard II™ reduces chemical attack on non-wetted
parts, reduces hazardous emissions passing through the air exhaust
and detects a leak while the back-up diaphragm offers containment
protecting from product contamination. The Wil-Gard II™ can easily be
connected to the FCS-I or SPC-I in order to detect diaphragm failure
while offering product containment.
Drum Pump Kit

The Wilden Universal Drum Pump Kit is designed
as a lightweight, portable means of adapting your
Wilden pump to drum pumping applications. The
Wilden Drum Pump Kit is used in conjunction with
Wilden 6 mm (1/4") and 13 mm (1/2") pump models.
The drum base adapter is available in Nylon and
Polypropylene, and the pick-up tube is available in
Nylon, Polypropylene and PTFE. The drum adapter
is available with a 51 mm (2") NPT male connection suitable for
installation on most drums. The pick-up tube can be cut to length to
accommodate various drum sizes.
Wilden Accessories 10
Automatic Powder Valve

The Wilden pump can be used to
successfully transfer many low density
powders. The Automatic Powder Valve
(APV) is a spring loaded valve that is
installed on the inlet line to the Wilden
pump. The APV introduces atmospheric air to the inlet line of the
pump and lightens or fluidizes the material being transferred before it
reaches the pump. While best results have been achieved transferring
powders with a density up to 400 kg/m3 (25 lbs per cubic foot), a
test should be performed to determine if desired capacities can be
obtained in your specific application.
2 for 1 System
Wilden’s split manifold kit allows users of the Wilden plastic pump
line to turn one pump into two. This simple kit contains four adapters
to allow one of the following unique uses, 1) transfer two different
products, 2) pump from one side and return with the other, and 3)
blend two products in the discharge manifold. Wilden pumps can be
purchased equipped with a 2 for 1 split manifold kit or a retro-fit kit can
be obtained to modify an existing pump.
A-series P-series PV-series T-series

13mm (1/2") • • •
38mm (1-1/2") • • • •
51mm (2") • • • •
P400 and PV4 Aluminum bolted pumps are also available in the 2 for 1 configuration.
PUMP USER'S GUIDE
Trouble-
shooting
11
Sec tion 11 Troubleshooting
The following is a concise set of troubleshooting suggestions. Contact

your local Wilden distributor for a comprehensive Troubleshooting
Guide, or turn to your EOM for your pump’s specific troubleshooting
techniques.
Pump Will Not Run or Runs Slowly:

1. Check air inlet screen and air filter for debris.
2. Check for sticking air valve, flush air valve with cleaning fluid.
3. Check for worn out air valve. Replace if necessary.
4. Check center block seals. If worn excessively, they will not seal and
air will simply flow through the pump and out the air exhaust. Use
only Wilden seals as they are of special construction.
5. Check for rotating piston in air valve.
6. Check type of lubricant being used if you are using a pump that
needs lubrication. A higher viscosity oil than suggested may cause
the piston to stick or run erratically. Wilden suggests the use of a
hydraulic oil with arctic characteristics (ISO grade 15/5wt arctic oil).
Pump Runs But Little or No Product Flows:

1. Check for pump cavitation; slow pump speed down to allow material
to enter pumping chambers. Increase speed accordingly.
2. Check for sticking ball checks. If material being pumped is not
compatible with pump elastomers, swelling may occur. Replace
balls with the proper elastomers.
3. Check to make sure all suction connections are air tight, especially
manifold connections around intake balls.
11 Troubleshooting
Pump Air Valve Freezes:

Check for excessive moisture in compressed air. Install either a dryer or
a hot air generator for compressed air.
Air Bubbles In Pump Discharge:

1. Check for ruptured diaphragm.
2. Check tightness of clamp bands, especially at the intake manifold.
Product Comes Out Air Exhaust:

1. Check for ruptured diaphragm.
2. Check tightness of large clamp bands.
3. Check tightness of piston plates to shaft if applicable.
Pump Rattles:
1. Use softer balls.
2. Create false discharge head or suction lift.
3. See Troubleshooting section in EOM.
PUMP USER'S GUIDE
Chemical
Resistance
Guide
12
Sec tion 12 Chemical Resistance Guide
This information is compiled from numerous sources and believed to

be reliable to this date. It is intended as a guideline to be used with all
available information to determine suitability of elastomers and wetted
portions of Wilden pumps for various applications. We suggest thorough
research, which should include known applications, when determining
pump construction. This chart is to be used at your discretion and risk.
The accuracy of these ratings cannot be guaranteed.
SELECTING THE BEST DIAPHRAGM FOR A WILDEN AIR-OPERATED
DOUBLE-DIAPHRAGM PUMP
In the absence of previous experience (which is always the best guide)
diaphragm material may be selected from available resistance charts.
The Wilden Chemical Resistance Guide is compiled from numerous
reliable sources and cross-checked, however, it is only intended as an
additional source of information.
Diaphragm life not only depends on a diaphragm’s chemical compatibility
with the process fluid but also on the process conditions. These
conditions will vary depending on the abrasiveness of your process
fluid, temperature, size of diaphragm, pumping media and lift conditions.
Consult your authorized Wilden distributor regarding which diaphragm
material will work best for your application requirements.
As A General Rule:
1. Neoprene or Wil-Flex™ diaphragms should generally be used unless
the chart shows them to be unsatisfactory. Even though Buna-N,
EPDM and Viton® may show “A” ratings, if neoprene or Wil-Flex™
have at least a “B” rating, it will probably be the most economical
choice on a “cost of diaphragms per gallon pumped” basis.
2. This is especially true when considering the use of Viton® diaphragms
due to their replacement cost being over six times that of neoprene.
Viton® should only be considered for aggressive media at extreme
temperatures if it shows an “A” rating and neoprene, Buna-N and
EPDM show an unsatisfactory rating.
12 Chemical Resistance Guide
These guides for best diaphragm selection do not hold for the valve ball
material. Because the diaphragms are securely gripped by their inner
and outer beads, they can stand up to 20% swell without affecting
pump performance. If the valve balls swell even a very small amount,
they cannot function properly. Therefore, there will be cases where
neoprene diaphragms will be the best selection but PTFE, Buna-N,
EPDM or polyurethane balls will be required.
CAUTION: Temperature limits are based upon mechanical
stress only. Certain chemicals will significantly reduce
maximum safe operating temperatures. Consult engineering
guides for chemical compatibility and temperature limits.
It must be emphasized that none of these figures are absolute and are
only general guidelines.
Selection of Plastic Materials

Many factors can affect the chemical resistance of plastics. These
include, but are not limited to, exposure time, extremes of temperature
and pressure, frequency of temperature and/or pressure cycling, attrition
due to abrasive particles and the type of mechanical stress imposed.
The fact that certain combinations of chemicals and mechanical load
can induce stress cracking in many otherwise chemically resistant
materials, both metallic and non-metallic, is of particular significance.
The chemical/temperature ratings presented are based on well-
processed or well fabricated test specimens being essentially resistant
to either chemical attack and/or severe swelling which would normally
impair their performance under moderate mechanical stresses.
Operating parameters are dependent upon the particular application of
polypropylene or PVDF and may differ from those experienced in either
laboratory testing or apparently similar field service. Because corrosive
fluids or vapors are often mixtures of various individual chemicals, it is
strongly recommended that trial installations be evaluated under actual
service conditions.
Chemical Resistance Guide 12
For example, immersion testing in individual chemicals at a specific

operating temperature does not predict the performance of
polypropylene or PVDF should an exothermic reaction take place when
mixtures of chemicals are involved.
The ratings given on the following pages are a guide and do not constitute
a warranty of any kind, expressed or implied, with respect to the
performance of the materials Wilden offers in any specific application.
Ratings Definition
Ratings: A: Minor effect; B: Minor to moderate effect; C: Moderate to
severe effect; D: Not recommended; —: Insufficient information.
Wil-Flex™ is a trademark of Wilden Pump and Engineering,
LLC. Saniflex™ is a trademark of Wilden Pump and Engineering, LLC.
Viton® is a registered trademark of DuPont Dow Elastomers.
The accuracy of these ratings cannot be guaranteed.
CHEMICALS ELASTOMERS
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
ACETALDEHYDE B D D D A D A -
ACETAMIDE A D A A A A A -
ACETATE SOLV B D D D C - A -
ACETIC ACID, GLACIAL B C D D B D A B
ACETIC ACID B C C C A C A A
ACETIC ANHYDRIDE A D B D B D A D
ACETONE B D D D A D A B
ACETONITRILE - - - - - - - -
ACETOPHENONE B D D D A D A -
ACETYL CHLORIDE B D D D C B A -
ACETYLENE C - B A A A A A
ACRYLONITRILE B - D D D D A -
ADIPIC ACID B - D B - - A -
ALCOHOLS
ALLYL - - - - - - - -
AMYL A C B B A B A A
BENZYL A - B D C A A -
BUTYL A D A A A A A -
DIACETONE C B D D B D A -
ETHYL B D A A A A A A
HEXYL B D B A B A A -
ISOBUTYL A D A C A A A -
ISOPROPYL B D B C B A A A
METHYL A D A A B D A A
OCTYL B D B B A A A -
PROPYL A D A A B A A -
Ratings: A: Minor effect; B: Minor to moderate effect; C: Moderate to severe effect;
D: Not recommended; —: Insufficient information. The accuracy of these ratings cannot be guaranteed.
METALS PLASTICS
CARBON-FILLED ACETAL (CFA)

HALAR® ECTFE COATED
STAINLESS STEEL (316)
POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
B A A A A/100 B/70 A A/212 C C D D
A A A - A/200 B/120 A A/250 A/70 A/70 A/140 D
B D A - A/100 A - A/175 B/72 B/72 A D
B D A A A/100 D D A/250 A/100 D A/120 D
B D A A A/100 D D A/250 B/70 A/120 A D
B D A A A/200 D D A/250 C D B/70 D
A A A A A/200 B/120 A A/212 D B/70 D D
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
B A B - A/200 A - A/250 A/70 - A/70 -
D A B - A/100 D - A/212 - D A/120 C
A A A - A/200 A A - B/72 D A A
B A A B - B/70 - A/140 B A A/70 B
B B B - - - - A/175 B A B A
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
B B A A A/200 A A - B B/120 A A
B B A A A/200 D A - A/70 D A D
B B A A - A A - B A A A
A A A A - A A - B/72 B/72 A/70 B
B A A A - B A - A B A C
A A A A - A A - A/70 A A A
B C A A - B/70 A - - A/120 A A
B C A A A/70 B/70 A A/140 A A/120 A/150 A
B A A A A/70 B/70 A - A/120 A/70 A A
A A A A - A A - - A - -
A A A A A/70 B A - A A/120 A/120 A
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
ALLYL CHLORIDE - - - - - - - -
ALKAZENE D B D D D A A -
ALUM-NH3-CR-K A - A A A D A -
ALUMINUM ACETATE A D B C A D A -
ALUMINUM CHLORIDE 100% - - - - - - - -
ALUMINUM CHLORIDE 20% A B A A A A A D
ALUMINUM FLUORIDE A C A A B - A -
ALUMINUM HYDROXIDE A - A A A A A -
ALUMINUM NITRATE A C A A A A A -
ALUMINUM PHOSPHATE A - A A A A A -
ALUMINUM POTASSIUM SULFATE (ALUM) A - A A A A A -
ALUMINUM SULFATE B D A A A A A D
AMINES A D B D - D - -
AMMONIA, ANHYDROUS A D A B A D A -
AMMONIA, GAS (COLD) A - A A D A A -
AMMONIA, GAS (HOT) A - B C C D A -
AMMONIA, LIQUIDS A B A B A D A -
AMMONIA, WATER - - - - - - - -
AMMONIA NITRATE A D C A - - - -
AMMONIUM BIFLUORIDE A - A A - A A -
AMMONIUM CARBONATE A - A D A B A -
AMMONIUM CASENITE A - A - - - - -
AMMONIUM CHLORIDE A A A A A A A A
AMMONIUM FLUORIDE - - - - - - - -
AMMONIUM HYDROXIDE A D A B A B A D
AMMONIUM NITRATE A D B A A A A -
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - A -
A D B B - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
B D C A - D C - A B/120 A A
B D C B A B/70 C A/250 A A/70 A A
A D A - A B/70 A A/250 A A/120 A A
B D A - A B/70 B A/250 A A/120 A B
- - A - - - - - - - - -
B D A B - D C - A A/120 A A
C D A A A A/120 B A/100 A A/120 A A
A D A - D D D - - C/70 - D
B D A A A/200 B/70 D - A/70 B/120 D A
- - - - - - A - B - D -
- - - - - - A - - - - -
D A A B - B/70 D A/250 A/70 C/70 A A
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
C A A - - D C - A A A B
D D A B A - D A/250 A/70 A/120 A A
C C A B A A D A/250 A B/120 A A
- - A - - - A - - - - -
C D C A A C B A/250 A A/120 A A
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
C A A A A/200 A C A/250 A A/70 A A
B B A A A B A A/212 A A/70 A A
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
AMMONIUM OXALATE A - A A - - - -
AMMONIUM PERSULFATE A D A D B A A -
AMMONIUM PHOSPHATE, DIBASIC A - A A A A A -
AMMONIUM PHOSPHATE, MONOBASIC A - A A A A A -
AMMONIUM PHOSPHATE, TRIBASIC A - A A A A A -
AMMONIUM SULFATE A A A A A D A B
AMMONIUM THIO-SULFATE A - A A A - A -
AMYL-ACETATE B D D D B D A B
AMYL-ALCOHOL B D B B A B A A
AMYL-BORATE B - B A D A A -
AMYL-CHLORIDE C - D D D A A -
AMYL-CHLORONAPTHALENE C D D B D A A -
AMYL-NAPTHALENE C D D D D A A -
ANILINE B - D D - D A D
ANILINE DYES B D B C A A A -
ANILINE HYDROCHLORIDE A D D C B B A -
ANIMAL FATS B B B A A A A -
ANTIMONY TRICHLORIDE - - - - - - - -
ANSUL ETHER D B D C C D A -
ANTI-FREEZE A - C A - A - -
AQUA REGIA (80%, HCI, 20% HNO3) D D D D C C A -
AROCHLOR(S)1248 D - D D C A A -
AROMATIC HYDROCARBONS C D D D D A A -
ARSENIC ACID A C A A A A A -
ARSENIC TRICHLORIDE B - A C D D A -
ASKAREL D D C B D A A -
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
- D A A - - B - - - - A
C D A A A/150 D D - A A/120 A A
B D A A A/70 D B A/250 A A/120 A A
B D A A - B B A/250 A A A A
B D A A - B B A/250 A C A A
B C A B A B/70 B A/250 A A/70 A A
- D A - - - B - - A - -
B C A B A/100 C B A/250 C/70 C/70 A/120 D
B B A A A B/70 A A/250 B B/120 A A
- - - - - - - - - - - -
D A A A A D A A/250 D D A D
- - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
C C A B A/100 C A A/250 B C C/70 C
B A B - - - - - - - - -
D D D - - D - A/140 - D A B
A A A - - - A - - - - -
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
A A A - - D D - A - - A
D D D D A/100 D D A/212 B B/70 A/70 C
A B A - - B/70 - A/175 - C/70 - -
A A A - - A A - D C - D
D D A - A C D A/250 A B/120 A A
D D D - - - D - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
ASPHALT B B B B D A A D
BARIUM CARBONATE A - - A A A A -
BARIUM CHLORIDE A A A A A A A -
BARIUM CYANIDE A - A C - A - -
BARIUM HYDROXIDE A A A A A A A D
BARIUM NITRATE A - A A - A - -
BARIUM SULFATE A A - A A A A -
BARIUM SULFIDE A A A A A A A -
BEER A D A A A A A A
BEET SUGAR LIQUIDS A D B A A A A -
BEET SUGAR LIQUORS A D A A A A A -
BENZALDEHYDE B D D D B D A -
BENZENE C D D D D A A B
BENZENESULFONIC ACID A D A C C A A -
BENZYL BENZOATE C - D D B A A -
BENZYL CHLORIDE C D D D D C A -
BENZOIC ACID A D D D B A A -
BENZOL B D D D D D A A
BENZOL, ALCOHOL - - - - - - - -
BLAST FURNACE GAS A D A C B A A -
BLEACH SOLUTIONS B D D D A A A -
BORAX (SODIUM BORATE) A A D B A A A A
BORDEAUX MIXTURE A D A A A A A -
BORIC ACID A A A A A A A A
BRINE A A A A A A A -
BREWERY SLOP A - A A - A - -
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
C A A - - A B - A A/70 A A
B A A - A B/70 A A/250 A B/120 A A
D C C A A B/120 A A/250 A A/70 A A
C C A - - - B - - B - D
D D A B A B/70 D A/250 A B/120 A A
B A A - A/73 B/70 B - - B/120 - A
D B A - A B/70 B A/250 A B/120 A B
D D A - A B/70 A A/250 A B/120 A A
A D A - A/150 B/70 A - B/70 A/120 A/175 A
A A A - - A B - A A/70 A A
A B A - A/150 - A - - - - -
B A A - A/73 C A A/212 D A/70 A/70 D
B A A B A/200 A A A/212 B/72 C/70 A/70 C
D D B - A/200 D C A/250 - A/70 A/70 A
A B B - - - - - - - - -
D D B - A/100 A A A/250 D - C -
B D A A A/250 D B A/250 B A/70 A A
B B A A - D A - D C/70 A/70 -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
- - - - - - D - - - - -
D - - - A - D A/250 B A/70 - -
C A A A A A B A/250 A A/120 A A
D C A - - - - - - - - -
B D A A A B A A/250 A A/120 A A
C C - A A - A - A - A -
- A A - - - - - - - - -
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
BROMINE C D D D C A A -
BROMINE-ANHYDROUS C D D - C A A D
BROMINE-TRIFLUORIDE C D D D D D A -
BROMINE-VAPOR - - - - - - - -
BROMINE-WATER B D B - - A A -
BROMOBENZENE D D D D D B A -
BUNKER OIL B B B A D A A -
BUTADIENE C D B A C A A -
BUTANE C A B A C A A A
BUTTER B A B A A A A -
BUTTERMILK A - A A - A - -
BUTYL ACETYL RICINOLEATE B D B A D A A -
BUTYL ACETATE B C D D B D A B
BUTYL ACRYLATE C - D D D D A -
BUTYL ALCOHOL - - - - - - - -
BUTYL AMINE A D D B D D A -
BUTYL BENZOATE C - D - B A A -
BUTYL CARBITOL B - B A A A A -
BUTYL CELLOSOLVE A D C B A C A -
BUTYL CHLORIDE - - - - - - - -
BUTYL ETHER - - - - - - - -
BUTYL OLEATE C - D - B A A -
BUTYL PHTHALATE - - - - - - - -
BUTYL STEARATE C - D A B A A -
BUTYLENE D D - B D A A -
BUTRALDEHYDE C C C D B D A -
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
D - D A A/150 D D - B/72 D A/150 C
D D D - - D - - D - A/150 -
D D B - - - D - D - - -
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
D D B - A/250 - D A/212 D - A -
D B B - A/73 - - - D - - -
A A A - - - - - - - - -
A - A - A/200 - A A/250 - D A C
A - A - A/200 B/70 A A/250 B/72 C/70 A/200 C
A D A - - - A - - - - -
A D A - - B/70 A - - A/70 - A
A A A - - - A - - - - -
A A C B A/150 A A A/250 D C/70 A/70 D
- - - - - - A - D - A/70 -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
A - - B - A C B/175 - - B/70 D
B B B - - - A - - - - -
- - - - - - A - - - - -
- - - - A/73 - A - - - - -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
- - - - - - A - - - - -
- - - - - - - A/140 - - - -
B B B - A/73 - A - - - - -
A - A - A B/70 A - D B/70 A A
- - - - - - - - D - B -
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
BUTYRIC ACID, AQEOUS A - D D C D A -
CAFFIENE CITRATE - - - - - - - -
CALCIUM BISULFATE - - - - - - - -
CALCIUM BISULFIDE D A A A - A - -
CALCIUM CARBONATE A - A A A A A -
CALCIUM CHLORIDE A A A A A A A A
CALCIUM HYDROXIDE A A A A A A A B
CALCIUM HYPOCHLORITE A D B B B A A B
CALCIUM NITRATE A A A A A A A -
CALCIUM SULFATE A - D A A A A -
CALCIUM SULFIDE A A B A A A A -
CALGON A - A A - A - -
CANE JUICE A D A A - - -
CANE SUGAR LIQUORS A D A A A A A -
CARBAMATE A D B C B A A -
CARBITOL B D B B B A A -
CARBOLIC ACID (SEE PHENOL) A C C D C A A D
CARBON BISULFIDE D C D D D A A B
CARBON DIOXIDE A A B A A B A A
CARBON DISULFIDE D C D D D A A -
CARBON MONOXIDE A A B A C A A A
CARBON TETRACHLORIDE D C D C D A A D
CARBONATE WATER A - A A - A - -
CARBONIC ACID A A A B A A A -
CATSUP A - C A - A - A
CELLOSOLVE C D C C A B A -
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
B - A A A B/70 C A/250 A D A B
- - - - - - - A/140 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
C - B A A A A - A B/70 A A
C - A A A A A A/212 A B/70 A A
C C C A A B/70 D A/250 A B/70 A C
C A A A A A/120 D A/250 A A/120 A B
C D A A A C D A/250 A A/70 A B
B C B B A D D A/250 A A/70 A A
B A A B A D D A/250 A B/70 A B
A B B - - - - A/250 A/120 - A -
- D A - - A A - A - - -
B A A - - A A - B/72 - A A
A B A - A/150 - - - A - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
B B B - - - - - C - A -
B D A A A/150 C D - C D A/70 D
A - A - - A A - B/72 - A D
A D A A A B/70 A A/250 A A/70 A A
C A A B A/200 B/70 A A/250 B/72 C/70 A/70 D
A A A B A/150 A A A/250 A A/120 B A
D C A A A/200 D A A/250 B/72 D A D
A D A - - A A - A A A A
A D B A A B/70 B A/250 A B/120 A A
D D A - - A B - A - - A
B B B - A/200 A A A/250 A - A -
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
CELLOSOLVE ACETATE C D D C A A A -
CELLULUBE D D D D A A A -
CLORACETIC ACID D D D D B D A -
CHLORINATE GLUE C - D C - A - -
CHLORINE (DRY) C D D D C A A D
CHLORINE (WET) C D D D D A A D
CHLORINE, ANHYDROUS LIQUID D - D D - A A D
CHLORINE DIOXIDE D - D D C A A D
CHLORINE GAS (DRY) - - - - - - - -
CHLORINE GAS (WET) - - - - - - - -
CHLORINE TRIFLUORIDE D D D D D C A D
CHLOROACETIC ACID - - - - - - - -
CHLOROACETONE C D C D D B A D
CHLOROBENZENE (MONO) C D D D D A A D
CHLOROBROMOMETHANE D D D D B A A D
CHLOROBUTADIENE C D D D D A A D
CHLORODODECANE D D D D D A A D
CHLOROFORM D C D D D A A D
1-CHLORONAPTHALENE D - D D D A A D
1-CHLORO 1-NITRO ETHANE C D D D D C A D
CHLOROSULFONIC ACID A D D D D D A D
CHLOROTOLUENE C D D D D A A D
®
CLOROX (BLEACH) B D B C - A A D
CHOCOLATE SYRUP A - - A - A - -
CHROMIC ACID 5% A D D D A A A -
CHROMIC ACID 50% A D D D C A A -
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
- - - - A/73 - A - - - A/120 -
- - - - - - A - - - - -
D D C A A D D - B/72 - A -
D D A - - - D - - - - -
D D - A A/150 D D - D D A D
D B D A A/200 C D A/100 D B/70 A -
D D D A - C D - D D A D
D D D A A/200 - - A/250 - - A -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
D D A - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
D B B - - - B - D D - -
D B A A A/100 B/70 B A/250 D D A/150 D
D B B - - - B - D A - D
D B A - - - - - D - - -
D - - - - - - - D - - -
D D A B A/200 D A A/212 D C/70 A D
D B B - - - - - D - - -
D - - - - - - - D - - -
D D D B - D D - D D D D
D B B - - - A - D - - -
D D A A - A D - B - - A
A D A - - A A - A - - -
C D A A A/200 D D B/250 A/70 D A/120 A
C D B A A/200 C D B/250 A/70 D A/120 D
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
CHROMIUM ALUM - - - - - - - -
CHROME PLATING SOLUTIONS B D D D D A A D
CIDER A - A A - A - D
CITRIC ACID A A A A A A A A
CITRIC OILS C - D A B A A -
COBALT CHLORIDE (2N) A D A A C A A -
COFFEE A D A A - A - -
COKE OVEN GAS B D C C D A A -
COPPER ACETATE A D B B A - A A
COPPER CHLORIDE A A B A A A A A
COPPER CYANIDE A A A A A A A A
COPPER FLUOBORATE A - A B - A - A
COPPER FLUORIDE - - - - - - - -
COPPER NITRATE A - A A A A A A
COPPER SULFATE (5% SOLUTION) A A A A A A A A
CREAM A - C A - A - -
CRESOLS C D D D D A A -
CRESYLIC ACID B D D D D A A -
CRUDE OIL - - - - - - - -
CYCLOHEXANE C B D A D A A A
CYCLOHEXANOL B - A B C A A -
CYCLOHEXANONE C D D D C D A -
CYANIC ACID B - D C - - - -
DECALIN (DEKLIN) C D D D D A A -
DECANE C B D B C A A -
DENATURED ALCOHOL B D B A A B A -
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
- - - - - - - B/250 - - - -
D D D A - - D - B - A -
B D A - - - A - - B - A
C D A A A B/70 C A/140 A D A B
C D A - - - B - A - - -
D D - - - - - - A - - -
A - A A - A A - A - - -
- - - - A - - - - - - -
D D C - - - A - - - - -
D D D - A A A A/250 A - A A
D D A A A B/70 A A/250 A B/120 A A
D D D B - - B - - - - A
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
D D A A A D A A/250 A B/120 A A
D D A A A C D A/250 A A/120 A A
A D A - - A A - A - - -
B C A B A/150 D B A/250 D C/70 A/150 D
C A A B - D D - C B/70 A/150 D
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
A B A B A A A A/250 D B/70 A D
C B B A A B A A/250 B - A/150 -
B B B - A/73 A A A/250 D D B/70 D
- D A - - - D - - - - -
- - - - - - - - B/120 - A/175 -
- - - - - - - A/250 A/70 - - -
A A A - - - A - A - A -
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
DETERGENTS B A B A A A A -
DEVELOPING FLUIDS A D A A A A A -
DIACETONE B B - D A D A -
DIBENZYL ETHER C B D D C C A -
DIBENZYL SEBECATE C D D D B B A -
DIBUTYL AMINE B - D C D B A -
DIBUTYL ETHER B B C B C C A -
DIBUTYL PHTHALATE B C D D A B A A
DIBUTYL SEBECATE B D D D B B A A
DICHLOROBENZYENE - - - - - - - -
DICHLOROETHYLENE - - - - - - - -
O-DICHLOROBENZENE D D D D D A A -
DICHLORO-ISOPROPYL ETHER D B D D C C A -
DICYCLOHEXYLAMINE B D D D D B A -
DIESEL FUEL C B D A D A A -
DIETHYL BENZENE C D D D D A A -
DIETHYL ETHER B A C B D D A -
DIETHYL SEBECATE B D D D B A A -
DIETHYLAMINE B C B B - D - -
DIETHYLENE GLYCOL A D A A A A A -
DIISOBUTYLENE C D C B - A A -
DIISOPROPYL BENZENE C - D D D A A -
DIISOPROPYL KETONE C D D D A D A -
DIMETHYL ANILINE B - D D B C A -
DIMETHYL FORMAMIDE A - D C - A A -
DIMETHYL PHTHALATE A - D D B C A -
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
A - A - A/200 A A A/250 A D - A
- - B - - - A - - - - -
A A A - A/100 A - A/212 D A A/70 -
B B B - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - D - - -
B B B - - - - A/212 D - A/20 -
A A A - - A - A/140 C - D -
- A A - A/200 - - - B/72 - D -
- - - - - - - A/140 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/175 - - - -
D B B - - - - - B/70 - A/150 -
D - - - - - - - D - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
A A A B A/200 A A A/250 B/70 C/70 A A
- - - - - - - - - - - -
B B B B A/200 C - A/212 - - A/70 D
A A A - - - - - A/120 - A/120 -
A B A A A/73 B/70 B A/212 C D A/70 D
B A A B A/70 B/70 D - - B/120 A C
B B B - - - A A/250 - - A -
- - - - - - A - - - - -
- - - - A/73 - A - - - - -
A - - B A/200 A D A/250 A - A/70 D
A A A - A/100 A C B/250 A/120 A D D
- - B - A/200 C - A/250 A/70 - A/70 -
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
DINITROTOLUENE B D D D D B A -
DIOCTYL PHTHALATE C C D D B A A A
DIOCTYL SEBECATE C B D D B B A -
DIOXANE C D D D A D A -
DIOXOLANE C D D D C B A -
DIPENTENE C D D C D A A -
DIPHENYL C D D D D A A -
DIPHENYL OXIDE C D D D D A A -
DISODIUM PHOSPHATE - - - - - - - -
DOWTHERM OIL D B D - D A A -
DRY CLEANING FLUIDS D C D C D A A -
DYES B - C - - A - -
EPICHLOROHYDRINE B D D D B D A D
EPSOM SALTS (MAGNESIUM SULFATE) A - A A A A A -
ETHANE C B B A D A A -
ETHANOLAMINE A C B B B D A -
ETHER C C D D D C A -
ETHYL ACETATE C D D D B D A B
ETHYL ACETOACETATE C C D D B D A -
ETHYL ACRYLATE C D D D B D A -
EHTYL ALCOHOL (ETHANOL) - - - - - - - -
ETHYL BENZENE C D D D D A A -
ETHYL BENZOATE C D D D B A A -
ETHYL CELLOSOLVE B D C C A B A -
ETHYL CELLULOSE A B B B B A A -
ETHYL CHLORIDE C C A A C A A D
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
- - - - - - - - - - - -
A A A - A/200 A B A/250 - - - -
- - - - - - B - - - - -
B A A - A/150 A B A/212 C/120 - C/120 -
- - - - - - B - - - - -
A A A - - - - - - - - -
A B B B - - - A/250 - - A/120 -
B A A B - - D A/250 - - B D
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
C B A - A/200 A - - - - - -
A A A - - - - - D - - -
B - A - - A C - - - - B
D A A - A/200 A B - B/70 - D -
A A A B A B/70 B A/250 A A/120 A A
A - A - - D A - - - A A
B - A B - A D A/212 D - C D
A C A B A/200 A A A/212 C D A/70 D
B A A B A/150 B/120 A B/175 B/72 A D D
A A - - A/73 - A - - - A/70 -
A A A - A/150 - A - D - C -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
A B B A - - A A/140 D - C -
A A A - - - A - - C/120 D D
- - - - - - A - - - - -
B A B - - - A - - - - -
D C A B A B/70 A A/250 D C/70 A D
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
ETHYL CHLOROCARBONATE A D C - - A A D
ETHYL CHLOROFORMATE C D C - - A A D
ETHYL ETHER C C D B D D A -
ETHYL FORMATE B - B D B C A -
ETHYL MERCAPTAN C - D D D B A -
ETHYL OXALATE B A D D A B A -
ETHYL PENTOCHLOROBENZENE D C D D D A A -
ETHYL SILICATE B - A A A A A -
ETHYL SULFATE B - - A - A A -
ETHYLENE C - - B C A A -
ETHYLENE BROMIDE - - - - - - - -
ETHYLENE CHLORIDE D D D D C A A -
ETHYLENE CHLOROHYDRIN C D B D A B A -
ETHYLENE DIAMINE A D A B A D A -
ETHYLENE DICHLORIDE D D D D B A A D
ETHYLENE GLYCOL A B A A A A A A
ETHYLENE OXIDE A C D D D D A A
ETHYLENE TRICHOLORIDE D D D D D A A -
FATTY ACIDS B - B C D A A -
FERRIC CHLORIDE A D B A A A A B
FERRIC NITRATE A A A A A A A -
FERRIC SULFATE A - A B A A A -
FERROUS CHLORIDE A D A B A A A -
FERROUS SULFATE A - A B A A A -
FISH OIL B - - A - A A -
FLUOBORIC ACID A - A B A A A -
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
D A - - - - A - - - - -
D - - - - - A - D - - -
C B A B A/150 B/70 A A/212 C D A D
C A B - A/120 - A - - - - -
B A B - - - - - - - - -
A - - - - - - - - - - -
D - - - - - - - D - - -
B A A - - - - - - - - -
- - D - - - - - - - - -
A A A - - - A - - - - -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
D C A B A B/70 A A/250 B/72 D A D
D B B B A/73 D B A/250 D D A/70 D
D A A C A/73 B/70 A A/140 A A D D
D A A B A/73 B/70 A A/212 D D A D
A B A B A B/70 D A/250 A/120 A/120 A A
A D - A A A/70 A A/212 D A A D
D A A - - - - A D - A -
B D A A A B/70 B A/250 B/70 D A A
D D D B A C D A/250 A A/70 A A
D - A A A C D A/250 A A/120 A A
D D A A A C D A/250 A A/120 A A
D D D B A D D A/250 A A/120 A A
D D A B A D D A/250 A A/120 A A
- - - - - - - - - - - -
D D B A A/73 D A A/250 A A/120 A A
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
FLUORINE (LIQUID) D - D D C B A -
FLUOROBENZENE C - D D D A A -
FLUOROCARBON OILS D - - - A - A -
FLUOROLUBE D - A C A B A -
FLUORINATE CYCLIC ETHERS D - - - - - - -
FLUOSILICIC ACID A B A A B - A B
FORMALDEHYDE B D D C A A A B
FORMIC ACID A D D D B B A B
FREON 11 D D D C D C A A
FREON 12 (WET) D A B A B A A A
FREON 13 D - A A A A A A
FREON 21 D - D D D D A A
FREON 22 D D A D C D A A
FREON 31 D - A D A D A A
FREON 32 D - A A A C A A
FREON 112 D - B B D A A A
FREON 113 D B A A D C A A
FREON 114 D A A A C A A A
FREON 115 D - A A A B A A
FREON 142B D - A A A D A A
FREON 152A D - A A A D A A
FREON 218 D - A A A A A A
FREON C316 D - A A A A A A
FREON C318 D - A A A A A A
FREON 13 B1 D A A A A A A A
FREON 114B2 D - A B D B A A
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
D D A B - D D - D D A/70 D
D - - - - - A - D - - -
D - - - - - - - D D - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
D - - - - - - - D - - -
D D B - A D A - A A/120 - D
A D A B A/200 D A A/212 A B A/120 A
D D A A A/250 D D A/250 A D A A
D C A A A/150 D A A/212 D C A A
D A A A A/150 D A A/212 B/72 A/70 A A
D - - - - - A - D - A -
D - - - A/150 - A A/212 D - A -
D D A A A/150 B A A/212 D - A A
D - - - - - A - - - - -
D - - - - - A - - - - -
D - - - - - A - - - - -
D - A A A/150 - A A/212 D - A B
D - - - A/150 - A A/212 D - A -
D - - - - - A - - - - -
D - - - - - A - - - - -
D - - - - - A - - - - -
D - - - - - A - - - - -
D - - - - - A - - - - -
D - - - - - A - - - - -
D - - - - - A - - - - -
D - - - - - A - - - - -
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
FREON 502 D - A B - B A A
FREON TF D A A A D B A A
FREON T-WD602 D A B B B A A A
FREON TMC D B B B B A A A
FREON T-P35 D A A A A A A A
FREON TA D A A A A C A A
FREON TC D A A A B A A A
FREON MF D C C A - - A A
FREON BF D - B B - - A A
FRUIT JUICE A - - A - A A -
FUEL OIL C B B A D A A -
FUMARIC ACID A - B C - A A -
FURAN, FURFURAN C - D D D C A -
FURAN RESIN C - D D D A A -
FURFURAL C D D D A D A -
GALLIC ACID B D C D B A A -
GASOLINE - LEADED C C D A D A A A
GASOLINE - UNLEADED C D D D D A A -
GELATINE A A A A A A A -
GLUCOSE A A A A A A A -
GLUE P.V.A. A A A D B A A A
GLYCERINE A A A A A A A A
GLYCOLIC ACID A - A A - A - -
GLYCOLS A B A A A A A -
GOLD MONOCYANIDE A - A A - A - -
GRAPE JUICE A - A A - A - -
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
D - - - - - A - - - - -
D A A A - D A - - - B B
D - - - - - - - - - - -
D - - - - - - - - - - -
D - - - - - - - - - - -
D - - - - - - - - - - -
D - - - - - - - - - - -
D - - - - - - - - - - -
D - - - - - - - - - - -
B D A A A/150 A D - A A A A
A A A A A B/70 A A/250 C B A A
- - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - A/212 C - - -
A - A B - - D - C D D A
A B A B A/200 B A A/212 D D B/120 D
A D B B A/150 B/70 - A/212 A A A/70 B
A A A A A A A A/250 D - A B
A A A A A A A A/250 D - C C
A D A A A/250 B/70 B - A A/120 A B
A B A A A B/70 A - A A/120 A A
B A A A - A/70 A - B A/70 A C
A B A A A A/70 A A/250 A A/70 A A
- - - A A/150 - A A/250 A/70 A/120 A/70 B
B B B - A B/70 D A/250 A - A -
- D A - - - A - - - - -
B D A - - A B - A B A A
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
GREASE B - D A D A A -
GREEN SULFATE LIQUOR A A A A A A A -
HALOWAX OIL D - D D D A A -
HEPTANE C B B A - A A -
HEXANE C B B A D A A A
N-HEXALDEHYDE C B A D B C A -
N-HEXENE-1 C A B A D A A -
HONEY A - A A - A - -
HYDRAULIC OILS (PETROLEUM) D A B A C A A -
HYDRAULIC OILS (SYNTHETIC) D - - C - A - -
HYDRAZINE A D B B A A A D
HYDROBROMIC ACID B D D D A A A -
HYDROCHLORIC ACID (20%) A B D C A A A B
HYDROCHLORIC ACID (37%) (HOT) C C D D C A A D
HYDROCHLORIC ACID (37%) (COLD) B C D C B A A D
HYDROCYANIC ACID B C B C B A A C
HYDROFLUORIC ACID (20%)* C - C D - A A D
HYDROFLUORIC ACID (50%)* D D C D A A A D
HYDROFLUORIC ACID (75%)* D - D D C A A D
HYDROFLUORIC ACID (CONC-) (HOT) D D D D - B A D
HYDROFLUORIC ACID (CONC-) (COLD) D D B D - A A D
HYDROFLUOSILICIC ACID (20%) B B B B B A A -
HYDROGEN FLUORIDE - - - - - - - -
HYDROGEN GAS A A A A B A A A
HYDROGEN PEROXIDE A C D B C A A -
HYDROGEN PEROXIDE (5%) - - - - - - - -
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
A A A A - - A - - - A A
- - - - - - - - A - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
A A A A A A A A/250 C/170 B/70 A C
A A A A A B/70 A A/250 C/170 D A B
A A A - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
A A A A - A/70 A - A B A A
A A A A A/100 A/70 A - D C - A
A A A A A/100 A A - D A - A
- C A - - - B A/100 A/70 - A/120 -
D D D D A D D A/250 B B/70 A A
D D D D A/200 D D A/250 A A/120 A A
D D D D - D D A/250 - B/120 A -
D D D D - D D A/250 A B/120 A -
A D A D A - D A/250 A A/120 A B
D D D D A/250 D D A/250 A* A/120 A B
D D D D A/250 D D A/250 B/72* A/70 A B
D D D D - D D A/250 B/72* C/70 A C
D D D D - D D A/212 D D A -
D D D D - D D A/250 D D A -
D D D B - D - - A B/120 A A
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
A A A A A B/120 - A/250 A A/120 A A
A D A A A/150 D D - A/70 C/120 A/70 A
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
HYDROGEN SULFIDE (WET) (COLD) A B B C A A A A
HYDROGEN SULFIDE (WET) (HOT) A - C D A B A A
HYDROGEN SULFIDE AQUEOUS SOLUTION A - B C A D A -
HYDROQUINONE A - D C - C A -
HYDROXYACETIC ACID (70%) A - A A - A A -
HYPOCHLOROUS ACID A - D D B A A -
INK A - - A - A - -
IODINE (IN ALCOHOL) A D D B D A A -
IODINE PENTAFLUORIDE B D D D D D A -
IODOFORM B - - D A - A -
ISOBUTYL ALCOHOL - - - - - - - -
ISOOCTANE C B B A D A A A
ISOTANE D - - A - A - -
ISOPHORONE B B D D C D A -
ISOPROPYL ACETATE B A D D B D A -
ISOPROPYL CHLORIDE C D D D D B A -
ISOPROPYL ETHER C B D B D D A -
JET FUEL (JP3, JP4, JP5) C C D A D A A A
KEROSENE C C B A D A A B
KETONES C A D D B D A B
LACQUERS C D D D D D A -
LACQUER SOLVENTS C D D D D D A B
LACTIC ACID A - C B B A A B
LARD B A B A C A A A
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
- - - - - - - A/140 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/140 - - - -
D D A A - C D A/250 A A A -
D D A A - D D A/250 A A A -
D D A A A/150 - C - A A A B
A B B B A/250 - A - A A A B
D B - - - - C - - - - D
D D D - A - D A/250 A - A -
C D A - - C A - - - A C
D D D B A/150 C A A/250 A/70 B A/150 A
- - - - - - - - - - - -
B A B D - - - - - - A A
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
A - - - A/73 B/70 - A/140 A B - A
A - - - - D - - B/72 - A A
A B A - - - - - - - - -
C - B B - B/70 A A/140 - B/70 - D
D A A - - - A - D - - -
A - A A A/73 A/70 A - B/72 B - B
A A A A A A/70 A A/212 D D A C
A A A B A A A A/250 B/72 C/70 A A
B - A A A/200 A/120 A A/212 D C/70 A/70 D
A C A A A/70 A/70 A - C A D D
A B A - A/70 A/70 A - C A D D
C D A B A/300 C A A/250 A A/70 A/70 B
A A A A A A/70 A A/250 A A A A
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
LATEX - WATER BASE A - B A - A A -
LAVENDER OIL B D C B C B A -
LEAD ACETATE A D B B A D A -
LEAD NITRATE - - - - - - - -
LEAD SULFAMATE A - A B A A A -
LIGROIN B B B A D A A -
LIME A - B A A A A -
LIME BLEACH A - B A A A A -
LIME SULFUR B - A D C A A -
LINDOL A C C D A B A -
LINOLEIC ACID B - D B D A A -
LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS C A B A D A A -
LUBRICANTS B B B A D A A -
LUBRICATING OILS (PETROLEUM) D B B A D A A A
LYE A C B C B B A -
MAGNESIUM CARBONATE A - A A C - A -
MAGNESIUM CHLORIDE A A A A A A A D
MAGNESIUM HYDROXIDE A A B B A A A D
MAGNESIUM NITRATE A - A A A - A D
MAGNESIUM OXIDE A - A A - - A D
MAGNESIUM SULFATE A - A A A A A D
MALEIC ACID A - D D C A A -
MALEIC ANHYDRIDE A - D D C A A -
MALIC ACID A - C B D A A -
MASH A - A A - - - -
MAYONNAISE A - - A - A - A
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
A - A - - A/70 A - A - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
D A B B A B/70 B A/250 A A/120 A B
- - - - - - - A/140 - - - -
C - - - - B/70 A - A A/70 A B
D - A - - D B - B/175 A A -
C A A - - B/70 B A/250 - A A B
D - A - - - - - B - - -
- - A - A/150 B/70 - A/250 A - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
A D A - - - - A/250 A/70 A A A
- - - A - - A - D - - -
A A A - - A/70 A - B D A B
A A A - A A/70 A A/250 B - A -
- - A - - A/70 - - A - A/150 B
D - A B A - A A/250 A B A B
D D D A A A/70 A A/250 A A/70 A B
D B A A A B/70 A A/250 A A/120 A A
D D A A A A/70 A A/250 A A/120 A A
B A A - - - A - - - - -
D C A B A A/70 A A/250 B A/120 A A
B A A B A/250 B/70 A - A B/120 A A
A - - A - - A - - D A -
B D A B A/250 C/70 A A/250 B B/120 A A
A - A - - A A - - A - -
D D A A - A A - A D A D
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
MELAMINE B - - C - - - -
MERCURIC CHLORIDE (DILUTE SOLUTION) A - A A A A A B
MERCURIC CYANIDE A - A A A - A -
MERCUROUS NITRATE - - - - - - - -
MERCURY A A A A A A A A
MESITYL OXIDE C D D D B D A -
METHANE C B B A D A A -
METHANOL (SEE ALCOHOL METHYL) A D A A B C A -
METHYL ACETATE B D B D A D A -
METHYL ACRYLATE B - B D B D A -
METHYL ACETONE B - D D - - A -
METHYL BROMIDE D - D B A A A -
METHYL BUTYL KETONE C D D D B D A -
METHYL CELLOSOLVE B D D D B D A -
METHYL CHLORIDE D D D D C A A -
METHYL CYCLOPENTANE C D C B D A A -
METHYL DICHLORIDE D D D D - A - -
METHYL ETHYL KETONE B D D D A D A B
METHYL FORMATE B D B D A D A -
METHYL ISOBUTYL KETONE C D D D B D A -
METHYL ISOPROPYL KETONE C - D D C D A -
METHYL METHACRYLATE B - D D C D A -
METHYL OLEATE C - D D C B A -
METHYL SALICYLATE B - D D C B A -
METHYLACRYLIC ACID A - B - B B A -
METHYLAMINE A - - B A - A -
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
- D D - - A A - - - - D
D D D B A/250 D B A/250 A A A A
D C A A A/250 A - A/250 A A A A
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
C A A A A A/120 A A/250 A A A A
A A A - - - - - - - - -
A - A A A/250 A/120 A A/250 B - A B
B A A A A/70 B/70 A A/250 A/120 A/70 A A
A A A A - A/120 A - C B/70 B D
- A - - - - A - - - B -
A A A - - A A - D - D D
D A - - A C A A/250 D C/70 A D
A - A - - D A - D - D A
A C - - A C A A/250 B - A D
D D A B A C A A/250 D C/70 A D
- - - - - - A - - - - -
D - - - - C A - D - D A
A A A A A/150 A/70 A A/250 C B/120 D D
A B B - - - A - - - - -
B C A A A/150 A/70 A - B/72 C D D
A C A - - D A A/250 C D - D
- C - - A/73 - A - A - B A
- - - - - - A - - - - -
A A - - - - A - B - B -
- - - - - - A - - - - -
- A A - - - A - - A/70 C D
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
METHYLENE CHLORIDE D D D D C B A D
MILK A - A A A A A -
MOLASSES A D A A A A A -
MONOBROMOROBENZENE - - - - - - - -
MONOCHLOROACETIC ACID - - - - - - - -
MONOCHLOROBENZENE C D D D D A A -
MONOMETHYL ANILINE B - D D D C A -
MONOETHANOLAMINE A C C B B C A -
MONOMETHYLETHER C - B A A A A -
MONOVINYL ACETYLENE C - B A A A A -
MUSTARD A - C B - A - -
NAPTHA C C D B D A A A
NAPTHALENE C B D D D A A B
NAPTHENIC ACID B - - B D A A -
NATURAL GAS C B A A C A A -
NEATSFOOT OIL B - - A B A A -
NEVILLE ACID A - C C B A A -
NICKEL ACETATE A - B B A A A -
NICKEL CHLORIDE A - A A A A A -
NICKEL NITRATE - - - - - - - -
NICKEL SULFATE A A A A A A A -
NITER CAKE A - A A A A A -
NITRIC ACID (5-10% SOLUTION) A C D D B A A B
NITRIC ACID (20% SOLUTION) B C D D B A A D
NITRIC ACID (50% SOLUTION) C C D D D A A D
NITRIC ACID (CONCENTRATED SOLUTION) C D D D D A A D
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
D B A A A/73 - A A/212 D D D D
A D A A A/250 A/120 A - A A A A
A A A A A/150 A/70 A - A A A A
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
D A A - A/100 B/70 A A/250 D - A/150 -
- - - - - - B - C - - -
B A A - - A D A/140 D C D D
- - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
B C A A - A/70 B - A A A -
A B A B A A/70 A A/250 C A/70 A A
B B B A A/150 A/70 A A/250 A/70 C A D
B B A A - - A - - - - -
A A A - A/150 - A A/250 A A - A
A A A - - - B - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
D - - - A/73 - - - - - - -
D D A - A C A A/250 A A A A
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
D D A B A A/70 A A/250 A A A A
- - - - - - - - - - - -
D D A A A C C B/212 A/120 B A/120 A
D D A A - D C B/212 B/70 C A A
C D A A A/150 D C B/212 B/70 B/70 A B
A/120 D A B A/150 D C - D C/70 A/125 B
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
NITRIC ACID - RED FUMING D D D D D B A D
NITROBENZENE B - D D C B A D
NITROBENZINE B - D - C A A -
NITRO ETHANE A - C D B C A -
NITROMETHANE A - C D A C A -
NITROUS ACID - - - - - - - -
NITROUS OXIDE - - - - - - - -
NITROGEN (GAS) A A A A A A A -
NITROGEN TETROXIDE D - D D C C A -
OCTADECANE B A B A D A A -
OCTANE - - - - - - - -
N-OCTANE B - - A D A A -
OCTACHLOROTOLUENE D D D D D A A -
OILS
ANILINE B C D D B A A -
ANISE C - D - - - A -
BAY C - D - - A - -
BONE C - D A - A A -
CASTOR B A A A B A A B
CINNAMON C - D - - - - -
CITRIC C - D A B A A -
CLOVE C - - A - - - -
COCONUT B A A A A A A -
COD LIVER C A B A A A A -
CORN B A D A A A A -
COTTON SEED B A D A A A A A
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
A/B D A - - D C - D - D -
C C B B A/150 B/70 B A/250 B/72 C/70 A/70 D
- - - - - - B - - - A -
A A A - - - B - C - - -
A A A A A/200 B/70 B A/212 C A A/120 B
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
A A A A A - A - A - A -
D D - - - - - - D - C -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
- - - - - - - - D - A -
D - - - - - - - D - - -
-
C A A B - A D - A - A/70 D
- A A - - - D - - - - -
- A A - - - D - - - A -
- A A - - - D - - - A -
A A A - - A A - - - A A
- - A - - - D - - D - D
A D A A A - A - A A A B
B - A A - - B - B - - -
B A A A - - A - A A A A
B - A A - - A - A - A A
B A A A A - A - A A A B
B A A A - A A - A A A B
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
CREOSOTE B - B A D A A -
DIESEL FUEL (20, 30, 40, 50) C - D A - A - A
FUEL (1, 2, 3, 5A, 5B, 6) C - D B D A A -
GINGER C - A A - A - -
HYDRAULIC (SEE HYDRAULIC)
LEMON C - D - - A - -
LINSEED B B D A B A A D
MINERAL C A B A D A A -
OLIVE B A B A A A A -
ORANGE C - D A - A - -
PALM B - D A - A A -
PEANUT B B D A C A A -
PEPPERMINT C - D D - A - -
PINE C - D A D A A -
RAPE SEED B B D B A A A -
ROSIN A - - A - A A -
SESAME SEED B - D A - A - -
SILICONE C A A A A A A -
SOYBEAN B B D A B A A D
SPERM B - D A - A - -
TANNING B - D A - A - -
TURBINE C - D A D A A -
OLEIC ACID B B D B B B A A
OLEUM D D D C D A A D
OLEUM SPIRITS D C D C C A A D
O-DICHLOROBENZENE D D D D A A - D
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
A - A B - D B - D C - C
A A A B - A A - B/70 A A B
A A A A - A/70 A - B/70 B A A
- - A - - - A - - - A -
A - A - - - A - D - A -
A A A B - A/70 A A/250 A A A A
A A A A - A A A/250 B B/70 A B
A A A A - A/70 A - A A/70 - C
A - A A - - A - A C/70 A C
A A A - - - A - - A A A
A A A - - - A - B/175 A A A
D - A - - - A - B/175 - A -
A C A - - A A - - D A D
- A A - - - A - - D A -
A - A A - A/70 A - A B/120 A C
A A A - - - A - - - A A
A A A A - A/70 A - A A A A
A A A A - B/70 A - A A/70 A A
- A A - - - A - - - A -
- - A - - - A - - - A -
A A A - - - A - B/70 C A A
B C A A A/250 B/120 A A/250 B C/120 A C
D D A D A/73 D D - D D D D
D D B - - - - - D D D -
A A - - - - A - D - - -
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
OXALIC ACID (COLD) A - B B A A A -
OXGEN - COLD A A A C B A A -
OXYGEN - 200°-400°F D D D D D B A -
OZONE A A B D A A A -
PAINT THINNER, DUCO C D C A D B A -
PALMITIC ACID B A B A B A A A
PARAFFIN A - - A D A A -
PENTANE A D B A D A A -
PERCHLORIC ACID C D A D B A A -
PERCHLORIC ACID-10% - - - - - - - -
PERCHLORIC ACID-70% - - - - - - - -
PERCHLOROETHYLENE A D D C D A A D
PETROLATUM B - B A - A - -
PETROLEUM - BELOW 250 B B B A D A A -
PETROLEUM - ABOVE 250 C D D C D B A -
PHENOL (CARBOLIC ACID) A C D D C A A D
PHENYLBENZENE C D D D D A A -
PHENYL ETHYL ETHER C D D D D C A -
PHENYL HYDRAZINE B D D D C A A -
PHORONE B D D D C A A -
PHOSPHORIC ACID - 20% A B B C A A A -
PHOSPHORIC ACID (TO 40% SOLUTION) A B D D B A A -
PHOSPHORIC ACID - 45% B B B D B A A -
PHOSPHORIC ACID (40%-100% SOLUTION) C C D D B A A -
PHOSPHORIC ACID CRUDE C A D D C A A -
PHOSPHOROUS TRICHLORIDE ACID B - D D A A A -
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
C D A B A/150 B/120 B A/250 A/70 A/120 A/120 B
A A A - A B/70 C A/250 C - A -
A A A - - D D - D - A -
B - - - A - D A/212 D C/70 A B
A A A - - - A - D - - -
C C A B A/250 C A A/250 A - A B
A - A B A/150 A/70 A - A B A B
A - C B - A/70 A - - D A A
D D D B A/200 D C - A B A/120 C
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/140 - - - -
D B A B A/200 D A A/250 B/72 D A C
B - A A - D A - A B A B
A A A - A A A A/250 A/70 C/70 A/200 -
A A A - - D A A/250 - C/70 - -
B D A A A/150 C A A/212 C D A/70 D
- - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - A/73 - - - - - D -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
D D B A - D D A/250 A/120 - A -
D D A A - D D A/250 A/120 B/70 A -
D D B - - D D A/250 A/120 - A -
D D B A A/250 C D A/250 A/120 - A B
D D C A - C D - A/120 B/70 A B
D B A A A/250 - D A/250 D B A -
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
PHOTOGRAPHIC (DEVELOPER) A - A A - A - -
PHTHALIC ACID - - - - - - - -
PHTHALIC ANHYDRIDE - - - - - - - -
PICKLING SOLUTION A C C - C B A D
PICRIC ACID B B B B B A A -
PINENE C B D B D A A -
PIPERIDINE B D D D D C A -
PLATING SOLUTIONS:
ANTIMONY A - A A - A A -
ARSENIC A - A A - A A -
BRASS A - - A - A A -
BRONZE A - A A - A - -
CADMIUM A - A A - A A -
CHROME A - D D A A A -
COPPER A - - A - A A -
GOLD A - A A - A A -
INDIUM A - - A - A - -
IRON A - A A - A A -
LEAD A - A A - A A -
NICKEL A - - A - A A -
SILVER A - A A - A A -
TIN A - A A - A A -
ZINC A - A A - A A -
POLYVINYL ACETATE EMULSION A - B - A - A -
POTASH A B B A B A A -
POTASSIUM ACETATE A D B B A B A -
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
C D A A A/150 - A A/250 A A - A
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
- - - A - - D - - - - -
C D D D A/73 C D A/140 B/70 A A/70 -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
D A A A - D A/130 - A - A/70 A
C A A A - A A/110 - A - - A
C A A A A/150 A A/100 A/250 A B A A
C A A A - A B - A - - -
C - - D A/150 A C A/250 A - A A
C - A D A/150 D - A/250 A - A A
C - - D A/150 A - A/250 A - A -
C - A - A/150 A/70 - A/250 A - A -
C - A A - D - - A - - A
C - A A - D - - A - A D
C - - - A/150 D - - A - A A
C - - - A/150 A - - A - A D
C - A - A/150 A/120 - - A - A A
C - A - A/150 D - - A - A A
C - A - A/150 D - - A - A D
- B - - - - A - B/70 - A -
C B A B A A A A/250 A A/70 A A
D A B - A/70 - A - A - A -
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
POTASSIUM ALUMINUM SULFATE - - - - - - - -
POTASSIUM BICARBONATE A - A A - A A -
POTASSIUM BICHROMATE - - - - - - - -
POTASSIUM BROMIDE A - A A A A A -
POTASSIUM CARBONATE A - B A A A A -
POTASSIUM CHLORATE A - A A A A A -
POTASSIUM CHLORIDE A A A A A A A -
POTASSIUM CHROMATE A - A A - A A -
POTASSIUM CUPRO CYANIDE A A A A A A A -
POTASSIUM CYANIDE SOLUTIONS A A A A A A A -
POTASSIUM DICHROMATE A A A A A A A D
POTASSIUM HYDROXIDE A B B B B D A D
POTASSIUM HYPOCHLORITE - - - - - - - -
POTASSIUM IODIDE - - - - - - - -
POTASSIUM NITRATE A A A A A A A -
POTASSIUM PERMANGANATE A - A A A A A -
POTASSIUM SULFATE A A A A A A A -
POTASSIUM SULFIDE - - - - - - - -
PRODUCER GAS C A B A C A A -
PROPANE (LIQUIFIED) C B B A D A A -
PROPYL ACETATE B D D D C D A -
PROPYL ALCOHOL - - - - - - - -
PROPYL NITRATE B - - - B C A -
PROPYLENE B D D D D A A -
PROPYLENE GLYCOL A - C A A A A -
PROPYLENE OXIDE A D D - B - A -
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
C A B B - A/70 A A/250 A A A A
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
C D A A A A/70 A A/250 A A A A
C B A B A A/70 A A/250 A - A -
B C A B - C A A/250 A A/70 A A
B B C B A B/70 A A/250 A A/70 A A
A A B A A A D A/250 A A A A
- - - - - - C - - - - -
D B A B A A/70 C A/250 A - A A
A B A B A D D A/250 A A A A
D C A B A/150 C A A/250 A A A/150 A
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
B A A B A B/70 B A/250 A A A A
B B B A - D C A/250 B A A A
A B B B A A/70 B A/250 A A/120 A A
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
- - - - - - A - - - - -
A A A A A A/70 A A/250 B/72 C/70 B/200 A
- - - - A/120 - A - C - A/70 -
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
A D - - - - A - - - - -
A A A - - - A - - - - B
A B A B - - D A/100 A B/70 A C
B B A - D - A A/140 C - D -
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
PYRANOL D B D A D A A -
PYDRAULS D D D D B A A A
PYRIDINE C - D D B D A D
PYROGALLIC ACID A - - - - A - -
PYROLIGNEOUS ACID B - C C B A A -
PYRROLE C B D D C C A -
RADIATION A A B B C B A -
RED OIL B B C A B A A -
ROSINS A - - A - - A -
RUM A D - A A A A -
RUST INHIBITORS B - C A - A - -
SALAD DRESSING A - - A - A - -
SALICYLALDEHYDE - - - - - - - -
SALICYLIC ACID - - - - - - - -
SAL AMMONIAC A A A A A A A -
SEA WATER A A B A A A A A
SEWAGE A D A A B A A -
SHELLAC (BLEACHED) B - - A - - - -
SHELLAC (ORANGE) B - - A - - - -
SILICATE ESTERS B A B A D A A -
SILICONE B - A A - A - -
SILICONE GREASES B A A A A A A A
SILVER BROMIDE A - - - - - - -
SILVER CHLORIDE - - - - - - - -
SILVER CYANIDE - - - - - - - -
SILVER NITRATE A A A C A A A -
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
- - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - A/70 A/70 - - - - - -
B A B A D C B A/250 C B/70 D D
- D A B A/150 - D A/140 - - A A
D C B - A/100 - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - D - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
A D A - - A/70 B - A B/70 - C
- - A - - A A - A - - A
- C A - - - A - A - - -
B D A - - A A - A - - -
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
D D A - - - - - - - - -
D D C - A/250 A/120 A - A A/120 A A
B B A - - - A A/250 A - A -
A A A - - A/70 A - A A/70 - -
A A A - - A/70 A - A A/70 - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
B A A - - A/70 A A/212 A - A A
- - - - - - A - - - - -
D D B A - - A - - A - -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
D D A A A A/70 A A/250 A A A A
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
SKYDROL 500 B D D D A C A A
SKYDROL 7000 B D D D C B A -
SOAP SOLUTIONS A A B A A A A A
SODA ASH (SEE SODIUM CARBONATE)
SODIUM ACETATE A D B B A D A -
SODIUM ALUMINATE A - A A - A A -
SODIUM BENZOATE - - - - - - - -
SODIUM BICARBONATE A - A A A A A -
SODIUM BICHROMATE - - - - - - - -
SODIUM BISULFATE A - A A A A A -
SODIUM BISULFITE A - A A A A A -
SODIUM BORATE A - A A A A A -
SODIUM BROMIDE - - - - - - - -
SODIUM CARBONATE A - A A A A A -
SODIUM CHLORATE A - A A A A A A
SODIUM CHLORIDE A A A A A A A A
SODIUM CHROMATE A - A A - A A D
SODIUM CYANIDE A - A A A A A -
SODIUM DICHROMATE - - - - - - - -
SODIUM FLUORIDE - - - - - - - -
SODIUM HYDROXIDE (20%) A B B A A A A B
SODIUM HYDROXIDE (50% SOLUTION) A B C D A A A B
SODIUM HYDROXIDE (80% SOLUTION) A B C D A B A -
SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE (TO 20%) A D D C C A A D
SODIUM METAPHOSPHATE A - B A A A A -
SODIUM METASILICATE A - A A - A - -
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
- - - - A/70 C A - - - - -
- - - - A/70 C A - - - - -
C B A A A/150 A/70 A - A D A A
- -
B B A A A B/70 A A/250 A A A B
C A A B A A/70 A - A - A -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
A C A B A A A A/250 A A/120 A A
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
D D A B A A/70 A A/250 A A/120 A A
A D A A A C A A/250 A A/120 A A
C B B A A A/70 A A/250 A/140 A/120 A A
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
C B A A A B/70 A A/250 A B/120 A A
B - A A A D A A/250 A B/120 A A
C B C A - A/70 A - A A/120 A A
D B - A A D D - A - A -
D B A A - A/70 B A/250 A A/120 A A
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
D B A B - A A A/250 A D A A
D C B A A/250 A A A/250 A D C A
D C D B - C A A/140 A D C A
D D C A A D D A/250 B/72 A A A
A C A - A A/70 B - D A/70 - A
B A A A - - D A/250 - - - A
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
SODIUM NITRATE A - B C A A A -
SODIUM NITRITE - - - - - - - -
SODIUM PERBORATE A - B B A A A -
SODIUM PEROXIDE B D B C B A A -
SODIUM PHOSPHATE A A B B A A A -
SODIUM POLYPHOSPHATE - - - - - - - -
(MONO, DI, TRIBASIC) A A D A - A - -
SODIUM SILICATE A - A A A A A -
SODIUM SULFATE A A A A A A A -
SODIUM SULFIDE A A A A A A A -
SODIUM SULFITE - - - - - - - -
SODIUM TETRABORATE A - - A A A A -
SODIUM THIOSULPHATE ("HYPO") A A A B A A A -
SORGHUM A - A A - A - -
SOY SAUCE A B A A B A A -
STANNIC CHLORIDE A B D A B A A C
STANNIC FLUOBORATE A - A A - A - -
STANNOUS CHLORIDE - - - - - - - -
STARCH A A A A A A A -
STEAM TO 200°F A C C C A D D B
STEAM 220°F-300°F B D D D A D D C
STEARIC ACID B A B C B A A C
STODDARD SOLVENT C A B B D A A -
STYRENE C C D D D B A D
SUCROSE SOLUTION A D A A A A A -
SUGAR (LIQUIDS) A - B A - A - -
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
A A A B A A/70 A A/250 A A/120 A A
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
B C C B - B/70 B A/250 A A/70 A A
D D A B A A/70 C A/250 B/120 A A B
D B B - A A/70 - A/250 A - A -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
D D A A - A/70 B - A A A A
C B A B A A/70 C A/250 A A/120 A A
B A A B A A B A/250 A A/120 A A
D A A B A A/70 B A/250 A A/120 A A
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
C - A - A A B - - A/120 - A
B C A A A B C A/250 A A/70 A A
- A A - - A A - - - - -
A D A - - A A - - - - -
D D D - A B B A/250 A A/120 A A
D D - - - - C - - - - -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
A C A - A/150 A/70 A - - B - A
A A A - A D B A/250 - - - -
A A A - A D D A/250 - - - -
B - A A A/150 A/120 A A/250 B/72 B/72 A B
A A A A A A A A/250 B/120 C/120 A C
A A A D - A/70 A A/212 D - B D
- B - A - A A - - - - -
A - A A - A/70 A - A - - -
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
SULFATE LIQUORS A - C - - - - -
SULFITE LIQUORS A - A A B A A -
SULFUR A B B B A A A C
SULFUR CHLORIDE D - D D D A A C
SULFUR DIOXIDE A - B D A D A D
SULFUR HEXAFLUORIDE B - B B A A A -
SULFUR TRIOXIDE C B C C C A A -
SULFUR TRIOXIDE (DRY) C B D D C A A -
SULFURIC ACID (DILUTE) A C C D - A A A
SULFURIC ACID (TO 10%) A D D D A A A A
SULFURIC ACID (10%-75%) A D D D C A A B
SULFURIC ACID (CONCENTRATED TO 98%) B D D D C A A C
SULFURIC ACID (20% OLEUM) D D D D D B A -
SULFUROUS ACID A D B C - A A B
SYRUP A - B A - A - A
TALL OIL - - - - - - - -
TALLOW B A - A A A A A
TANNIC ACID A A B A C A A A
TANNING LIQUORS A - - C - A A -
TAR, BITUMINOUS B - C B D A A -
TARTARIC ACID A A B A B A A C
TERPINEOL B B D C B A A -
TERTIARY BUTYL ALCOHOL B D A A A B A -
TERTIARY BUTYL CATECHOL B D B D B A A -
TERTIARY BUTYL MERCAPTAN B D D D D A A -
TETRA BROMOMETHANE D - D D D A A -
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
B C C A A/73 B/70 D A/250 A A/120 A B
D D B - A/73 - - A/250 - - - -
D B A - A/250 A/70 - A/250 A - A -
D D D A A/73 A D A/140 C C/70 A/70 C
D D A B A/150 C D A/250 A/70 B/70 A A
D D - - - - D - - B - B
D D B - - - - - - - - A
A A C B - A/70 D - D C/70 D A
D D B - - C D A/250 A A/70 A -
D D C A A/250 C D A/250 A/120 A/70 A A
D D C B A/150 D D A/250 A/72 B/70 A/150 A
D D B - A/150 D D A/250 C/72 B/70 A/120 D
D D - - - D D A/250 D - - -
D D B B A/250 D D A/212 A B/120 A A
A - A - - - A - A - - -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
A - A - - A/70 A - B/70 C - -
C C A B A/250 C B A/250 A A A A
C - A A A/250 A/70 B - A A/70 - A
- B B - A B B - - - - -
C C A B A/250 B/70 B A/250 A A/70 A A
A A A - - - - - D - B/120 -
- - - - - - A - B - - -
C B B - - - A - - - - -
- - - - - - B - - - - -
D - - - - - - - D - - -
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
TETRABUTYL TITANATE B - A B B A A -
TETRACHLOROETHYLENE D B D D D A A -
TETRACHLOROETHANE D - - D D A A -
TETRAETHYL LEAD C - D B D A A -
TETRAHYDROFURAN B C D D C B A B
TETRALIN C - D D D A A -
THIONYL CHLORIDE B - D D D A A -
TITANIUM TETRACHLORIDE D D D C D A A -
TOLUENE C C D C D A A B
TOLUENE DIISOCYANATE B - D - A - A -
TOLUENE, TOLUOL C C D D D A A B
TOMATO JUICE A - A A - - A A
TRANSFORMER OIL D D C B D A A -
TRANSMISSION FLUID TYPE A C A C A D A A -
TRIACETIN A D A A A C A -
TRIBUTOXY ETHYL PHOSPHATE B D D D A B A -
TRIBUTYL PHOSPHATE B D D D C D A -
TRIBUTYL MERCAPTAN B - D D D A A -
TRICHLOROACETIC ACID B D B C B B A -
TRICHLORETHANE D D D D D A A -
TRICHLORETHYLENE D D D D D A A D
TRICHLOROPROPANE D - A A - A A -
TRICRESYLPHOSPHATE B C D D A B A -
TRIETHYLAMINE B - B A - A A -
TRIETHANOL AMINE A D B B B B A D
TRIETHYL ALUMINUM B - D D - B A -
METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
- - - - - - - - - - - -
D A A - A/200 A/70 A A/250 D B - D
D A A - - C A A/140 D - - C
- - - - - - - A/250 A/70 - A -
- - A A D A C A/212 C C/70 B/70 D
A A A - - - - - D - - -
D D - - A/150 C - A/212 D - D -
D A B - - A/70 - A/212 D - A -
A A A A A/200 A/70 A A/250 D C/70 A -
- - - - - - C - - - - -
A A A - A/150 A/70 A - B/175 C/70 A D
A - A - A/250 A A A/212 A A/70 A A
A A A - A/250 A/70 A - B/70 - - B
A A A - - - A - - - - -
B - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
- A - - A/73 - - A/140 A/70 - A/70 -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
D D D B A/150 D D A/250 B/70 A A/70 B
D B A A - C A - D - A/120 C
D C A A A A/70 A A/250 B/72 D A D
D A A A - - A - D - - -
D B A A - A/120 C - B/70 B/70 - D
- A - - A/150 A/70 A A/212 C - A/120 B
B A A - A/73 A/70 A A/140 A/70 - A/70 -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
POLYURETHANE
SANIFLEX™ TPE
WIL-FLEX™
NEOPRENE
BUNA-N
VITON®
EPDM
PTFE
TRIETHYL BORANE B - D D - A A -
TRINITROTOLUENE A - A D D C A -
TRIOCTYL PHOSPHATE B - D D A B A -
TRISODIUM PHOSPHATE - - - - - - - -
TRIARYL PHOSPHATE B B C D A A A -
TUNG OIL B B B A C B A C
TURPENTINE C D D A D A A -
UNLEADED GASOLINE C D D D D A A -
URINE - - - - - - - -
VARNISH - - - - - - - -
VINEGAR - - - - - - - -
VINYL ACETATE - - - - - - - -
WATER, ACID, MINE - - - - - - - -
WATER, DEMINERALIZED - - - - - - - -
WATER, DISTILLED, LAB GRADE 7 - - - - - - - -
WATER, FRESH - - - - - - - -
WATER, SALT A A B B A A A A
WHITE LIQUOR (PULP MILL) - - - - - - - -
WINES - - - - - - - -
XYLENE - - - - - - - -
ZINC CHLORIDE - - - - - - - -
ZINC NITRATE - - - - - - - -
ZINC SULFATE - - - - - - - -

METALS PLASTICS

POLYPROPYLENE
POLYETHYLENE
ALUMINUM
CAST IRON
ALLOY C
NYLON
PVDF
ETFE
PVC
- - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
A B B - - - - - - - - -
A B A B A/200 A/70 A A/250 B/175 D A -
A A A A - A A - D - C -
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
D D C - - A/120 A A/250 A A A A
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/212 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -
- - - - - - - A/250 - - - -

Halogenated Solvents Warning

Halogenated solvents can, under certain circumstances, corrode
aluminum or galvanized parts. If the wetted parts or a pressurizable
fluid system contain aluminum or galvanized parts, this corrosive action
could cause an EXPLOSION. Although manufacturers of these solvents
typically add inhibitors, there is no known inhibitor that will prevent the
corrosive reaction under ALL circumstances. Special caution should
be exercised handling reclaimed or used solvents since the inhibitors
are often degraded. ONLY stainless steel or PVDF pumps should be
used for these materials. Typical examples of halogenated hydrocarbon
solvents (H.H.C.) include, but are not limited to, the following:
Trichlorethane, Trichlorethylene, Methylene Chloride, Methyl Chloride,
Carbon Tetrachloride, Chloroform and Dichlorethylene.
• Determine the pH value:
• pH is a measure of hydrogen-ion concentration. pH of 7 is neutral
— below 7, acid — above 7, alkaline.
Material 1pH
14
13 ALKALINE — CAUSTIC
STAINLESS
12 — BASIC
11
10
CAST IRON
9
8
ALUMINUM 7
6
5
CAST IRON
4
3
2
STAINLESS ACID
1
0
Elastomer Selection Guide for Solvents

The liquids classified and listed below cannot usually be handled with
Neoprene or Buna-N and will probably require Wil-Flex™, Viton®, EPDM
and/or PTFE.
a. Ketones and Aldehydes
1. Methyl ethyl ketone
2. Methylacetone Wil-Flex™
3. Acetone EPDM/PTFE
4. Formaldehyde
b. Acetates
1. Ethyl acetate
2. Isopropyl acetate Wil-Flex™
3. Amyl acetate EPDM/PTFE
4. Butyl acetate
c. Aromatic Hydrocarbons
1. Benzene
2. Toluol (toluene)
3. Xylene (xyol)
4. Benzol Viton®/PTFE
5. Hexane
6. Cyclohexane
7. Napthalene
d. Chlorinated Hydrocarbons
1. Carbon tetrachloride
2. Trichlorethylene
3. Ethylene dichloride
4. Methyl chloride Viton®/PTFE
5. Propyl chloride
6. Chloroform
7. Dichlorethylene
Temperature Limits for Elastomers

Wil-Flex™ –40° to 107.2° C (–40° to 225° F)
Neoprene –18° to 93.3° C (–0° to 200° F)
Buna-N –12° to 82.2° C (+10° to 180° F)
EPDM –51° to 137.8° C (–60° to 280° F)
®
Viton –40° to 176.7° C (–40° to 350° F)
1
PTFE 4° to 104.4° C (+40° to 220° F)
Polyurethane –12° to 65.6° C (+10° to 150° F)
Saniflex™ –29° to 104.4° C (–20° to 220° F)
Temperature Limits for Plastics
Polypropylene 0° to 79.4° C (+32° to 175° F)
Polyethylene 0° to 70.0° C (+32° to 158° F)
PVDF –12° to 107.2° C (+10° to 225° F)
2
PTFE/PFA –29° to 107.2° C (–20° to 225° F)
Acetal –29° to 82.2° C (–20° to 180° F)
Nylon –18° to 93.3° C (0° to 200° F)
1
4.4° to 148.9° C (40° to +300° F) - 13 mm (1/2") and 25 mm (1") models only.
2
–28.9° to 148.9° C (–20° to +300° F) - Ultrapure II and III models only.
NOTE: These are average temperatures. Chemicals and solvents can

have an effect on temperature limits.
Rubber Compounds
Listed below are the various rubber compounds manufactured for use
as elastomers in Wilden pumps. These compounds consist of natural
rubber and manmade additives to increase the compounds’ resistance
to specific types of fluids. Diaphragms made of these compounds will
utilize a nylon fabric mesh. The mesh is centered within the diaphragm
during the molding process. The fabric mesh lends dimensional stability
and strength to the compound. The elastomers manufactured of these
compounds are fabricated using compression molding process.
Compound Neoprene
Color Green
Temperature Limits –18° to 93° C
0° to +200° F
Suitable Applications An excellent general purpose diaphragm for use in
non-aggressive applications such as water-based slurries, well water or
sea water. Exhibits excellent flex life and low cost.
Compound Buna-n
Color Red
+10° to +180° F
Suitable Applications Excellent for applications involving petroleum/oil-
based fluids such as leaded gasolines, fuel oils, non-synthetic hydraulic
oils, kerosene, turpentines and motor oils.
Compound EPDM
Color Blue
–10° to +280° F
Suitable Applications Excellent for use in applications requiring extremely
cold temperatures. May also be used as a low cost alternative when
pumping dilute acids or caustics.
®
Compound Viton
Color Silver
–40° to +350° F
Suitable Applications Excellent for use in applications requiring extremely
hot temperatures. May also be used with aggressive fluids such as
aromatic or chlorinated hydrocarbons and highly aggressive acids.
PTFE would normally be used with these aggressive fluids as its flex
life is better than Viton®. However, in applications involving suction lift
outside the range of PTFE, Viton® will be the preferred choice for highly
aggressive fluids.
Thermoplastic Compounds
Listed below are the various thermoplastic (TPE) compounds
manufactured for use as elastomers in Wilden pumps.These compounds
are comprised entirely of man-made elements. Thermoplastic
elastomers manufactured of these compounds are fabricated using
an injection molding process. Diaphragms made of these compounds
require no fabric reinforcement due to the dimensional stability and
tensile strength inherent in TPE compounds.
Compound Polyurethane
Color Clear
0° to +150° F
Suitable Applications An excellent general purpose diaphragm for use in
non-aggressiv eapplications. This material exhibits exceptional flex life
and durability. Wilden’s least expensive diaphragm.
Compound Wil-Flex™
Color Cream
–40° to +225°F
Suitable Applications Excellent choice as a low cost alternative to PTFE
in many acidic and caustic applications such as sodium hydroxide,
sulfuric or hydrochloric acids. Exhibits excellent abrasion resistance and
durability at a cost comparable to neoprene.
Compound Saniflex™
Color Cream
–20° to +220° F
Suitable Applications Exhibits excellent abrasion resistance, flex life
and durability. This material is FDA approved for food processing
applications. An outstanding general purpose diaphragm as well.
PTFE Compounds
PTFE is one of the most chemically inert man-made compounds
known. Wilden engineers were the first to discover that by reinforcing
a molded PTFE diaphragm with concentric ribs they could control the
flex pattern of the diaphragm. The ribbed design extended flex life 5 to
10 times longer than that of any other PTFE diaphragm. This innovation
made the use of PTFE elastomers in diaphragm pumps cost effective,
greatly expanding the range of applications for diaphragm pumps. PTFE
is not an elastic material; therefore, PTFE diaphragms require a rubber
back-up diaphragm to provide flexibility and memory. Also, when using
a PTFE diaphragm, flow rates will be reduced by up to 20%. This is due
to the inability of PTFE to flex as far as a rubber diaphragm which will
decrease displacement per stroke.
Compound PTFE
Color White
+40° to +220° F
Suitable Applications Excellent choice when pumping highly aggressive
fluids such as aromatic or chlorinated hydrocarbons, acids, caustics,
ketones and acetates. Exhibits good flex life compared to a standard
rubber diaphragm.
PUMP USER'S GUIDE
Warranty
13
Sec tion 13 Warranty
Each and every product manufactured by Wilden Pump and Engineering,

LLC is built to meet the highest standards of quality. Every pump is
functionally tested to insure integrity of operation.
Wilden Pump and Engineering, LLC warrants that pumps, accessories
and parts manufactured or supplied by it to be free from defects in
material and workmanship for a period of five (5) years from date of
installation or six (6) years from date of manufacture, whichever comes
first. Failure due to normal wear, misapplication, or abuse is, of course,
excluded from this warranty.
Since the use of Wilden pumps and parts is beyond our control, we
cannot guarantee the suitability of any pump or part for a particular
application and Wilden Pump and Engineering, LLC shall not be liable
for any consequential damage or expense arising from the use or
misuse of its products on any application. Responsibility is limited
solely to replacement or repair of defective Wilden pumps and parts.
All decisions as to the cause of failure are at the sole discretion of
Wilden Pump and Engineering, LLC.
Prior approval must be obtained from Wilden for return of any items for
warranty consideration and must be accompanied by the appropriate
MSDS for the product(s) involved. A Return Goods Tag, obtained from
an authorized Wilden distributor, must be included with the items
which must be shipped freight prepaid.
The foregoing warranty is exclusive and in lieu of all other warranties
expressed or implied (whether written or oral) including all implied
warranties of merchantability and fitness for any particular purpose.
No distributor or other person is authorized to assume any liability or
obligation for Wilden Pump and Engineering, LLC other than expressly
provided herein.
PUMP USER'S GUIDE
Safety
Supplement
14
Safety Supplement 14
SAFETY MANUAL
Wilden Pump & Engineering, LLC.
Supplement to Engineering, Operation
and Maintenance Manual
IMPORTANT
READ THIS MANUAL BEFORE PRODUCT INSTALLATION, OPERATION,
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
This safety manual applies to all Wilden pumps

and dampeners and provides instructions for safe
installation, operation, inspection, and maintenance.
Failing to follow these instructions could result in
severe personal injury, including death, and/or substantial product
and/or property damage.
This document is a supplement to the Engineering, Operation and
Maintenance manual. It is important to refer to the Engineering,
Operation, and Maintenance manual for additional information about
specific products.
General Safety Considerations

• Verify that the model received matches the purchase order and/or
specification sheet.
• Ensure all operators are properly trained and employ safe operating
and maintenance practices as outlined in this Safety Manual,
the Pump User’s Guide, and the Engineering, Operation and
Maintenance manual for the specific product.
• Wear appropriate safety equipment during installation, operation,
inspection and maintenance. Use caution to avoid contact with
process fluids, cleaning fluids, and other chemicals. Gloves,
coveralls, face shields and other equipment may be required to
adequately protect personnel. All personnel must review the
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for all process and cleaning
fluids and follow all handling instructions.
14 Safety Supplement
• Wear safety glasses and additional safety equipment during

operation. If a diaphragm rupture occurs, the material being pumped
may be forced out air exhaust.
• Always use proper hearing protection. Pump noise can exceed 75
dBA under certain operating conditions.
Product Installation
• Always refer to the detailed installation instructions supplied in the
Engineering, Operation, and Maintenance manual.
• Retighten all fasteners to the specifications provided in the
Engineering, Operation and Maintenance manual.
• Application pressures and temperatures, product maximum
pressures, and an acceptable factor of safety should all be considered
when selecting suction and discharge piping and hoses. Extra caution
must be taken for all high-pressure H-Series and Rhino pumps due
to the high discharge pressure that these pumps produce. Consult
the product Engineering, Operation, and Maintenance manual or
your local distributor for further information.
• During operation, unwanted movement of the pump could occur. All
pumps should be bolted to a secure surface that is both level and
flat.
• Flush products thoroughly before installation to reduce the possibility
of process fluid contamination or chemical reaction.
• FDA, USDA, and 3A products should be cleaned and/or sanitized
prior to usage.
• Ensure proper ventilation of any liquid tanks or vessels. The pump
can generate high inlet suction and discharge pressure conditions.
Improper ventilation can lead to rupture of the container.
• When using gases other than compressed air to power the product,
make sure that the environment has adequate ventilation. Product
exhaust or system leak can displace air from the environment
creating a risk of suffocation.
Product Operation
• Do not exceed the maximum air supply pressure. Refer to the
Engineering, Operation, and Maintenance manual for maximum air
supply pressure.
• Do not exceed the maximum fluid housing pressure. Refer to the
Engineering, Operation, and Maintenance manual or contact factory
for details.
• Do not exceed 3.4 bar (50 psig) air supply pressure for UL 79 listed
models.
• Do not exceed 0.7 bar (10 psig) pressure to fluid inlet to minimize
potential for premature wear and parts failure.
Product Maintenance
• Follow all maintenance instructions in the Engineering, Operation
and Maintenance manual.
• Always wear hand and eye protection to prevent injury during
installation and maintenance. Example: Removal of a Turbo-Flo®
end cap using compressed air could cause the end cap to eject with
considerable force.
• Before any maintenance or repair is attempted, the compressed
air line to the product should be disconnected and all air pressure
allowed to escape. Close system valves to isolate intake and
discharge. Carefully drain pressure from intake and discharge piping
prior to disconnection. Drain pumps by turning upside down and
allowing any fluid to flow into a suitable container. Flush thoroughly
prior to performing maintenance.
Regulatory Compliance
• Always ensure that product installation, operation, inspection and
maintenance conforms with all applicable laws, regulations and
codes.
• Not all products are compliant to all regulatory standards. Consult your
local distributor for models that meet your regulatory requirements.
Fire And Explosion Prevention – Use Of Products In

Explosion Zones
• There is a risk of fire and/or explosion if certain conditions exist.
These conditions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Pumping flammable fluids (in some cases an additional risk may be
created by vapors or gases resulting when the process fluid escapes
by leaking, component failure, or improper maintenance.)
• Product used in flammable atmospheres (flammable atmospheres
can be caused by the presence of gases, dusts, or vapors)
• Placement of flammable materials near product
• Product powered by flammable gases (Example: Natural gas or
air/flammable compressor oil mixture)
• Standard Wilden pump models should not be powered by flammable
gases. Consult factory for specific models intended to be powered
by flammable gases.
• Be aware of the hazards associated with the specific application
and the application environment. Conform with all applicable laws,
regulations and codes.
• Do not use the product if there is any doubt about the safety of the
application.
• Mechanical operation and flowing fluids can generate static electricity.
Groundable products are required for all potentially flammable or
explosive applications to prevent static spark. The pump, piping,
valves, containers and other equipment must be grounded. Periodic
inspection of the ground connection should be performed to ensure
the equipment is properly grounded.
• The surface temperature of the equipment must be kept below the
ignition temperature of any potential explosive atmosphere. The
surface temperature is affected by the temperature of the fluid being
pumped and the kinetic energy added by the pump and application
(e.g., recirculation of process media). The end user must ensure

process media and equipment maximum temperature is acceptable
for the environment.
• Electrical products have special considerations when used in
explosive environments. Ensure electrical products possesses the
correct rating for the intended application.
ATEX Pump Considerations

• ATEX products have been assessed for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres in accordance with the European Directive 94/9/EC
(ATEX 100a). Users of ATEX products must be familiar with ATEX
requirements and follow all safety guidelines.
• All ATEX product identification tags contain the ATEX rating for the
specific model. Verify that the ATEX rating is appropriate for the
application.
• It is the responsibility of the end user of ATEX products to ensure
that the point of use location has been properly classified in
accordance with Directive 1999/92/EC ANNEX I (ATEX 137), and
that the equipment placed into service is compatible with that
classification.
• For ATEX Equipment Group I, Category M2, the equipment must
be de-energized in the presence of an explosive atmosphere. This is
achieved by disconnecting the air supply.
• When replacing worn or damaged components for products used
in ATEX environments, only use parts approved for use in ATEX
environments.
U.L. Pump Considerations
• Do not exceed 3.4 bar (50 psig) air supply pressure or fluid discharge
pressure for UL 79 listed models.
• All pipe connections must use U.L. classified gasoline-resistant pipe
compound.
• All installations must conform to Flammable and Combustible

Liquids Code NFPA 30 or Automotive and Marine Service Station
Code NFPA 30A, and all other applicable codes.
• Pump exhaust to be connected to pipe or tubing to be routed
outdoors or other location determined to be equivalent.
• Pump should be fitted with a pressure relief valve rated to a
maximum of 3.4 bar (50 psig). This valve should be connected to
the pump discharge line to vent pressure resulting from thermal
expansion. The pressure relief valve should incorporate a return line
back to the supply tank.
• Pump must be electrically grounded. The ground connection is
marked with a tag having the grounding symbol.
CSA International Pump Considerations

• The pump must be electrically grounded using the grounding
conductor provided. Improper grounding can cause improper and
dangerous operation.
• The gas outlet of the pump must be vented to a safe location in
accordance with local codes or, in the absence of local codes, an
industry or nationally recognized code having jurisdiction over the
specific installation.
Electrical Product Considerations

• Ensure electrical connections are installed according to Engineering,
Operation, and Maintenance manual and local laws, regulations and
codes.
• Always disconnect power supply before performing installation or
maintenance procedures.
• Protect all electrical connections from exposure to the environment
and fluids.
Submersible Applications
• Not all pumps can be used in submersible applications. Refer to the
Engineering, Operation, and Maintenance manual.
• When using a submersible pump, both the liquid path and external
components must be compatible with material in which the pump
will be submersed.
• Submersed pumps must have a hose attached to air exhaust and the
exhaust piped above liquid level.
Chemical And Temperature Compatibility

• Check the chemical compatibility of all wetted components, including
elastomers, with all process and cleaning fluids to minimize the risk
of dangerous chemical reactions. Example: Pumping halogenated
hydrocarbon solvents with an aluminum pump creates the potential
for an explosion caused by corrosion of the aluminum components.
• Chemical compatibility can change with process fluid concentration
and temperature.
• Check the temperature limits for all components, including the
elastomers. Example: Viton® has a maximum limit of 176.7°C
(350°F) but polypropylene has a maximum limit of only 79°C (175°F),
therefore a polypropylene pump fitted with Viton® elastomers is
limited to 70°C (175°F).
• Maximum temperature and pressure limits are based upon
mechanical stress only. Certain chemicals will significantly reduce
the maximum safe operating temperature and/or pressure.
• Always refer to the Wilden Chemical Resistance Guide or contact
your local distributor for information regarding specific products.
Temperature Limits
Pump Housing
Acetal –28.9°C to 82.2°C –20°F to 180°F
Carbon-Filled Acetal –28.9°C to 65.6°C –20°F to 150°F
Nylon –17.8°C to 93.3°C 0°F to 200°F
Polypropylene 0°C to 79°C 32°F to 175°F
PVDF –12°C to 107°C 10°F to 225°F
Teflon® PFA (UPII) –28.9°C to 148.9°C –20°F to 300°F
Teflon® PFA
(all other models) –28.9°C to 107.2°C –20°F to 225°F
Elastomer
Buna-N –12.2°C to 82.2°C 10°F to 180°F
Neoprene –17.8°C to 93.3°C 0°F to 200°F
Nordel® –51.1°C to 137.8°C –60°F to 280°F
Polyurethane -12.2°C to 65.6°C 10°F to 150°F
Saniflex™ –28.9°C to 104.4°C –20°F to 220°F
Teflon® PTFE (UPII) 4.4°C to 148.9°C 40°F to 300°F
Teflon® PTFE
(all other models) 4.4°C to 104.4°C 40°F to 220°F
Viton® –40°C to 176.7°C –40°F to 350°F
Wil-Flex™ –40°C to 107.2°C –40°F to 225°F
Rhino™ -12.2°C to 65.6°C 10°F to 150°F
Unitec™ Temperature Limits
Conductive Polyethylene 0.0°C to 70.0°C 32°F to 158°F
Teflon® PTFE -
UU Series, UA.025, UA.038 0.0°C to 100.0°C 32°F to 212°F
UU High Temperature 0.0°C to 200.0°C 32°F to 392°F
All Others 0.0°C to 120.0°C 32°F to 248°F
D.0024710002
Operating instructions (Translation)
Gear pump KF 2,5 - 200
88024710002-16
Englisch
2016-01-05
Table of Content
1 General 5
1.1 About the documentation 5

1.2 Manufacturer´s address 5
1.3 Applicable documents 5
1.4 Symbolism 6
2 Safety 7
2.1 Intended use 7

2.2 Personnel qualification and training 7
2.3 Basic safety instructions 7
2.4 Basic hazards 8
3 Device description 10
3.1 Functional principle 10

3.2 Possible versions 11
3.3 Basic construction 12
3.3.1 KF 2,5 - 200 R/L/B (with end cover) 12
3.3.2 KF 2,5 - 200 R/L. .-D. (with pressure relief valve) 13
3.3.3 KF 2,5 - 25 U (with universal valve) 14
3.3.4 KF 32 - 80 U (with universal valve) 14
3.4 Rotation and delivery direction 15
3.5 Types of seals 18
3.6 Quench 20
3.7 Type key 21
3.8 Important special numbers 23
4 Technical data 25
4.1 General 25
4.2 Overview nominal sizes 27
4.3 Viscosity - Rotation speed assignment 28
4.4 Permissible pressure range 29
4.4.1 Operating pressure of suction side and pressure 29
side
4.4.2 Max. suction side operating pressure for sealing 30
type 1, 2, 7 and 19
4.4.3 Differential pressure - viscosity assignment 31
4.5 Permissible temperature range 31
4.6 Material data 32
4.7 Weight 34
4.8 Dimensions 34
5 Transport and storage 35
5.1 General 35
5.2 Transport 35
5.3 Storage 36
6 Installation 38
6.1 Safety instructions for installation 38

6.2 Noise reduction 39
6.3 Mechanical installation 39
6.3.1 Preparation 39
6.3.2 Pumps with free shaft end 40
6.3.3 Coupling Type "R." 41
6.4 Connection lines 45
6.4.1 General 45
6.4.2 Suction line design 46
6.4.3 Pressure line design 47
6.4.4 Mounting Connection lines 47
6.5 Change of the direction of rotation 48
7 Operation start-up 50
7.1 Safety instructions for start-up 50

7.2 Preparation 50
7.3 Filling the quench chamber 51
7.4 Pressure relief valve adjustment 52
7.5 Further operation start-up 53
8 Removal 54
8.1 Safety instructions for removal 54

8.2 Removal 55
9 Maintenance 56
9.1 Safety instructions for maintenance 56

9.2 Maintenance work 57
9.3 Maintenance instructions 58
10 Repairs 60
10.1 Safety instructions for repair 60

10.2 General 61
10.3 Detecting and eliminating failures 62
1 General
1.1 About the documentation
These operating instructions describe the installation, operation and mainte-

nance of the following device:
The device is manufactured in different versions. Information about the ver-
sion concerned in the individual case can be found on the device's type plate.
These operating instructions are a component of the device and must be kept
accessible for the personnel near the device at all times.
If you have any questions about these operating instructions, please contact
the manufacturer.
1.2 Manufacturer´s address
KRACHT GmbH
Gewerbestraße 20
DE 58791 Werdohl
phone: +49 2392 935-0
fax: +49 2392 935-209
email: info@kracht.eu
web: www.kracht.eu
1.3 Applicable documents
1. KTR Kupplungstechnik GmbH, DE 48407 Rheine

○ KTR-N 40210: Coupling operating/assembly instruction Rotex
Excerpts from these documents are included in these operating instructions.
If required, the original documents can be requested from the respective
manufacturer.
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 5
1.4 Symbolism
DANGER
Identification of an immediate hazard, which would result in death or severe
bodily injury if not avoided.
WARNING
Identification of a potential medium risk hazard, which would lead to death
or severe bodily injury if not avoided.
CAUTION
Identification of a low risk hazard, which could lead to minor or medium
bodily injury if not avoided.
NOTICE
Flagging of notices to prevent property damage.
Identification of basic safety instructions. Non-compliance can lead to haz-

ards for people and the device.
Flagging of special user tips and other especially useful or important infor-
mation.
6 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
2 Safety
2.1 Intended use
1. The device has been designed for operation with fluid. Dry operation is
not permitted.
2. The device may be operated in filled condition only.
The medium must be compatible with the materials used in the device.
The chemical competence is necessary for this. Be careful with ethylene
oxide or other cathalytic or exothermic or self-decomposing materials.
Please consult the manufacturer in cases of doubt.
3. The device may be operated only in usual industrial atmospheres. If there
are any aggressive substances in the air, always ask the manufacturer.
4. Operation of the device is only permissible when complying with the op-
erating instructions.
Deviating operating conditions require the express approval of the man-
ufacturer.
5. In case of any use of the device not according to specification, any war-
ranty is voided.
2.2 Personnel qualification and training
The staff designated to assemble, operate and service the device must be
properly qualified. This can be through training or specific instruction. Per-
sonnel must be familiar with the contents of this operating instructions.
Read the operating instructions thoroughly before use.
2.3 Basic safety instructions
1. Comply with existing regulations on accident prevention and safety at

work along with any possible internal operator regulations.
2. Pay attention to the greatest possible cleanliness.
3. Wear suitable personal protection equipment.
4. Do not remove, make illegible or obliterate type plates or other referen-
ces on the device.
5. Do not make any technical changes on the device.
6. Maintain and clean the device regularly.
7. Use spare parts approved by the manufacturer only.
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 7
2.4 Basic hazards
DANGER
Hazardous fluids!
Danger of death when handling hazardous fluids.
1. Comply with the safety data sheets and regulations on handling haz-
ardous fluids.
2. Collect and dispose of hazardous fluids so that no hazards arise for
people or the environment.
DANGER
Rotating parts!
Danger of death due to body parts, hair or clothing getting trapped or en-
tangled.
1. Before all work, ensure that existing drives are voltage-free and pres-
sure-free.
2. Securely prevent restarting during all work.
WARNING
Rotating parts!
Danger of injury from flying parts.
1. Enclose rotating parts so as to avoid any danger from flying parts in the
event of breakage or malfunction.
WARNING
Failure of load-carrying parts due to overload!
Danger of injury from spurting fluids.
1. Depressurise the device and all connection lines before doing any work.
2. Securely prevent the restoration of pressure while working on the de-
vice.
8 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
WARNING
1. Use only connections and lines approved for the expected pressure
range.
2. Securely prevent exceeding the permissible pressure, e.g. by using
pressure relief valves or rupture discs.
3. Design pipework so that no tensions, e.g. caused by changes in length
due to fluctuations in temperature, are transmitted to the device.
WARNING
1. Do not operate the device against closed shut-off devices.
2. Do not operate the device in the false direction of rotation.
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 9
3 Device description
3.1 Functional principle
KF series pumps are external gear pump types that work according to the
positive displacement principle.
S = Suction connection
P = Pressure connection
When rotated, two gearwheels meshing together produce a volume enlarge-

ment as a result of the opening of the tooth spaces on the suction side (S),
so that medium can flow in and so that a corresponding volume is displaced
simultaneously by immersion of the teeth into the filled tooth spaces on the
pressure side (P). Fluid transport takes place through entrainment in the tooth
gaps along the wall of the wheel chamber. The so-called geometric flow rate
Vg is being displaced per wheel rotation. A value that is stated in technical
documents as rated volume Vgn to specify the pump size.
The actually delivered amount of liquid does not correspond with the theo-
retical value, it is being reduced through losses due to the necessary toler-
ances. The losses are less the lower the operating pressure and the higher
the viscosity of the medium.
Gear pumps are self-priming within wide limits. The displacement cycle de-
scribe initially takes place without exhibiting appreciable pressure build-up.
Only after setting external loads, for example, through delivery heights, flow
resistances, line elements, etc. will the required working pressure arise to
overcome these resistances.
As usual with non-axial play compensated pumps, the lateral clearance be-
tween gear and front face has been set in such a way that the maximum
allowable operating pressure is managed in an adequate and secure way.
Bearing and shaft seal of the device are lubricated by the media. The device's
operating life will be reduced if the medium contains abrasive ingredients.
The shaft seal chamber is connected to the device's suction side. The pres-
sure occurring at the shaft seal therefore corresponds to the pressure at the
10 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
suction connection of the device. The permissible pressure is determined by

the type of sealing.
3.2 Possible versions
Gear pump with end cover
Standard
Gear pump with pressure relief valve
Directly attached pressure relief valves of

the series "D" are used exclusively for pro-
tection of the pumps and may respond on
a short-term basis only. Constant trigger-
ing of the valve can destroy the pump due
to overheating.
Gear pump with universal valve

KF 2,5 - 25 U
Pumps with universal valve pump to the

same pressure connection even when the
direction of rotation of the drive shaft
KF 32 - 80 U changes. Because of the operating prin-
ciple, the pressure and suction connec-
tions remain the same under any direction
of rotation. Select the mounting position
so that the piston is in a horizontal position
and the pressure port is at the top.
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 11
3.3 Basic construction
3.3.1 KF 2,5 - 200 R/L/B (with end cover)
Explanation
1. End cover 7. Shaft seal
2. O-Ring (see "Section: Seal types")
3. Housing 8. Outbord bearing
4. Driven shaft (Mounting only: G; X)
5. Driving shaft 9. Valve
6. Plain bearing bush (Direction of rotation only: B)
12 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
3.3.2 KF 2,5 - 200 R/L. .-D. (with pressure relief valve)
Explanation
1. Pressure relief valve 6. O-Ring
2. Pump 7. Compression spring
3. Adjustment screw 8. Valve cone
4. Hexagonal nut 9. Housing
5. Retaining screw
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 13
3.3.3 KF 2,5 - 25 U (with universal valve)
Explanation
1. Universal valve 3. Pump
2. Adapter 4. Piston
3.3.4 KF 32 - 80 U (with universal valve)
Explanation
1. End cover 3. Pump
2. Universal valve 4. Piston
14 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
3.4 Rotation and delivery direction
The following definition applies with respect to the rotation and delivery di-
rection of external gear pumps for pump connections positioned below the
drive shaft:
Looking at the pump shaft end, the Looking at the pump shaft end, the
pumping flow is from left to right when pumping flow is from right to left
the shaft is moving clockwise. when the shaft is moving counter-
clockwise.
The direction of rotation is indicated by the bent arrow.

The flow direction is indicated by the straight arrows.
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 15
Hydraulic symbol Flange mounting Foot mounting

KF . R F/G KF . R W/X
KF . L F/G KF . L W/X
KF . B F/G KF . B W/X
16 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
Hydraulic symbol Flange mounting Foot mounting

KF . R F/G. .-D. KF . R W/X. .-D.
KF . L F/G. .-D. KF . L W/X. .-D.

Gear pump with universal valve
KF 2,5 - 25 U F/G -
KF 32 - 80 U F/G -
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 17
3.5 Types of seals
Rotary shaft seal Rotary shaft seal Rotary shaft seal

Seal type: 1; 2; 3; 9; 18; 31 Seal type: 23 with outboard bearing
Seal type: 1; 2; 3; 9; 18; 31
Double rotary shaft seal Double rotary shaft seal (for vac- Triple rotary shaft seal (for vac-
Connection borehole G 1/8" (for uum operation) uum operation + for normal oper-
Quench) (1) Connection borehole G 1/8" (for ation)
Seal type: 4; 7; 19; 32 Quench) (1) Connection borehole G 1/8" (for
Special number 74 Quench) (1)
Seal type: 4; 7; 19; 32 Special number 322
(only KF 32 - 80)
18 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
Mechanical seal Mechanical seal Mechanical seal with Quench (1)

Seal type: 5; 40 Seal type: 6 KF 2,5 - 25: Connection borehole
G 1/8" (for Quench) (1)
KF 32 - 80: Connection borehole
G 1/4" (for Quench) (1)
Special number 198
Seal type: 5
(on request)
without shaft seal

(Leak oil drain through shaft seal-
ing space)
Seal type: 30; 36
(1)
See section 3.6 “Quench”
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 19
3.6 Quench
Versions with quench are used when absolute leak tightness is required on
the shaft seal, e.g. when pumping media
● which cures upon contact with air.
● which crystallises upon contact with air humidity.
● the leakage of which must not be released into the environment.
● are under vacuum and their seal shall be gastight.
Select the mounting position so that the connection for the quench faces up.
20 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
3.7 Type key
Ordering example KF 2,5 - 200

KF 40 R F 1 /... - D15 - ...
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Explanation of type key KF 2,5 - 200

1. Product name
2. Nominal size (Rated volume)
Size 1: 2,5; 4; 5; 6; 8; 10; 12; 16; 20; 25
Vgn Size 2: 32; 40; 50; 63; 80
Size 3: 100; 112; 125; 150; 180; 200
3. Direction of rotation
Clockwise and counterclockwise
R Clockwise B
Flow direction alternating
Clockwise and counterclockwise
L Counterclockwise U
Flow direction consistent
4. Fixing type
DIN flange without outboard bear- Mounting angle without outboard
F W
ing bearing
Mounting angle with outboard
G DIN flange with outboard bearing X
bearing
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 21
Explanation of type key KF 2,5 - 200

5. Seal type
Rotary shaft seal Rotary shaft seal
1 18
NBR (BABSL) FKM (BAUMX7)
Rotary shaft seal Double rotary shaft seal
2 19
FKM (BABSL) NBR (BABSL)
Rotary shaft seal
Rotary shaft seal
3 23 FKM (MSS1) (Low temperature)
PTFE (HN2390)
(KF 2,5 - 80)
Double rotary shaft seal without shaft seal
4 30
PTFE (HN2390) O-Ring FKM
Mechanical seal with FKM secon- Rotary shaft seal
5 dary seals (AX15) 31 FKM (BABSL) (Low temperature)
C2S2V1G3G1 (KF 32 - 200)
Mechanical contact seal with FFKM
Double rotary shaft seal
secondary seals (AX30)
6 32 EPDM (R02-R)
Q2Q2K1G3 (KF 2,5 - 25)
(not resistant to mineral oil)
Q2B2K1G3 (KF 32 - 200)
Double rotary shaft seal without shaft seal
7 36
FKM (BABSL) O-Ring NBR
Rotary shaft seal Mechanical seal with FKM secon-
9 EPDM (R02-R) 40 dary seals (L4)
(not resistant to mineral oil) AQ2VFF
6. Special number for special versions
See section 3.8 “Important special numbers”
7. Pressure relief valve (only for direction of rotation R or L)
D15 Adjustable from 0 - 15 bar D25 Adjustable from 15 - 25 bar
8. Housing and cover material
No specifica-
EN-GJL-250 (GG-25)
tion
GJS EN-GJS-400-15 (GGG-40)
22 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
3.8 Important special numbers
Special Description
number
Double rotary shaft seal (for vacuum operation)
74
Connection borehole G 1/8" (for Quench)
Housing connection:
158 KF 2,5 - 12: Flange connection SAE 3/4"
KF 16 - 25: Flange connection SAE 1"
197 Noise-optimized version for aerated oils and vacuum (1)
198 Mechanical seal with Quench
Housing connection:
232 KF 100 - 112: Flange connection SAE 2 1/2"
KF 180 - 200: Flange connection SAE 3 1/2"
Vertical mounting position (shaft end above)
277
Separate lubrication for rotating shaft seal (reduced pumping rate)
304 Plastic plain bearings Iglidur® X (non-ferrous metal-free), Δpmax = 10 bar
Noise-optimized version for aerated oils and vacuum (1) (197)
317
Plastic plain bearings Iglidur® X (non-ferrous metal-free), Δpmax = 10 bar (304)
Triple rotary shaft seal (for normal operation + for vacuum operation)
Connection borehole G 1/8" (for Quench)
322
Housing connection:
KF 32; 40: Flange connection SAE 1 1/2" (Standard)
KF 50 - 80: Flange connection SAE 2" (232)
353
Multi layer friction bearings DP4 (lead free)
Housing connection:
KF 2,5 - 12: Flange connection SAE 3/4" (158)
359
Housing connection:
363
KF 100 - 112: Flange connection SAE 2 1/2" (232)
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 23
Special Description
number
Housing connection:
391
Double rotary shaft seal (for vacuum operation) (74)
Connection borehole G 1/8" (for Quench) (74)
Housing connection:
402 KF 16 - 25: Flange connection SAE 1" (158)
455 Vertical mounting position (shaft end above)
Separate lubrication for rotating shaft seal (reduced pumping rate) (277)
Double rotary shaft seal (for vacuum operation) (74)
Connection borehole G 1/8" (for Quench) (74)
Housing connection:
459
(1)
Measures for noise optimisation are only possible for one rotational direction and only effective
for aerated oils or vacuum. Can lead to a reduction of delivery rate.
24 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
4 Technical data
4.1 General
General information KF 2,5 - 200

Construction External gear pump
Fixing type Flange similar DIN ISO 3019 or Foot mounting
End of drive shaft ISO R 775 short-cylindrical
KF 2,5 - 12 Whitworth pipe thread G 3/4"
KF 2,5 - 12 .. ./158 Flange connection SAE 3/4"
KF 16 - 25 Whitworth pipe thread G 1"
KF 16 - 25 .. ./158 Flange connection SAE 1"
KF 32 - 80 Flange connection SAE 1 1/2"
KF 50 - 80 .. ./232
Flange connection SAE 2"
KF 100 - 112
KF 100 - 112 .. ./232
Flange connection SAE 2 1/2"
KF 125 - 150
Housing connection KF 125 - 150 .. ./232
KF 180 - 200
KF 180 - 200 .. ./232 Flange connection SAE 3 1/2"
Suction connection:
Whitworth pipe thread G 3/4"
KF 2,5 - 25 U
Pressure connection:
Whitworth pipe thread G 1/2"
Suction connection:
KF 32 - 80 U
Pressure connection:
KF . R/L/B without fluid buffer Any (1)
Shaft end horizontal, fluid buffer
KF . R/L/B with fluid buffer
Mounting position connection top
Piston horizontal
KF . U
Pressure connection on top
External loads on shaft
See section 4.2 “Overview nominal sizes”
end
See section 4.2 “Overview nominal sizes” + section 4.3 “Viscosity -
Speed n
Rotation speed assignment”
pe
Operating pressure See section 4.4 “Permissible pressure range”
pb
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 25
General information KF 2,5 - 200

νmin See section 4.4.3 “Differential pressure - viscosity assignment”
Viscosity
νmax 20000 mm2/s
Fluid temperature ϑm
Ambient tempera- See section 4.5 “Permissible temperature range”
ϑu
ture
Material See section 4.6 “Material data”
Filtering Filter porosity ≤ 60 µm
Lubricating fluids without abrasive components.
Permissible media
Petrols, solvents, etc. are not permissible.
(1)
A reduced service life must be expected for the shaft seal in the case of vertical installation (shaft
end top).
26 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
4.2 Overview nominal sizes
Nominal Geom. dis- Speed n (1) Perm. ra- Permis- Sound Mass in-
size placement nmin nmax dial force sible ax- pressure ertia
(2)
Vgn Vg [cm³/ ial force level (3) x10-6
[rpm] [rpm] (4)
rev.] Fradial [N] Faxial [N] LpA [dBA] J [kg m2]
(n = 1500 (n = 1500
rpm) rpm)
2,5 2,55 14,0
4 4,03 15,9
5 5,05 17,8
6 6,38 20,5
8 8,05 24,0
700 ≤ 67
10 10,11 28,4
12 12,58 33,7
3600
16 16,09 42,3
20 20,1 50,8
25 25,1 61,7
32 32,12 200 - 217
40 40,21 254
50 50,2 ≤ 68 299
63 63,18 368
80 80,5 443
100 101,5 1500 741
≤ 69
112 113,5 806
3000
125 129,4 1418
150 155,6 1637
≤ 65
180 186,6 1911
200 206,2 2500 2072
(1)
Comply with media-specific properties.
(2)
Outside forces are only permissible in combination with an outboard bearing. Fradial on central
shaft end.
(3)
n = 1500 rpm ; v = 34 mm2/s ; p = 5 - 25 bar.
(4)
Pay attention to the viscosity.
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 27
4.3 Viscosity - Rotation speed assignment
Kinematic viscosity ν [mm2/s]

100 200 300 500 1000 2000 3000 6000 10000 20000
3600 2900 2300 1800 1200 800 650 450 300 200
Recommended rpm n [rpm]
Select the speed of rotation so that complete filling of the pump is ensured.
This is given if the pressure on the suction side does not fall below the
permissible pressure pe min.
28 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
4.4 Permissible pressure range
4.4.1 Operating pressure of suction side and pressure side
Seal type (1) Special Operating pressure (2)

number Suction side Pressure side
pe min [bar pe max [bar] pb [bar] pb max [bar]
abs.] (3) (perm. conti- (Pressure
nous pres- peaks)
sure)
WDR See section 4.4.2
1 -
(BABSL) “Max. suction
side operating
WDR pressure for seal-
2 - ing type 1, 2, 7
(BABSL) 0,6 (4)
and 19”
WDR
3 -
(HN2390) 2
DRWDR -
4
(HN2390) 74 0,1 0,2
GLRD
5 -
(AX15)
10
GLRD
6 -
(AX30)
0,6 (4) See section 4.4.2
“Max. suction 25 40
side operating
DRWDR -
7 pressure for seal-
(BABSL) ing type 1, 2, 7
and 19”
74 0,1 0,2
WDR
9 -
(R02-R)
0,5
WDR
18 -
(BAUMX7)
0,6 (4) See section 4.4.2
“Max. suction
side operating
DRWDR -
19 pressure for seal-
(BABSL) ing type 1, 2, 7
and 19”
74 0,1 0,2
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 29
Seal type (1) Special Operating pressure (2)

number Suction side Pressure side
pe min [bar pe max [bar] pb [bar] pb max [bar]
abs.] (3) (perm. conti- (Pressure
nous pres- peaks)
sure)
WDR
23 - 0,5 16 (5) -
(MSS1)
30 - - 25 25 40
WDR
31 - 0,5 16 (5) -
(BABSL)
(4)
0,6
DRWDR - 0,5
32
(R02-R) 74 0,2
36 - - 25 25 40
GLRD
40 - 10
(L4)
(1)
WDR: Rotary shaft seal, DRWDR: Double rotary shaft seal, GLRD: Mechanical seal
(2)
bar abs.: absolute pressure, bar: relative pressure
(3)
KF . U: pe min = 0,65 bar abs.
(4)
Start-up condition: 0,4 bar absolute (max. 30 minutes).
(5)
KF 2,5 - 80 -GJS: 25 bar.
4.4.2 Max. suction side operating pressure for sealing type 1, 2, 7 and 19
Speed n [rpm] pe max [bar]

KF 2,5 - 63 KF 80 KF 100 - 180 KF 200
≤ 750 6 6 6 6
≤ 1000 5 5 5 5
≤ 1500 4 4 3,5 3,5
≤ 2000 3 3 2,5 2,5
≤ 2500 2,5 2,5 2 2
≤ 3000 2 2 1,5 -
≤ 3600 1,5 - - -
30 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
4.4.3 Differential pressure - viscosity assignment
Bearing Δpmax [bar]

ν ≥ 1,4 mm2/s ν ≥ 6 mm2/s ν ≥ 12 mm2/s
Multi layer friction bearings contains lead
(Standard)
DU, P10 3 12 25
Multi layer friction bearings lead free
DP4
Plastic plain bearings
Iglidur® G; X; H370
- 6 10
White-metalled bearing
TEGO® V738
4.5 Permissible temperature range
Sealing material Fluid temperature ϑm (1)
ϑm min [°C] ϑm max [°C]

NBR 90
PTFE/FEP -20 200
EPDM 120
FKM 150
-15
FFKM/FEP 200
FKM
-30 150
(Low temperature)
(1)
Comply with media-specific properties.
Sealing material Ambient temperature ϑu

ϑu min. [°C] ϑu max. [°C]
NBR
PTFE/FEP -20
EPDM
FKM 60
-15
FFKM/FEP
FKM
-30
(Low temperature)
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 31
4.6 Material data
Seal type (1) Material

Shaft seal O- Housing/End Gears Bearing
rings cover
WDR
1 NBR NBR
(BABSL)
WDR
2 FKM FKM
(BABSL)
WDR
3 PTFE FEP
(HN2390)
DRWDR
4 PTFE FEP Multi layer friction
(HN2390)
bearings contains
GLRD lead (Standard)
with FKM DU, P10
C2S2V1G3G1
5 secondary (2) FKM
(Steel, CuSn, PTFE,
seals
Pb)
(AX15)
---
GLRD Q2Q2K1G3 (3) Plastic plain bearings
with FFKM (KF 2,5 - 25) non-ferrous metal-
6 secondary FEP EN-GJL-250
free
seals Q2B2K1G3 (4) (GG-25) Case- Iglidur® X
(AX30) (KF 32 - 200) --- hardened
---
EN- steel
DRWDR Multi layer friction
7 FKM FKM GJS-400-15 (1.7139)
(BABSL) bearings lead free
(GGG-40)
WDR DP4
9 EPDM EPDM (Steel, CuSn, PTFE)
(R02-R)
---
WDR White-metalled bear-
18 FKM FKM
(BAUMX7) ing
DRWDR TEGO® V738
19 NBR NBR
(BABSL) (Steel, Cu, Sn, Sb, Cd,
FKM Ni, As)
FKM (Low (only KF 2,5 - 80)
WDR
23 (Low tempera- tem-
(MSS1)
ture) pera-
ture)
30 - - FKM
FKM FKM
WDR
31 (Low tempera- (Low
(BABSL)
ture) tem-
32 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
Seal type (1) Material

Shaft seal O- Housing/End Gears Bearing
rings cover
pera-
ture)
DRWDR
32 EPDM EPDM
(R02-R)
36 - - NBR
GLRD
with FKM
40 secondary AQ2VFF (5) FKM
seals
(L4)
(1)
WDR: Rotary shaft seal, DRWDR: Double rotary shaft seal, GLRD: Mechanical seal
(2)
Metal-impregnated carbon /CrMo-Steel, FKM, CrNiMo-Steel
(3)
SiC/SiC, FFKM, CrNiMo-Steel
(4)
SiC/Resin-impregnated carbon , FFKM, CrNiMo-Steel
(5)
Metal-impregnated carbon /SiC, FKM, CrNi-Steel
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 33
4.7 Weight
Nominal size Weight Pump Added weight

Vgn [kg] Mounting angle
with end cover with D - valve with universal valve [kg]
2,5
4
5
2,9 3,7
6 6,9
(KF . /158: +1,3) (KF . /158: +1,3)
8
1,3
10
12
16
3,5 4,3
20 7,5
(KF . /158: +1,3) (KF . /158: +1,3)
25
32
40 7,7 9,5 27,5
50 1,6
63
9,4 11,2 29,5
80
100
16,0 18,7
112
125
22,2 26,5 - 3,3
150
180
24,8 29,1
200
4.8 Dimensions
Dimensions of the device can be found in the relevant technical data sheets.
34 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
5 Transport and storage
5.1 General
● After receipt, check the device for transport damages.

● If transport damage is noticed, report this immediately to the manufac-
turer and the carrier. The device must then be replaced or repaired.
● Dispose of packing material and used parts in accordance with the local
stipulations.
5.2 Transport
WARNING
Falling or overturning loads!
Danger of injury while transporting large and heavy loads.
1. Use only suitable means of conveyance and lifting tackle with sufficient
load-bearing capacity.
2. Attach lifting tackle only to suitable load points.
3. Attach the lifting tackle in such a manner that it cannot slip.
4. Pay attention to the load balance point.
5. Always avoid jerks, impacts and strong vibrations during transportation.
6. Never walk under suspended loads, never work under suspended
loads.
To transport the device , eyebolts can be screwed into the flange connec-
tions.
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 35
5.3 Storage
The device's function is tested in the plant with mineral hydraulic oil. Then all
connections are closed. The remaining residual oil preserves the interior parts
for up to 6 months.
Metallic exposed exterior parts are protected against corrosion by suitable
conservation measures, also up to 6 months.
In case of storage, a dry, dust-free and low-vibration environment is to be
ensured. The device is to be protected against influences from weather,
moisture and strong fluctuations of temperature. The recommended storage
conditions are to be adhered to.
Below the permissible ambient temperature ϑu elastomer seals lose their
elasticity and mechanical loading capacity, since the glass transition temper-
ature is fallen below. This procedure is reversible. A force action on the device
is to be avoided in case of storage below the permissible ambient temperature
ϑu.
Devices with EPDM seals are not mineral-oil resistant and are not tested for
their function. There is no preservation of the interior parts. If the device is not
taken into operation immediately, all corrosion-prone surfaces are to be pro-
tected by suitable conservation measures. The same applies for devices
which are not tested for other reasons.
When storing for a long period of time (> 6 months), treat all surfaces at risk
of corrosion again with suitable preserving agents.
If high air humidity or aggressive atmospheres are expected, take additional
corrosion-preventing measures.
Storage in corrosion protection bags (VCI) maximum of 6 months.
NOTICE
Corrosion/chemical impact
Improper storage can render the device useless.
1. Protect endangered surfaces by means of suitable conservation meas-
ures.
2. Comply with recommended storage conditions.
36 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
Recommended storage conditions

1. Storage temperature: 5 °C - 25 °C
2. Relative air humidity: < 70 %
3. Protect elastomer parts from light, especially direct sunlight.
4. Protect elastomer parts from oxygen and ozone.
5. Comply with maximum storage times of elastomeric parts:
○ 5 Years: AU
○ 7 Years: NBR, HNBR, CR
○ 10 Years: EPM, EPDM, FEP/PTFE, FEPM, FKM, FFKM, VMQ,
FVMQ
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 37
6 Installation
6.1 Safety instructions for installation
DANGER
Hazardous fluids!
ardous fluids.
DANGER
Rotating parts!
tangled.
sure-free.
DANGER
Rotating parts!
tangled.
1. Take measures against accidental touching of rotating parts.
WARNING
Rotating parts!
1. Enclose rotating parts so as to avoid any danger from flying parts in the
event of breakage or malfunction.
WARNING
Unshielded gearwheels!
Gearwheels can trap and crush fingers and hands.
1. Do not engage gearwheels.
38 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
WARNING
vice.
6.2 Noise reduction
Measures for noise reduction

1. Use suction and pressure hoses.
2. Use bell housings with high damping properties (plastic or cast iron).
3. Use of damping rings and damping rods for separation of structure-
borne noise.
6.3 Mechanical installation
6.3.1 Preparation
● Check the device for transport damage and dirt.

● Check the device for freedom of movement.
● Remove existing preservatives.
○ Use only those cleaning agents that are compatible with the mate-
rials used in the device.
○ Do not use cleaning wool.
● Compare the environmental and ambient conditions at the place of in-
stallation to the permissible conditions.
○ Ensure a sufficiently stable and level foundation.
○ Expose the device only to small vibrations, see IEC 60034-14.
○ Secure sufficient access for maintenance and repair.
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 39
6.3.2 Pumps with free shaft end
The prerequisite for trouble-free operation is suitable load transmission be-

tween the pump and the drive. By default a torsionally flexible claw coupling
Type "R" is used for this.
● Pre-mount coupling parts as per manufacturer's specifications.
Torsionally flexible claw coupling type "R.": See section 6.3.3 “Coupling
Type "R."”
● Position the pumps and the drive with respect to each other.
○ Comply with the permissible mounting position.
○ Comply with the permissible direction of rotation.
Rotation and delivery direction: See chapter 3 “Device description”
● Tighten all fastening screws with the specified torque.

○ Keep to the permissible displacement values of the coupling.
○ Rule out any distortion of the device.
○ Pay attention to sufficient screw-in depth of the fastening screws.
Tightening torques [Nm]

Thread size (1) M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24
Counter-thread
4,6 11 22 39 95 184 315
Aluminium
Counter-thread
10 25 49 85 210 425 730
Cast iron/Steel
(1)
Screws/Nuts with min. strength class 8.8/8
● For devices without shaft seals, ensure that the leak oil from the shaft
sealing chamber is specifically drained off and cannot get into the envi-
ronment.
● Make sure no foreign bodies can get into the device.
● Take measures against accidental touching of rotating parts.
● Take measures against accidental touching of hot surfaces (> 60 °C).
● On devices with quench, mount a tank for the liquid seal.
○ Mount the tank above the device.
○ The connection on the device must point upward.
○ Checking the fluid level must be possible at any time.
A second port on the unit enables purging of the quench chamber and
draining of the liquid seal.
40 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
6.3.3 Coupling Type "R."
Claw couplings Type "R." are torsionally flexible and transmit the torque pos-
itive. They are fail-safe. The vibrations and impacts that occur during opera-
tion are effectively dampened and reduced.
Claw coupling Type "R."
NOTICE
Coupling breakage or increased wear
An overload can lead to premature failure of the coupling.
1. Ensure safe dimensioning when designing the coupling. Take vibra-
tions, torque peaks and temperatures into account.
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 41
Assembly data
Explanation
1. Shaft projects into spi- 4. Coupling halve
der
2. Coupling halve 5. Shaft with parallel key
projects into spider
3. Spider 6. Setscrew
When installing the coupling, maintain the "E" gap dimension so that the spi-
der remains free during operation. If the shaft diameters are less than (also
with parallel key) the dimension dH of the spider, the shaft ends can protrude
out into the spider.
14 19 24 28 38 42 48 55 65 75
Coupling size (1)
- 19/24 24/28 28/38 38/45 42/55 48/60 55/70 65/75 75/90
Coupling clearance
13 16 18 20 24 26 28 30 35 40
E [mm]
dH [mm] 10 18 27 30 38 46 51 60 68 80
G M4 M5 M5 M8 M8 M8 M8 M10 M10 M10
t [mm] 5 10 10 15 15 20 20 20 20 25
Tightening torque TA
1,5 2 2 10 10 10 10 17 17 17
[Nm]
(1)
Example: R.19-Z25/14-Z25/19 or R.19/24-Z25/14-Z25/24.
42 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
For assembly, the coupling halves can be heated to approx. 80 °C and

pushed onto the shaft ends while warm.
CAUTION
Hot surfaces!
Burn injury to skin if touched.
1. Wear protective gloves at temperatures ≥48°C.
● Mount the coupling halves on the shaft ends but avoid impacts on the
components.
● Position the coupling halves on the shaft ends so that in later operation
the "E" gap dimension is maintained.
● Secure the coupling halves by tightening the setscrews.
● Insert the spider in a coupling half.
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 43
Displacement values
Axial displacement Radial displacement Angular displacement
ΔKa ΔKr ΔKw/ΔKL
ΔKL ≙ Lmax - Lmin
14 19 24 28 38 42 48 55 65 75
Coupling size
- 19/24 24/28 28/38 38/45 42/55 48/60 55/70 65/75 75/90
Coupling clearance
13 16 18 20 24 26 28 30 35 40
E [mm]
+1,0 +1,2 +1,4 +1,5 +1,8 +2,0 +2,1 +2,2 +2,6 +3,0
ΔKa [mm]
-0,5 -0,5 -0,5 -0,7 -0,7 -1,0 -1,0 -1,0 -1,0 -1,5
1500
0,11 0,13 0,15 0,18 0,21 0,23 0,25 0,27 0,30 0,34
rpm
ΔKr [mm]
3000
0,08 0,09 0,1 0,13 0,15 0,16 0,18 0,19 0,21 0,24
rpm
1500
1,1 1,1 0,8 0,8 0,9 0,9 1,0 1,0 1,1 1,1
ΔKw [De- rpm
gree] 3000
1,0 1,0 0,7 0,7 0,8 0,8 0,9 0,9 1,0 1,0
rpm
1500
0,57 0,77 0,77 0,90 1,25 1,40 1,80 2,00 2,50 3,00
rpm
ΔKL [mm]
3000
0,52 0,7 0,67 0,80 1,00 1,30 1,60 1,80 2,20 2,70
rpm
44 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
Displacement combinations
Examples for displacement combinations shown in
the photo opposite:
Example 1:
ΔKr = 30 %
ΔKw = 70 %
Example 2:
ΔKr = 60 %
ΔKw = 40 %
ΔKr + ΔKw ≤ 100 %
6.4 Connection lines
6.4.1 General
WARNING
1. Use only connections and lines approved for the expected pressure
range.
2. Securely prevent exceeding the permissible pressure, e.g. by using
pressure relief valves or rupture discs.
3. Design pipework so that no tensions, e.g. caused by changes in length
due to fluctuations in temperature, are transmitted to the device.
Additional connections
1. Provide measurement connections for pressure and temperature as
close as possible to device.
2. If necessary, provide a facility to fill or empty the device and the line
system.
3. If necessary, provide a facility to vent the device and the line system.
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 45
6.4.2 Suction line design
A less than optimally planned suction line can lead to increased noise emis-
sion, cavitation as well as reduction of the delivery rate (caused by not
complete filling of the pump).
When designing the line, take the following points into consideration:
● The suction line must be piped as short as possible and in a straight line.
● Stipulate the nominal width of the suction line so that the permissible
operating pressure pe min is not exceeded on the suction side.
● Avoid large suction heights.
● Avoid additional pressure loss through line resistances such as fittings,
screwed connections, formed parts or suction filters/suction baskets.
Ensure that all technically required suction filters/suction baskets are
appropriately dimensioned.
● Make sure there is sufficient clearance of the suction port to the bottom
and walls of the media container.
● Make sure that the suction opening lies underneath the lowest fluid level
in all operating situations.
● When hose lines are used, ensure sufficient stability of the hoses so that
they cannot become constricted through the sucking action.
● Comply with the recommended flow velocity in the suction line (max. 1.5
m/s).
Suction line at vacuum operation

If suction from a tank under vacuum is desired, the
pump must be arranged approx. 1 m below the
tank. The suction line must run in a straight line and
without any resistances.
The tank may be subjected to vacuum only then
when the pipework and the pump have been filled
with liquid.
For this application, only pumps suitable for vac-
uum operation may be used.
(1)
Vacuum
NOTICE
Cavitation damage
Undercutting the permissible suction port pressure results in cavitation.
1. Design the suction line so that the pressure arising in operation on the
suction side is always higher than the vapour pressure of the pumped
medium. At the same time, comply with the installation altitude of the
device above mean sea level.
2. For aqueous fluids, mount the device underneath the fluid level, set the
operating temperature to 50 °C and limit the speed to 1500 rpm.
46 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
Prevention of suction problems

If there is a possibility that the suction line can run
dry if the pump stops, piping the suction line as si-
phon is an option to avoid suction problems. This
way, the pump will remain permanently filled after
initial commissioning.
It is appropriate to employ a foot valve or a non-return valve

in case of longer suction lines that can run dry while the
pump is at rest. These must have been designed for use in
suction lines and should offer as low a flow resistance as
possible.
During operation of a pump that has to pump media

via a non-return valve in a pressurized circuit (e.g. re-
serve pump in a lubricant circuit), suction problems can
occur if the suction line is filled with air.
In this case the pressure pipe must be bled directly
upstream of the non-return valve.
If no vent nozzle is used, the volume of the pressure
pipe between the pump and the non-return valve must
be at least 75 % of the suction line volume.
6.4.3 Pressure line design
When designing the line, take the following points into consideration:
● Select the nominal width of the pressure line so that the maximum per-
missible pressures are not exceeded.
● If necessary, provide a vent nozzle to prevent suction problems.
6.4.4 Mounting Connection lines
Position of the device connections: See chapter 3 “Device description”
● Clean all lines.

○ Do not use cleaning wool.
○ Pickle and flush welded pipes.
● Remove the protective plugs.
● Mount the lines.
○ Comply with the manufacturer's information.
○ Do not use sealants such as hemp or filler.
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 47
6.5 Change of the direction of rotation
For pump types KF . R and KF . L, a change of the direction of rotation is only

possible by converting.
The manufacturer normally carries out the conversion work and the customer
should do this only in exceptional cases. Please consult the manufacturer
about this.
Pumps in noise-optimized version cannot be converted. (e.g. special num-

ber 197)
DANGER
Rotating parts!
tangled.
sure-free.
WARNING
vice.
NOTICE
Leaks or increased wear
Damaged sealing surfaces or supports lead to lack of sealing and/or faults
in later operation.
1. When assembling or disassembling housing components, be sure not
to damage the bearings, e.g. by tilting.
2. When disassembling housing components, do not use screwdrivers or
the like as a lever to separate the joints.
3. Do not remove, damage or jam seals.
48 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
S = Suction connection 1. Fastening screws

P = Pressure connection 2. Leak oil hole
To change the direction of rotation of the pump, turn the end cover or the
pressure relief valve 180°.
● Loose fastening screws.
● Unscrew the end cover or the pressure relief valve of the pump housing
and replace it rotated 180°.
● Tighten the fastening screws with the stated torque.
Fastening screws KF 2,5 - 200

Pump KF 2,5 - 25 KF 32 - 80 KF 100 - 200
Tightening torques [Nm] 25 49 85
For pumps with sealing type 6, the lip-type seal must be replaced in addition.
During this process, the spring coiling direction must be observed.
When checking, pay attention to the following points:

1. For pumps without pressure relief valve, the leak oil hole in the end cover
must be placed at the pump's suction side.
2. Pumps with pressure relief valve must have their pressure relief valve
adjusting screw point toward the pump's pressure side.
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 49
7 Operation start-up
7.1 Safety instructions for start-up
DANGER
Hazardous fluids!
ardous fluids.
WARNING
1. Do not operate the device against closed shut-off devices.
2. Do not operate the device in the false direction of rotation.
CAUTION
Hot surfaces!
1. Wear protective gloves at temperatures ≥48°C.
7.2 Preparation
● Before starting the system make sure that a sufficient quantity of the
operating fluid is extant to avoid dry running.
Take this into consideration especially with high output volumes.
● Check all fastening screws on the device.
● Fill pump and the suction line with medium.
50 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
7.3 Filling the quench chamber
1. quench chamber
2. Container for quench-liquid (Accessories)
● For versions with quench, fill the quench chamber with a suitable liquid
seal.
○ The filling is implemented through the tank provided for that.
○ Fill fluid until the quench chamber is completely full and the tank is
half full.
● Do not apply pressure or vacuum to the quench chamber.
NOTICE
Seal failure due to dry run
A lack of liquid seal can lead to a failure of the seal.
1. Do not put pumps without liquid seal into operation.
A second port on the unit enables purging of the quench chamber and
draining of the liquid seal.
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 51
7.4 Pressure relief valve adjustment
Directly attached pressure relief valves of the series "D" are used exclusively
for protection of the pumps and may respond on a short-term basis only.
The valves are factory set to the rated pressure of each pressure stage. Set-
ting pressures that deviate from this are stated on the rating plate.
NOTICE
Failure of the pump
Long triggering of the valve can cause the pump to overheat.
1. Only allow intermittent triggering of the valve.
- Lower response pressure 1. Hexagonal nut

+ Higher response pressure 2. Adjustment screw
Pressure setting:
● Remove hexagon nut
● Set the response pressure using the adjusting screw
● Secure the adjusting screw with hexagon nut
WARNING
1. Consider the permissible pressure setting range of the valve.
52 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
7.5 Further operation start-up
● Open existing shut-off elements upstream and downstream of the de-

vice.
● Adjust pressure relief valves in the system installed for lowest opening
pressure.
● Allow the device start without or with a low pressure load (jog mode).
○ Flow should have developed after 30 s at the latest.
● Run the device for a few minutes depressurised or with low pressure.
● Vent the system at the highest possible point.
● Gradually increase the pressure load up to the desired operating pres-
sure.
● Operate the system for so long until the final operating state is achieved.
● Check the operating data such as:
○ Discharge flow
○ Operating pressure (as close as possible to device)
○ Fluid temperature (as close as possible to device)
○ Device temperature (in particular in the area of the bearing points)
○ ...
● Document the operating data of the initial start-up for later comparison.
● Check the level of the operating medium in the system.
● Check the filling level of the liquid seal (if existing).
● Check the device for leaks.
● Check all threaded connections for leaks and retighten if necessary.
In order to ensure a constant and reliable function of the device, an initial

maintenance of the device is recommended after several hours warm-up
time (max. 24 h). Faults can thus be identified at an early stage.
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 53
8 Removal
8.1 Safety instructions for removal
DANGER
Hazardous fluids!
ardous fluids.
DANGER
Rotating parts!
tangled.
sure-free.
WARNING
Unshielded gearwheels!
Gearwheels can trap and crush fingers and hands.
1. Do not engage gearwheels.
WARNING
vice.
CAUTION
Hot surfaces!
1. At temperatures ≥48°C the device must be allowed to cool down first.
54 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
NOTICE
Blocking of the device through hardening medium
Hardening medium can mechanically jam the device and make it unusable.
1. Clean device immediately after operting with a hardening medium.
8.2 Removal
● Depressurise and de-energize the system.

● Close existing shut-off elements upstream and downstream of the de-
vice.
● Open existing drain elements and loosen connection lines. Collect and
dispose of discharging medium so that no hazard arises for persons or
environment.
● Dismantle the device.
● Clean the device.
● Close the device connections and lines to prevent dirt penetration.
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 55
9 Maintenance
9.1 Safety instructions for maintenance
DANGER
Hazardous fluids!
ardous fluids.
DANGER
Rotating parts!
tangled.
sure-free.
WARNING
vice.
CAUTION
Hot surfaces!
56 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
9.2 Maintenance work
Checking and documentation of the operating data

Regular checking and documentation of all operating data such as pres-
sure, temperature, current consumption, degree of filter soiling, etc. con-
tributes to early problem detection.
● Perform maintenance according to specification.

● Replace defective and worn components.
● If required, request spare parts lists and assembly drawings from the
manufacturer.
● Document the type and scope of the maintenance work along with the
operating data.
● Compare the operating data with the values of the first commissioning.
Determine the cause in case of major non-compliances (> 10 %).
stipulations.
Barriers and instructions

All barriers and warning signs removed during this must be attached to their
original position on completing maintenance and/or repairs.
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 57
9.3 Maintenance instructions
The following information provides recommendations on maintenance work

and maintenance intervals for the device being used.
Depending on the actually occurring loads in operation, the type, scope and
interval of the maintenance work can deviate from the recommendations. The
equipment builder/operator shall write an obligatory maintenance plan.
Within the framework of preventive maintenance, it is appropriate to replace

wear parts before reaching the wear limit.
With corresponding expertise and sufficient equipment, the replacement can

be carried out by the equipment builder/operator. Please consult the manu-
facturer about this.
Warranty
In case of improper implementation, any warranty is voided.
Maintenance recommendations Gear pump

Interval Maintenance work Employ- Duration
ees approx.
[h]
Inspection: Discharge flow
Inspection: Operating pressure
Inspection: Fluid temperature
Firstly: Inspection: Device temperature
1 1
after max. 24 h Inspection: Add-on valve function (if existing)
Inspection: Check potential equalisation for
firm seating and functionality (if existing)
Inspection: Condition of operating fluid
Audiometric monitoring: Unusual noise
Cleaning: Remove dust deposits and dirt with
a moist cloth
Daily 1 0,1
Visual inspection: Leakages
Visual inspection: Filling level of liquid seal (if
existing)
58 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
Maintenance recommendations Gear pump

Interval Maintenance work Employ- Duration
ees approx.
[h]
Inspection: Discharge flow
Inspection: Operating pressure
Inspection: Fluid temperature
Inspection: Device temperature
3000 Operating hours 1 1
Inspection: Add-on valve function (if existing)
Inspection: Check potential equalisation for
firm seating and functionality (if existing)
Inspection: Condition of operating fluid
Visual inspection: Condition of gears
Visual inspection: Condition of housing parts
Visual inspection: Condition of plain bearings
6000 Operating hours 1 2
Visual inspection: Condition of shaft seal
Visual inspection: Condition of outboard bear-
ings (if existing)
Replace: Plain bearings (only by manufacturer)
Replace: Outbord bearing (if existing)
As required 1 2
Replace: Shaft seal
Replace: Other seals
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 59
10 Repairs
10.1 Safety instructions for repair
DANGER
Hazardous fluids!
ardous fluids.
DANGER
Rotating parts!
tangled.
sure-free.
WARNING
vice.
CAUTION
Hot surfaces!
60 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
10.2 General
The repairs covers:

1. Troubleshooting
Determination of damage, pinpointing and localisation of the damage
cause.
2. Elimination of damage
Elimination of the primary causes and replacement or repair of defective
components. The repair is generally made by the manufacturer.
Repairs by manufacturer
● Before returning the device, fill in the return notification form. The form
can be filled in online and is available as a pdf file download.
Device contains hazardous material

If the device was operated with dangerous liquids, it must be cleaned before
the return. If this should not be possible, the safety data sheet of the haz-
ardous material is to be provided beforehand.
Repair by equipment builder/operator

If corresponding expertise and sufficient equipment is available, the equip-
ment builder/operator can also make the repairs. Please consult the manu-
facturer about this.
● If required, request spare parts lists and assembly drawings from the
manufacturer.
● Use spare parts approved by the manufacturer only.
stipulations.
Warranty
In case of improper implementation, any warranty is voided.
Barriers and instructions

All barriers and warning signs removed during this must be attached to their
original position on completing maintenance and/or repairs.
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 61
10.3 Detecting and eliminating failures
Failure Potential causes Possible measures

1.1 Increased noise Excessive negative pressure Check suction line design
Pump cavitation (not complete filling of the Use noise-optimised pump
pump)
Suction line plugged Clean the suction line
Suction filter plugged or too Clean suction filter or use a
small larger filter
Replace filter element
Suction bascet plugged or too Clean intake strainer or di-
small mension larger
Fluid temperature too low Adjust the temperature of
medium
1.2 Increased noise Pump sucks air Check oil level in the tank
Foaming or air in medium Check suction line
Check the shaft seal
Shaft seal defective Replace shaft seal
Suction connection leaking Retighten or replace threa-
ded connections
Replace seals
System not vented Vent system
Return line ends above the flu- Extend return line
id level
Heavy foaming in the system, Use noise-optimised pump
e.g. in gears
1.3 Increased noise Incorrectly aligned and/or Correct the alignment of the
Mechanical vibrations loose coupling coupling and secure the cou-
pling halves
Incorrectly and/or insufficient Fixate lines with suitable fas-
line fastening tening material (e.g. pipe
clamps)
Wobbling pressure relief valve Increase valve opening pres-
(if existing) sure
Not a noise-reducing setup Use dampers
62 2016-01-05 88024710002-16

2 Pump does not suck Dry run Fill pump and the suction line
with medium.
Minimum filling level in the Top up medium
supply tank undercut
False direction of rotation of Correct the direction of rota-
the pump tion
Closed shut-off element in the Open the shut-off element
suction line
The air in the suction line can- Reduce the start-up pres-
not be compressed in the sure
pressure line Vent the pressure line
Increase volume of the pres-
sure line
Speed of the pump is too low Check the pump design
During frequency inverter
operation: Check the opera-
tion/line frequency
Geodetic suction head too Check installation location
high Provide pre-filling pump
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 63

3 Insufficient pressure Excessive negative pressure Check suction line design
Insufficient pumping flow (not complete filling of the
rate pump)
Viscosity too high Provide pre-filling pump
Speed of the pump is too low Check the pump design
During frequency inverter
operation: Check the opera-
tion/line frequency
Throttled shut-off element in Open the shut-off element
the suction line
Suction filter plugged or too Clean suction filter or use a
small larger filter
Replace filter element
Suction bascet plugged or too Clean intake strainer or di-
small mension larger
Constant triggering of pres- Increase valve opening pres-
sure relief valve (if existing) sure
Pump sucks air Check oil level in the tank
Check suction line
Check the shaft seal
Wear Replace the device
4 Excessive operating tem- Cooling and heat dissipation Increase the cooling capaci-
perature insufficient ty
Not sufficient oil in the system Check the container layout
Excess fluid is being delivered Check the pump design
into the supply tank via pres-
sure relief valve under load
5 Impermissible pump heat- Constant triggering of a direct- Increase valve opening pres-
ing ly attached pressure relief sure
valve (if existing)
Pressure too high in associa- Check the system design
tion with a media viscosity that
is too low
Speed too fast in connection Check the system design
with media viscosity that is too
high
Gland lid overtightened Unscrew gland lid and read-
(for gland seal) just leakage
Suction pressure too high Reduce the pressure
Wear Replace the device
64 2016-01-05 88024710002-16

6 Leakages Poor maintenance Comply with maintenance
Seal failure plan
Replace seals
Mechanical damage Replace seals
Thermal overload Check the operating datas
Replace seals
Pressure too high Check the operating datas
Replace seals
Gas content in medium too Check the operating datas
high Replace seals
Corrosion/chemical impact Check the material compati-
bility
Replace seals
Wrong direction of rotation Correct the direction of rota-
tion
Replace seals
Contaminated medium Provide filtration
Replace seals
Gland lid not sufficiently tight- Retighten gland lid
ened
(for gland seal)
Loose threaded connections Retighten or replace threa-
ded connections
7.1 Coupling Alignment error Correct the alignment of the
Coupling wear coupling and secure the cou-
pling halves
Spider overloaded Check the operating datas
Use harder spider
7.2 Coupling Spider wear Adapt maintenance intervals
Cam break Torque transmission due to Replace coupling
metal contact
7.3 Coupling Alignment error Correct the alignment of the
Premature spider wear coupling and secure the cou-
pling halves
Replace spider
Spider failure due to chemical Check the material compati-
corrosion bility
Replace spider
88024710002-16 2016-01-05 65

8 Motor protection switch Driving power too low Check the drive design
tripped Motor incorrectly connected Check motor connection
Phase failure Check feed/supply
Current consumption too high Check the operating datas
Check direction of rotation
Motor circuit breaker incor- Check the operating datas
rectly designed
Consult the manufacturer for all unidentifiable failures.
66 2016-01-05 88024710002-16
Operating and installation instructions
Strainer
PN6-160
Contents
1.0 General information on operating 5.0 Installation .....................................................6
instructions .................................................. 2 5.1 General notes on installation................................ 6
2.0 Notes on possible dangers.......................... 2 5.2 Installing valves with butt weld ends .................... 7
2.1 Significance of symbols ........................................2
6.0 Putting the valve into operation ..................7
2.2 Explanatory notes on safety information ...............2
7.0 Care and maintenance..................................8
3.0 Storage and transport ................................. 2 8.0 Troubleshooting ............................................9
4.0 Description .................................................... 3 9.0 Troubleshooting table ..................................9
4.1 Scope of applications ............................................3 10.0 Dismantling the valve or the top part .....10
4.2 Operating principles ..............................................3 11.0 Warranty / Guarantee ................................10
4.3 Diagram.................................................................4 12.0 EC declaration of conformity ...................11
4.4 Technical data - remarks .......................................5
4.5 Marking .................................................................5
4.5.1 PN16-40 ............................................................5
4.5.2 PN63-160 ..........................................................5
Rev. 0040101000 1613 englisch

Strainer
1.0 General information on operating instructions

These operating instructions provide information on mounting and maintaining the fittings.
Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer in case of problems which cannot be
solved by reference to the operating instructions.
They are binding on the transport, storage, installation, start-up, operation, maintenance
and repair.
The notes and warnings must be observed and adhered to.
- Handling and all work must be carried out by expert personnel or all activities must be
supervised and checked.
It is the owner’s responsibility to define areas of responsibility and competence and to
monitor the personnel.
- In addition, current regional safety requirements must be applied and observed when
taking the fittings out of service as well as when maintaining and repairing them.
The manufacturer reserves the right to introduce technical modifications at any time.
These Operating Instructions comply with the requirements of EU Directives.
2.0 Notes on possible dangers
2.1 Significance of symbols
ATTENTION !
... Warning of general danger.
2.2 Explanatory notes on safety information

In these Operating and Installation Instructions dangers, risks and items of safety
information are highlighted to attract special attention.
Information marked with the above symbol and “ATTENTION ! ” describe practices, a
failure to comply with which can result in serious injury or danger of death for users or third
parties or in material damage to the system or the environment. It is vital to comply with
these practices and to monitor compliance.
All other information not specifically emphasised such as transport, installation, operating
and maintenance instructions as well as technical data (in the operating instructions,
product documentation and on the device itself) must also be complied with to the fullest
extent in order to avoid faults which in turn can cause serious injury to persons or damage
to property.
3.0 Storage and transport

ATTENTION !
- Protect against external force (like impact, vibration, etc.).
- Valve mountings such as actuators, handwheels, hoods must not be used to
take external forces, e.g. they are not designed for use as climbing aids, or as
connecting points for lifting gear.
- Suitable materials handling and lifting equipment should be used.
See catalog sheet for weights.
- At -20°C to +65°C.
- The paint is a base coat to protect against corrosion during transportation and storage. Do
not damage paint protection.
Page 2 Rev. 0040101000 1613

Strainer
4.0 Description
4.1 Scope of applications
Strainers are used for "cleanin flowing mediums“.
ATTENTION !
- Refer to the data sheet for applications, limits on use and possibilities.
- Certain media require or preclude the use of special materials.
- The valves are designed for standard operating conditions. If conditions exceed
these requirements, e.g. aggressive or abrasive media, the operator should
state the higher requirements when ordering.
- Valves made from grey cast iron are not authorised for use in systems subject
to TRD 110.
The information complies to the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.
It is the responsibility of the machine planner to ensure compliance.
The special markings on the valve must be taken into account.
Refer to the catalogue sheet to see which materials are used in standard versions.
Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer if you have any questions.
4.2 Operating principles

The medium flows through the strainer screen in the direction shown on the strainer and is
thereby cleaned.
Rev. 0040101000 1613 Page 3

Strainer
4.3 Diagram
fig. 1: Strainer - Y fig. 2: Strainer - Y SE
fig. 3: Strainer - Y (1.4408)
fig. 4: Strainer - DG PN63-160 fig. 5: Strainer - DG SE PN63-160

Refer to the data sheet for information about materials with designations and figure
numbers.
Page 4 Rev. 0040101000 1613
Strainer
4.4 Technical data - remarks
for
- Principal dimensions
- Pressure-temperature-ratings
- Valves with butt weld ends, etc. refer to datasheet.
4.5 Marking
4.5.1 PN16-40
Details of the CE-marking on the valve:
CE-marking
0525 Notified body
Manufacturer Address of manufacturer:
refer to item 11.0 Warranty / Guarantee
Typ Type
Bj. Year of manufacture
According to the Pressure Equipment Directive table 6, annex II, valves without safety
function are only allowed to bear the CE-marking DN32 onwards.
4.5.2 PN63-160
Manufacturer Notified body

Type number
CE-marking
Serial number
Year of manufacture
(clear speach)
PSmax (max. allowable pressure) Body material

PS (operating pressure) Aprpoval
Plug design (No./inspector/year)
TS (operating temperature)
TSmax. (max. allowable temperature)
Fig. 6: Name plate

Address of manufacturer: refer to item 11.0 Warranty / Guarantee
According to the Pressure Equipment Directive table 6, annex II, valves without safety
function are only allowed to bear the CE-marking DN32 onwards.
Rev. 0040101000 1613 Page 5

Strainer
5.0 Installation
5.1 General notes on installation
The following points should be taken into account besides the general principles governing
installation work:
ATTENTION !
- Remove flange covers if present.
- The interior of valve and pipeline must be free from foreign particles.
- Note installation position with reference to flow direction, see mark on valve.
- Steam line systems should be designed to prevent water accumulation.
- Lay pipelines so that damaging transverse, bending and torsional forces are avoided.
- Protect valves from dirt during construction work.
- Connection flanges must mate exactly.
- Connecting bolts for pipe flanges should be mounted preferably from the
counter flange side (hexagon nuts from the valve side).
At DN15-32: If valves should be mounted directly to valves, the upper flange
connecting bolts should be preferably executed with studs and hexagon nuts on
both sides.
See data sheet for weights.
- Leave sufficient space to remove the screen basket during installation in
pipelines.
- Installation position:
a) The screen basket should never be at the top, otherwise the dirt will
fall back into the pipe.
b) If water hammer is possible due to condensation in steam lines,
never install the trap with the screen basket at the bottom, but install
it so that it is horizontal.
- Centre gaskets between the flanges.
- Install compensators to compensate for thermal expansion of the piping.
- Planners / construction companies or operators are responsible for positioning and
installing products.
- The valves are designed for application, not influenced from weather.
- For application outside or in adverse environments like corrosion-promoting conditions
(sea water, chemical vapours, etc.), special constructions or protective measures are
recommended.
Page 6 Rev. 0040101000 1613

Strainer
5.2 Installing valves with butt weld ends
Please note that only qualified persons using appropriate equipment and working in
accordance with technical rules are allowed to install fittings by welding.
The responsibility for this lies with the system owner.
Refer to the data sheet for information about the shape of the butt weld ends.
6.0 Putting the valve into operation
ATTENTION !
- Before putting the valve into operation, check material, pressure, temperature
and direction of flow.
- Regional safety instructions must be adhered to.
- Residues in piping and valves (dirt, weld beads, etc.) inevitably lead to leakage.
- Touching the valve when it is operating at high (> 50°C) or low (< 0°C) media
temperatures can cause injury.
Affix warning notice or protective insulation as appropriate!
Before putting a new plant into operation or restarting a plant after repairs or
modification, always make sure that:
- All works has been completed!
- The valve is in the correct position for its function.
- Safety devices have been attached.
Rev. 0040101000 1613 Page 7

Strainer
7.0 Care and maintenance

The strainer screens must be cleaned regularly. Maintenance and maintenance-intervals
have to be defined by the operator and depends on the degree of dirt accumulation in the
system.
- If necessary, the strainer can be fitted with an additional start-up filter (e.g. filter with
supporting basket) to start up the system.
- Flush the plant thoroughly before starting it.
- The strainer requires little maintenance.
ATTENTION !
Refer to point 10.0 before opening the strainer.
- Contaminated strainers in suction-lines will result cavitation and damage the
pumps.
- Before reassembling the unit, remember that the bearing surface must be cleaned and a
new gasket (pos. 6) must be inserted.
- Set the strainer cover (pos. 2) in place.
- Tighten the hexagon nuts (pos. 4) evenly crosswise.
- Tightening torque‘s for hexagon nuts / bolts:
hexagon nuts / Torque

PN DN
bolts (Nm)
16 - 40 15 - 32 M 10 20-35
40 M 12 20-35
50 - 65 M 12 60-80
80 - 150 M 16 100-125
200 M 20 150-200
250 - 400 M 24 340-410
500 M 27 340-410
63 - 160 10 - 25 M 16 50 ±2
32 - 50 M 20 150 ±3
Page 8 Rev. 0040101000 1613

Strainer
8.0 Troubleshooting
In the event of malfunction or faulty operating performance check that the installation and
adjustment work has been carried out and completed in accordance with these Operating
Instructions.
ATTENTION !
-
It is essential that the safety regulations are observed when identifying faults.
If malfunctions cannot be eliminate with the help of the following table

“9.0 troubleshooting table”, the supplier or manufacturer should be consulted.
9.0 Troubleshooting table

ATTENTION !
- read point 10.0 and 11.0 prior to dismantling and repair work!
- read point 6.0 before restarting the plant !
Fault Possible cause Corrective measures

No flow Flange covers have not been removed Remove flange covers
(Pos. 7, Fig. 3) (Pos. 7, Fig. 3)
Flow too low strainer clogged. Clean/replace screen.
Piping clogged. Check piping system.
Flange broken between Bolts tightened unevenly. Re-align piping and fit new valve!
unit and piping Mating flanges not properly aligned.
Rev. 0040101000 1613 Page 9

Strainer
10.0 Dismantling the valve or the top part

ATTENTION !
The following points must be observed:
- Pressureless pipe system.
- Medium must be cool.
- Plant must be drained.
- Purge piping systems in case of caustic, inflammable, aggressive or toxic
media.
11.0 Warranty / Guarantee

The extent and period of warranty cover are specified in the "Standard Terms and
Conditions of Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG“ valid at the time of delivery or, by way of
departure, in the contract of sale itself.
We guarantee freedom of faults in compliance with state-of-the-art technology and the
confirmed application.
No warranty claims can be made for any damage caused as the result of incorrect handling
or disregard of operating and installation instructions, datasheets and relavant regulations.
This warranty also does not cover any damage which occurs during operation under
conditions deviating from those laid down by specifications or other agreements.
Justified complaints will be eliminated by repair carried out by us or by a specialist
appointed by us.
No claims will be accepted beyond the scope of this warranty. The right to replacement
delivery is excluded.
The warranty shall not cover maintenance work, installation of external parts, design
modifications or natural wear.
Any damage incurred during transport should not be reported to us but rather to the
competent cargo-handling depot, the railway company or carrier company immediately or
else claims for replacements from these companies will be invalidated.
Technology for the Future.

GERMAN QUALITY VALVES
ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG, D-33756 Schloß Holte-Stukenbrock
Telephone (+49 5207) 994-0 Telefax (+49 5207) 994-158 or 159
Internet: http://www.ari-armaturen.com E-mail: info.vertrieb@ari-armaturen.com
Page 10 Rev. 0040101000 1613

Strainer
12.0 EC declaration of conformity

EC declaration of conformity acc. to Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC
We,
ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG,

Mergelheide 56-60, D-33756 Schloß Holte-Stukenbrock
hereby declare that the products listed below comply with the following requirements.
Description of valve series:
Strainer
Nominal Nominal Certificate-
Type Fluid group Module Applied standards
pressure diamter No.:
050 PN16-40 DN 32-500 I H DIN 3840
059 PN16-40 DN 32-500 I H AD 2000 leaflet A4
50003/1
(EN-JS1049, 1.0619+N,
080 PN16-40 DN 32-300 I H 1.0460, 1.4408)
050 PN 63-160 DN 32 -50 I A1 DIN EN 12516-2

-- AD 2000 leaflet A4
080 PN 63-160 DN 32 -50 I A1 (1.0460, 1.5415, 1.7335)
Note:
According to the above mentioned Directive 97/23/EC on Pressure Equipment (article 3, paragraph 3) products in DN
10-25 are executed and classified acc. to „Sound engineering practice“. These products are not covered to the requie-
ments of the Pressure Equipment directive and need not to carry a CE mark.
Name and address of the notified licensing and monitoring agency:
Lloyd’s Register Quality Assurance GmbH

Am Sandtorkai 41, D-20457 Hamburg
Number of the named agency:
0525
Schloß Holte-Stukenbrock, 22.04.2013
...................................................
(Brechmann, Managing Director
Rev. 0040101000 1613 Page 11

Strainer
ARI-Strainer
ARI-Strainer Y-pattern
with flanges
• German "TA-Luft" TÜV-Test-No. 922-9204866 Cast iron
• TRB 801 No. 45 (except cast iron) Nodular iron
Cast steel
BR 050 Page 2
with flanges
• German "TA-Luft" TÜV-Test-No. 922-9204866
• TRB 801 No. 45 BR 050
Stainless steel
BR 059 Page 2
with butt weld ends
• German "TA-Luft" TÜV-Test-No. 922-9204866
• TRB 801 No. 45
Cast steel
BR 080 Page 3
Features:
• Precise guidance of screen in cover and body
• Screen from DN50 with reinforced ring
• Screen from DN150 with supporting basket
• Screen and supporting basket made of
stainless steel
Edition 01/06 - Data subject to alteration Data sheet 0500001

ARI-Strainer, made of cast iron, nodular iron and cast steel
Figure Nominal Material Nominal
pressure diameters
10.050 PN 6 EN-JL1040 DN 15-200
12.050 PN 16 EN-JL1040 DN 15-300
22.050 PN 16 EN-JS1049 DN 15-300
23.050 PN 25 EN-JS1049 DN 15-150
34.050 PN 25 1.0619+N DN 15-200
35.050 PN 40 1.0619+N DN 15-200
Test: German "TA-Luft" TÜV-Test-No. 922-9204866
Selection of possible applications:
• Industry • Vacuum plant
• Powerstations • Ammonia
• Flue gas purification plant • Hot water
• Processing technology • Heating plant
• Gas supply • District heating
• Vapour facilities • Cooling and freezing systems
• Thermal oil applications • General plant manufacturing
• Recycling facilities • Steam systems
- other applications on request -
Weights (kg)
Figure-No. DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 500
10.050 2,5 3,0 4,5 5,5 7,0 9,0 13,0 19,0 26,0 38,0 54,0 110,0 -- --
12.050 3,0 4,0 5,0 7,0 9,0 12,0 16,0 21,0 30,0 43,0 61,0 121,0 154,0 335,0
22.050 3,5 4,0 5,5 7,0 9,0 12,0 16,0 21,0 28,0 41,0 58,0 115,0 154,0 335,0 on request
possible in straight
23.050 3,5 4,0 5,5 7,0 9,0 12,0 16,0 21,0 32,0 47,0 64,0 -- -- -- through form
34.050 4,0 5,0 6,0 8,0 10,0 13,0 19,0 24,5 35,0 51,0 71,0 144,0 -- --
35.050 4,0 5,0 6,0 8,0 10,0 13,0 19,0 24,5 35,0 51,0 71,0 144,0 -- --
ARI-Strainer, made of stainless steel (1.4408)

pressure diameters
52.059 PN 16 1.4408 DN 15-200
54.059 PN 25 1.4408 DN 15-200
55.059 PN 40 1.4408 DN 15-200

• Recycling facilities • Processing technology
• Chemical Industry • Process water installations
• Hospital technology • Installations with aggressive
media
Weights (kg)
Figure-No. DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 500
52.059 4,0 5,0 6,0 8,0 10,0 13,0 19,0 24,5 35,0 51,0 71,0 144,0
54.059 4,0 5,0 6,0 8,0 10,0 13,0 19,0 24,5 35,0 51,0 71,0 144,0 on request
55.059 4,0 5,0 6,0 8,0 10,0 13,0 19,0 24,5 35,0 51,0 71,0 144,0
2 Edition 01/06 - Data subject to alteration

ARI-Strainer, made of cast steel
pressure diameters
35.080 PN 40 1.0619+N DN 15-300
Butt weld ends according to DIN EN 12627 - 4 (refer to page 6)
• Industry • Vacuum plant
• Powerstations • Ammonia
• Flue gas purification plant • Hot water
• Processing technology • Heating plant
• Gas supply • District heating
• Vapour facilities • Cooling and freezing systems
• Thermal oil applications • General plant manufacturing
• Recycling facilities • Steam systems
Weights (kg)
Figure-No. DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 500
35.080 2,5 3,0 3,5 4,0 5,5 7,5 12,0 15,0 23,5 33,0 49,0 106,0 135,0 240,0 -- -- --
Only DN15: view on the cover flange (not for stainless steel)
DN 15 - 20 G 3/8
DN 25 - 32 G 3/4
DN 40 - 80 G1
DN 100 - 150 G1 1/2
DN 200 - 300 G2
DN 350 - 500 on request
Bleed screw
Edition 10/05 - Data subject to alteration 3

Dimensions / Kvs- and Zeta-values / parts
Dimensions, Kvs- and Zeta-values
Screen Standard screen Fine screen Y-

Y-pattern Y-pattern pattern
DN L H H1 H2 H3 B d1 d2 l1 l2
standard fine
(w) (w) Kvs Zeta Kvs Zeta V 1)
15 130 90 135 94 130 10 23,0 25,0 56 48 6,9 1,7 6,2 1,9 10,0
20 150 100 150 94 138 10 28,0 25,0 68 48 10,8 2,2 10,1 2,4 8,4
25 160 115 180 102 150 25 36,0 31,0 82 57 17,8 1,9 16,8 2,2 8,3
1
32 180 125 205 102 143 35 42,0 36,0 98 57 26,1 2,4 24,3 2,8 7,1
40 200 150 235 123 166 45 50,0 46,0 114 68 36,7 3,0 32,9 3,7 6,8
50 230 160 250 126 172 45 61,5 55,5 119 70 61,0 2,7 49,5 4,0 5,2
65 290 180 285 148 206 25 78,5 69,5 134 85 98,6 2,9 80,3 4,9 4,4
1,25 0,25
80 310 215 330 170 234 40 89,5 85,5 149 97 146,0 3,0 115,0 4,9 3,7
100 350 235 365 202 282 55 109,5 105,5 169 112 234,0 2,9 189,0 4,4 2,8
125 400 275 425 285 388 65 137,5 131,5 199 138 376,0 2,7 303,0 4,2 2,7
150 480 305 480 320 443 50 160,0 159,0 224 169 394,0 4,5 405,0 4,3 2,4
1,6
200 600 390 610 417 585 80 210,0 210,0 284 230 652,0 5,5 590,0 6,7 2,3
250 730 540 915 -- -- 230 258,0 -- 434 -- 1225,0 4,1 1231,0 4,1 2,7
300 850 680 1110 -- -- 350 308,0 -- 555 -- 1873,0 3,7 1883,0 3,6 2,9
350 Kvs-values based upon clean screen !
400 larger diameters on request
500
1) V = Ratio of the free screen surface area to the area of the nominal diameters.
Zeta-value ... range of tolerance for Kvs-values acc. to DIN EN 60534.

Dimensions of flanges refer to page 5 or the ARI quick reference slide chart (available on request).
Y-Strainer with flanges: Face-to-face dimension FTF series 1 according to DIN EN 558-1 (DIN3202-1 series F1)
Y-Strainer with butt weld ends: Face-to-face dimension ETE series 1 according to DIN EN 12982 (DIN 3202-2 series S7)
34. / 35.050;
Figure 10. / 12.050 22. / 23.050 52. / 55.059
34. / 35.080;
Pos. Description Material, Material-No.
EN-JS1049,
1 Body EN-JL1040, EN-GJL-250 GP240GH+N, 1.0619+N 1.4408
EN-GJS-400-18U-LT
DN<200: EN-JL1040 DN<100: EN-JS1049 DN<100: P250GH, 1.0460
2 Cover X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
DN≥200: P265GH, 1.0425 DN≥100: P265 GH, 1.0425 DN≥100: P265GH, 1.0425
3 Screen X5CrNi18-10, 1.4301 X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
3.1 Supporting basket* X5CrNi18-10, 1.4301 X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
4 Studs 25CrMo4, 1.7218 A 4-70
5 Hexagon nuts C35E, 1.1181 A4
6 Gasket CrNi laminated both sides with pure graphite
8 Bleed screw** C35E, 1.1181 A4
9 Sealing ring St Aramid
* Necessary at higher differential pressures (higher price)
** Bleed screw only on request (higher price)
Information / restrictions of technical rules have to be observed!

Operating instructions can be ordered on request by phone (+49 52 07) 994-0 or fax (+49 52 07) 994-158 or 159.
ARI-valves made of cast iron are not allowed to be operated in systems according to TRD 110.
A production allowance according to TRB 801 No. 45 exists (according to TRB 801 No. 45 cast iron is not allowed).
The engineer, designing a system or a plant, is responsible for the selection of the correct valve.

General information
A supporting basket is necessary, with higher differential pressures, dependent on clogging-up (higher price).
ARI-Strainer flow diagrams refer to technical annex
Approvals according to DIN 3230 -3
Pressure-temperature-ratings Flangeholes/-thickness tolerances acc. to DIN 2533 / DIN 2544 / DIN 2545
acc. to DIN EN 1092-2 Temperature
Material PN -60°C up to <-10°C* -10°C up to 120°C 150˚C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
6 --- 6 bar 5,4 bar 4,8 bar 4,2 bar 3,6 bar --- --- ---
EN-JL1040
16 --- 16 bar 14,4 bar 12,8 bar 11,2 bar 9,6 bar --- --- ---
16 on request 16 bar 15,5 bar 14,7 bar 13,9 bar 12,8 bar 11,2 bar --- ---
EN-JS1049
25 on request 25 bar 24,3 bar 23 bar 21,8 bar 20 bar 17,5 bar --- ---
acc. to DIN EN 1092-1 Temperature

Material PN -60°C up to <-10°C* -10°C up to 50°C 100°C 150˚C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
25 18,7 bar 25 bar 23,3 bar 21,7 bar 19,4 bar 17,8 bar 16,1 bar 15 bar 14,4 bar 13,9 bar
1.0619+N
40 30 bar 40 bar 37,3 bar 34,7 bar 30,2 bar 28,4 bar 25,8 bar 24 bar 23,1 bar 22,2 bar
25 18,7 bar 25 bar 23,3 bar 21,7 bar 19,4 bar 17,8 bar 16,1 bar 15 bar 14,4 bar 10 bar
1.0460
40 30 bar 40 bar 37,3 bar 34,7 bar 30,2 bar 28,4 bar 25,8 bar 24 bar 23,1 bar 16 bar
16 16 bar 16 bar 14,9 bar 13,5 bar 12,4 bar 11,7 bar 11 bar 10,7 bar 10,2 bar ---
1.4408 25 25 bar 25 bar 23,3 bar 21,1 bar 19,4 bar 18,3 bar 17,2 bar 16,7 bar 16 bar ---
40 40 bar 40 bar 37,3 bar 33,8 bar 31,1 bar 29,3 bar 27,6 bar 26,7 bar 25,6 bar ---
Intermediate values for max. permissible operational pressures can be determined by linear interpolation of the given
temperature / pressure chart.
* Studs and nuts made of A4-70 (at temperatures below -10°C)
Flange dimensions
PN 6 PN 16 PN 25 PN 40
DN
∅D ∅K n x ∅ d1 ∅D ∅K n x ∅ d1 ∅D ∅K n x ∅ d1 ∅D ∅K n x ∅ d1
15 80 55 4 x 11 95 65 4 x 14 95 65 4 x 14 95 65 4 x 14
20 90 65 4 x 11 105 75 4 x 14 105 75 4 x 14 105 75 4 x 14
25 100 75 4 x 11 115 85 4 x 14 115 85 4 x 14 115 85 4 x 14
32 120 90 4 x 14 140 100 4 x 18 140 100 4 x 18 140 100 4 x 18
40 130 100 4 x 14 150 110 4 x 18 150 110 4 x 18 150 110 4 x 18
50 140 110 4 x 14 165 125 4 x 18 165 125 4 x 18 165 125 4 x 18
65 160 130 4 x 14 185 145 4 x 18 185 145 8 x 18 185 145 8 x 18
80 190 150 4 x 18 200 160 8 x 18 200 160 8 x 18 200 160 8 x 18
100 210 170 4 x 18 220 180 8 x 18 235 190 8 x 22 235 190 8 x 22
125 240 200 8 x 18 250 210 8 x 18 270 220 8 x 26 270 220 8 x 26
150 265 225 8 x 18 285 240 8 x 22 300 250 8 x 26 300 250 8 x 26
200 320 280 8 x 18 340 295 12 x 22 360 310 12 x 26 375 320 12 x 30
250 --- --- --- 405 355 12 x 26 425 370 12 x 30 450 385 12 x 33
300 --- --- --- 460 410 12 x 26 485 430 16 x 30 515 450 16 x 33
Butt weld ends according to DIN EN 12627 - 4 (refer to page 6)
Please indicate when ordering:

1. Figure-No.
Dimensions in mm
2. Nominal pressure
Weights in kg
3. Nominal diameter
5
4. Special design / accessories 1 bar = 10 Pa =^ 0,1 MPa
^
Kvs in m3/h
Example:
1Kvs =^ 1,16 Cv (US)
Figure 35050; nominal pressure PN40; nominal diameter DN100; with bleed screw.
Strainers with butt weld ends / special design
(Face-to-face dimension)
Edge shaping
according to DIN EN 25817
Butt weld ends acc. to DIN EN 12627 - 4

DN
L ∅A ∅B ∅ di ∅R L1 Pipe = ∅ d3 x s1
15 130 22 17,3 15 3 10 21,3 x 2,0
20 150 28 22,3 20 3 10 26,9 x 2,3
25 160 35 28,5 25 3 10 33,7 x 2,6
32 180 44 37,2 32 3 10 42,4 x 2,6
40 200 50 43,1 40 3 10 48,3 x 2,6
50 230 62 53,9 50 3 10 60,3 x 3,2
65 290 77 68,9 65 3 10 76,1 x 2,9
80 310 91 80,9 80 3 12 88,9 x 4,0
100 350 117 104,3 100 3 14 114,3 x 5,0
125 400 144 130,7 125 3 18 139,7 x 4,5
150 480 172 157,1 150 3 20 168,3 x 5,6
200 600 223 204,9 200 5 20 219,1 x 7,1
250 730 278 257,0 250 5 25 273,0 x 8,0
300 850 329 307,9 300 5 33 323,9 x 8,0
350 980 362 338,0 330 5 45 355,6 x 8,8
400 1100 413 384,4 375 5 45 406,4 x 11,0
Face-to-face dimension according to DIN EN 12982 ETE-1 (DIN 3202 T2)
Butt weld ends according to DIN EN 12627 - 4 (DIN 3239 T1, form 2)
Weld joint according to DIN EN 29692 code number 1.3.3 (DIN 2559 T1, code number 22)
The material used for ARI valves with butt weld ends is: GP240GH+N, 1.0619+N according to DIN EN 10213-1-2.
Based on our experience we recommend electric welding process for connecting valves or strainers with tubes or with each other.
Lime based electrodes with an appropriate composite material should be used as filler material for welding.
Gas welding should be avoided.
Due to the different material composition and material thickness of valves and tubes, gas welding is more susceptible to produce faults than electric welding
(hardness cracks, coarse-grained structure).

ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG, D-33756 Schloß Holte-Stukenbrock,
Tel. +49 52 07 / 994-0, Telefax +49 52 07 / 994-158 or 159 Internet: http://www.ari-armaturen.com E-mail: info.vertrieb@ari-armaturen.com
6 Edition 01/06 - Data subject to alteration
Operating Instructions
Compact Continuous Flow Heater Type 4700
4700-en05.doc Translation from the original operating manual 1

1 Foreword
These operating instructions contain essential information that must be heeded during installation,
operation and maintenance. It must therefore without fail be read by the fitter before installation and
commissioning and by the responsible personnel or operators before use.
To ensure reliable and safe operation of the heater, it must be transported and stored correctly and
installed, commissioned and maintained by qualified personnel.
Repair work that impairs the normal operating status must be left to our customer service team or the
manufacturing firm's customer service team.
Important instructions that relate to the appliance's technical safety and personal protection are
highlighted as shown below.
CAUTION
Type and source of danger
Relates to working and operating methods that must be observed in order to exclude
personal danger.
IMPORTANT
Type and source of danger
Relates to working and operating methods that must be observed to avoid damage to
or destruction of material.
NOTE
Explanatory description that is useful for understanding the working or operating
method to be performed.
We reserve the right to make technical modifications to reflect further developments.
With best wishes.

ELWA Elektrowärme München A. Hilpoltsteiner GmbH & Co. KG

2 Table of Contents
1 Foreword................................................................................................................................................ 2
2 Table of Contents................................................................................................................................... 3
3 Keyword index........................................................................................................................................ 5
4 Safety notes............................................................................................................................................ 6
Important information................................................................................................................... 6
Personnel training........................................................................................................................ 6
Safety notes for service and operating personnel........................................................................6
Standards and directives............................................................................................................. 7
For further questions................................................................................................................... 7
Symbols used.............................................................................................................................. 8
5 Damage to health and the environment.................................................................................................. 9
Precautionary measures to protect your health...........................................................................9
Precautionary measures to protect the environment...................................................................9
6 Intended use......................................................................................................................................... 10
Approved media........................................................................................................................ 10
7 Transporting and storing the compact continuous flow heater Type 4700............................................11
8 Description............................................................................................................................................ 13
Heater box................................................................................................................................. 14
Flat heating element.................................................................................................................. 14
Control cabinet.......................................................................................................................... 15
Safety valve............................................................................................................................... 15
Safety temperature limiter.......................................................................................................... 16
9 Installation............................................................................................................................................ 17
Setting up the compact continuous flow heater.........................................................................17
Attaching the safety valve.......................................................................................................... 18
Connecting the pipes................................................................................................................. 18
Circuit diagram for the compact continuous flow heater............................................................19
10 Commissioning................................................................................................................................... 20
Safety temperature limiter.......................................................................................................... 20
Temperature regulator............................................................................................................... 20
Unlocking the safety temperature limiter....................................................................................21
Setting the threshold value........................................................................................................ 21
Displays and control elements................................................................................................... 23
Level concept............................................................................................................................ 24
Entries and operator prompting ................................................................................................25
Setting through trial and error (empirical setting).......................................................................28
Setting based on the oscillation method:...................................................................................28
Comparison of controller types.................................................................................................. 29
Fault messages ETU temperature regulator..............................................................................30
Installation instructions for the ETU temperature regulator .......................................................31
ETU circuit diagram .................................................................................................................. 33
11 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................. 34
Heating output is below target................................................................................................... 34
The heating output is exceeded.................................................................................................35
The compact continuous flow heater is switched off by the safety temperature limiter..............35
The compact continuous flow heater is not working..................................................................35
12 Maintenance / repair........................................................................................................................... 36
Removing the housing cover..................................................................................................... 36
Separate the electrical connection to the safety temperature limiter.........................................37
Separate the electrical connections to the control cabinet.........................................................38
Separate the electrical connections from the flat heating element.............................................38

Remove the control cabinet....................................................................................................... 38
Removing and attaching the control cabinet .............................................................................40
Remove the safety temperature limiter......................................................................................40
Remove the front and side panels.............................................................................................40
Loosen the rear holder............................................................................................................... 41
Loosen the adjusting screws..................................................................................................... 41
Remove the flat heating element............................................................................................... 43
Removing and attaching the control cabinet .............................................................................44
Remove the safety temperature limiter......................................................................................44
Remove the front and side panels.............................................................................................44
Remove the heat exchanger block ...........................................................................................45
Remove the holder.................................................................................................................... 46
Loosen the adjusting screws..................................................................................................... 46
Remove the flat heating element............................................................................................... 48
Remove the holder.................................................................................................................... 48
Dismantle the heat exchanger block.......................................................................................... 49
Tighten the counter nuts ........................................................................................................... 51
Tighten the setting screws ........................................................................................................ 52
13 Spare parts list.................................................................................................................................... 53
14 Dismantling......................................................................................................................................... 55
15 Disposal.............................................................................................................................................. 55
16 Imprint................................................................................................................................................. 56

3 Keyword index
Circuit diagram........................................................................................................................................... 33
Control cabinet........................................................................................................................................... 15
Counter nuts.............................................................................................................................................. 51
Flat heating element.................................................................................................................................. 14
Front and side panel.................................................................................................................................. 40
Heat exchanger block................................................................................................................................ 45
Heater box................................................................................................................................................. 14
Operating the temperature regulator.......................................................................................................... 22
Safety temperature limiter.......................................................................................................................... 16
Safety valve............................................................................................................................................... 15
Setting screws........................................................................................................................................... 52

4 Safety notes
Important information
The content of these operating instructions, the safety notes affixed to the appliance and the appropriate
accident prevention measures relating to the installation and operation of electrical equipment must be
observed.
This appliance has been built and tested in accordance with DIN/VDE 0410/0411 (Electrical analogue
strip chart recorder for use in industrial process management technology systems / Safety directives for
electrical measurement, instrumentation and control equipment). The appliance left the factory in perfect
condition from a safety technology perspective.
Personnel training
Personnel in charge of operating, maintaining, repairing and installing the equipment must be trained in
its use and hold the appropriate qualifications for this type of work.
Areas of responsibility and monitoring of personnel must be carefully regulated by the operator.
Safety notes for service and operating personnel
The failure to observe the safety directives can present a danger (of death or serious injury) to people and
to the environment and the system itself.
Failure to comply with these safety directives will render any claim for damages null and void.
The national directives on accident prevention, as well as internal working, operating and safety directives
enforced by the operator must be observed.
Maintenance, repair and installation work

Work is only permitted on the appliance if the power supply has been completely disconnected, all inlets
and outlets blocked off, the system has been depressurised and the components have been allowed to
cool down.
CAUTION
Risk of burns from hot surfaces
All components and pipes / cables must be allowed to cool down before work
commences. The temperature of the appliance must also be checked.
CAUTION
Death or serious injury from burning liquids
Fire, naked lights and sparks must be avoided at all times when working on the
appliance.
Do not smoke while working on the appliance.
NOTE
Before commencing any work on the appliance, disconnect the power supply and
secure the mains switch from accidentally being switched on (e.g. by using a warning
sign or padlock).
Immediately after the work is complete, all safety devices must be set to their correct status or function.
▷ Section 10. Commissioning on page 20 must be consulted for commissioning work.

Standards and directives
The industrial standards and specifications listed in these instructions are valid in Europe. If the appliance
is used outside Europe, the directives applicable in the actual country of use must be observed instead.
For further questions
Contact the manufacturer, whose location and address can be found in 16. Imprint on page 56.

Symbols used
General warning symbol
Warning: electric shock
Risk of fire
Hot surface
Heavy component
Risk of entrapment
Overhead loads
Environmentally-hazardous substance
Disconnect the power supply
Handling instructions

5 Damage to health and the environment
Precautionary measures to protect your health
Avoid long, excessive or repeated skin contact with approved media.

Protect your skin using suitable skin protection agents or protective gloves.
Do not use thinners or solvents to clean the skin.
Protect your skin after cleaning with moisturising skin cream.
Precautionary measures to protect the environment
CAUTION
Risk of environmental damage
Do not spill liquids.
Clean up spilt liquids using binding agents.
Dispose of binding agents correctly.
The inlet and outlet pipe must be closed with sealing plugs before working on the compact continuous
flow heater when it is full.
When carrying out maintenance and repair work, catch any approved media using a suitable container.
Food or drinks containers are not suitable for draining and storing approved media.
When disposing of approved media, you must observe the applicable directives enforced by the local
authorities.

6 Intended use
The compact continuous flow heater Type 4700 is used to pre-heat approved media.
Further products may be approved upon request.
Compact continuous flow heater Type 4700 must only be used in accordance with its intended use.
Incorrect use will absolve the manufacturer of any liability.
The compact continuous flow heater Type 4700 may only be operated if the operating temperature does
not exceed the boiling temperature of the medium flowing through the heater at atmospheric pressure.
Approved media
Product Designation Standard

Lubricating oil LO DIN 51603-3
LO-HD
Heating oil EL (extra light) DIN 51603-1
L (light)
M (Medium)
S (Heavy)
Diesel fuel EN ISO 3104
Marine diesel oil MDO ISO 8217
Heavy fuel oil HFO BS MA 100
CIMAC
Bio-fuels PLANT OILS DIN V 51605
FAME DIN EN 14214
PME
RME
AME
FME
Emulsion HL ISO 6743/4
(hydraulic oils) HM (HLP) (DIN 51 524)
HV (HVLP)
Emulsion HFAE
HFAS
HFC
Heating water VDI 2035

7 Transporting and storing the compact continuous flow heater Type 4700
7.1 Delivery condition

The compact continuous flow heater is supplied from the manufacturer's plant fully assembled, packaged
in a wooden create with film cladding or cardboard packaging.
Upon delivery, the shipment must be checked for completeness and intactness using the delivery
documents.
In the event of damage, an expert must be consulting and a record, as well as photographs, taken to
document the extent of the damage.
7.2 Transporting the compact continuous flow heater
CAUTION
Death or serious injury caused by falling loads and parts
Do not stand under overhead loads.
Use appropriately-sized securing straps and lifting equipment.
Only suspend the compact continuous flow heater at the crane hook eyelets
provided.
NOTE
When transporting the appliance with lifting loaders, square timber must be placed
underneath it and the lifting arm must lift the load from underneath.
The compact continuous flow heater must only be transported horizontally.
Lift and transport the compact continuous flow heater (3) using crane hook eyelets (1) and (2).

7.3 Storing the compact continuous flow heater
Note
The transport and storage temperature for the compact continuous flow heater is
+5°C to 65°C.
At the storage location, place the compact continuous flow heater (1) on a clean, dry and level surface.
The compact continuous flow heater (1) must be stored correctly at the storage location until it is
installed. The location must be dry, adequately ventilated and protected from dirt.

8 Description
8.1 Description of the system
Item Component Item Component

1 Heater box 6 Control cabinet
2 Inlet pipe 7 Temperature regulator
3 Outlet pipe 8 Safety temperature limiter
4 Heat exchanger plate 9 Safety valve
5 Flat heating element
The compact continuous flow heater Type 4700 is used to pre-heat liquid media.
The inlet and outlet pipe carry the medium through the heat exchanger plates installed in the heater box.
Flat heating elements installed between the heat exchanger plates heat the medium.
The medium is heated evenly by the formation of heat pockets in the direction of flow.
The low surface stress achieves gentle heating and prevents the local build-up of vapour bubbles.
To protect against excessive pressures, a safety valve is, or must be, installed on the cold side.
An electronic temperature regulator installed in the control cabinet regulates, monitors and optimises the
heating process. The system is also monitored by an independent safety temperature limiter in addition to
the temperature regulator.

8.2 Description of the components
Heater box
To make installing the heating box easier, the frame with the stand console is merely screwed in.
The frame serves as a mount for heat pockets and flat heating elements.
The cladding with steel plates serves as insulation. These are zinc-plated to protect against corrosion.
In addition to the cladding, an insulation effect is also achieved through padding with mineral wool.
Flat heating element
The flat heating elements (between 1 and 13 of them, depending on the type of heater) are inserted
between the heat pockets.
A special surface treatment ensures an even temperature of the flat heating elements.

Control cabinet
To ensure minimum wear and a long service life for the appliance, SSR solid-state contactors are
installed in the control cabinet.
The control cabinet also contains the connecting terminals for the flat heating elements and the electronic
temperature regulator ready for connection.
To connect the power supply, cable guides are pre-mounted on the sides.
Safety valve
A safety valve must be installed in a sleeve in the feed pipe.

Safety temperature limiter
Once the maximum permissible temperature is reached, the safety temperature limiter cuts the power
supply to the heater and maintains this status even when the medium has cooled.
The appliance's ready status is restored by pressing the restart button. See Unlocking the safety
temperature limiter on page 21.
Should the safety temperature limiter fail, the heater is protected from damage or the development of a
dangerous operating status by the self-regulating system.

9 Installation
9.1 Installing the compact continuous flow heater
Setting up the compact continuous flow heater
CAUTION
Risk of injury due to heavy component weight
Set up the compact continuous flow heater with assistance.
NOTE
During installation, ensure there is sufficient space around the compact continuous
flow heater to maintain and repair it.
NOTE
The compact continuous flow heater should only be installed on support elements that
are as free from vibration and as level as possible.
Place the compact continuous flow heater (1) with the base plate (3) at the specified position and
screw into place using fastening screws (2).

Attaching the safety valve
Attach the safety valve (1) on the inlet pipe of the compact continuous flow heater (2).
Attach the pipe with the free outlet to safety valve (1).
Connecting the pipes
NOTE
Pipes must be thoroughly cleaned and be connected without tension or stress.
Connect pipes with shut-off valves (3) to inlet (1) and outlet (2).

9.2 Electrical connections on the compact continuous flow heater
Circuit diagram for the compact continuous flow heater
Compo Connection (PIN) Function

nent
X1 - Connector block
A1 3/4 Temperature max. alarm (lamp / siren)
A2 5/6 Analog output temperature actual value 4-20mA
R1/0 7/8 External switch/jumper
S20 9/10 Flow monitor / jumper
S10 11/12 Safety temperature limiter
B10 14/15/16 Resistance thermometer Pt 100
K1/K2 11 Tapping contactor
P1 3/4 and 5/6 Temperature max. alarm and actual value
- PE/1 PEN circuit (AC)
- PE/2 PEN circuit (DC)
QO L1/L2/L3/PE Power connection / Emergency Stop switch
V1/V2 - SSR solid state contactors
Connect the compact continuous flow heater as per the wiring diagram.
10 Commissioning
10.1 Operating the electric continuous flow heater
IMPORTANT
Component damage due to lack of heat dissipation
Before switching on the power supply, open all shut-off valves.
Fill the heater with the medium and deaerate the filled appliance.
There must be an adequate volume of through-flow.
Safety temperature limiter
The installed limiter protects the medium and the appliance from dangerously high temperatures.
The settings should be at least 20 ° above that of the temperature regulator.
▷ The correct setting must be checked before commissioning. See Setting the threshold value on page
21.
Temperature regulator
The installed temperature regulator must be set to the desired temperature.

▷ The correct setting must be checked before commissioning. See 10.3 Operating the temperature
regulator on page 22.

10.2 Operating the safety temperature limiter
Unlocking the safety temperature limiter
Unscrew the cover (3).

Unlock the safety temperature limiter (1) by pressing the restart button (2).
Screw the cover (3) back on.
Setting the threshold value
Unscrew the fastening screws (2) and remove the housing cover (1).
Set the threshold value on the temperature limit reference setter (3).

10.3 Operating the temperature regulator

Displays and control elements
Pos. Bauteile Funktion

1 Red display (factory-setting: Process value);
4-digit, configurable decimal place (automatic adjustment on display overflow)
2 Green display (factory-setting: Set point value);
4-digit, configurable decimal place, serves also for operator guide (display of
parameter and level symbols)
3 Green LED Manual mode active;
Ramp function active;
Timer active
4 Key Exit/F leave level / function key
5 Key ▲ Value increase / next parameter
6 Key ▼ Value reduction / previous parameter
7 Key P Programming, one level deeper
8 Yellow LED Switching states of the binary outputs 1...4
(display lit = ON)

Level concept
The parameters for device setting are organised at different levels.
Normal display OPr/ Operator level OPr

USEr 1 Set points, process data
…
User level USEr
Up to any eight
parameters
(ex-factory empty)
PArA
Parameter level
PArA
- Pb, dt, rt …
ConF
> 2s Configuration level
or timeout ConF
- Analog input InP

- Controller CNtr
- Ramp function rAFC
- Limit comparators LC
- Timer tFCt
- Outputs OutP
- Binary functions binF
- Display diSP
- Interface IntF
1) Either the operator (OPr) or the user level (USEr) exists
1) One level backward

3) Next/previous level
2) One level forward
NOTE
If no key is pressed for 180s the device changes back to normal display (factory-
setting). The setting can be changed in the setup program
(Display/Operation/Service counter -> Operation -> Time-out).

Entries and operator prompting
Entering values:
When entries are made within the levels, the parameter symbol appears in the lower display.
Select parameter by pressing ▲ or ▼.

Change to the entry mode using P
(lower display blinks)
Change a value using ▲ and ▼..

The value alters dynamically for as long as the key is kept pressed.
Take over the entry with P

automatic return after 2s
or cancel the entry with Exit/F

The value will not be applied.
NOTE
If the function key is pressed for > 2s, the device changes back to normal display.

Parameter level
Normal display USEr
USEr
Pb 1
dt
rt
Al1
> 2s Y1
or timeout
1) One level backward

3) Next/previous level
2) One level forward

Parameter
Parameter Symbol Value Description
range
Proportional Pb1 0…5… Dimension of the proportional band
band 9999 The larger the proportional band the lower the controller
amplification
At Pb1,2=0, the controller structure is ineffective (limit
comparator behavior). For the continuous controller Pb1,2
must be >0
Derivative time dt 0…25… Influences the differential component of the controller
9999s output signal
The larger the derivative time the higher the effectiveness
of the D component.
Reset time rt 0…120… Influences the integral component of the controller output
9999s signal
The larger the reset time the lower the effectiveness of the I
component.
Alarm value Al1 0…5… Maximum alarm value in °C above desired temperature
999.9
Output value Y1 0…100% Current output
NOTE
Factory settings are shown bold.
Parameter display independent of the controller type.
Decimal places for some parameters depend on the device setting.

Setting through trial and error (empirical setting)
The easiest method is the manual method, which is performed as follows:
1. Start with a non-critical setting (“Pb” high (20), “rt” = 0/off, “dt” = 0/off) and slowly reduce the
proportional range (“Pb” until a sufficient heating effect is achieved without overheating the device
(base load). If oscillation occurs, the amplification needs to be increased slightly. (larger Pb = smaller
P ratio)
2. Then gradually add the I ratio, increasing it in stages until the result is about right. (larger rt = smaller
I ratio)
3. If necessary, a D ratio (PID structure) can also be tried. If the controller is more stable with this, “Pb”
and “rt” can be slightly increased again. [ rt/dt ~ 5/1 ]
(larger dt = larger D ratio)
This simple method can achieve good results thanks to a logical process.
If better results are wanted, only the setting based on the oscillation method can be used, as
described below.
Setting based on the oscillation method:
With the oscillation method, after Ziegler/Nichols, the control parameters are adjusted so that
the stability threshold is achieved and the control circuit begins to oscillate. The setting that is
determined in this way can be used to calculate the control parameters. This method can only
be used on control loops in which oscillation will not cause damage and that can be made
unstable. The procedure is as follows:
1. Set the controller as a pure P controller: (I ratio) “rt” = 0/off and (D ratio) “dt” = 0/off
2. The controller amplification (P ratio) “Pb” is slowly reduced until periodic permanent oscillation occurs.
3. The value “Pb” set at this point is referred to as XPk.
4. The period duration of the permanent oscillation is referred to as TK (sec).
5. The following table is then used to determine the control parameters.
Controller Proportional range P Reset time I Derivative time D

(Pb) (rt) (dt)
P XPk / 0.5 - -
PI XPk / 0.45 0.85 * TK -
PID XPk / 0.6 0.5 * TK 0.12 * TK

Comparison of controller types
The illustration below shows a comparison of P, I, PI, PD and PID controllers in a control circuit
with a PT2 member operated as a control loop. It is clear that the controllers without I ratio (P
and PD) exhibit a residual control deviation. Only the controllers with I ratio can regulate on the
end value of 1. With a pure I controller, this occurs so slowly that it cannot even be seen on the
diagram. The main purpose of an I ratio is therefore to avoid residual control deviations.
The quickest controllers are the ones with a D ratio (PD and PID). The D ratio is therefore
mainly used if fast dynamics are required or if the loop itself is already unstable. For speed,
however, it is essential that there no restrictions occur in the actuator. In practice, restriction is
usually unavoidable, which is why the step response is only used in practice for small steps.
Controllers without a D ratio, but with P ratio (P and PI), are of medium speed. For simple
control tasks, a pure P controller is often sufficient if residual control deviations can be ignored.

Fault messages ETU temperature regulator
Display Cause Fault remedy

Test/repair/replace
Alrt Binary function for which a text Carry out the measure intended for this case
display was configured is active
(factoryspecific
text, can be
changed)
- 1999 Underrange for the value being Is the medium being measured within the
(flashing!) displayed range (too hot? too cold?)
9999 Overrange for the value being
(flashing!) displayed Check probe for break and probe short-circuit
Check the probe connection and the

terminals
Check cable
Check that the connected probe complies

with the configured probe type
All displays ON; Watchdog or power ON trigger Replace controller, if initialisation takes
lower 7-segment initialisation (reset). longer than 5s
display flashes
Overrange / underrange covers the following events:

▷ Probe break/short-circuit
▷ Measured value outside the probe measuring range
▷ Display overflow

Installation instructions for the ETU temperature regulator
NOTE
The ambient conditions at the installation site must meet the requirements specified
in the technical data.
The device is not suitable for use in areas with an explosion hazard (Ex areas).
Dimensions (Close mounting)

Minimum spacing of panel cut-outs
Type horizontal vertical
without setup plug:
ETU (96mm x 96mm) > 10mm > 10mm
with setup plug:
ETU (96mm x 96mm) > 10mm > 10mm
Insert the device from the front into the panel cut-out.
From the panel rear, slide the mounting brackets into the guides on the sides of the case. The flat
faces of the mounting brackets must make contact with the case.

Place the mounting brackets against the panel rear, and tighten evenly with a screwdriver.
NOTE (Cleaning)
The device front can be cleaned using warm or hot water (possibly adding slightly
acidic, neutral or slightly alkaline cleaning agent). It has a limited resistance to
organic solvents (e. g. methylated spirits, white spirit, etc .). Do not use abrasive or
high-pressure cleaning equipment.

ETU circuit diagram
Item Component Item Component

1 Output 1 (K1): Relay 230V AC/3A 6.1 Standard signals
(input 0/2—10V alternative to binary input
2)
2 Output 2 (K2): Relay 230V AC/3A 6.2 Thermocouple
3 Output 3 (K3): Logic 0/14V 6.3 RTD temperature probe (3 wire)
4 Output 4 (K4) (option): 6.4 RTD temperature probe (2 wire)
Analog output or
Relay 230V AC/3A
5.1 Binary input 1 7 RS485 interface (Option)
(for potential-free contact)
5.2 Binary input 2 (for potential-free contact); 8 Voltage supply 110 - 240V AC
(alternative to input 0/2 - 10V, (Option: 20 - 30V AC/DC)
configurable with setup program)
6 Analog input

11 Troubleshooting
Heating output is below target
Possible fault Remedy

The temperature regulator setting is incorrect Check the setting of the temperature regulator
Failure of individual flat heating elements Check or replace the flat heating elements and
cables
The heat exchanger plates are dirty Replace the heat exchanger plates
▷ Check the temperature regulator setting and perform an actual value offset. See 10.3 Operating the
temperature regulator on page 22.
▷ Replace the flat heating elements, see 12.3. Removing and installing flat heating elements on page
40.
▷ Replace the heat exchanger plates, see 12.4. Dismantling and assembling the heat exchanger block
on page 44.

The heating output is exceeded

The temperature regulator setting is incorrect Check the setting of the temperature regulator
Pt 100 resistance thermometer shows a value that Check the installation position
is too low of the Pt 100 resistance thermometer
SSR solid state contactor constantly switches on Replace the SSR solid state contactor
▷ Check the temperature regulator setting and perform an actual value offset. See 10.3 Operating the
temperature regulator on page 22.
The compact continuous flow heater is switched off by the safety temperature
limiter

Inadequate heat dissipation Check the flow volume
The safety temperature limiter setting is incorrect Check the setting of the safety temperature limiter
The cabling to the safety temperature limiter is Check the cabling
faulty
The safety temperature limiter is faulty Replace the safety temperature limiter
SSR solid state contactor constantly switches on Replace the SSR solid state contactor
▷ Check the setting of the temperature regulator. See 10.3 Operating the temperature regulator on
page 22.
▷ Check the setting of the safety temperature limiter. See Setting the threshold value on page 21.
▷ Remove and install the safety temperature limiter. See 12.1 Removing and installing the safety
temperature limiter on page 36.
The compact continuous flow heater is not working

Voltage fluctuations Check the fuses
Short-circuit in the system Check the cables and connections
No connection or jumper on the terminal strip (X1) Check the cables and connections
▷ Error messages in the temperature regulator's display. See Fault messages temperature regulator
on page 30.

12 Maintenance / repair
NOTE
The procedures for removing components are described.
To reinstall the components, follow the instructions in reverse order.
Lines must be connected as per the labels indicated.
12.1 Removing and installing the safety temperature limiter
Removing the housing cover
Unscrew the fastening screws (3) and remove the housing cover (2).
Unscrew the screw joint (4).
Loosen the locking screw (1).

Separate the electrical connection to the safety temperature limiter
Pin Connection
1 Phase
2 Heat
4 not connected
PE Earth
Mark the lines' installation position.

Disconnect lines Pin 1 and Pin 2.
Unscrew fastening screw (1) and remove line (earth).
Pull the lines out of the housing.
Pull the safety temperature limiter out of the outlet pipe.

12.2 Removing and attaching the control cabinet
Separate the electrical connections to the control cabinet
▷ Separate the electrical connections to the control cabinet. See 9.2. Electrical connections on the
compact continuous flow heater on page 19.
Separate the electrical connections from the flat heating element
Mark the installation position of lines (1) and (3).

Disconnect lines (1).
Unscrew fastening nut (2).
Remove line (earth) (3).
Remove the control cabinet
CAUTION
Remove the control cabinet with assistance.

Unscrew fastening nuts (2) and (3).
Remove the control cabinet (1) and pull out the lines from the flat heating elements.

12.3 Removing and installing the flat heating element
Removing and attaching the control cabinet
▷ Remove and attach the control cabinet. See 12.2. Removing and attaching the control cabinet on
page 38.
Remove the safety temperature limiter
Loosen fastening screw (2).

Pull the safety temperature limiter (3) out of the outlet pipe.
Remove the safety valve (1).
Remove the front and side panels
Loosen fastening screw (2).

Remove the front panel (1) and side panel (3).

Loosen the rear holder
Loosen fastening screws (1).

Loosen fastening screws (2).
Loosen the adjusting screws
IMPORTANT
Damage to components due to entrapment of the heat exchanger plates and flat
heating elements
During installation, screw counter nuts on the adjusting screws to setting dimension A
as described in Tightening the adjusting screws on page 52.
Hold setting screws (3) and loosen counter nuts (2).

Unscrew counter nuts (2) to the middle of setting screws (3).
Loosen setting screws (3).
Repeat the step for setting screws (1).
Unscrew setting screws (4).
Unscrew counter nut (2) from setting screws (4).

Remove setting screws (4) from the holder.

Remove the flat heating element
Pull out flat heating element (1).

12.4 Dismantling and assembling the heat exchanger block
Removing and attaching the control cabinet
▷ Remove and attach the control cabinet. See 12.2. Removing and attaching the control cabinet on
page 38.
Remove the safety temperature limiter
▷ Remove the safety temperature limiter. See Removing the safety temperature limiter on page 40.
▷ Remove the safety valve.
Remove the front and side panels
Remove the front panel (1) and side panel (3).

Remove the heat exchanger block
CAUTION
Remove the heat exchanger block with assistance or use an appropriate lifting device.
CAUTION
Risk of injury caused by entrapment
During installation, do not place your hand between the heat exchanger block and the
base plate.
NOTE
During installation, position the insulating plate as per the hole pattern.

Unscrew fastening screws (2).
Remove heat exchanger block (1) from base plate (4).
Place heat exchanger block (1) on the worktop or workbench and secure against falling.
Remove insulating plate (3).
Remove the holder
Unscrew fastening screws (1).

Remove holder (2).
Loosen the adjusting screws
IMPORTANT
heating elements
During installation, screw counter nuts on the adjusting screws to setting dimension A
as described in Tightening the adjusting screws on page 52.
Hold setting screw (1) and loosen counter nut (2).

Unscrew counter nut (2) to the middle of setting screw (1).

Loosen setting screw (1).
Repeat this step for all setting screws (1) (6 x).

Remove the flat heating element
CAUTION
With help, place the heat exchanger block on one side.
Place heat exchanger block (1) on one side and secure against falling.
Pull out flat heating element (2).
Remove the holder
Unscrew setting screws (3) from holder (1)

Remove holder (1).
Unscrew counter nuts (4) and (5).
Remove holder (2) with setting screws (3).

Dismantle the heat exchanger block
IMPORTANT
Damage to components caused by contamination of the system
Heat exchanger plates must not be rinsed, only replaced.
NOTE
Screw seals and O-rings must be replaced each time the heat exchanger block is
dismantled.
NOTE
Depending on the type of compact heater, 2 to 13 heat exchanger plates may be
installed.
The B-spacer rings are used to balance out the heat exchanger plates.
In the case of models without B-spacer rings, the last screw seal is replaced with an
O-ring.
Remove insulating plates (7) and (9).

Hold inlet and outlet pipe (1) and unscrew counter nuts (6).
Remove spacer rings (5) with O-rings (4).
Remove B-spacer rings (3).

Remove heat exchanger plates (8) with screw seals (2).
Clean inlet and outlet pipe (1), B-spacer rings (3) and spacer rings (5).

Tighten the counter nuts
CAUTION
Risk of environmental damage caused by leakage from the system
Before and while tightening the counter nuts, the components must be centred.
Align the abutting faces of the inlet and outlet pipe with the grooves of front holder (3).
Position front holder (3).
Tighten counter nuts (1) and (2) all the way to 500 Nm.

Tighten the setting screws
IMPORTANT
heating elements
During installation, tighten the counter nuts to setting dimension A.
The setting dimension A can be found in the table.

Tighten counter nuts (1) and (2) on setting screws (6 x) to setting dimension A.
Type Number of heat exchanger plates Setting dimension A
4701 2 Heat exchanger plates 21.25 mm

13 Spare parts list
Spare parts
Item Component Pcs. X
number
*2 Safety temperature limiter 14081 □
1 Resistance thermometer Pt 100 14069 □
3 Counter nut M36x1,5 13915 □
4 End ring 19986 □
*5 O-ring 36x5 mm 20141 □
6 B-spacer ring 1 20341 □
*7 Flat heating element HK380-400-415V_1500_0.7W/cm² 19804 □
*7 Flat heating element HK380-400-415V_3000W_1.5W/cm² 19806 □
8 Heat exchanger plate 19800 □
9 Inlet and outlet pipe 19900 □
*10 Screw seal Ø39 (Viton®) 19899 □
5/10 Service kit (contains a screw seal Ø39 and O-ring 36x5 mm kit) 20138 □
To order spare parts, copy this page, check the component(s) required with an (X) and enter the
quantity in the "Pcs." column.

Wear parts items 1, 5, 7 and 10 are also marked with a "*".

14 Dismantling
Once the machine has reached the end of its useful life, it must be dismantled and disposed of in an
environmentally responsible manner.
15 Disposal
IMPORTANT
Incorrect disposal can cause environmental damage!
Electrical and electronics components, lubricants, fuels and auxiliary materials require
specialist disposal and must only be disposed of by specialist companies approved in
accordance with local regulations. .
If no returns or disposal agreement has been signed, broken-down components must be sent for
recycling.
Scrap metals
Return plastic components for recycling
Dispose of all other components appropriately, according to their composition
The appropriate local authorities or specialist disposal companies will provide information on how to
dispose of items in an environmentally responsible way.

16 Imprint
© 2008 ELWA Elektrowärme München A. Hilpoltsteiner GmbH & Co. KG
Reprinting, reproduction or translation, in whole or in part, is not permitted without the written consent of
ELWA.
All rights under copyright law remain expressly reserved for ELWA.
If modifications are made without ELWA's written consent, any warranty obligations will be voided as
regards damage and defects caused by the unauthorised modification.
ELWA also accepts no liability for damage caused as a result of unauthorised modifications.
Address
ELWA Elektrowärme München A. Hilpoltsteiner GmbH & Co. KG
Frauenstrasse 26
82216 Maisach
Customer services
Tel.: +49-8141 22866-0
Fax.: +49-8141 22866-10
E-mail: support@elwa.com
Website: www.elwa.com
Edited by: 2W Technische Informations GmbH
The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its contents
to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of
damages. All rights reserved in the event of the grant of a patent, utility model or design.
The operating instructions must be stored for future reference.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Ansicht von unten
F F
290
330
4xn13
Austritt SAE-Flansch ISO6162 kpl. 1"
Outlet SAE flange Sicherheitsventil 6bar
optional Safty valve
optional
Eintritt SAE-Flansch ISO6162 kpl. 1"
20
245 17,5
Inlet SAE flange
optional 280
E E
336 n25 AG 1" Anschlußgewinde Temperaturbegrenzer
227 connecting thread Temp. Limiter
120 60-130°C
Ringschraube M10
n34,5
40,5
IG 1"
27
D D
50
773
728
620
450
400
432
332,5
C C
19
Schaltkasten
42 Switch cabinet
72
47
330 17,5 300 25

200 245
341
482
*Heizkörper-Oberflächenbelastung / Surface load of heating elements
B Korrekturfaktor für die Leistung /correction factor for the capacity B
Leistung/ Capacity bei 3x400V 3x460V - - -
min 3x380V 90%
Type norm 3x400V 100%
0,7W/cm²* 1,1W/cm²* 1,5W/cm²* Inhalt/ Volume Gewicht/ Weight
max 3x415V 108%
Gehäuse: lackiert RAL 7035 (kW) (kW) (kW) (Ltr.) (kG) min 3x440V 91%
4701evo 1,5 2,25 3 1 60 norm 3x460V 100%
Isolierung: verzinkt 4,5 1,5
4702evo 3 6 64 max 3x480V 109%
Heizraum: Edelstahl 4703evo 4,5 6,75 9 2 68
Betriebstemperatur: max. 100C° 4704evo 6 9 12 2,5 72 ELWA Frauenstraße 26
D-82216 Maisach b. München Allgemein-
Toleranz
Oberfläche Maßstab: 1:5
-- Gew. k.A.
Betriebsdruck: max. 6 bar 4705evo 7,5 11,25 15 3 76 Elektrowärme Tel. 08141/22866-0, Fax.10
Werkstoff: --
4706evo 9 13,5 18 3,5 82
München © Email: support@elwa.com ISO 2768- mk
Datum Name
housing: steel vanished RAL 7035 4707evo 10,5 15,75 21 4 86 Gezeichnet 14.10.2008 glas Elektro-Durchlauferhitzer
4708evo 12 18 24 4,5 90 Kontrolliert 29.03.2010 gw
A Insulation: galvanized 4709evo 13,5 20,25 27 5 94 Norm Type 4700 evo_Version II A
Heating space: stainless steel 4710evo 15 22,25 30 5,5 98
operating temperature: max 100C° 16,5 24,75
Dieses Dokument ist Eigentum der ELWA nach DIN 34.
4711evo 33 6 102 20954_KEH 4700 evo
Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung dieser Dokumente,
Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhalts sind verboten, 1
operating pressure: max. 6 bar 4712evo 18 27 36 6,5 106
soweit nicht ausdrücklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen
verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte für den Fall
der Patent- oder Gebrauchsmustereintragung vorbehalten. A2
4713evo 19,5 29,25 39 7 110 Status Änderungen Datum Name (Ers.f:)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Dokument: Konform_o_PED
HERSTELLERERKLÄRUNG Version: 04 / 2007-10-16
MANUFACTURER DECLARATION
without PED Page: 1 / 1 Thanner
im Sinne der EG-Maschinenrichtlinie in accordance with EU Machinery Directive

98/37/EG 98/37/EU
Hiermit erklären wir, daß es sich bei dieser Lieferung We hereby declare that this delivery (see below
um die nachfolgend bezeichnete, jedoch following details) is to be handled as incomplete
unvollständige Maschine handelt, und daß ihre equipment and is not allowed to be put into use
Inbetriebnahme solange untersagt ist, bis festgestellt until the equipment has been declared to conform
wurde, daß die Maschine den Bestimmungen der with rules of the appropriate EU Machinery
EG-Maschinenrichtlinie entspricht und daß bei unten Directive and that the products with pressure
genannten Geräten mit Druckbehältern die Richtlinie vessel listed below not according to EU-Directive
über Druckgeräte ( 97/23/EG) nicht zutreffend ist: Pressure Equipment ( 97/23/EG).
Ö Konformitäts-Bewertungsverfahren Ö Conformity Assessment Procedures
Ö “gute Ingenieurpraxis“ Ö “sound engineering practice“
Angewandte harmonisierte EN ISO 12100-1/-2 Harmonised and national EN ISO 12100-1/-2
und nationale Normen, DIN EN 12828, standards applied, in particular: DIN EN 12828,
insbesondere: DIN 4753 AD 2000 DIN 4753 AD 2000
EN 287-1; EN 288 EN 287-1; EN 288
Produkt: Typ: Product: Type:
Elektro - 4600, 4700, KDE, 400, Electric Flow Heater 4600, 4700,KDE, 400,
Durchlauferhitzer ROE, RWE ROE, RWE
Elektro – Heizbatterien 800, 4600 Electric Heating Battery 800, 4600
Viskositäts - Viscosity Transmitter
EVM-2 / EVM-3 EVM-2 / EVM-3
Meßwertgeber
Aggregate / Module KVE, KVES, KVD, KVT, Sets / Moduls KVE, KVES, KVD,
SVE, DKW KVT, SVE, DKW
Heizkörper lose Rillenflach, Mikanit, „N“ Heating element single flat tube, mikanit, “N”
Raumheizgeräte 7500, 7600, room heating moduls 7500, 7600
Sondergeräte Special Moduls
ERKLÄRUNG ÜBER KONFORMITÄT DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

Hiermit erklären wir, daß das oben genannte We hereby declare that the products fulfils the
Produkte mit den Anforderungen folgender Normen requirements of the following standards and
und Richtlinien regulations of the directive
EG-Niederspannungsrichtlinie DIN EN 60204-1 EU Low -Voltage Equipment DIN EN 60204-1
(2006/95/EG): DIN EN 60335 Directive (2006/95/EU) DIN EN 60335
DIN EN 60519 DIN EN 60519
DIN 31000 DIN 31000
DIN 57727 DIN 57727
DIN VDE 0100 DIN VDE 0100
EG-Richtlinie DIN EN 50081-2 EU-Directive DIN EN 50081-2
Elektromagnetische DIN EN 61000-6-2 Electromagnetic Compatibility DIN EN 61000-6-2
Verträglichkeit (2004/108/EG) IEC 801-2 (2004/108/EU) IEC 801-2
ENV 50140 ENV 50140
ENV 50141 ENV 50141
übereinstimmt und damit den Bestimmungen and therefore corresponds to the regulations of the
entspricht. directive.
München, 2007-10-16
Geschäftsführender Inhaber ( oder Vertretung )

Managing director and company owner ( or representativ )
ELWA © ELWA Elektrowärme München A.Hilpoltsteiner GmbH & Co KG

Landsberger Str. 367-369 P.O.Box 210466 Tel: +49-89-546779-0
80687 München 80674 München Fax: +49-89-546779-10
E-Mail: support@elwa.com
Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung
Installation and Maintenance Manual
Bezeichnung Druckgesteuertes 3/2-Wege-Ventil

Pressure controlled 3/2-way valve
No. 9085-9000-000
Edition 0312

2 9085-9000-000 / 0312
ORIGINALBETRIEBSANLEITUNG
Inhaltliche Änderungen vorbehalten!
Für Anmerkungen und Vorschläge zur Verbesserung der Dokumentation sind

die Verfasser stets dankbar. Diese können gerichtet werden an:

Tel. +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_


Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 3
• Bitte lesen Sie vor Installation Ihrer Armatur diese Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung
sorgfältig durch.
• Die Installation und Wartung darf nur durch qualifiziertes Personal durchgeführt wer-
den.
• Bitte beachten Sie die in dieser Anleitung aufgeführten Sicherheitshinweise!
________________________________________
• Before installing and maintaining your valve, please read this manual carefully.
• Installation and maintenance is allowed for skilled employees only.
• Please pay attention to the safety advices!
®
Westfalia Separator
4 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Anforderungen an Ersatzteile
• Nur Original-Ersatzteile von GEA Westfalia

Separator verwenden. Die Original-
Ersatzteile sind im Ersatzteilkatalog aufge-
führt.
Der Einsatz von nichtoriginalen Teilen führt zu:
– Sicherheitsrisiken,
– verringerter Haltbarkeit dieser Teile,
– reduzierter Verfügbarkeit des Separators,
Fig. 1
– erhöhtem Servicebedarf.
Realisiert sich ein Sicherheitsrisiko beim Einsatz
von nichtoriginalen Ersatzteilen, ergeben sich
unter Umständen hierdurch auch strafrechtliche
Folgen für die handelnden Personen. GEA
Westfalia Separator übernimmt in diesen Fällen
keinerlei Haftung oder Gewährleistung.
Demands relating to spare parts
• Use only genuine spare parts from GEA

Westfalia Separator. The original spare parts
are listed in the spare parts catalog.
– safety risks,
for the responsible persons. In such cases, GEA
ranty claims.
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 5
Anforderungen an Ersatzteile ............................................................................... 4

Demands relating to spare parts .......................................................................... 4
1 DEUTSCH 7
Zu dieser Anleitung ........................................................ 8

Ziel der Anleitung ................................................................................................. 8
Abkürzungen und Symbole .................................................................................. 8
Leistungsbeschreibung .................................................. 9
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung ..................................................................... 9
Lagerung, Transport, Entsorgung ........................................................................ 9
Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen .......................................................................... 9
Gerätebeschreibung..................................................... 10
Notbetätigung ..................................................................................................... 11
Ersatzteilsets................................................................ 12
Tätigkeitsbeschreibung ................................................ 14
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines druckgesteuerten 3/2-Wege-Ventils ...... 14
Wartung ....................................................................... 15
1. Kolbeneinheit .................................................................................................. 15
2. Obere Spindellagerung .................................................................................. 16
3. Rückschlagventil ............................................................................................ 17
2 ENGLISH 19
This manual ................................................................. 20

Intention of this manual ...................................................................................... 20
Shortcuts and symbols ....................................................................................... 20
Specification of service ................................................ 21

Intended usage ................................................................................................... 21
Storage, transport, disposal ............................................................................... 21
Terms of general application .............................................................................. 21
Device description ........................................................ 22

Emergency operation ......................................................................................... 23
Spare Parts .................................................................. 24

Initial operation and maintenance ................................ 26
Installation of a pressure controlled 3/2-way valve ............................................ 26
®
Westfalia Separator
6 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Maintenance ................................................................ 27
1. Piston unit ....................................................................................................... 27
2. Upper spindle bearing .................................................................................... 28
3. Check valve .................................................................................................... 29
Faxformular - Fax Form ............................................. 32
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 7
1 DEUTSCH
Zu dieser Anleitung ........................................................ 8

Ziel der Anleitung ................................................................................................. 8
Abkürzungen und Symbole .................................................................................. 8
Leistungsbeschreibung .................................................. 9
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung ..................................................................... 9
Lagerung, Transport, Entsorgung ........................................................................ 9
Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen .......................................................................... 9
Gerätebeschreibung..................................................... 10
Notbetätigung ..................................................................................................... 11
Ersatzteilsets................................................................ 12
Tätigkeitsbeschreibung ................................................ 14
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines druckgesteuerten 3/2-Wege-Ventils ...... 14
Wartung ....................................................................... 15
1. Kolbeneinheit .................................................................................................. 15
2. Obere Spindellagerung .................................................................................. 16
3. Rückschlagventil ............................................................................................ 17
®
Westfalia Separator
8 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Zu dieser Anleitung
Ziel der Anleitung
Die vorliegenden Informationen ermöglichen es Ihnen, die Armatur fachgerecht zu

installieren und zu warten. Die Anleitung richtet sich an technisch qualifiziertes
Personal. Es wird vorausgesetzt, dass bestimmtes Fachvokabular verstanden wird
und dass technische Zeichnungen gelesen werden können.
Sollte dies nicht der Fall sein, informieren Sie bitte Ihren zuständigen Kun-
denbetreuer.
Abkürzungen und Symbole
Achtung! Bitte Achtung! Heiße

lesen! Oberfläche!
Werkzeug Vorsicht!
notwendig Spannung
Zu Ihrer Dokumente
Information beachten
Verletzungs- Hinweis auf

gefahr! Anleitung
Betriebsstoff
notwendig
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 9
Leistungsbeschreibung
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung
Die druckgesteuerte 3/2-Wege-Zulaufarmatur ist zum Einsatz im industriellen Be-
reich geeignet. Die Armatur ermöglicht das Steuern gasförmiger und flüssiger Me-
dien. Die Gehäuse- und Dichtmaterialien müssen für das eingesetzte Medium und
den angegebenen Temperaturbereich geeignet sein.
Verletzungsgefahr!
Hineinführen von Körperteilen und Gegenständen in das Ventil kann zu

schweren Verletzungen führen und sollte unbedingt vermieden werden!
Lagerung, Transport, Entsorgung

Die Produkte sind i.d.R. durch Umverpackungen vor äußeren Einflüssen wie
Feuchtigkeit oder Schmutz geschützt. Wir empfehlen, diese Umverpackung erst
kurz vor Montagebeginn zu entfernen, um die Geräte vor Verunreinigungen zu
schützen.
Bei Einlagerung ist darauf zu achten, dass die Geräte trocken und schmutzfrei
untergebracht werden.
Auf die Handhabung beim Transport können wir nur mit Ihrer Hilfe Einfluss
nehmen. Bitte informieren Sie uns unverzüglich, wenn die Ware bereits mit be-
schädigter Verpackung bei Ihnen eintrifft! Die Kontrolle der Produkte muss unmit-
telbar nach Wareneingang erfolgen und sollte eine Prüfung der technischen Pa-
rameter und eine Sichtprüfung beinhalten. Verdeckte Mängel sind unverzüglich
nach Entdeckung zu rügen, andernfalls gilt die Ware als abgenommen.
Warenmängel oder Abweichungen der Menge müssen spätestens 7 Tage

nach Erhalt der Ware schriftlich angezeigt werden, andernfalls erlischt der
Gewährleistungsanspruch!
Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen
Rohrleitungen sollten vor Einbau, spätestens jedoch vor Inbetriebnahme durchge-
spült werden. Automatisierte Armaturen bedürfen einer besonderen Beachtung bei
der Inbetriebnahme! Diese Geräte können im Werk nur unter Werkstattbedingun-
gen getestet und eingestellt werden. Sicherheitsstellungen sollten gezielt simuliert
und getestet werden. Die Endlagen (offen/geschlossen) müssen überprüft und
ggf. nachjustiert werden! Zusätzliche Wegschalter oder andere elektrische Geräte
zur Stellungsrückmeldung ebenfalls auf richtige Justierung überprüfen!
®
Westfalia Separator
10 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Gerätebeschreibung
1 Einstellschraube d. Drossel
2 Eingang
3 Ausgang (stromlos offen)
4 Ausgang nach Betätigung
5 Zylinder
6a Sicherungskappe
6b Notbetätigung [Druckventil] (SW 19)
7 Befestigungsbohrungen
8 Schalldämpfer
9 Stecker für Magnetventil
10 Magnetventil
11 Notbetätigung [Magnetventil]
12 Lufteinlass
13 Temperaturfühler PT100
14 Rückschlagventil
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 11
Notbetätigung
Sollte der Versorgungsdruck des Ventils einmal ausfallen, gehen Sie bitte
wie folgt vor:
 Transparente Kappe (6a) am oberen Ende des 3/2-Wege-Ventils ab-

schrauben.
 Sechskantmutter [SW 19] (6b) bis zu deutlich spürbarem Widerstand (ca.
10 mm) einschrauben.
 Ventil ist nun geschaltet. Vergessen Sie nicht, nach der Instandsetzung
der Druckluftversorgung die Notbetätigungsschraube zurück in ihren Ur-
sprung zu versetzen
Sollte die Versorgungsspannung für das Magnetventil (10) einmal ausfallen,

gehen Sie bitte wie folgt vor:
 Mit Schraubendreher die Notbetätigung (11) um 180° drehen , bis das Ven-
til öffnet.
Die Stellung der Notbetätigung ist mit den Buchstaben o = geöffnet (open) und
c = geschlossen (closed) gekennzeichnet. Im Lieferzustand ist die Notbetäti-
gung auf die Position „geschlossen“ eingestellt („c“ steht rechts).
 Für die normale Funktion des Magnetventils muss die Notbetätigung wie-
der zurückgesetzt werden.
 Das Bild „A“ zeigt die geschlossene Stellung, das Bild „B“ die geöffnete
Stellung.
®
Westfalia Separator
12 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Ersatzteilsets
Rückschlagventil (9) Teil-Nr. 0018-7621-920
Zylinder (Luft) (3) Teil-Nr. 0018-7621-930
Klarsichtkappe mit Dichtung (1) Teil-Nr. 0018-7621-940
Pilotventil mit Kabelkopf, Teil-Nr. 0018-7621-600

Skintopverschraubung und
Schalldämpfer mit montierter
Winkelverschraubung1/8 – DN8 und
montierter lösbarer Verschraubung 1/4 - 1/8
mit Drossel (2)
Doppel PT100 (4) Teil-Nr. 0001-1579-400
Spindeleinheit vollständig (6) Teil-Nr. 0018-7621-950
Einschraubteil vollständig (5) Teil-Nr. 0018-7621-960
O-Ring - 22x2 - 1 Stk. (7) Teil-Nr. 0007-2412-830
O-Ringe - 12x2 - 3 Stk. (8) Teil-Nr. 0007-1929-830
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 13
1 Klarsichtkappe mit Dichtung

2 Pilotventil mit Kabelkopf
3 Zylinder (Luft)
4 Doppel PT100
5 Einschraubteil vollständig
6 Spindeleinheit vollständig
7 O-Ring 22x2
8 O-Ringe 12x2
9 Rückschlagventil
®
Westfalia Separator
14 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Tätigkeitsbeschreibung
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines druckgesteuerten 3/2-Wege-Ventils
Der Einbau darf nur in drucklosem Zustand erfolgen.
Das Ventilgehäuse mit den Flanschdichtungen vor-

sichtig zwischen die zuvor angebrachten Flansche
schieben.
Bitte achten Sie darauf, dass die verwendeten Dichtungen für das Durch-
fluss-Medium geeignet ist!
Die Flanschbohrungen zueinander ausrichten und

passende Schrauben oder Stehbolzen in die Bohrun-
gen stecken bzw. einschrauben.
Die Flansche mit passenden Schrauben fest und

kreuzweise befestigen bzw. passende Muttern fest
und kreuzweise auf die Stehbolzen aufschrauben.
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 15
Wartung
Eine vorbeugende Wartung oder Reinigung wird in Abhängigkeit von den Be-
triebsbedingungen und bei auffälliger Veränderung von Schaltzeiten oder Schalt-
geräuschen empfohlen.
Je nach Umgebungsbedingungen sind in regelmäßigen Abständen die Magnet-
spulen auf Risse und Schmutzablagerungen und der elektrische Anschluss auf
festen Sitz und sichere Abdichtung zu überprüfen.
Der Betreiber trägt die Verantwortung für die Festsetzung angemessener Prüf-
und Wartungsintervalle in Abhängigkeit von den Einsatzbedingungen der Ventile.
Wartungsarbeiten dürfen nur von geschultem Fachpersonal und mit geeigneten
Werkzeugen durchgeführt werden.
Ablagerungen, Schmutz, gealterte oder verschlissene Dichtungen können zu
Funktionsstörungen führen.
Wartungsarbeiten dürfen nur bei drucklosem Rohrsystem und von der Span-
nungsversorgung getrennten Magneten durchgeführt werden.
1. Kolbeneinheit
Demontage
Befestigungsschrauben des Zylinders lösen. Zylinder demontieren.
Kolbeneinheit demontieren.
Kolben mit Pneumatikfett (z. B. Molykote 55M) nachfetten oder ggf. austauschen.
Die Montage erfolgt in umgekehrter Reihenfolge
®
Westfalia Separator
16 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Wichtig: O-Ringe schmieren (z. B. mit temperaturbeständigem Mehrzweck-

fett)
Kolben mit Pneumatikfett schmieren (z. B. Molykote 55M)
Kolbeneinheit wieder montieren
2. Obere Spindellagerung
Demontage - Zylinder demontieren
Befestigungsschrauben des Zylinders lösen. Zylinder demontieren.
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 17
Kappe demontieren. Obere Spindellagerung demontie-

ren.
O-Ring nachschmieren (z. B. mit temperaturbeständigem Mehrzweckfett) oder

ggf. komplette obere Spindeleinheit austauschen.
Die Montage erfolgt in umgekehrter Reihenfolge.
3. Rückschlagventil
Demontage
Sicherungsblech lösen. Sicherungsblech demontieren.
Rückschlagventil reinigen oder austauschen.
Die Montage erfolgt in umgekehrter Reihenfolge.
®
Westfalia Separator
18 9085-9000-000 / 0312
ACHTUNG: Vor Montage der Systemarmatur in die Rohrleitung die korrekte

Sicherung des Haltebleches sicherstellen.
Sicherung des Haltebleches sicherstellen.
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 19
2 ENGLISH
This manual ................................................................. 20

Intention of this manual ...................................................................................... 20
Shortcuts and symbols ....................................................................................... 20
Specification of service ................................................ 21

Intended usage ................................................................................................... 21
Storage, transport, disposal ............................................................................... 21
Terms of general application .............................................................................. 21
Device description ........................................................ 22

Emergency operation ......................................................................................... 23
Spare Parts .................................................................. 24

Initial operation and maintenance ................................ 26
Installation of a pressure controlled 3/2-way valve ............................................ 26
Maintenance ................................................................ 27
1. Piston unit ....................................................................................................... 27
2. Upper spindle bearing .................................................................................... 28
3. Check valve .................................................................................................... 29
®
Westfalia Separator
20 9085-9000-000 / 0312
This manual
Intention of this manual
This information enables you to install and maintain your valve. This manual is for
skilled employees only. We assume that you are familiar with the common valve
terminology and that you can read technical documents.
If you don’t meet these expectations please inform your personal customer
advisor!
Shortcuts and symbols
Attention! Please Danger!

read carefully Hot surface!
Danger!
Tools necessary
Voltage.
For your Please read

information documents
Attention! Hint to the

Risk of injury! manual part.
Supply items
needed!
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 21
Specification of service
Intended usage
These pressure controlled valves are suitable for industrial use. The valve enables
the control of gaseous and liquid media. The housing and sealing compounds
must be suitable for the assigned medium and temperature range.
Danger of injury! 1
Do not put parts of your body or articles into the valve. This can cause
heavy injuries and should be absolutely avoided!
Storage, transport, disposal

The products are protected by packaging against external influences such as
humidity or dirt. We recommend that the packaging is removed only briefly before
the beginning of assembly in order to protect the devices against impurities.
Make sure, that the devices are stored dry and dirt-free.
Influencing the handling during transport requires your assistance – please in-
form us immediately if the commodity arrives with damaged packaging! An exami-
nation of the technical parameters and a visual check of the products should take
place immediately after delivery. Notice on latent defects is to be given immediate-
ly after detection. Subsequent complaints will not be accepted.
Deficient goods or divergences of the amount must be indicated at the latest

7 days on receipt of the products in writing, otherwise the guarantee claim
will run out!
Terms of general application

It is advised to clean the valve and piping before initial use. Automated valves
need special attention! These devices can be tested under workshop conditions
only. Security positions should be systematically simulated and tested. The final
positions must be checked (open/closed) and re-adjusted if necessary! Additional
switches or other electric devices for the position feedback must be likewise
checked regarding correct settings.
®
Westfalia Separator
22 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Device description
1 Adjusting screw
2 Input
3 Output (normally open)
4 Output after operation
5 Cylinder
6a Safety cover
6b Emergency operation [valve] (SW 19)
7 fixing hole
8 Absorbing duct
9 Connector for solenoid valve
10 Solenoid valve
11 Emergency operation [solenoid valve]
12 Air input
13 Temperature sensor PT100
14 Non-return valve
Emergency operation:
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 23
Emergency operation
In case of a supply pressure deficiency at the valve, please proceed as fol-

lows:
 Unscrew transparent cap (6a) at the upper end of the valve.

 Screw in hexagon nut [SW 19] (6b) up to clearly noticeable resistance
(app. 10mm).
 Valve is switched. Do not forget to screw back the emergency operating
screw into its original position when the compressed air supply is re-
stored.
In case of a supply voltage deficiency at the solenoid valve, please proceed

as follows:
 Turn the manual override (11) about 180° using a screwdriver until the
valve opens. The position of the manual override is marked with o = open
and c = closed. Delivery condition is closed (mark “c” on the right side).
 Reset the manual override to restore normal function.
 Picture „A“ shows the closed and picture B the open position.
®
Westfalia Separator
24 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Spare Parts
Non-return valve (pos. 9) Part no. 0018-7621-920
Cylinder (air) (pos. 3) Part no. 0018-7621-930
Transparent cap with sealing Part no. 0018-7621-940

(pos. 1)
Pilot valve with cable head, Part no. 0018-7621-600

skintop connection and ab-
sorbing duct with mounted elbow
union 1/8 – DN8 and assembled removable
screwing 1/4 - 1/8
with air regulation (pos. 2)
Double PT100 (pos. 4) Part no. 0001-1579-400
Spindle device, complete (pos. 6) Part no. 0018-7621-950
Screw-in fitting, complete (pos. 5) Part no. 0018-7621-960
O-ring 22x2 1 pc. (pos. 7) Part no. 0007-2412-830
O-ring 12x2 3pcs. (pos. 8) Part no. 0007-1929-830
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 25
1 transparent cap with sealing

2 pilot valve with cable head
3 cylinder (air)
4 double PT100
5 complete screw-in fitting
6 complete spindle device
7 o-ring 22x2
8 o-ring12x2
9 non-return valve
®
Westfalia Separator
26 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Initial operation and maintenance

Installation of a pressure controlled 3/2-way valve
Installation in unpressurised state only!
Push the valve housing with the flange seals carefully

between the flanges.
Please pay attention to the fact that the used sealing compounds are suita-
ble for the flowing medium!
Align the flange drillings to each other and put suitable

screws into the drillings
Fix the nuts crosswise and firmly onto the screws.
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 27
Maintenance
Preventing maintenance or cleaning is recommended depending on the operating
conditions and in case of significant alteration of switching time or switching nois-
es.
Depending on ambient conditions the coil is to be checked regularly in terms of
cracks and dirt and the electric connection in terms of firm hold and safe sealing.
The operator is responsible for determining adequate maintenance intervals refer-
ring to the given operating conditions of the valve.
Any maintenance work is to be carried out by expert staff only. Adequate tooling is
required.
Functional failures can be provoked by disposal, dirt and aged or worn out sealing
material.
Any maintenance work has to be done with depressurized piping and disconnect-
ed solenoids only.
1. Piston unit
Disassembly
Loosen the fixing screws of the cylinder. Disassemble cylinder.
Dismount piston unit.
Lubricate piston with pneumatic grease (e.g. Molykote 55M) or replace piston
when necessary.
Assembly takes place in reverse order.
®
Westfalia Separator
28 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Important: lubricate o-ring (e. g. using temperature resistant multi-purpose

grease)
Lubricate piston with pneumatic grease (e.g. Molykote 55M).
Mount piston unit.
2. Upper spindle bearing

Disassembly - Dismantle cylinder
Loosen the fixing screws of the cylinder. Disassemble cylinder.
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 29
Dismantle cap. Disassemble upper spindle bear-

ing.
Lubricate o-ring (e. g. using temperature resistant multi-purpose grease) or re-

place complete upper spindle bearing when necessary.
3. Check valve
Disassembly of check valve
Loosen retaining plate Dismount retaining plate
Clean or replace check valve.

®
Westfalia Separator
30 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Attention: make sure the retaining plate is fixed in correct position prior to
mounting the system valve into the piping!
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 31
®
Westfalia Separator
32 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Seite / page: 1-2

zur / for
Ersatzteilanfrage Ersatzteilbestellung
An / To
Am Neuländer Gewerbepark 6
D-21079 Hamburg (Germany)
Fax-No.: +49 (0) 40-7380585
Besteller / Orderer
Firma / Company
Name
Straße, Haus-Nr.
Street, house no.
PLZ, Ort / ZIP, City
Telefon / Phone
Fax
Lieferanschrift (falls abweichend) Rechnungsanschrift (falls abweichend)

Delivery address (if different) Invoice address (if different)
Firma Firma
Company Company
Name Name
Straße, Straße,
Haus-Nr. Haus-Nr.
Street, house Street,
no. house no.
PLZ, Ort ZIP, PLZ, Ort
City ZIP, City
Telefon Telefon
Phone Phone
Fax Fax
Gewünschte Lieferzeit:
Desired delivery time:
Kommentar:
Remarks:
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 33
Seite / page: 2-2

zur / for
Ersatzteilanfrage Ersatzteilbestellung
WICHTIG! Bei Anfrage oder Bestellung unbedingt angeben:

IMPORTANT! When submitting your inquiry or order, be sure to state:
Serien-
WSM-Auftrags-Nr. Nr.
WSM Order No.: Serial No. Typ Type
Kundenauftrags-Nr.
Customer Order No.
Pos. (falls
vorhanden) Bestellnummer Menge Bezeichnung
Item (if Part-No. Qty. Description
available)
®
Westfalia Separator
34 9085-9000-000 / 0312
®
Westfalia Separator
Tel. +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
BW-MV-direkt
Magnetventile direktgesteuert
Direct acting solenoid valves DEUTSCH
ENGLISCH
Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung

Installation and Maintenance manual
Bitte lesen Sie vor Installation Ihrer Armatur diese Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung sorgfältig
durch.
Die Installation und Wartung darf nur durch qualifiziertes Personal durchgeführt werden.
Bitte beachten Sie die in dieser Anleitung aufgeführten Sicherheitshinweise!
Before installing and maintaining your valve, read this manual carefully.
Installation and maintanance is allowed for skilled employees only.
Please pay attention to the safety advices!
-1-
BW-MV-direkt
©2006 - MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH, Vlotho
Alle Rechte an Texten und Bildern, auch die der Übersetzung, sind vorbehalten.
Dieses Handbuch darf nicht, auch nicht in Auszügen, in irgendeiner Form (Druck, Fotokopie, Mikrofilm oder weitere
Verfahren) ohne schriftliche Zustimmung reproduziert oder unter Verwendung elektronischer Systeme verarbeitet,
vervielfältigt oder verbreitet werden.
The property rights of all texts and pictures are subject to MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH. It is not allowed to change
or duplicate even parts of it without written permission. We do not assume responsibility for correctness and integrity.
Colours of original products can differ from images.
Änderungen sind vorbehalten.

Errors excepted regarding print and technical changes.
Auflage: September 2008, Revision 2

Edition: September 2008, Revision 2
Anfragen richten Sie bitte schriftlich an:

MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH
Industriestr. 9
32602 Vlotho
-2-
BW-MV-direkt
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Seite / page
Zu dieser Anleitung 4
This manual
Abkürzungen und Symbole 4
Leistungsbeschreibung 5
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung 5
Intended usage
Lagerung, Transport, Entsorgung 5
Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen 5
Gerätebeschreibung 6
Device description
Wartung 6
Maintenance
Inbetriebnahme und Wartung 7, 8

Acticity description
Installation und Inbetriebnahme 7, 8
Installation
-3-
DEUTSCH BW-MV-direkt
Zu dieser Anleitung
Ziel der Anleitung
Die vorliegenden Informationen ermöglichen es Ihnen die Armatur fachgerecht zu installieren

und zu warten. Die Anleitung richtet sich an technisch qualifiziertes Personal. Es wird
vorausgesetzt, dass bestimmtes Fachvokabular verstanden wird und dass technische
Zeichnungen gelesen werden können.
Sollte dies nicht der Fall sein, informieren Sie bitte Ihren zuständigen Kundenbetreuer bei
MIT.
Aktuelle Dokumentation im Internet
Wir bitten Sie, sich regelmäßig über aktualisierte Versionen dieser Anleitung zu informieren.
Diese Anleitung unterliegt nicht der Revisionierung und stellt lediglich den zum Zeitpunkt des
Drucks aktuellen Informationsstand der MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH dar. Aktuelle
Informationen zu Ihrem Produkt können Sie jederzeit unter www.systemarmaturen.de
abrufen oder telefonisch bei Ihrem zuständigen Kundenbetreuer anfordern.
Gültigkeit der Anleitung
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH behält sich Änderungen an der Armatur sowie
Erweiterungen und Änderungen der vorliegenden Anleitung, die dem technischen Fortschritt
dienen, vor.

lesen! Oberfläche!
Werkzeug Vorsicht!
notwendig Spannung
Zu Ihrer Dokumente

gefahr! Anleitung
Betriebsstoff
notwendig
-4-
BW-MV-direkt DEUTSCH
Direktgesteuerte Magnetventile der Baureihen GMV48, 5200, 7200, 7300, 7500, 2138, 2148,
2162, 2167, 2197, 3162, 3163, 3197 und FMV 2300 sind zum Einsatz im industriellen
Bereich geeignet. Die Magnetventile besitzen bei fachgerechter Montage der optional
lieferbaren Stecker eine Schutzart von IP65. Die Verteiler ermöglichen das Schalten
neutraler gasförmiger und flüssiger Medien. Die Gehäuse- und Dichtmaterialien müssen für
das eingesetzte Medium und den angegebenen Temperaturbereich geeignet sein.
Verletzungsgefahr
Hineinführen von Körperteilen und Gegenständen in die Anschlüsse der Armatur kann zu
MIT-Produkte sind i.d.R. durch Umverpackungen vor äußeren Einflüssen wie Feuchtigkeit
oder Schmutz geschützt. Wir empfehlen, diese Umverpackung erst kurz vor Montagebeginn
zu entfernen, um die Geräte vor Verunreinigungen zu schützen.
Bei Einlagerung ist darauf zu achten, dass die Geräte trocken und schmutzfrei
untergebracht werden.
Auf die Handhabung beim Transport können wir nur mit Ihrer Hilfe Einfluss nehmen – bitte
informieren Sie uns unverzüglich, wenn die Ware bereits mit beschädigter Verpackung bei
Ihnen eintrifft! Die Kontrolle der Produkte muss unmittelbar nach Wareneingang erfolgen und
sollte eine Prüfung der technischen Parameter und eine Sichtprüfung beinhalten. Verdeckte
Mängel sind unverzüglich nach Entdeckung zu rügen, andernfalls gilt die Ware als
genehmigt.
Warenmängel oder Abweichungen der Menge müssen spätestens 7 Tage nach Erhalt der Ware
schriftlich angezeigt werden, andernfalls erlischt der Gewährleistungsanspruch!
Rohrleitungen sollten vor Einbau, spätestens jedoch vor Inbetriebnahme durchgespült

werden. Automatisierte Armaturen bedürfen einer besonderen Beachtung bei der
Inbetriebnahme! Diese Geräte können bei MIT im Werk nur unter Werkstattbedingungen
getestet und eingestellt werden. Sicherheitsstellungen sollten gezielt simuliert und getestet
werden.
-5-
Gerätebeschreibung
1 - Steckerschraube
2 - Mutter
3 - Steckdose
4 - Steckdosendichtung
5 - elektrischen Anschlüsse
6 - Wellscheibe
7 - Scheibe
8 - Spule
9 - Tubus
10 - Anker
11 - Feder
12 - Gehäuse
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines direktgesteuerten Magnetventils
Der Einbau darf nur in drucklosem Zustand erfolgen!
Der Einbau der Armatur sollte vorzugsweise senkrecht erfolgen!
Der elektrische Anschluss darf nur von einer hierfür ausgebildeten Fachkraft erfolgen!
Zum Anschluss des Magnetventils an Ihr Leitungssystem werden keine

Sonderwerkzeuge benötigt.
-6-
BW-MV-direkt DEUTSCH
Direktgesteuerte Magnetventile sind in der Grundausstattung immer stromlos geschlossen. In

Ruhestellung verschließt der Anker durch Federkraft direkt den Sitz. Wird durch Anlegen einer Spannung
die Magnetspule erregt, so wird der Anker mit dem Dichtelement direkt vom Sitz angehoben.
Wichtig!
Die Standardventile sind immer stromlos geschlossen (NC)!
Einbau
In der Regel ist die Einbaulage mit stehendem Magneten in waagerechter Leistung vorgeschrieben.
Pfeilrichtung am Gehäuse mit Fließrichtung des Mediums vergleichen. Vor der Montage, Rohrleitung mit
Druckintervallen durchspülen. Bei verschmutzten Medien unbedingt einen Schmutzfänger möglichst nach
dem Ventileingang vorsehen. Wird ein Ventil mit Muffenanschluss montiert, Spule nicht als Hebel
benutzen. Ein Verspannen des Ventilgehäuses durch Einsatz von unsachgemäßem Werkzeug oder
Dichtungsmaterial oder durch nicht fluchtende Rohrleitungen muss vermieden werden. Bitte benutzen Sie
ausschließlich passendes Werkzeug an den Schlüsselflächen des Gehäuses!
Elektrischer Anschluss
Die Magnetsysteme des Standardprogramms haben einen Steckeranschluss oder eine Kabeleinführung
zum Klemmkasten an der Magnetspule. Vor Anschluss der Stromzufuhr die vorgeschriebene Stromart
und Spannung auf Typenschild und Lieferschein beachten. Spannungstoleranz +/-10%. Die
Einschaltdauer beträgt 100%ED. Als Dauerbetrieb (DB) gilt die Funktion, bei der die Spule solange
eingeschaltet bleibt bis die Belastungstemperatur erreicht ist. Achtung - Verbrennungsgefahr! Die
Oberflächen der Magnetspulen können bei Betrieb sehr heiß werden! Elektrische Anschlüsse vor
Feuchtigkeit schützen. Bei Freiluftmontage eine ausreichende Abdeckung vorsehen. Die Schutzart IP 65
ist nur für eine kurze Feuchtigkeitsbelastung ausgelegt. Elektrische Anschlüsse nur durch Fachpersonal
vornehmen lassen. Anschlusskabel entsprechend dem Einsatzfall und den örtlichen Begebenheiten (z.B.
erhöhte Temperaturen) auswählen. Bei zündfähiger Atmosphäre (Ex-Schutz) unbedingt die
Bestimmungen der Zulassungsbehörde beachten.
Anschlussplan
Erdanschluss
Für Gleich- und Mit einem Gleichrichter

Stromanschlüsse Wechselstrom für Wechselstrom
-7-
Wartung und Störungsbeseitigung
Die Magnetventile sind wartungsfrei!
Mögliche Störfälle!!
Bitte zunächst Pfeilrichtung, Spannung, Einsatzort und Betriebsdruck überprüfen!
Anker wird nicht angezogen.

1. Anschlussspannung ist unterbrochen oder nicht ausreichend
2. Magnetspule oder Gleichrichter defekt
3. Anker blockiert im verschmutzten Tubusraum; Wenn der Anker die Hubendlage nicht erreicht, führt
diese bei
erregter Wechselstrom-Spule, schon nach kurzer Zeit, zum Ausfall der Spule (thermische
Überlastung).
4. Nennspannung und Spulenspannung unterschiedlich.
Ventil schließt nicht!

1. Anker blockiert
3. Nennspannung liegt noch an
4. Handbetätigung nicht zurückgestellt
5. Pfeilrichtung mit Durchflussrichtung nicht identisch
Ventil öffnet nicht!

1. Membrane oder Kolben defekt
2. Entlastungsbohrung verstopft (Dichtmittel oder Verschraubung im Ausgang überprüfen)
3. Nennspannung liegt nicht an
4. Magnetspule defekt
5. Nennspannung und Spulenspannung unterschiedlich.
Bei Fehlfunktionen überprüfen Sie, ob der Ventilsitz, das Dichtungselement, der Anker und der Tubus
sauber sind.
Mögliche Instandsetzungsarbeiten dürfen nur vom Fachpersonal durchgeführt

werden!
-8-
ENGLISH
ENGLISH BW-MV-direkt
This manual
This information enables you to install and maintain your valve. This manual is for skilled
employees only. We assume that you are familiar with the common valve terminology and
that you can read technical documents.
If you don’t meet these expectations please inform your personal customer advisor at
MIT!
Latest documentation on the internet
Please check regularly for updated versions of this document. This manual is not audited
and represents only the current information of MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH at the
time of print. You can get current information of your product at any time on the internet:
www.systemarmaturen.de.
Validity of the manual
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH declares that it reserves its right to modify both the
manual and the valve if necessary for technical advancement.

Danger!
Tools necessary
Voltage.


Supply items
needed!
-4-
BW-MV-direkt ENGLISH
Intended usage
Direct acting solenoid valves of the type GMV4800, 5200, 7200, 7300, 7500, 2138, 2148,
2162, 2197, 3162, 3163, 3197 and FMV 2300 made by MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik
GmbH are suitable for the producing industries. The valves have protection class IP65
when you use the optional deliverable plugs of MIT.
The valves are used for switching neutral gaseous and liquid media. The medium and
temperature range and pressure have to be suitable to the body and sealing materials.
Danger of injury
Don´t put parts of your body or other parts into the valve. This can cause heavy injuries
and should be avoided!
MIT-products are protected by packing against external influences such as humidity or dirt.
We recommend removing this packing just before assembly in order to protect the devices
against impurities.
During storage make sure that the devices are accommodated dry and dirt-free.
We can only take influence on the transport process with your assistance - please inform
us immediately if the commodity arrives with damaged packing! Examination of technical
parameters and a visual product check should take place emidiately after delivery.
Subsequent complains can not be excepted.
The warranty expires if product failings or quantity divergences are not announced in
writing within 7 days after receipt of goods!
Please ensure that no humidity gets into the pipings. Automated valves need a special
attention in time of initial operation! These devices can be tested at MIT Moderne
IndustrieTechnik GmbH only under workshop conditions. Security positions should be
simulated and tested straight.
-5-
BW-MV-direkt
ENGLISH
Device description
1 - Screw for the plug

2 - Nut
3 - Plug
4 - Plug sealing
5 - electric connectors
6 - Washer
7 - Washer
8 - Solenoid
9 - Tube
10 - Plunger
11 - Spring
12 - Body
Activity description
Installation of a direct acting solenoid valve
The installation may occur only in state without pressure.
We recommend the installation with the valve in upright position!
Electric connection is only allowed for skilled employees!
You don't need any special tools to connect the solenoid valve with your piping system.
-6-
BW-MV-direkt ENGLISH
Direct acting solenoid valves are always in the state "normally closed". In rest position the plunger locks
the seat only by spring force. When the solenoid is energized the plunger with its sealing is directly lifted
from the seat.
IMPORTANT!
Our common solenoid valves are always in the state "normally closed"!
Installation
Normally you have to install your solenoid valve with the solenoid in upright position and in a horizontal
piping.
Please compare the arrow on the body with the flow direction of your medium. Before installation keep
in mind to rinse your piping with pressure interval. If you have media with particles we recommend to
use a strainer directly in front of the solenoid valve. If you mount a valve with muffle connection don't
use the coil as hand lever. Avoid twisting of the valve body - this can be caused by wrong tools, sealings
or non-flush pipelines. Remind to use suitable tools at the spanner flats only.
Electric Connection
Our common solenoids have a plug connection or a cable entry point to the terminal box. Please mind
the required current and voltage before connection - you can find them on the type label or the bill of
delivery. The tolerance of voltage is +/- 10%. The duty time is 100%. The continous duty is the time
when the solenoid is energized until the load temperature is reached. Caution - risk of burnig! The
surfaces of the solenoids may become extremely hot! Protect the electric connection from humidity. If
the valve is mounted outside arrange for adequate cover. Protection class IP65 is only for short periods
of humidity. Choose the adequate connection cable according to the surrounding area and the local
conditions, e.g. high temperature. If you have ignitable atmosphere you have to follow the regulations of
your local accreditation agency.
Wiring diagram
Ground
for AC /DC with rectifier for AC

Current connection
-7-
ENGLISH
BW-MV-direkt
Maintenance
Our solenoid valves are maintenance-free!
Possible failures
First of all check the arrow on the body with your medium flow, the voltage, the place of installation and
the working pressure!
Also check if the valve seat, the sealing, the plunger and the tube are clean.
The Plunger is not lifted.

1. The connection voltage is broken or not high enough.
2. The solenoid or the rectifier is broken.
3. The plunger is blocked in the polluted plunger area. If the plunger can not reach the final position this
can lead to a broken solenoid (only with energized AC - solenoid) Thermal overload!
4. Nominal voltage and solenoid voltage are different.
The valve does not close properly!

1. The plunger is blocked.
2. There is still nominal voltage.
3. You did not reset the hand lever.
4. Arrow on the body and medium flow are not in the same direction.
The valve does not open properly!

1. Diaphragm or piston are broken.
2. The relief boring is blocked (please check the sealing compound ort he screwing in the outlet)
3. You don't have nominal voltage.
4. The solenoid is broken.
5. Nominal voltage and solenoid voltage are different.
Repair is allowed for skilled employees only!
-8-
BW-MV-direkt
-9-
BW-MV-direkt
Kontakt / Contact:
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH

Industriestr. 9
32602 Vlotho
Tel. +49 (5228) 952-0
Fax +49 (5228) 952-90
Email: MIT@Systemarmaturen.de
Internet: www.systemarmaturen.de
- 10 -
Type 6014
3/2-Way Solenoid Valve
3/2-Wege-Magnetventil
Électrovanne à 3/2 voies
Bedienungsanleitung
Manuel d‘utilisation
Bürkert Fluid Control Systems

Sales Center
Christian-Bürkert-Str. 13-17
D-74653 Ingelfingen
Tel. + 49 (0) 7940 - 10 91 111
Fax + 49 (0) 7940 - 10 91 448
E-mail: info@de.buerkert.com
International address
www.burkert.com → Bürkert → Company → Locations
Manuals and data sheets on the Internet : www.burkert.com
Bedienungsanleitungen und Datenblätter im Internet: www.buerkert.de
Instructions de service et fiches techniques sur Internet: www.buerkert.fr
© 2012 Bürkert Werke GmbH

Operating Instructions 1308/18_EU-ML_00803455 / Original DE
www.burkert.com
Type 6014
1. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 2. INTENDED USE
english
The operating instructions contain important information. Incorrect use of the solenoid valve Type 6014 can be dangerous
▶▶Read the operating instructions carefully and follow the safety instruc- to people, nearby equipment and the environment.
tions in particular, and also observe the operating conditions. • The device is designed for blocking, dosing, filling and venting neutral
▶▶Operating instructions must be available to each user. gaseous and liquid media.
▶▶The liability and warranty for the product / device are void if the oper- • Do not use the device outdoors.
ating instructions are not followed. • Use according to the permitted data, operating conditions and
conditions of use specified in the contract documents and operat-
1.1. Symbols ing instructions. These are described in the chapter entitled “5.
▶▶Designates an instruction to prevent risks. Technical data”.
→→designates a procedure which you must carry out. • The device may be used only in conjunction with third-party devices
Warning of injuries: and components recommended and authorised by Bürkert.
• Correct transportation, correct storage and installation and careful
DANGER! use and maintenance are essential for reliable and problem-free
Imminent danger! Serious or fatal injuries. operation.
WARNING! • Use the device only as intended.
Potential danger! Serious or fatal injuries.
CAUTION! 2.1. Restrictions
Danger! Minor or moderately severe injuries. If exporting the product / device, observe any existing restrictions.
Warns of damage to property:
NOTE!
2.2. Definition of term 2.4. Ex approval

In these operating instructions, the term “device” or “product” always The Ex approval is only valid if you use the modules and components
english
refers to the solenoid valve Type 6014. authorized by Bürkert as described in these operating instructions.
You may use the electronic modules only in combination with the pneu-
matic valve types released by Bürkert, otherwise the Ex approval will be
2.3. Approvals void!
The approval mark indicated on the Bürkert type labels refers to the If you make unauthorized changes to the system, the modules or com-
Bürkert products. ponents, the Ex approval will also be void.
e1
03 5791
Devices which must bear the type approval mark were approved at the
Kraftfahrtbundesamt under the type approval number
e1*72/245*2006/96*5791*00
and are put into circulation with the indicated type approval mark. You
can obtain an extract of the type approval from the address below.
Bürkert Werke GmbH
Zulassungsbeauftragter,
Christian-Bürkert-Str. 13-17,
D-74653 Ingelfingen
3. BASIC SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ▶▶After an interruption in the power supply or pneumatic supply, ensure
These safety instructions do not make allowance for any contingencies that the process is restarted in a defined or controlled manner.
english
and events which may arise during installation, operation and maintenance. ▶▶The device may be operated only when in perfect condition and in
consideration of the operating instructions.
▶▶The general rules of technology apply to application planning and
operation of the device.
Risk of injury from high pressure in the equipment/device.
▶▶Before working on equipment or device, switch off the pressure and To prevent damage to property of the device, ensure:
deaerate/drain lines. ▶▶Supply the media connections only with those media which are speci-
Risk of electric shock. fied as flow media in the chapter entitled “5. Technical data” .
▶▶Before working on equipment or device, switch off the power supply ▶▶Do not put any loads on the device (e.g. by placing objects on it or
and secure to prevent reactivation. standing on it).
▶▶Observe applicable accident prevention and safety regulations for ▶▶Do not make any modifications to the device. Do not paint the body
electrical equipment! parts or screws.
Risk of burns/Risk of fire if used continuously through hot
3.1. Versions with explosion protection
device surface.
▶▶Keep the device away from highly flammable substances and media DANGER!
and do not touch with bare hands.
General hazardous situations. Danger of explosion.
To prevent injury, ensure that: Improper use in the potentially explosive area may result in an explosion.
▶▶The system cannot be activated unintentionally. ▶▶Also follow the specifications in the certificate of conformity.
▶▶Installation and repair work may be carried out by authorized techni- ▶▶If versions have ATEX approval, also follow the specifications in the
cians only. ATEX instructions.
4
Type 6014
4. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 5. TECHNICAL DATA
english
5.1. Conformity
The direct-acting solenoid valve Type 6014 is available in two designs. In accordance with the EC Declaration of conformity, the solenoid valve
Type 6014 is compliant with the EC Directives.
Type 6014 is used for the blocking, dosing, filling and 5.2. Standards
venting of neutral gaseous and liquid media, in par- The applied standards, which verify conformity with the EC Directives,
ticular for controlling single-acting pneumatic actuators can be found on the EC-Type Examination Certificate and / or the EC
or technical vacuum. The modular designed valve can Declaration of Conformity.
be installed individually or in a block on the multiple
manifold. 5.3. Operating conditions
Type 6014P is used as a special pilot valve for direct WARNING!

installation on the externally controlled pneumatic actu-
ators. It consists of the magnetic actuator Type 6014 Risk of injury from discharge of medium and pressure.
and a special body with hollow screw which can be con- ▶▶If the device is used outdoors, do not expose it unprotected to the
nected directly to the pilot air port of the actuator. The weather conditions.
valve features manual actuation as standard. ▶▶Avoid heat sources which may cause the allowable temperature
range to be exceeded.
Ambient temperature -10 – +55 °C
Degree of protection IP65 in accordance with EN 60529 with
cable plug
5.4. Mechanical data 5.5. Fluidic data

Dimensions See data sheet
english
Circuit functions
Materials 2(A)
C 3/2-way valve, direct-acting,
Body Type 6014 brass, stainless steel 1.4305, (NC) normal output A unloaded
1(P) 3(R)
polyamide (PA, flange)
2(B)
Type 6014P brass, polyamide (PA) D 3/2-way valve, direct-acting, normal
Hollow screw Type 6014P brass nickel-plated (NO) output B pressurized
1(P) 3(R)
aluminium anodized 2(A)
Base plate Type 6014P aluminium anodized or IXEF T 3/2-way valve, direct-acting,
universal valve
Sealing Type 6014 FKM, EPDM on request 1(P) 3(R)
Type 6014P FKM Tab. 1: Circuit functions
Port connection Type 6014 G1/8, G1/4, flange Pressure range see type label
Type 6014P G1/8, G1/4 Media neutral gaseous and liquid media (e.g. compressed
Hollow screw G1/8, G1/4 air, town gas, natural gas, water, hydraulic fluid,
petrol, technical Vacuum), which do not attack body
and sealing materials
(see Chemical Resistance Chart www.burkert.com)
Medium temperature 5.7. Electrical data

FKM - 10 – +100 °C (PA coil) Connection DIN EN 175301-803 (DIN 43 650), form A
english
-10 – +120 °C (Epoxid coil) for cable plug Type 2508
Viscosity max. 21 mm²/s Operating voltage 24 V DC ± 10 % - max. residual ripple 10 %
24 V / 50 Hz
5.6. Type label 230 V / 50 Hz
Orifice Voltage tolerance ± 10 %
Circuit function Sealing material Nominal output 8W
Type Body material Impulse version 7W
Nominal operating mode 100 % continuous operation
6014 C 1,5 FKM MS
Made in Germany
G1/8 PN 0-16 bar for block installation 5 W continuous operation on request

24V 50 Hz 8W 8 W intermittent operation 60 % (30 min)
CE
00450000 W14UN
Identifications number
Voltage / frequency / power
Port connection / nominal pressure
Fig. 1: Type label (example)
7
Type 6014
6. INSTALLATION 6.2. Fluid installation
english
6.1. Safety instructions DANGER!
DANGER! Risk of injury from high pressure in the equipment/device.

▶▶Before working on equipment or device, switch off the pressure and
Risk of injury from high pressure in the equipment/device. deaerate/drain lines.
deaerate/drain lines. Installation position: any, coil preferably upwards.
Risk of electric shock.
▶▶Before working on equipment or device, switch off the power supply
and secure to prevent reactivation. Procedure:
▶▶Observe applicable accident prevention and safety regulations for →→Before installation, clean any possible dirt off the pipelines and flange
electrical equipment. connections.
Risk of injury from improper installation. →→If required, install a dirt trap to prevent malfunctions.
▶▶Installation may be carried out by authorized technicians only and Mesh size:
with the appropriate tools! 0,2 – 0,4 mm
▶▶Secure system from unintentional activation.
▶▶Following installation, ensure a controlled restart.
Pay attention to the flow direction of the valve.
from 1(P) → 2(A) (Circuit function C) or
from 1(P) → 2(B) (Circuit function D)
Valve with threaded connection: Nut

→→Use PTFE tape as sealing material.
english
NOTE! Coil
Caution risk of breakage.

▶▶Do not use the coil as a lifting arm. Cover plate
Seal
→→Hold the device with a suitable tool (open-
end wrench) on the body and screw into Manifold
the pipeline.
Fig. 2: Valve with flanged connection
WARNING!
Risk of injury due to escaping medium.
▶▶Make certain the seals included with delivery are properly seated in
the valve.
▶▶Ensure that the manifold is even.
▶▶Ensure that the surface quality of the manifold is adequate.
Valve with flanged connection: →→Insert the seal into the body.
→→Remove the cover plate. →→Screw the body onto the manifold (tightening torque: max. 1.5 Nm).
→→Loosen the nut on the coil and remove coil. →→Attach the coil and screw on the nut (tightening torque: max. 5 Nm).
9
6.3. Electrical connection with cable plug

Note the voltage and current type as specified on the type label.
english
DANGER!
→→Check that seal is fitted correctly.
▶▶Before working on equipment or device, switch off the power supply →→Connect and tighten the cable plug (tightening torque: max. 1 Nm).
and secure to prevent reactivation.
▶▶Observe applicable accident prevention and safety regulations for The cable plug can be turned by 4 x 90°.
electrical equipment.
If the protective conductor contact between the coil and body is Control of pulse version
missing, there is danger of electrical shock.
Correct polarity is essential to ensure that the device functions:
▶▶Always connect protective conductor.
Note identification on the upper side of the coil.
▶▶Check electrical continuity between coil and body.
Pulse duration at least 50 ms.
Type 2508 +
switch ONOFF
Seal + switc
h
Protective conductor connection
max. 1 Nm
Terminal 2
Terminal 1
Fig. 3: Electrical connection with cable plug Fig. 4: Pulse version
10
Type 6014
Polarity Specifications Terminal connections Nut

max. 5 Nm
english
Valve (P seat) (+) on terminal 2,
- Switch ON +
will be opened (–) on terminal 1
Valve (P seat) (+) on terminal 1,
+ Switch OFF -
will be closed (–) on terminal 2
Tab. 2: Control of pulse version
Use only cable plug without electrical wiring for pulse versions.
6.4. Rotation of coil O-ring
WARNING! Fitting
Fig. 5: Rotation of coil
If the protective conductor contact between the coil and body is
missing, there is danger of electrical shock. The coil can be turned by 4 x 90° (for block installation only 2 x 180°).
▶▶Check protective conductor contact after installing the coil. →→Loosen nut.
Overheating, risk of fire. →→Turn coil.
Connection of the coil without pre-assembled valve will result in →→Tighten nut with suitable tool (open-end wrench, tightening torque:
overheating and destroy the coil. max. 5 Nm).
▶▶Connect the coil with assembled fitting only.
11
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING 7.1. Malfunctions

If malfunctions occur, check:
english
DANGER!
→→the line connectors,
Risk of injury from high pressure in the equipment/device. →→the operating pressure,
▶▶Before working on equipment or device, switch off the pressure and →→the power supply and valve control.
deaerate/drain lines.
If the valve still does not switch, please contact your Bürkert Service.
▶▶Observe applicable accident prevention and safety regulations for
Risk of burns/Risk of fire if used continuously through hot
device surface.
▶▶Keep the device away from highly flammable substances and media
and do not touch with bare hands.
Risk of injury from improper maintenance.
▶▶Maintenance may be carried out by authorized technicians only and
with the appropriate tools.
▶▶Secure system from unintentional activation.
▶▶Following maintenance, ensure a controlled restart.
12
8. DISASSEMBLY Valve with threaded connection:

→→Hold the device with a suitable tool (Open-end wrench) on the
english
8.1. Safety instructions body and screw off the pipeline.
DANGER!
Valve with flanged connection:
Risk of injury from high pressure in the equipment/device.
→→Loosen the nut on the coil and remove coil.
deaerate/drain lines. →→Loosen the body from the manifold
▶▶Observe applicable accident prevention and safety regulations for
Risk of injury from improper disassembly.
▶▶Disassembly may be carried out by authorized technicians only and
with the appropriate tools.
8.2. Disassembly
→→Turn off the pressure and vent the lines.
→→Switch off the power supply. Fig. 6: Disassembly
→→Loosen the cable plug.
13
Type 6014
9. SPARE PARTS 10. PACKAGING, TRANSPORT, STORAGE,

DISPOSAL
english
CAUTION!
NOTE!
Risk of injury and/or damage by the use of incorrect parts! Transport damages.
Incorrect accessories and unsuitable spare parts may cause injuries Inadequately protected equipment may be damaged during transport.
and damage the device and the surrounding area.
▶▶During transportation protect the device against wet and dirt in shock-
▶▶Use only original accessories and original spare parts from Bürkert. resistant packaging.
▶▶Avoid exceeding or dropping below the allowable storage temperature.
Nut Coil and fitting can be ordered
complete by quoting the identi- Incorrect storage may damage the device.
fication number of the device. ▶▶Store the device in a dry and dust-free location!
Coil (see type label) ▶▶Storage temperature: -40 - 80 °C.
Wearing part set on request. Damage to the environment caused by device components con-
taminated with media.
▶▶Observe applicable regulations on disposal and the environment.
Fitting
Fig. 7: Spare parts
14
Type 6014
Bedienungsanleitung

Sales Center
D-74653 Ingelfingen
Tel. + 49 (0) 7940 - 10 91 111
Fax + 49 (0) 7940 - 10 91 448

www.burkert.com
Typ 6014
1. DIE BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG 2. BESTIMMUNGSGEMÄSSER GEBRAUCH

Die Bedienungsanleitung enthält wichtige Informationen. Bei nicht bestimmungsgemäßem Gebrauch des Magnetventils
▶▶Bedienungsanleitung sorgfältig lesen und Hinweise zur Sicherheit Typ 6014 können Gefahren für Personen, Anlagen in der
beachten. Umgebung und die Umwelt entstehen.
▶▶Bedienungsanleitung muss jedem Benutzer zur Verfügung stehen. • Das Gerät ist zum Sperren, Dosieren, Füllen und Belüften von
▶▶Haftung und Gewährleistung für das Produkt / Gerät entfällt, wenn neutralen gasförmigen und flüssigen Medien konzipiert.
die Anweisungen der Bedienungsanleitung nicht beachtet werden. • Das Gerät nicht im Außenbereich einsetzen.
• Für den Einsatz die in den Vertragsdokumenten und der
1.1. Darstellungsmittel Bedienungsanleitung spezifizierten zulässigen Daten, Betriebs-
deutsch
▶▶markiert eine Anweisung zur Gefahrenvermeidung. und Einsatzbedingungen beachten. Diese sind im Kapitel „5.
→→markiert einen Arbeitsschritt den Sie ausführen müssen. Technische Daten“ beschrieben.
• Das Gerät nur in Verbindung mit von Bürkert empfohlenen bzw.
Warnung vor Verletzungen:
zugelassenen Fremdgeräten und -komponenten einsetzen.
GEFAHR! • Voraussetzungen für den sicheren und einwandfreien Betrieb sind
Unmittelbare Gefahr! Schwere oder tödliche Verletzungen. sachgemäßer Transport, sachgemäße Lagerung und Installation
WARNUNG! sowie sorgfältige Bedienung und Instandhaltung.
Mögliche Gefahr! Schwere oder tödliche Verletzungen. • Gerät nur bestimmungsgemäß einsetzen.
VORSICHT!
Gefahr! Leichte oder mittelschwere Verletzungen. 2.1. Beschränkungen
Bei der Ausfuhr der Produkte / Geräte gegebenenfalls bestehende
Warnung vor Sachschäden:
Beschränkungen beachten.
HINWEIS!
15
2.2. Begriffsdefinition 2.4. Ex-Zulassung

Der in dieser Bedienungsanleitung verwendete Begriff „Gerät“ oder Die Ex-Zulassung ist nur gültig, wenn Sie die von Bürkert zugelassenen
„Produkt" steht immer für das Magnetventil Typ 6014. Module und Komponenten so verwenden, wie es in dieser
Bedienungsanleitung beschrieben ist.
2.3. Zulassungen
Die Elektronikmodule dürfen Sie nur in Kombination mit den von Bürkert
Die auf den Bürkert Typschildern aufgebrachte Zulassungskennzeichnung freigegebenen Pneumatikventiltypen einsetzen, andernfalls erlischt die
bezieht sich auf die Bürkert Produkte. Ex-Zulassung!
e1 Nehmen Sie unzulässige Veränderungen am System, den Modulen oder
deutsch
03 5791 Komponenten vor, erlischt die Ex-Zulassung ebenfalls.
Geräte, die das Typgenehmigungszeichen tragen müssen, wurden beim

Kraftfahrtbundesamt unter der Typgenehmigungsnummer
e1*72/245*2006/96*5791*00
genehmigt und werden mit dem gezeigten Typgenehmigungszeichen in
den Verkehr gebracht. Einen Auszug der Typgenehmigung erhalten Sie
unter der unten stehenden Adresse.
Bürkert Werke GmbH
D-74653 Ingelfingen
16
3. GRUNDLEGENDE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE Allgemeine Gefahrensituationen.

Diese Sicherheitshinweise berücksichtigen keine Zufälligkeiten und Zum Schutz vor Verletzungen ist zu beachten:
Ereignisse, die bei Montage, Betrieb und Wartung auftreten können. ▶▶Gerät nicht in explosionsgefährdeten Bereichen einsetzen.
▶▶Dass die Anlage nicht unbeabsichtigt betätigt werden kann.
▶▶Nur geschultes Fachpersonal darf Installations- und
Verletzungsgefahr durch hohen Druck in Anlage/Gerät. Instandhaltungsarbeiten ausführen.
▶▶Vor Arbeiten an Anlage oder Gerät, den Druck abschalten und ▶▶Nach einer Unterbrechung der elektrischen oder pneumatischen
Leitungen entlüften/entleeren. Versorgung ist ein definierter oder kontrollierter Wiederanlauf des
Prozesses zu gewährleisten.
deutsch
Gefahr durch Stromschlag.

▶▶Gerät nur in einwandfreiem Zustand und unter Beachtung der
▶▶Vor Arbeiten an Anlage oder Gerät, die Spannung abschalten und
Bedienungsanleitung betreiben.
vor Wiedereinschalten sichern.
▶▶Für die Einsatzplanung und den Betrieb des Geräts die allgemeinen
▶▶Die geltenden Unfallverhütungs- und Sicherheitsbestimmungen für
Regeln der Technik einhalten.
elektrische Geräte beachten.
Verbrennungsgefahr/Brandgefahr bei Dauerbetrieb durch heiße Zum Schutz vor Sachschäden am Gerät ist zu beachten:
Geräteoberfläche. ▶▶In die Medienanschlüsse nur Medien einspeisen, die im Kapitel „5.
▶▶Das Gerät von leicht brennbaren Stoffen und Medien fernhalten Technische Daten“ aufgeführt sind.
und nicht mit bloßen Händen berühren. ▶▶Bei Wechselspannung auf beweglichen Kern achten.
▶▶Gerät nicht mechanisch belasten (z. B. durch Ablage von
Gegenständen oder als Trittstufe).
▶▶Am Gerät keine Veränderungen vornehmen. Geräteteile und
Schrauben nicht lackieren.
17
Typ 6014
3.1. Ausführungen mit Explosionsschutz 4. PRODUKTBESCHREIBUNG
GEFAHR! Das direktwirkende Magnetventil Typ 6014 ist in zwei Ausführungen
verfügbar.
Explosionsgefahr.
Bei unsachgemäßem Einsatz im explosionsgefährdeten Bereich Typ 6014 wird zum Sperren, Dosieren, Füllen und
besteht Explosionsgefahr. Belüften von neutralen gasförmigen und flüssigen
Medien verwendet, insbesondere zum Steuern
▶▶Zusätzlich die Angaben der Konformitätsbescheinigung beachten.
einfachwirkender Pneumatikantriebe oder technisches
▶▶Bei Ausführungen mit ATEX-Zulassung sind zusätzlich die Angaben
Vakuum. Das modular aufgebaute Ventil kann einzeln
der ATEX-Anleitung zu beachten.
deutsch
oder im Block auf Mehrfachanschlussplatte montiert

werden.
Typ 6014P wird als spezielles Pilotventil zum
Direktanbau an fremdgesteuerte pneumatische Antriebe
verwendet. Es besteht aus dem Magnetantrieb vom Typ
6014 und einem speziellen Gehäuse mit Hohlschraube,
die direkt an den Steuerluftanschluss des Antriebs
angeschlossen werden kann. Das Ventil ist serienmäßig
mit Handbetätigung ausgestattet.
18
5. TECHNISCHE DATEN 5.4. Mechanische Daten

Abmessungen siehe Datenblatt
5.1. Konformität
Das Magnetventil Typ 6014 ist konform zu den EG-Richtlinien Werkstoffe
entsprechend der EG-Konformitätserklärung.
Gehäuse Typ 6014 Messing, Edelstahl 1.4305,
Polyamid (PA, Flansch)
5.2. Normen Typ 6014P Messing, Polyamid (PA)
Die angewandten Normen, mit denen die Konformität mit den
EG-Richtlinien nachgewiesen wird, sind in der EG-Baumusterprüf- Hohlschraube Typ 6014P Messing vernickelt
deutsch
bescheinigung und/oder der EG-Konformitätserklärung nachzulesen. Aluminium eloxiert
Sockelplatte Typ 6014P Aluminium eloxiert bzw IXEF
5.3. Betriebsbedingungen
Dichtung Typ 6014 FKM, EPDM auf Anfrage
WARNUNG! Typ 6014P FKM
Gefahr durch hohen Druck und Mediumsaustritt. Leitungsanschluss Typ 6014 G1/8, G1/4, Flansch
▶▶Beim Einsatz im Außenbereich das Gerät nicht ungeschützt den Typ 6014P G1/8, G1/4
Witterungsverhältnissen aussetzen. Hohlschraube G1/8, G1/4
▶▶Wärmequellen vermeiden, die zur Überschreitung des zulässigen
Temperaturbereichs führen können.
Umgebungstemperatur -10 ... +55 °C

Schutzart IP65 nach EN 60529 mit Gerätesteckdose
19
5.5. Fluidische Daten Mediumstemperatur

bei FKM -10 ... +100 °C (PA-Spule)
Wirkungsweisen -10 ... +120 °C (Epoxidspule)
2(A)
C 3/2 Wege-Ventil, direktwirkend, Viskosität max. 21 mm²/s
(NC) stromlos Ausgang A entlastet
1(P) 3(R)
2(B)
5.6. Typschild
D 3/2 Wege-Ventil, direktwirkend, Nennweite
(NO) stromlos Ausgang B druckbeaufschlagt
1(P) 3(R) Wirkungsweise Dichtungswerkstoff
deutsch
2(A)
3/2 Wege-Ventil, direktwirkend Typ Gehäusewerkstoff
T
Universalventil
1(P) 3(R)
6014 C 1,5 FKM MS
Made in Germany
Tab. 1: Wirkungsweise G1/8 PN 0-16 bar

24V 50 Hz 8W
CE
Druckbereich siehe Typschild 00450000 W14UN
Medien neutrale gasförmige und flüssige Medien

(z. B. Druckluft, Stadtgas, Ferngas, Wasser, Ident-Nr.
Hydrauliköl, Benzin, technisches Vakuum) Spannung / Frequenz / Leistung
die Gehäuse und Dichtwerkstoffe nicht angreifen
(siehe Beständigkeitstabelle unter www.buerkert.de) Leitungsanschluss / Nenndruck
Bild 1: Typschild Beispiel
20
Typ 6014
5.7. Elektrische Daten 6. INSTALLATION
Anschluss DIN EN 175301-803 (DIN 43 650), Form A
für Gerätesteckdose Typ 2508
6.1. Sicherheitshinweise
Betriebsspannung 24 V DC ± 10 % - max. Restwelligkeit 10 % GEFAHR!

24 V / 50 Hz
230 V / 50 Hz Verletzungsgefahr durch hohen Druck in Anlage/Gerät.
▶▶Vor Arbeiten an Anlage oder Gerät, den Druck abschalten und
Spannungstoleranz ± 10 % Leitungen entlüften/entleeren.
deutsch
Nennleistung 8W
Impulsausführung 7W ▶▶Vor Arbeiten an Anlage oder Gerät, die Spannung abschalten und
Nennbetriebsart Dauerbetrieb, ED 100 % ▶▶Die geltenden Unfallverhütungs- und Sicherheitsbestimmungen für
bei Blockmontage 5 W Dauerbetrieb auf Anfrage
8 W Aussetzbetrieb, ED 60 % (30 min) Verletzungsgefahr bei unsachgemäßer Installation.
▶▶Die Installation darf nur autorisiertes Fachpersonal mit geeignetem
Werkzeug durchführen.
▶▶Anlage vor unbeabsichtigtem Betätigen sichern.
▶▶Nach der Installation einen kontrollierten Wiederanlauf gewährleisten.
21
6.2. Fluidische Installation Ventil mit Gewindeanschluss:

GEFAHR!
→→Als Dichtungsmaterial PTFE-Band verwenden.
HINWEIS!
Verletzungsgefahr durch hohen Druck in Anlage/Gerät.
▶▶Vor Arbeiten an Anlage oder Gerät, den Druck abschalten und Vorsicht Bruchgefahr!
Leitungen entlüften/entleeren. • Die Spule darf nicht als Hebelarm benutzt werden.
Einbaulage: beliebig, vorzugsweise Spule nach oben. →→Das Gerät mit geeignetem Werkzeug
deutsch
(Gabelschlüssel) am Gehäuse festhalten

Vorgehensweise: und in die Rohrleitung einschrauben.
→→Vor der Montage Rohrleitungen und Flanschanschlüsse von
eventuellen Verschmutzungen säubern.
→→Zum Schutz vor Störungen gegebenenfalls einen Schmutzfänger
einbauen. Maschenweite:
0,2 ... 0,4 mm
Die Durchflussrichtung des Ventils beachten. Ventil mit Flanschanschluss:

von 1(P) → 2(A) (WWC) oder →→Die Verschlussplatte entfernen.
von 1(P) → 2(B) (WWD) →→Mutter der Spule lösen und Spule demontieren.
22
Mutter 6.3. Elektrischer Anschluss mit Gerätesteckdose

GEFAHR!
Spule
Verschlussplatte vor Wiedereinschalten sichern.
Dichtung elektrische Geräte beachten.
Bei fehlendem Schutzleiterkontakt zwischen Spule und Gehäuse
deutsch
Anschlussplatte besteht die Gefahr des Stromschlags.

▶▶Schutzleiter immer anschließen.
Bild 2: Ventil mit Flanschanschluss
▶▶Elektrischer Durchgang zwischen Spule und Gehäuse prüfen.
WARNUNG!
Verletzungsgefahr durch Mediumsaustritt.
▶▶Bei mitgelieferten Dichtungen auf den richtigen Sitz im Ventil achten. Typ 2508
▶▶Auf die Ebenheit der Anschlussplatte achten. Dichtung
▶▶Auf ausreichende Oberflächengüte der Anschlussplatte achten. max. 1 Nm
→→Dichtung in das Gehäuse einlegen.
→→Gehäuse auf Anschlussplatte schrauben
(Anziehdrehmoment: max. 1,5 Nm).
→→Spule aufstecken und Mutter befestigen (Anziehdrehmoment: max. 5 Nm). Bild 3: Elektrischer Anschluss mit Gerätesteckdose
23
Typ 6014
Spannung und Stromart laut Typschild beachten. Polung Beschreibung Klemmenbelegung

Ventil (P-Sitz) (+) auf Klemme 2,
→→Korrekten Sitz der Dichtung prüfen. - Switch ON +
wird geöffnet (–) auf Klemme 1
→→Geräteckdose montieren und festschrauben (max. 1 Nm) + Switch OFF -
Ventil (P-Sitz) (+) auf Klemme 1,
wird geschlossen (–) auf Klemme 2
Gerätesteckdose kann um 4 x 90° gedreht werden. Tab. 2: Ansteuerung Impulsausführung
Nur Gerätesteckdose ohne elektrische Beschaltung für

Ansteuerung Impulsausführung
deutsch
Impulsausführungen verwenden.
Richtige Polarität ist Vorraussetzung für die Funktion des
Geräts: Die Kennzeichnung auf der Spulenoberseite beachten. 6.4. Drehen der Spule
Impulsdauer mindestens 50 ms. WARNUNG!
Verletzungsgefahr durch Stromschlag.

+
switch ONOFF Bei fehlendem Schutzleiterkontakt zwischen Spule und Gehäuse
Schutzleiteranschluss
h
+ switc
besteht die Gefahr des Stromschlags.
Klemme 2 ▶▶Schutzleiterkontakt nach der Spulenmontage prüfen.
Klemme 1 Überhitzung, Brandgefahr.
Der Anschluss der Spule ohne montierte Armatur führt zur
Überhitzung und zerstört die Spule.
Bild 4: Impulsausführung ▶▶Spule nur mit montierter Armatur anschließen.
24
Mutter 7. WARTUNG, FEHLERBEHEBUNG

max. 5 Nm GEFAHR!
Verletzungsgefahr durch hohen Druck in Anlage/Gerät.

▶▶Vor Arbeiten an Anlage oder Gerät, den Druck abschalten und
Leitungen entlüften/entleeren.
deutsch
O-Ring elektrische Geräte beachten.
Armatur Verbrennungsgefahr/Brandgefahr bei Dauerbetrieb durch heiße
Geräteoberfläche.
Bild 5: Drehen der Spule
▶▶Das Gerät von leicht brennbaren Stoffen und Medien fernhalten
und nicht mit bloßen Händen berühren.
Die Spule kann um 4 x 90° gedreht werden (bei Blockmontage nur Verletzungsgefahr bei unsachgemäßer Wartung.
2 x 180°). ▶▶Die Wartung darf nur autorisiertes Fachpersonal mit geeignetem
→→Mutter lösen. Werkzeug durchführen.
→→Spule drehen. ▶▶Anlage vor unbeabsichtigtem Betätigen sichern.
▶▶Nach der Wartung einen kontrollierten Wiederanlauf gewährleisten.
→→Mutter mit geeignetem Werkzeug (Gabelschlüssel) festdrehen
(Anziehdrehmoment max. 5 Nm).
25
7.1. Störungen 8. AUSSERBETRIEBNAHME

Bei Störungen überprüfen:
8.1. Sicherheitshinweise
→→die Leitungsanschlüsse
→→den Betriebsdruck GEFAHR!
→→die Spannungsversorgung und Ventilansteuerung Verletzungsgefahr durch hohen Druck in Anlage/Gerät.
Falls das Ventil dennoch nicht schaltet, wenden Sie sich an Ihren ▶▶Vor Arbeiten an Anlage oder Gerät, den Druck abschalten und
Bürkert-Service. Leitungen entlüften/entleeren.
deutsch

Verletzungsgefahr bei unsachgemäßer Demontage.
▶▶Die Demontage darf nur autorisiertes Fachpersonal mit geeignetem
Werkzeug durchführen.
8.2. Demontage
→→Druck abschalten und Leitungen entlüften.
→→Elektrische Spannung abschalten.
→→Gerätesteckdose demontieren (bei Bedarf).
26
Typ 6014
Ventil mit Gewindeanschluss: 9. ERSATZTEILE
→→Gerät mit geeignetem Werkzeug (Gabelschlüssel) am Gehäuse
festhalten und von der Rohrleitung abschrauben. VORSICHT!
Ventil mit Flanschanschluss: Verletzungsgefahr, Sachschäden durch falsche Teile.

Falsches Zubehör und ungeeignete Ersatzteile können Verletzungen
→→Mutter der Spule lösen und Spule demontieren. und Schäden am Gerät und dessen Umgebung verursachen.
→→Gehäuse von der Anschlussplatte demontieren. ▶▶Nur Originalzubehör sowie Original-Ersatzteile der Firma Bürkert
verwenden.
deutsch
Mutter Spule und Armatur
können komplett unter der
Identnummer des Geräts
Spule bestellt werden.
(siehe Typschild)
Verschleißteilsatz auf Anfrage.
Armatur
Bild 6: Demontage
Bild 7: Ersatzteile
27
10. TRANSPORT, LAGERUNG, ENTSORGUNG

HINWEIS!
Transportschäden.
Unzureichend geschützte Produkte können durch den Transport
beschädigt werden.
▶▶Gerät vor Nässe und Schmutz geschützt in einer stoßfesten
Verpackung transportieren.
▶▶Eine Über- bzw. Unterschreitung der zulässigen Lagertemperatur
deutsch
vermeiden.
▶▶Elektrische Schnittstellen der Spule und die pneumatischen
Anschlüsse mit Schutzkappen vor Beschädigungen schützen.
Falsche Lagerung kann Schäden am Gerät verursachen.
▶▶Gerät trocken und staubfrei lagern.
▶▶Lagertemperatur -40 … +80 °C.
Umweltschäden durch von Medien kontaminierte Geräteteile.
▶▶Gerät und Verpackung umweltgerecht entsorgen.
▶▶Geltende Entsorgungsvorschriften und Umweltbestimmungen
einhalten.
28
Type 6014
Bedienungsanleitung

Sales Center
D-74653 Ingelfingen
Tel. + 49 (0) 7940 - 10 91 111
Fax + 49 (0) 7940 - 10 91 448

www.burkert.com
Type 6014
1. MANUEL D’UTILISATION 2. UTILISATION CONFORME

Manuel d’utilisation contiennent des informations importantes. L’utilisation non conforme de l’électrovanne, type 6014 peut
▶▶Lire attentivement ce manuel d’utilisation et respecter les consignes présenter des dangers pour les personnes, les installations
de sécurité. proches et l’environnement.
▶▶Le manuel d’utilisation doit être à disposition de chaque utilisateur. • L’appareil est conçu pour couper, doser, remplir et aérer les fluides
▶▶Nous déclinons toute responsabilité et n’accordons aucune garantie neutres gazeux et liquides.
légale pour le produit / l’appareil en cas de non-respect des instruc- • N’utilisez pas l’appareil à l’extérieur.
tions figurant dans ce manuel d’utilisation. • Lors de l’utilisation, il convient de respecter les données et conditions
d’utilisation et d’exploitation admissibles spécifiées dans les instruc-
1.1. Symbols tions de service et dans les documents contractuels. Celles-ci sont
▶▶Identifie une instruction visant à éviter un danger. décrites au chapitre « 5. Caractéristiques techniques ».
→→identifie une opération que vous effectuer. • L’appareil peut être utilisé uniquement en association avec les
Mise en garde contre les blessures : appareils et composants étrangers recommandés et homologués
DANGER ! par Bürkert.
Danger imminent ! Les blessures graves ou mortelles. • Les conditions pour l’utilisation sûre et parfaite sont un transport,
un stockage et une installation dans les règles ainsi qu’une parfaite
français
AVERTISSEMENT ! utilisation et maintenance.
Danger possible ! Les blessures graves ou mortelles. • Veillez à ce que l’utilisation de l’appareil soit toujours conforme.
ATTENTION !
Danger ! Les blessures légères ou moyennement graves. 2.1. Limitations
Met en garde contre des dommages matériels : Lors de l’exportation du produit /de l’appareil, veuillez respecter les
REMARQUE ! limitations éventuelles existantes.
29
2.2. Définition du terme 2.4. Homologation Ex

Le terme « appareil» ou « produit » utilisé dans ce manuel désigne toujours L’homologation Ex n’est valable que si vous utilisez les modules et
l’électrovanne type 6014. composants homologués par Bürkert tel que cela est décrit dans ces
instructions de service.
Les modules électroniques peuvent être utilisés uniquement avec les
2.3. Homologations types de vannes pneumatiques autorisés par Bürkert, sinon l’homologation
Le marquage d’homologation apposé sur les plaques signalétiques Ex devient caduque.
Bürkert se rapporte aux produits Bürkert. L’homologation Ex devient également caduque si vous apportez des modi-
fications non autorisées au système, aux modules ou aux composants.
e1
03 5791
Les appareils devant porter l’homologation ont été autorisés par l’office
fédéral sous le numéro
e1*72/245*2006/96*5791*00
et sont mis sur le marché avec cette homologation. Vous pouvez obtenir
français
un extrait de cette homologation à l’adresse mentionnée ci-dessous.

Bürkert Werke GmbH
D-74653 Ingelfingen
30
3. CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ Situations dangereuses d’ordre général.

FONDAMENTALES Pour prévenir les blessures, respectez ce qui suit :
Ces consignes de sécurité ne tiennent pas compte des hasards et des ▶▶L’installation ne peut être actionnée par inadvertance.
événements pouvant survenir lors du montage, de l’exploitation et de ▶▶Les travaux d’installation et de maintenance doivent être effectués
l’entretien. uniquement par des techniciens qualifiés et habilités disposant de
l’outillage approprié.
▶▶Après une interruption de l’alimentation électrique ou pneumatique,
un redémarrage défini ou contrôlé du processus doit être garanti.
Risque de blessures dû à la présence de haute pression dans ▶▶L’appareil doit être utilisé uniquement en parfait état et en respectant
l‘installation/l‘appareil. le manuel d’utilisation.
▶▶Avant de travailler sur l’installation ou l’appareil, il convient de couper ▶▶Les règles générales de la technique sont d’application pour planifier
la pression et de purger l’air des conduites/de les vider. l’utilisation et utiliser l’appareil.
Risque de choc électrique.
▶▶Avant de travailler sur l’installation ou l’appareil, couper la tension et Pour prévenir les dommages matériels, respectez ce qui suit :
empêcher toute remise sous tension par inadvertance. ▶▶Alimentez les raccords uniquement de fluides repris comme fluides
▶▶Respecter les réglementations en vigueur pour les appareils électriques de débit au chapitre « 5. Caractéristiques techniques ».
en matière de prévention des accidents et de sécurité. ▶▶Ne soumettez pas l’appareil à des contraintes mécaniques (par ex.
français
Risque de brûlures/d’incendie en fonctionnement continu dû à pour déposer des objets ou en l’utilisant comme marche).
des surfaces d’appareils brûlantes. ▶▶N’apportez pas de modifications à l’appareil. Ne laquez pas les pièces
▶▶Tenez les substances et les fluides facilement inflammables à de l’appareil et les vis.
l’écart de l’appareil et ne touchez pas ce dernier à mains nues.
31
Type 6014
3.1. Versions avec protection contre les explosions 4. DESCRIPTION DU PRODUIT
DANGER ! L’électrovanne à action directe type 6014 est disponible en deux versions.
Risque d’explosion. Le type 6014 est utilisé pour couper, doser, remplir et
Il y a risque d’explosion en cas d’utilisation non conforme dans des aérer les fluides neutres gazeux et liquides et en parti-
zones présentant des risques d’explosion. culier pour commander des actionneurs pneumatiques
simple effet ou le vide technique. La vanne modu-
▶▶Respectez également les indications reprises dans le certificat de
laire peut être montée seule ou dans un bloc sur des
conformité.
embases multiples.
▶▶Pour les versions avec homologation ATEX, il convient de respecter
également les indications des instructions ATEX.
Le type 6014P est utilisé comme vanne pilote spéciale
à monter directement sur des actionneurs pneumatiques
à commande extérieure. Elle est composée d’une élec-
trovanne du type 6014 et d’un corps spécial avec vis
creuse pouvant être raccordée directement sur l’air de
pilotage de l’actionneur. De série, la vanne est dotée
d’une commande manuelle.
français
32
5. CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES 5.4. Caractéristiques mécaniques

Dimensions voir fiche technique
5.1. Conformité
L‘électrovanne type 6014 est conforme aux directives CE sur la base de Matériaux
la déclaration de conformité CE.
Corps Type 6014 laiton, acier inoxydable 1.4305,
5.2. Normes polyamide (PA, bride)
Les normes appliquées justifiant la conformité aux directives CE peuvent Type 6014P laiton, polyamide (PA)
être consultées dans le certificat d’essai de modèle type CE et / ou la Vis creuse Type 6014P laiton nickelé
déclaration de Conformité CE. aluminium anodisé
5.3. Conditions d’exploitation Plaque de socle Type 6014P aluminium anodisé ou IXEF
AVERTISSEMENT ! Étanchéité Type 6014 FKM, EPDM sur demande
Type 6014P FKM
Risque de blessures dû à la sortie de fluide et à la décharge de
pression. Raccords de
▶▶Lorsqu‘il est utilisé à l‘extérieur, n‘exposez pas l‘appareil aux intem- conduite Type 6014 G1/8, G1/4, bride
français
péries sans aucune protection. Type 6014P G1/8, G1/4
▶▶Évitez les sources de chaleur susceptibles d’entraîner un dépasse- Vis creuse G1/8, G1/4
ment de la plage de température admissible.
Température ambiante 0 ... +55 °C
Degré de protection IP65 selon EN 60529 avec connecteur
33
5.5. Données fluidiques Température du fluide

FKM -10 ... +100 °C (bobine PA)
Fonction -10 ... +120 °C (bobine Epoxid)
2(A)
C Vanne à 3/2 voies, à action directe, Viscosité 21 mm²/s maxi
(NC) sortie A normalement fermée
1(P) 3(R)
2(B)
5.6. Plaque signalétique (exemple)
D Vanne à 3/2 voies, à action directe, Diamètre nominal
(NO) sortie B normalement ouverte
1(P) 3(R) Fonction Matériau du joint
2(A)
Vanne à 3/2 voies, à action directe, Type Matériau du corps
T
vanne universelle
1(P) 3(R)
6014 C 1,5 FKM MS
Made in Germany
Tab. 1: Fonction G1/8 PN 0-16 bar

Plage de pression voir plaque signalétique 24V 50 Hz 8W
CE
Fluides fluides neutres gazeux et liquides (par ex. air 00450000 W14UN
français
comprimé, gaz de ville, gaz naturel, eau, huile

hydraulique, essence, vide technique) qui N° ID
n’attaquent pas le corps et les matériaux du
joint Tension / fréquence / puissance
(voir Résistances chimique www.buerkert.fr) Raccord de conduite / pression nominale
Fig. 1 : Plaque signalétique (exemple)
34
Type 6014
5.7. Caractéristiques électriques 6. INSTALLATION
Raccordement DIN EN 175301-803 (DIN 43 650), forme A
pour connecteur type 2508
6.1. Consignes de sécurité
Tension de service 24 V DC ± 10 % DANGER !

- ondulation résiduelle maxi 10 %
24 V / 50 Hz Risque de blessures dû à la présence de haute pression dans
230 V / 50 Hz l‘installation/l‘appareil.
▶▶Avant de travailler sur l’installation ou l’appareil, il convient de couper
Tolérance de tension ± 10 % la pression et de purger l’air des conduites/de les vider.
Puissance nominale 8W Risque de choc électrique.
Version à impulsions 7W ▶▶Avant de travailler sur l’installation ou l’appareil, couper la tension et
empêcher toute remise sous tension par inadvertance.
Mode opératoire nominal 100 % fonctionnement continu ▶▶Respecter les réglementations en vigueur pour les appareils élec-
triques en matière de prévention des accidents et de sécurité.
en montage dos à dos 5 W fonctionnement continu sur demande
8 W fonctionnement intermittent 60 % Risque de blessures dû à un montage non conforme.
(30 min) ▶▶Le montage doit être effectué uniquement par un personnel qualifié
français
et habilité disposant de l’outillage approprié.
▶▶Empêchez tout actionnement involontaire de l’installation.
▶▶Garantissez un redémarrage contrôlé après le montage.
35
6.2. Installation fluide Corps avec raccord fileté :

DANGER !
→→Utilisez une bande PTFE comme matériau d’étanchéité.
REMARQUE !
Risque de blessures dû à la présence de haute pression dans
l‘installation/l‘appareil. Attention risque de rupture.
▶▶Avant de travailler sur l’installation ou l’appareil, il convient de couper ▶▶La bobine ne doit pas être utilisée comme levier.
la pression et de purger l’air des conduites/de les vider.
Position de montage : au choix, de préférence avec la bobine vers le →→Maintenez l’appareil sur le corps à l’aide
haut. d’un outil approprié (clé à fourche) et
Procédure à suivre : vissez-le dans la tuyauterie.
→→Avant le montage, nettoyer la tuyauterie et les raccordements à
bride afin d’enlever les éventuelles saletés.
→→Installez éventuellement un collecteur de boues comme protection
contre les dysfonctionnements Mailles :
français
0,2 ... 0,4 mm
Vanne avec raccord à bride :

Respectez le sens du débit de la vanne : →→Enlevez la plaque de fermeture.
de 1(P) → 2(A) (fonction C) ou →→Desserrez l’écrou de la bobine et démontez celle-ci.
de 1(P) → 2(B) (fonction D)
36
Écrou 6.3. Raccordement électrique avec connecteur

DANGER !
Bobine
▶▶Avant de travailler sur l’installation ou l’appareil, couper la tension et
Plaque de empêcher toute remise sous tension par inadvertance.
fermeture ▶▶Respecter les réglementations en vigueur pour les appareils élec-
Joint triques en matière de prévention des accidents et de sécurité.
Il y a risque de choc électrique en l’absence d’un contact du
Plaque de conducteur de protection entre la bobine et le corps.
raccordement ▶▶Raccordez toujours le conducteur de protection.
Fig. 2 : Vanne avec raccord à bride ▶▶Contrôlez le passage du courant entre la bobine et le corps.
AVERTISSEMENT !
Risque de blessures dû à la sortie de fluide.
▶▶Veillez au positionnement correct des joints fournis dans la vanne. Type 2508
français
▶▶Veillez à la planéité de la plaque de raccordement. Joint

1 Nm maxi
▶▶Veillez à une qualité de surface suffisante de la plaque de raccordement.
→→Placez le joint dans le corps.
→→Vissez le corps sur l’embase (couple de serrage : 1,5 Nm maxi).
→→Mettez la bobine en place et serrez l’écrou (couple de serrage : 5
Nm maxi). Fig. 3 : Raccordement électrique avec connecteur
37
Type 6014
Respectez la tension et le type de courant selon la plaque Polarité Spécifications Affectation de cosse
signalétique.
Vanne (siège P) sera (+) sur cosse 2,
- Switch ON +
→→Vérifier le bon positionnement du joint. ouverte (–) sur cosse 1
→→Monter et visser le connecteur (couple de serrage : 1 Nm maxi) + Switch OFF -
Vanne (siège P) sera (+) sur cosse 1,
fermée (–) sur cosse 2
Le connecteur peut être tournée 4 x 90°. Tab. 2: Commande version à impulsions
Utiliser uniquement un connecteur sans câblage électrique pour

Commande version à impulsions les versions à impulsions.
La polarité correcte est la condition pour le bon fonctionnement
de l’appareil : respectez l’identification sur le dessus de la bobine. 6.4. Rotation de la bobine
Durée d’impulsion au moins 50 ms. AVERTISSEMENT !

+ Raccord du conducteur de Il y a risque de choc électrique en l’absence d’un contact du
switch ONOFF
+ switc
h
protection conducteur de protection entre la bobine et le corps.
français
▶▶Contrôlez le contact du conducteur de protection après montage

Cosse 2 de la bobine.
Cosse 1 Surchauffe, risque d’incendie.
▶▶Le raccordement de la bobine sans vanne en amont entraîne la
surchauffe et la destruction de la bobine.
Fig. 4 : Version à impulsions
▶▶Raccorder la bobine uniquement avec la robinetterie montée.
38
Écrou 7. MAINTENANCE, DÉPANNAGE

5 Nm maxi DANGER !!
Risque de blessures dû à la présence de haute pression dans

l‘installation/l‘appareil.
la pression et de purger l’air des conduites/de les vider.
Joint torique ▶▶Respecter les réglementations en vigueur pour les appareils élec-
Robinetterie triques en matière de prévention des accidents et de sécurité.
Fig. 5 : Rotation de la bobine
Risque de brûlures/d’incendie en fonctionnement continu dû à
des surfaces d’appareils brûlantes.
▶▶Tenez les substances et les fluides facilement inflammables à
La bobine peut être tournée 4 x 90° (en montage dos à dos: 2 x 180°). l’écart de l’appareil et ne touchez pas ce dernier à mains nues.
français
→→Desserrez l’écrou. Risque de blessures dû à des travaux de maintenance non
→→Tournez la bobine. conformes.
▶▶La maintenance doit être effectué uniquement par un personnel
→→Serrez l’écrou à fond avec un outil approprié (clé à fourche) qualifié et habilité disposant de l’outillage approprié.
(5 Nm maxi).
▶▶Empêchez tout actionnement involontaire de l’installation.
▶▶Garantissez un redémarrage contrôlé après la maintenance..
39
7.1. Pannes 8. DÉMONTAGE

8.1. Consignes de sécurité
En présence de pannes, vérifiez
→→les raccords de conduite DANGER !
→→la pression de service Risque de blessures dû à la présence de haute pression dans
→→la tension d’alimentation et la commande de la vanne l‘installation/l‘appareil.
Si malgré tout la vanne ne fonctionne pas, veuillez contacter votre service la pression et de purger l’air des conduites/de les vider.
après-vente Bürkert. Risque de choc électrique.
▶▶Respecter les réglementations en vigueur pour les appareils élec-
triques en matière de prévention des accidents et de sécurité.
Risque de blessures dû à un démontage non conforme.
▶▶Le démontage doit être effectué uniquement par un personnel qualifié
français
et habilité disposant de l’outillage approprié.
8.2. Démontage
→→Coupez la pression et assurez l’échappement de l’air des conduites.
→→Coupez la tension.
→→Desserrez le connecteur.
40
Type 6014
Vanne avec raccord fileté : 9. PIÈCES DE RECHANGE
→→Maintenez l’appareil sur le corps à l’aide d’un outil approprié (clé à
fourche) et desserrez de la tuyauterie. ATTENTION !
Risque de blessures, de dommages matériels dus à de mau-

Vanne avec raccord à bride : vaises pièces.
→→Desserrez l’écrou de la bobine et démontez celle-ci. De mauvais accessoires ou des pièces de rechange inadaptées
→→Desserrez le corps de l’embase. peuvent provoquer des blessures et endommager l’appareil ou son
environnement.
▶▶Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ainsi que des pièces de
rechange d’origine de la société Bürkert.
Écrou La bobine et la robinetterie
peuvent être commandées
au complet sous le numéro
Bobine d’identification d’appareil.
(voir plaque signalétique)
français
Jeu de pièces d’usure sur
demande.
Robinet-
Fig. 6 : Démontage
terie
Fig. 7 : Pièce de rechange
41
10. EMBALLAGE, TRANSPORT, STOCKAGE,

ÉLIMINATION
REMARQUE !
Dommages dus au transport.
▶▶Les appareils insuffisamment protégés peuvent être endommagés
pendant le transport.
▶▶Transportez l’appareil à l’abri de l’humidité et des impuretés et dans
un emballage résistant aux chocs.
▶▶Évitez le dépassement vers le haut ou le bas de la température de
stockage admissible.
Un mauvais stockage peut endommager l’appareil.

▶▶Stockez l’appareil au sec et à l’abri des poussières.
▶▶Température de stockage : -40 ... 80 °C.
français
Dommages à l’environnement causés par des pièces d’appareil

contaminées par des fluides.
▶▶Respectez les prescriptions en matière d’élimination des déchets et
de protection de l’environnement en vigueur.
42
Safety valves SAFE
SAFE SAFE-P
(Series 900) (Series 920)
SAFE-TC SAFE-TCP/TCS
(Series 940) Contents (Series 960/950)
1.0 General information on operating 7.0 Care and maintenance.................................11
instructions ..................................................... 2 7.1 Setting instructions ................................................11
2.0 Notes on possible dangers........................... 2 7.1.1 Removing the cap ........................................11
2.1 Significance of symbols ..........................................2 7.1.2 Changing the set pressure
2.2 Explanatory notes on safety information .................2 “without” spring change .............................. 12
7.1.3 Changing the set pressure
3.0 Storage and transport .................................. 3 “with” spring change ................................... 12
4.0 Description..................................................... 3 7.2 Representation .................................................... 14
4.1 Scope of applications ..............................................3
8.0 Troubleshooting .......................................... 15
4.2 Operating principles ................................................3
9.0 Troubleshooting table ............................... 15
4.3 Diagram...................................................................4
4.3.1 Parts list ..........................................................5
10.0 Dismantling the valve or the top part ..... 17
4.4 Technical data - remarks .........................................6
11.0 Warranty / Guarantee ................................ 17
4.5 Marking .................................................................7
12.0 EC declaration of conformity ................... 18
5.0 Installation...................................................... 8
5.1 General notes on installation...................................8
6.0 Putting the valve into operation................. 10
Rev. 0040401000 2913 englisch

SAFE, SAFE-P, SAFE-TC, SAFE-TCP/TCS
1.0 General information on operating instructions

These operating instructions provide information on mounting and maintaining the fittings.
Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer in case of problems which cannot be
solved by reference to the operating instructions.
They are binding on the transport, storage, installation, start-up, operation, maintenance
and repair.
The notes and warnings must be observed and adhered to.
- Handling and all work must be carried out by expert personnel or all activities must be
supervised and checked.
It is the owner’s responsibility to define areas of responsibility and competence and to
monitor the personnel.
- In addition, current regional safety requirements must be applied and observed when
taking the fittings out of service as well as when maintaining and repairing them.
The manufacturer reserves the right to introduce technical modifications at any time.
These Operating Instructions comply with the requirements of EU Directives.
2.0 Notes on possible dangers
2.1 Significance of symbols
ATTENTION !
... Warning of general danger.
Non-compliance with operating instructions is dangerous!

Read the operating instructions before installation, operation,
maintenance or disassembly and adhere to them strictly.
2.2 Explanatory notes on safety information

In these Operating and Installation Instructions dangers, risks and items of safety
information are highlighted to attract special attention.
Information marked with the above symbol and “ATTENTION ! ” describe practices, a
failure to comply with which can result in serious injury or danger of death for users or third
parties or in material damage to the system or the environment. It is vital to comply with
these practices and to monitor compliance.
All other information not specifically emphasised such as transport, installation, operating
and maintenance instructions as well as technical data (in the operating instructions,
product documentation and on the device itself) must also be complied with to the fullest
extent in order to avoid faults which in turn can cause serious injury to persons or damage
to property.
Page 2 Rev. 0040401000 2913

3.0 Storage and transport

ATTENTION !
- Protect against external force (like impact, vibration, etc.).
See catalog sheet for weights.
- At -20°C to +65°C.
- The paint is a base coat to protect against corrosion during transportation and storage. Do
not damage paint protection.
4.0 Description
4.1 Scope of applications
Safety valves are used to protect pressurised systems.
ATTENTION !
- Refer to the data sheet for applications, limits on use and possibilities.
- Certain media require or preclude the use of special materials.
- The valves are designed for standard operating conditions. If conditions exceed
these requirements, e.g. aggressive or abrasive media, the operator should
state the higher requirements when ordering
- Valves made from grey cast iron are not authorised for use in systems subject
to TRD 110.
- When media in Fluid Group 1 are used, seal exteriors must be designed so that
they pose no danger to humans or the environment.
- Open safety valves (open bonnet / open cap) are not permissible for fluids,
dusty atmospheres, open air use or for any Group 1 fluids in accordance with
Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.
The information complies to the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.
It is the responsibility of the machine planner to ensure compliance.
The special markings on the valve must be taken into account.
Refer to the catalogue sheet to see which materials are used in standard versions.
Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer if you have any questions.
4.2 Operating principles
Safety valves are safety devices designed to prevent the pressure in any pressurised
system from exceeding the maximum permissible pressure by more than the permissible
tolerance of, usually +10%.
Rev. 0040401000 2913 Page 3

4.3 Diagram
Fig. 901 Fig. 921 Fig. 941 Fig. 961
fig. 1
Fig. 902 / 912 / 903 / 904 / 922 / 924 / 945 / 946
WEDI Bellow
Lever Disc series 950 Bellow series 940

Fig. 951/952; 961/962
fig. 2
Page 4 Rev. 0040401000 2913

4.3.1 Parts list
Pos. Description Pos. Description

1 Body 32 Hex. nut
2 Seat (not changeable) 33 Lift bolt
2 Screwed seat (SAFE-TC) 34 Screw
3 Stud 35 Lift fork
4 Spindle guide 36 Lifting lever
7 Gasket 37 Spring
8 Hex. nut 38 Screw
9 Lift limitation ring 39 Bolt
10 Spindle ring 40 Split pin
11 Bonnet, closed 41 Lever open
12 Disc unit 42 Bonnet, open
13 Lifting aid 43 Bellow
14 Spindle 44 Ring
15 Gasket 45 Ring
16 Spring type straight pin 47 Ball
17 Adjusting screw 48 Retaining ring
18 Ball 55 Bellow unit
19 Spindle cap 59 Protective rim
20 Parallel pin 60 Spacer
21 Lock nut 61 Coupling
22 Hex. head screw 62 Weight
23 Lead seal 63 Guide bush
25 Snap ring 65 Coupling
26 Spring plate 66 O-Ring
27 Gasket 67 Lift button
28 Cap, closed 68 Spring type straight pin
29 Cap open 70 Balanced piston
31 Ring
Refer to the data sheet for information about materials.
Rev. 0040401000 2913 Page 5

4.4 Technical data - remarks
for
- Principal dimensions
- Pressure-temperature-ratings, etc. refer to datasheet.
Series 900: DN 20/32 - DN 150/250, 1”x2“ - 6”x10”

EN-JL1040, EN-JS1049, 1.0619+N, 1.4408, SA 216 WCB
PN 16/16, PN 40/16, ANSI 150/150, ANSI 300/150
Approval acc. to:
Figure 901, 902, 911, - DIN EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV leaflet 100, AD2000-A2 and
912 TRD 421.
Application letter D/G and F
- ASME Code Section VIII-Division 1 (UV-Stamp)
Figure 903, 904, 990 -VdTÜV leaflet 100, -100/4, TRD 721, DIN EN 12828.
Application letter D/G/H and D (for Figure 904, 990)
Series 920: DN 15 - DN 100

EN-JL1040, 1.0619+N, 1.4408
PN 16, PN 40
Approval acc. to:
Figure 921-924 - DIN EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV leaflet 100, AD2000-A2 and
TRD 421.
Series 940: DN 15 - DN 25 (G 1/2“ - G 1“)

EN-JS1049, 1.4408
PN 40
Approval acc. to:
Figure 941-943 - DIN EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV leaflet 100, AD2000-A2 and
TRD 421.
Figure 945-946 -VdTÜV leaflet 100, -100/4, TRD 721, DIN EN 12828.
Application letter D/G/H and D
Series 950/960: DN 15 - DN 25 (G 1/2“ - G 1“)

EN-JS1049, 1.4581
PN 100
Approval acc. to:
Figure 951-953 - DIN EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV leaflet 100, AD2000-A2.
Figure 961-963 Application letter D/G and F
Accessories: Stainless steel bellow for back-pressure compensation;

elastomer bellow; soft sealing disc; lock bush; proximity switch;
heating jacket; test gag; rupture disc; support tongues;
removable lifting aid
Page 6 Rev. 0040401000 2913

4.5 Marking
Fig.-No./Type Type-test
Safety valve (TÜV) approved No. Kdr CE-marking
Manufacturer d0
Notified
body
Approval
Set pressure Adjusting services
Serial-No.
Soft sealed disc: Year of manufacture

E = EPDM -35°C up to 150°C
V = Viton (FPM) -25°C up to 180°C
N = Neoprene -30°C up to 125°C
NB-stamp
Safety valve (ASME) Size (inch) UV-stamp CE-marking
Manufacturer
Notified
body
Fig.-No./Type
Capacity
Fig. 3: Set pressure
Units:
Type test plates SCFM = air
lb/hr = steam
gal/min = water
Address of manufacturer: refer to item 11.0 Warranty / Guarantee
Set pressure
Mechanic No.
BA/BQ
Logo of external approvals
Fig. 4: Body (outlet)

Series with thread connections are marked on the body.
Rev. 0040401000 2913 Page 7

5.0 Installation
5.1 General notes on installation
The following points should be taken into account besides the general principles governing
installation work:
ATTENTION !
- Remove flange covers if present.
- The interior of valve and pipeline must be free from foreign particles
- Note installation position with reference to flow, see mark on valve.
- Steam line systems should be designed to prevent water accumulation
- Lay pipelines so that damaging transverse, bending and torsional forces are
avoided.
- Protect valves from dirt during construction work.
- Connection flanges must mate exactly.
- Connecting bolts for pipe flanges should be mounted preferably from the
counter flange side (hexagon nuts from the valve side).
At DN15-32: If valves should be mounted directly to valves, the upper flange
connecting bolts should be preferably executed with studs and hexagon nuts on
both sides.
- Valve mountings such as actuators, handwheels, bonnets must not be used to
See data sheet for weights.
- The blow-off line shall be sufficiently large to ensure that the internal back-
pressure while blowing-off does not exceed 10% (on reqest max. 15%) of the
set pressure. (Exception: safety valves with metallic bellow for back-pressure
compensation).
- If back pressure exceeds 10% (on request max. 15%) of set pressure, the
safety valve must be fitted with a metallic bellow seal for back pressure
compensation. The maximum back pressure must be specified by the
manufacturer. If necessary a leak detector should be provided to monitor the
back pressure compensating metallic bellow seal, but the leak detector must
not block ventilation.
- The ventilation hole in the bonnet of safety valves with a metallic bellow seal
must remain open as a matter of principle, although in the case of Group I fluids
(PED 97/23/EC) a non-isolatable pipeline must be connected to remove the
medium safely (without back pressure if the bellow seal is damaged. Ventilation
must not be blocked by any leak detector used.
- No pipe sections or screws must protrude into the spring bonnet through the
inspection connection. Blockage hazard!
- The drainage system shall be adequate to remove the condensate.
- Blockage of the drainage system by dirt or foreign bodies shall be avoided.
- Freezing, sticking or blocking of the safety valve must be avoided at all costs. If
necessary use a heating jacket and/or stainless steel bellow with or without a
rupture disk.
- Safety valves shall be installed with upright spindle, not series 950 when
marked, “Einbau nur horizontal (Installation only horizontal)”, then they must be
installed horizontally.
Page 8 Rev. 0040401000 2913
- Flange gaskets shall be fitted concentrically and not restrict the flow cross
section.
- Keep the shaft of the spindle-unit free from paint (open bonnet / cap).
- Blow-off lines shall be laid with gradient.
- The ratio pao/po shall be taken into account when dimensioning the system.
- Safety valves shall be equipped with support tongues to absorb high reaction
forces.
- Pressure losses in the line to the safety valve shall not exceed 3%.
- Ensure that adequate drip pans are used if setting media in Fluid Group
pursuant to PED 97/23/EC.
- Planners / construction companies or operators are responsible for positioning and
installing products.
- The valves are designed for application, not influenced from weather.
- For application outside or in adverse environments like corrosion-promoting conditions
(sea water, chemical vapours, etc.), special constructions or protective measures are
recommended.
- Refer to appropriate TRD 421, AD2000-A2, DIN, ASME Code rules for piping and
installation.
- Remove transport fasteners and protective caps for inlet and outlet immediately before
installation.
- Water shall be drained from the safety valve and blow-off line via the blow-off line
(drainage points always at the lowest point).
Support
Bellow
Drip pan
Drainage Drainage at lowest point
fig. 5
Rev. 0040401000 2913 Page 9

6.0 Putting the valve into operation

ATTENTION !
- Before putting the valve into operation, check material, pressure, temperature
and direction of flow.
- Regional safety instructions must be adhered to.
- Residues in piping and valves (dirt, weld beads, etc.) inevitably lead to leakage.
- Touching the valve when it is operating at high (> 50°C) or low (< 0°C) media
temperatures can cause injury.
Affix warning notice or protective insulation as appropriate!
- Before putting the valve into operation, check material, pressure, temperature,
direction of flow and also check that the data of the valve are correct for the
plant
(refer to type test plate)
- Remove any test gag from cap and close opening with stopper.
- Remove protective caps and lever lock before putting the valve into operation
- Freezing, sticking or blocking of the safety valve must be avoided at all costs. If
necessary use a heating jacket and/or stainless steel bellow without a rupture
disk. (Note point 5 “Installation”).
- When operating without a blow-off line, medium may spurt from the valve outlet.
Injury hazard!
- Blowing off may generate loud flow noise.
- Medium may be discharged from the ventilation or inspection hole in the spring
bonnet (safety valves with stainless steel bellows and heating valves)
Injury hazard!
- Hot vapour may be discharged if the spring bonnet is open.
Before putting a new plant into operation or restarting a plant after repairs or
modification, always make sure that:
- All works has been completed!
- The valve is in the correct position for its function.
- Safety devices have been attached.
Page 10 Rev. 0040401000 2913

7.0 Care and maintenance

Maintenance and maintenance-intervals have to be defined by the operator according to
the requirements.
ATTENTION !
- Too frequent lifting for test purposes can increase wear of the sealing surfaces!
(by ≥ 85% from the set pressure) to ensure that the valve works correctly.
- The safety valve must be lifted from time to time in line with current regulations
(The intervals at which this must be done depends on various factors so that no
generally applicable interval can be specified)
- Original parts only should be fitted as spares as a matter of policy.
- In safety valves with an open spring bonnet there is a danger of being crushed
between the spring windings during lifting and setting.
- Lift the safety valve stem briefly (releasing the lever suddenly) to eliminate slight leaks due
to particles between the seat and disc.
- If this does not eliminate the leak, the sealing surfaces of the seat and/or disc have been
damaged.
This can only be rectified at our works or by an authorised contractor.
- With valves corresponding to Figures 901, 921 and 941, the lever must always be
returned to the original position after lifting the safety valve.
- With Fig. 951 and 961 the lift button must be pressed down again after lifting.
- The manufacturer accepts guarantee liabilities only if tampering by third parties is
prevented.
7.1 Setting instructions
ATTENTION !
The following work must only be carried out by authorised specialist workshops
or at the operator’s own responsibility with monitoring by an independent agency
(e.g. TÜV).
7.1.1 Removing the cap
ATTENTION !
If there is back pressure or during setting/lifting, medium may be discharged from
the open bonnet, or into the adjusting screw area if the bonnet is closed.
ATTENTION !
When changing to the cap without lifting device (series 911, 923, 943), the
spindel cap (pos. 19) must be removed.
Open caps
- Remove slit pin (pos. 40), bolt (pos. 39).
- Extract lifting lever (pos. 41).
- Remove screw (pos. 38).
- Unscrew cap (pos. 29).
Closed caps
- Press lifting lever (pos. 36) towards bonnet (pos. 11) and against stop.
- Unscrew cap (pos. 28).
Rev. 0040401000 2913 Page 11

Closed cap series 960/950
- Remove spring type straight pin (pos. 68)
- Remove lift button (pos. 67) or lifting lever (pos. 36)
- Unscrew cap (pos. 28)
7.1.2 Changing the set pressure “without” spring change
ATTENTION !
- When changing the set pressure in a pressurised system bear in mind vapour
discharge if bonnet is open, in adjusting screw area if bonnet is closed.
- Note spring setting range.
- Check the spring range.
- Spindle (pos. 14) must be held fast by all alterations.
- Loosen lock nut (pos. 21).
- Turn adjusting screw (pos. 17) clockwise to increase and anticlockwise to reduce the set
pressure.
- Secure spring setting by tightening lock nut (pos. 21).
- Assemble lifting device.
7.1.3 Changing the set pressure “with” spring change
ATTENTION !
- Depressurise the system before dismantling or opening the safety valve.
- For removing the cap refer to 7.1.1.

- Extract parallel pin (pos. 20) and lift off the spindle cap (pos. 19).
- Slacken locknut (pos. 21) and relieve spring (pos. 37) by turning adjusting screw (pos. 17)
anticlockwise.
- Unscrew nuts (pos. 8) at flange connection and remove bonnet (pos. 11/42).
Fig. 940: loosen coupling (pos. 61)
Fig. 950/960: loosen bonnet (pos. 11)
ATTENTION !
- With higher set pressures, the two nuts (pos. 8) on the longer studs (pos. 3)
must be removed last and simultaneously!
- Remove top spring-plate (pos. 26) and spring (pos. 37).
- Extract spindle (pos. 14) with disc (pos. 12/12a), guide plate (pos. 4/4a) and bottom
spring-plate (pos. 26).
- Clean seat (pos. 2) and disc (pos. 12).
- Insert spindle (pos. 14) with disc (pos. 12), guide plate (pos. 4), spring-plate (pos. 26) and
different spring (pos. 37).
Page 12 Rev. 0040401000 2913

- when carrying out any adjustment work hold the spindle (pos. 14) firm to prevent it
twisting.
ATTENTION !
- Torques must be observed:
M10 16-25 Nm screw joint BR940 100 Nm
M12 30-40 Nm screwed seat BR940 180 Nm
M16 70-90 Nm bonnet BR950/960 60 Nm
M20 150-175 Nm
- Check spring marking in accordance with manufacturer’s data.

- Note spring setting range.
- Change seals.
- Fit bonnet (pos. 11/42) and reset the set pressure; make sure spring setting range is
appropriate.
- Secure spring setting by means of lock nut (pos. 21).
- Assemble lifting device.
- If necessary, replace both spring plates (pos. 26) and use longer studs (pos. 3) when
fitting a spring for a higher set pressure.
- Further information obtainable from the manufacturer.
Only for series 900

ATTENTION !
When changing the set pressure and fitting a new spring, note that safety valves
with set pressures between 0.2 and 1.5 bar have a greater lift.
Therefore:
Set pressure in the range Spring change only in
the range
0.2 to 1.5 bar 0.2 to 1.5 bar
> 1.5 bar > 1.5 bar
Only for series 950:

ATTENTION !
Safety valves for horizontal application, must also to be set in a
horizontal position (≤ 4.9 bar).
Rev. 0040401000 2913 Page 13

7.2 Representation
SAFE-TCS
SAFE-TCP
SAFE-TC
Bellow
Closed cap
Open cap
fig. 6
Page 14 Rev. 0040401000 2913

8.0 Troubleshooting
In the event of malfunction or faulty operating performance check that the installation and
adjustment work has been carried out and completed in accordance with these Operating
Instructions.
ATTENTION !
-
It is essential that the safety regulations are observed when identifying faults.
If malfunctions cannot be eliminate with the help of the following table

“9.0 troubleshooting table”, the supplier or manufacturer should be consulted.
9.0 Troubleshooting table

ATTENTION !
- read point 10.0 and 11.0 prior to dismantling and repair work!
- read point 6.0 before restarting the plant !

Safety valve does not Flange covers not removed. Remove flange covers.
respond,
Test gag still in place. Remove test gag.
no flow
Spring blocked. Remove pipe or screw projecting into
bonnet through inspection connection.
Set pressure too high. Reset (point 8.1) or replace the safety
valve.
Stainless steel bellow defective, Replace the safety valve.
no back-pressure compensation.
Back-pressure not taken into account. Reset (point 8.1) or, if necessary,
replace the safety valve.
The use of a stainless steel bellow to
compensate for back-pressure should
be considered.
Medium viscous or sticky Use bellow / heating jacket. Insert
rupture disc upstream if necessary.
The valves and piping must be Heating !

protected against freezing and
solidifying media.
Stem cannot be lifted. Pressure less than 85% of set It must be possible to lift the spindle at
pressure. over 85% of the set pressure.
Safety valve seat leaking. Working pressure higher than 90% of Working pressure must be less than
set pressure. 90% of the set pressure.
At low pressures: lever not in neutral Press lever into neutral position
position with closed cap. (towards bonnet).
Safety valve flattering. Refer to separate point “Flattering”.
Medium contaminated; foreign body Raise spindle briefly or, if necessary,
between seat and disc. replace safety valve.
Use of a soft sealing disc should be
considered.
Rev. 0040401000 2913 Page 15


Flange broken. Damage during transport. Replace safety valve.
Flange bolts not evenly tightened. Replace safety valve.
Transfer of forces such as bending or Install free of tension.
torsional forces.
Pressure surges. Safety valve not installed at highest Install safety valve at highest point.
point.
Valve drainage inadequate or not fitted. Install drainage system a required by
regulations.
Valve constantly blows off. Transport fastening not removed. Remove transport fastening (red screw
above cap, Figure 990).
Spring corroded by medium and Replace safety valve.
broken. In the case of vapour, select open cap
or bonnet if possible.
Injury owing to medium. Danger of injury from medium (e.g. Replace safety valve.
liquids) emerging from valve. Select design with closed bonnet and
cap.
Install a guard if necessary.
Injury from vapour discharge Install a guard if necessary
(open bonnet / cap)
Flattering. Pressure loss >3% in line to valve. Reduce resistance by chamfering or
radius in connection socket. Select
larger line if necessary.
Poor welding (root pass), gaskets at Change conditions.
inlet and outlet flanges too small or not
concentric.
Safety valve capacity too high. Install smaller safety valve.
Burner capacity too low. Install smaller safety valve.
Blow-off line too long or diameter too Use larger diameter or back-pressure
small. compensation by stainless steel
bellow.
Inlet and/or outlet socket too small. Install with dimensions larger than DN
of inlet and outlet lines.
Back-pressure higher than 10%. Install stainless steel bellow for
pressure compensation.
Capacity too low. Safety valves not applied unsuitable for Select and install suitable safety
plant conditions. valves.
Safety valve not applied in line with Adjust conditions.
current DIN, AD, TRD, etc. rules.
Page 16 Rev. 0040401000 2913

10.0 Dismantling the valve or the top part

ATTENTION !
The following points must be observed:
- Pressureless pipe system.
- Medium must be cool.
- Plant must be drained.
- Purge piping systems in case of caustic, inflammable, aggressive or toxic
media.
11.0 Warranty / Guarantee

The extent and period of warranty cover are specified in the "Standard Terms and
Conditions of Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG“ valid at the time of delivery or, by way of
departure, in the contract of sale itself.
We guarantee freedom of faults in compliance with state-of-the-art technology and the
confirmed application.
No warranty claims can be made for any damage caused as the result of incorrect handling
or disregard of operating and installation instructions, datasheets and relavant regulations.
This warranty also does not cover any damage which occurs during operation under
conditions deviating from those laid down by specifications or other agreements.
Justified complaints will be eliminated by repair carried out by us or by a specialist
appointed by us.
No claims will be accepted beyond the scope of this warranty. The right to replacement
delivery is excluded.
The warranty shall not cover maintenance work, installation of external parts, design
modifications or natural wear.
Any damage incurred during transport should not be reported to us but rather to the
competent cargo-handling depot, the railway company or carrier company immediately or
else claims for replacements from these companies will be invalidated.
The manufacturer will accept warranty liability only if there has been no third party
tampering.

ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG, D-33756 Schloß Holte-Stukenbrock
Telephone (+49 5207) 994-0 Telefax (+49 5207) 994-158 or 159
Internet: http://www.ari-armaturen.com E-mail: info.vertrieb@ari-armaturen.com
Rev. 0040401000 2913 Page 17

12.0 EC declaration of conformity

ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG,
Mergelheide 56-60, D-33756 Schloß Holte-Stukenbrock
EC declaration of conformity
as defined by
the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC
Herewith we declare,
that according to the above mentioned Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) the below listed
products comply and have been approved according to Module H1 and also EC type test according
to module B+D through Lloyd´s Register Quality Assurance GmbH (BS-No. 0525),
Am Sandtorkai 41, D-20457 Hamburg.
Certificate-No: 50003/2
Safety valves Safety valves

SAFE series 900 SAFE-P series 920
Type 901,911,912,902,903,904,990 Type 921,922,923,924
Applied standards : Applied standards :
DIN EN ISO 4126-1 DIN EN ISO 4126-1
AD 2000 Code of Practice A2 AD 2000 Code of Practice A2
- Cast iron with spher. graphite - Cast steel
- Cast steel TRD 421, TRD 721
TRD 421, TRD 721 VdTÜV 100, DIN 3840
VdTÜV 100, DIN 3840
ASME Code Section VIII-Div. 1
Safety valves Safety valves
SAFE-TC series 940 SAFE-TCP/TCS series 950/960
Type 941,942,943,945,946 Type 951,952,953,961,962,963
Applied standards : Applied standards :
DIN EN ISO 4126-1 DIN EN ISO 4126-1
- Cast iron with spher. graphite - Cast iron with spher. graphite
- Cast steel - Cast steel
TRD 421, TRD 721 VdTÜV 100, DIN 3840
VdTÜV 100, DIN 3840
Schloß Holte-Stukenbrock, 19.07.2013
...................................................
(Brechmann, Managing director)
Page 18 Rev. 0040401000 2913

Operation and Installation Manual
Ball Valves
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG

Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 341 · Oberbecksener Str. 78 · D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen · Telefon (05731) 7900-0 · Telefax (05731) 7900-199 · http://www.end.de
Impressum
© by END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG
All rights reserved. END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG claims copyright over this documentation.
This documentation may neither be altered, expanded , reproduced nor passed to third parties without the
written agreement of END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG . This restriction also applies to the corresponding
drawings.
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG has the right or change parts of the valves and armatures at any time without
prior or direct notice to the client. The contents of this publication are subject to change without notice.
This publication has been written with great care. However, END-Armaturen GmbH & Co.KG cannot be held
responsible, either for any errors occuring in this publication or for their consequences.
The products are specified by the statements in this documentation; no assurance or the properties is given.

Oberbecksener Straße 78
D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen
Telefon: 05731 / 7900 - 0
Telefax: 05731 / 7900 - 199
Internet: http://www.end.de
E-Mail: post@end.de
Edition: 01/2012
2 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Contents
Contents
1 Foreword 4
2 General advice 5
2.1 Validity 5
2.2 Inward monitoring 5
2.3 Complaints 5
2.4 Guarantee 5
2.5 Symbols and their signification 6
3 Safety advice 7
3.1 Personal advice 7
3.1.1 Safety advices for mounting 7
3.1.2 Safety advice for adjustment / starting 7
3.1.3 Safety advice for maintaining / repairing 8
3.2 Device safety 9
4 Name-plate 10
5 Ball valves 11
5.1 General 11
5.2 Corresponding use 11
5.3 Operation 11
5.4 Mounting / Disassembly 11
5.4.1 Mounting with threaded connection 12
5.4.2 Mounting with welded connection 13
5.4.2.1 Disassembly of the center part of the ball valve 13
5.4.2.2 Welding of the connection ends 14
5.4.2.3 Mounting of the center part 15
5.4.3 Mounting with flanged connection 16
5.5 Maintenance 17
5.5.1 Readjusting of the gland 18
5.5.2 Exchange of the ball and the sealing 19
5.5.2.1 3-part ball valve with threaded or welded connection 19
5.5.2.2 Multiple part ball valve with flanged connection 22
6 Declaration in conformity as defined by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC 26
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 3
Foreword
1 Foreword
Dear customer,
Dear assembler / user,
these operation and installation manuals are intended to give you the knowledge, which is
necessary for you to be able to carry out the mounting and adjustment of the ball valves rapaidly
and correctly.
Please read these instructions carefully and pay particular attention to the advice and warning
notes.
Only instructed and qualified mechanician should mount, adjust or maintain the ball valves.
If you have any questions in relation to the ball valves we shall be pleased to answer them.
The telephone number will be found on the inside cover of these operation and installation manual.
Yours
General advice
2 General advice
2.1 Validity
These mounting and installation manual is valid for the standard version of the ball valves.
2.2 Inward monitoring
Please check
• directly after delivery the ball valves for any transport damages and defi-
ciencies.
• with reference to the accompanying delivery note the number of parts.
Do not leave any parts in the package.
2.3 Complaints
Claims for replacement or goods which relate to transport damage can only be considered valid if
the delivery company is notified without delay.
In case of returns (because of transport damage / repairs), please make a damage protocol and
send the parts back to the manufacturer, if possible in the original packaging.
In case of a return, please mention the following:

• Name and address of the consignee
• Stock-/ ordering-/ article-number
• Description of the defect
2.4 Warranty
For our ball valves we give a guarantee period in accordance with the sales contract.
The end of the normal duration of life of the wearing parts represents no defect.
The warranty and guarantee rules of END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG are applicable.
Symbols and their signification
2.5 Symbols and their signification
Paragraphs which are identified with this symbol contain very important advices; this also includes
advices for averting health risks. Observe these paragraphs without fail!
Paragraphs which are identified with this symbol contain very important advices, this also includes
how to avoid damage to property. Observe these papgraphs without fail!
This symbol indicates paragraphs which contain comments / advices or tips.
This spanner identifies the description of actions which you should carry out.
Safety advice
3 Safety advice
Depending on the technical circumstances and the time under and at which the armatures and
valves are mounted, adjusted and commissioned, you must take into account particular safety
aspects in each case!
If, for example, a pneumatic actuator works a slide in an operational chemical plant, the potential
hazards of commissioning have another dimension from that when this is only being carried out for
test purposes an a „dry“ part of the plant in the assembly room!
Since we do not know the circumstances at the time of the mounting/adjustment/commissioning,

you may find advices on hazards in the following descriptions which are not relevant to you.
Please observe (only) the advices which applies to your situation!
3.1 Personal advice
3.1.1 Safety advices for mounting
We wish to point out expressly that the mounting, adjusting and at accessories the pneumatical
and eletrical installation of the armatures and valves must be carried out by trained specialist
personnel having mechanical, pneumatical and electrical knowledge!
Secure that the machine / plant come up to the Machinery Directice after the mounting and instal-
ling of the armatures and valves.
Switch off all the devices / machines / plant affected by mounting or repair.
If appropriate, isolate the devices / machines / plant from the mains.
Check (for example in chemical plants) whether the switching off of devices / machines / plant
will cause potential danger.
If appropriate, in the event of a fault in the armature / valve (in a plant which is in operation)
inform the shift forman / safety engineer or the works manager without delay about the fault, in
order, for example, to avoid an outflow / overflow of chemicals or the discharge of gases in good
time by means of suitable measures!
Before mounting or repairing, remove the pressure from pneumatic / hydraulic devices / machi-
nes / plant.
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting up of the devices /
machines / plant.
Observe the respective relevant professional safety and accident prevention regulations when
carrying out the mounting / repair work.
Check the correct functioning of the safety equipment (for example the emergency push off but-
tons/ safety valves, etc)!
3.1.2 Safety advice for adjustment / starting
As a result of the starting (pneumactic, electric or by hand) of the armatures and valves the flow
of gases, steam, liquids, etc. may be enabled or interrupted! Satisfy yourself that, as a result of
the starting or the test adjustment no potential hazards will be produced for the personnel or the
environment!
Safety advice
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting up or shutting down
of the device / machine / plant.!
By ending the adjustment check the correct function and should the occasion arise the position
of the slide / valve / flap.
Check the function of the limit switches (option)!
Check, whether the slide / valve / flap will be closed totally, if the control signals the appropriate
limit stop!
Through suitable measures, prevent links being trapped by moving actuating elements!
Check the right function of all safety devices (for example emergency push off buttons / safety
valves)!
Carry out the starting and the adjustments only in accordance with the instructions discribed in
this documentation!
Adjusting switch on armatures and valves with options (e.g. actuators, solenoid valves, limit
switches) there is the risk that live parts (230 V AC~) can be touched!
Therefore the adjustments must be carried out only by the electrican or a person having adequate
training, who is aware of the potntial hazard!
3.1.3 Safety advice for maintaining / repairing
Do not carry out any maintenances / repairs if the armature / valve will be under pressure.
Before disassembling or a armature or valve some essential points should be clarified!

• Will the armature/valve to be disassembled be replaced by another immediately?
• If appropriate, does the production process of the plant needed to be stopped?
• Is it necessary to inform specific personnel about the disassmbly?
If necessary, inform the shift foreman/ safety engineer or the manager about the maintenance
or repair without delay in order, for example, to avoid an outflow/ overflow of chemicals or a
discharge of gases in good time by means of suitable measures!
Observe that some valves / armatures are able to enclose the pressured medium e.g. the ball
in the ball valve. You have to relieve the pressure in the pipes in which the armture/valve is
mounted.
Switch off pilot pressure and the power supply and relieve the pressure in the pipes.
If necessary set up warning signs in order to prevent

• the inadvertent starting up of the devices/machines/plants in which the armature/
valve is mounted
• the switching on of pilot medium supply, pilot power supply and/or the power supply
of actuators and accessories.
In case of defect in the armature/valve make contact to the supplier. The telephone number will
be found on the back cover of these mounting and installation manual.
Safety Advice
If you ascertain a damage of the armature/valve, isolate the device from the mains. Please
observe the safefy advices.
Do not mount, start or adjust the armature/valve if itself, the pipes or a mounted actuator will be
damaged.
After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the armature/valve and the tightness
of the pipe connections.
Also check the function of the accessories e.g. actuators, limit switches, etc.
3.2 Device safety
The armatures/valves
• are quality products which are produced in accordance to the recognized industrial
regulations.
• left the manufacturer`s work in a perfect safety condition.
In order to maintain this condition, as installer / user you must carry out your task in accordance
with the description in these instructions, technically correctly and with the greatest possible
precision .
We assume, as a trained specialist you are having mechanical and electrical knowledge!
Satisfy yourself that the armatures/vales will only be used within their admissible limiting value
(see the technical data) .
The armatures/valves must be used only for a purpose corresponding to their construction!
The armatures/valves must be used within the values specified in the technical data!
The operating of the armature/valve outside the nominal temperature range could destroy the
sealings and the bearings.
The operating of the armatures/valves outside the nominal pressure range could destroy the inner
parts and the body.
Never remove a cap or a other component part if the armature/valve will be under pressure.
Do not mount, start or adjust the armature/valve if itself, the pipes or a mounted actuator will be
damaged.
After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the armature/valve and the tightness
of the pipe connections.
Name-plate
4 Name-plate
In some cases the armatures/valves will be provided with a nameplate, which permitts a definite identification
of the armatures/valves and shows the most important technical data to you. The name-plate should not be
displaced or changed

+49 (0)5731 - 7901-0 www.end.de
Art. No.:฀ AE311028
Serial:฀ 220885
฀ Pressure range (PS):฀ 16 bar
Pilot pressure:฀ - bar
Temperature range (TS): -20°C ... +180°C
Size (DN):฀฀ 50 / G2"
Testing pressure (PT):฀ 60 bar
Fluidgroup:฀ 1
Date of manufacturing: 14.02.2002
0062
Fig. 4.1 - Name-plate
Art.No. article number of the valve / armature

Serial order- or production- number
Pressure range (PS) max. admisable working pressure of the valve / armature [bar]
Pilot pressure recommend pilot pressure for correct function of the valve / armature [bar]
(only at pneumatic actuated valves / armatures)
Size (DN) connecting size of the valve / armature
Testing pressure (PT) testing pressure of the body of the valve / armature
Fluidgroup allowed fluidgroup of the valve / armature
Date of manufacturing month and year of manufacturing of the valve / armature
10 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball Valves
5 Ball valves
5.1 General
Before you are mount, adjust, start, operate or disassemble a ball valve you have to read the
Safety advices
If you have not read the safety advices until now, read this important advices now and turn back
to this point.
5.2 Corresponding use
Ball valves will be used to cut off medium flow.

It should only be used clean liquids and gases, on which the material of the ball valve will be resi-
stant. Pollution or using outside the nominal pressure range and/or the nominal temperature range
should causes damages on the armature especially on the seals.
In some cases you have to install an equalization boring into the ball, that there will be no overpres-
sure between the body and the ball by changing temperatures.
5.3 Operation
The ball valve will be open or close totally by using a handle or an pneumatic or electric actuator
(option).
During the operation of the ball valve take care that there won`t be insert any objects or limbs
into the armature. Heavy injuries or damages will be the consequence. If it is necessary you have
to install a protective device.
5.4 Mounting / Disassembly
The mechanical installation will be same at all variants of the ball valve. There will be differences
in the type of connection.
Observe the flow direction: the handle should point at the flow direction.
Remove the package and the safety devices (e.g. caps or plugs). Take care that there will be no
parts of the package or other parts in the armature.
Clean up the pipes in which the ball valve will be mounted. Pollution could affect the safety in
operation and the duration of life of the armature. If necessary you have to install a Y- strainer in
front of the ball valve.
Avoid stress in case of non align pipes.
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 11
Ball valves
5.4.1 Mounting with threaded connection
Before lay on sealing compounds, check the hardly screwing by the pipes into the valve body.
Lay on the correct sealing compounds on the pipes end. By using PTFE-ribbon or hemp sealings
observe the screw direction. Don`t use sealing compounds which are not prescribed for your
employment.
Screw the pipes into the connection ends of the valve. Don`t use the handle as a lever.
Strike up the pipes with pressure after that time the manufacturer of the sealing compounds pre-
tends to harden it.
Check the tightness of all connections.
sealing compound
harden
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.1 - ball valves, mounting threaded connection (Fig.: Art. TB111025)
12 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
5.4.2 Mounting with welded connection
Before welding you have to disassemble the center part of the ball valve to prevent the sealings
from damages.
5.4.2.1 Disassembly of the center part of the ball valve
Clamp the valve between a vice carfully. By using guard plates you can prevent the damage of the
ends of the body.
Loosen the nuts crossvice and remove the screws out of the body.
Take the center part of the ball valve. Observe, that you didn´t drop the sealings or the ball. Put the
parts aside carefully. To attach the center parts and the connection ends at a later mounting you
can sign the parts.
G y
o. K an
& C erm .de
bH n · G end
Gm use st@
ren ha · po
atu Oeyn d.de
D -Arm Bad w.en
EN 2547 ://ww
3 ttp
h
N
PE
F·O OS
E
AU
·CL
ZU
Fig. 5.2 - ball valves, mounting welded connection, disassembly of the center part (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 13
Ball Valves
5.4.2.2 Welding of the connection ends
The center part of the ball valve must be substitute by a distance part as long as the center part
during the welding.
By welding the valve body with the pipes observe appropriate demands and guide lines.
The safety demands by welding are depending on the place and the position of the point of weld.
Welding the parts at a serviceable device/machine/plant the potential of danger is as higher as
welding the parts in a welding room.
If appropriate, inform the shift foreman/safety engineer or the works manager and the fire brigade
of your factory.
By welding observe your own national guide lines about safety and pevention of accidents.
Fig. 5.3 -ball valves,mouting welded connections, welding of the connection ends(Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
14 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
5.4.2.3 Mounting of the center part
Before mounting the center part let the connection ends cool down.
Disassemble the distance part.
Insert the center part between the connection ends. Attach the center parts to the right connec-
tion ends.
Observe the correct seat of the sealings and that there will be no pollution in the seats of the seal-
ings and in the ball.
Insert the screws into the borings of the connection ends.Tighten the nuts equally and crosswise.
Observe the max. torque of the screws.
Check the function of the ball valve.
G y
o. K man
& C er d.de
bH n · G en
Gm se st@
en hau po
tur yn e ·
r ma d Oe nd.d
D-A Ba w.e
EN 2547 ://ww
3 ttp
h cool down !
N
PE
F·O OS
E
AU
·CL
ZU
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.4 - ball valves, mounting welded connections, mounting of the center part of the ball valve (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 15
Ball valves
5.4.3 Mounting with flanged connection
In the following discription we assume that you have mounted the flanges at the end of the pipes
and the ball valve (welded flanges) and they are cooled down.
Insert the ball valve and the flange sealings between the flanges.
Align the flange borings und put fit screws through the borings.
Put fit nuts on the screws and tighten them equally and crossvice. Observe the required and the
max. torque of the ball valve, the flanges, the flanges seals and the screws.
G y
o. K an
& C erm .de
bH n · G end
Gm use st@
ren ha · po
D
atu Oeyn d.de
-Arm Bad w.en
EN 2547 ://ww
cool down !
3 ttp
h
N
F·OPE
AU SE
·CLO
ZU
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.5 - ball valves, mounting flanged connection (Fig.: Art. ZP311007)
16 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
5.5 Maintenance
Before you maintain or shut down the valves you have to read the
Safety advice
to this point.
On normal accounts the ball valve is maintenance free.In periodical turns the controlling of the
function and the tightness should happen:
• check the tighness of the gland

• check the tightness of the ball seats
Depending on the version of the ball valve for decreasing tightness at the stem the gland could be
readjust. See also chapter 5.5.1. „Readjusting of the gland“.
Ball valves in a multiple part design could be disassemble to exchange the seals and/or the ball.
See also chapter: 5.5.2. „Exchange of the ball and the sealings“.
In case of a defect of the valve make a contact to the supplier. The telephone number will be
found on the back or these operation and installation manual.
If you ascertain a demage of the valve switch off the device/ machine/ plant! However before
doing this, it is essential to refer to the
Safety advice.
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 17
Ball valves
5.5.1 Readjusting of the gland
For decreasing tightness at the stem the gland could be readjust.
By keeping the nominal pressure you have to tighten up the screw of the gland until the tightness
of the the gland will be restored
After the readjusting the ball of the valve must be able to move slightly.
At ball valves with spring forced sealings or o-ring sealings at the stem the readjustment isn`t
necessary.
o.k. tightness
Fig. 5.6 - ball valves, readjusting of the gland (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
18 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
5.5.2 Exchange of the ball and the sealing
For decreasing tightness the ball and/or the sealings of the ball valve could be exchange. The
availability of the spare parts kit you can see in the data sheet of your ball valve.
Corresponding to the wear of the parts exchange the sealings and the ball. By the replacement of
the ball you should also exchange the sealing.
In the following description we assume, that your ball valve will be actuated by hand. If your ball
valve will be actuated be a pneumatic or electric actuator, please also observe the opration and
installation manual of the actuator.
Cut off the media flow and relieve the media pressure.
Keep ready some fit tanks to catch up leaking liquids.
If it`s necessary remove the additional limt switches and gear boxes.
5.5.2.1 3-part ball valve with threaded or welded connection
At 3-part ball valve it will do when you remove the center part of the ball valve. Loosen the nuts
crosswise and remove the screws out of the body.
Take the center part of the ball valve. Observe, that you didn´t drop the sealings or the ball. Put the
parts aside carefully.
. KG ny
Co rma e
H & · Ge end.d
mb en
n G aus post@
a ture eynh .de ·
rm d O nd
D-A Ba w.e
EN 2547 ://ww
3 ttp
h
N
PE
F·O SE
AU
·CLO
ZU
Fig. 5.7 - ball valves, replacement of the sealing kit: removement of th center part (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 19
Ball valves
Observe that ball valves could enclose medium inside the ball.
Take the parts aside carefully. Place a mark on the body and the connection ends that you will be
able to join the correct parts by a subsequent mounting.
Remove the ball seals and the ball out of the body.
Perhaps you have to turn the handle to remove the ball out of the body. Do not insert any limbs into
the ball valve. Heavy injuries will be the consequences.
Loosen the nut of the handle and take the handle and all discs und washers aside.
Depending on the version of the ball valve loosen the nut on the stem or loosen the gland nut
Remove the stem and all other sealings, washers and discs out of the body.
Clean all parts and check them for damages.
Throw away the old pieces by observing the appropriate demands and guide lines.
& er .de
. K ny
bH n · G end
Co ma
@
G
n G us st
re ha o
tu yn · p
e
ma Oe .de
Ar d d
D- Ba .en
m
EN 547 www
32 tp:/
ht
SE
LO
·C
N
ZU
PE
F·O
AU
Fig. 5.8 - ball valves, replacement of the sealing kit: removement of the inner parts (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
20 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
Make the stem with the new sealings and discs complete.
Insert the stem from the inside into the body.
Depending on the version of the ball valve mount the other sealings, discs and spring washers at
the stem, and screw the nut or the gland nut onto the stem.
Insert the ball into the body. The dihedral of the stem must engage in the grove of the ball. If need
be you have to turn the stem.
Put the handle onto the stem. Observe the correct function of the limit switches and take care that
the handle and the boring of the ball will align.
Fix the nut of the handle onto the stem and tighten it.
Put the ball sealings and the ball into their seats at the center part of the ball valve. Observe, that
you didn´t drop the sealings or the ball.
Before mounting the center part clean the connection ends at the end of the pipes.
Move the center part of the body between the connection ends. If need be arange the center parts
to the correct connection ends.
Insert the screws into the borings of the connection ends.Tighten the nuts equally and crosswise.
Observe the max. torque of the screws.
For mounting read the advices at chapter
5.4.2.3. „Mounting of the center part“.
Check the tightness of all the connections.
If need be adjust the gland of the stem. Please read the advices at chapter
5.5.1. „Readjusting of the gland“.
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 21
Ball valves
5.5.2.2 Multiple part ball valve with flanged connection
Remove the ball valve out of the pipes. Loosen the flange screws and pull the screws out of the
flange.
Take the ball valve from the pipes.
Dismantle the ball balve. Depending on the version of the ball valve:
• you have to screw out the screw of the body, or
• you have to screw the screw joint out of the body.
Observe, that you didn´t drop the sealings or the ball.
Observe that ball valves could enclose medium inside the ball.
Put the parts aside carefully. Place marks on the parts that you will be able to join the correct parts
by a subsequent mounting of the ball valve.
Remove the ball sealing and the ball out of the body.
. KG any
& Co Germ d.de
bH ·
Gm sen st@en
uren nhau · po
mat d Oey d.de
D-Ar en
EN 547 Bawww.
32 tp://
ht
N
PE
F·O E
AU OS
·CL
ZU
Fig. 5.9 - Ball valves, replacement of the sealing kit: removement of the ball valve (Fig.: Art. ZP311007)
22 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
Perhaps you have to turn the handle to remove the ball out of the body. Do not insert any limbs into
the ball valve. Heavy injuries will be the consequences..
Remove the second ball sealing.
Loosen the nut of the handle and take the handle and all discs und washers aside.
Depending on the version of the ball valve loosen the nut on the stem or loosen the gland nut
Remove the stem and all other sealings, washers and discs out of the body.
Clean all parts and check them for damages.
& erm .de
. K ny
bH n · G nd
Co a
Gm e e
n us t@
G
re ha pos
atu eyn e ·
rm d O d.d
D-A Ba .en
EN 547 ww
32 p://w
htt
SE
LO
·C
EN
ZU
OP
F·
AU
Fig. 5.10 - ball valves, replacement of the sealing kit: removement of the inner parts (Fig.: Art. ZP311007)
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 23
Ball valves
Make the stem with the new sealings and discs complete.
Insert the stem from the inside into the body.
Depending on the version of the ball valve mount the other sealings, discs and spring washers at
the stem, and screw the nut or the gland nut onto the stem.
Place the first ball seal into the seat in the body.
Insert the ball into the body. The dihedral of the stem must engage in the grove of the ball. If need
be you have to turn the stem.
Place the second ball seal into the seat in the body.
Assemble the ball valve. Depending on the version of the ball valve:
• you have to join the parts of the body together and to screw them up with the fit
screws; or
• you have to screw up the screw joint with the body.
If need be attach the different parts of the boby.
Put the handle onto the stem. Observe the correct function of the limit switches and take care that
the handle and the boring of the ball will align.
Fix the nut of the handle onto the stem and tighten it.
Before mounting the center part clean the connection ends at the end of the pipes.
Insert the ball valve with new flange sealings between the flanges.
Align the flange borings und put fit screws through the borings.
Put fit nuts on the screws and tighten them equally and crossvice. Observe the max. torque of the
screws.
For mounting read the advices at chapter
5.4.3 „Mounting with flanged connection“.
Check the tightness of all the connections.
If need be adjust the gland of the stem. Please read the advices at chapter
5.5.1. „Readjusting of the gland“.
24 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Notes
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 25
6 Declaration in conformity as defined by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC
(1)
Declaration in conformity
(2)
fi by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC
as defined
(3) This declaration apply to the article groups with the nominal sizes:
Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size
Butterfly valves
fl NG DN32 ... DN100 VL 1¼" ...2", 3" ZU 1¼" ... 3"
HA DN50 ... DN300 Ball valves VN 1¼" ... 2" Non-return valves
TA DN40 ... DN300 AG 1¼" ... 2" VO DN32 ... DN200 AR 1¼" ... 2"
WA DN50 ... DN300 BK DN32 ... DN100 VS DN32 ... DN200 CK3003 DN65 ... DN200
WM DN50 ... DN300 EK 1¼" ... 3" VT DN32 ... DN100 CK5003 DN32 ... DN200
Gate valves GD 1¼" ... 2" VU 4" CK5100 DN65 ... DN250
AB 1¼" ... 2" IK 1¼" ... 2" ZA 1¼" ... 4" CK5200 DN65 ... DN250
AE 1¼" ... 3" IL 1¼" ... 4" ZA DN32 ... DN100 CW5400 DN65 ... DN250
AE DN32 ... DN80 IW 1¼" ... 2" ZB 1¼" ... 2" EB 1¼" ... 3"
CA5014 DN100 ... DN300 KA 1¼" ... 3" ZB DN32 ... DN50 EB DN32 ... DN80
CA5015 DN65 ... DN300 PD 1¼" ... 2" ZD 1¼" ... 4" RG1300 DN32 ... DN100
CA5214 DN40 ... DN200 PE 1¼“ ... 4“ ZD DN32 ... DN100 RG33xx DN32 ... DN200
CD5010 DN32 ... DN200 TB 1¼" ... 4“ ZE 1¼" ... 4" RK DN32 ... DN400
CV3010 DN32 ... DN150 TF DN32 ... DN200 ZE DN32 ... DN100 TD 4"
CV5010 DN32 ... DN200 TH 1¼" ZF 1¼" ... 4" Strainer
CV5020 DN32 ... DN200 VD 1¼" ... 4" ZG 1¼" ... 2" AS 1¼” ... 3”
Pressure reducer VD DN32 ... DN100 ZH 1¼" ... 2" AS DN32 ... DN200
SD ⅜" ... 2"
⅜ VH 1¼" ... 2" ZK DN32 ... DN100 EA 1¼" ... 3"
SD DN32 ... DN80 VH3100 1¼" ... 2" ZL 1¼" ... 3" EA DN32 ... DN80
Pressure relief valves VK DN32 ... DN200 ZM 1¼" ... 2"
NG 1¼" ... 1½" VK/PN40 DN32 ... DN200 ZP DN32 ... DN200
and all variations of these articles
(4) of the company END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG

Germany
(5) Herewith we declare that the above-mentioned articles in the conditions of our delivery are in conformity with the regula-
tions of the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EG.
(6) Applied conformity assessment procedure: Modul H.
(7) Notied body for conformity assessment PED an Quality-Management-System:
Bureau Veritas S.A.

Paris / Frankreich
Kennzeichen 0062
(8)  numbers:
Certicate Quality Management System: INT110198DE
 of System approval PED:
Certicate 2011/70.10.1777/P
(9) Applied harmonized standards, in particular:
DIN EN 12516:2005 Industriearmaturen - Gehäusefestigkeit
(10) On behalf bH & Co. KG Bad Oeynhausen, 17. january 2012

END-Armaturen Gm78
Oberbecksener Str. usen · Germany
32547 Bad Oey nha
- 7900-0
Telefon: +49 (0)5731 - 7900-199
Telefax: +49 (0)5731· pos t@end.de
http://www.end .de
Friedhelm König Michael End
Technical Manager Quality Manager
Declaration without signature or company stamp shall not be valid. The declaration may be circulated only without alternation.
Extracts or alternations are subject to approval by END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG.

Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 341 · Oberbecksener Str. 78 · D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen (Germany) · Telefon +49 - 5731 - 7900-0 · Telefax +49 - 5731 - 7900-199 · http://www.end.de
(1)
(2)
fi by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC
as defined
Gate valves BO-BO ½" ... 2" VK DN15 ... DN25 BH ⅜" ... 3"⅜
AA ½" ... 2" BT ½" ... 1" VL ¼" ... 1" CK3003 DN15 ... DN50
AB ¼" ... 1" BV ¼“ ... ¾“ VN ¼" ... 1" CK5000 DN40 ... DN250
AC ⅛" ... 2"⅛ CB ¼" ... 2½" VO DN25 CK5003 DN40 ... DN25
AD ½" ... 2" EK ¼" ... 1" VS DN15 ... DN25 CK5100 DN40 ... DN50
AE ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25 GD ¼" ... 1" VT DN15 ... DN25 CK5200 DN40 ... DN50
AV ¼" ... 1" HF ¼" ... 1" ZA ¼" ... 1", DN10 ... DN25 CW5400 DN40 ... DN50
BE ⅜" ... 3"⅜ HO DN10 ... DN15 ZB ¼" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25 DR DN50 ... DN300
BF ¼" ... 3" IB ¼" ... 2" ZD ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25 EB ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25
BS ½" ... 1¼" IK ¼" ... 1" ZE ¼" ... 1", DN10 ... DN25 MR ¼" ... 3"
CA5014 DN40 ... DN80 IL ¼" ... 1" ZF ¼" ... 1" RG DN15 ... DN25
CA5015 DN40 ... DN50 IW ¼" ... 1" ZG ¼" ... 1" TD ⅜" ... 3"⅜
CA5214 DN40 ... DN32 KA ½" ... 1" ZH ½" ... 1" TG ½" ... 2"
CD5010 DN15 ... DN25 KFE ⅜" ... ¾"⅜ ZK DN15 ... DN25 TR ⅜“ ... 4"⅜
CV3010 DN15 ... DN25 NK ⅜“ ... 4",⅜DN10 ... DN100 ZL ¼" ... 1" VB ¼“ ... 2“
CV5010 DN15 ... DN25 PB ⅛ ... 2" ⅛ ZM ¼" ... 1" ZR DN15 ... DN200
CV5020 DN15 ... DN25 PD ½" ... 1" ZP DN15 ... DN25 Sight glasses
IC ¼" ... 4" PE ¼“ ... 1“ ZU ¼" ... 1" SG ¼" ... 2", DN15 ... DN150
MV ½" SK ½" ... 3", DN10 ... DN80 Pipe fittingsfi Strainer
TC ¼" ... 4" TB ¼" ... 1" FG ⅛" ... 4"⅛ AS ¼“ ... 1“
Pressure reducer TE ½" ... 2" FS DN15 ... DN150 AS DN15 ... DN25
ID ⅜" ... ¾"⅜ TF DN20 ... DN25 GE Ø6 ... Ø20 BG ⅜" ... 2"⅜
MB ½" ... 2" TH ½" ... 1" GR Ø8 ... Ø28 CU DN15 ... DN250
MC ½" ... 2" TT ⅜" ... 1"⅜ GV Ø6 ... Ø20 EA ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25
SD ⅜“ ... 1“,⅜DN20 ... DN25 TV ⅜" ... 1"⅜ TE Ø6 ... Ø25 IG ¼" ... 4"
Pressure relief valves VD ¼" ... 1" TV Ø6 ... Ø20 KU DN15 ... DN100
NG ⅜" ... 1",⅜DN15 ... DN25 VD DN10 ... DN25 WE Ø6 ... Ø38 STE DN25 ... DN150
Ball valves VE ¼" ... 1" WV Ø6 ... Ø20 Water-shock damper
AG ¼" ... 1" VF ⅛“ ... ½"⅛ Non-return valves TS ½"
BC ⅛“ ... ¾"⅛ VH ⅛“ ... 1"⅛ AH ¼" ... 1½"
BK DN15 ... DN25 VH3100 ½" ... 1" AR ½" ... 1"

Germany
tions of Article 3 Part 3 of the directive 97/23/EG. These products bear no CE mark, but are in line to the good engineering
practice designed and manufactured.

en GmbH & Co. KG
END-Armatur 78
Oberbecksener Str. usen · Germany
(7) On behalf 32547 Bad Oeynha - 7900-0 Bad Oeynhausen, 17. january 2012
Tele fon: +49 (0)5 731
- 7900-199
Telefax: +49 (0)5731· pos t@e nd.d e
http://www.end.de


watergates
knife-gate-valves - Stoffschieber
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG Watergates GmbH & Co. KG

Oberbecksener Str.78 Oberbecksener Str.70
D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen
Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 341 Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 321
Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0 Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0
Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199 Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199
Internet http://www.end.de Internet http://www.watergates.de
E-Mail post@end.de E-Mail post@watergates.de
Type 5281 Sicherheit Safety Sécurité
Manual de instrucciones
2/2-Wege-Magnetventil Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung Proper Usage Utilisatio
Operating instructions
für neutrale Medien
Bitte beachten Sie die Hinweise dieser Betriebsanleitung To ensure the proper function of the device and promote Af
2/2-way solenoid valve sowie die Einsatzbedingungen und zulässigen Daten ge- long service lift, you must comply with the information in pe
for neutral media mäß Datenblatt Typ 5281, damit das Gerät einwandfrei these Operating Instructions and the application conditions and contenues
Èlectrovanne à 2/2 voies funktioniert und lange einsatzfähig bleibt. Bei Nichtbeachtung specifications provided in the Type 5281 Data Sheet. Usage of d’utilisation
dieser Hinweise sowie bei unzulässigen Eingriffen in das Gerät the device in a manner that is contrary to these Operating technique
pour fluides neutres entfällt jegliche Haftung unsererseits, ebenso erlischt die Garantie Instructions or the application conditions and specifications tions et d’i
r 24V
Válvula magnética de 2/2 pasos auf Geräte u. Zubehörteile! Das Gerät dient ausschließlich als 2/ provided in the Type 5281 Data Sheet is improper and will void déclinons
2 V o para medios neutrales 2-Wege-Magnetventil für die lt. Datenblatt zulässigen Medien. your warranty. This device serves exclusively as a 2/2-way les access
ge 1 lid with
Eine andere oder darüber hinausgehende Benutzung gilt als solenoid valve for the media stated to be permissible on the data vanne 2/2
o l t a y
nicht bestimmungsgemäß. Für hieraus resultierende Schäden sheet. Any other use is considered improper use. Bürkert will Une autre
V R va pply onl
haftet Bürkert nicht. Das Risiko trägt allein der Anwender. not be responsible for any improper use of the device. considérée
U
dommages
/
UL er su
toute respo
o w ACHTUNG! ATTENTION!
s2p
• Halten Sie sich bei Einsatzplanung und Betrieb des • Be sure to observe generally accepted safety rules •
clas
Gerätes an die einschlägigen allgemein anerkannten when planning, installing and using this device. For
sicherheitstechnischen Regeln. example, take suitable measures to prevent
• Treffen Sie geeignete Maßnahmen, um unbeabsichtig- unintentional operations of the device.
tes Betätigen oder unzulässige Beeinträchtigungen • Do not impair the operation of the device. •
auszuschließen. • Do not attemp to detach or unscrew any lines or
• Beachten Sie, daß in Systemen, die unter Druck valves in the system that are under pressure, and
Notice d'utilisation
stehen, Leitungen und Ventile nicht gelöst werden always be sure to switch off the voltage supply •
Betriebsanleitung
dürfen. Schalten Sie vor Eingriffen in das System in before working on the system.
jedem Fall die Spannung ab! • When attaching the coil to the plug socket, be sure
• Achten Sie auf den einwandfreien Sitz der Dichtung the seal is properly seated.
beim Verschrauben der Spule mit der Geräte- • Jammed coils can cause coil overheating with AC!
steckdose. • For explosion-proof models, data from the conformity •
• Festsitzender Kern bewirkt bei Wechselspannung certificate PTB No. 00ATEX 2129 X must also be
(AC) Spulenüberhitzung! complied with! •
• Bei Ausführungen mit Explosionsschutz sind zusätz-
lich die Angaben der Konformitätsbescheinigung PTB WARNING! •
Nr. 00ATEX 2129 X zu beachten. • Do not touch the coil during use as it becomes very
hot.
WARNUNG!
• Verletzungsgefahr! Bei Dauerbetrieb kann die Spule •
sehr heiß werden.
Fluid Control Systems
Sécurité Seguridad Sicherheit Sicherheit
Utilisation conforme aux prescriptions Utilización con arreglo a las disposiciones Safety / Sécurité / Seguridad Safety / Sécurité / Seguridad
e the proper function of the device and promote Afin que l’appareil puisse fonctionner parfaitement et Se ruega observar las indicaciones contenidas en este Ma-
vice lift, you must comply with the information in pendant longtemps, veuillez observer les instructions nual de instrucciones así como las condiciones de uso y datos Spannungsfreie Montage / Voltage-free assembly Fluidischer Anschluß / Fluid connection
nstructions and the application conditions and contenues dans cette notice d’utilisation ainsi que les conditions admisibles con arreglo a la hoja de servicio Tipo 5281, de modo que el Montage sans tension / Montaje libre de tensión Raccordement fluidique / Conexión fluídica
vided in the Type 5281 Data Sheet. Usage of d’utilisation et les données admissibles mentionnées dans la fiche aparato funcione impecablemente y permanezca durante largo tiempo
anner that is contrary to these Operating technique du type 5281. En cas d’inobservation de ces instruc- apto para el empleo. La inobservancia de estas indicaciones así como
e application conditions and specifications tions et d’interventions non autorisées dans l’appareil, nous las inter-venciones inadmisibles en el aparato suponen la declinación
ype 5281 Data Sheet is improper and will void déclinons toute responsabilité et la garantie couvrant l’appareil et por nuestra parte de toda clase de responsabilidad, además de la
his device serves exclusively as a 2/2-way les accessoires s’éteint! L'appareil sert uniquement d’électro- extinción de la garan-tía de los aparatos y de las piezas de los accesorios.
the media stated to be permissible on the data vanne 2/2 voies pour les fluides admis selon la fiche technique. El aparato sirve ex-clusivamente como válvula magnética de 2/2 pasos
use is considered improper use. Bürkert will Une autre utilisation ou une utilisation excédant ce contexte sera para los medios autorizados según la hoja de datos. Cualquier otra
ble for any improper use of the device. considérée comme non conforme aux prescriptions. Pour les utilización que vaya más ella no será conforme a las disposiciones.
dommages qui en résulteraient, le fabricant/fournisseur décline El fabricante / suministrador no es responsable de los daños que de ello
toute responsabilité. L’utilisateur seul en assume le risque. pudieran resultar. El riesgo corresponde únicamente al usuario. 0 bar, psi, kPa Du
Dir rchflu
ATTENTION! ATTENTION! ¡ATENCIÓN! Se ectio ß
re to observe generally accepted safety rules • Pour la planification de l’utilisation et l’exploitation de • Para la planificación y operación del aparato atenerse Se s d'é n flo
n
ntid cc
planning, installing and using this device. For l’appareil, veuillez vous en tenir aux règles applicables a las correspondientes reglas generales y re- o d ou
ep
as
ple, take suitable measures to prevent et généralement reconnues en matière de technique conocidas de la técnica de seguridad.
entional operations of the device. de sécurité. • Tomar las medidas apropiadas para excluir
ot impair the operation of the device. • Prenez les mesures nécessaires pour exclure tout accionamien-tos no intencionados o perjuicios Elektrischer Anschluß / Electrical connection
ot attemp to detach or unscrew any lines or actionnement involontaire ou des altérations inadmisibles; prestar atención a que en el caso de Raccordement électrique / Conexión eléctrica
s in the system that are under pressure, and inadmissibles. sistemas que se encuentren bajo presión no deben
s be sure to switch off the voltage supply • Notez qu’il n’est pas permis de desserrer des desconec-tarse conducciones y válvulas.
e working on the system. conduites ou des vannes se trouvant sous pression • Antes de proceder a intervenciones en el sistema
attaching the coil to the plug socket, be sure dans des systèmes! Avant d’intervenir dans le desco-nectar siempre la tensión.
eal is properly seated. système, coupez l’alimentation électrique dans tous • Prestar atención al asiento impecable de la empaque-
med coils can cause coil overheating with AC! les cas! tadura al atornillar la válvula con la caja de enchufe
xplosion-proof models, data from the conformity • Veillez à ce que le joint repose parfaitement lorsque para aparatos eléctricos.
icate PTB No. 00ATEX 2129 X must also be vous visserez la bobine avec le connecteur. • Con tensión alterna (AC), el macho de asiento duro
lied with! • Un noyau bloqué provoque en cas d’alimentation en provoca sobrecalentamiento de la bobina!
tension alternative (AC) une surchauffe de la bobine! • En las ejecuciones con protección debe tenerse
WARNING! • Dans les exécutions antidéflagrantes, les indications adicio-nalmente en cuenta los datos de la declaración
ot touch the coil during use as it becomes very de l'attestation de conformité PTB N° 00ATEX 2129 X de con-formidad PTB n° 00ATEX 2129 X.
doivent observées en plus.
AVERTISSEMENT! ¡AVISO!
• Risque de blessure! En cas de fonctionnement • ¡Peligro de lesiones! En estado de operación continua
permanent, la bobine peut devenir très chaude. la bobina puede ponerse muy caliente.
Sicherheit Technische Daten Technische Daten
Caractéristiques techniques / Datos técnicos

Safety / Sécurité / Seguridad Technical Data
Umgebungstemperatur Température d' ambiante
Fluidischer Anschluß / Fluid connection Temperature of Surroundings Temperatura de ambiente
Raccordement fluidique / Conexión fluídica
Boîtier/Caja
Gehäuse/Housing Laiton/Latón
Messing/brass Acier fin/Acero inoxidable
Edelstahl/Stainless steel
Dichtwerkstoff Temp.
Matériau d’étanchéité Temp.
Sealing material Medium
Material de estanqueidad Fluide/Medio
NBR -10 .. +90 °C
NBR -10 .. +90 °C
EPDM -40 .. +120 °C
EPDM -40 .. +120 °C
0 bar, psi, kPa Du FKM -10 .. +120 °C
FKM -10 .. +120 °C
Dir rchflu
Se ectio ßrich Nennweite/Nominal size Dimension nominale
Se s d'é n flow tung
n
ntid cc Anchura nominal
o d oule
ep Wirkungsweise
as ment
o Circuit function Fonctionnement
A Funcionamiento
A
Typ/ Type
Type/Tipo
MADE IN GERMANY
MADE IN GERMANY
5281 A 13,0 FKM MS 5281 A 13,0 FKM MS
Beispiel 0,2 -16 bar 0,2 -16 bar
24V 50-60Hz 8W Exemple 24V 50-60Hz 8W
Example
Ejemplo
450000Y W14UN
450000Y W14UN
Bestell-Nr. / Id. No. N° id. / N° de pedido

Spannung (±10 %) - Frequenz - Leistung Tension (±10%) - fréquence - puissance
Voltage (±10 %) - Frequency - Power Tensión (±10 %) - frecuencia - potencia
Druckbereich/Pressure range Plage de pression / Gama de presión
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten Sous resérve de modification techniques.

We reserve the right to make technical changes without notice Nos reservamos el derecho de llevar a cabo modificaciones tècnicas
sin previo aviso.
Niederlassungen / Branch Offices Montage Montage Montage
Montage / Assembly / Montage / Montaje Montage / Assembly/ Montage / Montaje Montage

Contact addresses / Kontaktadressen
Germany / Deutschland / Allemange
Spulenmontage / Coil assembly / Einbaulage beliebig / Any assembly position / Position Ab
Bürkert Fluid Control System
Montage de la bobine / Montaje de bobina de montage quelconque / Sentido de montaje Se
Sales Centre
discrecional Eta
Chr.-Bürkert-Str. 13-17
Mutter Vorzugsrichtung Ato
D-74653 Ingelfingen Nut Preffered direction
Tel. + 49 (0) 7940 - 10 91 111 Ecrou Orientation préférentielle
Fax + 49 (0) 7940 - 10 91 448 Tuerca Colector de lodo
International
Contact addresses can be found on the internet at:
Die Kontaktadressen finden Sie im Internet unter: max. 5 Nm
Les adresses se trouvent sur internet sous :
www.burkert.com Bürkert / Company / Locations
Schmutzfänger
Dirt trap
O-Ring
Collecteur d’impuretés
Joint torique Ge
Anillo en O Sentido de paso
en
Schutzleiterfunktion / Protective conductor function /
Fonctionnement du conducteur de protection / Función del Sc
conductor de protector Alw
Nach Spulenmontage immer prü- con
fen! flow Ra
Always test function after assembly of d cas
tion ida
of coil! irec nque tec
/ D ta
Toujours vérifier après montage de ng t / Es Co
htu
la bobine! ric men de
¡Tras el montaje de bobina hfluß oule tier
rc c
pruébese siempre la function¡ Du s d’é
n
se
Widerstand Prüfspannung Prüfstrom Rohrleitungen reinigen
resistance test voltage test current Cleaning the piperuns
résistance tension d’essai courant d’essai Nettoyer les conduites
intensidad tensión de prueba corriente de prueba
Limpieza tuberías
max. 0,1 Ω 12 V 1A
Operating Instructions 0512/13_EU-ML_00803312 12/05/1'M
Montage Montage Störungen Ersatzteile
sembly/ Montage / Montaje Montage / Assembly / Montage / Montaje Montage / Assembly / Montage / Montaje Troubleshooting / Dérangements / Averías Spare parts / Pièces de rechange / Pieza
e beliebig / Any assembly position / Position Abdichtung Einschrauben der Rohrleitungen / Screwing in the pipe Spannung und Stromart prüfen!
age quelconque / Sentido de montaje Seal connections Check the voltage and type of current!
al Etanchéification Vissage les conduites / Averías las tuberías Vérifier la tension et le genre de courant! Spulensatz
tung Atornillado Comprobar tensión y clase de corriente!
rection Coil kit
préférentielle PTFE
lodo
Jeu de bobines
Juego de bobina
Druck prüfen! / Check the pressure! Verschleißteilsatz

Vérifier la pression! / Comprobar presión!
änger Set of Wearing Parts
Normeinschraubtiefe nicht überschreiten!
r d’impuretés Do not exceed standard screw-in depth! Jeu de pièces d'usure
e paso Gerätesteckdose / Instrument socket / Connecteur / Caja de Ne pas dépasser la profondeur filetée
enchufe para aparatos eléctricos normalisée!
Juego del piazas de cierre
¡No sobrepasar la profundidad de
Schutzleiter immer anschließen! roscado normalizada!
bar, psi, kPa
Always connect the protective Dichtung
conductor! Seal
flow Raccordez dans tous les Joint d'étanchéité
of d cas le conducteur de pro-
tion ida Sellado Rohrleitungen prüfen! / Check the piperun!
irec nque tection!
/ D ta Vérifier les conduites! / Comprobar tuberías! Dichtungssatz
ng t / Es Conectar en todo caso el conductor
htu
ric men de puesta a
hfluß oule tierra!
1 Nm
Set of Seals
rc c
Du s d’é
n
se
Jeu de joints
ngen reinigen
the piperuns Juego de estanqueidad
es conduites
tuberías Type 2508
Ersatzteile Ersatzteile Ersatzteile
Spare parts / Pièces de rechange / Pieza de repuesto Spare parts / Pièces de rechange / Pieza de repuesto Spare parts/Pièces de rechange/Pieza de repuesto
Spannung Leistung Id-Nr. D ich tw erksto ff Id -N r.

Nennw eite
Voltage Power Id. No. Sealing m aterial Id . N o.
No m in al diam eter
M atière de jo int N o cd e .
Tension Puissance No cde. D iam ètre nom inal
Spulensatz M aterial de No de
Tensión Potencia No de pedito A n ch ura no m in al
estan queidad p edito
[V] [W]
Coil kit N BR 645 561 A
Europa, 024 / DC 8 126 434 R
Europe 13 - 65 FK M 645 562 B
Jeu de bobines
024 / 56 8 645 556 D E P DM 645 563 C
Juego de bobina 110 / 56 8 645 557 E

NBR 624 012 J
230 / 56 8 645 558 P 13 FKM 624 013 K
N.A.F.T.A. EPDM 624 014 L

024 / DC 8 126 434 R
Verschleißteilsatz NBR 624 015 M
024 / 56 8 645 556 D 20 FKM 624 016 N
Set of Wearing Parts EPDM 624 017 P
120 / 60 8 643 802 B
NBR 624 018 Y
Jeu de pièces d'usure 240 / 60 8 643 803 C
25 FKM 624 019 Z
Juego del piazas de cierre A.P.A.C. 024 / DC 8 126 434 R EPDM 624 020 W
024 / 56 8 645 556 D NBR 624 021 K
32, 40 FKM 624 022 L

100 / 56 8 645 559 Q
EPDM 624 023 M
110 / 56 8 645 557 E NBR 624 024 N
Dichtungssatz
200 / 56 8 645 560 M 50 FKM 624 025 P
Set of Seals
EPDM 624 026 Q
230 / 56 8 645 558 P
Jeu de joints Lors de la commande de pièces de rechange, indiquez, en
Bitte geben Sie bei der Bestellung von Verschleißteilen zusätz- plus de leur numéro de commande, celui de commande de
Juego de estanqueidad lich zur Bestellnummer der Ersatzteile auch die Bestellnummer votre appareil complet.
Typ 5281
Ihres Komplettgerätes an. Con ocasión del pedido de las pieza de repuesto, rogamos
When ordering spare parts, please also quote the order number indicar además del número de pedido de la pieza de
of your complete appliance in addition to the order number of the requesto también el número de pedido de su aparato
replacement parts. completo.
- Product information -
Solenoid valve block for water distribution Project 10168
Multi-valve block with adjustment and display of the output pressure
TECHNICAL DATA
Materials Valves Type 5281, DN13
Valve block Brass (alternative: Cv-value valves 4.0 m³/h (1.11 l/sec)
brass, nickel-plated) Operating voltage 24 V DC (alternative: 120 V AC)
Coil jacket PA Voltage tolerance 10 %
Armature guide tube Stainless steel Nominal power 8 W per valve
Seal material EPDM / (alternative Nominal operating Long-term operation;
FKM) mode duty cycle 100 %
Medium Water Electrical connection Plug tabs DIN 43650 A
Media temperature -10 to +80 °C with pre-wired device
Ambient temperature max. +55 °C sockets incl. 1.6 m of cable
Medium feed pressure max. 10 bar Degree of protection IP 65 with device socket
Pressure control range 1 to 6 bar Special feature Manually actuated valves
Operating range 1 to 6 bar Filter sieve 0.25 mm stainless steel
Connections Block fixing with 2 screws M8x50
Input E G 3/4 internal thread through housing drill holes
Output A1 M22x1.5; external Installation position of any, preferably drives at top
Output A2 M14x1.5; external block
A
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
A differential pressure of 0.5 bar is required to open the full valve cross section.
The minimum pressure at the system input is 1 bar.
OF VALVE
A 2/2-way valve, pilot-operated,
normally closed
DIMENSIONS [MM]
DESCRIPTION
The valve block consists of a brass
block, two or three valves of Type
Front view 5281 with manual actuation, a pres-
sure controller, a dirt trap (with 0.25
mm sieve) and a pressure gauge.
Valve V 1 is used as a safety valve at
the inlet and - if present - directs the
medium to the pressure controller.
Otherwise, the valve position is
sealed by a cover plate. Ball valve,
tube and dirt trap form a module that
can be rotated through 180° when
necessary, enabling medium feed
from the opposite side.
The valve seats are integrated in the
block. The block operates so that the
same respective water flow is applied
to each valve output in parallel opera-
tion. The water volumes flowing
through the valves can be adjusted
Rear view
via the set-point of the pressure con-
troller. The pressure gauge indicates
the set pressure.
The block is fixed in place with 2 hex-
agonal socket head screws via the
drill holes in the valve block.
Legend
V1 optional cover plate or safety valve (solenoid valve Type 5281, DN13);
the double block with cover plate is presented in the graphic
V2, V3 dosing valves
VS lock screw for sieve
SW7 external hex. screw (SW7 - wrench size 7) for setting the pressure set-point value
Ordering table water distributor

Housing material Seal material Voltage Number of valves EEx Order no.
Brass EPDM 24 V DC 2 no 175 777 Fixing
Brass EPDM 24 V DC 2 yes 183 535 screws 2 x M8x50
Brass FKM 24 V DC 2 no 187 621
Brass EPDM 24 V DC 3 no 200 670
Brass, nickel-plated EPDM 24 V DC 2 no 230 044
Brass EPDM 120 V AC 2 no 235 122
FLUID CONTROL SYSTEM
PI-10168_EN_2014-06-11.docx/bi/11/06/2014 Technical changes reserved

TFU006
Pressure regulator for water
• Brass version with DIN DVGW and international

drinking water approvals
• Stainless steel version with DIN DVGW-Approval
• Plastic compact version
• Pressure gauge connection at pressure output
The water pressure regulator works according Technical data – Version I

to the principle of pressure reduction. It is pref-
Body material EN 12165 CW602N
erably for use in the provided water systems.
Seal material NBR
The pressure regulator consists of a housing,
Diaphragm NBR
a piston or diaphragm valve with an adjustable
Valve type Single seat valve, relieved
spring and spring cap.
The inlet pressure reaches the target value, Material valve seat Stainless steel (AISI 304)
opens the piston or the diaphragm against Pressure gauge connection G 1/4 (without pressure gauge)
the spring force of the control valve and the Port connections 1/2" to 2" (threaded male)
built-up output pressure. The output pressure Medium temperature +60 °C
is the controlled variable. When exceeding the Inlet pressure 25 bar1)
nominal value the valve closes, when there is Outlet pressure 1–6 bar1)
a shortfall the valve opens and thus the output Default setting 3 bar1)
pressure is kept almost constant. Flow rate 1–2 m/s (optimum values)
By changing the spring tension, the spring Set-
Noise class II <30
point can be continuously adjusted.
Mounting place if possible directly behind the counter
Installation horizontal or vertical, preferably spring cap upright.
Observe flow direction!
The pressure regulator is available in 3 versions:
Approvals
Version I:
Brass housing with DIN DVGW and
international drinking water approvals 1)
Pressure values (bar): Overpressure with respect to atmospheric pressure
Version II:
Stainless steel case with DIN DVGW approval
Version III:
with plastic housing
Union connection G 1/8 "and G 1/4"
www.burkert.com p. 1/4
TFU006
Technical data – Version II

Body material Brass DZR
EN 12165 CW602N
Seal material NBR
Diaphragm NBR
Material valve seat Stainless steel (AISI 304)
Pressure gauge connection G 1/4 (without pressure gauge)
Port connections 1/2" to 1" (threaded male)
Medium temperature +40 °C
Inlet pressure 25 bar1)
Outlet pressure 1–6 bar1)
Default setting 3 bar1)
Flow rate 1–2 m/s (optimum values)
Noise class II <30
Installation horizontal or vertical, preferably spring cap upright.
Approvals
Technical data – Version III

Body material Stainless steel 1.4305
Seal material NBR
Diaphragm NBR
Material valve seat Stainless steel
Material strainer bowl Stainless steel
Pressure gauge connection both ways 1/4" (without pressure gauge)
Port connections 1/2" to 2" (threaded male)
Medium temperature +70 °C
Inlet pressure 25 bar1)
Outlet pressure 1,5–6 bar1)
Default setting 3 bar1)
Flow rate 1–2 m/s (optimum values)
Noise class II <30
Installation in horizontal direction, strainer bowl downwards
Approvals
Technical data – Version IV

(plastic body, with threaded ports G 1/8 and G 1/4)
Body material Technopolymer
Threaded port Brass
Special roller diaphragm NBR
Medium water
Medium temperature max. +50 °C
Pressure gauge connection G 1/8 (without pressure gauge)
Port connections Threaded port G 1/8 or G 1/4
Inlet pressure max. 13 bar1)
Outlet pressure 0–4 bar1)
(continuously adjustable) 0–8 bar1)
0–12 bar1)
Setpoint adjustment only ascending pressure, screw can be locked
Installation As required, preferably controller handle upright.
Approvals None
1)
Pressure values (bar): Overpressure with respect to atmospheric pressure
p. 2/4
TFU006
Ordering chart pressure regulator for water

Version I AUBE
¯ (
Port con-
nections
Item no.
Ø Cover
D (inch)
[m3/h]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
Kvs
A
&
1/2 140.00 76.00 20.50 112.00 54.00 1.27 788 439
3/4 160.00 90.00 20.50 112.00 54.00 2.27 788 440
1 180.00 95.00 20.50 112.00 54.00 3.60 788 441
$
1 1/4 200.00 110.00 40.00 178.00 73.00 5.80 788 442
%
1 1/2 220.00 120.00 40.00 178.00 73.00 9.10 788 443
"
2 250.00 130.00 40.00 178.00 73.00 14.00 788 444
!
The pressure regulator version I have a

pressure gauge G 1/4 for measuring the
output pressure.
Delivered without pressure gauge.
Version II
E
Port con-
Delivered without
nections
Item no.
A (inch)
[m3/h]
pressure gauge.
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
Kvs
G
D
B
1/2 169.00 86.50 100.50 54.00 58.00 1.27 771 130
D
3/4 180.00 89.00 98.00 54.00 58.00 2.27 770 991
1 205.00 88.50 99.50 54.00 58.00 3.60 770 992
A
C
F
Spare parts Version I and II B
Item no.
Spare
parts
Cartridge for 1/2" 771 847

Cartridge for 3/4" 771 847
Cartridge for 1" 771 848
Cartridge for 1 1/4" 771 849
Cartridge for 1 1/2" 771 850
Cartridge for 2" 770 243
Tool for filter case 771 851
Filter for 771 852
Version II
Filter case for 771 853
Version II Cartridge Filter Filter case
p. 3/4
TFU006
Ordering chart pressure regulator for water (continued)

Version III
Port con-
Item no.
R (inch)
nection
[m3/h]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
H
Kvs
H
H
A
B
1/2 140.00 80.00 89.00 58.00 2.40 770 977
3/4 160.00 90.00 89.00 58.00 3.10 771 854
R "
1 180.00 100.00 111.00 64.00 5.80 771 855
1 1/4 200.00 105.00 111.00 64.00 5.90 771 856
h
1 1/2 225.00 130.00 173.00 126.00 12.60 771 857
2 255.00 140.00 173.00 126.00 12.00 771 858
B
Spare parts Version III

Spare parts
Item no.
Valve insert 772 210

1/2" and 3/4"
1" and 1 1/4"
1 1/2" and 2"
Replacement strainer 772 213
1/2" and 3/4"
1" and 1 1/4"
1 1/2" and 2"
Tool for releasing 772 217
Version IV
(plastic body, with threaded ports G 1/8 and G 1/4)
X
operating
threaded
pressure
Item no.
[bar] 1)
port
LTA
G 1/8 0–4 783 256

0–8 783 257
0–12 783 258

G 1/4 0–4 783 259

0–8 783 260
0–12 783 261

The pressure regulator version III have a

1)
Pressure values [bar]: Overpressure with respect to atmospheric pressure pressure gauge G 1/8 for measuring the

output pressure.
To find your nearest Bürkert office, click on the orange box www.burkert.com
In case of special application conditions, Subject to alterations

please consult for advice. © Christian Bürkert GmbH & Co. KG 1503/3_EU-en_00895122
p. 4/4
Hydraulic characteristics
1 Flow velocity diagram
The steps to take for selecting the correct size are as follows:
V (m/s)
5 · The total flow rate is calculated from the number and type
4 of appliances present by taking the sum of the individual
3 flow rates.
2
Example:
1
One living unit with 1 bathroom
1 bidet G = 6 l/min
1/2” 3/4” 1 shower G = 9 l/min
0,5
1 wash basin G = 6 l/min
0,4
1 wc with cistern G = 6 l/min
0,3
1 kitchen sink G = 12 l/min
0,2 1 washing machine G = 12 l/min
Gtot = 51 l/min
0,1
No appliances = 6
0,2
0,5
(l/min) (m3/h)
1
10
Flow rate
5
10
20
50
100
· The design flow rate is calculated from the table of

coefficients of simultaneity (using that for 10 appliances).
2 Pressure drop diagram
∆p (bar) ∆p (m w.g.) Example:
1,5 15
1,2 12 Gds = Gtot · % = 51 · 41 % = 21 l/min

1 10
0,9 9
0,8 8
0,7 7
0,6 6 It is recommended that flow velocity is kept within 1 to 2
0,5 5
metres per second when calculating the correct reducer
0,4 4
1/2” 3/4”
size. This will prevent noise in the pipes and rapid wear of
0,3 3 appliances.
0,2 2 · The correct diameter of the reducing valve is taken from

diagram 1 on the basis of the design flow rate taking into
account an ideal flow velocity of between 1 and 2 m/s
0,1 1 (blue band).
0,2
0,5
(l/min) (m3/h)
1
10
Flow rate
Example:
5
10
20
50
100
for Gds = 21 l/min select diameter 1/2”

Under the following conditions Inlet pressure = 6 bar
(see indications on diagram 1)
Outlet pressure = 4 bar
· The pressure drop is taken from diagram 2 again on the

Sizing the valve basis of where the design flow rate intersects the curve for
the relative diameter already selected (the downstream
The flow rates of commonly used appliances in domestic pressure falls by an amount equal to the pressure drop, with
plumbing systems are given below to assist in the selection respect to the set pressure at no flow condition).
of the correct valve diameter:
Table of typical flow rates Example:
Bath tub, kitchen sink, dishwashing machine 12 l/min for Gds = 21 l/min 1/2” ∆p = 0,8 bar
Shower 9 l/min (see indications on diagram 2)
Wash basin, bidet, washing machine, w.c. with cistern 6 l/min
Recommended flow rates

The coefficient of simultaneous use must be taken into
For an average flow velocity of 1,5 m/s, the recommended
consideration to avoid selecting a valve that is too large.
flow rates for each diameter are as follows:
Basically the fewer the people using the system the lower the
probability will be of two appliances being used at the same
time. Diameter 1/2” Ø 15 3/4” Ø 22
Flow rate m3/h 1,2 1,2 2,1 2,1
Table showing simultaneos-use factor as % Flow rate l/min 20 20 35 35
Number of Residential Community Number of Residential Community Number of Residential Community
appliances appliances appliances
5 54 64,5 35 23,2 30 80 16,5 22

10 41 49,5 40 21,5 28 90 16 21,5
15 35 43,5 45 20,5 27 100 15,5 20,5
20 29 37 50 19,5 26 150 14 18,5
25 27,5 34,5 60 18 24 200 13 17,5
30 24,5 32 70 17 23 300 12,5 16,5
Intended use
The user must comply with the information in these operating instruc- Safety instructions
tions to ensure that the device functions perfectly and safely and has  Do not operate the block without first releasing the manual con-
a long service life and must observe the operating conditions and trols of the valves, otherwise the coils may burn out!
permitted data according to the data sheet and rating plate. The gen-  Never exceed the maximum media input pressure; otherwise
eral rules of technology must be observed for application planning and there is a danger of bursting!
operation of the device. Unintentional actuation or unacceptable im-  Do not install the valve block in a twisted position, as this may
pairments must be prevented by taking suitable measures. result in mechanical stress and impairment of the block function!
 Observe the specified screw tightening torques when changing
Caution! Only authorized technicians using suitable tools may work spare parts.
on the block.  Caution risk of hot surfaces! The solenoid drives may become
very hot during prolonged operation.
Operating principle of the single valves
A 2/2-way solenoid valve,  The electrical connection is made with device sockets using pre-
pilot-controlled, assembled cables (cable length 1.60 m).
A closed when de-energized (NC)  Make the correct connections and carefully connect the ground
wires.
 Ensure that the flat seal is correctly fitted between the coil and
Structure device socket! The tightening torque for fastening screws of the
The valve block consists of a brass block, two or three valves of Type device socket is 1 Nm.
5281 with manual control, a pressure controller, a dirt trap (with 0.25
mm sieve) as well as a pressure gauge. Valve V1 is used – if fitted - Start-up/pressure setting
as a safety valve at the input and conveys the medium into the pres-  Before starting up the electrical system, release all manual con-
sure controller. Ball valve, hose and dirt trap form one module which trols on the valves.
can be rotated by 180° if required and therefore allows media connec-  Build up the media pressure. During the initial start-up the pres-
tion from the opposite side. sure gauge indicates 6 bar (factory setting).
The valve seats are integrated in the block. The block operates in  Set the required pressure using the set-point value screw A/F7
such a way that each valve output is supplied in parallel operation with on the pressure controller. The set pressure is indicated on the
the same water current. The volume of water flowing through the pressure gauge.
valves can be adjusted using the set-point value of the pressure con-  Apply the operating voltage and start the process.
troller. The pressure gauge indicates the set pressure.
If faults occur
Technical data  Check electrical connections, operating voltage, wire connec-
Also observe the specifications on the rating plate! tions, operating pressure and installation and rectify any errors.
Medium Water  If the valve still does not switch, please contact your Bürkert
Media temperature -10 to +80 °C Service representative.
Ambient temperature max. +55 °C
Operating voltage of valves 24 V DC
Nominal power of valves 8 W per valve Components / wire connections
Orifice of valves DN 13
Media input pressure max. 10 bar
Pressure control range 1 to 6 bar
Kv value water valves 4.0 m³/h (1.11 l/sec)
Housing and seal materials

Valve block Brass
Coil jacket Polyamide
Core guide pipe Stainless steel
Seal material EPDM / alternatively FKM
Line connections Input E: G 3/4; inside
Output A1: M22x1.5; outside
Output A2: M14x1.5; outside
Installation
 Check that the operating conditions comply with the performance
data of the block! E G 3/4; inside SW7 hexagon head A/F7
 Before performing any work on the block, ensure that it is de- A1 M22x1.5; outside for setting the
energized and depressurized! A2 M14x1.5; outside set-point pressure
 Before installing the block, clean the line connections and the V1 optional cover plate value
ends of the hose! or safety valve MS 2 mounting screws
(cover plate here) M8x50 with 6 mm
 The installation position is freely selectable.
Recommendation: Solenoid drives of the dosing valves face up. V2, V3 dosing valves Hexagon socket
VS lock screw
 Attach the block by screwing two hexagonal socket head screws
for sieve
M8x50 through the designated 9 mm holes.
 Connect the outputs. Ensure that the connection points are tight.
Caution! Bürkert Werke GmbH Bürkert Werke GmbH

To open the full valve cross-section, a differential pressure of 0.5 bar Christian-Bürkert-Str. 13-17 Christian-Bürkert-Str. 2
is required. The minimum pressure at the system input is D 74653 Ingelfingen D 01900 Großröhrsdorf
1 bar. Tel. +49 (0)7940 / 10-91-111 Tel. +49 (0)5952 / 36-300
Fax +49 (0)7940 / 10-91-448 Fax +49 (0)5952 / 36-551
info@de.buerkert.com info@de.buerkert.com
http://www.buerkert.com http://www.buerkert.com
BA-10168_EN_01_2015-06-25.docx/bi Page 1 of 3
Spare parts
Item Designation Order no.  Check the O-ring (22x2.5 mm) for damage. An undamaged O-
1 Pressure controller installation set 788 692 ring can be reused. A defective O-ring must be replaced (see
2 Ball valve G 3/4 inside/inside 781 755 spare parts).
3 Pressure gauge 787 035  Moisten the O-ring before installation and ensure that the O-ring
4 Filter sieve VA; 0.25 mm 788 812 is fitted properly during installation.
5.1 O-ring on filter lock screw – EPDM 9353 4827 Caution! Do not use any oil or grease!
5.2 O-ring on filter lock screw – FKM 902 478  Place the sieve unit - now offset by 180° - on the housing so that
6.1 O-ring on sieve unit – EPDM 786 525 the locking pin fits into the guide hole in the housing.
6.2 O-ring on sieve unit – FKM 790 667  Fix the sieve unit using the 2 fastening screws and washers.
7.1 Coil set 126 434  Tighten the fastening screws (see figure for “torques”).
7.2 Coil set – EEx 133 547  Reconnect the pressure and power.
8.1 Valve actuator – EPDM 145 458
8.2 Valve actuator – FKM 143 574 Sieve unit:
9.1 Wearing parts set – EPDM 624 014
9.2 Wearing parts set – FKM 624 019
10.1 Core, complete – EPDM 631 964
10.2 Core, complete – FKM 606 396
11 Device socket, assembled for V3 786 346
14 Both ends of hose fitted with union nut M30x2 786 122
Locking pin in first hole
Conversion and repair work (ex works)
Safety instructions second hole for locking pin (for 180° rotation)
 Caution! Only authorized technicians using suitable tools may
work on the block.
 Before starting work, order the required spare parts according to Changing the filter sieve (see figure of valve block 2)
the order table. If the filter sieve is very dirty, it should be cleaned or changed.
 Before performing any work on the block, ensure that it is de-
energized and depressurized! Valve block 2:
Rotating the sieve unit by 180° (conversion)

If required, the sieve unit can be rotated by 180° so that the input ball
valve is offset from the factory setting by exactly 180° (see diagram of
valve block 1).
 De-energize and depressurize the block.
 Loosen both fastening screws on the sieve unit (hexagon socket
5 mm).
 Remove the sieve unit from the locking pin (pin is tight, therefore
a little stiff).
 Remove the locking pin form the first guide hole in the sieve unit
(see figure of the “sieve unit”).
 Insert the locking pin into the second guide hole in the sieve unit.
Valve block 1:
Copper collar on the sieve O-ring Lock screw
 Have a new filter sieve ready.

 Loosen the lock screw on the filter unit (A/F 22).
 Remove the filter sieve.
 Assess whether the sieve should be cleaned or replaced.
 Re-insert the cleaned or new sieve in the correct position (cop-
per collar inwards).
 Screw the lock screw hand-tight to form a good seal. The O-ring
on the lock screw acts as the sealing element.
 Reconnect the pressure and power.
Fastening screws on the

sieve unit
(Hexagon socket 5 mm)
Locking pin O-ring
Changing the pressure gauge and ball valve Changing a pilot control diaphragm in the valve
The pressure gauge and the manual ball valve are screwed in with (see also information in the operating instructions Type 5281)
thread sealant (Loctite 542 or 577). The diaphragm is an important element for pilot control of the valve.
 Use the square head or hexagon head on the components to The diaphragm is subject to natural wear.
screw them out and in. Change the diaphragm as follows.
 Before screwing in the parts, place a little Loctite 542 or 577 on  Have a new diaphragm ready.
the thread and screw in the parts to form a good seal.  De-energize and depressurize the block.
 Mark the mounting position of the actuator with respect to the
housing.
Spare parts sets for the valve Type 5281  Loosen the fastening screws (tool Tx20) between actuator and
housing.
 Remove the valve actuator.
 Note the installation position and remove the diaphragm.
 If required, clean the valve housing.
Coil set  Insert the new diaphragm into the housing collar in the correct
SET1 position so that the middle plate of the diaphragm with the larger
diameter is visible.
 Place the valve actuator in the correct position.
 Attach the actuator and tighten the 4 screws crosswise (see
figure for “torques”).
Valve actuator
Screw tightening torques:
Core, complete
Wearing parts set

SET3
(parts list changed for
DN13
Changing a valve core

(see also information in the operating instructions Type 5281)
A complete core set consists of an iron core with a seal and a spring.
In particular, the valve seal is subject to natural wear. If a closed valve
is leaking, the core should be changed as follows.
 Have a new complete core ready.
 Loosen the fastening screw on the device socket and remove
the device socket.
 Loosen the fastening nut on the coil (A/F 14) and remove the
coil.
 Remove the plastic cover.
 Loosen the 4 fastening screws (tool Tx20). Note the local as-
signment of the screws which vary in length.
 Remove the core feed pipe upwards and use your other hand to
prevent the core from falling.
 If required, clean the inner parts of the valve.
 Insert the new core into the cleaned core feed pipe so that the
seat seal is visible.
 Place the core with the core feed pipe in the correct position on
the valve seat and hold the components with one hand.
 With the other hand, attach the core feed pipe using the fas-
tening screws. In doing so, ensure that the long and short fas-
tening screws are in the correct position.
 Tighten the fastening screws crosswise (see figure for “torques”).
 Attach the plastic cover so that one of the recesses is located
above the manual control.
 Place the coil in the correct position. Ensure that the coil locks
every 90° and can otherwise be placed in any position.
 Screw the fastening nut onto the coil (see figure for “torques”).
Operation and Installation Manual
Globe valves
Gate valves
Needle valves

Impressum
This documentation may neither be altered, expanded , reproduced nor passed to third parties without the
written agreement of END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG . This restriction also applies to the corresponding
drawings.
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG has the right or change parts of the globe valves, gate valves, needle valves
at any time without prior or direct notice to the client. The contents of this publication are subject to change
without notice.
The products are specified by the statements in this documentation; no assurance or the properties is given.

Telefon: 05731 / 7900 - 0
Telefax: 05731 / 7900 - 199
E-Mail: post@end.de
Edition: 04/2011
2 http://www.end.de 04/2011
Contents
Contents
1 Foreword 4
2 General advice 5
2.1 Validity 5
2.3 Complaints 5
2.4 Warranty 5
3 Safety advice 7
3.1 Personal protection 7
3.1.1 Safety advice for mounting 7
3.2 Device Safety 9
4 Name-plate 10
5 Globe valves, Gate valves, Needle valves 11

5.1 General 11
5.3 Operation 11
5.4 Mounting / Disassembly 11
5.4.1 Mounting of the valve with threaded connection 12
5.4.2 Mounting of the valve with welded connection 12
5.4.2.1 Disassembly of the valve`s top 13
5.4.2.2 Welding the body between pipes 13
5.4.2.3 Mounting of the valve top 14
5.4.3 Mounting of the valve with flanged connection 15
5.5 Maintenance 16
5.5.1 Gland 16
04/2011 http://www.end.de 3
Foreword
1 Foreword
Dear customer,
these operation and installation manuals are intended to give you the knowledge, which is neces-
sary for you to be able to carry out the mounting and adjustment of the valves rapidly and
correctly.
notes.
Only instructed and qualified mechanician should mount, adjust or maintain the valves.
If you have any questions in relation to the globe valves, gate valves or the needle valves we shall
be pleased to answer them.
The telephone number will be found on the inside cover of these operation and installation
manual.
Yours
General advice
2 General advice
2.1 Validity
These mounting and installation manual is valid for the standard version of the valves
Please check
• directly after delivery the valve for any transport damages and deficiencies.
• with reference to the accompanying delivery note the number of parts.
2.3 Complaints

2.4 Warranty
For our globe valves, gate valves and needle valves we give a warranty period in accordance
with the sales contract.
how to avoid damage to property. Observe these paragraphs without fail!
Safety advice
3 Safety advice
Depending on the technical circumstances and the time under and at which the globe valve, gate
valve, needle valve is mounted, adjusted and commissioned, you must in each case take into
account particular safety aspects!
If, for example, the valve works in an operational chemical plant, the potential hazards of commis-
sioning have another dimension from that when this is only being carried out for test purposes an
a „dry“ part of the plant in the assembly room.
Since we do not know the circumstances at the time of the mounting / adjusting / commissioning
you may find advice on hazards in the following description which are not relevant to you.
3.1 Personal protection
3.1.1 Safety advice for mounting
We wish to point out expressly that the mounting, the electrical installation and the adjustment of
the globe valve, gate valve, needle valve and the accessories must be carried out only by trained
specialist personnel having mechanical and electrical knowledge!
At first switch off all the devices / machines / plant affected by mounting or repair!
will causes potential danger!
If appropriate, in the event of a fault in the globe valve, gate valve, needle valve (in a plant which
is in operation) inform the shift foreman / safety engineer or the works manager without delay
about the fault, in order, for example, to avoid an outflow / overflow of chemicals or the discharge
of gases in good time by means of suitable measures!
Before mounting or repair, remove the pressure from pneumatic / hydraulic devices / machines
/ plant! Empty the conduit from medium.
machine / plant.
carrying out the mounting / repair.
tons /safety valves, etc.!
As a result of the operation of a globe valve, gate valve or needle valve the flow of gases, steam,
liquids, etc. may be enabled or interrupted. Satisfy yourself that, as a result of the starting or the
test adjustment of the valve, no potential hazards for the personnel or the environment will be
produced!
Safety advice
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting or shutting down of
the devices / machine / plant.
By ending mounting check the correct function and the tightness of the globe valve / gate valve
/needle valve.
Through suitable measures, prevent links being trapped by moving actuating elements.
valves, etc.)
Carry out the starting and the adjustments only in accordance with the instructions described in
this documentation.
Never try to repair or maintain a globe valve, gate valve, needle valve under pressure.
Before disassembling the globe valve, gate valve, needle valve some essential points should be
clarified:
• Will the valve to be disassembled be replaced immediately by another?
• Could the valve remain in the pipe?
• If appropriate, does the production process of the plant need to be stopped?
• Is it necessary to inform specific personnel about the disassembly? etc.
If necessary, inform the shift foreman / safety engineer or the manager about the disturbance
without delay in order, for example, to avoid an outflow / overflow of chemicals or a discharge
of gases in good time by means of suitable measures!
Observe that some valves / armatures are able to enclose the pressured medium e.g. the ball
in the ball valve. You have to release the pressure in the pipes in which the armature / valve is
mounted.
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent

• the inadvertent starting up of the devices / machines / plants, or
• the switching on of the medium.
In case of a defect in the globe valve, gate valve, needle valve make contact to the supplier. The
telephone number will be found on the back cover of these operation and installation manual.
If you determinate that there is a damage to the globe valve, gate valve, needle valve isolate it
from the device/ machine. However before doing this, it is essential to refer to the safety advice.
Don`t mount or start the globe valve, gate valve, needle valve or carry out any adjustments on it
if the globe valve, gate valve, needle valve, the supply lines or the part of the plant on which it is
mounted is damaged!
After a repair / maintenance check the right function of the globe valve, gate valve, needle valve
and the tightness of all connections.
Safety advice
3.2 Device Safety
The globe valve, gate valve, needle valve

• is a quality product which is produced in accordance with the recognized industrial
regulations.
• left the manufacturer`s work in a perfect condition!
with the descriptions in these instructions, technically correctly and with the greatest possible
precision!
We assume that you have, as a trained specialist, sound mechanical and electrical knowledge!
The globe valve, gate valve, needle valve must be used only for a purpose corresponding to its
construction!
The globe valve, gate valve, needle valve must be used within the values specified in the techni-
cal data.
Operate the globe valve, gate valve, needle valve only inside the allowed temperature range.
Don`t operate the globe valve, gate valve, needle valve with a pressure as higher as the nominal
pressure
The mentioned data are experience values only and describe the general condition of our product.
They should be used as a guideline to evaluate the suitability of the non-concreate individual case,
but without any guarantee for the suitability given by END-Automation.
The final responsibility to proof and confirm the suitability of our products, for which we confirm
the perfect (faultless) quality by our delivery- and payment terms, lies in the dependance with your
constructive responsibility to the end-user.
Never remove the bonnet or other parts from the globe valve, gate valve, needle valve if it is under
pressure.
Don`t mount or start the globe valve, gate valve, needle valve or carry out any adjustments on it
if the globe valve, gate valve, needle valve the supply lines or the part of the plant on which it is
mounted is damaged!
By ending mounting check the correct function and the tightness of the globe valve, gate valve,
needle valve and check the correct function.
Name-plate
4 Name-plate
The globe valve, gate valve, needle valve will be provided with a name-plate, which permits a definite identifica-
tion of the valves and shows the most important technical data to you. The name-plate should not displaced
or changed

+49 (0)5731 - 7900-0 • www.end.de
Art.No.: ZA310028-ED620632
Serial: ARMAU813857
Pressure range (PS): 16 bar
Pilot pressure: 6...8 bar G/DN: 2”
Volt: Hz: Fluidgroup 1
Temperature (TS): -30...+180°C
Testing pressure (PT): 60 bar
Date of manufacturing: 25.11.2009 0062
Fig. 4.1 - Name plate
Art.No. article number of the valve

Serial order- or production-number
Pressure range (PS) max. admissible working pressure of the valve [bar]
Temperature (TS) temperature range of the valve
G / DN connecting size of the valve
Testing pressure (PT) testing pressure of body
Fluidgroup allowed fluid group of the valve
Date of manufacturing manufacturing month and year of manufacturing
Globe valves, Gate valves, Needle valves
5 Globe valves, Gate valves, Needle valves
5.1 General
Before you mount /disassemble, adjust or commission a globe valve, gate valve, needle valve
you must have read the
Safety advice
If you have not read the safety advices until now please read these important advices now and
turn back to this point.
Globe valves, gate valves and needle valves will be used to cut off medium flow.
It should only be used clean liquids and gases, on which the material of the valves and the material
of the seals will be resistant. Pollution or using outside the nominal pressure range and/or the
nominal temperature range should causes damages on the valves especially on the seals.
Metallic sealed valves should only be used for liquid media.
5.3 Operation
Globe valves, gate valves and needle valves should be actuated by turning a handwheel or a hand
knob.
By non totally opening / closing of the valve you will be able to control the media flow.
During the operation of the valve take care that there won`t be insert any objects or limbs into
the armature. Heavy injuries or damages will be the consequence. If it is necessary you have to
install a protective device.
5.4 Mounting / Disassembly
The mechanical mounting is identical in all variants. It differs only by the type of connection.
Observe the flow direction which is specified on the valve body.
Remove all transport safety devices (e.g. plugs or caps). Observe that there won`t be any parts of
the package or other pollution in the armature.
Before mounting the solenoid valve clean up the pipes. Pollution will reduce the safety and the
duration of life of the valve. If necessary mount a Y- strainer in front of the valve.
Avoid strains on the body by non align pipes.
Globe valve, Gate valve, Needle valve
5.4.1 Mounting of the valve with threaded connection
Before lay on sealing compounds, check the hardly screwing of the pipes into the valve body.
Lay on the correct sealing compounds on the pipes end. By using PTFE- ribbon or hemp seals
employment.
Screw the pipes into the connection ends of valve. Don´t use the handwheel as a lever.
tends for harden it.
sealing compound
harden !
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.1 - Globe valve, Gate valve, Needle valve, mounting threaded connection ( Art. TC101025)
5.4.2 Mounting of the valve with welded connection
Before welding the valve between the pipes you have to disassemble the valve top first, to pre-
vent the damage of the seals.
5.4.2.1 Disassembly of the valve`s top
Clamp the valve between a vice carefully. By using guard plates you can prevent the damage of
the ends of the valve body.
Loosen the valve top by using a fit spanner. Put the spanner onto the hexagon of the screw joint
and not onto the hexagon of the gland screw.
Screw the valve top out of the valve body and put it aside. Place a mark on the valve top and the
body that you will be able to join the correct parts by a subsequent mounting of the valve.
Fig. 5.2 - Globe valve, Gate valve, Needle valve, disassembly of the valve top (Art. AD311064)
5.4.2.2 Welding the body between pipes
The safety demands be welding are depending on the place and the position of the point of weld.
Welding the parts in a serviceable device/machine/plant the potential of danger is as higher as
If appropriate inform the shift foreman / safety engineer or the works manager and the fire brigade
of your factory.
By welding observe your own national guide lines about safety and the prevention of accidents.
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.3 - Globe valve, Gate valve, Needle valve, mounting with welded connection (Art. AD311064)
5.4.2.3 Mounting of the valve top
Before mounting let the valve body cool down.
Screw the valve top into the body.
Check the correct position of the sealing at the screw joint and take care that there will be no
pollution on the sealing or on the seat.
Fasten the valve top with a fit spanner. Put the spanner onto the hexagon of the screw joint and not
on the hexagon or the gland screw.
cool down!
o.k.
Abb. 5.4 - Globe valve, Gate valve, Mounting of the valve top(Art. AD311064)
5.4.3 Mounting of the valve with flanged connection
In the following description we assume that you have mounted the flanges at the end of the pipes
and the valve (welded flanges) and they are cooled down.
Push the valve between the flanges by using the appropriate seals. This process must happen
easily to avoid the damage of the seals. (Please refer to Fig. 5.5)
Align the borings of the flanges and put some fit screws through the holes.
Screw the fit nuts onto the screws and tighten them up crosswise.
Fasten all screws crosswise and check the function of the valve. Observe the maximum torque of
the screws.
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.5 - Globe valve, Gate valve, mounting with flanged connections (Art. CA521408)
5.5 Maintenance
Before you maintain or shut down the globe valve, gate valve, needle valve
you have to read the
Safety advice
to this page.
In periodical turns the controlling of the function and the tightness should happen:
• Check the tightness of the gland packing

• resp. readjusting of the gland packing
If you determinate that there is a damage to the valve switch off the device/ machine/ plant!
However before doing this, it is essential to refer to the
Safety advice
5.5.1 Gland
The sealing of valve takes place by a gland packing. For decreasing tightness the gland could be
readjust. By keeping the nominal pressure you have to tighten up the screw of the gland until the
tightness of the the gland will be restored. (Please refer to Fig. 5.6)
After the readjusting the handwheel of the valve must be able to move slightly.
tightness
o.k.
Fig. 5.6 - Globe valve, Gate valve, Needle valve; Readjusting of the gland (AD311064)
Notice
(1)
(2)
as defined by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC
Butterfly valves NG DN32 ... DN100 VO DN32 ... DN200 Non-return valves
HA DN50 ... DN300 Ball valves VS DN32 ... DN200 AR 1¼" ... 2"
TA DN40 ... DN300 AG 1¼" ... 2" VT DN32 ... DN100 CK3003 DN65 ... DN200
WA DN50 ... DN300 BK DN32 ... DN100 VU 4" CK5003 DN32 ... DN200
WM DN50 ... DN300 IK 1¼" ... 2" ZA 1¼" ... 4" CK5100 DN65 ... DN250
Gate valves IL 1¼" ... 4" ZA DN32 ... DN100 CK5200 DN65 ... DN250
AB 1¼" ... 2" IW 1¼" ... 2" ZB 1¼" ... 2" CW5400 DN65 ... DN250
AE 1¼" ... 3" KA 1¼" ... 3" ZB DN32 ... DN50 EB 1¼" ... 3"
AE DN32 ... DN80 PD 1¼" ... 2" ZD 1¼" ... 4" EB DN32 ... DN80
CA5014 DN100 ... DN300 TB 1¼" ... 4“ ZD DN32 ... DN100 RG1300 DN32 ... DN100
CA5015 DN65 ... DN300 TF DN32 ... DN200 ZE 1¼" ... 4" RG33xx DN32 ... DN200
CA5214 DN40 ... DN200 TH 1¼" ZE DN32 ... DN100 RK DN32 ... DN400
CD5010 DN32 ... DN200 VD 1¼" ... 4" ZF 1¼" ... 4" TD 4"
CV3010 DN32 ... DN150 VD DN32 ... DN100 ZG 1¼" ... 2" Strainer
CV5010 DN32 ... DN200 VH 1¼" ... 2" ZH 1¼" ... 2" AS 1¼” ... 3”
CV5020 DN32 ... DN200 VH3100 1¼" ... 2" ZK DN32 ... DN100 AS DN32 ... DN200
Pressure reducer VK DN32 ... DN200 ZL 1¼" ... 3" EA 1¼" ... 3"
SD Ǫ" ... 2" VK/PN40 DN32 ... DN200 ZM 1¼" ... 2" EA DN32 ... DN80
Pressure relief valves VL 1¼" ...2", 3" ZP DN32 ... DN200
NG 1¼" ... 1½" VN 1¼" ... 2" ZU 1¼" ... 3"

Germany
(7) Noti¿ed body for conformity assessment PED an Quality-Management-System:
Bureau Veritas S.A.

Paris / Frankreich
Kennzeichen 0062
(8) Certi¿cate numbers: Quality Management System: INT110198DE

Certi¿cate of System approval PED: 2011/70.10.1777/P
(10) On behalf bH & Co. KG Bad Oeynhausen, 07. July 2011

END-Armaturen Gm . 78
Oberbecksener Str en · Germany
32547 Bad Oeynhaus 1 - 7900-0
Telefon: +49 (0)5731 - 7900-199
Telefax: +49 (0)573· post@end.de
http://www.end.de

(1)
(2)
Gate valves BT ½" ... 1" VN ¼" ... 1" CK3003 DN15 ... DN50
AA ½" ... 2" BV ¼“ ... ¾“ VO DN25 CK5000 DN40 ... DN250
AB ¼" ... 1" CB ¼" ... 2½" VS DN15 ... DN25 CK5003 DN40 ... DN25
AC ǩ" ... 2" CO-CO ½" ... 2" VT DN15 ... DN25 CK5100 DN40 ... DN50
AD ½" ... 2" HF ¼" ... 1" ZA ¼" ... 1", DN10 ... DN25 CK5200 DN40 ... DN50
AE ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25 HO DN10 ... DN15 ZB ¼" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25 CW5400 DN40 ... DN50
AV ¼" ... 1" IB ¼" ... 2" ZD ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25 DR DN50 ... DN300
BE Ǫ" ... 3" IK ¼" ... 1" ZE ¼" ... 1", DN10 ... DN25 EB ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25
BF ¼" ... 3" IL ¼" ... 1" ZF ¼" ... 1" MR ¼" ... 3"
BS ½" ... 1¼" IW ¼" ... 1" ZG ¼" ... 1" RG DN15 ... DN25
CA5014 DN40 ... DN80 KA ½" ... 1" ZH ½" ... 1" TD Ǫ" ... 3"
CA5015 DN40 ... DN50 KFE Ǫ" ... ¾" ZK DN15 ... DN25 TG ½" ... 2"
CA5214 DN40 ... DN32 NK Ǫ“ ... 4", DN10 ... DN100 ZL ¼" ... 1" TR Ǫ“ ... 4"
CD5010 DN15 ... DN25 PB ǩ ... 2" ZM ¼" ... 1" VB ¼“ ... 2“
CV3010 DN15 ... DN25 PD ½" ... 1" ZP DN15 ... DN25 ZR DN15 ... DN200
CV5010 DN15 ... DN25 SK ½" ... 3", DN10 ... DN80 ZU ¼" ... 1" Sight glasses
CV5020 DN15 ... DN25 TB ¼" ... 1" Pipe fittings SG ¼" ... 2", DN15 ... DN150
IC ¼" ... 4" TE ½" ... 2" FG ǩ" ... 4" Strainer
MV ½" TF DN20 ... DN25 FS DN15 ... DN150 AS ¼“ ... 1“
TC ¼" ... 4" TH ½" ... 1" GE Ø6 ... Ø20 AS DN15 ... DN25
Pressure reducer TT Ǫ" ... 1" GR Ø8 ... Ø28 BG Ǫ" ... 2"
ID Ǫ" ... ¾" TV Ǫ" ... 1" GV Ø6 ... Ø20 CU DN15 ... DN250
MB ½" ... 2" VD ¼" ... 1" TE Ø6 ... Ø25 EA ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25
MC ½" ... 2" VD DN10 ... DN25 TV Ø6 ... Ø20 IG ¼" ... 4"
Pressure relief valves VE ¼" ... 1" WE Ø6 ... Ø38 KU DN15 ... DN100
NG Ǫ" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25 VF ǩ“ ... ½" WV Ø6 ... Ø20 Water-shock damper
Ball valves VH ǩ“ ... 1" Non-return valves TS ½"
AG ¼" ... 1" VH3100 ½" ... 1" AH ¼" ... 1½"
BC ǩ“ ... ¾" VK DN15 ... DN25 AR ½" ... 1"
BK DN15 ... DN25 VL ¼" ... 1" BH Ǫ" ... 3"

Germany

ren GmbH & Co. KG
END-Armatu . 78
(7) On behalf 32547 Bad Oeynhaus 1 - 7900-0
Bad Oeynhausen, 04. July 2011
Telefon: +49 (0)5731 - 7900-199
573
Telefax: +49 (0) · post@end.de
http://www.end.de


watergates
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG END-Automation GmbH & Co. KG Watergates GmbH & Co. KG
Oberbecksener Str.78 Oberbecksener Str.78 Oberbecksener Str.70
D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen
Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 341 Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 342 Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 321
Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0 Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7901-0 Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0
Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199 Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7901-999 Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199
Internet http://www.end.de Internet http://www.end.de Internet http://www.watergates.de
E-Mail post@end.de E-Mail post@end.de E-Mail post@watergates.de
Rückschlagventile DEUTSCH
check valves
ENGLISH
Original Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung

Translation of the original installation and
maintenance manual
Bitte lesen Sie vor Installation Ihrer Armatur diese Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung sorgfältig durch.
Die Installation und Wartung darf nur durch qualifiziertes Personal durchgeführt werden.
Bitte beachten Sie die in dieser Anleitung aufgeführten Sicherheitshinweise!
Before installing and maintaining your valve, read this manual carefully.
Installation and maintenance is allowed for skilled employees only.
Please pay attention to the safety advices!
BW-RVA
©2005 - MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG, Vlotho
Alle Rechte an Texten und Bildern, auch die der Übersetzung, sind vorbehalten.
Dieses Handbuch darf nicht, auch nicht in Auszügen, in irgendeiner Form (Druck, Fotokopie, Mikrofilm oder
weitere Verfahren) ohne schriftliche Zustimmung reproduziert oder unter Verwendung elektronischer Systeme
verarbeitet, vervielfältigt oder verbreitet werden.
The property rights of all texts and pictures are subject to MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG. It is
not allowed to change or duplicate even parts of it without written permission.
Änderungen sind vorbehalten.

Errors excepted regarding print and technical changes.
Auflage: September 2014, Revision 1

Edition: September 2014, Revision 1
Anfragen richten Sie bitte schriftlich an:
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG

Industriestr. 9
32602 Vlotho
Germany
- DE 2 -
BW-RVA DEUTSCH
Sicherheitshinweise
Sicherheitshinweise für die Montage und Inbetriebnahme: Die Inbetriebnahme der Armatur darf erst
erfolgen, wenn die Bestimmungen der MRL 2006/42/EG für die Gesamtmaschine erfüllt sind.
Alle Montage-, Wartungs- und Reparaturarbeiten an den Armaturen dürfen nur von autorisiertem und
qualifiziertem Fachpersonal durchgeführt werden.
Eigenmächtige Veränderungen sowie die Verwendung von nicht Originalersatzteilen schließen eine
Haftung für die daraus resultierenden Schäden aus.
Nationale Vorschriften zur Unfallverhütung sowie ortsgebundene Sicherheitsvorschriften des

Betreibers werden durch diese Betriebsanleitung nicht ersetzt und sind in jedem Fall als vorrangig zu
betrachten.
Es darf keine Armatur betrieben werden, deren zugelassene Druck-/Temperaturgrenzen und

Medienbeständigkeit für die Betriebsbedingungen nicht ausreichen.
Wenn eine Armatur aus einer Rohrleitung ausgebaut werden muss, kann Medium aus der Leitung
oder aus der Armatur austreten. Bei gesundheitsschädlichen oder gefährlichen Medien muss die
Rohrleitung vollständig entleert sein, bevor die Armatur ausgebaut wird. Vorsicht bei Rückständen,
die nachfließen könnten.
Zum Anschluss des Rückschlagventils an Ihr Rohrsystem benötigen Sie passende Schlüssel!
Alle Arbeiten dürfen nur an einer drucklos und stromlos geschalteten Armatur erfolgen.
Bitte achten Sie darauf, dass das verwendete Dichtmittel für das Durchfluss-Medium geeignet ist!
Die Spannungsversorgung muss bauseits durch eine Elektrofachkraft erfolgen!
Verletzungsgefahr! Hineinführen von Körperteilen und Gegenständen in die Armatur kann zu

Durch Rückstände des Betriebsmediums können Gefahren entstehen, gegebenenfalls

Sicherheitshandschuhe, Schutzbrille etc. tragen.
- DE 3-
DEUTSCH BW-RVA
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Sicherheitshinweise..........................................................................................................................................3
Inhaltsverzeichnis .............................................................................................................................................4
Zu dieser Anleitung...........................................................................................................................................5
Ziel der Anleitung ............................................................................................................................................5
Aktuelle Dokumentation ..................................................................................................................................5
Gültigkeit der Anleitung...................................................................................................................................5
Abkürzungen und Symbole.............................................................................................................................5
Leistungsbeschreibung....................................................................................................................................6
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung ................................................................................................................6
Lagerung, Transport, Entsorgung ...................................................................................................................6
Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen.....................................................................................................................6
Gerätebeschreibung .........................................................................................................................................7
Wartung .............................................................................................................................................................7
Tätigkeitsbeschreibung ....................................................................................................................................8
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines Rückschlagventils mit Gewindeanschluss ..........................................8
- DE 4 -
BW-RVA DEUTSCH
Zu dieser Anleitung
Ziel der Anleitung
Die vorliegenden Informationen ermöglichen es Ihnen, die Armatur fachgerecht zu installieren

und zu warten.
Die Anleitung richtet sich an technisch qualifiziertes Personal. Es wird vorausgesetzt, dass
bestimmtes Fachvokabular verstanden wird und dass technische Zeichnungen gelesen werden
können.
Sollte dies nicht der Fall sein, informieren Sie bitte Ihren zuständigen Kundenbetreuer bei MIT.
Aktuelle Dokumentation
MIT erklärt die Konformität gemäß Konformitätserklärung. Die Konformitätserklärung kann bei
Bedarf angefordert werden.
Wir bitten Sie, sich regelmäßig über aktualisierte Versionen dieser Anleitung zu informieren.
Diese Anleitung unterliegt nicht der Revisionierung und stellt lediglich den zum Zeitpunkt des
Drucks aktuellen Informationsstand MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG. Aktuelle
Informationen zu Ihrem Produkt können Sie jederzeit unter www.systemarmaturen.de abrufen.
Gültigkeit der Anleitung
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG behält sich Änderungen an der Armatur sowie
Erweiterungen und Änderungen der vorliegenden Anleitung, die dem technischen Fortschritt
dienen, vor.

lesen! Oberfläche!
Werkzeug Vorsicht!
notwendig Spannung
Zu Ihrer Dokumente

gefahr! Anleitung
Betriebsstoff
notwendig
- DE 5-
DEUTSCH BW-RVA
Rückschlagventile der Baureihe RVA (Artikel 114266) der MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH
& Co. KG sind zum Einsatz im industriellen Bereich geeignet. Die Armaturen ermöglichen das
Absperren neutraler, gasförmiger und flüssiger Medien. Die Gehäuse- und Dichtmaterialien
müssen für das eingesetzte Medium und den angegebenen Temperaturbereich geeignet sein.
Verletzungsgefahr! Hineinführen von Körperteilen und Gegenständen in die Armatur kann zu

MIT-Produkte sind i.d.R. durch Umverpackungen vor äußeren Einflüssen wie Feuchtigkeit oder
Schmutz geschützt. Wir empfehlen, diese Umverpackung erst kurz vor Montagebeginn zu
entfernen, um die Geräte vor Verunreinigungen zu schützen.
Bei Einlagerung ist darauf zu achten, dass die Geräte trocken und schmutzfrei untergebracht
werden. Lange Lagerzeiten können eine Erhöhung des Losbrechmomentes zu Folge haben. Erst
nach Betätigung der Armatur wird das Nenndrehmoment wieder erreicht.
Auf die Handhabung beim Transport können wir jedoch nur mit Ihrer Hilfe Einfluss nehmen – bitte
informieren Sie uns unverzüglich wenn die Ware bereits mit beschädigter Verpackung bei Ihnen
eintrifft! Die Kontrolle der Produkte muss unmittelbar nach Wareneingang erfolgen und sollte eine
Prüfung der technischen Parameter und eine Sichtprüfung beinhalten. Verdeckte Mängel sind
unverzüglich nach Entdeckung zu rügen, andernfalls gilt die Ware als genehmigt.
Das Verpackungsmaterial und die Armatur sind nach den örtlichen gesetzlichen Bestimmungen
und Verordnungen sachgerecht zu entsorgen. Auf die Beachtung der abfallrechtlichen
Bestimmungen bei der Entsorgung der aus der Anlage entnommenen Stoffe wird hingewiesen.
Warenmängel oder Abweichungen der Menge müssen spätestens 7 Tage nach Erhalt der Ware
schriftlich angezeigt werden, andernfalls erlischt der Gewährleistungsanspruch!
Rohrleitungen sollten vor Einbau, spätestens jedoch vor Inbetriebnahme durchgespült werden.
Automatisierte Armaturen bedürfen einer besonderen Beachtung bei der Inbetriebnahme! Diese
Geräte können im Werk nur unter Werkstattbedingungen getestet und eingestellt werden.
Sicherheitsstellungen sollten gezielt simuliert und getestet werden. Die Endlagen
(offen/geschlossen) müssen überprüft und ggf. nachjustiert werden! Zusätzliche Wegschalter
oder andere elektrische Geräte zur Stellungsrückmeldung ebenfalls auf richtige Justierung
überprüfen!
- DE 6 -
BW-RVA DEUTSCH
Gerätebeschreibung
Wartung
Diese Rückschlagventile sind wartungsfrei.
Wir empfehlen ihnen, bei einem defekten einteiligen Rückschlagventil die ganze Armatur
auszutauschen!
- DE 7-
DEUTSCH BW-RVA
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines Rückschlagventils mit Gewindeanschluss
Der Einbau darf nur in drucklosem Zustand erfolgen!
Zum Anschluss des Rückschlagventils an Ihr Rohrsystem benötigen Sie passende Schlüssel!
Geeignetes Dichtmaterial an den Rohrleitungsenden

anbringen, bei PTFE-Band oder Hanfdichtungen die
Einschraubrichtung beachten.
Nur dem Einsatzzweck entsprechende Dichtmaterialien
verwenden.
Bitte achten Sie darauf, dass das verwendete Dichtmittel für das Durchfluss-Medium geeignet
ist!
Rückschlagventil in die Rohrleitung einschrauben, dabei auf die Durchflussrichtung des Mediums
achten!
Aushärtezeit des Dichtmaterials abwarten, erst dann die Rohrleitung mit Druck beaufschlagen.
- DE 8 -
BW-RVA DEUTSCH
Kontakt:

Industriestr. 9
32602 Vlotho
Germany
Tel. +49 (5228) 952-0
Fax +49 (5228) 952-90
- DE 9-
ENGLISH BW-RVA
Translation of the original installation and maintenance manual

Safety instructions
Safety instructions for assembly and initiation: The initiation of the valve is unauthorized until it
complies with the conditions of the machinery directive 2006/42/EC.
Assembly, maintenance and repairing of the valves are allowed for authorised and qualified
professionals only.
Modifications of the valve and the use of non-authorized spare parts exclude the liability of resulting
damage.
National directives for the prevention of accidents as well as local safety instructions of the user are
paramount and are not replaced by this document.
It is not allowed to use the valves, if the operating conditions do not match the pressure-temperature-
diagram and the medium resistance.
If you demount a valve in a piping, medium may drop out. Therefore, if the medium is hazardous to
health, the piping must be emptied completely. Be careful with residues that may flow out later.
For connecting the valve to the piping system a suitable wrench is required.
Installation in unpressurized and non-energized state only!
Please pay attention to the fact that the used sealing compounds means are suitable for the flowing
medium!
The power supply must be done on site by a qualified electrician!
Danger of injury! Do not put parts of your body or other things into the valves. This can cause
Residue of the operating medium may cause danger. If necessary wear safety shoes, gloves and
glasses.
- EN 10 -
BW-RVA ENGLISH
Content
Translation of the original installation and maintenance manual............................................................... 10
Safety instructions .......................................................................................................................................... 10
Content ............................................................................................................................................................ 11
This manual ..................................................................................................................................................... 12
Intention of this manual................................................................................................................................. 12
Latest documentation ................................................................................................................................... 12
Validity of the manual ................................................................................................................................... 12
Shortcuts and symbols ................................................................................................................................. 12
Specification of service .................................................................................................................................. 13
Intended usage ............................................................................................................................................. 13
Storage, transport, disposal .......................................................................................................................... 13
Terms of general application ........................................................................................................................ 13
Device description .......................................................................................................................................... 14
Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................... 14
Activity description ......................................................................................................................................... 15
Installation of a check valve with threaded connection ................................................................................. 15
EN 11-
ENGLISH BW-RVA
This manual
This information enables you to install and maintain your valve.

This manual is for skilled employees. We assume that you are familiar with the common valve
terminology and that you can read technical documents.
If you don’t meet these expectations please inform your personal customer advisor at MIT!
Latest documentation on the internet
MIT declares the conformity with a declaration of conformity. Please order it if required.
Please check regularly for updated versions of this document. This manual is not audited and
represents only the current information of MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. at the time
of print. You can get current information of your product at any time on the internet:
www.systemarmaturen.de.
Validity of the manual
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG declares that it reserves its right to modify both
the manual and the valve if necessary for technical advancement.

Danger!
Tools necessary
Voltage.


Supply items
needed!
- EN 12 -
BW-RVA ENGLISH
Intended usage
The check valves of the series RVA (article 114266) made by MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik
GmbH & Co. KG are suitable for the producing industries. The armatures allow the distribution of
neutral gaseous and liquid media. The housing and sealing compounds must be suitable for the
assigned medium and temperature range.
Danger of injury! Don´t put parts of your body or articles into the armature. This can cause
MIT-products are protected by packing against external influences such as humidity or dirt. We
recommend removing the packing only briefly before beginning of assembly in order to protect
the devices against impurities.
During storage it is to be made certain that the devices are dry and dirt-free accommodated.
After a long period of storage the breakaway torque may increase. After opening and closing the
valve manually for one time the rated breakaway torque can be reached again
We can only take influence on the transport process with your assistance - please inform us
immediately if the commodity arrives with damaged packing! Examination of technical parameters
and a visual product check should take place immediately after delivery. Subsequent complains
can not be accepted.
The packaging material and the valve need to be properly disposed of according to the local legal
requirements and regulations.
Please consider the waste legislation requirements for the disposal of substances withdrawn from
the system.
Goods faults or divergences of the amount must be indicated at the latest 7 days on receipt of
the product in writing, otherwise the guarantee claim expires!
Please ensure that no humidity gets into the piping. Automated valves need a special attention in
time of initial operation! These devices can be tested at MIT only under workshop conditions.
Security positions should be simulated and tested straight. The final positions must be checked
(opened/closed) and be re-adjusted if necessary! Additional switches or other electric devices to
the position feedback must be likewise checked for correct alignment.
EN 13-
ENGLISH BW-RVA
Device description
Maintenance
These check valves are maintenance-free.
In case of a defective check valve we recommend the substitution of the valve.
- EN 14 -
BW-RVA ENGLISH
Activity description
Installation of a check valve with threaded connection
Installation in unpressurized and non-energized state only!
For connecting the valve to the piping system a suitable wrench is required.
Attach suitable sealing compounds to the pipe ends, if you use

PTFE tape or hemp seals follow the direction of thread.
Make sure the used sealing compound is suitable for the
application conditions.
Please pay attention to the fact that the used sealing compounds are suitable for the flowing
medium!
Screw pipe ends into the threaded ends of the check valve, pay attention to the flow direction of
the medium.
Do not give pressure on the piping before the sealing material is hardened.
EN 15-
BW-RVA
Contact:

Industriestr. 9
32602 Vlotho
Germany
Tel. +49 (5228) 952-0
Fax +49 (5228) 952-90
- EN 16 -
Mounting and Operating Manual
Non-Return valves
Swing-Check valves

Impressum
This documentation may neither be altered, expanded, reproduced nor passed to third parties without the writ-
ten agreement of END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG. This restriction also applies to the corresponding drawings.
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG has the right to change parts of the non-return valves / swing check valves
at any time without prior or direct notice to the client. The contents of this publication are subject to change
without notice.
The products are specified by the statements in this documentation; no assurance of the properties is given.

Telefon: 05731 / 7900 - 0
Telefax: 05731 / 7900 - 80
E-Mail: post@end.de
Edition: 11/02
Contents
Contents
1 Foreword 4
2 General Advice 5
2.1 Validity 5
2.3 Complaints 5
2.4 Guarantee 5
3 Safety Advice 7
3.1 Personal advice 7
3.1.1 Safety advices for mounting 7
3.2 Device safety 9
4 Name-plate 10
5 Non-Return valves, Swing-Check valves 11

5.1 General 11
5.3 Operation 11
5.4 Mounting / Disassemble 11
5.4.1 Mounting with threaded connection 12
5.4.2 Mounting with welded connection 12
5.4.2.1 Disassemble of the bonnet and the inner parts 13
5.4.2.2 Welding the body between pipes 13
5.4.2.3 Mounting of the bonnet and the inner parts 14
5.4.3 Mounting of the valve with flanged connection 15
5.5 Maintenance 15
Foreword
1 Foreword
Dear customer,
these operation and installation manuals are intended to give you the knowledge, which is
necessary for you to be able to carry out the mounting and adjustment of the non-return valves /
swing-check valves rapidly and correctly.
notes.
Only instructed and qualified mechanician should mount, adjust or maintain the non-return valves
/ swing-check valves.
If you have any questions in relation to the non-return valves / swing-check valves we shall be
pleased to answer them.
The telephone number will be found on the inside cover of these operation and installation
manual.
Yours
General Advice
2 General Advice
2.1 Validity
This mounting and installation manual is valid for the standard versions of the non-return valves /
swing-check valves and their variants.
Please check directly after delivery the non-return valves /swing-check valves for any transport
damages and deficiencies and with reference to the accompanying delivery note the number of
parts.
2.3 Complaints

2.4 Warranty
For our non-return valves / swing-check valves we give a guarantee period in accordance with
the sales contract.
how to avoid damage to property. Observe these paragraphs without fail!
Safety Advice
3 Safety Advice
Depending on the technical circumstances and the time under and at which the non-return valves
/ swing-check valves are mounted, adjusted and commissioned, you must take into account par-
ticular safety aspects in each case!
If, for example, a non-return valve / swing-check valve works a slide in an operational chemical
plant, the potential hazards of commissioning have another dimension from that when this is only
being carried out for test purposes an a „dry“ part of the plant in the assembly room!
Since we do not know the circumstances at the time of the mounting/adjustment/commissioning,

you may find advices on hazards in the following descriptions which are not relevant to you.
3.1 Personal advice
3.1.1 Safety advices for mounting
We wish to point out expressly that the mounting, adjusting and at accessories the pneumatical
and electrical installation of the butterfly valves must be carried out by trained specialist person-
nel having mechanical, pneumatical and electrical knowledge!
Secure that the machine / plant come up to the Machinery Directive after the mounting and
installing of the ball valves.
Switch off all the devices / machines / plant affected by mounting or repair.
will cause potential danger.
If appropriate, in the event of a fault in the butterfly valve (in a plant which is in operation) inform
the shift foreman / safety engineer or the works manager without delay about the fault, in order,
for example, to avoid an outflow / overflow of chemicals or the discharge of gases in good time
by means of suitable measures!
Before mounting or repairing, remove the pressure from pneumatic / hydraulic devices / machines
/ plant.
machines / plant.
carrying out the mounting / repair work.
tons/ safety valves, etc)!
As a result of the starting of the non-return valves / swing-check valves the flow of gases, steam,
liquids, etc. may be enabled or interrupted! Satisfy yourself that, as a result of the starting or the
test adjustment no potential hazards will be produced for the personnel or the environment!
Safety Advice
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting up or shutting down
of the device / machine / plant.!
By ending the adjustment check the correct function and should the occasion arise the position
of the non-return valve / swing-check valve.
Check the function of the limit switches (option)!
Check, whether the armature will be closed totally, if the control signals the appropriate limit
stop!
Through suitable measures, prevent links being trapped by moving actuating elements!
valves)!
Carry out the starting and the adjustments only in accordance with the instructions discribed in
this documentation!
Adjusting switches on ball valves with options (e.g. actuators, solenoid valves, limit switches)
there is the risk that live parts (230 V AC~) can be touched!
Therefore the adjustments must be carried out only by the electrician or a person having adequate
training, who is aware of the potential hazard!
Do not carry out any maintenances / repairs if the non-return vales / swing check valves will be
under pressure.
Before disassembling the armature some essential points should be clarified!

• Will the non-return valves / swing-check valves to be disassembled be replaced by
another immediately?
• If appropriate, does the production process of the plant needed to be stopped?
• Is it necessary to inform specific personnel about the disassembly?
If necessary, inform the shift foreman/ safety engineer or the manager about the maintenance
or repair without delay in order, for example, to avoid an outflow/ overflow of chemicals or a
discharge of gases in good time by means of suitable measures!
You have to relieve the pressure in the pipes in which the butterfly valve is mounted.
Switch off pilot pressure and the power supply and relieve the pressure in the pipes.
If necessary set up warning signs in order to prevent

• the inadvertent starting up of the devices/machines/plants in which the armature is
mounted
• the switching on of pilot medium supply, pilot power supply and/or the power supply
of actuators and accessories.
In case of defect in the non-return vales / swing check valves make contact to the supplier. The
telephone number will be found on the back cover of these mounting and installation manual.
Safety Advice
If you ascertain a damage of the non-return vales / swing check valves, isolate the device from
the mains. Please observe the safety advices.
Do not mount, start or adjust the non-return vales / swing check valves if itself, the pipes or a
mounted actuator will be damaged.
After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the non-return vales / swing check
valves and the tightness of the pipe connections.
3.2 Device safety
The non-return valves / swing-check valves

• are quality products which are produced in accordance to the recognized industrial
regulations.
• left the manufacturer`s work in a perfect safety condition.
with the description in these instructions, technically correctly and with the greatest possible
precision .
We assume, as a trained specialist you are having mechanical and electrical knowledge!
Satisfy yourself that the non-return vales /swing check valves will only be used within their
admissible limiting value (see the technical data) .
The non-return vales / swing check valves must be used only for a purpose corresponding to their
construction!
The non-return vales / swing check valves must be used within the values specified in the techni-
cal data!
The operating of the non-return vales / swing check valves outside the nominal temperature
range could destroy the seals and the bearings.
The operating of the non-return vales / swing check valves outside the nominal pressure range
could destroy the inner parts and the body.
Do not mount, start or adjust the non-return vales / swing check valves if itself, the pipes or a
mounted actuator will be damaged.
After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the non-return vales / swing check
valves and the tightness of the pipe connections.
Name-plate
4 Name-plate
In some cases the armatures/valves will be provided with a nameplate, which permitts a definite identification
of the armatures/valves and shows the most important technical data to you. The name-plate should not be
displaced or changed.
END-Armaturen
END-ArmaturenGmbH GmbH & Co. KG KG
& Co.
D-32547
D-32547BadBadOeynhausen
Oeynhausen
+49
+49(0)5731
(0)5731- 7900-0 • www.end.de
- 7900-0 www.end.de
Art.Nr.:
Art.Nr.: ZA310028-ED620632
ZA310028-ED620632
Serial: 313857
Serie: ARMAU813857
Pressure range (PS): 16 bar
Betriebsdruck (PS): 16 bar
Pilot pressure:
Steuerdruck:
6-8
6...8 bar G/DN: 2”
bar
Temperature
Volt: rangeHz:(TS): -30°C ... +180°C
Fluidgruppe 1
Size (DN):
Temperatur (TS): -30...+180°C 50 / G2"
Testing pressure
Prüfdruck (PT): (PT):
60 bar 60 bar
Herstellungsdatum:
Fluidgroup: 25.11.2009 1 0062
Date of manufacturing: 11.2002
0062
Fig. 4.1 - name-plate
Art.No. article number of the valve / armature

Serial order- or production- number
Pressure range (PS) max. admissible working pressure of the valve / armature [bar]
Size (DN) connecting size of the valve / armature
Testing pressure (PT) testing pressure of the body of the valve / armature
Fluidgroup allowed fluidgroup of the valve / armature
Date of manufacturing month and year of manufacturing of the valve / armature
Non-Return valves, Swing-Check valves
5 Non-Return valves, Swing-Check valves
5.1 General
Before you mount /disassemble, adjust or commission a non-return valve or a swing-check valve
you must have read the
Safety advice
If you have not read the safety advices until now please read these important advices now and
turn back to this point.
Non-return valves and swing-check valves are used to prevent the back-flow of media.
It should only be used clean liquids and gases, on which the material of the valves and the material
of the sealings will be resistant. Pollution or using outside the nominal pressure range and/or the
nominal temperature range should causes damages on the valves especially on the seals.
5.3 Operation
Non-return valves and swing-check vales need no special operation .
5.4 Mounting / Disassemble
The mechanical mounting is identical in all variants. It differs only by the type of connection.
Observe the flow direction which is specified on the valve body. The installation of a swing-check
valves will have take place that the flap of the swing-check valve will close by the force of gravity
automatically.
Please observe that that the installation of the swing-check valve / non-return valve will have influ-
ence on the opening pressure.
Remove all transport safety devices (e.g. plugs or caps). Observe that there won`t be any parts of
the package or other pollution in the armature.
Before mounting swing-check valve / non-return valve clean up the pipes. Pollution will reduce the
safety and the duration of life of the armature.
o.k. o.k.
Fig. 5.1 - non-return valve, swing-check valve, installation (Fig.: Art. TR100025).
Avoid stress in case of non align pipes.
5.4.1 Mounting with threaded connection
Before lay on sealing compounds, check the hardly screwing by the pipes into the valve body.
Lay on the correct sealing compounds on the pipes end. By using PTFE-ribbon or hemp seals
employment.
Screw the pipes into the connection ends of the valve.
tends to harden it.
sealing compound
harden!
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.2 - non-return valves, swing-check valves, mounting with threaded connection (Fig.: Art. BH120025)
5.4.2 Mounting with welded connection
Before welding the valve between the pipes you have to disassemble the bonnet of the non-return
valve first, to prevent the damage of the seals.
Non-Return valves, Swing-check valve
5.4.2.1 Disassemble of the bonnet and the inner parts
Clamp the valve between a vice carefully. By using guard plates you can prevent the damage of
the ends of the valve body.
Loosen the bonnet with a fit spanner.
Screw the bonnet out of the body. By doing this be very careful, because there will be a resilience
on the bonnet. Take the spring and the inner part out of the bonnet and put the parts aside.
resilience
Fig. 5.3 - non-return valves, swing check valve, disassembly of the bonnet and the inner parts (Fig.: Art. EB310064)
5.4.2.2 Welding the body between pipes
The safety demands be welding are depending on the place and the position of the point of weld.
Welding the parts in a serviceable device/machine/plant the potential of danger is as higher as
If appropriate inform the shift foreman / safety engineer or the works manager and the fire brigade
of your factory.
By welding observe your own national guide lines about safety and the prevention of accidents.
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.4 - non-return valves, swing-check valves, welding of the body (Fig.: body of Art. EB310064)
5.4.2.3 Mounting of the bonnet and the inner parts
Before mounting the bonnet and the inner parts let the body cool down.
Insert the inner parts and the spring into the body. Take care about the correct placement of the
inner parts and the spring.
Screw the bonnet into the body. Check the correct position of the sealing at the bonnet and take
care that there will be no pollution on the sealing or on the seat.
Tighten the bonnet with a fit spanner.
cool down
o.k.
Fig. 5.5 - non-return valve, swing-check valve, mounting of the bonnet and the inner parts (Fig.: Art. EB310064)
5.4.3 Mounting of the valve with flanged connection
In the following description we assume that you have mounted the flanges at the end of the pipes
and the valve (welded flanges) and they are cooled down..
Push the valve between the flanges by using the appropriate seals. This process must happen
easily to avoid the damage of the seals.
Align the borings of the flanges and put some fit screws through the holes. Screw the fit nuts onto
the screws and tighten them up crosswise.
Fasten all screws crosswise and check the function of the valve. Observe the maximum torque of
the screws.
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.6 - non-return valves, swing-check valve, mounting with flanged connection (Fig.: Art. KU3000xx)
5.5 Maintenance
Before you maintain or shut down a non-return valve / swing-check valve you have to read the
Safety advice
to this page.
Non-return valves need on maintenance
If you determinate that there is a damage to the valve switch off the device/ machine/ plant!
However before doing this, it is essential to refer to the
Safety advice.
Notice
Notice
(1)
(2)
Butterfly valves NG DN32 ... DN100 VO DN32 ... DN200 Non-return valves
HA DN50 ... DN300 Ball valves VS DN32 ... DN200 AR 1¼" ... 2"
TA DN40 ... DN300 AG 1¼" ... 2" VT DN32 ... DN100 CK3003 DN65 ... DN200
WA DN50 ... DN300 BK DN32 ... DN100 VU 4" CK5003 DN32 ... DN200
WM DN50 ... DN300 IK 1¼" ... 2" ZA 1¼" ... 4" CK5100 DN65 ... DN250
Gate valves IL 1¼" ... 4" ZA DN32 ... DN100 CK5200 DN65 ... DN250
AB 1¼" ... 2" IW 1¼" ... 2" ZB 1¼" ... 2" CW5400 DN65 ... DN250
AE 1¼" ... 3" KA 1¼" ... 3" ZB DN32 ... DN50 EB 1¼" ... 3"
AE DN32 ... DN80 PD 1¼" ... 2" ZD 1¼" ... 4" EB DN32 ... DN80
CA5014 DN100 ... DN300 TB 1¼" ... 4“ ZD DN32 ... DN100 RG1300 DN32 ... DN100
CA5015 DN65 ... DN300 TF DN32 ... DN200 ZE 1¼" ... 4" RG33xx DN32 ... DN200
CA5214 DN40 ... DN200 TH 1¼" ZE DN32 ... DN100 RK DN32 ... DN400
CD5010 DN32 ... DN200 VD 1¼" ... 4" ZF 1¼" ... 4" TD 4"
CV3010 DN32 ... DN150 VD DN32 ... DN100 ZG 1¼" ... 2" Strainer
CV5010 DN32 ... DN200 VH 1¼" ... 2" ZH 1¼" ... 2" AS 1¼” ... 3”
CV5020 DN32 ... DN200 VH3100 1¼" ... 2" ZK DN32 ... DN100 AS DN32 ... DN200
Pressure reducer VK DN32 ... DN200 ZL 1¼" ... 3" EA 1¼" ... 3"
SD Ǫ" ... 2" VK/PN40 DN32 ... DN200 ZM 1¼" ... 2" EA DN32 ... DN80
Pressure relief valves VL 1¼" ...2", 3" ZP DN32 ... DN200
NG 1¼" ... 1½" VN 1¼" ... 2" ZU 1¼" ... 3"

Germany
(7) Noti¿ed body for conformity assessment PED an Quality-Management-System:
Bureau Veritas S.A.

Paris / Frankreich
Kennzeichen 0062
(8) Certi¿cate numbers: Quality Management System: INT110198DE

Certi¿cate of System approval PED: 2011/70.10.1777/P
(10) On behalf bH & Co. KG Bad Oeynhausen, 07. July 2011

END-Armaturen Gm . 78
32547 Bad Oeynhaus 1 - 7900-0
Telefon: +49 (0)5731 - 7900-199
http://www.end.de

(1)
(2)
Gate valves BT ½" ... 1" VN ¼" ... 1" CK3003 DN15 ... DN50
AA ½" ... 2" BV ¼“ ... ¾“ VO DN25 CK5000 DN40 ... DN250
AB ¼" ... 1" CB ¼" ... 2½" VS DN15 ... DN25 CK5003 DN40 ... DN25
AC ǩ" ... 2" CO-CO ½" ... 2" VT DN15 ... DN25 CK5100 DN40 ... DN50
AD ½" ... 2" HF ¼" ... 1" ZA ¼" ... 1", DN10 ... DN25 CK5200 DN40 ... DN50
AE ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25 HO DN10 ... DN15 ZB ¼" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25 CW5400 DN40 ... DN50
AV ¼" ... 1" IB ¼" ... 2" ZD ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25 DR DN50 ... DN300
BE Ǫ" ... 3" IK ¼" ... 1" ZE ¼" ... 1", DN10 ... DN25 EB ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25
BF ¼" ... 3" IL ¼" ... 1" ZF ¼" ... 1" MR ¼" ... 3"
BS ½" ... 1¼" IW ¼" ... 1" ZG ¼" ... 1" RG DN15 ... DN25
CA5014 DN40 ... DN80 KA ½" ... 1" ZH ½" ... 1" TD Ǫ" ... 3"
CA5015 DN40 ... DN50 KFE Ǫ" ... ¾" ZK DN15 ... DN25 TG ½" ... 2"
CA5214 DN40 ... DN32 NK Ǫ“ ... 4", DN10 ... DN100 ZL ¼" ... 1" TR Ǫ“ ... 4"
CD5010 DN15 ... DN25 PB ǩ ... 2" ZM ¼" ... 1" VB ¼“ ... 2“
CV3010 DN15 ... DN25 PD ½" ... 1" ZP DN15 ... DN25 ZR DN15 ... DN200
CV5010 DN15 ... DN25 SK ½" ... 3", DN10 ... DN80 ZU ¼" ... 1" Sight glasses
CV5020 DN15 ... DN25 TB ¼" ... 1" Pipe fittings SG ¼" ... 2", DN15 ... DN150
IC ¼" ... 4" TE ½" ... 2" FG ǩ" ... 4" Strainer
MV ½" TF DN20 ... DN25 FS DN15 ... DN150 AS ¼“ ... 1“
TC ¼" ... 4" TH ½" ... 1" GE Ø6 ... Ø20 AS DN15 ... DN25
Pressure reducer TT Ǫ" ... 1" GR Ø8 ... Ø28 BG Ǫ" ... 2"
ID Ǫ" ... ¾" TV Ǫ" ... 1" GV Ø6 ... Ø20 CU DN15 ... DN250
MB ½" ... 2" VD ¼" ... 1" TE Ø6 ... Ø25 EA ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25
MC ½" ... 2" VD DN10 ... DN25 TV Ø6 ... Ø20 IG ¼" ... 4"
Pressure relief valves VE ¼" ... 1" WE Ø6 ... Ø38 KU DN15 ... DN100
NG Ǫ" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25 VF ǩ“ ... ½" WV Ø6 ... Ø20 Water-shock damper
Ball valves VH ǩ“ ... 1" Non-return valves TS ½"
AG ¼" ... 1" VH3100 ½" ... 1" AH ¼" ... 1½"
BC ǩ“ ... ¾" VK DN15 ... DN25 AR ½" ... 1"
BK DN15 ... DN25 VL ¼" ... 1" BH Ǫ" ... 3"

Germany

ren GmbH & Co. KG
END-Armatu . 78
(7) On behalf 32547 Bad Oeynhaus 1 - 7900-0
Bad Oeynhausen, 04. July 2011
Telefon: +49 (0)5731 - 7900-199
http://www.end.de


watergates
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG END-Automation GmbH & Co. KG Watergates GmbH & Co. KG
Oberbecksener Str.78 Oberbecksener Str.78 Oberbecksener Str.70
D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen
Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 341 Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 342 Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 321
Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0 Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7901-0 Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0
Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199 Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7901-999 Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199
Internet http://www.end.de Internet http://www.end.de Internet http://www.watergates.de
E-Mail post@end.de E-Mail post@end.de E-Mail post@watergates.de
D Einbau- und Bedienungsanleitung
GB Fitting and operating instructions 17-4-1
F Instructions pour le montage et l’entretien
Wartungseinheiten
Filterregler - Nebelöler
Service units
filter regulator – oil-mist lubricator
les groupes de surveillance

détendeur à filtre- lubrificateur
Wartungseinheiten, aus Filter- Air treatment units normally consisting Les groupes de surveillance, composés
regler und Öler bestehend, haben die of filter regulator, and fog lubricator are normalement d'un détendeur à filtre, et
Aufgabe, Druckluft als Betriebsmittel intended for cleaning compressed air for d'un lubrificateur à brouillard d'huile, ont
von flüssigen und festen Bestandteilen workshop purposes from liquid and solid pour fonction d'épurer l'air comprimé
zu reinigen, den Luftdruck zu regeln und contamination, for pressure regulation and servant d'agent moteur en le
die Luft mit feinst vernebeltem Öl zur for providing a fine oil spray for the débarrassant des particules liquideset
Schmierung von Zylindern, Ventilen, lubrication of cylinders, valves, compressed solides, de réguler la pression d'air et
druckluftgesteuerten Werkzeugen und air controlled tools ect. d'imprégner l'air avec un brouillard d'huile
dergleichen zu durchsetzen. In richtiger, When used correctly and in accordance extrêmement fin pour le graissage des
den jeweiligen Betriebsverhältnissen with the respective operating conditions, cylindres, soupapes, outils pneu-
entsprechender Anwendung erhalten they maintain the performance level of matiques, etc.
sie den Leistungsgrad pneumatischer pneumatic plant and increase its service Utilisés de façon adéquate, en fonction
Anlagen und erhöhen deren life. Our special brochures covering air des conditions de service correspon-
Lebensdauer. Eine übersichtliche Dar- treatment units contain the sizes and types dantes, ils contribuent à conserver aux
stellung der einzelnen Typen und with all details in a clearly arranged table installations pneumatiques leur puissance
Größen in unserem Hauptkatalog und thus facilitating selection according to the et à prolonger leur durée de vie. La
die technischen Details in unseren operating requirements. description très claire et les détails
Datenblättern erleichtert die richtige techniques donnés par nos dépliants
Auswahl nach Maßgabe der Betriebs- spéciaux sur les différents types et
ansprüche. dimensions de groupes de surveillance
facilitent un choix adéquat en fonction des
© Riegler 17-4-1
exigences d'exploitation.
Einbau Fitting Montage
In Pfeilrichtung, so nah wie möglich an Sequence (in direction of arrow) in normal Le montage s'effectue normalement
den Verbraucher (max. 10m vor dem cases: filter regulator - fog lubricator; the (dans le sens de la flèche) dans l'ordre
Verbraucher). distance between the air treatment unit and suivant: détendeur à filtre - Lubrifica-
Einbaulage vertikal, bezogen auf die the consumerpoint should be as short as teur à brouillard d'huile, et ce à la plus
Behälter. possible. The units must be mounted faible distance possible du point de
vertically. prélèvement.
04/05 techn.Änderungen vorbehalten 1.1

17-4-1 Druckluftaufbereitung
Filterregler Filter regulator Dètendeur à filtre
Filter Filter Filtre
Druckluft enthält Kondenswasser, Rohr- Compressed air contains water condensate L'air comprimé contient de l'eau de con-
zunder, Rostteilchen, u.ä., die pneu- scale, rust particles etc. which attack densation, des oxydes de tuyauterie, des
matisch gesteuerte und betriebene pneumatically controlled and actuated tools particules de rouille etc. qui attaquent les
Werkzeuge, Druckzylinder, Ventile usw. such as compressed air cylinders, valves outils à commande ou entraînement
angreifen und auf deren Funktion störend etc. and which thus have a disturbing effect pneumatique, vérins, soupapes, etc., et
einwirken. Die Reinigung der Druckluft ist on their function. For this reason the perturbent leur bon fonctionnement. C'est
deshalb eine unerläßliche Notwendigkeit purification of compressed air is an pourquoi l'épuration de l'air comprimé est
und wird durch den Filter bewirkt. Der indispensable necessity and is undertaken une nécessité absolue, et elle est assurée
Reinigungsgrad ist von der Porenweite with the aid of filters. The filtering effect is par le filtre. Le degré d'épuration
(normal 40µ) des Sinterfilters abhängig. dependent on the pore diameter (normally (élimination des éléments solides et
Auf Wunsch können Sinterfilter mit 40µ) of the sintered filter. If required, liquides) dépend du diamètre des pores
geringerer Porenweite eingebaut werden. sintered filters with smaller pore diameter (normalement 40 microns) du filtre fritté.
can be fitted. Sur demande, nous pouvons monter des
filtres à pores de moindre diamètre.
Wartung: Kondenswasser regelmäßig ab- Servicing: Drain off the water condensate Entretien: Purger régulièrement l'eau de
lassen und Sinterfilter, wenn verschmutzt, at regular intervals and clean the sintered condensation et nettoyer le filtre fritté dès
reinigen. filter if it is dirty. qu'il est encrassé.
Ausbau: Behälter abschrauben, Removal: Unscrew the bowl. Dépose: Retirer la cuve,
Prallscheibe vom Sinterfilter lösen, Undo the twist plate from the sintered filter; dévisser l’écrou de fixation du filtre en
Sinterfilter herausnehmen. Sinterfilter in take out the sintered filter. Place the métal fritté et sortir ce dernier, le
Lösungsmittel legen (z.B. Benzin Tri usw.) sintered filter in a solvent (e.G. petrol, tricho remplacer par un filtre neuf. Replacer la
gut durchschwenken und trocknen, dann etc.), agitate well and dry. Replace the filter. cuve. Veiller à ce que le joint O-Ring soit
wieder einbauen. Auf einwandfreie Ensure that the seal is perfectly seated. For en parfait état.
Dichtung achten. cleaning of the plastic bowl, see the next
page.
Druckregler Pressure regulator Manodétendeur
Der Leitungsdruck einer Druckluftanlage The system pressure in a compressed air La pression existant dans la tuyauterie
schwankt entsprechend der Kompres- installation fluxuates according to the size d'une installation à air comprimé varie en
sorgröße (z.B. 6-10 oder 10-16 bar usw.). of the compressor (e.g. 6-10 or 10-16 bar fonction des dimensions compresseur (par
Druckregler reduzieren diesen etc.). Pressure regulators reduce this ex. 6 à 10 ou 10 à 16 bar). Les
schwankenden Leitungsdruck (Vordruck) fluxuating system pressure (upstream pres- manodétendeurs réduisent et stabilisent
auf den gewünschten Arbeitsdruck (Hinter- sure) to the desired working pressure cette pression variable (pression primaire)
© Riegler 17-4-1
druck) und halten diesen konstant. (downstream pressure) and maintain it à la pression de service désirée.
constant.
Für Wartungseinheiten werden Pressure regulators with reverse control are Pour les groupes de surveillance on utilise
Druckregler mit Rücksteuerung ver- used for air treatment units. Pressure normalement des manodétendeurs à
wendet. Druckregler mit Rücksteuerung regulators with reverse control offer the commande en retour, L'avantage de ces
haben den Vorteil, daß der Hinterdruck advantage that the downstream pressure appareils est qu'ils premettent de diminuer
ohne Luftentnahme durch Zurückdrehen can be reduced, without bleeding off air, by la pression sans prélèvement d'air, en
der Regulierschraube vermindert werden turning back the regulating screw. In dévissant la broche de réglage. Les
kann. Ferner werden die Rückstöße, addition, the blow-backs which occure in réactions qui se produisent avec les
welche bei pneumatischen Steuerungen pneumatic controls are vented to commandes pneumatiques, sont
auftreten, durch die Rücksteuerung, atmosphere by the reverse control (which at évacuées en outre dans l'atmosphère par
welche zugleich als Sicherheitsventil be- the same time can also be regarded as a la commande en retour gui fait en même
trachtet werden kann, in die Atmosphäre safety valve) thus protecting the pressure temps fonction de soupape de sûreté, ce
geleitet, wodurch das Manometer ge- gauge. qui a pour effet de protéger le manomètre.
schützt wird.
1.2 techn. Änderungen vorbehalten 04/05

Druckluftaufbereitung 17-4-1
Druckeinstellung: Handrad ziehen (Regler Pressure setting: Pull the adjusting knob, Réglage de la pression: Tourner
entriegelt), Druckregler durch drehen des or release the lock nut (Regulator ensuite le volant dans le sens des
Handrades auf den gewünschten Druck unlocked) then by tuning the knob adjust aiguilles d’une montre jusqu’à ce que
einstellen, Handrad drücken (Regler the pressure regulator to the desired le manomètre du détendeur indique la
verriegelt). pressure, finally press the adjusting knob, pression de service désirée. Bloquer
or set the lock nut (Regulator locked) down ensuite le volant à l’aide du bouton d’
to fix the unit set at the desired pressure. arrét.
Nebelöler Fog lubricator Lubrificateurs
Die Druckluft wird durch den Nebelöler mit The compressed air is enriched with a fine Grâce au lubrificateur, l'air comprimé
feinem Ölnebel angereichert und bewirkt in oil mist by the fog lubricator so that in this est enrichi d'un fin brouillard d'huile
diesem Zustand eine laufende und zuver- state it thus effects continuous and reliable et, dans cet état, assure un graissage
lässige Schmierung pneumatisch ge- lubrication of the pneumatically controlled constant et sûr des outils, vérins,
steuerter Druckluftwerkzeuge, Zylinder, compressed air tools, cylinders, valves etc. soupapes, etc. à commande
Ventile usw. pneumatique.
Bitte beachten: Mindestbetriebsdruck Please note: Minimum operating pressure Très important: La pression de ser-
0,5 bar. is 0,5 bar. vice minimale est de 0,5 bar.
Dosierung: Die Ölmenge (Tropfen pro Dosage: Set the amount of oil (drops per Dosage: Pendant la marche, régler le
Minute) während des Betriebes an der minute) on the dosaging screw as required débit d'huile (gouttes par minute)
Dosierschraube nach Bedarf einstellen. during operation. The number of drops can suivant besoin à l'aide de la vis de
Tropfenzahl im Schauglas ersichtlich. be seen in the sight-glass. dosage. Le nombre de gouttes peut
être contrôlé à travers le regard
transparent
Öleinfüllung: Einfüllschraube entfernen, Oil filling: Remove the oil filler screw. Remplissage d'huile: Dévisser le
Behälter bis zu Einfüllmarke (ca. 2/3) füllen. Fill the bowl to the upper mark (approx. 2/3 bouchon de remplissage, remplir le
Einfüllschraube gut schließen. Ölnach- full). Firmly replace the filler screw. It is réservoir jusqu'au repère (env. 2/3).
füllung während des Betriebes möglich, possible to replenish the oil during Bien revisser ensuite le bouchon de
die Luftzufuhr braucht nicht abgestellt operation; the air supply need not be shut remplissage. Le remplissage d'huile
werden. off. peut être effectué pendant la marche;
© Riegler 17-4-1
il n'est pas nécessaire de fermer

l'admission d'air.
Ölsorte: HL 25 nach DIN 51524-ISO VG Oil types: 22 - 46 cSt at 40°C. In special Sorte d'huile 22-46 cSt E 40°C .
32. In besonders gelagerten Fällen wende cases refer to the technical lubrication Dans les cas exceptionnels,
man sich an die schmiertechnischen service of the oil companys whose s'adresser aux services techniques de
Dienste der Ölgesellschaften, deren engineers are always available to give free graissage des sociétés pétrolières;
Ingenieure jederzeit unverbindlich und advice on all lubrication problems without leurs ingénieurs sont en tout temps à
kostenlos zur Beratung aller schmier- obligation. votre disposition pour vous conseiller
technischen Fragen zur Verfügung stehen. gratuitement et sans engagement sur
toutes les questions techniques
relatives au graissage.
04/05 techn. Änderungen vorbehalten 1.3

17-4-1 Druckluftaufbereitung
Tropfaufsätze: Für besondere Dome assembly: For special appli-

Fälle sind Tropfaufsätze aus Metall cations you need a dome assembly made
lieferbar. of metal.
Max. Betriebsdruck und Betriebs- Maximum operating pressures and Pression de service et température de
temperatur für Filter-Druckregler-und operating temperatures for pressure re- fonctionnement maxi.pour filtres et
Nebelöler: gulators and fog lubricators: lubrificateurs à brouillard d'huile:
max. Betriebsdruck bar max. operating pressure bar Pression de service maxi. bar
Kunststoffbehälter ohne Plastic bowl, with or without Cuve en matière plastique avec
oder mit Schutzkorb 16 protective cage 16 ou sans grillage de protection 16
Metallmantel 25 Metal casing 25 Cuve métallique 25
_______________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________
Betriebstemperatur °C Operating temperature C° Température de service C°

Kunststoffbehälter 0 bis + 50 Plastic bowl 0 to + 50 Cuve en matière plastique 0 à + 50
Metallmantel 0 bis + 60 Metal casing 0 to + 60 Cuve métallique 0 à + 60
Kunststoffbehälter dürfen nur mit Plastic bowls may only be cleaned Cuves en matière plastique
Wasser, Petroleum oder Waschbenzin using water, petroleum or spirit. Please «Makrolon»:
gereinigt werden. note: Petrol supplied for use in internal Les cuves en matière plastique doivent
Bitte beachten: Tankstellenbenzin ist combustion engines is not cleaning spirit. être nettoyées exclusivement avec de
kein Waschbenzin. l'eau, de l'essence rectifiée ou du
pétrole.
Benzin, Benzol, Aceton, trihaltige Benzine, benzole, acetone, cleaning Ne jemais utiliser de benzène, de
einigungsmittel oder ähnliches darf fluids containing tricho, or similar are l'essence normale ou super, de
keinesfalls zum Reinigen der Behälter under no cirumstances permitted for use l'acétone, de solvants contenant du
verwendet werden. Das Öl welches as cleaning agents for the bowl. The filling trichloréthylène ou d'autres produits
eingefüllt wird, darf mit keinen Flüssig- oil may not be thinned or blended with any analogues.
keiten, welche Weichmacher enthalten, fluid that contains emollients such as
z.B. Alkohol, Glysantin usw. verdünnt alcohol, "Glysantin" (antifreeze) etc.
bzw. vermengt werden.
Für Schäden, die durch Nichtbeachtung No responsibility can be accepted for Il ne faut jemais verser dans les cuves
dieser Vorschrift entstehen, kann keine damage which may result from non- ob- en Makrolon des liquides contenant des
© Riegler 17-4-1
Haftung übernommen werden. servance of these instructions. plastifiants tels que de l'alcool, du
glysantin etc.
Riegler & Co. KG, Schützenstr. 27 - 72574 Bad Urach Telefon (07125) 9497-0 Fax (07125) 949797
1.4 techn. Änderungen vorbehalten 04/05

Compressed air conditioning 3-1
Filter regulator
Size 0
C 05 C 06
G 1/8 G 1/4
0.1 to 3 bar
0.2 to 6 bar*
0.5 to 10 bar
0.5 to 16 bar*
*On request
Ordering information
Characteristics
Type Port Options Output press.
Type C 05 C 06
Port G 1/8 G 1/4
Pressure gauge port G 1/8 C XX - X X
Type of construction Diaphragm pressure regulator with Order example: C 05-K 10
self-relieving design
Centrifugal filter
Sintered filter element
Port
Special versions on request 05 G 1/8
06 G 1/4
Important
Input pressure p1 Max. 16 bar

Options
Max. 10 bar with fully automatic
drain K Plastic bowl
Input pressure p1 M Metal bowl
with semi- and fully
automatic drain Min. 1.5 bar
Please use the suffix »A« to order automatic
Control range p2 0.1 to 3 bar / 0.5 to 10 bar (standard) drain
0.2 to 6 bar / 0.5 to 16 bar on request
Mounting position Vertical, drain plug at bottom Options
Mounting type Nut, hole ∅30.5
Bracket
- Lockable adjusting knob
Medium temperature Max. 60°C (other temperature Description
Ambient temperature Max. 60°C ranges on request)
- Block design
Filter rating 5 µm - Simple block mounting with other devices
Bowl capacity Max. 16 cm³ condensate using conical clamps
Condensate drain Semi-automatic (standard, HA 4) - Joiner sets (KP 05) required for block mounting
Manual and fully automatic on request - Pressure setting can be locked by pushing
Weight [g] 280 / 360 with pressure gauge the knob down
Important: Block mounting with other devices: p1 max. = 12 bar - Flow direction indicated by arrows
- Entry in direction of arrow
- Independent of inlet pressure
Materials - Pressure gauge ∅40 included
- Pressure gauge can be mounted at both ends
© Riegler 3-1
Part Material - Filter rating acc. to ISO 4003

Head piece (body) Z 410
Spring bonnet POM-brass Accessories
Diaphragm Î NBR-brass Designation Order No.
Pressure spring Galvanised steel Nut M 30 x 1.5 R 11-55
Valve cone Î NBR-brass Mounting bracket with nut R 11-55 MV 30
Counter-pressure spring Stainless steel Joiner set KP 05
O-ring 30 x 2 Î NBR Polycarbonate bowl 640/1
Spring bonnet, lockable POM-Al Metal bowl 640/11
Lock cylinder Brass Filter element 5 µm 611.6.905
Plastic bowl with automatic drain valve KS 11 F-A
Filter element 5 µm Cellpor Metal bowl with semi-autom. drain valve 641/11-HA
Condensate bowl Polycarbonate Metal bowl with fully automatic drain valve 640/11-A
Air deflector/cone guide POM / PA6 Automatic drain valve 655.6.900
07/10 Data subject to change 1.1
3-1 Compressed air conditioning
Dimensions [mm]
Flow rates
Flow rates at p1 = 8 bar
C 05-K 3 Flow characteristic
C 05-K 10 C 06-K
Art. No. C 06-K 10 Control range 0.5 to 10 bar
C 05 M 3
C 06 M
Output pressure p2 = 6 [bar]
QN l/min 900 1000 1500
Nominal flow (Δp = 1 bar)
Hysteresis
Hysteresis of p2 as a function of rising (falling)
p1 at a constant draw-off rate QN 20 l/min
Basic setting (starting point): p1: 7.0 bar
p2: 2.0 bar
© Riegler 3-1
Main spare parts

Part Part No.
→ Set of wearing parts 22.1805.4
- Diaphragm, cmpl.
- Valve cone, cmpl.
- O-ring 16 x 2
Pr. gauge ∅40, G1/8
0 to 4 bar 110.44-KD
0 to 6 bar 110.45-KD
0 to 10 bar 110.46-KD
0 to 16 bar 110.47-KD
1.2 Data subject to change 07/10

Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauges
Stainless Steel Case, Crimped-on Ring, Accuracy Class 1.6 Nom. Size 63 (2½") Model RgG
Glycerine Filled
Application
For fluid and gaseous media (non-corrosive to brass and bronze),
which are not highly viscous and do not tend to polymerize
Nominal Case Size

63 (2½")
Accuracy Class (EN 837-1)

1.6 ( i.e. accuracy error max. + 1.6% of full scale value)
Pressure Ranges (EN 837-1)

0 ... 1 to 0 ... 600 bar 1)
also vacuum and compound ranges
Pressure Limitations
Steady pressure: 75% of full scale value
Cyclic pressure: 65% of full scale value
Temporary: full scale value
How to Order:
For ordering gauges from stock1) simply state the ordering number
Temperature Limitations as follows:
Ambient temperature: -20 / +60 °C (-4 / +140 °F) Bottom connection Center back
Pressure ranges
Medium temperature: max. +60 °C (+140 °F) connection
bar Ordering number (stock):
Further information about advantages, applications, specifications, temperature
limitations and pressure ranges of Bourdon tube pressure gauges, accuracy classes -1-0 L-631002 L-631102
1.0 and 1.6 according to EN, can be found in our model overview 1000
-1/+3 L-631005
0-4 L-631013 L-631113
Standard Configuration 0-6 L-631014 L-631114
Process Connection 0-10 L-631015 L-631115
G ¼ B (¼" BSP) bottom connection brass
0-16 L-631016 L-631116
Bourdon Tube 0-25 L-631017 L-631117
• up to 40 bar = bronze, C-form, soft soldered
0-40 L-631018 L-631118
• 60 bar and up = bronze, helical, silver brazed
0-60 L-631019 L-631119
Movement 0-100 L-631020 L-631120
Brass / German silver
0-160 L-631021 L-631121
Dial 0-250 L-631022 L-631122
Aluminum alloy, black figures, white background 0-400 L-631023 L-631123
Pointer 0-600 L-631024 L-631124

Aluminum alloy black Pressure gauges with center back connection (L-6311..) can be
ordered optionally with front flange (Fr) or U-clamp (BFr).
Case and Ring
Stainless steel, ring crimped-on Ordering Examples: 35 x L-631022
20 x L-631102, Fr
Filling Liquid To avoid mistakes it will be helpful to give a short description of the
Glycerine instrument (model, nom. size, case configuration, pressure range),
especially for special versions resp. instruments not available from
Window stock:
Polycarbonate
Model, nom. size, ordering
no. for wetted partes: RgG 63–1
Code letters for
Optional Special Configurations ase configuration: rm, rmFr, rmBFr
• ¼" 1
Other process connections (G / B resp. / BSP ,
NPT), minimum order quantity 10 pieces
8
1
8
1
/8 " NPT, (see reverse side) without code letter = bottom connection
Pressure range: according to EN 837-1,
• Front flange for versions with center back connection e.g. -1-0, 0-6 or 0-160 bar
Options: see left, e.g. ¼" NPT connection
• U-clamp for versions with center back connection (Minimum ordering quantity!)
1)
Examples for Ordering Information:
Pressure ranges -1/0 and 0/4 to 0/600 bar are available from stock (without
obligation). For all the other pressure ranges a minimum order quantity of 10 •50 x RgG 63–1, 0-2.5 bar 1)
pieces and the actual delivery time has to be considered. •50 x RgG 63–1 rmFr, 0-160 bar, ¼" NPT 1)
Subsidiary Company and Sales East Germany and Eastern Europe
ARMATURENBAU GmbH MANOTHERM Beierfeld GmbH 1112

Manometerstraße 5 • D-46487 Wesel - Ginderich Am Gewerbepark 9 • D-08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld
Phone: (0 28 03) 91 30–0 • Fax: (0 28 03) 10 35
armaturenbau.com • mail@armaturenbau.com
Phone: (0 37 74) 58–0 • Fax: (0 37 74) 58–545
manotherm.com • mail@manotherm.com
3/06
Case Configurations, Code Letters, Dimensional Data and Weight
Bottom connection, Center back connection,

without code letter to add code letters: rm
Center back connection, Center back connection,

front flange, U-clamp for panel mounting,
code letters: rmFr code letters: rmBFr
Dimensional Data ( mmm / inches ) and Weight ( kg / lb )

Weight
Nom. Size a b c c1 c2 d1 d2 d3 d4 D G g h ±1 M s s1 SW
(approx.)
63 10 32 5 2 13 75 88 3.6 74 67 G¼B 58 54 85 3 6.5 17 .25

2½" .39 1.26 .2 .08 .51 2.95 3.46 .14 2.91 2.64 ¼" BSP 2.28 2.13 3.35 .12 .26 .67 .55
The information in this leaflet is given in good faith, but we reserve the right to make changes without notice.
1112 -03/06 P. 2 of 2 • ARMATURENBAU GmbH, D-46487 Wesel-Ginderich, Tel. +49(0)2803/9130–0, mail@armaturenbau.com • MANOTHERM Beierfeld GmbH, D-08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld, Tel. +49(0)3774/58–0, mail@manotherm.com
Operating Instruction Pressure Gauges
Selection Criteria, Set-up Options, Installation and Operating Instructions
Contents
Page Page
1. Important Note, Scope 1 7. Operation 7
2. Measuring Units, Construction of 8. Maintenance and Repair 8
Pressure Gauges and Chemical Seals 1 9. Electrical Accessories 8
3. Selection Criteria 3 10. Storage 8
4. Accessories 5 11. Installation in potentially explosive areas 8
5. Set-up Options 6 11.1 General Information 8
6. Installation 6 11.2 Marking for explosive area 8
1. Important Note, Scope

1.1 Important Note
Please inspect the transport packaging and the delivered goods immediately upon their receipt to determine their
integrity and completeness. In case of returns, please use the original packaging.
1.2 Scope
The information provided in this operating instruction, relating to the selection, application, set-up options, instal-
lation and operation, applies to pressure gauges with elastic element.
2. Elastic Elements, Construction of Pressure Gauges and Chemical Seals
2.1 Elastic Elements
Bourdon Tube Types:
C-Type Bourdon Tube Helical Bourdon Tube
Diaphragm Type: Capsule Type:

horizontal vertical
Sales and Export South, West, North Subsidiary Company, Sales and Export East
ARMATURENBAU GmbH MANOTHERMBeierfeldGmbH B1
Manometerstraße 5 • D - 46487 Wesel-Ginderich Am Gewerbepark 9 • D-08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld
Tel.: +49 (0) 28 03/ 91 30–0 • Fax: +49 (0) 28 03/ 10 35 Tel.: +49 (0) 37 74/ 58–0 • Fax: +49 (0) 37 74/ 58–545 02/14
armaturenbau.com • mail@armaturenbau.com manotherm.com • mail@manotherm.com
2.2 Construction of Pressure Gauges

Pressure Gauge with C-type Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge with Horizontal Diaphragm
Hairspring
of the movement
Pinion Bourdon tube Dial

Pinion
Tip of the
Dial bourdon tube Toothed
Zero dead stop quadrant
Pointer
Link
Upper
Link screw measuring Connecting
flange rod
Pointer Toothed quadrant
Overrange
protector Upper movement plate
Stem
Process connection
(socket)
(here) radial bottom
Diaphragm,
connection Lower horizontal
measuring
Process connection,
flange
radial bottom con-
nection
Pressure Gauge with Diaphragm Capsule Pressure Gauge with Vertical Diaphragm
Capsule Connecting rod
Diaphragm,
Pointer vertical Dial
Process Pointer
connection
Movement (here) bottom
connection Movement
Process Dial
connection
(here) centre
back connection
Pressure Gauge in line with Safety Requirements according to EN 837-1, S3 (formerly DIN 16 006 Part 1 and Part 2)
Full blow-out back Case with solid

front Window made of
multilayer safety
glass
Bayonet ring
B1 - 02/14 EN - p. 2 of 8 ARMATURENBAU GmbH, D-46487 Wesel-Ginderich, tel.: +49 (0) 2803/9130-0, e-mail: mail@armaturenbau.com MANOTHERM Beierfeld GmbH, D-08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld, tel: +49 (0) 3774/58-0, e-mail: mail@manotherm.com, 01/14 DE
2.3 Types of Chemical Seals
Diaphragm Capsule In-line
3. Selection Criteria Bourdon tube pressure gauges are applied for pressure
The user has to ensure that the proper pressure gauge ranges from 0.6 bar to 4,000 bar, generally in the accu-
is selected regarding indication range and type (e.g. racy classes 0.6 to 2.5.
resistance of the materials against medium, atmosphere The influence of temperature changes on the indication
and temperature, overrange protection etc.). The regu- mainly depends on the temperature coefficient (TEC=
lations applying to the particular application as well as change in stiffness caused by change in temperature)
EN 837-2 have to be regarded. of the modulus of elasticity of the bourdon tube.
Depending on the material, the accuracy error caused
3.1 Principles of Measurement by differing temperatures lies between 0.3 % and
The pressure gauges described in this operating instruc- 0.4 % per 10 K.
tion contain measuring elements that deform elastically Diaphragm Pressure Gauges
when subjected to pressure.This motion is transferred to The diaphragms are corrugated and circular shaped.
a movement. Due to their robustness and easy handling, The pressure acts on one side of the diaphragm. The
these instruments (pressure gauges) are widely used in deflection of the diaphragm is a measure for the pres-
pressure measurement. sure. Diaphragms have a relatively high restoring force.
The measuring elements are generally made of copper Therefore, the influence of additional accessories is lower
alloys or alloyed steel. compared to bourdon tube gauges. Due to the annular
Pressure Gauges with Bourdon Tube fixing arrangement of the diaphragm it is less sensitive
Bourdon tubes are circular bent tubes with an oval cros- to vibrations. Diaphragms can be protected against high
section. The pressure that is to be measured acts on the overload, by supporting the measuring unit. They can be
interior of the tube so that the tube's oval cross section protected against corrosive media by applying coatings or
approaches a circular form. The hoop stress produced foils. Diaphragm gauges can be applied to an advantage
by this deformation causes the arced Bourdon tube with highly viscous and crystallising media, as extended
to open. The end of the bourdon tube that is not fixed connection bores, open connection flanges or purge
performs a motion, which is a measure for the pressure. holes allow for cleaning options.
For pressure ranges up to 40 bar, circular bent bourdon
tubes with a torsion angle of 270° are generally used. There are gauges with horizontal diaphragm and
For higher pressure ranges, helical bourdon tubes with with vertical diaphragm, i.e. where the diaphragm
several torsions are applied. is placed in parallel to the dial. For pressure ranges
Bourdon tubes have a relatively low restoring force. < 0.6 bar, diaphragms with a diameter of 160 mm are
generally used, whereas for higher pressure ranges
Therefore, when using additional accessories such diaphragms with a diameter of 100 mm are used. Due
as indicating pointers, limit switch contact assemblies to the annular fixing arrangement of the diaphragm, the
or potentiometric transducers, their influence on the deviation in indication caused by temperature changes is
indication has to be taken into account. significantly greater compared to bourdon tube gauges.
Diaphragm pressure gauges are applied for pressure
Pressure gauges with a bourdon tube can only be pro- ranges from 10 mbar to 25 bar in the accuracy classes
tected against overload to a limited extent, by supporting of 1.6 and 2.5, exceptionally also in 4.0.
the elastic element at a specific pressure limit.
Operating Instructions Pressure Gauges
Capsule Pressure Gauges
A diaphragm capsule consists of two corrugated, cir- In both cases, the susceptibility to contamination is
cular shaped diaphragms or a diaphragm and a base disadvantageous. Attenuators at the movement only
plate that are assembled pressure tight at the edge. decelerate the pointer fluctuation. Fluid filled cases
The pressure is introduced at the centre of one of the dampen the fluctuation of the measuring element and
diaphragms and acts on the inside of the capsule. The reduce the wear of the moving parts.
hereby produced lifting movement is a measur for the
pressure. Temperature
Capsule pressure gauges are not suited for liquid media. If the temperature of the medium at the measuring point
They can be applied for pressure ranges from 2.5 mbar deviates from the operating temperature specified for the
to 600 mbar in accuracy classes from 0.6 to 1.6. pressure gauge (see section 7., as well as EN 837-1,
The deviation in indication caused by changes in tem- -2, -3), a measuring line with sufficient length, a siphon
perature can lie between 0.3 % and 0.4 % per 10 K, or a chemical seal with capillary line must be connected
depending on the material. upstream to the pressure gauge.
The influence on the indication owing to deviating instru-
3.2 Pressure Ranges ment temperatures from +20 °C must be considered.
The operating pressure should lie in the middle third of
the pressure range of the gauge. The maximum pressure Highly Viscous, Crystallising and Solid-Containing
load should not exceed 75 % of the full scale value at Media
steady load or 65 % of the full scale value at dynamic For measurements of highly viscous, crystallising or
load, cf. EN 837-2. solid-containing media, the use of diaphragm or bourdon
tube pressure gauges with attached chemical seal (see
3.3 Accuracy Limits section 4.4) is recommended.
The error limits for pressure gauges are defined in
EN 837-1 (bourdon tube gauges) and EN 837-3 (capsule Corrosive Media
and diaphragm gauges – formerly DIN 16 005). If corrosive media can be kept away from the measuring
Pressure gauges of the classes 0.1 to 0.6 and higher element by separating agents, then standard pressure
are preferably used in laboratories and workshops for gauges may be used. Otherwise, the selection of suitable
accurate measurements. material is mandatory, whereby the user must provide
Pressure gauges of the classes 1.0 and 1.6 are mainly the manufacturer with every information on the materials
used for measurements on machines and production that are compatible with the medium under the specific
facilities. measuring conditions, cf. EN 837-2, 4.3.
Pressure gauges of the classes 2.5 and 4.0 are used for Due to the restricted choice of materials for the elastic
monitoring tasks without special accuracy requirements. elements, diaphragm pressure gauges with a protective
lining possibly have to be used, or chemical seals made
3.4 Conditions of Usage of media resistant materials need to be connected
When selecting pressure gauges the selection criteria upstream to a bourdon tube pressure gauge.
and installation recommendations in accordance with
EN 837-2 (formerly DIN 16 005 Part 1 and Part 2) as well Safety
as the instructions provided here, especially in sections A higher risk exists, for example, with gases and fluids
3.4.1, 3.4.2 and 5. must be considered. under high pressure. In case of leakage or bursting of
The use of pressure gauges which do not meet the pressure-retaining components, employees standing
actual operating conditions, can cause great conse- in front of the window of the instrument, should not be
quential damages. endangered by medium emerging to the front. Safety
pressure gauges with a blow-out device at the rear, for
3.4.1 Pressure Media Properties example a blow-out back, provide for protection (see fig.
Pressure History on page 2, at the bottom).
Rapid pressure changes or pressure strokes should not With hazardous media, for example
act abruptly on the measuring element. – oxygen
Pressure strokes must not exceed the pressure limits – acetylene
specified for the pressure gauges. If necessary, overload – combustible substances
protection (see section 4) must be connected upstream. – toxic substances
Pressure changes of >10% of the full scale value per as well as refrigerating units, compressors etc., the
second impair the readings of the measured values. applicable regulations must be considered.
Moreover, this will severely reduce the service life of
the pressure gauges. In such cases, attenuators must In accordance with EN 837-1, 9.7 fluid filled pressure
be provided. gauges must be equipped with blow-out devices (version
With snubbers (restrictor screw or adjustable snubber) S1, or S2 resp. S3 according to EN 837-1).
the inlet cross section can be significantly reduced,
thus delaying the change in pressure in the measuring
element. The installation of an integrated restrictor screw
(reduction of the cross section of the measuring element)
is also possible.
3.4.2 Ambient Conditions

Vibrations Siphons
If an exposure of the pressure gauge to vibrations can To protect the shut-off fittings and pressure gauges
not be avoided by way of suitable installations, gauges against heating through hot media (e.g. steam), suf-
equipped with dampened movement or with fluid filling ficiently long measuring lines or siphons should be
must be used.
installed.
Ambient Temperature
Chemical Seals
The error limit given on the dial applies to a reference
With aggressive, hot, highly viscous or crystallising
temperature of +20 °C. Deviating temperatures have an
media, chemical seals can be mounted to bourdon tube
influence on the indication. The extent of the influence
gauges as separating element in order to prevent the
depends on the measuring principle (see section 3.1).
At outdoor installations, the ambient conditions must ingress of such media into the measuring element. The
be taken into account through selection or protection, pressure is transmitted to the measuring element by a
in order to prevent, for example, the pressure gauge neutral fluid that is selected depending on measuring
from freezing over at temperatures below 0 °C. In fluid range, temperature, viscosity and other influences,
filled instruments the viscosity of the fluid increases as whereby the compatibility of this fluid with the medium
the temperature drops causing a considerable delay of has to be considered.
indication. The ambient temperature must also be taken
into account regarding the maximum allowed operating Chemical seals are available in different configurations,
temperature for the pressure gauge. see figure in section 2.3, whereas the diaphragm seal
is the most commonly used model.
Corrosive Atmosphere
In corrosive atmospheres, correspondingly suitable With in-line and flange type diaphragm seals the pres-
casings and components made of corrosion resistant sure gauge must be mounted at works to the chemical
materials must be provided. seal, in accordance to the given installation position.
Special surface finishings help protect the pressure
gauge cases on the outside. Pressure gauge and chemical seal should not be
disconnected.
4. Accessories
Shut-off Fittings for Pressure Gauges Possible errors occuring due to mounting of a chemical
It is recommended to install a shut-off device between seal to a pressure gauge have to be considered.
the measuring point and the pressure gauge, which
allows for an exchange of the pressure gauge and check Overrange Protection Devices
of zero point during continued operation of the system. If, for operational reasons the indication pressure range
Depending on the application, either cocks or valves are has to lie below the maximum operating pressure, the
used. Cocks have three positions: pressure gauge can be protected against damages by
– Venting: The supply line is shut-off and connecting overrange protection devices.
the gauge is connected to the At a pressure stroke the overrange protector shuts down
atmosphere. The zero point can immediately, at slow rising pressure gradually. The clo-
be checked. sing pressure that needs to be set, therefore depends
– Operation: The supply line is open, the gauge on the progress in time.
is pressurised.
– Blow-out: The supply line is open, the medi- Highly viscous and contaminated media, however, can
um escapes into the atmosphere. impair the function of the overrange protector or render
The gauge is not working. it ineffective.
With valves (e.g. according to DIN 16 270 and DIN 16 271),
a venting screw is usually provided between valve seat Capsule and diaphragm pressure gauges can also be
and pressure gauge. produced overrange protected (3-fold, 5-fold or 10-fold
Venting to the atmosphere should be thus arranged that overrange protected).
employees are not endangered by escaping medium.
Environmental pollution should be avoided.
With certain applications (e.g. steam boilers), the shut-
off fittings must have a test port, to allow for checking
of the pressure gauge without having to remove it from
the system.
Pressure Gauge Holder

If the measuring line is not sufficiently stable to support
the pressure gauge free from vibrations, a suitable holder
is to be provided.
Table 1 State of medium fluid gaseous
fluid partly fully gaseous partly fully
State of the filling in the measuring degassing degassing condensed condensed
line (humid)
condensate boiling "liquid gases" dry moist air water vapour

Examples fluids air flue gas
1 2 3 4 5 6
a) Pressure gauge above

the measurement port
7 8 9 10 11
b) Pressure gauge below

the measurement port
The arrangements 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 and 11 are to be preferred.
5. Set-up Options The pressure gauge should be installed in such a way

General Remarks that the temperature does not drop below or exceed the
Proven measuring arrangements and proposals for permissible operating temperature (see also sections
components are detailed in VDE/VDI 3512 sheet 3. 3.4.1 and 7). In the process, the influence of convection
Table 1 shows an overview of possible arrangements. and thermal radiation should be considered. When the
measuring element of a pressure gauge is filled with
Pressure Measuring Port water or a water mixture, the instrument must be pro-
The pressure measuring port should be installed where tected against frost.
the flow is unimpaired and permanent measuring condi- Generally, the pressure gauge is mounted with a vertical
tions exist. It is recommended to provide for a sufficiently dial. In all other cases, the symbol on the dial indicating
large bore for the pressure measurement and to lock the the position according to EN 837 (formerly DIN 16 257)
measuring port with a shut-off device. applies.
Measuring Line A difference in height between the pressure measuring

The measuring line is the connection between pres- port and the pressure gauge causes a shift at the start
sure measuring port and pressure gauge. The inside of measurement, when the medium in the measuring
diameter of the measuring line should be sufficiently line does not have the same density as the ambient air.
large in order to avoid blockage. The measuring line This shift at the start of measurement Dp results from
should have a steady slope (recommended is a slope the difference in density (rM - rL) and the difference in
of 1:15). With gaseous media, a drain should be provi- height Dh: 10-5 · ( rM - rL ) g · Dh
ded at the lowest point, with high-viscosity fluids a vent
should be provided at the highest point. With gases or Dp = Shift at start of measurement (bar)
rM = Density of the medium kg/m3
fluids containing solids, separators should be provided rL = Density of the air (1.205 at 20 °C) kg/m3
that can be demounted from the system and emptied
during operation, due to shut-off valves. The measuring Dh = Difference in height m
line should be implemented and installed in such a way g = Gravitational acceleration m/s2
that it withstands loads caused by expansion, vibration (approx. gravitational acceleration = 9.81 m/s2)
or thermal effects. The indication is decreased by Dp when the pressure
gauge is positioned higher than the pressure measuring
Shut-off Valves at the Pressure Gauge port, and increased by Dp when it is positioned lower.
Shut-off valves at the pressure gauge serve the purpose
of checking the zero setting or exchanging the pressure 6. Installation
gauge during operation (cf. section 4). Pressure gauges should only be installed by trained
engineering personnel.
Pressure Gauge For measurement arrangement see section 5.
The pressure gauge has to be mounted free of vibrations
and so that the dial is easily readable. When reading During installation or removal, pressure gauges should
the dial, parallax errors should be avoided. It has to be never be held at the case but at the wrench flat of the
ensured that any blow-out devices in the pressure gauge socket. It must be ensured that the matching process
are not blocked (cf. EN 837-1, 9.7). connection is selected (nominal width, if required sui-
table sealing face, etc.).
For instruments with thread connection, an installation 7. Operation
with clamping sleeve or union nut is recommended, in Shut-off devices should be opened slowly in order to
order to allow for proper readability. avoid sudden pressure peaks when putting into ope-
Instruments with flange connections are fitted to the ration.
counter flange and secured with suitable screws. Ensure
that the screws are firmly tightened. Application Range
The connections must be tight. Therefore, sealings The application range for steady loads is indicated on
made of suitable medium-resistant material should be the dial of many pressure gauges by a pressure limit
used for the connection. indication mark (see EN 837-1, EN 837-3).
For the sealing of pressure measurement connections At steady load bourdon tube pressure gauges of nomi-
with cylindrical thread spigots, flat sealing rings accor- nal case sizes 100, 160 or 250 are loadable to the full
ding to EN 837-1 or profile packings, resp. lense-type scale value. At dynamic load only the 0.9-fold as peak
sealing rings for corresponding high pressure connec- load of that pressure is permissible, for pressure ranges
tions have to be applied at the sealing surface. Tapered of 0/2500 bar and 0/4000 bar only 2/3 max. of the full
threads (e.g. NPT-threads) are sealed additionally with scale pressure value. Bourdon tube pressure gauges
sealants such as for example PTFE-tape (cf. EN 837-2). are overrange protected up to 1.3 of the full scale value
(instruments with the ranges 0/2500 bar and 0/4000 bar
can only be loaded to their full scale value!).
cylindrical thread tapered thread At steady load bourdon tube pressure gauges of nominal
case sizes 40, 50, 60, 63, 80 and 72x72 are loadable up
to 3/4 of the full scale value, at dynamic load up to 2/3
wrench flats maximum of the full scale value and only temporarily to
the full scale value.
sealing in the
sealing surface thread Diaphragm pressure gauges with vertical diaphragm are
loadable to the full scale value at steady load, at dynamic
load to the 0.9-fold of the full scale value.
For pressure gauges with pressure ranges of < 6 bar and Diaphragm pressure gauges with horizontal diaphragm
with a pressure relief vent Ø of 13 mm at the top of the are overrange protected to the 5-fold of the full scale
case, it is recommended to cut off the fitting at the filling value (custom-made instruments also higher), but never
plug in order to allow for internal pressure compensation higher than 40 bar.
through venting of the gauge.
Capsule pressure gauges are loadable to the full scale
If the pressure gauge is positioned below the pressure value at steady load, at dynamic load maximum to the
relief vent, the measuring line should be rinsed thorough- 0.9-fold of the full scale value. Just as bourdon tube
ly before putting into operation. pressure gauges they are 1.3-fold overrange protected
(custom-made instruments also higher).
During pressure tests on pipes or vessels, the pressure
gauge must not be exposed to higher loads than indi- Zero Point Check
cated by the pressure limit indication mark on the In order to check the zero point of the pressure gauge
dial; resp. the pressure limit at steady load, specified during operation, the required shut-off device has to be
for the pressure gauge, should not be exceeded (see closed (see section 4.) and pressure is relieved. The
section 7.). pointer must rest within the zero range indicated by I.
If the pointer comes to rest outside this range, a perma-
With diaphragm gauges the clamping bolts for the upper nent deformation of the measruing unit can be assumed,
and lower flange must not be unloosened. which has to be checked thoroughly in order to avoid
The connections between pressure gauge and chemical accidents caused by measuring errors. Therefore, the
seal and possibly between chemical seal and capillary pressure gauge should be replaced and, if necessary,
line are not to be released. returned to the manufacturer for checking and repair.
Before removing the pressure gauge, the measuring Pressure Range Check
unit must be depressurised. Possibly the pressure must If the pressure range indication has to checked during
be relieved on the measuring line. Residues of the operation, the pressure gauge is separated from the
medium in demounted pressure gauges can endanger process via the required shut-off device with test port
personnel, facilities and the environment. Therefore, (see section 4.), and a test pressure is applied to the
precautionary measures must be taken. gauge. The error limits according to EN 837-1 resp.
EN 837-3 apply.
(Electrical accessories: see section 9).
Temperature-Resistance
The permissible operating temperatures of the pressure
gauge must not be exceeded.
The temperature resistance resp. the permissible If specified, suitable switch amplifiers or multifunctional
operating temperature generally lies between -40 °C to relais must be used (e.g. for instruments with inductive
+60 °C maximum (cf. EN 837-1 and EN 837-3 ), whereas contacts). The valid operating instructions must be
unfilled gauges with brazed bourdon tubes withstand considered.
measuring temperatures of up to +100 °C or with shiel-
ded arc welded bourdon tubes in stainless steel cases 10. Storage
up to +200 °C. During storage, the pressure gauges should remain
Special versions that are labelled accordingly (tA / tR) in their original packaging and be stored protected
can be suitable for higher temperatures. against damages caused through external influences.
Note: These are only pieces of information on tempera- After possible temporary removal of a pressure gauge
ture resistance of the materials resp. the soldered joints (e.g. for a test), it should be replaced in the original
or welded seams. The information on indication errors packging for further storage.
due to deviation from the reference temperature has to
be considered! In general, during storage the minimum temperature
Further details ca be found in our model overview 1000 should not fall below -40 °C and the maximum tem-
for bourdon tube pressure gauges. perature should not exceed +60 °C (cf. EN 837-1 and
© 2014 ARMATURENBAU GmbH and MANOTHERM Beierfeld GmbH · Technical changes, replacement of materials and printing errors excepted!
EN 837-3).
Cleaning Temperature
When rinsing the measuring line, the permissible ope- 11. Installation in Potentially Explosive Areas
rating temperature of the pressure gauge (see above) 11.1 General Information
must not be exceeded. If necessary, the gauge has to Pressure Gauges are mechanical pressure measuring
be shut-off or removed. instruments and when operated as intended, do not
The maximum cleaning temperature tR of pressure show sources of ignition. Versions made of stainless
gauges with chemical seals must not be exceeded. steel and with laminated safety glass are suitable for
application in areas of category 2 and 3 according to the
8. Maintenance and Repair
ATEX-Directive 94/9/EC. For applications in category 1
In general, pressure gauges are maintenance-free. (e.g. installation to Zone 0), only pressure gauges with
integrated, type-approved flame arresters, our model
They should only be repaired by the manufacturer. Adapt-FS, are suitable. This protection system prevents
Before returning an instrument for repair, all wetted a flame penetration at deflagration of explosive vapor-air
parts must be cleaned thoroughly, especially regarding resp. gas-air mixtures of explosion groups IIA, IIB and
hazardous media (see also section 6.). The repair IIC in an upstreamed volume of max. 0.2 l. The flame
order should include a description of the medium resp. arrester "Adapt-FS" is certified with
a declaration of contamination. IIG IIC PTB 12 ATEX 4001 X
9. Electrical Accessories on condition that the operating pressure does not ex-
Installation and electrical connections should only be ceed 1.1 bar abs. and the operating temperature does
performed by trained engineering personnel. not exceed 60 °C.
Instruments with electric accessories are marked with
a nameplate that indicates the electrical connection of To avoid heating of the measuring elements of bourdon
the instrument. tube pressure gauges, dynamic load is not allowed with
Consideration of load limits is obligatory. Exceeding of gaseous media!
load limits can cause damage.
The national and international safety regulations (e.g. 11.2 Marking for Explosive Area
VDE 0100) must be considered during installation, Pressure gauges without limit switch contacts for
starting up and operation of the instruments. application in potentially explosive areas, are marked
as follows:
It must be ensured that the cable diameters match the Example: Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge
nominal widths of the sealing inserts. Screw fittings must Type RCh 100 – 3
be tightened firmly. Only then compliance with certified Manufacturer ARMATURENBAU
protection standards can be ensured. In versions with Manometerstraße 5 • D-46487 Wesel
angular plugs, plug connectors or terminal boxes, the
centrally arranged fixing screws must be tightened Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge
hand-tight.
Type RCh 100 – 3
For the connection of pressure transmitters DMU, only
shielded cables are to be used in order to conserve the II 2Gc
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). The shield of the
II 2Dc
cable must be connected with the case resp. with the
ground terminal of the angular plug.
Temperature range -25…+75 °C
The CE-mark according to EMC-guidelines on instru- (content binding, partition free)
ments with magnetic contact only applies, when the
frequency of operation does not exceed 5 switching Please contact the manufacturer in case of uncertain-
cycles per minute. ties.
Betriebsanleitung 8251/53/55/57
Mode d'emploi Pressure Transmitter
Instructions NAT/NAH/NAE/NSL
Elektrischer Anschluss / Raccordement électrique / Electrical connection

Schutzart/Protection1) IP651) IP671)
Ausführung Industrial Standard M12x1

Exécution (DIN43650 C193)
4–pol. 5–pol.
Execution
01 32 35
Standard with accessory 95 with accessory 96
Ausgangssignal
Signal de sortie
Output
2 1 - - 4
1 3 - - 1
4 - - 5
825X.XX.XXXX.XX.19
1 1 1 1 2
2 2 3 4 4
3 3 4 3 3
4 2 2 5
825X.XX.XXXX.XX.14/16/17/23
1)
nur mit vorschriftsmässig montierter Kabeldose gültig
valable seulement avec fiche femelle montée selon instructions
provided with female connector is mounted according to instructions
Output Load resistance ISUPPLY USUPPLY

4 ... 20 mA (USupply-9V)/20mA 24(9 ... 32) VDC 825X.XX.XXXX.XX.19...
0 ... 5 VDC ≥2.0 kΩ ≤10 mA 24(9 ... 32) VDC 825X.XX.XXXX.XX.14...
1... 6 VDC ≥2.0 kΩ ≤10 mA 24(9 ... 32) VDC 825X.XX.XXXX.XX.16...
0... 10 VDC ≥5.0 kΩ ≤10 mA 24(15...32) VDC 825X.XX.XXXX.XX.17...
0.5... 4.5 VDC ≥2.0 kΩ ≤10 mA 5(4.5...5.5) VDC ratiometrisch/ ratiométrique/ ratiometric 825X.XX.XXXX.XX.23...
Einschaltverzögerung / Retard à l'enclenchement / Switch-on delay

1s
Anziehdrehmoment Druckanschluss / Couple de serrage raccord de pression / Torque moment pressure connection
max. 25Nm
Betriebstemperatur / Température de service / Operating temperature
NAT: -25°C...+85°C / NAH, NAE, NSL: -40°C...+125°C
Lagertemperatur / Température de stockage / Storage temperature
–25°C ... +85°C
Medientemperatur / Température de fluide / Media temperature
NAT: -25°C...+125°C / NAH, NAE, NSL: -40°C...+125°C

Betriebsdruck / Pression de fonctionnement / Operating pressure Achtung / Attention / Attention
Bereich 0 ... 0.2 Überdruck max. 0.5 Steckerausführung 01/34: Nur original Schraube verwenden!
Plage 0 ... 0.4 Surpression 1 Exécution fiche 01/34: Utilise seulement la vis originale!
Range 0 ... 0.6 Over pressure 1.5
Plug execution 01/34: Use only original screw!
(bar) 0 ... 1.0 (bar) 2
0 ... 1.6 3.5
0 ... 2.5 5
0 ... 4.0 12 Nicht an Kabeldose drehen.
0 ... 6.0 12 Ne pas tourne la fiche femelle
0 ... 10.0 20 Don't turn the female connector
0 ... 16.0 32
0 ... 25.0 50
0 ... 40.0 80
0 ... 60.0 120
0 ... 100.0 200
0 ... 160.0 320
0 ... 250.0 500
0 ... 400.0 800
0 ... 600.0 1000
Massbilder / Cotes d'encombrement / Dimensions
NSL NSL
H73250g Trafag AG 03/2008

825X.XX.2X17.XX 825X.XX.2X18.XX 825X.XX.2X30.XX 825X.XX.2X24.XX 825X.XX.4X17.XX 825X.XX.4X30.XX
825X.XX.XXXX.01.XX 825X.XX.XXXX.32.XX 825X.XX.XXXX.35.XX

We reserve the right to make alternations as technical progress may warrant.
NSL: Empfohlene Montageposition 825X.XX.XXXX.XX.33 825X.XX.XXXX.XX.34

NSL: Position de montage recommandée
NSL: Recommended mountig position
8255
Engine pressure Transmitter NAE
anwendung Applications Applications
Schiffbau Construction navale Shipbuilding

ABS, BV, DNV, GL, ABS, BV, DNV, GL, ABS, BV, DNV, GL,
KRS, LR, RINA, NKK KRS, LR, RINA, NKK KRS, LR, RINA, NKK
Motorenbau Constr. de moteurs Engine manufacturing
Schienenfahrzeuge Véhicules sur rail Railways
Maschinenbau Machines-outils Machine tools
Hydraulik Hydraulique Hydraulics
HLK CVC HVAC
Kältetechnik Réfrigération Refrigeration
Prozess Techn. Techn. de procédés Process technology
Wasseraufbereitung Traitement de l‘eaux Water treatment
Autoindustrie Industrie automobile Automotive industry
Prüfstände Banc d‘essai à frein Test benches
Ex Ex Ex
Lebensmittelindustrie Industrie alimentaire Food Industry
Autoklaven Autoclavage Autoclaves
Hauptmerkmale Caractères distinctifs Main characteristics
 Sensor: Dünnfilm auf Stahl  Capteur: Couche mince sur acier  Sensor: Thin film on steel
 Messbereich: 0...2.5 bis 0...600 bar  Plage de mesure: 0...2.5 à 0...600 bar  Measuring range: 0...2.5 to 0...600 bar
 Ausgangssignal: 4...20 mA  Signal de sortie: 4...20 mA  Signal output: 4...20 mA
0...10 VDC 0...10 VDC 0...10 VDC
0.5...4.5 VDC (ratiom.) 0.5...4.5 VDC (ratiom.) 0.5...4.5 VDC (ratiom.)
 NLH (BSL durch 0): ± 0.1 % d.S. typ.  NLH (BSL par 0): ± 0.1 % E.M. typ.  NLH (BSL through 0): ± 0.1 % FS typ.
oder ± 0.2 % d.S. typ. ou ± 0.2 % E.M. typ. or ± 0.2 % FS typ.
i
Vorteile Avantages principaux Main features
 Schiffszulassung  approbations navales ship approvals

 kleinste Bauform  construction la plus compacte  smallest design
 verschiedene Genauigkeitsklassen  différente classe de précision  different accuracy classes
 hervorragende Temperaturbeständigkeit  résistance de température excellente  excellent temperature resistance
 Surge  Surge  Surge
 erhöhte Vibrationsbeständigkeit  résistance de vibration élevée  improved vibration resistance
 komplett verschweisstes Sensorsystem  système de capteur en acier complétement  Completely welded steel sensor system
aus Stahl ohne zusätzliche Dichtungen soudé sans joints without additional seals
i baugleiche Modelle mit reduzierten Spezifikationen:

Data sheet No: H72250, H72300
version même construction avec des spécifications réduites:
www.trafag.com/data-sheet
identical construction with lower specifications:
änderungen vorbehalten - sous réserve de modifications - Subject to change
File: H72301f Page: 1 (4) Date: 02/2007

8255
Engine Pressure Transmitter NAE
Bestellinformation / Information pour la commande / Ordering information
Lager Code (kurze Lieferzeiten)/ Numéro de stock (delai de livraison bref)/ Code for stock products (short delivery time): NAE (z.B./ Ex./e.g: NAE10.0A)
 siehe Katalog:/ regardez catalogue:/ see catalogue: „Standard Products“ XXXX.XX.XXXX.XX.XX.XX...

Varianten Code/ Numéro de variantes/ Custom build code 8255

Bereich * 0 ... 2.5 Überdruck max. 5 Berstdruck 50 75

Plage 0 ... 4.0 Surpression 8 Pression destruction 60 76
Range 0 ... 6.0 Over pressure 12 Burst pressure 100 77
0 ... 10 20 200 78
... 16 32 200 79
[bar] 0 ... 25 [bar] 50 [bar] 300 80
0 ... 40 80 300 81
0 ... 60 120 400 82
0 ... 100 200 500 83
0 ... 160 320 750 85
0 ... 250 500 1000 74
0 ... 400 800 1500 84
0 ... 600 1000 2000 86
* Nur Genauigkeit 0.3%/ seulement précision 0.3%/ only accuracy 0.3%
Sonderbereich nach Kundenwunsch,

plage sur demande du client, p. ex.: –1 ... +4 bar XX
customized ranges on request, e.g.:
Sensor Relativdruck, Genauigkeit:/ Pression relatif, précision relatif:/ Relative pressure, accuracy: 0.3% 23
Capteur Relativdruck, Genauigkeit:/ Pression relatif, précision relatif:/ Relative pressure, accuracy: 0.15% 21
Sensor
Druckanschluss G 1/4“ aussen/ mâle/ male (O-Ring) 17

Raccord de pression * 7/16“-20UNF aussen/ mâle/ male *18
Pressure connection 1/4“ NPT aussen/ mâle/ male 30
* nur für Relativdruck/ seulement pour mesurage de pression relatif/ only for relative pressure measurement
* max. zulässiger Druckbereich / Plage de pression admissible max. / max. allowable pressure range: 40 bar
Ausführung Gerätestecker/ Embase mâle/ Male electrical plug DIN43650 C (contact distance 9.4mm) (Mat.: PBT) 01
Exécution M12x1, 4–pol. (Mat.: PBT) 32
Execution M12x1, 5–pol. (Mat.: PBT) 35

Ausgangssignal Output Load resistance ISUPPLY USUPPLY

Signal de sortie 4 ... 20 mA (USupply–9V)/20mA 24 (9 ... 32) VDC 19
Output 0 ... 10 VDC ≥5.0 kΩ ≤10 mA 24 (15 ... 32) VDC 17
0.5 ... 4.5 VDC ≥2.0 kΩ ≤10 mA 5 (4.5...5.5) VDC ratiometrisch/ ratiométrique/ ratiometric 23
Zubehör Kabeldose/ Fiche femelle/ Female electrical connector

Accessoires M12x1, 5–pol. (für Ausführung/ pour exécution/ for execution 32, 35) 33
Accessories Industrial standard 34
Druckspitzendämpfung/ Elément d‘amortissement à pointe de surpression/ Pressure peak damping element
(nur für Druckanschluss Nr. 17 + 30)/ (seulement pur raccord de pression no. 17 + 30)/
(only for pressure connection no. 17+ 30)
Loch/ trou/ hole ø1.0mm 40
ø0.3mm 43
ø0.5mm 45
Trafag entwickelt und produziert auch speziell auf Ihre Bedürfnisse zugeschnittene Produkte. Bitte fragen Sie uns an.
i Trafag développe et fabrique des produits adaptés à vos besoins spécifiques en se basant sur votre cahier des charges.Contactez-nous s.v.p.
Trafag develops and manufactures customized products according to your specifications to meet your requirements. Please contact us.
File: H72301f Page: 2 (4) Date: 02/2007

8255
Spezifikationen Spécifications Specifications
Hauptmerkmale Caractères distinctifs Main characteristics

Sensor: Dünnfilm auf Stahl (s. Material) Capteur: Couche mince sur acier (voir matière) Sensor: Thin film on steel (see material)
Messbereich: 0...2.5 bis 0...600 bar Plage de mesure: 0...2.5 à 0...600 bar Measuring range: 0...2.5 to 0...600 bar
Ausgangssignal: 4...20 mA Signal de sortie: 4...20 mA Signal output: 4...20 mA
0...10 VDC 0...10 VDC 0...10 VDC
0.5...4.5 VDC (ratiom.) 0.5...4.5 VDC (ratiom.) 0.5...4.5 VDC (ratiom.)
Genauigkeit Précision Accuracy

Messgenauigkeit 0.3% Précision de mesure 0.3% Measuring accuracy 0.3%
(Bestell.-Nr. 23) (No. commande 23) (Ordering No 23)
TFB @ -25...+85°C: ± 1.0 % d.S. typ. TEB @ -25...+85°C: ± 1.0 % E.M. typ. TEB @ -25...+85°C: ± 1.0 % FS typ.
Genauigkeit @ +25°C: ± 0.3 % d.S. typ. Précision @ +25°C: ± 0.3 % E.M. typ. Accuracy @ +25°C: ± 0.3 % FS typ.
NLH @ +25°C (BSL durch 0):± 0.2 % d.S. typ. NLH @ +25°C (BSL par 0): ± 0.2 % E.M. typ. NLH @ +25°C (BSL through 0): ± 0.2 % FS typ.
TK Nullpunkt und Spanne: ± 0.01 % d.S./K typ. CT point zéro et écart: ± 0.01 % E.M./K typ. TC zero point and span: ± 0.01 % FS/K typ.
Langzeitstabilität Stabilité à long terme Long term stability
1 Jahr @ +25°C: < ± 0.1 % d.S. typ. 1 année @ +25°C: < ± 0.1 % E.M. typ. 1 year @ +25°C: < ± 0.1 % FS typ.
Messgenauigkeit 0.15% Précision de mesure 0.15% Measuring accuracy 0.15%
(Bestell.-Nr. 21) (No. commande 21) (Ordering No 21)
TFB @ -25...+85°C: ± 0.5 % d.S. typ. TEB @ -25...+85°C: ± 0.5 % E.M. typ. TEB @ -25...+85°C: ± 0.5 % FS typ.
Genauigkeit @ +25°C: ± 0.15 % d.S. typ. Précision @ +25°C: ± 0.15 % E.M. typ. Accuracy @ +25°C: ± 0.15 % FS typ.
NLH @ +25°C (BSL durch 0):± 0.1 % d.S. typ. NLH @ +25°C (BSL par 0): ± 0.1 % E.M. typ. NLH @ +25°C (BSL through 0): ± 0.1 % FS typ.
TK Nullpunkt und Spanne: ± 0.002 % d.S./K typ. CT point zéro et écart: ± 0.002 % E.M./K typ. TC zero point and span: ± 0.002 % FS/K typ.
Langzeitstabilität Stabilité à long terme Long term stability
1 Jahr @ +25°C: < ± 0.1 % d.S. typ. 1 année @ +25°C: < ± 0.1 % E.M. typ. 1 year @ +25°C: < ± 0.1 % FS typ.
Elektrische Daten Spécifications électriques Electrical data

Ausgangssignal/Speisespannung Signal de sortie/Tension d‘alimentation Output/Supply voltage
4...20 mA: 24 (9...32) VDC 4...20 mA: 24 (9...32) VDC 4...20 mA: 24 (9...32) VDC
0...10 VDC: 24 (15...32) VDC 0...10 VDC: 24 (15...32) VDC 0...10 VDC: 24 (15...32) VDC
0.5...4.5 VDC: 5 VDC ratiometrisch 0.5...4.5 VDC: 5 VDC ratiométrique 0.5...4.5 VDC: 5 VDC ratiometric
Anstiegszeit: typ. 1 ms/10...90% Sensibilité de réponse: typ. 1 ms/10...90% Rise time: typ. 1 ms/10...90%
Nenndruck pression nominale nominal pressure
Einschaltverzögerung: 1s Retard à l’enclenchement: 1s Switch-on delay: 1s
Umgebungsbedingungen Conditions d‘environnement Environmental conditions

Betriebstemperatur: -40...+125°C Température de service: -40...+125°C Operating temperature: -40...+125°C
Medientemperatur -40...+125°C Température de médias: -40...+125°C Media temperature: -40...+125°C
Schutzart: 1)
min. IP65 Protection: 1)
min. IP65 Protection: 1)
min. IP65
Feuchtigkeit: max. 95% relativ Humidité: 95% max. relatif Humidity: max. 95% relative
Vibration: 40g (20...2000 Hz) Vibration: 40g (20...2000 Hz) Vibration: 40g (20...2000 Hz)
Schock: 100g/11 ms Choc: 100g/11 ms Shock: 100g/11 ms
EMV-Schutz CEM Protection EMC Protection

Emission: EN/IEC 61000-6-4 Emission: EN/CEI 61000-6-4 Emission: EN/IEC 61000-6-4
Immunity: EN/IEC 61000-6-2 Immunité: EN/CEI 61000-6-2 Immunity: EN/IEC 61000-6-2
Mechanische Daten Spécifications mécaniques Mechanical data

Material Matiére Material
Sensor: 1.4542/1.4548 (AISI630) Capteur: 1.4542/1.4548 (AISI630) Sensor: 1.4542/1.4548 (AISI630)
Gehäuse: 1.4301 (AISI304) Boîtier: 1.4301 (AISI304) Housing: 1.4301 (AISI304)
O-Ring (medienberührend): FKM 70°Sh O-Ring (contact. de médias): FKM 70°Sh O-Ring (media contacting): FKM 70°Sh
Gerätestecker: siehe Bestellinformationen Embase mâle: voir information de commande Male electrical plug: see ordering information
Anziehdrehmoment: 25 Nm Couple de serrage: 25 Nm Mounting torque: 25 Nm
Gewicht: ca. 50 g Poids: env. 50 g Weight: appr. 50 g
4
Measuring accuracy 0.3% 4
Measuring accuracy 0.15%
3 3
Accuracy (%)
Accuracy (%)
2 2
1 1
0 0
-1 -1
-2 -2
-3 -3
-4 -4
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
max. typ. TEB (-25...+85) Temp. (°C) max. typ. TEB (-25...+85) Temp. (°C)
1)
nur mit vorschriftsmässig montierter Kabeldose gültig/ valable seulement avec fiche femelle montée selon instructions/ provided female connector
is mounted according to instructions
File: H72301f Page: 3 (4) Date: 02/2007

8255
Massbilder / Cotes d‘encombrement / Dimensions
8255.XX.XX17.XX 8255.XX.XX18.XX 8255.XX.XX30.XX
8255.XX.XXXX.01.XX 8255.XX.XXXX.32.XX 8255.XX.XXXX.35.XX
8255.XX.XXXX.XX.33 8255.XX.XXXX.XX.34
elektrischer Anschluss / connexion électrique / electrical connection
Schutzart/Protection2) IP652) IP672)

provided with female connector is mounted according to instructions
Ausführung DIN43650 C M12x1

Exécution 4–pol. 5–pol.
valable seulement avec fiche femelle montée selon instructions
Execution 01 32 35
Ausgangssignal
nur mit vorschriftsmässig montierter Kabeldose gültig
Signal de sortie
Output
2 1 4
1 3 1
4 5
8255.XX.XXXX.XX.19
1 1 2
2 2 4
3 3 3
4 5
8255.XX.XXXX.XX.17/23
2)
Trafag AG, Industriestrasse 11, CH-8608 Bubikon, Tel +41 44 922 32 32, Fax +41 44 922 32 33, www.trafag.com
File: H72301f Page: 4 (4) Date: 02/2007

Installation & Instruction Leaflet
IP2044/GEA
December 2006 Vibrating Fork
Vibrating Fork
Important safety notice
GB
Protection afforded by compliance to EN61010-1 (2001) may be impaired if the equipment is not used as specified.
Vibrating Fork is a liquid level switch. It must be installed, connected, commissioned, operated and maintained by
suitably qualified personnel only, observing any national and local requirements that may apply.
Note Importante
F
La sécurité selon la norme EN610100-1 (2001) pourra être réduite si les conseils dans ce manuel ne sont pas suivis.
Vibrating Fork est un détecteur de niveau de liquide conçu pour une utilisation en dehors de zones classées
dangereuses. Vibrating Fork doit être installé, raccordé, mis en service, utilisé, et entretenu par des personnes
convenablement qualifiées qui respectent des normes locales et nationales.
Wichtiger Sicherheitshinweis:
D
Wenn die Geräte nicht wie spezifiziert verwendet werden, kann der Schutz gemäß EN610100-1 (2001) beeinträchtigt
werden.
Vibrating Fork ist ein Flüssigkeitsstandschalter zur Verwendung im Ex-freien Bereich. Vibrating Fork muss durch
geeignetes Personal installiert, angeschlossen, betrieben und gewartet werden. Dabei sind nationale und lokale
Bestimmungen zu beachten.
Viktig information om säkerhet:

S
Personskydd i enlighet med EN610100-1 (2001) kan minska eller upphöra om nivåvakten inte brukas enligt denna
instruktion
Vibrating Fork är en nivåvakt för vätskor. Den får endast installeras i icke explosionsfarliga miljöer. Vibrating Fork får
endast installeras, elektriskt inkopplas, driftsättas och underhållas av härför tekniskt kvalificerad personal med
beaktande av nationella och lokala tillämpliga bestämmelser.
Atención
E
Protección según EN610100-1 (2001), Se reducirá si el equipo no se utiliza según especificación.
El Vibrating Fork es un interruptor de nivel diseñado para trabajar fuera de zonas clasificadas peligrosas. El Vibrating
Fork debe instalarse, conectarse, ponerse en marcha, operarse y mantenerse por personal cualificado, teniendo en
cuenta todas las reglamentaciones nacionales y locales vigentes.
Belangrijke veiligheidsnota.
NL
De protectie conform aan de directieve EN610100-1 (2001) kan vervallen wanneer het product niet wordt toegepast
zoals beschreven.
De Vibrating Fork is ontworpen om gebruikt te worden in niet- explosiegevaarlijke ruimten. De Vibrating Fork dient
uitsluitend geplaatst, aangesloten, in bedrijf gesteld en onderhouden te worden door bevoegd personeel, en de
nationale voorschriften dienen gerespecteerd te worden.
PL Uwaga dotycząca bezpieczeństwa.

Zabezpieczenia w konstrukcji urządzenia wykonane zgodnie z normą EN610100-1 (2001) mogą być
niewystarczające o ile urządzenie jest użytkowane niezgodnie ze specyfikacją.
Vibrating Fork jest sygnalizatorem poziomu cieczy. Musi być instalowany, podłączony, użytkowany i serwisowany tylko
przez wykwalifikowany personel, posiadający wymagane uprawnienia.
Page 2
GB CAUTION: REFER TO MANUAL
F ATTENTION: CONSULTER LE MANUEL
D VORSICHT: HANDBUCH BEACHTEN
S VARNING: SE INSTRUKTIONEN
E PRECAUCIÓN: VER MANUAL
NL AANDACHT: RAADPLEEG DE FOLDER
PL UWAGA: PATRZ INSTRUKCJA
THE EXTERNAL SURFACE MAY BE HOT. CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO AVOID

GB
POSSIBLE BURNS.
LA SURFACE EXTERNE PEUT ETRE CHAUDE. ATTENTION AU RISQUE EVENTUEL

F
DE BRULURE.
DIE OBERFLÄCHE DES GERÄTS KANN VON AUßEN HEIß SEIN. BITTE VORSICHT,
D
UM VERBRENNUNGEN ZU VERMEIDEN.
S VARNING: VARM YTA, SE TILL ATT DU INTE BRÄNNER DIG
LA SUPERFICIE EXTERNA PUEDE ESTAR CALIENTE. DEBE TENERSE EN CUENTA

E
PARA EVITAR POSIBLES QUEMADURAS.
DE EXTERNE OPPERVLAKTE KAN HEET ZIJN.DE ZORG MOET WORDEN GENOMEN

NL
OM MOGELIJKE BRANDWONDEN TE VERMIJDEN.
ZEWNĘTRZNA POWIERZCHNIA MOŻE BYĆ GORĄCA, DLATEGO NALEŻY

PL
ZACHOWAĆ OSTROŻNOĆ ABY SIĘ NIE POPARZYĆ.
Page 3
THE PROTECTIVE EARTH TERMINAL MUST BE CONNECTED TO AN EXTERNAL
GB
PROTECTIVE EARTHING SYSTEM.
LA BORNE DE MISE A LA TERRE DOIT ETRE RELIEE A LA TERRE DU RESEAU

F
ELECTRIQUE.
DER EXTERNER ERDANSCHLUSS MUSS AN EINE SEPARATE ERDE

D
ANGESCHLOSSEN WERDEN.
S SKYDDSJORDANSLUTNINGEN MÅSTE DRAS TILL EXTERN SKYDDSJORD
E EL TERMINAL DE PUESTA A TIERRA DEBE CONECTARSE A LA RED DE TIERRAS.
DE BESCHERMENDE TERMINAL EARTH MOET AAN HET EXTERNE

NL
BESCHERMENDE AANAARDEN WORDEN AANGESLOTEN SYSTEEM.
OCHRONNY ZACISK UZIEMIENIA MUSI BYĆ PODŁĄCZONY Z ZEWNĘTRZNYM

PL
UZIEMIENIEM SYSTEMU.
Page 4
GB Handling
F Manipulation
D Handhabung
S Hantering
E Manejo Do not hold Vibrating Fork by forks.

Ne pas tenir le Vibrating Fork par les lames.
Vibrating Fork nicht an der Stimmgabel halten.
Håll ej Vibrating Fork i gaffeln.
NL Behandeling
No sujetar el Vibrating Fork por las horquillas
De Vibrating Fork mag niet aan de vorken vastgehouden worden.
Nie przenosić Vibrating Fork za widełki.
PL Obsługa
Device Identification
GB PNP solid state output
models : dc low voltage
Identification
F Modèle à sortie PNP: faible
intensité cc
Typenschild
D PNP Transistorausgang:
Niederspannung DC
Produktidentifiering
S Modell med PNP
transistorutgång max 60V dc
Identificación del equipo
E Modelos con salida PNP:
baja intensidad cc
Identificatie van het toestel
NL Model met PNP-uitgang:zwakke
dc intensiteit
PL Identyfikacja urządzenia.
Wyjście PNP: dc
Page 5
Page 6
GB Mounting examples
F Exemples de montage
D Montagebeispiele
S Exempel på montering
E Ejemplos de montaje
NL Montagewoorbeelden
PL Przykłady motażu
SP Switchpoint
GB
HY Switching hysteresis
SP Point de détection (pour de l’eau)

F
HY Hystérésis
SP Schaltpunkt
D
HY Schalthysterese
SP Omkopplingspunkt
S
HY Omkopplingspunkt Hysteres
SP Punto de conmutación
E
HY Histéresis
SP Schakelpunt
NL
HY Hysteresis
SP Punkt przełączania
PL
HY Histereza
Page 7
Avoid product build-up GB
Eviter des dépôts de matières

F
solides
Produktablagerungen
D
vermeiden
Undvik uppbyggnad av
S
beläggningar
Evitar el almacenamiento de
E
producto
Vermijd productaanladingen NL
Zabopieganie zarastaniu czujnika PL
Do not alter Vibrating Fork in

GB
any way
Ne modifier, en aucune manière,

F
la forme des lames.
Vibrating Fork in keiner Weise

D
verändern.
Vibrating Forks gaffelblad får

inte böjas eller vinklas i någon S
riktning
No debe modificarse la forma de

E
las láminas en ningun caso
In elk geval mag de Vibrating

NL
Fork niet beschadigd worden
Nie modyfikować Vibrating Forka

PL
w żaden sposób
Page 8
GB Installation ¾” BSPT, NPT
1” BSPT (R1)
PTFE
F Installation (Teflon)
D Installation
S Installation 1” BSPP (G1)

Gasket
Joint
E Dichtung
Instalación
Packning
Junta
Dichting
NL Installatie Uszczelnienie
PL Instalacja
51mm Tri-clover
(ISO2852)
Seal (supplied in SK266)

Joint (fourni dans SK266)
Dichtung (enthalten in SK266)
Packning (levereras med SK266)
Junta (suministrada en SK266)
Dichting (geleverd met SK266)
Uszczelka (dostarczana z SK266)
Page 9
Correct fork alignment GB
Orientation correcte de
F
la fourche
Richtige
D
Sensorausrichtung
Korrekt gaffelläge S
Alineación correcta de la
E
horquilla
Correcte orientatie van

NL
de vork
Prawidłowe usytuowanie
PL
widełek
Alignment groove
Repère pour orienter la fourche
Ausrichtung
Indikeringsspår för gaffelläge
Marca para alineación
Een inkeping duidt de orientatie
van de vork
Rowek ustawienia
Note
Noter l’orientation de la fourche
Beachten
OBS ! “spåret”
Nota
Uwaga
Page 10
Important safety notice
GB
Ensure wiring is suitable for the load current and the insulation is suitable for the voltage, temperature and
environment of the installation
A supply disconnection device must be included in the installation, fitted as a close as practical and not
obstructed by the equipment. It must be double pole and marked as the disconnection device.
Disconnect supply before removing connector
F Note Importante
Le type de câble doit convenir à la tension d'alimentation, au courant consommé et à la température de

service.
Un coupe-circuit doit être compris dans le circuit, monté près du détecteur et facile d'accés. Il doit être
double pôle et repéré clairement.
Couper l'alimentation avant d'ôter le connecteur du détecteur.
Wichtiger Sicherheitshinweis:
D
Bitte sicherstellen, dass die Kabel für die Stromlast geeignet sind und dass die Isolierung der Spannung,
Termperatur und Umgebung angemessen ist.
Bei der Installation muss ein Trennschalter so nahe wie möglich am Schalter und jederzeit erreichbar
angebracht werden. Er muss zweipolig sein und als Trennschalter gekeinnzeichnet sein.
Bitte Strom abschalten, bevor der Anschlussstecker gezogen wird.
Viktig information om säkerhet:

S
Säkerställ att kabel med lämplig area och isolering för aktuell ström, spänning, temperatur och miljö används.
Installationen måste vara försedd med en tvåpolig arbetsbrytare så nära utrustningen som det är praktiskt
möjligt. Brytaren skall vara tydligt uppmärkt.
Bryt spänningen innan du tar bort kabelkontakten
E Atención
Asegurarse que los cables son los adecuados para la carga a soportar y el aislamiento de los mismos para el
voltaje, confirmar las temperaturas y las condiciones de ambiente en la instalación
Un elemento suplementario de desconexión debe ser incluido en la instalación, situado tan cerca como sea
posible y que no pueda quedar obstruido. Debe ser de doble polaridad y marcado como elemento de
desconexión.
Desconectar el suministro eléctrico antes de cambiar el conector.
NL Belangrijke veiligheidsinstructie
Verzeker u ervan dat de bedrading geschikt is voor de belastingsstroom en de isolatie

aangepast aan de spanning, de temperatuur en de omgeving van de installatie.
Een voedings – afschakelelement dient te worden voorzien in de installatie en zo dicht als maar praktisch
mogelijk bij het instrument geplaatst, zonder door dit laatste gehinderd te zijn.
Schakel de voeding af vooraleer de connector te verwijderen.
PL
Uwaga dotycząca bezpieczeństwa
Należy zapewnić odpowiedni prąd obciążenia i izolacje przewodów odpowiednią dla napięcia, temperatury i
warunków montażu.
Elektryczna linia zasilająca musi być wyposażona w odpowiednie zabezpieczenie, zamontowane zgodnie z
zasadami wymaganymi przy tego typu instalacjach. Zabezpieczenie powinno być podłączone i wyraźnie
oznaczone na obiekcie.
Odłącz zasilanie przed demontażem złącza.
Page 11
GB Mode selection Load switching: ac/dc PNP output: dc
Direct load switching: ac/dc PNP for PLC/SPS connection: dc

Commutation de charge ca/cc PNP pour automate: cc
F Choix de commutation Zweileiterschalter: AC/DC PNP für SPS- Anschluss: DC
Lastbrytare ac/dc PNP transistorutgång till PLC: dc
Commutación carga : ca/cc PNP para conexion a PLC: dc
D Funktionswahl ac/dc belastingsverandering PNP voor aansluiting aan een:cc
Wyjście z bezpośrednim obciążeniem: PLC/SPS : dc
ac/dc Wyjście PNP dla PLC: dc
S Funktionsval
Selección modo
E
conmutación
NL Functieselectie
PL Wybór trybu pracy
Direct load Switching PNP output
PE (Ground / Terre ou masse / Erde / PE (Ground / Terre ou masse / Erde /

Skyddsjord / Aarding / Tierra ò masa / Skyddsjord / Aarding / Tierra ò masa /
Uziemienie) Uziemienie)
DRY = ON: High level alarm

SEC = Passant : pour alarme de
niveau haut
TROCKEN = EIN: Anwendung als
oberer Begrenzer
TORR = TILL: Högnivålarm
SECO - ON : Alarma nivel alto
DROOG = AAN : Hoog niveau alarm
DRY = ON: Alarm wysokiego
poziomu
PE (Ground / Terre ou masse / Erde / PE (Ground / Terre ou masse / Erde /

Skyddsjord / Aarding / Tierra ò masa / Skyddsjord / Aarding / Tierra ò masa /
Uziemienie) Uziemienie)
WET = ON: Low level alarm

MOUILLE = Passant : pour alarme de
niveau bas
NASS = EIN: Unterer Begrenzer
(Mangelsicherung)
VÅT = TILL: Lågnivålarm
HUMEDO = ON Alarma nivel bajo
NAT = AAN : Laag niveau alarm
WET = ON: Alarm niskiego poziomu
Page 12
Selección modo
E Mode selection GB
conmutación
NL Functieselectie Choix de commutation F
PL Wybór trybu pracy Funktionswahl D
Funktionsval S
Load switching: ac/dc PNP output: dc

Direct load switching: ac/dc Solid state PNP output: dc
Commutation de charge ca/cc Sortie PNP: cc
Zweileiterschalter: AC/DC PNP Transistor Ausgang: DC
Lastbrytare ac/dc PNP transistorutgång: dc
Commutación carga : ca/cc Salida PNP : cc
ac/dc belastingsverandering PNP uitgang : dc
Wyjście z bezpośrednim obciążeniem: ac/dc Wyjście PNP dla PLC: dc
GB R = external load (must be wired) = external load
Max. inrush current: 5A (electrically protected)

I Max continuous: I Load off : <3mA
I Min: 20mA I Max continuous: 500 mA
I Load off: <3mA
F R = Charge dans la boucle (obligatoire.) = Charge externe
Courant d’entrée maxi: 5A (limiteur interne)

Courant maxi de maintien: 500mA
I Maxi continu: 500mA
I Mini: 20mA Courant mini de veille : <3mA environ
D R = externe Last (muss angeschlossen = externe Last (muss angeschlossen werden.)

werden)
Max. Spitzenstrom: 5A (elektrisch geschützt)
I Max Dauerstrom: 500mA I Leckstrom (aus): <3mA
I Max Dauerstrom: 500mA
I Min: 20mA
I Leckstrom (aus): <3mA
S R = extern last (måste finnas ansluten) = extern last
Max. stötström: 5A (elecktroniskt avsäkrad)

I Max kont.ström: 500mA I Frånslaget läge :<3mA
Min ström: 20mA I Max kont.ström: 500mA
I Läckström : <3mA
E R = carga externa debe estar conectada = Carga externa
Corriente max de entrada : 5A (protegida eléctricamente)

I max continua 500mA I carga no conectada (3mA)
I Min: 20mA I Max continua : 500mA
I carga no conectada : <3mA
R = Uitwendige belasting
NL (dient bedraad te worden) = Uitwendige belasting
Max. inloopstroom : 5A (electronisch beveiligd)

I Max. continue stroom : 500mA I Zonder belasting :<3mA
I Min: 20mA Max. continue stroom : 500Ma
I Zonder belasting :<3mA
R = zewnętrzne obciążenie (musi być = zewnętrzne obciążenie

PL
podłączone)
Max. prąd rozruchowy: 5A (elektrycznie zabezpieczony)

Max. prąd ciągły: Prąd wyłączenia <3mA
Prąd min.: 20mA Max. prąd ciągły: 500mA
Prąd wyłączenia: <3mA
Page 13
Function and High level DRY = ON Low level WET = ON
GB
LED indication Niveau haut Sec = Passant Niveau bas
TROCKEN = EIN Mouillé = Passant
Oberer Begrenzer NASS = EIN
Indication de Hög nivå TORR = TILL Unterer Begrenzer
F
fonctionnement Nivel alto SECO=ON Låg nivå VÅT = TILL
Hoog niveau Nivel bajo HUMEDO=ON
Funktion und DROOG = AAN Laag niveau NAT = AAN
D Wysoki poziom DRY = ON Niski poziom WET = ON
LED-Anzeige
Funktion och Short circuit Internal

S
LED-indikering load fault
or I max >
500mA
Indicacion de
E
funcionamiento
Court circuit, Défaut
pas de interne
Functie en charge en
NL
led-aanduiding série
ou I max >
500mA
Funkcjonalność i
PL
wskaźnik LED
Kurzschluss Interner
oder Fehler
PLC (positive input) ∆U
I max >
∆U <100µA <100µA
Automate (entrée positive) 500mA
<3V IL IL <3V IL IL
Positiver Eingang für SPS
3 2 1 3 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1
Positiv PLC-utgång
PLC para entrada positiva Kortslutning Internt fel
PLC voor positieve input + I/P + I/P + I/P + I/P eller
Podłączenie do PCL PLC PLC PLC PLC I max >
500mA
∆U <100µA ∆U <100µA
PNP dc Carga en Fallo
Sortie PNP <3V IL IL <3V IL IL
cortocircuito interno
PNP Ausgang 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 I max >
PNP-utgång 500mA
Salida PNP
PNP uitgang
Wyjście PNP Kort-sluit- Inwendige
+V 0V +V 0V +V 0V +V 0V
belasting of I fout
max.>
500mA
<3mA
Load switching ac/dc ∆U
<3mA
∆U
Commutation de la charge ca/cc <12V <12V
Lastschalter AC/DC Chwilowe Wewnętrz
3 1 3 1 2 1 2 1
Last brytare ac/dc włączenie w ne
Commutación carga ca/cc obwodzie uszkodzen
ac/dc belastings-verandering lub max. ie
Bezpośrednie obciążenie 0V +V 0V +V 0V +V 0V +V prąd >
ac/dc N L1 N L1 N L1 N L1 500mA
L.E.D
On 1Hz On 1Hz ¼Hz 3Hz
= Load on. = Load off.

= Relais excité = Relé au reposo
= Last ein. = Last aus.
= Belastning till. = Belastning från.
= Carga on. = Carga off.
= Belasting aan. = Belasting uit.
= Pod napięciem. = Bez napięcia.
Page 14
Fixing screw
Wiring
GB
Use only connector supplied
Seal
Joint
Dichtung
Cablage Tätning
F max
Utiliser le connecteur fourni Junta
1.5mm2 Dichting
(AWG 16)
Podkładka
Anschluss
D
Bitte nur den mitgeliefertern Plug Assembly
Anschlussstecker verwenden
Elektrisk anslutning
S
Använd endast medföljande
kabelkontakt
Ø max 8mm
Conexionado (0.31 in)
E
Usar únicamente el conector Ø min 6mm
suministrado (0.24 in)
Bedrading
NL Maak enkel gebruik van de
geleverde connector Insert cable into plug housing
Insérer le câble dans le connecteur
Przewody elektryczne Kabel in Steckergehäuse einführen
Należy tylko używać złacza Stick kabeln genom kabelkontaktens hus
PL Insertar el cable en el conector
dostarczonego wraz z
De kabel in de plugbehuizing inbrengen
przyrządem
Przewody należy doprowadzić do
urządzenia wykorzystując Plug Fitted
poszczególne elementy dławika wg.
Relay connection warning:
GB Vibrating Fork requires a minimum current of 3mA, which continues to flow when Vibrating Fork is ‘off’. If
selecting a relay to wire in series with Vibrating Fork, the user must ensure that the drop-out voltage of
the relay is greater than the voltage which will be generated across the relay coil when 3mA flows
through it.
Précaution pour le raccordement aux relais:
F Le Vibrating Fork consomme en permanence un courant de 3mA. Si l’on choisit de raccorder un relais
en série avec le Vibrating Fork, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer que le courant de maintien du relais soit
supérieure au courant de veille (3mA env) du détecteur sinon il restera collé en position "Travail".
Bei Relaisanschluss beachten:
D Vibrating Fork benötigt einen minimalen Leckstrom von 3mA, auch im “AUS”-Zustand. Mit einem Relais
in Reihe muss sicher gestellt sein, dass die Abfallspannung des Relais größer als der Spannungsabfall
über die Relaisspule ist, wenn 3mA fließen.
Observera vid reläanslutning:
S Vibrating Fork kräver en lägsta ström av 3mA för att fungera, även då den slagit från. Det betyder att
reläets frånslagsspänning måste vara större än den spänning som genereras över reläspolen då en
läckström på 3mA flyter genom den.
Precauciones para la conexión a los relés :
E El Vibrating Fork consume permanentemente una corriente de 3mA. Si se quiere conectar un relé en
serie con el Vibrating Fork, el usuario debe asegurarse de que la caida de tensión a nivel del relé sea
superior a la tensión generada a través de la bobina del relé cuando ésta consuma 3mA
Voorzorgmaatregelen voor het aansluiten aan een relais :
NL De Vibrating Fork verbruikt permanent 3mA. Wanneer men een relais in serie aansluit met de Vibrating
Fork, dient de verbruiker zich ervan te verzekeren dat het stroomverlies ter hoogte van het relais hoger
is dat de onstane stroom doorheen de spoel van het relais, wanneer deze 3mA verbruikt.
Uwaga: Podłączenie przekaźników
PL Vibrating Fork wymaga minimalnego prądu zasilania (3mA) gdy stan wyjść urządzenia jest nieaktywny.
W przypadku wykorzystania dodatkowych przekaźników, sterowanych Vibrating Forkiem, urzytkownik
musi być pewny, że napięcie zwolnienia przekaźnika jest większe niż napięcie generowane w
przekaźniku kiedy przepływa przez niego prąd podtrzymania w wysokości 3mA w stanie nieaktywnego
Vibrating Forka.
Page 15
No magnet Normal condition
Sans aimant Magnetic test point GB
Ohne magnet
Ingen magnet
Geen magneet
Sin imán Point test magnetique F
Bez magnesu
Magnetische Funktionsprüfung D
Magnetisk testpunkT
S
With magnet
Avec aimant Test condition Punto test magnético
E
Met Magneet
Mit magnet
Imantado
Med magnet NL
Con magneto
Magnetischtestpunt
Z magnesem
Magnetyczny punkt testujący PL
Cover orientation GB
Orientation du connecteur F
Steckerausrichtung D
Kontaktdon orientering S
Orientación del conector E
Orientatie van de plug NL
Orientacja dławika kablowego PL
The Vibrating Fork is IP66 and IP67 when El Vibrating Fork es IP66 y IP67 cuando se
GB correctly assembled with the supplied E instala con el cable apropiado y el conector
connector and suitable cable. que se proporciona
Le Vibrating Fork est IP66 et IP67 De Vibrating Fork is IP66 en IP67 indien hij
F lorsqu’équipé du connecteur fourni et du NL wordt aangesloten met de bijgeleverde
câble approprié. connector en een geschikte kabel.
Bei Anschluss mit dem mitgelieferten Vibrating Fork posiada stopień ochrony
D Anschlussteil und einem geeigneten Kabel ist PL IP66 oraz IP67. Dla zachowania tej cechy
der Vibrating Fork IP66 und IP67. należy zwrócić uwagę na prawidłowe
podłączenie kabli z wykorzystaniem
dostarczonego łącza i usytuowania dławika.
Vibrating Fork är IP66 och IP67 när det
S medföljande kontaktdonet och en lämplig
kabel har monterats korrekt
Page 16
Temperature Technical data GB
Limites de température
Temperatur
Tillåten F
Donnees techniques
arbetstemperatur
Temperatura
Temperatuur Technische Daten
D
Tekniska data S
Datos Técnicos E
Technische gegevens NL
Pressure
Limites de pression Dane techniczne PL
Druck
Tryck
Presión
Druk
Ciśnienie
Density p 0,6 - 1,6 Viscosity v max. 10000 cPs

Densité r 0,6 - 1,6 Viscosité v max. 10000 cPs
Dichte p 0,6 - 1,6 g/cm Viskosität v max. 10000 cP
3
Densitet ρ 0,6 - 1,6 kg/dm Viskositet v max. 10000 cP
Densidad 0,6 – 1,6 Viscosidad v max. 10000 cPs
Densiteit 0,6 - 1,6 Viscositeit v max. 10000 cPs
Gęstość 0,6 - 1,6 Lepkość maksymalna. 10000 cPs
Tamb = Ambient temperature Tamb = Température ambiante

GB Tp = Process temperature F Tp = Température du liquide
p = Process pressure p = Pression dans le réservoir
Tamb = Umgebungstemperatur Tamb = Omgivningstemperatur

D Tp = Prozesstemperatur S Tp = Vätsketemperatur
p = Prozessdruck p = Processtryck
Tamb = Omgevingstemperatuur Tamb = Temperatura ambiente

NL Tp = Procestemperatuur E Tp = Temperatura del líquido
p = Procesdruk p = Presión en el tanque
Tamb = Temperatura otoczenia

PL Tp = Temperatura procesu
p = Ciśnienie procesowe
Page 17
Cable gland supplied
Presse-étoupe fourni Technical data GB
Kabelverschraubung
Kontaktdon med kabel-
förskruvning Donnees techniques F
Geleverde kabelwartel
Prensaestopas
Dławik dostarczony z Technische Daten D
Ø38 urządzeniem
Notch to indicate fork
orientation
Repère d’orientation Tekniska data S
de la fourche
Nut für Sensor-
orientierung
Spår för indikering av Datos Técnicos E
gaffelläge
Borne de Tierra externo
Dodatkowe uziemienie
Externer Erdanschluss
Borne externe de terre
Muesca para indicar
Uitwendige aarding
orientación de la Technische gegevens NL
horquiilla External earth
Een inkeping duidt de
M4 x 4.5mm
Extern jord
orientatie van de vork
Vibrating Fork
Dane techniczne PL
aan
Rowek określający
położenie widełek
41 A/F
41 sur plats A
SW 41
B
Thread 1” or ¾”
Filetage 1” ou ¾” 13 mm
Gewinde 1” oder ¾”
Gänga1” eller ¾”
Rosca 1” o ¾” Nominal sensing level (vertically mounted)
Schroefdraad 1” of ¾” Point de détection (montage vertical)
Gwint 1” lub ¾” Nennschaltpunkt (vertikale Montage)
Nominell omkopplingspunkt (vertikal montering)
Nivel de detección(montaje vertical)
Nominaal schakelpunt (vertikaal gemonteerd)
Nominalny poziom czułości (montaż pionowy)
Vibrating
fork
A mm 116
B mm 98
C mm 239
Page 18
K7741
Accessories & spare Material: Non-asbestos BS7531 grade X Seal

GB
parts carbon fibre with rubber binder Joint
Dichtung
Accessoires & Matière: Sans amiante BS7531 grade X Fibre
F Tätning
pieces de rechange de carbone avec liant en caoutchouc
Junta
Zubehör und Material: Kohlefaser mit Gummibindung, Dichting
D
Ersatzteile asbestfrei Uszczelnienie
Tillbehör och Material: Asbestfri kolfiber (BS7531 Grade X)

S
reservdelar med bindemedel I gummi
Accesorios & Material: Sin amianto BS7531 grado X fibra de

E
recambios carbono con junta de goma
Bijbehorigheden en Materiaal: Asbestvrij BS7531 grade X

NL
onderdelen koolstofvezels met rubber bindmiddel
Akcesoria i części
PL Materiał: włókno węglowe w osłonie gumowej
zapasowe
SK267
Material: 316 SS fitting. Fluorocarbon Hygienic adaptor boss

(FPM/FKM) ‘O’ ring
Raccord alimentaire
Matière: Acier inox 316 avec joint torique en Hygiene Einschweißfitting
Fluorocarbon (FPM/FKM) Hygienisk adapter
Adaptador higiénico
Material: 316 rostfr. Stahl, Fluorocarbon Hygiënische aansluitmof
(FPM/FKM) ‘O’ Ring
Przyłącze higieniczne
Material: Syrafast stål Fluorocarbon

(FPM/FKM) ‘O’ ring
Material: Accesorio en acero inox. AISI 316,

Junta tórica en Fluorocarbon (FPM/FKM)
Materiaal: Roestvrij staal 316 O-ring dichting

uit Fluorocarbon (FPM/FKM)
Materiał: 316 SS – króciec, Fluorocarbon
(FPM/FKM) – O-ring
51mm (2”) Tri-clover kit SK266

Kit comprises:- Material: 316 St. steel, Fluorocarbon
Vessel fitting, clamp ring, seal (FPM/FKM) seal
Un kit comprend:- Matière: Acier inox 316, joint en
Raccord à souder, bague de serrage, joint Fluorocarbon (FPM/FKM)
Kit umfaßt:- Material: 316 rostfr. Stahl,
Behälterfitting, Klemmring, dichtung Fluorocarbon (FPM/FKM) Dichtung
Satsen omfattar:- Material: Syrafast stål 316
Tankanslutning klämhylsa, tätning Fluorocarbon (FPM/FKM)tätning
Cada kit comprende:- Fijación para depósito Material: Acero inox. AISI 316
junta clamp Junta Fluorocarbon (FPM/FKM)
Een kit bevat: Reservoiraansluiting, Drukrig Materiaal: Roestvrij staal 316
Dichting uit Fluorocarbon
Komplet obejmuje:- Materiał: stal nierdzewna 316
Króćce zbiornikowe, obejma, uszczelnienie Uszczelka - Fluorocarbon
Page 19
GB Specification
Application & mounting

Vibrating Fork will work in most liquids, including coating and aerated liquids and
slurries.
For use in safe area only. Mount in any position in tank or pipe. Mounting is by ¾”
or 1” thread or hygienic fitting.
Construction
Wetside material 316L Stainless steel (1.4404)
Gasket (1” BSPP model only) Non-asbestos
BS7531 Grade X carbon fibre
with rubber binder
Dryside materials
Body 304 Stainless steel with polyester label
LED window Flame retardent Polyamide
(Pa12) UL94 V2
Plug Polyamide glass re-inforced
Plug seal Nitrile butadiene rubber
Ingress protection
rating IP66 an IP67
Operating conditions
Wetside temp. -40oC to +150oC
Ambient temp. -40oC to +80oC
(derated to 50oC at 150oC wetside)
Wetside pressure -0.25 bar g to +100 bar g at 50oC
(30 bar for hygienic fittings)
Liquid sg 0.6 to 2.0
Liquid viscosity 0.2 to 10,000 cPs
Switching point 13mm from tip (vertical) / from edge
(water) horizontal) of fork
Hysteresis (water) +/- 1mm nom.
Switching delay 1 sec dry to wet / wet to dry.
Maximum altitude 2000m
Maximum humidity 100% RH
Electrical
Switching mode User selectable (Dry = on or Wet = on) by
selection wiring in plug
Protection Reverse polarity protected. Missing load /
short circuit protection.
Cable connection Via 4 way plug provided – DIN43650
Orientation – 4 position (90/180/270/360 deg.)
Max. conductor size 1.5mm2
PG9 Cable gland provided for cable dia. 6mm to 8mm
Earthing Vibrating Fork must always be earthed
either through cable plug or using
external earth connection provided.
Safety EMC
E.M.C. Directive EN50081-1 (Emmissions)
EN50082-2 (Immunity) EN61326
L.V. Directive EN61010-1
Pollution degree 2, Category II (264V max)
Pollution degree 2, Category III (150V max)
Page 20
Specification F
Applications et montage
Vibrating Fork détectera la plupart des liquides, colles, vernis, peintures
même s'ils sont aérés ou chargés.
Utilisation hors zone dangereuse (non agréé ATEX SI ou ADF). Montage dans
n'importe quelle position sur cuve ou sur canalisation. Raccord fileté ¾” ou 1” male
Construction
Coté liquide Acier inox 316 C12
Joint (Modèle 1” BSPP seulement) Sans amiante
BS7531 Grade X fibre carbone/caoutchouc.
Boîtier Acier inox 304 avec etiquette en
polyester
Indicateur visuel Polyamide (Pa12) UL94 V2
résistant aux flammes
Connecteur Polyamide renforcé au verre
Joint connecteur Caoutchouc nitrile butadiène
Etanchéité IP66 et IP67
Conditions de service
Température liquide. -40oC à +150oC
Température ambiante -40oC à +80oC
(50oC pour 150oC liquide)
Pression -0.25 bar eff à +100 bar eff à 50oC
Densité relative 0.6 à 2.0
Viscosité 0.2 à 10,000 cps
Point de détection 13mm du bout (montage vertical) ou du bord
(montage horizontal) de la fourche pour de l’eau
Hystérésis (eau) +/- 1mm en moyenne.
Temps de réponse 1 seconde.
Maximum altitude 2000m

Maximum humidity 100% RH
Caractéristiques électriques
Commutation (Sonde sèche = passant ou bloqué) choisie par le
câblage du connecteur
Protection Contre inversion de polarité, court-circuit,
ou manque de charge dans la boucle 2 fils.
Raccordement Par connecteur 4 pôles – DIN43650
Orientable en 4 sens (90/180/270/360o.)
Capacité conducteur 1.5mm2 max.
Presse-étoupe (fourni) PG9 pour câble Ø 6mm à 8mm.
Mise à la terre Obligatoire soit par le connecteur, soit
par la borne sur la partie 6 pans
Agréments CE
Directive C.E.M. EN50081-1 (Emission)
EN50082-2 (Immunité) EN61326
Directive L.V. D EN61010-1
Pollution degré 2, Catégorie II,
(264V max)
Pollution degré 2, Catégorie III, (150V max)
Page 21
Technische
D
Daten
Applikation & Montage

Der Vibrating Fork arbeitet bei den meisten Flüssigkeiten, einschließlich klebrigen
und sprudelnden Flüssigkeiten sowie Schlämmen. Montage in beliebiger Lage an
Behältern und Rohrleitungen im Ex-freien Bereich mit 3/4” oder 1” Gewinde (siehe
Typenschlüssel)
Konstruktiver Aufbau
Benetzte Seite Rostfreier Stahl 316 (Werkst. Nr. 1.4404)
Dichtung (nur G1A) Asbestfrei, Kohlefaser mit Gummibindung
Trockene Seite
Gehäuse Rostfr. Stahl 304 mit Polyester Typenschild
LED-Fenster Flammenhemmendes Polyamid
(Pa12) UL94 V2
Stecker Polyamid, Glasfaserverstärkt
Steckerdichtung Nitril Butadien Gummi
Schutzart IP66 und IP67
Betriebsbedingungen
Temp. nasse Seite -40oC bis +150oC
Umgebungstemp. -40oC bis +80oC (50oC bei 150oC nasse Seite)
Druckbereich -0,25 bar bis +100 bar bei 50oC
Dichte 0,6 bis 2,0 g/cm³
Viskositätsbereich 0,2 bis 10.000 cP
Schaltpunkt (Wasser) 13 mm von Spitze (vertikal)/von Kante
Hysterese (Wasser) ±1 mm nom.
Schaltverzögerung 1 sec trocken zu nass/nass zu trocken
Max. Höhe ü.d.

Meeresspiegel 2000 m
Max. Luftfeuchtigkeit 100% RH
Elektrische Spezifikation
Funktionswahl Wählbar vor Ort (Trocken = Ein oder
Nass = Ein) durch Steckeranschluss
Geräteschutz Verpolungsschutz sowie Schutz bei
fehlender Last als Kurzschlussschutz
Kabelanschluss über mitgelieferten 4-poligen Stecker-
DIN 43650, Orientierung vier Positionen
(90°/180°/270°/360°)
Max. Leiterquerschnitt 1,5 mm2
PG9 Kabelverschraubung für Kabeldurchmesser 6 mm bis 8 mm.
Erdung Vibrating Fork muss immer geerdet werden,
entweder über den Steckeranschluss,
oder die externe Erdschraube.
Sicherheit und EMV

E.M.V. Vorschrift EN50081-1 (Emmission)
EN50082-2 (Immunität) EN61326
Niederspannungsrichtlinie EN61010-1
Verschmutzungsgrad 2, Isolierstoffgruppe II
(264V max) und Isolierstoffgruppe III (150V max)
Page 22
Teknisk S
Specifikation
Applikation och installation

Vibrating Fork arbetart I kan användas till både tunnflytande och trögflytande vätskor
samt slam. Den påverkas ej av skum eller luftbubblor. Valfritt monteringsläge i
tankens tak, vägg, botten eller i rörledning. ¾” eller 1” utvändig gänganslutning.
Konstruktion
Våtsida Syrafast stål 316
Tätning (Endast 1” BSPP) Asbestfri kolfiber
(BS7531 Grade X) med bindemedel av gummi
Torrsida Hus: Rostfritt stål 304 med etikett i polyester
LED-fönster: Flamtåligt Polyamid
(Pa12) UL94 V2
Kontaktdon Glasfiberförstärkt polyamid
Kontakttätning Nitrilgummi
Kapslingsklass IP66 och IP67
Driftsdata
Vätsketemp. -40oC till +150oC
Omgivn.temp. -40oC till +80oC (dock max 50°C vid 150° på
våtsidan)
Vätsketryck -0.25 bar till +100 bar övertryck vid 50oC
Vätskedensitet 0.6 till 2.0 kg/dm3
Vätskeviskositet 0.2 till 10,000 cP
Omslagspunkt 13 mm från gaffelns spets vid vertikalt montage (vatten)
3 mm över gaffelns centrumlinje vid horisontellt
montage
Hysteres (vatten) ± 1mm nominellt
Fördröjning 1 sekund våt till torr eller torr till våt
Max. höjd ö.h. 2000m

Max. rel. fuktighet 100% RH
Elektriska data
Kontaktfunktion Väljs i kabelkontakten (torr=till eller våt=till)
Belastningen ansluts i serie
Max brytström 500 mA kontinuerligt
Max stötström 5 A elektroniskt skyddad
Min brytström 20 mA kontinuerligt
Strömförbrukning <3,0 mA kontinuerligt (i frånläge)
Spänningsfall Ca 6,5 V vid 24 VDC/5,0 V vid 240 VAC
Anslutningssp. 24 till 240 V (± 10%) AC eller DC
Skyddad mot omvänd polaritet, frånvaro av belastning och kortslutning.
Anslutning via 4-vägs avskiljbart kontaktdon (ingår) - DIN 43650.
PG9 kabelförskruvning ingår. Kabeldiameter 6-8 mm.
Max area per ledare: 1,5 mm2
Orientering 4 lägen (90/180/270/360°)
Vibrating Fork skall alltid jordas antingen via kontaktdonet eller vaktens externa
jordanslutning
Tillämpliga EU-direktiv
EMC-direktivet EN50081-1 (Emission)/
EN50082-2 (Immunitet) EN61326
Lågspänningsdirektivet EN61010-1
Miljöklass 2 kategori II (264V max)
Miljöklass 2 kategori III (150 V max)
Page 23
E Características
Montaje y aplicación
El Vibrating Fork funcionará con la mayoria de líquidos, colas, barnices, pinturas,
liquidos con burbujas y residuales.
Para emplear solamente fuera de zonas peligrosas. Se puede montar en cualquier
posición en depósitos y tuberías.
Montaje mediante rosca macho de ¾” o 1” ó accesorio higiénico.
Materiales
Partes húmedas Acero inox. AISI 316
Junta (sólo en el modelo de 1” BSPP) Sin amianto
BS7531 Grado X fibra al carbono con goma
Cuerpo
Acero inox. AISI 304 con etiqueta de poliéster
Ventana para LED Polyamide (Pa12) UL94 V2
retardante a la llama
Tuerca Nylon reforzado con fibra de vidrio
Junta tuerca Goma butadienonitrilo
Grado de protección IP 66/67 s/ EN60529
Condiciones de funcionamiento
Temp. Partes húmedas. -40oC a +150oC
Temp. Ambiente. -40oC a +80oC (-50oC a 150oC partes
húmedas)
Presión partes húmedas -0.25 bar a +100 bar a 50oC
(30 bar para accesorios higiénicos)
Densidad líquidos 0.6 a 2.0
Viscosidad líquidos 0.2 a 10,000 cps
Punto de conmutación 13mm desde el extremo (vertical) /
desde el borde (horizontal) de la
horquilla.
Histéresis (agua) +/- 1mm nom.
Altitud máxima 2000m

Humedad máxima 100% HR
Caracteristicas electricas
Retardo conmutación 1 segundo de seco a húmedo/ húmedo a seco.
Eléctrico
Modo de conmutación Seleccionable por el usuario (Seco=on ó
Húmedo=on) mediante selector en
conector
Protección Protegido contra reversión de polaridad
y contra cortocircuitos.
Conexión cables Mediante conector 4 vías – DIN43650
Orientación – 4 posiciones 90/180/270/
360 grados.)
Tamaño máx. cables 1.5mm2
Se suministra con prensa estopas PG 9 apto para cables de 6 a 8 mm.
Puesta a tierra Vibrating Fork debe conectarse siempre
a tierra, ya sea mediante el conector
o empleando la conexión externa a tierra
que incorpora.
Seguridad CEE
Directiva CEE EN50081-1 (Emisiones)
EN50082-2 (Inmunidad) EN61326
Directiva Baja EN61010-1
Tension Grado 2, Categoría II (264V máx.)
Grado 2, Categoría III (150V máx.)
Page 24
Specificaties NL
Toepassing & montage

Vibrating Fork zal werken in de meeste vloeistoffen, met inbegrip van aanklevende,
beluchte en beladen vloeistoffen, ook van slib. Alleen bestemd voor toepassing in niet
explosiegevaarlijke omgevingen. Montage in om het even welke positie in tanks en
leidingen. Montage via een 3/4” of 1” schroefdraad of een een hygiënische
aansluiting.
Constructie
Vloeistofzijde Roestvrij staal 316
Dichting (1” BSPP model alleen) Asbestvrij)
BS7531 Grade X koolstofvezels met
rubber bindmiddel
Droge zijde
Behuizing Roestvrij staal 304 met polyester label
LED venster Zelfdovend Polyamide
(Pa12) UL94 V2
Plug Glasvezelversterkt polyamide
Plugdichting Nitril Butadïeenrubber
Protectiegraad IP66/67 volgens EN60529
Werkingsvoorwaarden
Vloeistof To bereik -40oC tot +150oC
Omgevings To -40oC tot +80oC (beperkt tot 50oC bij een
vloeistoftemperatuur van 150oC)
Vloeistofzijde -0,25 bar g tot +100 bar g bij 50oC
drukbereik (30 bar voor hygiënische aansluiting)
Vloeistofdensiteit : 0,6 tot 2,0
Vloeistofviscositeit : 0,2 tot 10,000 cps
Schakelpunt 13mm vanaf het uiteinde (vertikale montage)
/ as van de vorkbladen (horizontale montage)
Hysteresis (water) +/- 1mm nominaal
Responsietijd 1 sec. droog naar nat / nat naar droog
Maximum hoogte 2000m

Maximale vochtigheid 100% Relatieve Vochtigheid
Electrische karakteristieken
Schakelfunctie Selecteerbaar door de gebruiker (Droog = Aan
/of Nat = Aan) door bedraden in de plug
Protectie Beschermd door polariteitsinversie,
afwezigheid van belasting / kortsluiting
Kabelaansluiting Via een 4-wegsplug – DIN43650
Orientatie – 4 posities (90/180/270/360 gr.)
Max geleiderssectie 1,5mm2
Kabelwartel Pg9 kabelwartel - kabels van diam. 6 tot 8mm
Aarding Vibrating Fork dient steeds geaard te worden
via de kabel of een voorziene aardingsaansluiting.
EMC Directieven
E.M.C. Directieve EN50081-1 (Emissies)
EN50082-2 (Immuniteit) EN61326
L.V. Directieve Richtlijn EN61010-1 (lage voltage)

Niveau van de verontreiniging 2, Categorie II (264V
maximum).
Niveau van de verontreiniging 2, Categorie III (150V
maximum).
Page 25
PL Specyfikacja
Zastosowanie i montaż.
Vibrating Fork przeznaczony jest dla większości cieczy, łącznie z cieczami
napowietrzanymi i z tędęcją do tworzenia powłok oraz dla zawiesin.
Przeznaczony dla stref niezagrożonych wybuchem. Vibrating Fork może być
montowany w każdej pozycji w zbiorniku lub na rurociągu z wykorzystaniem przyłączy
gwintowych lub higenicznych
Konstrukcja
Materiał części zwilżanych
Stal nierdzewna 316L (1.4404)
Podkładka Włókna węglowe pokryte gumą, bez azbestu
(dla modelu 1” BSPP) - BS7531 Grade X carbon fibre
Materiał elementów suchych
Obudowa Stal nierdzewna 304
Okno diody LED Żywica poliamidowa
(Pa12) UL94 V2
Łącze Szkło poliamidowe
Uszczelnienie łącza Kauczuk polibutadienowy
Stopień ochrony IP66 - IP67
Warunki pracy
Temperatura procesu. -40oC to +150oC
Temperatura otoczenia. -40oC to +80oC
(50oC dla tem. procesu 150oC)
Ciśnienie procesowe -0.25 bar g do +100 bar g przy 50oC
(30 bar dla przyłączy higenicznych)
Gęstość cieczy 0.6 to 2.0
Lepkość cieczy 0.2 to 10,000 cps
Punkt przełączenia 13mm od końca widełek (dla montażu pionowego)
(woda) 13mm od najniższego punktu widełek (dla montażu
poziomego)
Histereza (dla wody) +/- 1mm nom.
Opóźnienie przełączenia 1s przy zanurzeniu i wynurzeniu
Max. wysokość pracy 2000m
Max. wilgotność 100% RH
Własności elektryczne
Tryb przełączania Wybierany przez użytkownika (Dry = on lub Wet = on) za
pomocą odpowiedniej konfiguracji podłączenia
przewodów elek.
Ochrona Zabezpieczenie przed odwrotną polaryzacja, przed
zwarciem, brakiem obciążenia.
Przyłącza kabli Łącze wg. DIN43650
Orientacja – 4 pozycje (90/180/270/360 stopni.)
Max. rozmiar przewodów 1.5mm2
Dławik kablowy PG9 Średnica kabla - 6mm do 8mm.
Uziemienie Vibrating Fork musi być zawsze uziemiony poprzez
zaciski lub specjalne przyłącze zewnętrzne
Bezpieczeństwo EMC
Dyrektywy E.M.C. EN50081-1 (Emisja)
EN50082-2 (Odporność) EN61326
Dyrektywy L.V. EN61010-1
Stopień zanieczyszczenia 2, Kategoria II (264V max)
Stopień zanieczyszczenia 2, Kategoria III (150V max)
Page 26
GB Maintenance
F Maintenance
D Wartung
S Underhåll
E Mantenimiento
NL Onderhoud
PL Konserwacja
Check connector and seals are correctly fitted, also that the connector fixing screw and gland are
GB Inspection tight. Check unit for damage and if damaged do not use.
Contrôler la mise en place du connecteur et des joints et le serrage de ces derniers. Si le matériel
F Contrôle est endommagé, ne pas mettre en service.
Bitte prüfen, dass der Anschlussstecker richtig eingesteckt ist, die Dichtungen richtig sitzen und
D Inspektion dass die Schraube des Anschlusssteckers und die Verschraubung fest angezogen sind. Bitte
untersuchen, ob das Gerät beschädigt ist. Bei Beschädigung nicht anschliessen.
Kontrollera att kabelkontakt och tätningar är korrekt monterade samt att skruv och kabeltätning är
S Inspektion åtdragna. Kontrollera att delarna är oskadade. Skadade delar kasseras.
Comprobar que el conector y los cierres estan montados correctamente y si el material está
E Inspección dañado, no ponerlo en servicio.
Kijk na of de connector en dichtingen correct zijn geplaatst, alsook dat de connector-

NL Inspectie bevestigingsschroef en rondsel goed zijn aangedrukt.
Kontroleer het toestel op beschadiging en gebruik het niet indien beschadigd
Należy sprawdzić złącze i dławik. Prawidłowość montażu i szczelność połączenia. Przeprowadzić

PL Kontrola należy oględziny urządzenia, jeśli są ślady uszkodzenia nie należy podłączać zasilania i
niezwłocznie zgłosić problem do producenta.
Page 27
Installation & Instruction Leaflet
IP2044/GEA
Vibrating Fork December 2006
Vibration level fork
- Liquitec series -
SHORT FORK FOR MINIMUM INSTALLATION DEPTH
CONTINUOUS OPERATING TEMPERATURE OF UP TO 150°

AND 100 BAR GAUGE PRESSURE
24 V DC PNP TRANSISTOR OUTPUT

FOR CONNECTION TO SPS / PLS
STANDARDISED VERSION AND HYGIENIC

DESIGN SUITABLE FOR FOOD AND PHARMACEUTICALS
VERSIONS
The maintenance-free Liquitec series consists of liquid level switches for use in an EX-free operating environment.
Liquitec Standard with GIB threaded connection and welding socket, with O-ring seal, fork polishing optional
Liquitec L Hygienic version with Tri-Clamp 2“, parts in contact with the medium have been polished
TECHNICAL DATA
Application & Installation
For use in most liquids, including viscous and effervescent liquids and slurries.
Installation in any position in containers and pipes in the EX-free area with 1“ threads.
Construction
Housing: Stainless steel 304

LED window: Flame-retarding polycarbonate
Process connection: Liquitec series:
G1B threaded connection
O-ring seal (EPDM, for zem / Liquitec),
or flat seal (NBR, for hexagonal)
Liquitec L series:
Tri-Clamp 2" according to ISO 228,
Parts in contact with the medium have been mirror-finished (standard)
Parts in contact with the medium: Cr Ni St 1.4404, 316 L
Electrical connection Polyamide cable socket, glassfibre-reinforced
Plug seal: Nitrile butadiene rubber
Type of protection IP 66/67 according to EN 60529
Operating conditions
Temperature of medium: -40ºC to +150ºC

Environmental temperature -40ºC to + 80ºC (+50ºC at +150ºC on medium side)
Pressure range: -0.25 bar to +100 bar at +50ºC
Specific weight: 0.6 to 2.0 viscosity range 0.2 to 10,000 cP
Switch point (water): 13 mm from tip (vertical) and from edge (horizontal) of fork
Hysteresis (water): +/- 1mm, nom. switching delay 1s dry / wet and wet / dry
Norms / regulations
CE conformity conditions have been fulfilled

Requirements according to EN 50081 (emission) / EN 50082-2 (immission),
EN 61326 Low-voltage guideline EN 61010-1 Pollution level 2,
Insulation material group II (264 max) and III (150 V max) conditions have been adhered to
N/Liquitec/D-e-08-1/1
Hengesbach GmbH & Co. KG · Schimmelbuschstr. 17 · D-40699 Erkrath · Tel. +49 (0) 21 04 / 30 32-0 · Fax +49 (0) 21 04 / 30 32-22 · www.hengesbach.biz
- Liquitec type series -
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
Selection of switching mode:
Load switch PNP switch

Load
0V/L +V
PLC
+V/N 0V
PE PE
Protection Reverse polarity protection, missing load / short circuit protection
Cable connection: via 4-pin plug according to DIN 43650 (attached),

Max. conductor size = 1.5 mm², 4-position orientation (90º, 180º, 270º, 360º),
PG 9 cable connection (attached), cable diameter 6 to 8 mm
Earthing: always recommended, either via a cable plug or an external earth connection
2-wire load switch PNP switch

Operating voltage: 24 to 240 V (+/- 10%) DC / AC 18-60 V DC
Max. switch load: 500 mA 500 mA
Max. peak load: 5A 5A
Min. switch load: 20 mA continuous _
Voltage drop: 6.5 V @ 24 V DC / 5.0 V @ 240 V AC <3V
Power requirements: - 3 mA effective
Output current (without load): - < 0.5 mA
Input current (without load): < 3.0 mA continuous _
DIMENSIONAL DRAWING
Groove for fork orientation
Nominal switch point

vertically mounted External
terminal connection
(Tri-Clover 2") Cable entry point
Liquitec (Tri-Clover)
Process A B C D
connection (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
G1B 78 60 201 N/A

Tri-Clamp 2" 69 50 188 64
Semi-extended 116 98 239 N/A
ADAPTOR
O-Ring O-Ring O-ring
zem / G1 - liquitec zfl / VA - liquitec zfl / MG ... - liquitec

Welding socket Liquitec Varivent flange DN50 / 40 Conical socket DIN 11851 - DN40 ... DN50
ORDER INFORMATION
LIQUITEC series (standard versions)
Process connection
S Thread G 1, ISO 228, standard fork surface
X Other (¾“ NPT,...)
Y Thread G 1, ISO 228, fork manually polished < 0,8 µm
Electronics
B PNP-transistor output 24 - 60 VDC
F 2-wire-circuit in series with load
Length
A Standard length (69 / 50 mm)
B Semi-extended (116 / 98 mm)
Authorisations
A Standard
Z WHG overflow safeguard
Liquitec
LIQUITEC L series (hygienic version)
Process connection
L Tri clamp 2”, ISO 228
Electronics
B PNP-transistor output 24 - 60 VDC
F 2-wire-circuit in series with load
Length
A Standard length (69 / 50 mm)
Authorisations
A Standard
Z WHG overflow safeguard
Liquitec L A
A) Utilisation / installation
• The Liquitec vibration level fork is suitable for use in an EX-free environment.
• The device must be installed, operated and maintained by trained staff,

taking into account the usual and current national and local technical specifications.
• Before using the device, its suitability for the specific application must be checked.
• Product deposits of all kinds in the sensor area should be avoided.
• The correct sensor alignment (groove for fork orientation, see dimensional drawing above) must
be ensured.
B) Function / LED
• The range of functions and the LED display are indicated on the type label.
> DRY = ON > Use as upper limit switch ( HI alarm )

> WET = ON > Lower limit switch ( LO alarm / dry run protection)
The LED display installed as part of the electrical connections has a cycle time of 1 Hz under normal operating
conditions and displays ON; in the event of a short-circuit, the cycle time is reduced to 0.25 Hz, while in the
event of an internal fault it increases to 3 Hz.
C) Magnetic function test
• A provisional function test (closing / opening functions) can be carried out before installation by touching the
housing with a special bar magnet.
D) Electrical connection
• Before connecting the device, the type label must be identified once again, in order to determine the electrical
connection and the switch modes (2-wire load switch or PNP transistor switch). Technical connection data -
see table above.
• The adaptor supplied must be equipped with a suitable cable to achieve the protection class IP66 or IP67. The
cable inlet should be orientated downwards to ensure leak-tightness.
• Warning for relay connection:

The level switch requires a minimum current of 3 mA, even when "OFF".
When using a serially switched relay, care must be taken that the drop-out voltage of the relay
is greater than the voltage drop via the relay coil when the current is equal to 3 mA.
Our products are constantly in further development, therefore subjects to modifications.
Inductive sensor NJ5-11-N-G
Dimensions
M14x1
Ø 11
14
31
3
19
0102
Model Number
NJ5-11-N-G
Features
• Comfort series
• 5 mm not embeddable
Technical Data
• Usable up to SIL2 acc. to IEC 61508
General specifications
Switching element function NAMUR, NC
Connection Rated operating distance sn 5 mm
Installation not embeddable
Output polarity NAMUR
Assured operating distance sa 0 ... 4.05 mm
BN Reduction factor rAl 0.4
L+
Reduction factor rCu 0.3
Reduction factor r304 0.85
BU Nominal ratings
L- Nominal voltage Uo 8V
Switching frequency f 0 ... 3000 Hz
Hysteresis H typ. 5 %
Current consumption
Measuring plate not detected ≥ 3 mA
Measuring plate detected ≤ 1 mA
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature -25 ... 100 °C (-13 ... 212 °F)
Mechanical specifications
Connection type cable PVC , 2 m
Core cross-section 0.34 mm2
Housing material Stainless steel 1.4305 / AISI 303
Sensing face PVDF
Protection degree IP68
General information
Use in the hazardous area see instruction manuals
Category 2G; 1D
Compliance with standards and directives
Standard conformity
NAMUR EN 60947-5-6:2000
Standards EN 60947-5-2:2007
IEC 60947-5-2:2007
Approvals and certificates
UL approval cULus Listed, General Purpose
Date of issue: 2012-02-09 112726_eng.xml
CSA approval cCSAus Listed, General Purpose

Release date: 2012-02-09 14:47
Subject to modifications without notice Copyright Pepperl+Fuchs

Pepperl+Fuchs Group
www.pepperl-fuchs.com
USA: +1 330 486 0001
fa-info@us.pepperl-fuchs.com
Germany: +49 621 776-4411
fa-info@pepperl-fuchs.com
Singapore: +65 6779 9091
fa-info@sg.pepperl-fuchs.com
1
ATEX 2G
Instruction Manual electrical apparatus for hazardous areas
Device category 2G for use in hazardous areas with gas, vapour and mist
Directive conformity 94/9/EG
Standard conformity EN 60079-0:2006, EN 60079-11:2007
Ignition protection "Intrinsic safety"
Use is restricted to the following stated conditions
CE symbol 0102
Ex-identification ¬ II 2G Ex ia IIC T6
EC-Type Examination Certificate PTB 00 ATEX 2048 X

Appropriate type NJ 5-11-N...
Effective internal capacitance Ci ≤ 45 nF ; a cable length of 10 m is considered.
Effective internal inductance Li ≤ 50 µH ; a cable length of 10 m is considered.
General The apparatus has to be operated according to the appropriate data in the data
sheet and in this instruction manual. The EC-Type Examination Certificate has to
be observed. The special conditions must be adhered to!
Directive 94/9/EG and hence also EC-Type Examination Certificates apply in gene-
ral only to the use of electrical apparatus under atmospheric conditions.
The use in ambient temperatures of > 60 °C was tested with regard to hot surfaces
by the mentioned certification authority.
If the equipment is not used under atmospheric conditions, a reduction of the per-
missible minimum ignition energies may have to be taken into consideration.
Highest permissible ambient temperature The temperature ranges, according to temperature class, are given in the EC-Type
Examination Certificate.
Installation, Comissioning Laws and/or regulations and standards governing the use or intended usage goal
must be observed. The intrinsic safety is only assured in connection with an appro-
priate related apparatus and according to the proof of intrinsic safety.
Maintenance No changes can be made to apparatus, which are operated in hazardous areas.
Repairs to these apparatus are not possible.
Special conditions
Protection from mechanical danger When used in the temperature range below -20 °C the sensor should be protected
from knocks by the provision of an additional housing.
Electrostatic charging Electrostatic charges must be avoided on the mechanical housing components.
Dangerous electrostatic charges on the mechanical housing components can be
avoided by incorporating these in the equipotential bonding.
112726_eng.xml
Release date: 2012-02-09 14:47 Date of issue: 2012-02-09

2 Pepperl+Fuchs Group
USA: +1 330 486 0001
Germany: +49 621 776-4411
Singapore: +65 6779 9091
ATEX 1D
Instruction Manual electrical apparatus for hazardous areas
Device category 1D for use in hazardous areas with combustible dust

Directive conformity 94/9/EG
Standard conformity IEC 61241-11:2002: draft; prEN61241-0:2002
type of protection intrinsic safety "iD"
Use is restricted to the following stated conditions
CE symbol 0102
Ex-identification ¬ II 1D Ex iaD 20 T 108 °C (226.4 °F)

The Ex-relevant identification may also be printed on the accompanying adhesive
label.
EC-Type Examination Certificate ZELM 03 ATEX 0128 X
Appropriate type NJ 5-11-N...
Effective internal capacitance Ci ≤ 45 nF ; a cable length of 10 m is considered.
Effective internal inductance Li ≤ 50 µH ; a cable length of 10 m is considered.
General The apparatus has to be operated according to the appropriate data in the data
sheet and in this instruction manual.
The EC-Type Examination Certificate has to be observed.
The special conditions must be adhered to!
Maximum housing surface temperature The maximum surface temperature of the housing is given in the EC-Type Exami-
nation Certificate.
Installation, Comissioning Laws and/or regulations and standards governing the use or intended usage goal
must be observed.
The intrinsic safety is only assured in connection with an appropriate related
apparatus and according to the proof of intrinsic safety.
The associated apparatus must satisfy at least the requirements of category ia IIB
or iaD. Because of the possibility of the danger of ignition, which can arise due to
faults and/or transient currents in the equipotential bonding system, galvanic isola-
tion in the power supply and signal circuits is preferable. Associated apparatus wit-
hout electrical isolation must only be used if the appropriate requirements of IEC
60079-14 are met.
The intrinsically safe circuit has to be protected against influences due to lightning.
When used in the isolating wall between Zone 20 and Zone 21 or Zone 21 und
Zone 22 the sensor must not be exposed to any mechanical danger and must be
sealed in such a way, that the protective function of the isolating wall is not
impaired. The applicable directives and standards must be observed.
If the Ex-relevant identification is exclusively printed on the included adhesive label,
this must be applied in the direct vicinity of the sensor! The surface to which the
label is to applied must be clean and free from grease! The applied adhesive label
must be durable adlegible to protect it against the possibility of chemical corrosion!
Maintenance No changes can be made to apparatus, which are operated in hazardous areas.
Repairs to these apparatus are not possible.
Special conditions
Electrostatic charging The connection cables are to be laid in accordance with EN 50281-1-2 and must not
normally be subjected to chaffing during use.
Electrostatic charges must be avoided on the mechanical housing components.
Dangerous electrostatic charges on the mechanical housing components can be
avoided by incorporating these in the equipotential bonding.
112726_eng.xml
Release date: 2012-02-09 14:47 Date of issue: 2012-02-09

Pepperl+Fuchs Group
USA: +1 330 486 0001
Germany: +49 621 776-4411
Singapore: +65 6779 9091
3
Betriebsanleitung (Original) / Translation / Traduction)
Betriebsanleitung.................................................. Seite 1 - 16
Operating manual ................................................page 17 - 32
Notice d'utilisation................................................page 33 - 48
Widerstandsthermometer
Typ W083
Messbereich von -40 °C bis +200 °C.
© SiKA • Ba_W083.pdf 12/2011.
Bewahren Sie diese Betriebsanleitung zum Nachschlagen auf.

Geben Sie diese Betriebsanleitung bei der Veräußerung des Gerätes mit.
SiKA Dr.Siebert & Kühn GmbH & Co. KG y Struthweg 7–9 y D-34260 Kaufungen y Germany
℡ +49 5605 803-0 y +49 5605 803-54 y info@sika.net y www.SIKA.net
Widerstandsthermometer
Inhaltsverzeichnis Seite
0 Hinweise zur Betriebsanleitung ................................................................................. 3
1 Gerätebeschreibung.................................................................................................. 4
1.1 Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung ........................................................................ 5
2 Sicherheitshinweise .................................................................................................. 6
3 Aufbau und Funktion .................................................................................................7
4 Einbau des Widerstandsthermometers ......................................................................8
4.1 Einbauhinweise .......................................................................................................8
4.2 Montage ..................................................................................................................8
5 Elektrischer Anschluss ............................................................................................ 10
5.1 Anschlussvarianten ............................................................................................... 11
5.2 Überprüfung des Oberflächenwiderstandes (Ausführung W083…X) .................... 11
6 Wartung, Reinigung und Probleme ......................................................................... 12
7 Demontage und Entsorgung ................................................................................... 13
8 Schutzrohre............................................................................................................. 13
9 Werkstofftabelle ...................................................................................................... 14
10 Technische Daten ................................................................................................... 14
11 Abmessungen ......................................................................................................... 15
12 Herstellererklärung.................................................................................................. 16
Urheberschutzvermerk:
Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung dieser Betriebsanleitung, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhalts
sind verboten, soweit nicht ausdrücklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz.
Alle Rechte für den Fall der Patent-, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vor-
behalten.
-2- © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Widerstandsthermometer Hinweise zur Betriebsanleitung
0 Hinweise zur Betriebsanleitung

• Die Betriebsanleitung richtet sich an Facharbeiter und angelernte Arbeitskräfte.
• Lesen Sie vor jedem Arbeitsschritt die dazugehörigen Hinweise sorgfältig durch und
halten Sie die vorgegebene Reihenfolge ein.
• Lesen Sie den Abschnitt „Sicherheitshinweise“ besonders aufmerksam durch.
• Die Abbildungen in der Betriebsanleitung sind beispielhaft und gelten für alle Typen
von Widerstandsthermometern.
• Abschnitte oder Beschreibungen die nicht alle Typen von Widerstandsthermometern
betreffen, sind entsprechend gekennzeichnet.
Sollten Sie Probleme oder Fragen haben, wenden Sie sich an Ihren Lieferanten oder direkt
an:
Dr. Siebert & Kühn GmbH & Co. KG

Struthweg 7-9 • D - 34260 Kaufungen
℡ 05605-803 0 • 05605-803 54
info@sika.net • www.sika.net
Verwendete Gefahrenzeichen und Symbole:

VORSICHT! Hohe Temperatur!
Dieses Zeichen kennzeichnet Gefahren durch hohe Temperaturen, die zu gesundheitlichen
Schäden führen oder erheblichen Sachschaden verursachen können.
WARNUNG! / VORSICHT! Verletzungsgefahr!
Diese Zeichen kennzeichnet Gefahren, die Personenschäden verursachen, die zu gesundheit-
lichen Schäden führen oder erheblichen Sachschaden verursachen können.
VORSICHT! Materialschaden!
Dieses Zeichen weist auf Handlungen hin, die mögliche Sach- und Umweltschäden ver-
ursachen können.
HINWEIS!
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG BEACHTEN! Diese Zeichen gibt Ihnen wichtige Hin-
weise, Tipps oder Informationen.
KEIN HAUSMÜLL!
Das Gerät darf nicht zusammen mit
Hausmüll entsorgt werden.
Beachten und befolgen Sie die damit ge- Überprüfen Sie die angegebenen Punkte
kennzeichneten Informationen. oder Hinweise.
ª Befolgen Sie die angegebenen An- J Verweis auf einen anderen Abschnitt,
weisungen bzw. Handlungsschritte. Dokument oder Quelle.
Halten Sie die Reihenfolge ein. • Gliederungspunkt.
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten -3-

Gerätebeschreibung Widerstandsthermometer
1 Gerätebeschreibung
Das Widerstandsthermometer hat zwei, redundant aufgebaute Pt100 Temperatursensoren.
Es dient der Fernüberwachung von flüssigen und gasförmigen Medien in Rohrleitungen oder
Behältern, sowie Maschinen oder Anlagen.
Die beiden Sensoren des Widerstandsthermometer befinden sich an der gleichen Messstelle.
Baugruppen:
Die wichtigsten Baugruppen des Widerstandsthermometer sind der Anschlusskopf und das
Tauchrohr.
Anschlusskopf:
Der Anschlusskopf dient dem Anschluss des
elektrischen Temperatursensors für die Fernüber-
wachung. In ihm befindet sich der Messeinsatz.
Tauchrohr:
Das Tauchrohr dient dem Prozessanschluss der An-
lage oder Maschine. Es wird im Bereich der Mess-
stelle eingebaut.
Bei Anwendungen mit besonderen Belastungen ist der
Einbau von Schutzrohren erforderlich.
Messstelle:
Die Temperaturmessung erfolgt im unteren Teil des Tauchrohres. Dort befinden sich die
temperaturempfindlichen Bereiche des Messeinsatzes (J § 3 "Aufbau und Funktion").
Ausführungen:
Das Widerstandsthermometer ist in den Ausführungen W083 und W083…X lieferbar. Die
Ausführung W083…X kann im Ex-Bereich eingesetzt werden.
Typenschild:
Auf dem Typenschild finden Sie die wichtigsten Daten und das Anschlussbild des gelieferten
Widerstandsthermometers.
W083:
W083…X:
Lieferumfang:
• 1x Widerstandsthermometer.
• 1x Betriebsanleitung.
• ggf. Verpackung oder Transportschutz.
Zubehör:
• Schutzrohre nach DIN 43772:2000.
-4- © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Widerstandsthermometer Gerätebeschreibung
1.1 Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung

Das Widerstandsthermometer darf nur zur Temperaturanzeige bzw. -überwachung von
flüssigen und gasförmigen Medien in Rohrleitungen oder Behältern, Maschinen oder Anlagen
verwenden werden.
WARNUNG! Kein Sicherheitsbauteil!

Die Widerstandsthermometer W083 und W083…X sind keine Sicherheitsbauteile im
Sinne der Richtlinie 2006-42-EG (Maschinenrichtlinie).
ª Verwenden Sie dies Widerstandsthermometer niemals als Sicherheitsbauteil.
Die Betriebssicherheit des gelieferten Gerätes ist nur bei bestimmungsgemäßer Verwendung
gewährleistet. Die angegebenen Grenzwerte (J § 10 "Abmessungen") dürfen keinesfalls
überschritten werden.
VORSICHT! Verletzungsgefahr oder Materialschaden!

Das Widerstandsthermometer kann im Betrieb sehr heiß werden und darf keinen
mechanischen Belastungen ausgesetzt werden.
ª Verwenden Sie das Widerstandsthermometer niemals als Haltegriff oder Trittfläche.
Überprüfen Sie vor dem Einbau, ob die benetzten Werkstoffe des Gerätes für das ver-
wendete Medium geeignet sind (J § 9 "Werkstofftabelle").
Ausführung W083…X:
Das Widerstandsthermometer W083…X ist für den Einsatz in Bereichen mit explosions-
fähiger Atmosphäre vorgesehen.
ª Beachten Sie die weiterführenden Informationen in § 12 "Herstellererklärung".
ª Beachten Sie die nachfolgenden Maßnahmen:
Zündtemperatur des zu überwachenden Mediums:
ª Die Zündtemperatur des zu überwachenden Mediums muss mindestens 10 K
oberhalb des Temperaturbereichs liegen. Beim W083…X also ≥ 210 °C.
Wackelkontakt an elektrischen Anschlüssen:
ª Anschluss des Gerätes an einen bescheinigten eigensicheren Stromkreis.

Sicherheitshinweise Widerstandsthermometer
2 Sicherheitshinweise
Bevor Sie das Widerstandsthermometer installieren, lesen Sie diese Betriebsanleitung
sorgfältig durch. Werden die darin enthaltenen Anweisungen, insbesondere die Sicher-
heitshinweise nicht beachtet, können Gefahren für Mensch, Umwelt, Gerät und Anlage
die Folge sein.
Die Widerstandsthermometer entsprechen dem aktuellen Stand der Technik. Dies betrifft die
Genauigkeit, die Funktionsweise und den sicheren Betrieb der Geräte.
Um eine sichere Bedienung zu gewährleisten, ist sachkundiges und sicherheitsbewusstes
Verhalten der Bediener erforderlich.
SiKA gewährt persönlich oder durch entsprechende Literatur Hilfestellung für die Anwendung
der Produkte. Der Kunde prüft die Einsetzbarkeit des Produktes auf der Basis unserer
technischen Informationen. In kunden- und anwendungsspezifischen Tests überprüft der
Kunde die Eignung des Produktes für seinen Verwendungszweck. Mit dieser Prüfung gehen
Gefahr und Risiko auf unseren Kunden über; unsere Gewährleistung erlischt.
Qualifiziertes Personal:
Das Personal, das mit der Inbetriebnahme und Bedienung des Widerstandsthermometers
beauftragt wird, muss eine entsprechende Qualifikation aufweisen. Dies kann durch
Schulung oder entsprechende Unterweisung geschehen.
Dem Personal muss der Inhalt der vorliegenden Betriebsanleitung bekannt und jederzeit
zugänglich sein.
Der elektrische Anschluss darf nur von einer Elektrofachkraft vorgenommen werden.
Allgemeine Sicherheitshinweise:
Bei allen Arbeiten sind die bestehenden nationalen Vorschriften zur Unfallverhütung und
Sicherheit am Arbeitsplatz einzuhalten. Vorhandene interne Vorschriften des Betreibers
sind zu beachten, auch wenn diese nicht in dieser Anleitung genannt werden.
Schutzart nach DIN EN 60529:
Achten Sie darauf, dass die Umgebungsbedingungen am Einsatzort die Anforderungen
der angegebenen Schutzart (J § 10 "Technische Daten") nicht überschreiten.
Setzen Sie das Widerstandsthermometer keinen mechanischen Beanspruchungen aus.
Verwenden Sie es niemals als Haltegriff oder Trittfläche.
Verwenden Sie das Widerstandsthermometer nur in einwandfreiem Zustand. Be-
schädigte oder fehlerhafte Geräte müssen sofort überprüft und ggf. ersetzt werden.
Verwenden Sie bei Montage, Anschluss und Demontage des Widerstandsthermometers
nur passende Werkzeuge.
Typenschilder oder sonstige Hinweise auf dem Gerät dürfen weder entfernt noch un-
kenntlich gemacht werden, da sonst jegliche Garantie und Herstellerverantwortung er-
lischt.
Spezielle Sicherheitshinweise:
Warnhinweise, die sich speziell auf einzelne Funktionsabläufe oder Tätigkeiten beziehen,
finden Sie vor den entsprechenden Stellen in dieser Betriebsanleitung.
-6- © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Widerstandsthermometer Aufbau und Funktion
Sicherheitshinweise für Ausführung W083…X:

Beim Einsatz des Widerstandsthermometers in explosionsgefährdeten Bereichen müssen
zusätzlich noch die nachfolgenden Sicherheitshinweise beachtet werden.
Alle Arbeiten, die den Ex-Bereich betreffen, dürfen nur von einer entsprechend quali-
fizierten Elektrofachkraft vorgenommen werden.
Das Widerstandsthermometer darf nur an einem bescheinigten eigensicheren Stromkreis
betrieben werden. Das Abklemmen der Anschlussdrähte innerhalb des Ex-Bereiches ist
aufgrund der bescheinigten Eigensicherheit zulässig.
Das Widerstandsthermometer ist durch den Einbau in eine metallische Rohrleitung oder
Behälter in den Potenzialausgleich mit einzubeziehen.
Überprüfen Sie den Oberflächenwiderstand beim Widerstandsthermometer nach Durch-
führung des elektrischen Anschlusses (J § 5.2).
Überprüfen Sie in regelmäßigen Zeitabständen (3 Monate) das Widerstandsthermometer
auf Korrosion / Korrosionsspuren (J § 6 "Wartung Ausführung W083…X").
3 Aufbau und Funktion

Aufbau:
c
Anschlusskopf und Tauchrohr:
d
Kopfgehäuse.
Deckel mit Dichtung, Schrauben und Zahn-
e
scheiben.
Kabelverschraubung mit Dichtung und Druckring.
f
g
Kontermutter.
Tauchrohr mit Gewindeanschluss.
h
Messeinsatz:
i
Klemmsockel
j
Fühlerleitungen und Sensorrohr.
2x Pt100 Temperaturfühler.
Funktion des Messeinsatzes:

Der Messeinsatz arbeitet nach dem Prinzip der Widerstandsänderung. Die Temperatur an
der Messstelle wird durch den Temperaturfühler in einen entsprechenden Widerstandswert
umgewandelt.
Die beiden Pt100 Temperaturfühler befinden sich unten im Sensorrohr. Ein Kabel im Inneren
des Sensorrohres verbindet die Temperaturfühler mit dem Klemmsockel im Kopfgehäuse.
Die elektrischen Signale der Temperaturfühler liegen direkt am Klemmsockel an.

Einbau des Widerstandsthermometers Widerstandsthermometer
4 Einbau des Widerstandsthermometers
4.1 Einbauhinweise
POSITION DER MESSSTELLE!

Für eine präzise Temperaturmessung ist die richtige Positionierung der Messstelle des
Widerstandsthermometer am Einbauort erforderlich.
Beachten Sie die nachfolgenden Einbauhinweise:
Die Messstelle muss sich in der Mitte der Rohr- Achten Sie bei Isolierungen auf ein aus-
leitung befinden. reichend langes Tauchrohr.
Zu kurze oder zu lange Tauchrohre führen zu
einer falschen Temperaturanzeige.
Das Widerstandsthermometer W083…X ist durch den Einbau in eine metallische Rohrleitung
oder einen metallischen Behälter in den Potenzialausgleich mit einzubeziehen.
4.2 Montage
VORSICHT! Hohe Temperatur!

Die Oberfläche des Widerstandsthermometers kann beim Betrieb sehr heiß werden!
ª Berühren Sie niemals das heiße Widerstandsthermometer.
VORSICHT! Verletzungsgefahr und Materialschaden!

Bei ungeeigneten Dichtwerkstoffen kann heißes Medium austreten! Es besteht die Gefahr von
Personenschäden, sowie von Schäden an der Anlage und Verunreinigung der Umwelt.
ª Verwenden Sie nur geeignete Dichtstoffe.
Überprüfen Sie vor dem Einbau, ob

die Anlage ausgeschaltet ist und sich in einem sicheren und stromlosen Zustand befindet.
die Anlage drucklos und abgekühlt ist.
ein Einschraubstutzen am Einbauort der Anlage oder Maschine vorhanden ist.
ein geeigneter Dichtstoff verwendet wird.
-8- © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Widerstandsthermometer Einbau des Widerstandsthermometers
GEEIGNETE WERKZEUGE:
Verwenden Sie nur geeignete Werkzeuge der passenden Größe.
Einbau:
ª 1. Abdichten ª 2. Einsetzen
ª 3. Tauchrohr festziehen ª 4. Kontermutter lösen
Anzugsmoment: 55 + 5 Nm
ª 5. Ausrichten ª 6. Kontermutter anziehen
Anzugsmoment: 55 + 5 Nm

Elektrischer Anschluss Widerstandsthermometer
5 Elektrischer Anschluss
Im Anschlusskopf des Widerstandsthermometers wird der Messeinsatz elektrisch angeschlossen.
Dabei wird die Anschlussleitung mit dem Klemmsockel des Messeinsatzes verbunden.
VORSICHT! Elektrischer Strom!

Der elektrische Anschluss des Widerstandsthermometer darf nur von einer Elektrofach-
kraft vorgenommen werden.
ª Schalten Sie die Anlage spannungsfrei, bevor Sie die das Widerstandsthermometer
anschließen.
ª 1. Lösen Sie die Schrauben des Deckels. ª 4. Führen Sie die Anschlussleitung durch
ª 2. Nehmen Sie den Deckel mit Schrauben, die Überwurfmutter und den Klemmein-
Zahnscheiben und Dichtung vom Kopf- satz in das Kopfgehäuse.
gehäuse ab. ª 5. Stülpen Sie die Abschirmung der Leitung
ª 3. Lösen Sie die Überwurfmutter der über den Klemmeinsatz.
Kabelverschraubung. ª 6. Stecken Sie den Klemmeinsatz in den
Gewindestutzen. Sichern Sie den
Klemmeinsatz mit der Überwurfmutter.
Beachten Sie das Anschlussbild auf dem Typenschild des Widerstandsthermometer.
ª 7. Schließen Sie die Anschlussleitung ent- ª 9. Setzten Sie den Deckel mit Dichtung auf
sprechend dem Anschlussbild an das Kopfgehäuse.
(J § 5.1 "Anschlussvarianten"). Achten Sie auf den richtigen Sitz der
ª 8. Ziehen Sie die Kabelverschraubung fest. Dichtung des Deckels.
Achten Sie darauf, dass die Anschluss- ª 10. Drehen Sie die Schrauben fest.
leitungen zugfrei sind!
- 10 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Widerstandsthermometer Elektrischer Anschluss
Das Widerstandsthermometer darf nur an einem bescheinigten eigensicheren Stromkreis
betrieben werden. Das Abklemmen der Anschlussdrähte innerhalb des Ex-Bereiches ist
aufgrund der bescheinigten Eigensicherheit zulässig.
Überprüfen Sie den Oberflächenwiderstand beim Widerstandsthermometer nach Durch-
führung des elektrischen Anschlusses (J § 5.2").
5.1 Anschlussvarianten
Der Temperaturfühler des Messeinsatzes ist mit dem Klemmsockel verbunden. Der An-
schluss erfolgt am Klemmsockel.
FARBMARKIERUNG:
Die Klemmen des Sockels sind farblich markiert. Ist keine Farbe an der Klemme vor-
handen, so entspricht dies "weiß" im Anschlussbild.
ª Verbinden Sie die Anschlussleitung mit dem Klemmsockel entsprechend dem Anschluss-
bild ihres Widerstandsthermometers.
Pt 100:
2-Leiter
5.2 Überprüfung des Oberflächenwiderstandes (Ausführung W083…X)

Nach Durchführung des elektrischen Anschlusses muss der Oberflächenwiderstand des
Widerstandsthermometers durch eine entsprechend qualifizierte Elektrofachkraft überprüft
werden.
Dazu wird mit Hilfe eines Multimeters der elektrische Wider-
stand zwischen den markierten Bauteilen gemessen. Der
Oberflächenwiderstand zwischen den Messpunkten liegt
idealerweise bei 1 Ω.
Nach DIN EN 13463-1: 2009 darf der Oberflächen-

widerstand bei 23 ±2 °C und einer relativen Luftfeuchte
von 50 ±5 % einen Wert von 109 Ω nicht überschreiten.
ª Überprüfen Sie den elektrischen Widerstand zwischen
den folgenden Messpunkten:
c Sechskant Tauchrohr <=> Rohrleitung
d Sechskant Tauchrohr <=> Kabelverschraubung
e Sechskant Tauchrohr <=> Deckelschraube
Wird der Normwert überschritten, muss der Einbau des W083…X auf Kontaktprobleme hin
überprüft werden. Eine Inbetriebnahme darf nicht erfolgen!
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten - 11 -

Wartung, Reinigung und Probleme Widerstandsthermometer
6 Wartung, Reinigung und Probleme

Wartung:
Das Widerstandsthermometer ist wartungsfrei. Die einzelnen Baugruppen sind teilweise voll-
ständig vergossen und enthalten keinerlei Bauteile, welche vom Anwender repariert oder
ausgetauscht werden können.
Bei einem Defekt muss das Gerät ausgetauscht oder zur Reparatur an den Hersteller
zurückgeschickt werden.
Wartung Ausführung W083…X:

Das Widerstandsthermometer ist in regelmäßigen Zeitabständen (3 Monate) durch visuelle
Kontrolle auf Korrosion (Aluminiumoxidation) zu überprüfen.
ª Entfernen Sie vorhandene Oxidationsbildung an den Messpunkten mit geeigneten
Reinigungsmitteln (z. B. Alureiniger).
ª Überprüfen Sie den Oberflächenwiderstand des Widerstandsthermometers (J § 5.2).
Ist der Oberflächenwiderstand kleiner als der Normwert, darf das Widerstandsthermometer
bis zum nächsten Wartungsintervall betrieben werden.
Anderenfalls muss der Einbau des Widerstandsthermometer auf Kontaktprobleme hin über-
prüft werden.
Wird der Normwert weiterhin überschritten, muss das Widerstandsthermometer ausgetauscht
werden.
Reinigung:
ª Reinigen Sie das Widerstandsthermometer mit einem trockenen oder feuchten anti-
statischem Tuch.
ª Verwenden Sie beim Reinigen keine scharfen Gegenstände oder aggressive
Reinigungsmittel.
Probleme:
Welche Probleme Sie wie beheben können, ist in der nachfolgenden Tabelle ausgeführt.
Problem mögliche Ursache Abhilfe

Messeinsatz:
kein Ausgangssignal Anschluss ohne Kontakt. Überprüfen Sie den elektrischen
Anschluss.
Messeinsatz defekt. Gerät zur Reparatur einschicken.
Temperaturabweichung Falscher Einbau. Einbausituation überprüfen.
Messeinsatz
Normwert Überschritten Kontaktprobleme zwischen den Einbau auf Kontaktprobleme hin
(Prüfung Oberflächenwiderstand) Bauteilen. überprüfen.
Können Sie ein Problem nicht beheben, senden Sie bitte das Gerät mit einer kurzen Fehlerbeschreibung,
den Umgebungsbedingungen und der Einsatzdauer bis zum Eintreten der Störung zur Reparatur ein.
- 12 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Widerstandsthermometer Demontage und Entsorgung
7 Demontage und Entsorgung

VORSICHT! Verletzungsgefahr!
Entfernen Sie niemals das Widerstandsthermometer aus einer im Betrieb befindlichen Anlage.
ª Sorgen Sie dafür, dass die Anlage fachgerecht ausgeschaltet wird.
Vor der Demontage:

Überprüfen Sie vor der Demontage, ob
die Anlage ausgeschaltet ist und sich in einem sicheren und stromlosen Zustand befindet.
die Anlage drucklos und abgekühlt ist.
Demontage:
ª Entfernen Sie die elektrischen Anschlüsse.
ª Bauen Sie das Widerstandsthermometer mit passenden Werkzeugen aus.
Entsorgung:
KEIN HAUSMÜLL!
Das Widerstandsthermometer besteht aus unterschiedlichen Werkstoffen. Es darf nicht
zusammen mit Hausmüll entsorgt werden.
ª Führen Sie das Widerstandsthermometer der

lokalen Wiederverwertung zu
oder
ª schicken Sie das Widerstandsthermometer an

Ihren Lieferanten bzw. SiKA zurück.
8 Schutzrohre
Bei Anwendungen mit besonderen Belastungen muss ein zusätzliches Schutzrohr, nach
DIN 43772:2000, verwendet werden.
• hohen Druck und / oder hoher Temperatur in der Anwendung.

Besondere Belastungen entstehen durch
• hohe Durchflussgeschwindigkeiten des Mediums.

• korrosive und / oder abrasive Eigenschaften des Mediums.
Bei der Verwendung von Schutzrohren können Widerstandsthermometer während des Be-
triebes ein- und ausgebaut werden. Die Anlage kann dabei unter Druck bleiben und die
Leitungen müssen nicht geleert werden.

Werkstofftabelle Widerstandsthermometer
9 Werkstofftabelle
Bauteil W083 Bauteil
benetzt
Kopfgehäuse Aluminium Druckguss
Deckel Aluminium Druckguss
Dichtung NBR
Deckelschrauben (Zahnscheiben)
Kontermutter Messing 2.0401
Tauchrohr mit
Edelstahl 1.4571 X
Gewindeanschluss
Kabelverschraubung:
- Überwurfmutter Messing vernickelt
- Klemmeinsatz Polyamid
- O-Ring CR / NBR
- Gewindestutzen Messing vernickelt
10 Technische Daten
Bitte beachten Sie die Angaben auf dem Typenschild.
Kenndaten W083
Messbereich -40…200 °C
Genauigkeit Klasse B
Ansprechzeit 25 °C ---> 90 °C: 15 s (vorläufig)
t90 in Wasser
Temperaturfühler
- Sensor 2x Pt100/B/2 • IEC 751
- Nennwiderstand 100 Ω
bei 0 °C ±0,3 °C
- zulässiger Messstrom 1 mA
Ausführung W083…X
Maximaler Strom Ii = 20 mA
Maximale Spannung Ui = 30 VDC
Prozessgrößen
Elektrischer Anschluss Anschlusskopf Form J, drehbar
mit Kabelverschraubung M16 x 1,5
Tauchrohr:
- Durchmesser 8 x 1 mm
- Länge 50 mm
- Material / Nenndruck Edelstahl 1.4571 / PN 40
Medium Verträglichkeit mit Tauchrohrmaterial muss gegeben sein,
siehe auch 8."Schutzrohre"
Mediumstemperatur siehe Messbereich
Umgebungstemperatur 0…70 °C
Prozessanschluss *1) G½A
Vibrationsbeständigkeit Kennlinie 2, 4g
Zulassungen ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LRS, RINA, Class NK
- 14 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Widerstandsthermometer Abmessungen
11 Abmessungen

Herstellererklärung Widerstandsthermometer
12 Herstellererklärung
- 16 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Operating manual (Translation)
Betriebsanleitung ................................................. Seite 1 - 16
Operating manual ................................................page 17 - 32
Notice d'utilisation................................................page 33 - 48
Resistance thermometer
Type W083
Measuring range from -40 °C to +200 °C.
© SiKA • Ba_W083.pdf 12/2011.
Please keep this operating manual for future reference.

If the device is resold, please provide the operating manual along with it.
SiKA Dr.Siebert & Kühn GmbH & Co. KG y Struthweg 7–9 y D-34260 Kaufungen y Germany
℡ +49 5605 803-0 y +49 5605 803-54 y info@sika.net y www.SIKA.net
Resistance thermometer
Table of contents page

0 About this operating manual.................................................................................... 19
1 Device description................................................................................................... 20
1.1 Intended use ......................................................................................................... 21
2 Safety instructions................................................................................................... 22
3 Construction and function ....................................................................................... 23
4 Installation of Resistance thermometer.................................................................... 24
4.1 Installation instructions.......................................................................................... 24
4.2 Assembly .............................................................................................................. 24
5 Electrical connection ............................................................................................... 26
5.1 Connection types .................................................................................................. 27
5.2 Checking the surface resistance (W083…X version) ............................................ 27
6 Maintenance, cleaning and problems...................................................................... 28
7 Disassembly and disposal....................................................................................... 29
8 Protective tube ........................................................................................................ 29
9 Materials table.........................................................................................................30
10 Technical data......................................................................................................... 30
11 Dimension ...............................................................................................................31
12 Manufacturer declaration......................................................................................... 32
Copyright notice:
The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this operating manual as well as the communication of
its contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of the grant of a patent, utility model or design.
- 18 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Resistance thermometer About this operating manual
0 About this operating manual

• The operating manual is aimed at specialists and semi-skilled personnel.
• Before each step, read through the relevant advice carefully and keep to the specified
order.
• Thoroughly read and understand the information in the section “Safety instructions ”.
• The figures in the operating manual are examples and apply to all types of Resistance
thermometers.
• Sections or descriptions that do not apply to all types of Resistance thermometers are
marked accordingly.
If you have any problems or questions, please contact your supplier or contact us directly
at:
Dr. Siebert & Kühn GmbH & Co. KG

Struthweg 7-9 • D - 34260 Kaufungen
℡ 05605-803 0 • 05605-803 54
info@sika.net • www.sika.net
Hazard signs and other symbols used:

CAUTION! High temperature!
This sign indicates dangers resulting from high temperature that can lead to health defects or
considerable damage to property.
WARNING! / CAUTION! Risk of injury!
This sign indicates dangers that cause personal injuries that can lead to health defects or
cause considerable damage to property.
CAUTION! Material damage!
This sign indicates actions which could lead to possible damage to material or environmental
damage.
NOTICE!
ADHERE TO OPERATING MANUAL! This symbol indicates important notices,
tips or information.
NO DOMESTIC WASTE!
The device must not be disposed of
together with domestic waste.
Pay attention to and comply with information Check the specified points or notices.
that is marked with this symbol. J Reference to another section, document or
ª Follow the specified instructions and steps. source.
Adhere to the given order. • Item.
Technical changes reserved - 19 -

Device description Resistance thermometer
1 Device description
The Resistance thermometer has two redundant Pt100 temperature sensors. It is used for
the remote monitoring of liquid and gaseous media in pipes, tanks, machines or plants.
Both sensors of the Resistance thermometer located at the same measuring point.
Assemblies:
The most important assemblies of the Resistance thermometer are the connection head and
the immersion tube.
Connection head:
The connection head allows the connection of an
electrical temperature sensor for remote monitoring.
The measuring insert is to be found within it.
Immersion tube:
The immersion tube is used to create the process
connection to the installation or machine. It is installed
in proximity to the measuring point.
Use in particularly high-stress situations requires the
fitting of protective tubes.
Measuring point:
The temperature measurement is carried out in the lower part of the immersion tube. There are
the temperature-sensitive parts of the measuring insert (J § 3 "Construction and function").
Versions:
The Resistance thermometer is available in the W083 and W083…X versions. The W083…X
version can be used in explosion hazard areas.
Type plate:
The type plate contains the most important data and the connection diagram of the
Resistance thermometer supplied.
W083:
W083…X:
Scope of delivery:
• 1x Resistance thermometer.
• 1x Operating manual.
• Packaging or transport protection (if applicable).
Accessories:
• Protective tubes certified according to DIN 43772:2000.
- 20 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Resistance thermometer Device description
1.1 Intended use

The Resistance thermometer may only be used to display or monitor the temperatures of liq-
uid or gaseous media in pipes, tanks, machines or plants.
WARNING! NO SAFETY COMPONENT!

The Resistance thermometer W083 and W083…X are not safety components in
accordance with Directive 2006-42-EC (Machine Directive).
ª Never use the Resistance thermometer as a safety component.
The operational safety of the device supplied is only guaranteed by intended use. The
specified limits (J § 10 "Technical data ") may under no circumstances be exceeded.
CAUTION! Risk of injury or material damage!

The Resistance thermometer must not be subjected to mechanical stress and can be-
come very hot when in operation.
ª Never use the Resistance thermometer as a carrying handle or tread.
Before installing the device, check that the wetted device's materials are suitable for the
medium intended for use (J § 9 "Materials table ").
Version W083…X:
The Resistance thermometer W083…X is intended to be used in areas with potentially ex-
plosive atmospheres.
ª Observe the additional information in § 12 "Manufacturer declaration ".
ª Observe the following requirements:
Ignition temperature of the medium to be monitored:
ª The ignition temperature of the medium to be monitored must be at least 10 K
higher than the temperature range. With the W083…X, this means ≥ 210°C.
Intermittent electrical connection:
ª Connect the device to a certified intrinsically safe circuit.

Safety instructions Resistance thermometer
2 Safety instructions
Before you install the Resistance thermometer, read through this operating manual
carefully. If the instructions contained within it are not followed, in particular the safety
guidelines, this could result in danger for people, the environment, and the device and
the system it is connected to.
The Resistance thermometer correspond to the state-of-the-art technology. This concerns
the accuracy, the operating mode and the safe operation of the device.
In order to guarantee that the device operates safely, the operator must act competently and
be conscious of safety issues.
SiKA provides support for the use of its products either personally or via relevant literature.
The customer verifies that our product is fit for purpose based on our technical information.
The customer needs to carry out his/her own specific tests to ensure this device is suitable
for the intended application. With this verification all hazards and risks are transferred to our
customers; our warranty is not valid.
Qualified personnel:
The personnel who are charged for the installation, operation and maintenance of the
Resistance thermometer must hold a relevant qualification. This can be based on training
or relevant tuition.
The personnel must be aware of this operating manual and have access to it at all times.
The electrical connection should only be carried out by a fully qualified electrician.
General safety instructions:

In all work, the existing national regulations for accident prevention and safety in the
workplace must be complied with. Any internal regulations of the operator must also be
complied with, even if these are not mentioned in this manual.
Degree of protection according to EN 60529:
Ensure that the ambient conditions at the site of use does not exceed the requirements
for the stated protection rating (J § 10 "Technical data ").
Do not subject the Resistance thermometer to any mechanical strain. Never use it as a
carrying handle or a tread.
Only use the Resistance thermometer if it is in perfect condition. Damaged or faulty
devices must be checked without delay and, if necessary, replaced.
When fitting, connecting and removing the Resistance thermometer use only suitable
appropriate tools.
Do not remove or obliterate nameplates or other markings on the device, as otherwise
the warranty is rendered null and void.
Special safety instructions:

Warnings that are specifically relevant to individual operating procedures or activities can be
found at the beginning of the relevant sections of this operating manual.
- 22 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Resistance thermometer Construction and function
Safety instructions for version W083…X:

The following safety instructions must also be observed when Resistance thermometers are
used in explosion hazard areas.
All work involving an explosion hazard area must be performed by a suitably qualified
electrician.
The Resistance thermometer may only be used in combination with a certified intrinsically
safe electrical circuit. Disconnecting the connection wires within the explosion hazard
area is allowed due to the certified intrinsic safety.
Integrate the Resistance thermometer in the potential equalisation system by installing it
on a metallic pipe or tank.
Check the surface resistance of the Resistance thermometer after making the electrical
connection (J § 5.2).
Check the Resistance thermometer at regular intervals (every 3 months) for corrosion or
signs of corrosion (J § 6 "W083…X maintenance").
3 Construction and function

Construction:
c
Connection head and immersion tube:
d
Head housing.
Cover with gasket, screws and tooth lock
e
washers.
Cable fitting with gasket and compression ring.
f
g
Counter nut.
Immersion tube with threaded connector.
h
Measuring insert:
i
Terminal socket
j
Sensor wire and sensor tube.
2x Pt100 Temperature sensor.
Function of the measuring insert:

The measuring insert works according to the principle of changes in resistance. The tempera-
ture recorded at the measuring point is converted by the temperature sensor into a corre-
sponding resistance value.
The both temperature sensor are located at the bottom of the sensor tube. The sensors are
connected to the terminal socket in the head housing via a cable inside the sensor tube.
The electrical signals from the temperature sensors are directly applied to the terminal
socket.

Installation of Resistance thermometer Resistance thermometer
4 Installation of Resistance thermometer
4.1 Installation instructions
MEASURING POINT LOCATION!

For accurate temperature measurement, the right measuring point location for the
Widerstandsthermometer should be selected at the installation site.
Please observe the following installation instructions:
The measuring point must be located in the If the pipe is lagged ensure that a long
centre of the pipe. enough immersion tube is used.
If the immersion tube is too short or too long it
will be impossible to gauge the temperature
accurately.
Version W083…X:
Integrate the Resistance thermometer W083…X in the potential equalisation system by in-
stalling it on a metallic pipe or a metallic tank.
4.2 Assembly
CAUTION! High temperature!

The surface of the Resistance thermometer can become very hot when the device is op-
erational!
ª Never touch the hot Resistance thermometer.
CAUTION! Risk of injury and material damage!

The use of unsuitable sealants can lead to the escape of hot medium. There is a risk of
injury as well as of damage to the plant and environmental pollution.
ª Be sure only to use suitable sealants.
Before installing, check that

the equipment is switched off and is in a safe and de-energised state.
the equipment is depressurised and has coolde down.
a screw-in fitting is available at the measuring location on the plant or the machine.
a suitable sealant is used.
- 24 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Resistance thermometer Installation of Resistance thermometer
SUITABLE TOOLS:
Use only suitable tools of the correct size.
Installation:
ª 1. Sealing ª 2. Insert
ª 3. Fully tighten immersion tube ª 4. Loosen counter nut
Tightening torque: 55 + 5 Nm
ª 5. Align ª 6. Fully tighten counter nut
Tightening torque: 55 + 5 Nm

Electrical connection Resistance thermometer
5 Electrical connection
The measuring insert is connected inside the connection head of the Resistance thermometer.
The connecting cable is connected with the terminal socket of the measuring insert.
CAUTION! Electric current!

The electrical connection of the Resistance thermometer should only be carried out by a
fully qualified electrician.
ª De-energize the electrical system before connecting the Resistance thermometer.
ª 1. Loosen the cover screws. ª 4. Guide the connecting cable into the
ª 2. Remove the cover complete with head housing through the union nut and
screws, tooth lock washers and gasket the terminal insert.
from the head housing. ª 5. Pull the cable shield over the seal ring.
ª 3. Loosen the union nut of the cable ª 6. Insert the seal ring into the threaded
connector. connector. Secure the sealing ring with
the union nut.
Follow the connection diagram on the Resistance thermometer type plate.
ª 7. Connect the cable according to the in- ª 9. Place the cover with gasket on the head
structions on the connection diagram housing.
(J § 5.1 "Connection types "). Ensure that the cover gasket is correctly
ª 8. Fully tighten the cable connection. positioned.
Ensure that the connecting cables are ª 10. Fully tighten the screws.
not under strain!
- 26 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Resistance thermometer Electrical connection
W083…X version:
The Resistance thermometer may only be used in combination with a certified intrinsically
safe electrical circuit. Disconnecting the connection wires within the explosion hazard
area is allowed due to the certified intrinsic safety.
Check the surface resistance of the Resistance thermometer after making the electrical
connection (J § 5.2").
5.1 Connection types

The temperature sensor of the measuring insert is connected to the terminal socket.
Connection takes place at the terminal socket.
COLOUR CODING:
The terminal sockets are colour coded. If a particular terminal clamp is not colour coded,
this is labelled “white” on the connection diagram.
ª Connect the connecting cable to the terminal socket in accordance with the connection
diagram on your Resistance thermometer.
Pt 100:
2-wire
5.2 Checking the surface resistance (W083…X version)

After the electrical connection is made, the surface resistance of the Resistance thermometer
must be checked by a suitably qualified electrician.
To do this, use a multimeter to measure the resistance be-
tween the marked components. The surface resistance be-
tween the test points should ideally be 1 Ω.
According to EN 13463-1:2009, the surface resistance

may not exceed 109 Ω at 23 ±2 °C with 50 ±5% relative
humidity.
ª Check the resistance between the following test points:
c Immersion tube hex flats and pipe
d Immersion tube hex flats and cable gland
e Immersion tube hex flats and cover screw
If the value specified by the standard is exceeded, the in-
stallation of the W083…X must be checked for contact
problems. Do not put the device into service!

Maintenance, cleaning and problems Resistance thermometer
6 Maintenance, cleaning and problems

Maintenance:
The Resistance thermometer is maintenance-free. The individual components are in some
cases fully potted; they thus contain no sub-assemblies which can be repaired or replaced by
the user.
In case of a defect, the device must be replaced or returned to the manufacturer for repair.
W083…X maintenance:
Visually inspect the Resistance thermometer at regular intervals (3 months) for corrosion
(aluminium oxidation).
ª Use a suitable cleaning product (e.g. aluminium cleaner) to remove any oxidation build-
up at the measuring points.
ª Check the surface resistance of the Resistance thermometer (J § 5.2).
If the surface resistance is lower than the standard value, the Resistance thermometer may
continue to be used until the next maintenance event.
Otherwise the installation of the Resistance thermometer must be checked for contact prob-
lems.
If the standard value is still exceeded, the Resistance thermometer must be replaced.
Cleaning:
ª Clean the Resistance thermometer using a dry or damp antistatic cloth.
ª Never use sharp objects or aggressive cleaning agents to clean the device.
Problems:
The following table details what problems you can solve yourself and how to solve them.
Problem Possible cause Remedy

Measuring insert:
no output signal Open-circuit connection. Check electrical connection.
Faulty measuring insert . Submit device for repair .
Temperature deviations Improper installation . Check installation situation.
Measuring insert
Standard value exceeded Contact problems between com- Check installation for contact prob-
(Surface resistance test) ponents. lems.
If you are unable to remedy a particular problem, please send the device for repair with a brief
description of the fault, the environmental conditions and the length of time the device was operational
before the problem occurred.
- 28 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Resistance thermometer Disassembly and disposal
7 Disassembly and disposal

CAUTION! Risk of injury!
Never remove the Resistance thermometer from a plant in operation.
ª Make sure that the plant is shut down professionally.
Before disassembly:
Prior to disassembly, ensure that
the equipment is switched off and is in a safe and de-energised state.
the equipment is depressurised and has cooled down.
Disassembly:
ª Remove the electrical connectors.
ª Remove the Resistance thermometer using suitable tools.
Disposal:
NO HOUSEHOLD WASTE!
The Resistance thermometer consists of various different materials. It must not be
disposed of with household waste.
ª Take the Resistance thermometer to your local

recycling plant
or
ª send the Resistance thermometer back to your

supplier or to SiKA.
8 Protective tube
If the device is to be used for high-stress applications, then an additional protective tube certi-
fied according to DIN 43772:2000 is required.
• high pressure and / or temperature in the application.

High-stress situations arise due to the following
• high medium flow speeds.

• corrosive and / or abrasive medium properties.
If protective tubes are used, it is possible to install and remove Resistance thermometers dur-
ing machine operation. The plant can thus remain pressurised, and it is unnecessary to
empty the pipes.

Materials table Resistance thermometer
9 Materials table
Component W083 Component-
wetted
Head housing Aluminium Druckguss
Head housing Aluminium Druckguss
Gasket NBR
Cover screw
(Tooth lock washers)
Conter nut Messing 2.0401
Immersion tube with
Edelstahl 1.4571 X
threaded connector
Cable gland:
- Union nut Messing vernickelt
- Terminal insert Polyamid
- O-ring CR / NBR
- Threaded connection Messing vernickelt
10 Technical data
Please observe the informations specified on the type plate.
Characteristics W083
Measuring range -40…200 °C
Accuracy Class B
Response time 25 °C ---> 90 °C: 15 s (temporarily)
t90 in water
Temperaturfühler
- Sensor 2x Pt100/B/2 • IEC 751
- Nominal resistance 100 Ω
at 0 °C ±0,3 °C
- permissible measuring current 1 mA
Version W083…X
Maximum current Ii = 20 mA
Maximum voltage Ui = 30 VDC
Process variables
Electrical connection Type J connection head, rotatable
with cable gland M16 x 1,5
Immersion tube:
- Diameter 8 x 1 mm
- Length 50 mm
- Material / Nominal pressure Stainless steel 1.4571 / PN 40
Medium Must be cleared for compability with immersion tube material,
see also 8."Protective tube "
Medium temperature see measuring range
Ambient temperature 0…70 °C
Process connection *1) G½A
Resistance to vibration Characteristic curve 2, 4g
Approvals ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LRS, RINA, Class NK
- 30 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Resistance thermometer Dimension
11 Dimension

Manufacturer declaration Resistance thermometer
12 Manufacturer declaration
- 32 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Manufacturer Declaration
We hereby declare that the resistance thermometer type
W083P220502J02WX
manufactured by
SIKA Dr. Siebert & Kühn GmbH & Co. KG

has undergone ignition hazard evaluation in accordance with EN 13463-1: 2009 and does not have
any inherent potential sources of ignition when used as intended. It is therefore not subject to Directive
94/9/EC.
The resistance thermometer constitutes a simple electrical device for connection to a certified
intrinsically safe electrical circuit as described in EN 60079-11: 2007. The effective internal
inductances and capacitances are negligibly small.
The resistance thermometer is intended to be used in areas where a potentially explosive atmosphere
is present. The resistance thermometer may be used in Zone 1. The ignition energy of the potentially
explosive atmosphere may be less than 60 µJ (Explosion Group IIC).
The following additional requirements must be observed:
The ignition temperature of the medium to be monitored must be at least 10 K above the temperature
measuring range. This yields an ignition temperature of 210 °C (200 °C + 10K), corresponding to
Temperature Class T2.
It must be ensured that all metallic parts of the resistance thermometer are connected to the potential
equalisation system. This can for example be done by installing the device on a metallic piping
system. This must be ensured before the device is put into service.
Attachment in Zone 0:
To prevent potential ignition sources from becoming effective in the event of foreseeable or rare
disturbances, a protective tube compliant with DIN 43772: 2000 must be used as a protective
measure. If this protective tube is used, the device may be attached to equipment in Zone 0 explosion
hazard areas.
Maximum currency Ii = 20mA;
Maximum voltage Ui = 30VDC
Installation and commissioning must be performed by suitably qualified staff.
Kaufungen, the 31. August 2012
i.V.
Dipl.- Ing. K. Ulloth
(CE- Koordinator und Produktsicherheitsbeauftragter)
(Manager CE- Coordination and Safety Supervisor)
Herstellererklärung Widerstandsthermometers W083P220502J02WX_engl-ID15.doc

Motors | Automation | Energy | Transmission & Distribution | Coatings
Manual Geral de Instalação, Operação e

Manutenção de Motores Elétricos
Installation, Operation and Maintenance
Manual of Electric Motors
Manual General de Instalación, Operación
y Mantenimiento de Motores Eléctricos
Installations-, Betriebs- und
Wartungsanleitung für Elektrische Motoren
--
www.weg.net
Português 2
English 57
Español 111
Deutsch 167
57 Motores Elétricos
www.weg.net
INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

MANUAL OF ELECTRIC MOTORS
This manual provides information about WEG induction motors fitted with squirrel cage,
permanent magnet or hybrid rotors, low, medium and high voltage, in frame sizes IEC 56
to 630 and NEMA 42 to 9606/10.
The motor lines indicated below have additional information that can be checked in their
respective manuals:
g Smoke Extraction Motors;
g Electromagnetic Brake Motors;
g Hazardous Area Motors.
These motors meet the following standards, if applicable:

g NBR 17094-1: máquinas Elétricas Girantes - Motores de Indução - Parte 1: trifásicos
g NBR 17094-2: Máquinas Elétricas Girantes - Motores de Indução - Parte 2: monofásicos
g IEC 60034-1: Rotating Electrical Machines - Part 1: Rating and Performance
g NEMA MG 1: Motors and Generators
g CSA C 22.2 N°100: Motors and Generators
g UL 1004-1: Rotating Electrical Machines - General Requirements
If you have any questions regarding this manual please contact your local WEG branch,
contact details can be found at www.weg.net.
58 Manual of Electric Motors

www.weg.net
Table of Contents
1. Terminology......................................................................................................... 61
2. Initial Recommendations................................................................................ 62
2.1. Warning Symbol.......................................................................................................................... 62
2.2. Receiving Inspection................................................................................................................. 62
2.3. Nameplates................................................................................................................................... 63
3. Safety Instructions......................................................................................... 66
4. Handling and Transport................................................................................ 67

4.1. Lifting............................................................................................................................................... 67
4.1.1. Horizontal motors with one eyebolt....................................................................................... 67
4.1.2. Horizontal motor with two eyebolts...................................................................................... 68
4.1.3. Vertical motors . ...................................................................................................................... 69
4.1.3.1. Procedures to place W22 motors in the vertical position................................................ 69
4.1.3.2. Procedures to place HGF motors in the vertical position............................................... 70
4.2 Procedures to place W22 vertical mount motors in horizontal position..... 71
5. Storage.................................................................................................................. 73
5.1. Exposed machined Surfaces.................................................................................................. 73
5.2. Storage........................................................................................................................................... 73
5.3 Bearings.......................................................................................................................................... 74
5.3.1 Grease lubricated bearings..................................................................................................... 74
5.3.2 Oil lubricated bearings............................................................................................................ 74
ENGLISH
5.3.3 Oil Mist lubricated bearings.................................................................................................... 75
5.3.4 Sleeve bearing.......................................................................................................................... 75
5.4. INSULATION RESISTANCE.............................................................................................................. 75
5.4.1. Insulation resistance measurement...................................................................................... 75
6. Installation.......................................................................................................... 78
6.1. Foundations.................................................................................................................................. 79
6.2. MOTOR MOUNTING......................................................................................................................... 81
6.2.1. Foot mounted motors.............................................................................................................. 81
6.2.2. Flange mounted motors......................................................................................................... 81
6.2.3. Pad mounted motors.............................................................................................................. 82
6.3. Balancing....................................................................................................................................... 82
6.4. Couplings....................................................................................................................................... 82
6.4.1. Direct coupling......................................................................................................................... 83
6.4.2. Gearbox coupling.................................................................................................................... 83
6.4.3. Pulley and belt coupling......................................................................................................... 83
6.4.4. Coupling of sleeve bearing motors....................................................................................... 83
6.5. Leveling.......................................................................................................................................... 84
6.6. Alignment....................................................................................................................................... 84
6.7. Connection of oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors.............................. 85
6.8. Connection of the cooling water system...................................................................... 85
6.9. Electrical connection............................................................................................................ 85
Manual of Electric Motors 59

www.weg.net
6.10. Connection of the thermal protection devices....................................................... 88

6.11. Resistance Temperature Detectors (Pt-100)................................................................. 89
6.12. Connection of the space heaters..................................................................................... 91
6.13. Starting Methods..................................................................................................................... 92
6.14. Motors driven by Frequency Inverter........................................................................... 93
6.14.1. Use of dV/dt filter.................................................................................................................... 93
6.14.1.1. Motor with enameled round wire....................................................................................... 93
6.14.1.2. Motor with prewound coils................................................................................................ 93
6.14.2. Bearing insulation.................................................................................................................. 94
6.14.3. Switching frequency.............................................................................................................. 94
6.14.4. Mechanical speed limitation................................................................................................ 94
7. Commissioning..................................................................................................... 95
7.1. Initial Start-up ............................................................................................................................ 95
7.2. Operating conditions .............................................................................................................. 97
7.2.1.Limits of vibration .................................................................................................................... 98
8. Maintenance......................................................................................................... 99
8.1. General Inspection.................................................................................................................... 99
8.2. Lubrication................................................................................................................................... 99
8.2.1. Grease lubricated rolling bearings...................................................................................... 100
8.2.1.1. Motor without grease fitting.............................................................................................. 102
8.2.1.2. Motor with grease fitting................................................................................................... 102
8.2.1.3. Compatibility of the Mobil Polyrex EM grease with other greases.............................. 102
8.2.2. Oil lubricated bearings......................................................................................................... 103
ENGLISH
8.2.3. Oil mist lubricated bearings................................................................................................. 103

8.2.4. Sleeve bearings..................................................................................................................... 103
8.3. Motor assembly and disassembly.................................................................................... 104
8.3.1. Terminal box........................................................................................................................... 105
8.4. Drying the stator winding insulation............................................................................ 105
8.5. Spare parts................................................................................................................................. 106
9. Environmental Information........................................................................ 107

9.1. Packaging..................................................................................................................................... 107
9.2. Product........................................................................................................................................ 107
10. Troubleshooting chart x solutions.................................................... 108
11. Warranty Term................................................................................................ 109
12. Ec declaration of conformity.................................................................110

www.weg.net
1. Terminology
Balancing: the procedure by which the mass distribution of a rotor is checked and, if necessary, adjusted to
ensure that the residual unbalance or the vibration of the journals and/or forces on the bearings at a frequency
corresponding to service speed are within specified limits in International Standards.
[ISO 1925:2001, definition 4.1]
Balance quality grade: indicates the peak velocity amplitude of vibration, given in mm/s, of a rotor running free-
in-space and it is the product of a specific unbalance and the angular velocity of the rotor at maximum
operating speed.
Grounded Part: metallic part connected to the grounding system.
Live Part: conductor or conductive part intended to be energized in normal operation, including a neutral
conductor.
Authorized personnel: employee who has formal approval of the company.
Qualified personnel: employee who meets the following conditions simultaneously:

g Receives training under the guidance and responsibility of a qualified and authorized professional;
g Works under the responsibility of a qualified and approved professional.
Note: The qualification is only valid for the company that trained the employee in the conditions set out by the authorized and qualified
professional responsible for training.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
2. Initial Recommendations
Electric motors have energized circuits, exposed rotating parts and hot surfaces that may cause serious
injury to people during normal operation. Therefore, it is recommended that transportation, storage,
installation, operation and maintenance services are always performed by qualified personnel.
Also the applicable procedures and relevant standards of the country where the machine will be installed must
be considered.
Noncompliance with the recommended procedures in this manual and other references on the WEG website
may cause severe personal injuries and/or substantial property damage and may void the product warranty.
For practical reasons, it is not possible to include in this Manual detailed information that covers all construction
variables nor covering all possible assembly, operation or maintenance alternatives.
This Manual contains only the required information that allows qualified and trained personnel to carry out their
services. The product images are shown for illustrative purpose only.
For Smoke Extraction Motors, please refer to the additional instruction manual 50026367 available on the
website www.weg.net.
For brake motors, please refer to the information contained in WEG 50006742 / 50021973 brake motor manual
available on the website www.weg.net.
For information about permissible radial and axial shaft loads, please check the product technical catalogue.
The user is responsible for the correct definition of the installation environment and application
characteristics.
During the warranty period, all repair, overhaul and reclamation services must be carried out by WEG
ENGLISH
authorized Service Centers to maintain validity of the warranty.
2.1. Warning Symbol
Warning about safety and warranty.
2.2. Receiving Inspection

All motors are tested during the manufacturing process.
The motor must be checked when received for any damage that may have occurred during the transportation.
All damages must be reported in writing to the transportation company, to the insurance company and to
WEG. Failure to comply with such procedures will void the product warranty.
You must inspect the product:
g Check if nameplate data complies with the purchase order;
g Remove the shaft locking device (if any) and rotate the shaft by hand to ensure that it rotates freely.
g Check that the motor has not been exposed to excessive dust and moisture during the transportation.
Do not remove the protective grease from the shaft, or the plugs from the cable entries. These protections must
remain in place until the installation has been completed.

www.weg.net
2.3. Nameplates
The nameplate contains information that describes the construction characteristics and the performance of the
motor. Figure 2.1 and Figure 2.2 show nameplate layout examples.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
ENGLISH
Figure 2.1 - IEC motor nameplate.

www.weg.net
ENGLISH
Figure 2.2 - NEMA motor nameplate

www.weg.net
3. Safety Instructions
The motor must be disconnected from the power supply and be completely stopped before conducting
any installation or maintenance procedures. Additional measures should be taken to avoid accidental
motor starting.
Professionals working with electrical installations, either in the assembly, operation or maintenance,
should use proper tools and be instructed on the application of standards and safety requirements,
including the use of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) that must be carefully observed in order to
reduce risk of personal injury during these services.
Electric motors have energized circuits, exposed rotating parts and hot surfaces that may cause serious
injury to people during normal operation. It is recommended that transportation, storage, installation,
operation and maintenance services are always performed by qualified personnel.
Always follow the safety, installation, maintenance and inspection instructions in accordance with the applicable
standards in each country.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
4. Handling and Transport

Individually packaged motors should never be lifted by the shaft or by the packaging. They must be lifted only by
means of the eyebolts, when supplied. Use always suitable lifting devices to lift the motor. Eyebolts on the frame
are designed for lifting the machine weight only as indicated on the motor nameplate. Motors supplied on pallets
must be lifted by the pallet base with lifting devices fully supporting the motor weight.
The package should never be dropped. Handle it carefully to avoid bearing damage.
Eyebolts provided on the frame are designed for lifting the machine only. Do not use these eyebolts for
lifting the motor with coupled equipment such as bases, pulleys, pumps, reducers, etc.
Never use damaged, bent or cracked eyebolts. Always check the eyebolt condition before lifting the motor.
Eyebolts mounted on components, such as on end shields, forced ventilation kits, etc. must be used for lifting
these components only. Do not use them for lifting the complete machine set.
Handle the motor carefully without sudden impacts to avoid bearing damage and prevent excessive mechanical
stresses on the eyebolts resulting in its rupture.
To move or transport motors with cylindrical roller bearings or angular contact ball bearings, use always
the shaft locking device provided with the motor.
All HGF motors, regardless of bearing type, must be transported with shaft locking device fitted.
4.1. Lifting
Before lifting the motor ensure that all eyebolts are tightened properly and the eyebolt shoulders are in
contact with the base to be lifted, as shown in Figure 4.1. Figure 4.2 shows an incorrect tightening of the
eyebolt.
Ensure that lifting machine has the required lifting capacity for the weight indicated on the motor nameplate.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.1 - Correct tightening of the eyebolt Figure 4.2 - Incorrect tightening of
the eyebolt.
The center-of-gravity may change depending on motor design and accessories. During the lifting
procedures the maximum allowed angle of inclination should never be exceeded as specified below.
4.1.1. Horizontal motors with one eyebolt

For horizontal motors fitted with only one eyebolt, the maximum allowed angle-of-inclination during the lifting
process should not exceed 30º in relation to the vertical axis, as shown in Figure 4.3.
30° Max.
Figure 4.3 - Maximum allowed angle-of-inclination for motor with one eyebolt.
www.weg.net
4.1.2. Horizontal motor with two eyebolts

When motors are fitted with two or more eyebolts, all supplied eyebolts must be used simultaneously for the
lifting procedure.
There are two possible eyebolt arrangements (vertical and inclined), as shown below:
g For motors with vertical lifting eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.4, the maximum allowed lifting angle should not
exceed 45° in relation to the vertical axis. We recommend to use a spreader bar for maintaining the lifting
elements (chain or rope) in vertical position and thus preventing damage to the motor surface.
45° Max.
Figure 4.4 - Maximum resulting angle for motors with two or more lifting eyebolts.
g For HGF motors, as shown in Figure 4.5, the maximum resulting angle should not exceed 30° in relation to the
vertical axis.
ENGLISH
30° Max.
Figure 4.5 - Maximum resulting angle for horizontal HGF motors
g For motors fitted with inclined eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.6, the use of a spreader bar is required for
maintaining the lifting elements (chain or rope) in vertical position and thus preventing damage to the motor
surface.
Figure 4.6 - Use of a spreader bar for lifting.

www.weg.net
4.1.3. Vertical motors

For vertical mounted motors, as shown in Figure 4.7, the use of a spreader bar is required for maintaining the
lifting element (chain or rope) in vertical position and thus preventing damage to the motor surface.
Figure 4.7 - Lifting of vertical mounted motors.
Always use the eyebolts mounted on the top side of the motor, diametrically opposite, considering the
mounting position. See Figure 4.8.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.8 - Lifting of HGF motors.
4.1.3.1. Procedures to place W22 motors in the vertical position

For safety reasons during the transport, vertical mounted Motors are usually packed and supplied in horizontal
position.
To place W22 motors fitted with eyebolts (see Figure 4.6), to the vertical position, proceed as follows:
1. Ensure that the eyebolts are tightened properly, as shown in Figure 4.1;
2. Remove the motor from the packaging, using the top mounted eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.9;
Figure 4.9 - Removing the motor from the packaging.

www.weg.net
3. Install a second pair of eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.10;
Figure 4.10 - Installation of the second pair of eyebolts.
4. Reduce the load on the first pair of eyebolts to start the motor rotation, as shown in Figure 4.11. This
procedure must be carried out slowly and carefully.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.11 - End result: motor placed in vertical position.
These procedures will help you to move motors designed for vertical mounting. These procedures are also
used to place the motor from the horizontal position into the vertical position and vertical to horizontal.
4.1.3.2. Procedures to place HGF motors in the vertical position

HGF motors are fitted with eight lifting points: four at drive end and four at non-drive end. The HGF motors are
usually transported in horizontal position, however for the installation they must be placed in the vertical
position.
To place an HGF motor in the vertical position, proceed as follows:
1. Lift the motor by using the four lateral eyebolts and two hoists, see Figure 4.12;
Figure 4.12 - Lifting HGF motor with two hoists.

www.weg.net
2. Lower the hoist fixed to motor drive end while lifting the hoist fixed to motor non-drive end until the motor
reaches its equilibrium, see Figure 4.13.
Figure 4.13 - Placing HGF motor in vertical position
3. Remove the hoist hooks from the drive end eyebolts and rotate the motor 180° to fix the removed hooks into
the two eyebolts at the motor non-drive end, see Figure 4.14.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.14 - Lifting HGF motors by the eyebolts at the non-drive end.
4. Fix the removed hoist hooks in the other two eyebolts at the non-drive end and lift the motor until the vertical
position is reached, see Figure 4.15.
Figure 4.15 - HGF motor in the vertical position
These procedures will help you to move motors designed for vertical mounting. These procedures are also
used to place the motor from the horizontal position into the vertical position and vertical to horizontal.
4.2 Procedures to place W22 vertical mount motors in horizontal position
To place W22 vertical mount motor in horizontal position, proceed as follows:

www.weg.net
1. Ensure that all eyebolts are tightened properly, as shown in Figure 4.1;
2. Install the first pair of eyebolts and lift the motor as shown in Figure 4.16;
Figure 4.16 - Install the first pair of eyebolts
3. Install the second pair of eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.17;

ENGLISH
Figure 4.17 - Install the second pair of eyebolts
4. Reduce the load on the first pair of eyebolts for rotating the motor, as shown in Figure 4.18. This procedure
must be carried out slowly and carefully.
Figure 4.18 - Motor is being rotated to horizontal position
5. Remove the first pair of eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.19.
Figure 4.19 - Final result: motor placed in horizontal position

www.weg.net
5. Storage
If the motor is not installed immediately, it must be stored in a dry and clean environment, with relative humidity
not exceeding 60%, with an ambient temperature between 5 ºC and 40 ºC, without sudden temperature
changes, free of dust, vibrations, gases or corrosive agents. The motor must be stored in horizontal position,
unless specifically designed for vertical operation, without placing objects on it. Do not remove the protection
grease from shaft end to prevent rust.
If the motor are fitted with space heaters, they must always be turned on during the storage period or when the
installed motor is out of operation. Space heaters will prevent water condensation inside the motor and keep
the winding insulation resistance within acceptable levels. Store the motor in such position that the condensed
water can be easily drained. If fitted, remove pulleys or couplings from the shaft end (more information are given
on item 6).
The space heaters should never be energized when the motor is in operation.
5.1. Exposed machined Surfaces

All exposed machined surfaces (like shaft end and flange) are factory-protected with temporary rust inhibitor. A
protective film must be reapplied periodically (at least every six months), or when it has been removed and/or
damaged.
5.2. Storage
The stacking height of the motor packaging during the storage period should not exceed 5 m, always
considering the criteria indicated in Table 5.1:
Table 5.1 - Max. recommended stacking height
ENGLISH
Packaging Type Frame sizes Maximum stacking quantity
IEC 63 to 132 Indicated on the top side of
Cardboard box
NEMA 143 to 215 the cardboard box
IEC 63 to 315
06
NEMA 48 to 504/5
IEC 355
Wood crate 03
NEMA 586/7 and 588/9
HGF IEC 315 to 630
Indicated on the packaging
HGF NEMA 5000 to 9600
Notes:
1) Never stack larger packaging onto smaller packaging.
2) Align the packaging correctly (see Figure 5.1 and Figure 5.2).
Figure 5.1 - Correct stacking

X
Figure 5.2 - Incorrect stacking

www.weg.net
3) The feet of the crates above should always be supported by suitable wood battens (Figure 5.3) and never stand on the steel tape or
without support (Figure 5.4).
Figure 5.3 - Correct stacking

X XFigure 5.4 - Incorrect stacking
4) When stacking smaller crates onto longer crates, always ensure that suitable wooden supports are provided to withstand the weight
(see Figure 5.5). This condition usually occurs with motor packaging above IEC 225S/M (NEMA 364/5T) frame sizes.
ENGLISH
Figure 5.5 - Use of additional battens for stacking
5.3 Bearings
5.3.1 Grease lubricated bearings
We recommend rotating the motor shaft at least once a month (by hand, at least five revolutions, stopping the
shaft at a different position from the original one). If the motor is fitted with shaft locking device, remove it before
rotating the shaft and install it again before performing any handling procedure. Vertical motors may be stored
in the vertical or in horizontal position. If motors with open bearings are stored longer than six months, the
bearings must be relubricated according to item 8.2 before commissioning of the motor.
If the motor is stored for longer than 2 years, the bearings must be replaced or removed, washed, inspected
and relubricated according to item 8.2.
5.3.2 Oil lubricated bearings

The motor must be stored in its original operating position and with oil in the bearings. Correct oil level must be
ensured. It should be in the center of the sight glass.
During the storage period, remove the shaft locking device and rotate the shaft by hand every month, at least
five revolutions, thus achieving an even oil distribution inside the bearing and maintaining the bearing in good
operating conditions. Reinstall the shaft locking device every time the motor has to be moved.
If the motor is stored for a period of over six months, the bearings must be relubricated according to Item 8.2
before starting the operation. If the motor is stored for a period of over two years, the bearings must be
replaced or removed, washed according to manufacturer instructions, checked and relubricated according to
Item 8.2. The oil of vertical mounted motors that are transported in horizontal position is removed to prevent oils
leaks during the transport. These motors must be stored in vertical position after receiving and the bearing
must be lubricated.

www.weg.net
5.3.3 Oil Mist lubricated bearings

The motor must be stored in horizontal position. Lubricate the bearings with ISO VG 68 mineral oil in the
amount indicated in the Table 5.2 (this is also valid for bearings with equivalent dimensions). After filling with oil,
rotate the shaft by hand, at least five revolutions)
During the storage period, remove the shaft locking device (if any) and rotate the shaft by hand every week, at
least five revolutions, stopping it at a different position from the original one. Reinstall the shaft locking device
every time the motor has to be moved. If the motor is stored for a period of over two years, the bearings must
be replaced or removed, washed according to manufacturer instructions, checked and relubricated according
to item 8.2.
Table 5.2 - Amount of oil per bearing
Bearing Size Amount of Oil (ml) Bearing Size Amount of Oil (ml)
6201 15 6309 65
6202 15 6311 90
6203 15 6312 105
6204 25 6314 150
6205 25 6315 200
6206 35 6316 250
6207 35 6317 300
6208 40 6319 350
6209 40 6320 400
6211 45 6322 550
6212 50 6324 600
6307 45 6326 650
6308 55 6328 700
ENGLISH
The oil must always be removed when the motor has to be handled. If the oil mist system is not operating after
installation, fill the bearings with oil to prevent bearing rusting. During the storage period, rotate the shaft by
hand, at least five revolutions, stopping it at a different position from the original one. Before starting the motor,
all bearing protection oil must be drained from the bearing and the oil mist system must be switched ON.
5.3.4 Sleeve bearing

The motor must be stored in its original operating position and with oil in the bearings. Correct oil level must be
ensured. It should be in the middle of the sight glass. During the storage period, remove the shaft locking
device and rotate the shaft by hand every month, at least five revolutions, and at 30 rpm, thus achieving an
even oil distribution inside the bearing and maintaining the bearing in good operating conditions. Reinstall the
shaft locking device every time the motor has to be moved.
If the motor is stored for a period of over six months, the bearings must be relubricated according to the Item
8.2 before starting the operation.
If the motor is stored for a period longer than the oil change interval, or if it is not possible to rotate the motor
shaft by hand, the oil must be drained and a corrosion protection and dehumidifiers must be applied.
5.4. INSULATION RESISTANCE
We recommend measuring the winding insulation resistance at regular intervals to follow-up and evaluate its
electrical operating conditions. If any reduction in the insulation resistance values are recorded, the storage
conditions should be evaluated and corrected, where necessary.
5.4.1. Insulation resistance measurement

We recommend measuring the winding insulation resistance at regular intervals to follow-up and evaluate its
electrical operating conditions. If any reduction in the insulation resistance values are recorded, the storage
conditions should be evaluated and corrected, where necessary.
The insulation resistance must be measured in a safe environment.

www.weg.net
The insulation resistance must be measured with a megohmmeter. The machine must be in cold state and
disconnected from the power supply.
To prevent the risk of an electrical shock, ground the terminals before and after each measurement.
Ground the capacitor (if any) to ensure that it is fully discharged before the measurement is taken.
It is recommended to insulate and test each phase separately. This procedure allows the comparison of the
insulation resistance between each phase. During the test of one phase, the other phases must be grounded.
The test of all phases simultaneously evaluates the insulation resistance to ground only but does not evaluate
the insulation resistance between the phases.
The power supply cables, switches, capacitors and other external devices connected to the motor may
considerably influence the insulation resistance measurement. Thus all external devices must be disconnected
and grounded during the insulation resistance measurement.
Measure the insulation resistance one minute after the voltage has been applied to the winding. The applied
voltage should be as shown in Table 5.3.
Table 5.3 - Voltage for the insulation resistance
Winding rated voltage (V) Testing voltage for measuring the insulation resistance (V)
< 1000V 500
1000 - 2500 500 - 1000
2501 - 5000 1000 - 2500
5001 - 12000 2500 - 5000
> 12000 5000 - 10000
The reading of the insulation resistance must be corrected to 40 °C as shown in the Table 5.4.
Table 5.4 - Correction Factor for the Insulation Resistance corrected to 40 °C

ENGLISH
Measuring temperature Correction factor of the Measuring temperature of Correction factor of the
of the insulation insulation resistance the insulation resistance insulation resistance
resistance (°C) corrected to 40 °C (°C) corrected to 40 °C
10 0.125 30 0.500
11 0.134 31 0.536
12 0.144 32 0.574
13 0.154 33 0.616
14 0.165 34 0.660
15 0.177 35 0.707
16 0.189 36 0.758
17 0.203 37 0.812
18 0.218 38 0.871
19 0.233 39 0.933
20 0.250 40 1.000
21 0.268 41 1.072
22 0.287 42 1.149
23 0.308 43 1.231
24 0.330 44 1.320
25 0.354 45 1.414
26 0.379 46 1.516
27 0.406 47 1.625
28 0.435 48 1.741
29 0.467 49 1.866
30 0.500 50 2.000

www.weg.net
The motor insulation condition must be evaluated by comparing the measured value with the values
indicated in Table 5.5 (corrected to 40 °C):
Table 5.5 - Evaluation of the insulation system
Limit value for rated voltage Limit value for rated voltage
Situation
up to 1.1 kV (MΩ) above 1.1 kV (MΩ)
Dangerous. The motor can not
Up to 5 Up to 100
be operated in this condition
5 to 100 100 to 500 Regular
100 to 500 Higher than 500 Good
Higher than 500 Higher than 1000 Excellent
The values indicated in the table should be considered only as reference values. It is advisable to log all
measured values to provide a quick and easy overview on the machine insulation resistance.
If the insulation resistance is low, moisture may be present in the stator windings. In this case the motor
should be removed and transported to a WEG authorized Service Center for proper evaluation and repair
(This service is not covered by the warranty). To improve the insulation resistance through the drying
process, see section 8.4.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
6. Installation
The insulation resistance must be measured in a safe environment.
Check some aspects before proceeding with the installation:
1. Insulation resistance: must be within the acceptable limits. See item 5.4.
2. Bearings:
a. Rolling bearings: oxidized bearings must be replaced. If no oxidation is detected, lubricate the bearings as
described in Item 8.2. If the motor is stored for a period of over two years, the bearings must be replaced
before starting the motor.
b. Sleeve bearing: if sleeve bearing motors are stored longer than the recommended oil change interval, the
oil must be changed before machine starting. Don’t forget to remove the dehumidifiers when you drain the
oil from the motor and to fill it again with new oil before starting the machine. For more details, see item
8.2.
3. Operating conditions of the start capacitors: If single-phase motors are stored for a period of over two years,
it is recommended to change the start capacitors before motor starting since they lose their operating
characteristics.
4. Terminal box:
a. the inside of the terminal box must be clean and dry.
b. the contacts must be correctly connected and corrosion free. See 6.9 and 6.10.
c. the cable entries must be correctly sealed and the terminal box cover properly mounted in order to ensure
the degree of protection indicated on the motor nameplate.
5. Cooling: the cooling fins, air inlet and outlet openings must be clean and unobstructed. The distance
between the air inlet openings and the wall should not be shorter than ¼ (one quarter) of the diameter of the
air inlet. Ensure sufficient space to perform the cleaning services. See item 7.
6. Coupling: remove the shaft locking device (where fitted) and the corrosion protection grease from the shaft
ENGLISH
end and flange just before installing the motor. See item 6.4.
7. Drain hole: the motor must always be positioned so the drain hole is at the lowest position (If there is any
indication arrow on the drain, the drain must be so installed that the arrow points downwards).
Motors supplied with rubber drain plugs leave the factory in the closed position and must be opened
periodically to allow the exit of condensed water. For environments with high water condensation levels and
motor with degree of protection IP55, the drain plugs can be mounted in open position (see Figure 6.1).
For motors with degree of protection IP56, IP65 or IP66, the drain plugs must remain at closed position (see
Figure 6.1), being opened only during the motor maintenance procedures.
The drain system of motors with Oil Mist lubrication system must be connected to a specific collection
system (see Figure 6.12).
Closed position Open position
Figure 6.1 - Detail of the rubber drain plug mounted in closed and open position.

www.weg.net
8.Additional recommendations:
a. Check the direction of motor rotation, starting the motor at no-load before coupling it to the load.
b. Vertical mounted motors with shaft end down must be fitted with drip cover to protect them from liquids
or solids that may drop onto the motors.
c. Vertical mounted motors with shaft end up must be fitted with water slinger ring to prevent water
penetration inside the motor.
Remove or fix the shaft key before starting the motor.
6.1. Foundations
The foundation is the structure, structural element, natural or prepared base, designed to withstand the
stresses produced by the installed equipment, ensuring safe and stable performance during operation. The
foundation design should consider the adjacent structures to avoid the influences of other installed equipment
and no vibration is transferred through the structure
The foundation must be flat and its selection and design must consider the following characteristics:
a) T
he features of the machine to be installed on the foundation, the driven loads, application, maximum
allowed deformations and vibration levels (for instance, motors with reduced vibration levels, foot flatness,
flange concentricity, axial and radial loads, etc. lower than the values specified for standard motors).
b) Adjacent buildings, conservation status, maximum applied load estimation, type of foundation and fixation
and vibrations transmitted by theses constructions.
If the motor is supplied with leveling/alignment bolts, this must be considered in the base design.
Please consider for the foundation dimensioning all stresses that are generated during the operation of
the driven load.
ENGLISH
The user is responsible for the foundation designing and construction.
The foundation stresses can be calculated by using the following equations (see Figure 6.2):
F1 = 0,5 * g * m - (4 * Tb / A)
F2 = 0,5 * g * m + (4 * Tb / A)
Where:
F1 and F2 = lateral stresses (N);

g = gravitational acceleration (9,8 m/s2);
m = motor weight (kg);
Tb = breakdown torque (Nm);
A = distance between centerlines of mounting holes in feet or base of the machine (end view) (m).

www.weg.net
The motors may be mounted on:

g Concrete bases: are most used for large-size motors (see Figure 6.2);
g Metallic bases: are generally used for small-size motors (see Figure 6.3).
F1 F1
A
F2 F2
Figure 6.2 - Motor installed on concrete base Figure 6.3 - Motor installed on metallic base
A
The metallic and concrete bases may be fitted with sliding system. These types of foundations are generally
used where the power transmission is achieved by belts and pulleys. This power transmission system is easier
to assemble/disassemble and allows the belt tension adjustment. Other important aspect of this foundation
type is the location of the base locking screws that must be diagonally opposite. The rail nearest the drive
pulley is placed in such a way that the positioning bolt is between the motor and the driven machine. The other
rail must be placed with the bolt on the opposite side (diagonally opposite), as shown in Figure 6.4 .
To facilitate assembly, the bases may have the following features:

ENGLISH
g shoulders and/or recesses;
g anchor bolts with loose plates;
g bolts cast in the concrete;
g leveling screws;
g positioning screws;
g steel & cast iron blocks, plates with flat surfaces.
Figure 6.4 - Motor installed on sliding base
After completing the installation, it is recommended that all exposed machined surfaces are coated with
suitable rust inhibitor.

www.weg.net
6.2. MOTOR MOUNTING
Footless motors supplied with transportation devices, according to Figure 6.5, must have their devices
removed before starting the motor installation.
Figure 6.5 - Detail of the transportation devices for footless motors.
6.2.1. Foot mounted motors

The drawings of the mounting hole dimensions for NEMA or IEC motors can be checked in the respective
technical catalogue.
The motor must be correctly aligned and leveled with the driven machine. Incorrect alignment and leveling may
result in bearing damage, generate excessive vibration and even shaft distortion/breakage.
For more details, see section 6.3 and 6.6. The thread engagement length of the mounting bolt should be at
ENGLISH
least 1.5 times the bolt diameter. This thread engagement length should be evaluated in more severe
applications and increased accordingly.
Figure 6.6 shows the mounting system of a foot mounted motor indicating the minimum required thread
engagement length.
L = 1.5 x D
D
Figure 6.6 - Mounting system of a foot mounted motor
6.2.2. Flange mounted motors
The drawings of the flange mounting dimensions, IEC and NEMA flanges, can be checked in the technical
catalogue.
The coupling of the driven equipment to the motor flange must be properly dimensioned to ensure the required
concentricity of the assembly.
Depending on the flange type, the mounting can be performed from the motor to the driven equipment flange
(flange FF (IEC) or D (NEMA)) or from the driven equipment flange to the motor (flange C (DIN or NEMA)).
For the mounting process from the driven equipment flange to the motor, you must consider the bolt length,
flange thickness and the thread depth of the motor flange.
If the motor flange has tapped through-holes, the length of the mounting bolts must not exceed the
tapped through-hole length of the motor flange, thus preventing damage to the winding head.

www.weg.net
For flange mounting the thread engagement length of the mounting bolt should be at least 1.5 times the bolt
diameter. In severe applications, longer thread engagement length may be required.
In severe applications or if large motors are flange mounted, a foot or pad mounting may be required in addition
to the flange mounting (Figure 6.7). The motor must never be supported on its cooling fins.
Figure 6.7 - Mounting method of flange mounted motors with frame base support
Note:
When liquid (for example oil) is likely to come into contact with the shaft seal, please contact your local WEG representative.
6.2.3. Pad mounted motors

Typically, this method of mounting is used in axial fans. The motor is fixed by tapped holes in the frame. The
dimensions of these tapped holes can be checked in the respective product catalogue. The selection of the
motor mounting rods/bolts must consider the dimensions of the fan case, the installation base and the thread
depth in the motor frame.
ENGLISH
The mounting rods and the fan case wall must be sufficiently stiff to prevent the transmission of excessive
vibration to the machine set (motor & fan). Figure 6.8 shows the pad mounting system.
Figure 6.8 - Mounting of the motor inside the cooling duct
6.3. Balancing
Unbalanced machines generate vibration which can result in damage to the motor. WEG motors are
dynamically balanced with “half key” and without load (uncoupled). Special balancing quality level must be
stated in the Purchase Order.
The transmission elements, such as pulleys, couplings, etc., must balanced with “half key” before they
are mounted on the motor shaft.
The balance quality grade meets the applicable standards for each product line.
The maximum balancing deviation must be recorded in the installation report
6.4. Couplings
Couplings are used to transmit the torque from the motor shaft to the shaft of the driven machine. The following
aspects must be considered when couplings are installed:
g Use proper tools for coupling assembly & disassembly to avoid damages to the motor and bearings.
Whenever possible, use flexible couplings, since they can absorb eventual residual misalignments during the
g
machine operation.
The maximum loads and speed limits informed in the coupling and motor manufacturer catalogues cannot
g
be exceeded.
g Level and align the motor as specified in sections 6.5 and 6.6, respectively.

www.weg.net
Remove or fix the shaft key firmly when the motor is operated without coupling in order to prevent
accidents.
6.4.1. Direct coupling

Direct coupling is characterized when the Motor shaft is directly coupled to the shaft of the driven machine
without transmission elements. Whenever possible, use direct coupling due to lower cost, less space required
for installation and more safety against accidents.
Do not use roller bearings for direct coupling, unless sufficient radial load is expected.
6.4.2. Gearbox coupling

Gearbox coupling is typically used where speed reduction is required.
Make sure that shafts are perfectly aligned and strictly parallel (in case of straight spur gears) and in the right
meshing angle (in case of bevel and helical gears).
6.4.3. Pulley and belt coupling

Pulleys and belts are used when speed increase or reduction between motor shaft and driven load is required.
Excessive belt tension will damage the bearings and cause unexpected accidents such as breakage of
the motor shaft.
6.4.4. Coupling of sleeve bearing motors
Motors designed with sleeve bearings must be operated with direct coupling to the driven machine or a
ENGLISH
gearbox. Pulley and belts can not be applied for sleeve bearing motors.
Motors designed with sleeve bearings have 3 (three) marks on the shaft end. The center mark is the indication
of the magnetic center and the 2 (two) outside marks indicate the allowed limits of the rotor axial movement, as
shown in Figure 6.9.
The motor must be so coupled that during operation the arrow on the frame is placed over the central mark
indicating the rotor magnetic center. During start-up, or even during operation, the rotor may freely move
between the two outside marks when the driven machine exerts an axial load on the motor shaft. However,
under no circumstance, the motor can operate continuously with axial forces on the bearing.
Axial Clearance
Figure 6.9 - Axial clearance of motor designed with sleeve bearing

www.weg.net
For coupling evaluation consider the maximum axial bearing clearance as shown in Table 6.1.
The axial clearance of the driven machine and coupling influence the maximum bearing clearance.
Table 6.1 - Clearance used for sleeve bearings
Bearing size Total axial clearance (mm)

9* 3+3=6
11* 4+4=8
14* 5 + 5 =10
18 7,5 + 7,5 = 15
* For Motors in accordance with API 541, the total axial clearance is 12.7 mm
The sleeve bearings used by WEG were not designed to support axial load continuously.
Under no circumstance must the motor be operated continuously at its axial clearance limits.
6.5. Leveling
The motor must be leveled to correct any deviations in flatness arising from the manufacturing process and the
material structure rearrangement. The leveling can be carried out by a leveling screw fixed on the motor foot or
on the flange or by means of thin compensation shims. After the leveling process, the leveling height between
the motor mounting base and the motor cannot exceed 0.1 mm.
If a metallic base is used to level the height of the motor shaft end and the shaft end of the driven machine, level
only the metallic base relating to the concrete base.
Record the maximum leveling deviations in the installation report.
6.6. Alignment
The correct alignment between the motor and the driven machine is one of the most important variables that
extends the useful service life of the motor. Incorrect coupling alignment generates high loads and vibrations
ENGLISH
reducing the useful life of the bearings and even resulting in shaft breakages. Figure 6.10 illustrates the
misalignment between the motor and the driven machine.
Motor shaft Driven machine shaft
Max.
misalignment
Driven machine
offset (mm)
Motor
offset (mm)
Figure 6.10 - Typical misalignment condition
Alignment procedures must be carried out using suitable tools and devices, such as dial gauge, laser alignment
instruments, etc. The motor shaft must be aligned axially and radially with the driven machine shaft.
The maximum allowed eccentricity for a complete shaft turn should not exceed 0.03 mm, when alignment is
made with dial gauges, as shown in Figure 6.11. Ensure a gap between couplings to compensate the thermal
expansion between the shafts as specified by the coupling manufacturer.
Dial gauge
Reference
Line
GAP
Parallel alignment Angular alignment
84 Manual of Electric Motors Figure 6.11 - Alignment with dial gauge.

www.weg.net
If alignment is made by a laser instrument, please consider the instructions and recommendations provided by
the laser instrument manufacturer.
The alignment should be checked at ambient temperature with machine at operating temperature.
The coupling alignment must be checked periodically
Pulley and belt couplings must be so aligned that the driver pulley center lies in the same plane of the driven
pulley center and the motor shaft and the shaft of the driven machine are perfectly parallel.
After completing the alignment procedures, ensure that mounting devices do not change the motor and
machine alignment and leveling resulting into machine damage during operation.
It is recommended to record the maximum alignment deviation in the Installation Report.
6.7. Connection of oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors

When oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors are installed, connect the existing lubricant tubes (oil inlet and
oil outlet tubes and motor drain tube), as shown in Figure 6.12. The lubrication system must ensure continuous
oil flow through the bearings as specified by the manufacturer of the installed lubrication system.
Inlet
ENGLISH
Drain
Outlet
Figure 6.12 - Oil supply and drain system of oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors
6.8. Connection of the cooling water system

When water cooled motors are installed, connect the water inlet and outlet tubes to ensure proper motor
cooling. According to item 7.2, ensure correct cooling water flow rate and water temperature in the motor
cooling system.
6.9. Electrical connection

Consider the rated motor current, service factor, starting current, environmental and installation conditions,
maximum voltage drop, etc. to select appropriate power supply cables and switching and protection devices.
All motors must be installed with overload protection systems. Three-phase motors should be fitted with phase
fault protection systems.
Before connecting the motor, check if the power supply voltage and the frequency comply with the
motor nameplate data. All wiring must be made according to the connection diagram on the motor
nameplate. Please consider the connection diagrams in the Table 6.2 as reference value.
To prevent accidents, check if motor has been solidly grounded in accordance with the applicable standards.

www.weg.net
Table 6.2 - Typical connection diagram for three-phase motors.

1 2 3
1
1
1 22
2 33 3
1 2 3
Type of 111 222 333
Configuration Quantity of Leads Connection
L1 1
L1 L2
L1
L2 2 diagram
L2 L3L33
L3 LL
L
connection L1
L1 L2
L1 L2 L3
L2 L3
L3
L
L
L
L1
L1 1 L2
L2 2 L3
L3 3 L1
L
L1 L2 L3
3 - 66 44 55
66 44 55 6 66 44
6 4L1 55 L2 6 L3 4 55 6 4L
6
6 4 4 5 5 6 4
6 4 5
4 5 6
6 4 4
666
11 422 5334 4 5 6 611 4422 5533 666
11 4422
4
116 224 335 1 16 224 335 116 224
L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1
1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1 L2 2
1
1L1
L1 222 L3
L2
L2 33
L3
L3 1L1
L1
1 L2 222 L3
L2
L2 33
L3
L3 1
1L1
L1 222
L2
L2
6 Δ-Y
L1
L1
L1
1 L2
1 L2
L2 2 L333 L1
L3 L1
L1 1 L2
L2 2 L333
L3
L1
L1
L1
1 L2
1 L2 L2 2
L16 L2
L1 L2 4 L3 L3 5 L1 L1 L2 6 L2 L3 4 L3 5 L16 L2
L1 L2 4
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2
44 55 66 4 5 6 44 55
4 5 6 L144 4 L2 55 5L3 66 6 4 5
4L1 L2
4
7
4 5 L36
5
8
5 6
9
6 4
7
4 5
8
5 6
9 4L1 L2
4
7
5
5
8
44777 5588 8 6699 9 44777 5588 8 666 99
9 4
44777 558 58
8
1
714 8
7 2
825 9 3
936 1
714 8
7 2
825 9 3
936 1
714 8
7 2
825
771 1 8822 9933 771 1 8822 9933 771 1 8822
YY - Y L1
L1
L1
17 L2
1
11 L2 L2
L2
28 L3
2
22 L3 L3
L333
39 L1
3 L1
L1
17 L2
1
11 L2 L2
L2
28 L3
2
22 L3 L3
L3
33
39
3 L1L1
L1
1 L2
1117 L2 L2
L2
2
2228
L1
L1 L2 L3 L1
L1 L2 L3 L1
L1 L2
L1 4 L2 5 L3 6 L1 4 L2 5 L3 6 L1 4 L2 5
L1 1 L2
L1 L2 2 L3 L3 3 L1 L1 1 L2 L2 2 L3 L3 3 L1 1 L2
L1 L2 2
L17 L28 L39 L17 L28 L39 L17 L28
9 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2
44 5 66 4 5 6 44 5
L1 44 L25 5 L3 6 L144 4 L25 5 L36 6 L1 4 L25 5
47 5
7
4 58 6
8
5 69
9
6 47 5
7
4 58 6
8
5 69
9
6
4
47 5
7 58
8
ΔΔ - Δ 447 7 58 5 8 69 6 9 4 477 58 5 8 69 6 9 44477 58 5 5 8
Single Speed 777
1
71
14 88 2
82
25 99 3
9336 777
1
71
14 88 2
82
25 99 3
93
36 777
1
71
14 88 2
8225
L1 1
17 L2 82
28 L3 93
39 L1 1
17 L2 82
28 L3 93
39 L1 1
17 L2 82
28
L1L1
L1
1 1 L2
L2
L22 2 L3
L3
L33 3 L1L1
L1
1 1 L2 L2
L2
22 L3
L3
L33 3 L1L1
L1
1 1 L2L2
L2
2 2
L1 1
L1 1 L2 2
L2 2 L3 3
L3 3 1
L1 1 L2
L1 2
L2 2 L3 3
L3 3 1
L1 1 L2
L1 L2 22
L1
L1 4 L2 L2 5 L3 L3 6 L1
L1 4 L2 L2 5 L3 L3 6 L1
L1 4 L2 L2 5
11 12 10 L1 11 L2 12L39 10 L1
11 7 12 L210 L39 11 12 10 11 12 10 L1 11 L2
11 12
11
11 12 10
12 10 7 11
10 118 12
11 12 10
12 10
10 1111
11 12 12810
12 10 11
10 11 12
11 12 10 10 11 12
11 12 10
12 10 7 11
10 118 11
11 1
5
11
5 12
11 6
12
126 10 4
10
104 1 5
11
11 2
5 12 6
12
126 10 34
10
104 5
11
11 1
5 12 6
12
12 6 10 2 4
10
4 311
10 55 12
11
11 66 10
12
12 44
10
10
11
5
11
5 12
11 6
12
126 10 4
10
104 1 55 2 1
11
11 6
1
1
115
115 6
12 6 4
104 11
115 5 126 6 4
10 4 11115 5 126 6 4
104 115 5 12 6
12 6 10 4
104 115
115 6
12 6 4
104 11115 5 12
16
5
88 6
5811669999124444
77 L1 5
8L2
8 6
9
5811669912449 L3 4
77 L15
8 8 6
9
581166991244 9L2 4
77 L3 5
88 6
9 9
581166991244 4
77 5
88 6
99
581166991244 4
77 L1 5
8L2
8
5811669 69
ΔΔ - YY - Δ - Y 558 7710 558 47 710 558 47710 558 47710 558 710 558
2
82
8
88225
63
993
93
936 1
71
714 882
2
8
8 2
5
2
63
993
9
9 3
36 1
7
71
14 8
882
2
8 2
5
2
63
993
9
9 3
36 1
7
714
1 882
2
8
82
25
63
9
9
993 3
6
3 1
7
71
14
2
888
225 969
82 336 747
93 1
71
714 888
225 969
82 3
9
L2
L22
2 L3
L3 3
3
771
L1
L11 L2
L2 2
2 L3
L3 3
3 L1771
L1 1 L2L2 22 L3
L3 3
3
771
L1
L11 L2
L2 2
2 L3
L33
3
771
L1
L11 L2
L22 L3
2 93
L3 3 L1
3 71
L117 L2 L2
2
22 L3 L3933
L2
2
L2 8
211L3 L3
3312L19 L1
1 1 7
110 L2 L2
2 8
211L3 L3
3 9
312L1 L1
1 1 7
110 L2 L2
2 8
211L3 L3
3 312L19 L1
1 1 7
110 L2 L2
2 8
211L3 L3
3 9
312L1 L1
1 1
1107 L2
2
L2 8
211L3L3
3
312L19 L1
1 1
110 L2 L2
2 211 8 L3 333
L3
L2
L2 L3
2 L3 L1
3 L1 L2
L2 2 L3L3 L1
3 L1 L2
L2 2 L3L3 L1
3 L1 L2
L2 L3
2 L3 L1
3 L1 L2
L252L3 L3
L363L1 L1
L141 L2 L2
L252L3 L3
L3
L2
L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2 L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2 L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2 L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2
L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
L2 L3 9 L1
8 PART-WINDING 7 L2 8 L3 9 L1 7 L2 8 L3 L17 L2
9WYE-DELTA 8 L3 9 L1 7 L2 8 L3 9 L1 7
PART-WINDIN L2 8 L
PART-WINDING WYE-DELTA PART-WINDIN
PART-WINDIN
12 PART-WINDING
2 PART-WINDING
3 1
PART-WINDING 2 3 1 2 3 WYE-DELTA
WYE-DELTA
1
WYE-DELTA 2 3 1 2 PART-WINDIN
3 1
PART-WINDIN
PART-WINDIN
2
L2STARTPART-WINDING
PART-WINDING
L3 L1 L2 RUN
L3 L1 L2START L3 WYE-DELTA
WYE-DELTA
L1 L2 RUN
L3 L1 L2 PART-WINDING
PARTIDAPART-WINDING
L3 L1 OPERA
L2 L3
PART-WINDING
START
START RUN
RUN START
START WYE-DELTARUN RUN PARTIDA
PARTIDA PART-WINDIN OPER
OPER
START
START PART-WINDING RUN
RUN START
START WYE-DELTA RUN
RUN PARTIDA
PARTIDA OPERA
OPERA
12START
12
START 1010 11 1111 1212RUNRUN 10
10 11 11
11 12
START
12 10
START 1010 11 11
11 12 12
12 RUN
RUN 10
10 11 11
11 12
PARTIDA
12
PARTIDA 1010 1111 OPERA
OPERA 12
12 11
Δ - PWS 1212
START 1010 11 1212 RUN 10
10 11 12
START
12 10 11 12 RUN1010 11 PARTIDA
1212 1010 1111 OPERA 12
12 1 1
12
77 10
12 10
START88 11
10 11
99
11 12
77 10
12 10
RUN88 11
10 11
99
11 12
12 START
66 10 10
1044 11 11
55 12
11 12
66 10
12 10
RUN
44 11
10 11
55
11 12
12 10
7PARTIDA
88
10 11
99
11 OPER12
77 10
12 18
1
12
127 10 PART-WINDING
8 11 9 12
127 7 10 88 119 9 12
12 66 104 4 11
55
WYE-DELTA 12
6 6 10
44 11
55 12
127
7 1010 PART-WINDIN
8 1111 9 12
127 7 18 8
8
Part-winding start 7
6
712 84
6
76
8
4
8 10 95 9
5
9511 776 6
7 12884
6 4
8410995 5
9 11 667
5 6
7712 448 4
8 10559
8 5
911 667
9 6
7 12448
7 4
8810559 5
911
9
7
6
712 84
6
8
4
8 10 95
4
9
5
9511 776 6
7612884 4
8 4
776
6
1 884
4
2
4 995
5
3 76
6
1 844
2 95
5
3 671 482 59
3 67
1 48
2 59
3 777
6
6
1
6 884
4
PARTIDA
2 995
5
3 OPER766
1 844
2
61 START 2 53 17 44RUN 28 55 39 7 START
16 88 8 24 99 935 77 7 16 88 8
RUN
24 99 935 17 44 28 53 53 17 42 42
66117 444 2 28 553 39 6661 1 42 2 53 3 77711 82 2 933 71 1 822 933 61
661 42 2 5339 66161
422
L1112
1 L2
6 2L2 2
210 L3
4 3L33
311
5 L1 1
1126 L2 L2 2
210 L3
4 3L33
3115 L1 1
1127 22 L22210 L3
8 33 3
311
9 1L1 L11
112 2
L2
210 L33
311 L1112
1 L2
6 2L22
210 L3
4 3L3311
5 L1 11126 L L2 21
L1
11
L1
L1 L2 L3
2 L3
3 L1
1L1
1 22 L2 L3 L3
3 L1
11
L1 L2
L2 L3
L3 17 22
L1 L2
L2 8 33 L3
L3 9 L1
11
L1 L2 L3
2 L3 L1
3 L1
1L1
1 22 L
L171 L2
L1 L2
L2 L393 L1
82 L3 L171 L2
L1 L2
L2 L3
82 L3 93
L1
L161 L2
L1 L2
L2 42 L3
L3
L3 53 L1
L1
L161 L2 L2
L2 42 L3
L3
L353 L1
L171 L2
L1 L2
L2 L3
82 L3 93 L1 L171 L2 L2
L2 8
L1
L16 L2 L24 L3 L35 44 L1 L1 556 L2 L2 664 L3L35 L1 L1 L2 L244L3 L3 55 L1 L166 L2 L2 L3 L3 L1
L16 L2 L24 L3 L35 44 L1 L1 556 L2 L2 664
L1 L2 L34 4 5
L1 6 6
L2 L3 7
L1 L2 8 4 9 5 6 7 8 9 4 5 L6
4 5 5 6 44 L35 5 6 6L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L34 4 5 L1 6
5 6
1 2 3444 11 555 21 666 32 3 1 4424 11 3555 2 666 31 2 3 1 2 3444 11 522 6332
5 5 1 6 6
14 22 25 33 36 14 22 25 33 36 1 225 33
YY - Y L1 L2 L31 1 L1
2 L2
3 L3 L1 L2 11 L3 2 L1
3 L2 L3 L1 L2 L31 14 L1 2 L3
111 222 333 111 222 333 111 222 333
ENGLISH
L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 L2 L3
Variable Torque L1
L1
L1 4 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L3 6 L1 L1
L1 4 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L36 L1
L1
L1 4 L252 L3
1 L2 L
L6
L1
L1 LOW L2 SPEED
L2 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1
HIGH L2 L3 L3 MENOR L1 L2
L1 L2
ROTA
L2 L3
L3
L1
L1LOWLOW L2 L3
SPEED L1
HIGH L2SPEED L3
SPEED MENOR
MENOR L1 L2ROTA
ROTA L3
L11 L2
LOW
LOW L2
L33
SPEED
2SPEED
SPEED L3
L1
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH L1 1 L2 L22
SPEED
L33
SPEED
SPEED L3
MENOR
MENOR
MENOR
L1
L1
L2
1 ROTAÇROTAÇ
ROTA
L2 2 L3 L3
LOW
44 5SPEED SPEED 66 HIGH 44 SPEED SPEED
55 66 MENOR
MENOR 44 ROTAÇ 55 66
LOW
LOW4 55 5SPEED 6 HIGH
HIGH 4 SPEED 5 66 MENOR 4 ROTAÇ 5 6
4
4LOW
4 5 SPEED 6
6 HIGH44 5 5SPEED 6 4 ROTA
4 5
5 6 6
4L1
411 L2 55522 6L3 6
633 4L14
411 L2 555
22 6L3 6
63 4
L14
411 L2 55522 6L 6
63
14 225 336 14 225 33 3 14 225 33 3
1
1LOW 2 SPEED 3 11 2 2SPEED 36 MENOR 1
1 ROTA 2 3 3
Δ - YY 1
11 22 33 2 3 HIGH 1
11 22 33 3 1
11 22 33 2
6 L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1 L2 2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Constant Torque L1
L1
L1 4 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L3 6 L1 L1
L1 L2
4 L25 L3 L3
L363 L1
L1
1
4 L25 L3L2 2 L
L6
L1
L1 LOW L2 SPEED
L2 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1
HIGH L2SPEED
L2 L3
L3 MENOR
L1
L1 L2
L1 L2
ROTA
L2 L3
L3
L1
L1LOWLOW
LOW L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED L1
HIGH
L1
HIGH L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED MENOR
MENOR
MENOR L1
L11 L2 L2 ROTA
ROTA
ROTA L3
L33
L11 2SPEED 3 HIGH 1 L2 SPEED
2 3 MENOR ROTA 2
44 L2
LOW
LOW SPEED
55SPEED L3
66 HIGH
HIGH L144 SPEED 55 L3
SPEED
SPEED 6 MENOR
MENOR L144 ROTAÇ L2
ROTA 55 L6
Double Speed LOW
LOW44 5SPEED 5SPEED 6 6 HIGH
HIGH 44 SPEED 5 66 6 MENOR 4 ROTA 5
4LOW
4 5 SPEED
5 6
6 HIGH 4 5
4 5SPEED
5 6
6 MENOR 4
4 ROTA
4
5
5 6
5 66
Dahlander 441 L2
L1 552 6 L3633 4 411 L2
L1 552 6L3 633 441 L2
L1 552 6 63
1 1
14 225 336 2 114 225 3362 11
14 22 25 L3
1 2 2 3 3 1 2 3 3 1 ROTA 2 3 3
111LOW 22 SPEED 33 111 222SPEED
HIGH 33 MENOR 1
11 22 33 2
YY - Δ L1 L2 2 L3 L1 L2 2 L3 L1 L22 L3
L1L1
L1 41 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L3 63 L1 L1
L1 41 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L363 L1L1
L1 41 L2 L25 L L
Constant Output L1
L1 LOW L2SPEED
L2 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1
HIGH L2SPEED L3
L3 MENOR L1 L2
L1 L2 L3
ROTA
L2 L3
L3
L1
L1 LOW
LOW L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED L1
HIGH
L1
HIGH L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED MENOR
MENOR
MENOR L1
L11 L2 L2ROTA
ROTA
ROTA L3L3
LOW
L11 L2 2SPEED L33 HIGH L1 1 L2 SPEED
2 L3 3 MENOR L1 ROTA 2
LOW
LOW
LOW SPEED
SPEED
SPEED
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
SPEED
SPEED
SPEED MENORROTAÇ
MENOR ROTAL
L2
MENOR
7 88 ROTAÇ 99
77 8LOW 8LOW 99SPEED 77 88 HIGH 99HIGHSPEED 77 88 99 7 8
MENOR
7 8 ROTA 9
7 7 88 9 9 SPEED 77 8 8 99 SPEED
77 88 99 77
11 882L18 9
93 L
3
777
71 8
1 2L1
8 L293 L3
3
9 71 2
17 82 39 93L1 L2 7 71L3 8
1 822 99 93
3 777 1 822 2 99 L29 3
1 82 2 993 3 771 1 882 93 7711 82 3 1 3
117 82
4 28LOW
5 3
669SPEED11 17 82
4 28 93
5 3 9
6HIGH 17 82
SPEED
4 28 93
5 3669 11
447 22
11MENOR
4 5
2
58 3ROTA
5 36
3
3669
111
4 4
4 22
2
5 5
5 33
3
6 6 14 4
4 22
2
5 5
5 33
3
66
6 11
1
44
4 22
2
5 5
5 33
3
6 6 441 25 52 6 63
41
4 552 66 5 6 3 4 1 5 2 6 3 4
4 55 663
1 5 2 6 444 5
55 L3 66 6
44
L1 L258 L3 69 444 L2
L1 555 L3 666 4L1
4L1 L258 L3 69 L1L1
L1
L2
74 L2L2
L2 8 L3 L39
9 Δ - Y - YY L1
L1
L1
7
L1
4 L2 L2
L2 L3 6
L25L3 L3
L3 L1 7
L14 L2
L1 L2
L1 L25 L3
L2 L3
8 L3
L3
L36
9 L1
L1
ONLY
7
L14 L2 L2
L25L3
L2FOR
L3
L3
L3 6
L1
L1
L1 L25L3
MENOR
L2
MENOR L3 6
L3
L1 1 L2L2 L3 L1 L2 ONLY
L1 L2 FOR
L3 L1
L1 1 L2
MENOR
L2
MENOR 2L3 L3 3
LOW
LOWL1
L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
2L3 L3 3 HIGH
HIGH L11L2
L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
2L3 L33 L11 L2
ONLY
L1
ONLY L2FOR2FOR
L3L3 3 MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
L1 L2
LOW
LOW
LOW L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
SPEED
4 SPEED L3 6
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
SPEED L3 ONLY
STARTING
ONLYL1
STARTING
STARTING
ONLY L2FOR
FOR
5 L36
FOR
MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
4
ROTAÇÃO
MENOR 5 L36
LOW
LOW
5 HIGH4SPEED 5 6 ONLY 4 FOR
STARTING
STARTING ROTAÇÃO
MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
LOW SPEED SPEED HIGH
HIGH SPEED SPEED ONLY FOR
STARTING
STARTING
STARTING
ROTAÇÃO
ROTAÇÃO
LOW SPEED
L1 L211 11L3 2 2
2 3 3 HIGH
3 L1 L2 L3 66 SPEED 6 6 4 4 L15 5
4STARTING5L2 L3 L1 L2
ROTAÇÃO 11 L322 33
1 2 33
1 2 2 3 3 6 4 4 5 5 MENOR 11 2 2 3
LOW SPEED 111 222 333 HIGH SPEED 666 444ONLY 555 FOR 111 222 333
L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 6 L2 L3
STARTING
4 5 ROTAÇÃO L1 1 L2 2 L3
Double Speed L1 L2
L1
L1 L2 L3 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1 L2 L3 L3
L3 L1
L1 L2
L2 L3
L
6 - LOWL1 L2
L1 L2
L2 SPEED L3
L3 HIGH
L1
L1 L2
L1 L2
SPEED
L2 L3
L3 MENOR
MENOR
L1
L1 L2
L1 L2
L2ROTA
ROTA
L3
L3
L3
Double Winding LOW
L1
LOW
L1
LOW
LOW
L2
L2
1 SPEED
SPEED
SPEED
2 L3
SPEED
L3
L3 3
HIGH
L1
HIGH
L1
HIGH
HIGH
L2
L2
6 SPEED
SPEED
SPEEDL3
4 L3
SPEED
L3 5
MENOR
MENOR
MENOR
L1
L1 1 ROTA
L2
L2 ROTA
ROTA2 L
L3
L3 3
LOW L1 L2
SPEED HIGH L1 L2
SPEED MENOR
MENOR L1 L2
ROTA
LOW
LOW SPEED SPEED HIGH
HIGH SPEED SPEED MENOR ROTAÇ ROTA
LOW SPEED HIGH SPEED MENOR ROT
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L
Equivalent table for lead identificationLOW SPEED HIGH SPEED MENOR ROTA
Lead identification on the wiring diagram 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NEMA MG 1 Part 2 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12
IEC 60034-8 U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 U3 V3 W3 U4 V4 W4
Single Speed
JIS (JEC 2137) - up to 6 terminals U V W X Y Z
JIS (JEC 2137) - above 6 terminals U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 U5 V5 W5 U6 V6 W6
Double Speed NEMA MG 1 Part 21) 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
(Dahlander / IEC 60034-8 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
Double Winding) JIS (JEC 2137) 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
1) NEMA MG 1 Part 2 defines T1 to T12 for two or more winding, however WEG adopts 1U to 4W.

www.weg.net
If motors are supplied without terminal blocks, insulate the cable terminals with suitable insulation material that
meets the power supply voltage and the insulation class indicated on the motor nameplate.
Ensure correct tightening torque for the power cable and grounding connections as specified in Table 8.7
The clearance distance (see Figure 6.13) between non-insulated live parts with each other and between
grounded parts must be as indicated in Table 6.3.
Clearance distance
Clearance distance
ENGLISH
Clearance distance Clearance distance
Figure 6.13 - Clearance distance representation

Table 6.3 - Minimum clearance distance (mm) x supply voltage.
Voltage Minimum clearance distance (mm)

U ≤ 440 V 4
440 < U ≤ 690 V 5.5
690 < U ≤ 1000 V 8
1000 < U ≤ 6900 V 45
6900 < U ≤ 11000 V 70
11000 < U ≤ 16500 V 105
Even when the motor is off, dangerous voltages may be present inside the terminal box used for the
space heater supply or winding energization when the winding is used as heating element.
Motor capacitors will hold a charge even after the power has been cut off. Do not touch the capacitors
and/or motor terminals, before discharging the capacitors completely.

www.weg.net
After the motor connection has been completed, ensure that no tool or foreign body has been left inside
the terminal box.
Unused cable inlet holes in the terminal box must be properly closed to ensure the degree of protection
indicated on the motor nameplate.
The cable inlets used for power supply and control must be fitted with components (for example, cable-
glands and conduits) that meet the applicable standards and regulations in each country.
If the motor is fitted with accessories, such as brakes and forced cooling systems, these devices must
be connected to the power supply according to the information provided on their nameplates and with
special care as indicated above.
All protection devices, including overcurrent protection, must be set according to the rated machine conditions.
These protection devices must protect the machine against short circuit, phase fault or locked rotor condition.
The motor protection devices must be set according to the applicable standards.
Check the direction of rotation of the motor shaft. If there is no limitation for the use of unidirectional fans, the
shaft rotation direction can be changed by reversing any two of the phase connections. For single-phase motor,
check the connection diagram indicated on the motor nameplate.
6.10. Connection of the thermal protection devices

If the motor is supplied with temperature monitoring devices, such as, thermostat, thermistors, automatic
thermal protectors, Pt-100 (RTD), etc., they must be connected to the corresponding control devices as
specified on the accessory nameplates. The non-compliance with this procedure may void the product
warranty and cause serious material damages.
ENGLISH
Do not apply test voltage above 2.5 V on thermistors and current above 1 mA on RTDs (Pt-100)
according to IEC 60751 standard.
Figure 6.14 and Figure 6.15 show the connection diagram of the bimetal thermal protector (thermostats) and
thermistors, respectively.
Figure 6.14 - Connection of the bimetal thermal protectors (thermostats)
Figure 6.15 - Thermistor connection

www.weg.net
The alarm temperature limits and thermal protection shutdowns can be defined according to the application;
however these temperature limits can not exceed the values in Table 6.4.
Table 6.4 - Maximum activation temperature of the thermal protections
Maximum temperature of the protection setting (°C)
Component Insulation class
Alarm Tripping
B - 130
Winding F 130 155
H 155 180
Bearing All 110 120
Notes:
1) The number and type of the installed protection devices are stated on the accessory nameplate of the motor.
2) If the motor is supplied with calibrated resistance, (for example, Pt-100), the motor protection system must be set according to the
operating temperatures indicated in Table 6.4.
6.11. Resistance Temperature Detectors (Pt-100)

The thermocouples Pt-100 are made of materials, whose resistance depends on the temperature variation,
intrinsic property of some materials (usually platinum, nickel or copper), calibrated resistance. Its operation is
based on the principle that the electric resistance of a metallic conductor varies linearly with the temperature,
thus allowing a continuous monitoring of the motor warm-up through the controller display ensuring a high level
of precision and answer stability. These devices are widely used for measuring temperatures in various industry
sectors.
In general these devices are used in installations where precise temperature control is required, for example, in
installation for irregular or intermittent duty.
The same detector may be used for alarm and tripping purposes.
Table 6.5 and Figure 6.16 show the equivalence between the Pt-100 resistance and the temperature.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
Table 6.5 - Equivalence between the Pt-100 resistance and the temperature.
ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω
-29 88.617 17 106.627 63 124.390 109 141.908 155 159.180
-28 89.011 18 107.016 64 124.774 110 142.286 156 159.553
-27 89.405 19 107.404 65 125.157 111 142.664 157 159.926
-26 89.799 20 107.793 66 125.540 112 143.042 158 160.298
-25 90.193 21 108.181 67 125.923 113 143.420 159 160.671
-24 90.587 22 108.570 68 126.306 114 143.797 160 161.043
-23 90.980 23 108.958 69 126.689 115 144.175 161 161.415
-22 91.374 24 109.346 70 127.072 116 144.552 162 161.787
-21 91.767 25 109.734 71 127.454 117 144.930 163 162.159
-20 92.160 26 110.122 72 127.837 118 145.307 164 162.531
-19 92.553 27 110.509 73 128.219 119 145.684 165 162.903
-18 92.946 28 110.897 74 128.602 120 146.061 166 163.274
-17 93.339 29 111.284 75 128.984 121 146.438 167 163.646
-16 93.732 30 111.672 76 129.366 122 146.814 168 164.017
-15 94.125 31 112.059 77 129.748 123 147.191 169 164.388
-14 94.517 32 112.446 78 130.130 124 147.567 170 164.760
-13 94.910 33 112.833 79 130.511 125 147.944 171 165.131
-12 95.302 34 113.220 80 130.893 126 148.320 172 165.501
-11 95.694 35 113.607 81 131.274 127 148.696 173 165.872
-10 96.086 36 113.994 82 131.656 128 149.072 174 166.243
-9 96.478 37 114.380 83 132.037 129 149.448 175 166.613
-8 96.870 38 114.767 84 132.418 130 149.824 176 166.984
-7 97.262 39 115.153 85 132.799 131 150.199 177 167.354
-6 97.653 40 115.539 86 133.180 132 150.575 178 167.724
-5 98.045 41 115.925 87 133.561 133 150.950 179 168.095
-4 98.436 42 116.311 88 133.941 134 151.326 180 168.465
-3 98.827 43 116.697 89 134.322 135 151.701 181 168.834
ENGLISH
-2 99.218 44 117.083 90 134.702 136 152.076 182 169.204

-1 99.609 45 117.469 91 135.083 137 152.451 183 169.574
0 100.000 46 117.854 92 135.463 138 152.826 184 169.943
1 100.391 47 118.240 93 135.843 139 153.200 185 170.313
2 100.781 48 118.625 94 136.223 140 153.575 186 170.682
3 101.172 49 119.010 95 136.603 141 153.950 187 171.051
4 101.562 50 119.395 96 136.982 142 154.324 188 171.420
5 101.953 51 119.780 97 137.362 143 154.698 189 171.789
6 102.343 52 120.165 98 137.741 144 155.072 190 172.158
7 102.733 53 120.550 99 138.121 145 155.446 191 172.527
8 103.123 54 120.934 100 138.500 146 155.820 192 172.895
9 103.513 55 121.319 101 138.879 147 156.194 193 173.264
10 103.902 56 121.703 102 139.258 148 156.568 194 173.632
11 104.292 57 122.087 103 139.637 149 156.941 195 174.000
12 104.681 58 122.471 104 140.016 150 157.315 196 174.368
13 105.071 59 122.855 105 140.395 151 157.688 197 174.736
14 105.460 60 123.239 106 140.773 152 158.061 198 175.104
15 105.849 61 123.623 107 141.152 153 158.435 199 175.472
16 106.238 62 124.007 108 141.530 154 158.808 200 175.840

www.weg.net
Figure 6.16 - Ohmic resistance of the Pt-100 x temperature
6.12. Connection of the space heaters

Before switching ON the space heaters, check if the space heaters connection have been made according to
the connection diagram shown on the space heater nameplate. For motors supplied with dual voltage space
ENGLISH
heaters (110-127/220-240 V), see Figure 6.17.
Figure 6.17 - Dual voltage space heater connection.
The space heaters should never be energized when the motor is in operation.

www.weg.net
6.13. Starting Methods

Whenever possible, the motor starting must be Direct On Line (DOL) at rated voltage. This is the most simple
and feasible starting method. However, it must only be applied when the starting current does not affect the
power supply. Please consider the local electric utility regulations when installing a motor.
High inrush current may result in:
a) high voltage drop in the power supply line creating unacceptable line disturbance on the distribution system;
b) requiring oversized protection system (cables and contactor) increasing the installation costs.
If DOL starting is not allowed due to the reasons mentioned above, an indirect starting method compatible with
the load and motor voltage to reduce the starting current may be used.
If reduced voltage starters are used for starting, the motor starting torque will also be reduced.
Table 6.6 shows the possible indirect starting methods that can be used depending on the number of the
motor leads.
Table 6.6 - Starting method x number of motor leads.
Number of leads Possible starting methods
Autotransformer
3 leads
Soft-starter
Star-Delta
6 leads Autotransformer
Soft-Starter
Series/Parallel
Part Winding
9 leads
Autotransformer
ENGLISH
Soft-Starter
Star-Delta
Series/Parallel
12 leads Part Winding
Autotransformer
Soft-Starter
Table 6.7 shows examples of possible indirect starting methods to be used according to the voltage indicated
on the motor nameplate and the power supply voltage.
Table 6.7 - Starting methods x voltage
Nameplate Operating Autotransformer Starting by series/ Part-winding Starting by
Star-delta
voltage voltage Starting parallel switch Starting soft-starter
220 V YES YES NO NO YES
220/380 V
380 V NO YES NO NO YES
220 V NO YES YES YES YES
220/440 V
230 V NO YES YES YES YES
230/460 V
380/660 V 380 V YES YES NO NO YES
220 V YES YES YES YES YES
220/380/440 V 380 V NO YES YES YES YES
440 V YES YES NO NO YES
The WQuattro line motors must be started direct on-line (DOL) or driven by a frequency inverter in scalar
mode.

www.weg.net
6.14. Motors driven by Frequency Inverter
The operation with frequency inverter must be stated in the Purchase Order since this drive type may
require some changes of the motor design.
Wmagnet Motors must only be driven by WEG frequency inverter.
The frequency inverter used to drive motors up to 690 V must be fitted with Pulse With Modulation (PWM) with
vector control.
When a motor is driven by a frequency inverter at lower frequencies than the rated frequency, you must reduce
the motor torque to prevent motor overheating. The torque reduction (derating torque) can be found in the item
6.4 of the “Technical Guidelines for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available on the site
www.weg.net.
If the motor is operated above the rated frequency, please note:

g That the motor must be operated at constant output;
g That the motor can supply max. 95% of its rated output;
g Do not exceed the maximum speed and please consider:
g max. operating frequency stated on the additional nameplate;
g mechanical speed limitation of the motor.
Information on the selection of the power cables between the frequency inverter and the motor can be found in the item
6.4 of the “Technical Guidelines for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available at www.weg.net.
6.14.1. Use of dV/dt filter

6.14.1.1. Motor with enameled round wire
ENGLISH
Motors designed for rated voltages up to 690 V, when driven by frequency inverter, do not require the use of
dV/dT filters, provided that following criteria are considered.
Criteria for the selection of motors with round enameled wire when driven by frequency inverter 1
Inverter MTBP 3
Peak voltage at the dV/dt
Motor rated votage 2 Rise Time 3 Time between pulses
motor terminals (max) inverter output (max)
(min.) (min)
Vnom ≤ 460 V ≤ 1600 V ≤ 5200 V/µs
460 < Vnom ≤ 575 V ≤ 1800 V ≤ 6500 V/µs
≥ 0,1 µs ≥ 6 µs
575 < Vnom ≤ 690 V 4 ≤ 1600 V ≤ 5200 V/µs
575 < Vnom ≤ 690 V 5 ≤ 2200 V ≤ 7800 V/µs
Notes:
1. For the application of motors with round enameled wires designed for 690 < Vnom ≤ 1100 V, please contact WEG.
2. For the application of dual voltage motors, example 380/660 V, consider the lower voltage (380 V).
3. Information supplied by the inverter manufacturer.
4. When not stated in the Purchase Order that the motor will be driven by frequency inverter.
5. When stated in the Purchase Order that the motor will be driven by frequency inverter.
6.14.1.2. Motor with prewound coils

Motors with prewound coils (medium and high voltage motors regardless of frame sizes, and low voltage
motors from IEC 500 / NEMA 800 frame on), designed for the use with frequency inverters, do not require the
use of filters, provided they comply with the criteria in Table 6.8.
Table 6.8 - Criteria to be considered when using motor with prewound coils to be drive by frequency inverters
Turn to turn insulation (phase-phase) Phase-ground insulation

Type of Peak voltage at Peak voltage at
Motor rated voltage dV/dt at the motor dV/dt at the motor
modulation the motor the motor
terminals terminals
terminals terminals
Sinusoidal ≤ 5900 V ≤ 500 V/µs ≤ 3400 V ≤ 500 V/µs
690 < Vnom ≤ 4160 V
PWM ≤ 9300 V ≤ 2700 V/µs ≤ 5400 V ≤ 2700 V/µs
Sinusoidal ≤ 9300 V ≤ 500 V/µs ≤ 5400 V ≤ 500 V/µs
4160 < Vnom ≤ 6600 V
PWM ≤ 14000 V ≤ 1500 V/µs ≤ 8000 V ≤ 1500 V/µs

www.weg.net
6.14.2. Bearing insulation

Only the motors in IEC frame size 400 (NEMA 680) and larger are supplied, as standard, with insulated bearing.
If motor must be driven by frequency inverter, insulate the bearing according to Table 6.9.
Table 6.9 - Recommendation on the bearing insulation for inverter driven motors
Frame size Recommendation
IEC 315 and 355
NEMA 445/7, 447/9, L447/9, 504/5, 5006/7/8, 5009/10/11, 586/7, g Insulated bearing/end shield
5807/8/9, 5810/11/12 and 588/9 g Grounding between shaft and frame by grounding brush
IEC 400 and larger g Insulated NDE bearing
NEMA 680 and larger g Grounding between shaft and frame by grounding brush
When motors are supplied with shaft grounding system, monitor the grounding brush constantly during
its operation and, when it reaches the end of its useful life, it must be replaced by another brush with the
same specification.
6.14.3. Switching frequency

The minimum inverter switching frequency must not be lower than 2.5 kHz and should not exceed 5 kHz.
The non-compliance with the criteria and recommendations indicated in this manual may void the
product warranty.
6.14.4. Mechanical speed limitation

Table 6.10 shows the maximum speeds allowed for motors driven by frequency inverter.
ENGLISH
Table 6.10 - Maximum motor speed (in rpm).

Frame size Maximum speed for
DE-bearing
IEC NEMA standard motors
6201
6202
63-90 143/5 6203 10400
6204
6205
100 - 6206 8800
6207 7600
112 182/4
6307 6800
132 213/5 6308 6000
160 254/6 6309 5300
180 284/6 6311 4400
200 324/6 6312 4200
6314 3600
6315 3600
6316 3200
6319 3000
6220 3600
225-630 364/5-9610
6320 2200
6322 1900
6324 1800
6328 1800
6330 1800
Note:
to select the maximum allowed motor speed, consider the motor torque derating curve.
For more information on the application of frequency inverters, contact WEG or check the “Technical Guidelines
for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available at www.weg.net.

www.weg.net
7. Commissioning
7.1. Initial Start-up
After finishing the installation procedures and before starting the motor for the first time or after a long period
without operation, the following items must be checked:
If the nameplate data (voltage, current, connection diagram, degree of protection, cooling system, service
g
factor, etc.) meet the application requirements.

g If the machine set (motor + driven machine) has been mounted and aligned correctly.
If the motor driving system ensures that the motor speed does not exceed the max. allowed speed indicated
g
in Table 6.10.
g Measure the winding insulation resistance, making sure it complies with the specified values in item 5.4.
g Check the motor rotation direction.
Inspect the motor terminal box for damage and ensure that it is clean and dry and all contacts are rust-free,
g
the seals are in perfect operating conditions and all unused threaded holes are properly closed thus ensuring
the degree of protection indicated on the motor nameplate.
Check if the motor wiring connections, including grounding and auxiliary equipment connection, have been
g
carried out properly and are in accordance with the recommendations in item 6.9.
Check the operating conditions of the installed auxiliary devices (brake, encoder, thermal protection device,
g
forced cooling system, etc.).

Check bearing operating conditions. If signs of oxidation are detected, replace the bearings. If no sign of
g
oxidation is detected, relubricate the bearings as described in item 8.2. If the motors are stored for more than
two years, the bearings must be replaced before starting the motor.
g When motors are fitted with sleeve bearings, ensure:

g correct oil level for the sleeve bearing. The oil level should be in the center of the sight glass (see Figure 6.8);
g that the motor is not started or operated with axial or radial loads;
that if the motor is stored for a period equal or longer than the oil change interval, the oil must be changed
g
ENGLISH
before starting the motor.
g Inspect the capacitor operating condition, if any. If motors are installed for more than two years, but were
never commissioned, it is recommended to change the start capacitors since they lose their operating
characteristics.
g Ensure that the air inlet and outlet opening are not blocked. The minimum clearance to the nearest wall (L)
should be at least ¼ of the fan cover diameter (D), see Figure 7.1. The intake air temperature must be at
ambient temperature.
L
Figure 7.1- Minimum clearance to the wall

www.weg.net
Please consider the minimum distances shown in the Table 7.1 as reference value
Table 7.1 - Minimum distance between the fan cover and wall
Frame size Distance between the fan cover and the wall (L)
IEC NEMA mm inches
63 - 25 0.96
71 - 26 1.02
80 - 30 1.18
90 143/5 33 1.30
100 - 36 1.43
112 182/4 41 1.61
132 213/5 50 1.98
160 254/6 65 2.56
180 284/6 68 2.66
200 324/6 78 3.08
225 364/5
85 3.35
250 404/5
444/5
280 445/7 108 4.23
447/9
L447/9
504/5
315 122 4.80
5006/7/8
5009/10/11
586/7
588/9
355 136 5.35
5807/8/9
5810/11/12
6806/7/8
400 147 5.79
6809/10/11
450 7006/10 159 6.26
500 8006/10 171 6.73
ENGLISH
560 8806/10 185 7.28

630 9606/10 200 7.87
g nsure correct water flow rate and water temperature when water cooled motors are used. See item 7.2.
e
g ensure
that all rotating parts, such as pulleys, couplings, external fans, shaft, etc. are protected against
accidental contact.
Other tests and inspections not included in the manual may be required, depending on the specific installation,
application and/or motor characteristics.
After all previous inspections have been carried out, proceed as follows to start the motor:
g Start the motor on no-load (if possible) and check the motor direction of rotation. Check for the presence of
any abnormal noise, vibration or other abnormal operating conditions.
g Ensure the motor starts smoothly. If any abnormal operating condition is noticed, switch off the motor, check
the assembly system and connections before the motor is started again.
g If excessive vibrations are noticed, check if the motor mounting bolts are well tightened or if the vibrations are
not generated and transmitted from adjacent installed equipment. Check the motor vibration periodically and
ensure that the vibration limits are as specified in item 7.2.1.
g Start the motor at rated load during a short time and compare the operating current with the rated current
indicated on the nameplate.
g Continue to measure the following motor variables until thermal equilibrium is reached: current, voltage,
bearing and motor frame temperature, vibration and noise levels.
g Record the measured current and voltage values on the Installation Report for future comparisons.
As induction motors have high inrush currents during start-up, the acceleration of high inertia load requires an
extended starting time to reach full speed resulting in fast motor temperature rise. Successive starts within
short intervals will result in winding temperature increases and can lead to physical insulation damage reducing
the useful life of the insulation system. If the duty cycle S1 / CONT. is specified on the motor nameplate, this
means that the motor has been designed for:
two successive starts: first start from cold condition, i. e., the motor windings are at room temperature and
g
the second start immediately after the motor stops.

one start from hot condition, i. e., the motor windings are at rated temperature.
g
The Troubleshooting Chart in section 10 provides a basic list of unusual cases that may occur during motor
operation with the respective corrective actions
www.weg.net
7.2. Operating conditions

Unless otherwise stated in the Purchase Order, electric motors are designed and built to be operated at
altitudes up to 1000 meters above sea level and in a temperature range from -20 °C to +40 °C. Any deviation
from the normal condition of motor operation must be stated on the motor nameplate. Some components must
be changed if the ambient temperature is different from the specified one. Please contact WEG to check the
required special features.
For operating temperatures and altitudes differing from those above, the factors indicated in Table 7.2 must be
applied to the nominal motor power rating in order to determine the derated available output (Pmax = Pnom x
correction factor).
Table 7.2 - Correction factors for altitude and ambient temperature.
Altitude (m)
T (°C)
1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000
10 0.97 0.92 0.88
15 0.98 0.94 0.90 0.86
20 1.00 0.95 0.91 0.87 0.83
25 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.89 0.85 0.81
30 1.00 0.96 0.92 0.90 0.86 0.82 0.78
35 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.90 0.88 0.84 0.80 0.75
40 1.00 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.82 0.80 0.76 0.71
45 0.95 0.92 0.90 0.88 0.85 0.81 0.78 0.74 0.69
50 0.92 0.90 0.87 0.85 0.82 0.80 0.77 0.72 0.67
55 0.88 0.85 0.83 0.81 0.78 0.76 0.73 0.70 0.65
60 0.83 0.82 0.80 0.77 0.75 0.73 0.70 0.67 0.62
65 0.79 0.76 0.74 0.72 0.70 0.68 0.66 0.62 0.58
70 0.74 0.71 0.69 0.67 0.66 0.64 0.62 0.58 0.53
75 0.70 0.68 0.66 0.64 0.62 0.60 0.58 0.53 0.49
80 0.65 0.64 0.62 0.60 0.58 0.56 0.55 0.48 0.44
Motors installed inside enclosures (cubicles) must be ensured an air renewal rate in the order of one cubic
meter per second for each 100 kW installed power or fraction of installed power. Totally Enclosed Air Over
ENGLISH
motors - TEAO (fan and exhaust / smoke extraction) are supplied without cooling fan and the manufacturer of
the driven machine is responsible for sufficient motor cooling. If no minimum required air speed between motor
fins is indicated on the motor nameplate, ensure the air speed indicated in the table 7.3 is provided. The values
shown in Table 7.3 are valid for 60 Hz motors. To obtain the minimum air speed for 50 Hz motors, multiply the
values in the table by 0.83.
Table 7.3 - Minimum required air speed between motor fins (metres/second).
Frame Poles
IEC NEMA 2 4 6 8
63 to 90 143/5 14 7 5 4
100 to 132 182/4 to 213/5 18 10 8 6
160 to 200 254/6 to 324/6 20 20 12 7
225 to 280 364/5 to 444/5 22 22 18 12
315 to 355 445/7 to 588/9 25 25 20 15
The voltage and frequency variations may affect the performance characteristics and the electromagnetic
compatibility of the motor. The power supply variations should not exceed the values specified in the applicable
standards. Examples:
ABNT NBR 17094 - Parts 1 and 2. The motor has been designed to supply the rated torque for a combined
g
variation in voltage and frequency:

g Zone A: ±5% of the rated voltage and ±2% of the rated frequency.
g Zone B: ±10% of the rated voltage and +3% -5% of the rated frequency.
When operated continuously in Zone A or B, the motor may show performance variations and the operating
temperature may increase considerably. These performance variations will be higher in Zone B. Thus it is not
recommended to operate the motor in Zone B during extended periods.
g IEC 60034-1. The motor has been designed to supply the rated torque for combined variation in voltage and
frequency:
gZone A: ±5% of the rated voltage and ±2% of the rated frequency.
g Zone B: ±10% of the rated voltage and +3% -5% of the rated frequency.
When operated continuously in Zone A or B, the motor may show performance variations and the operating
temperature may increase considerably. These performance variations will be higher in Zone B. Thus it is not
recommended to operate the motor in Zone B during extended periods. For multivoltage motors (example 380-
415/660 V), a ±5% voltage variation from the rated voltage is allowed.
www.weg.net
g NEMA MG 1 Part 12. The motor has been designed to be operated in one of the following variations:
g ±10% of the rated voltage, with rated frequency;
g ±5% of the rated frequency, with rated voltage;
g A combined variation in voltage and frequency of ±10%, provided the frequency variation does not exceed
±5%.
If the motor is cooled by ambient air, clean the air inlet and outlet openings and cooling fins at regular intervals
to ensure a free airflow over the frame surface. The hot air should never be returned to the motor. The cooling
air must be at room temperature limited to the temperature range indicated on the motor nameplate (if no room
temperature is specified, please consider a temperature range between -20 °C and +40 °C).
Table 7.4 shows the minimum required water flow for water cooled motors considering the different frame sizes
and the maximum allowed temperature rise of the cooling water after circulating through the motor. The inlet
water temperature should not exceed 40 °C.
Table 7.4 - Minimum required water flow and the maximum allowed
temperature rise of the cooling water after circulating through the motor
Frame size Flow rate Maximum allowed water

IEC NEMA (litres/minute) temperature rise (°C)
180 284/6 12 5
200 324/6 12 5
225 364/5 12 5
250 404/5 12 5
444/5
280 445/7 15 6
447/9
315 504/5 16 6
586/7
355 25 6
588/9
Motors fitted with oil mist lubrication systems can be operated continuously for a maximum of one hour after
ENGLISH
the failure of the oil pumping system.
Considering the sun’s heat increases the operating temperature, externally mounted motors should always be
protected from direct sunlight exposure.
Each and every deviation from the normal operating condition (tripping of the thermal protection, noise and
vibration level increase, temperature and current rise) should be investigated and corrected by WEG Authorized
Service Centers.
Motors fitted with cylindrical roller bearings require a minimum radial load to ensure a normal operation.
For information regarding the radial preload, please contact WEG.
7.2.1.Limits of vibration
The vibration severity is the maximum vibration value measured at all positions and in all directions as
recommended in the standard IEC 60034-14. Table 7.5 specifies the limits of the maximum vibrations
magnitudes according to standard IEC 60034-14 for shaft heights IEC 56 to 400, for vibrations grades A and B.
The vibration severity limits in Table 7.5 are given as RMS values (Root Mean Square values or effective values)
of the vibration speed in mm/s measured in free suspension condition.
Table 7.5 - Recommended limits for the vibration severity according to standard IEC 60034-14
Shaft height [mm] 56 < H < 132 132 < H < 280 H > 280
Vibration Grade Vibration severity on elastic base [mm/s RMS]
A 1.6 2.2 2.8
B 0.7 1.1 1.8
Notes:
1-T he values in Table 7.5 are valid for measurements carried out with decoupled machines (without load) operated at rated voltage and
frequency.
2 - The values in Table 7.5 are valid regardless of the direction of rotation of the machine.
3-T he values in Table 7.5 are not applicable to single-phase motors, three-phase motors powered by a single-phase system or to
machines mounted in situ or coupled with inertia flywheels or to loads.
According to NEMA MG 1, the allowed vibration limit for standard motors is 0.15 in/s (peak vibration in in/s).
Note:
For the load operation condition, the use of the standard ISO 10816-3 is recommended for evaluating the motor vibration limits. In the
load condition the motor vibration will be influenced by several factors, such as, type of the coupled load, condition of the motor fixation,
alignment condition under load, structure or base vibration due to other equipments, etc.

www.weg.net
8. Maintenance
The purpose of the maintenance is to extend the useful life of the equipment. The non-compliance with one of
these previous items can cause unexpected machine failures.
If motors with cylindrical roller or angular contact bearings are to be transported during the maintenance
procedures, the shaft locking device must always be fitted. All HGF motors, regardless of the bearing type,
must always be transported with the shaft locking device fitted.
All repairs, disassembly and assembly related services must be carried out only by qualified and well-trained
personnel by using proper tools and techniques. Make sure that the machine has stopped and it is
disconnected from the power supply, including the accessory devices (space heater, brake, etc.), before any
servicing is undertaken.
The company does not assume any responsibility or liability for repair services or maintenance operations
executed by non-authorized Service Centers or by non qualified service personnel. The company shall have no
obligation or liability whatsoever to the buyer for any indirect, special, consequential or incidental loss or
damage caused or arising from the company’s proven negligence
8.1. General Inspection
The inspection intervals depend on the motor type, application and installation conditions. Proceed as follows
during inspection:
g V
isually inspect the motor and coupling. Check if abnormal noises, vibrations, excessive heating, wear signs,
misalignment or damaged parts are noticed. Replace the damaged parts as required.
g Measure the insulation resistance according to the item 5.4.
g C
lean the motor enclosure. Remove oil spills and dust accumulation from the motor frame surface to ensure
a better heat transfer to the surrounding ambient.
g Check cooling fan condition and clean the air inlet & outlet openings to ensure a free air flow over the motor.
g Investigate the actual condition of the seals and replace them, if required.
ENGLISH
g D
rain the condensed water from inside the motor. After draining, reinstall the drain plugs to ensure the degree
of protection as indicated on the motor nameplate. The motor must always be positioned so the drain hole is
at the lowest position (see item 6).
g C
heck the connections of the power supply cables, ensuring the correct clearance distance between live and
grounded parts, as specified in Table 6.3.
g C
heck if the tightening torque of the bolted connections and mounting bolts meets the tightening torque
specified in Table 8.7.
g C
heck the status of the cable passages, the cable gland seals and the seals inside the terminal box and
replace them, if required.
g C
heck the bearing operating conditions. Check for the presence of any abnormal noise, vibration or other
abnormal operating conditions, like motor temperature rise. Check the oil level, the lube oil condition and
compare the workings hours with the informed life time.
g Record and file all changes performed on the motor.
Do not reuse damaged or worn parts. Damaged or worn parts must be replaced by parts supplied by
the manufacturer and must be installed as if they were the original parts.
8.2. Lubrication
Proper lubrication plays a vital role in the motor performance. Only use the grease or oil types, amounts and
lubrication intervals recommended for the bearings. This information is available on the motor nameplate and
the lubrication procedures must be carried out according to the type of lubricant (oil or grease).
When the motor is fitted with thermal protection devices for bearing temperature control, consider the operating
temperature limits shown in Table 6.4.
The maximum operating temperature of motors used in special applications may differ from those shown in
Table 6.4. The grease and oil disposal should be made in compliance with applicable laws in each country
Please contact WEG when motors are to be installed in special environments or used for special
applications.

www.weg.net
8.2.1. Grease lubricated rolling bearings
Excess grease causes bearing overheating, resulting in bearing failure.
The lubrication intervals specified in Table 8.1, Table 8.2, Table 8.3 and Table 8.4 consider an absolute
temperature on the bearing of 70 °C (up to frame size IEC 200 / NEMA 324/6) and 85 °C (for frame size IEC
225 / NEMA 364/5 and above), the motor running at rated speed, a motor mounted in horizontal position and
greased with Mobil Polyrex EM grease. Any variation of the parameters listed above must be evaluated.
Table 8.1 - Lubrication intervals for ball bearings

LUBRICATION INTERVALS (hours)
Frame W21 TEFC W22 TEFC

Bearing Amount of ODP
Poles (Totally Enclosed Fan (Totally Enclosed Fan
designation grease (g) (Open Drip Proof)
Cooled) Cooled)
IEC NEMA 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
2 18100 15700 22000 20000
4
160 254/6 6309 13 20000 20000
6 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 13700 11500 17000 14000
4
180 284/6 6311 18 20000 20000
6 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 11900 9800 15000 12000
4
ENGLISH
200 324/6 6312 21 20000 20000

6 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 18000 14400 4500 3600 5000 4000
4 11600 9700 14000 12000
6314 27
6 20000 20000 16400 14200 20000 17000
8 19700 17300 24000 20000
364/5 *Upon *Upon *Upon

2 14000 3500 4000
404/5 request request request
444/5 4 6316 34 10400 8500 13000 10000
225 445/7
6 20000 20000 14900 12800 18000 16000
250 447/9
280 L447/9 8 18700 15900 20000 20000
315 504/5
*Upon *Upon *Upon
355 5008 2 9600 2400 3000
request request request
5010/11
586/7 4 6319 45 9000 7000 11000 8000
588/9 6 20000 20000 13000 11000 16000 13000
8 17400 14000 20000 17000
4 7200 5100 9000 6000
6 6322 60 20000 20000 10800 9200 13000 11000
8 15100 11800 19000 14000

www.weg.net
Table 8.2 - Lubrication intervals for cylindrical roller bearings

LUBRICATION INTERVALS (hours)
Amount
Frame W21 TEFC W22 TEFC
Bearing of ODP
Poles (Totally Enclosed Fan (Totally Enclosed Fan
designation grease (Open Drip Proof)
Cooled) Cooled)
(g)
IEC NEMA 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
2 19600 13300 9800 16000 12000
4
160 254/6 NU309 13 20000
6 20000 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 18400 12800 9200 6400 11000 8000
4 19100
180 284/6 NU311 18
6 20000 20000 20000 25000 25000
20000
8
2 15200 10200 7600 5100 9000 6000
4 17200 21000
200 324/6 NU312 21
6 20000 20000 20000 25000
20000 25000
8
4 17800 14200 8900 7100 11000 9000
364/5 6 NU314 27 13100 11000 16000 13000
20000 20000
404/5 8 16900 15100 20000 19000
444/5 4 15200 12000 7600 6000 9000 7000
225 445/7 6 NU316 34 19000 11600 9500 14000 12000
250 447/9 20000
8 20000 15500 13800 19000 17000
280 L447/9
315 504/5 4 12000 9400 6000 4700 7000 5000
355 5008 6 NU319 45 19600 15200 9800 7600 12000 9000
5010/11 8 20000 20000 13700 12200 17000 15000
586/7 4 8800 6600 4400 3300 5000 4000
588/9 6 NU322 60 15600 11800 7800 5900 9000 7000
8 20000 20000 11500 10700 14000 13000
ENGLISH
Table 8.3 - Lubrication intervals for ball bearings - HGF line
Frame Bearing Amount of Lubrication intervals (hours)
Poles
IEC NEMA designation grease (g) 50Hz 60Hz
2 6314 27 3100 2100
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8T and
6320 50 4500 4500
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T 4-8
6316 34 4500 4500
2 6314 27 3100 2100
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9T and
6322 60 4500 4500
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T 4-8
6319 45 4500 4500
2 6315 30 2700 1800
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8T and
6324 72 4500 4500
400 C/D/E 6809/10/11T 4-8
6319 45 4500 4500
2 6220 31 2500 1400
6328 93 4500 3300
4
450 7006/10 6322 60 4500 4500
6328 93 4500 4500
6-8
6322 60 4500 4500
6330 104 4200 2800
4
6324 72 4500 4500
500 8006/10
6330 104 4500 4500
6-8
6324 72 4500 4500
6330 104 4200 2800
4
6324 72 4500 4500
500 8006/10
6330 104 4500 4500
6-8
6324 72 4500 4500
560 8806/10 4-8
*Upon request
630 9606/10 4-8

www.weg.net
Table 8.4 - Lubrication intervals for cylindrical roller bearings - HGF line
Frame Bearing Amount of Lubrication intervals (hours)
Poles
IEC NEMA designation grease (g) 50 Hz 60 Hz
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8 and 4 4300 2900
NU320 50
315C/D/E 5009/10/11 6-8 4500 4500
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9 and 4 3500 2200
NU322 60
355C/D/E 5810/11/12 6-8 4500 4500
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8 and 4 2900 1800
NU324 72
400C/D/E 6809/10/11 6-8 4500 4500
4 2000 1400
450 7006/10 6 NU328 93 4500 3200
8 4500 4500
4 1700 1000
500 8006/10 6 NU330 104 4100 2900
8 4500 4500
4 75 2600 1600
560 8806/10 NU228 + 6228
6-8 106 4500 4500
4 92 1800 1000
630 9606/10 6 NU232 + 6232 120 4300 3100
8 140 4500 4500
For each increment of 15 ºC above the bearing temperature, the relubrication intervals given in the Table must
be halved. The relubrication interval of motors designed by the manufacturer for mounting in horizontal position,
but installed in vertical position (with WEG authorization), must be halved.
For special applications, such as: high and low temperatures, aggressive environments, driven by frequency
inverter (VFD - frequency inverter), etc., please contact WEG about the required amount of grease and the
relubrication intervals.
8.2.1.1. Motor without grease fitting

ENGLISH
Motors without grease fittings must be lubricated in accordance with the existing Maintenance Plan. Motor
disassembly must be carried out as specified in Item 8.3. If motors are fitted with shielded bearings (for
example, ZZ, DDU, 2RS, VV), these bearings must be replaced at the end of the grease service life.
8.2.1.2. Motor with grease fitting
To lubricate the bearings with the motor stopped, proceed as follows:
Motors with grease fittings must be stopped to be lubricated. Proceed as follows:
Before lubricating, clean the grease nipple and immediate vicinity thoroughly;
g
Lift grease inlet protection;

g
Remove the grease outlet plug;

g
Pump in approximately half of the total grease indicated on the motor nameplate and run the motor for about
g
1 (one) minute at rated speed;

Switch-off the motor and pump in the remaining grease;
g
Lower again the grease inlet protection and reinstall the grease outlet protection.
g
To grease the motor while running, proceed as follows:

g Before lubricating, clean the grease nipple and immediate vicinity thoroughly;
g Pump the total grease indicated on the motor nameplate;
g Lower again the grease inlet protection.
For lubrication, use only manual grease gun.
If Motors are provided with a spring device for grease removal, the grease excess must be removed by pulling
the rod and cleaning the spring until the spring does not remove more grease.
8.2.1.3. Compatibility of the Mobil Polyrex EM grease with other greases

The Mobil Polyrex EM grease has a polyurea thickener and a mineral oil thus being compatible with greases
that contain:
Lithium based thickener, lithium-based complex thickener, polyurea thickener and refined mineral oil;
g
The used grease must have in its formulation corrosion and oxidation inhibitors.
g
In general terms, greases with the same type of soap are compatible to each other. However, depending on the
proportion of the mixture there may be incompatibility. In such a case, it is not recommended to mix different
types of greases without contacting the supplier or WEG beforehand.
www.weg.net
8.2.2. Oil lubricated bearings

To change the oil of oil lubricated motor proceed as follows:
g s
witch-off the motor;
g r
emove threaded oil drain plug;
g o
pen the valve and drain the oil;
g c
lose the drain vale again;
g r
einstall the threaded oil drain plug;
g fi
ll-up with the type and amount of oil as specified on the nameplate;
g c
heck oil level. The oil level is OK when the lubricant can be viewed approximately in the center of the sight
glass;
g r
einstall oil inlet plug;
g c
heck for oil leaks and ensure that all not used threaded plugs are closed with plugs.
The bearing lubricating oil must be replaced as specified on the nameplate or whenever changes in the oil
properties are noticed. The oil viscosity and pH must be checked periodically. The oil level must be checked
every day and must be kept in the center of the sight glass.
Please contact WEG, when oils with different viscosities should be used.
Note:
The HGF vertical mounted motors with high axial thrust are supplied with grease lubricated DE-bearings and with oil lubricated NDE-
bearings. The DE-bearings must be lubricated according to recommendations in item 8.2.1. Table 8.5 specifies the oil type and the
amount of oil required for this motor lubrication.
Table 8.5 - Oil properties for HGF vertical mounted motors with high axial thrust
Frame Bearing Lubricant

Poles Oil (liters) Interval (h) Lubricant
Mounting - High axial thrust
IEC NEMA designation specification

315L/A/B e 5006/7/8T e
4-8 29320 20
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T
355L/A/B e 5807/8/9T e ISO VG150
4-8 29320 26
ENGLISH
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T Renolin mineral oil with
400L/A/B e 6806/7/8T e 8000 DTA 40 / antifoam and
4-8 29320 37 SHC 629 antioxidant
400C/D/E 6809/10/11T
additives
450 7006/10 4-8 29320 45
8.2.3. Oil mist lubricated bearings

Check the service conditions of the seals and if replacement is required use only original components. Clean
the seal components before assembly (bearing caps, end shields, etc.).
Apply joint sealant between the bearing caps and end shields. The joint sealant must be compatible with the
used lubricating oil. Connect the oil lubricant tubes (oil inlet and oil outlet tubes and motor drain tube), as shown
in Figure 6.12.
8.2.4. Sleeve bearings
The lubricating oil of sleeve bearings must be changed at the intervals specified in Table 8.6. To replace the oil,
proceed as follows:
g N
DE-bearing: remove the protection plate from the fan cover;
g D
rain the oil through the drain hole located at the bottom of the bearing (see Figure 8.1);
g C
lose the oil drain hole;
g R
emove the oil inlet plug;
g F
ill the sleeve bearing with the specified oil and with the amount of oil specified in;
g C
heck the oil level and ensure it is kept close to the center of the sight glass;
g I
nstall the oil inlet plug;
g C
heck for oil leaks. Oil inlet
Oil sight glass
Oil outlet
Figure 8.1 - Sleeve bearing Manual of Electric Motors 103

www.weg.net
Table 8.6 - Oil properties for sleeve bearings.
Frame Bearing Oil Lubricant

Poles Interval (h) Lubricant
IEC NEMA designation (liters) Specification
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8T and
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T ISO VG32
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9T and mineral oil with
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T Renolin
2 9-80 2.8 8000 antifoam and
DTA 10
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8 and antioxidant
400C/D/E 6809/10/11T additives
450 7006/10
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8T and
9-90
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T
2.8 ISO VG46
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9T and
9-100 mineral oil with
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T
4-8 8000 Renolin DTA 15 antifoam and
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8 and
11-110 antioxidant
400C/D/E 6809/10/11T
4.7 additives
450 7006/10
11-125
500 8006/10
The lubricating oil must be replaced as specified on the nameplate or whenever changes on the oil properties
are noticed. The oil viscosity and pH must be checked periodically. The oil level must be checked every day
and kept in the center of the sight glass.
Please contact WEG, when oils with different viscosities are to be used.
8.3. Motor assembly and disassembly
All repair services on motors should be always performed by qualified personnel and in accordance with
the applicable laws and regulations in each country. Always use proper tools and devices for motor
disassembly and assembly.
ENGLISH
Disassembly and assembly services can be carried out only after the motor has been disconnected
from the power supply and is completely stopped.
Dangerous voltages may be present at the motor terminals inside the terminal box since capacitors can
retain electrical charge for long periods of time even when they are not connected directly to a power source or
when space heaters are connected to the motor or when the motor windings are used as space heaters.
Dangerous voltages may be present at the motor terminals when they are driven by frequency inverter even
when they are completely stopped.
Record the installation conditions such as terminal connection diagram, alignment / leveling conditions before
starting the disassembly procedures. These records should be considered for later assembly.
Disassemble the motor carefully without causing scratches on machined surfaces or damaging the threads.
Assemble the motor on a flat surface ensuring a good support base. Footless motors must be fixed/locked on
the base to prevent accidents.
Handle the motor carefully to not damage the insulated components such as windings, insulated rolling
bearings, power cables etc.
Seal elements, such as joint seals and bearing seals should always be replaced when wear or damage is
noticed.
Motors with degree of protection higher than IP55 are supplied with joint and screw seal Loctite 5923 (Henkel)
Clean the components and apply a new coat of Loctite 5923 on the surfaces before assembly.

www.weg.net
8.3.1. Terminal box

Proceed as follows to remove the terminal box cover and to disconnect/connect the power supply cables and
the cables of the accessory devices:
g E
nsure that during the screw removal the terminal box cover does not damage the components installed
inside the terminal box.
g I
f the terminal box cover is fitted with lifting eyebolt, lift the terminal box cover always by its lift eyebolt.
g I
f motors are supplied with terminal blocks, ensure the correct tightening torque on the motor terminals as
specified in Table 8.7.
g E
nsure that the cables do not contact sharp edges.
g E
nsure that the original IP degree of protection is not changed and is maintained as indicate on the motor
nameplate. The power supply cables and the control cables must always be fitted with components (cable
glands, conduits) that meet the applicable standards and regulations of each country.
g E
nsure that the pressure relief device is in perfect operating condition, if provided. The seals in the terminal
box must be in perfect condition for reuse and must be reinstalled correctly to ensure the specified degree of
protection.
g E
nsure the correct tightening torque for the securing bolts of the terminal box cover as specified in Table 8.7.
Table 8.7 - Tightening torque for the securing bolts [Nm]

Screw type and seal M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20
Hex bolt/hex socket bolt
- 4 to 7 7 to 12 16 to 30 30 to 50 55 to 85 120 to 180 230 to 360
(without seal)
Combined slotted screw
- 3 to 5 5 to 10 10 to 18 - - - -
(without seal)
(with seal with metallic - - - 13 to 20 25 to 37 40 to 55 50 to 65 -
stop/cord)
Combined slotted screw
(with flat seal 'and/or - 3 to 5 4 to 8 8 to 15 - - - -
ENGLISH
mettallic stop/cord)
- - - 8 to 15 18 to 30 25 to 40 35 to 50 -
(with flat seal)
Terminal blocks 1 to 1,5 1,5 to 4 3 to 6,5 6 to 9 10 to 18 15,5 to 30 30 to 50 -
Grounding terminals - 3 to 5 5 to 10 10 to 18 30 to 50 55 to 85 120 to 180 -
8.4. Drying the stator winding insulation

Dismantle the motor completely. Remove the end shields, the rotor with the shaft, the fan cover, the fan and the
terminal box before the wound stator with the frame is transferred to the oven for the drying process. Place the
wound stator in the oven heated to max. 120 °C for two hours. For larger motors a longer drying time may be
required. After the drying process has been concluded, allow the stator to cool to room temperature. Measure
the insulation resistance again as described in item 5.4. Repeat the stator drying process if the required
insulation resistance does not meet the values specified in Table 5.3. If the insulation resistance does not
improve despite several drying processes, evaluate the causes of the insulation resistance drop carefully and an
eventual replacement of the motor winding may be required. If in doubt contact WEG.
To prevent electrical shock, discharge the motor terminals immediately before, and after each
measurement. If the motor is equipped with capacitors, these must be discharged before beginning any
repair.

www.weg.net
8.5. Spare parts

When ordering spare parts, always provide complete motor designation, indicating the motor type, the code
number and the serial number, which are stated on the motor nameplate.
Spare parts must always be purchased from WEG authorized Service Centers. The use of non-original spare
parts can cause motor failure, performance drop and void the product warranty.
The spare parts must be stored in a clean, dry and properly ventilated room, with relative air humidity not
exceeding 60%, with ambient temperature between 5 °C and 40 °C, free of dust, vibrations, gases, corrosive
smokes and at constant temperature. The spare parts must be stored in their normal mounting position without
placing other components onto them.
ENGLISH
Figure 8.2 - Exploded view of the components of a W22 motor

www.weg.net
9. Environmental Information
9.1. Packaging
WEG electric motors are supplied in cardboard, plastic or wooden packaging. These materials can be recycled
and must be disposed according to the applicable laws and regulations in each country. All wood used in the
packaging of WEG motors come from the company reforestation program and is not submitted to any chemical
conservation treatment.
9.2. Product
Electric motors consist mainly of ferrous metals (steel plates and cast iron), non ferrous metals (copper and
aluminum) and plastic materials.
In general, electric motors have relatively long service live. However when they must be discarded, WEG
recommends to dismantle the motor, sort the different materials and send them for recycling.
No-recyclable materials should be disposed of at industrial landfills according to the applicable environmental
laws and regulations in each country, or co-processed in cement kilns or incinerated.
The recycling service providers, the disposal in industrial landfills, the waste co-processing or the incineration
process must be properly authorized by the state environment agency to carry out these activities.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
10. Troubleshooting chart x solutions

This troubleshooting chart provides a basic list of problems that may occur during motor operation, possible
causes and recommended corrective actions. In case of doubts, please contact WEG Service Center.
Problem Possible cause Corrective action

Check the control panel and the motor
Power cables are interrupted.
power supply cables.
Blown fuses. Replace blown fuses.
Motor does not start, neither coupled nor
decoupled Correct the motor connection according to
Wrong motor connection.
connection diagram.
Check motor shaft to ensure that it rotates
Locked rotor.
freely.
Load toque is too high during start-up. Do not start the motor on load.
The motor starts at no-load, but fails when
load is applied. It starts very slowly and Check the installation dimensioning
does not reach the rated speed. Too high voltage drop in the power cables (transformer, cable cross section, relays,
circuit breakers, etc.)
Defective transmission component or Check the transmission force, the coupling
defective driven machine. and the alignment.
Align / level the motor with the driven
Misaligned / unleveled base.
machine
Unbalanced components or unbalanced
Balance the machine set again
driven machine
Abnormal / excessive noise Different balancing methods used for motor
Balance the motor again
and coupling balancing (halve key, full key)
Wrong motor direction of rotation Reverse the direction of rotation
Loose bolts Retighten the bolts
Foundation resonance Check the foundation design
ENGLISH
Damaged bearings Replace the bearings

Clean air inlet and outlet and cooling fins
Check the minimum required distance
Insufficient cooling between the fan cover and nearest walls.
See item 7
Check air temperature at inlet
Measure motor current, evaluate motor
Overload
application and if required, reduce the load
Number of starts per hour is too high or the
Reduce the number of starts per hour
load inertia moment is too high
Check the motor power supply voltage.
Motor overheating Power supply voltage too high Power supply voltage must not exceed the
tolerance specified in item 7.2
Check the motor power supply voltage and
the voltage drop. Power supply voltage
Power supply voltage too low
must not exceed the tolerance specified in
item 7.2
Interrupted power supply Check the connection of the power cables
Check for blown fuses, wrong commands,
Voltage unbalance at the motor terminals voltage unbalance in the power line, phase
fault or interrupted power cables
Direction of rotation is not compatible with Check if the direction of rotation matches
the unidirectional fan the rotation arrow indicated on end shield
Excessive grease / oil
Clean the bearing and lubricate it
Grease / oil aging
according to the provided
The used grease / oil does not matches the recommendations
specified one
Bearing overheating
Lubricate the bearing according to the
Lack of grease / oil provided recommendations
Excessive axial or radial forces due to Reduce the belt tension
the belt tension Reduce the load applied to the motor

www.weg.net
11. Warranty Term

WEG Equipamentos Elétricos S/A, Motor Unit, offers warranty against defects in workmanship and materials for
their products for a period of 18 months from the invoice issue date by factory or distributor / dealer, limited to
24 months from date of manufacture. Motors of the HGF Line are covered for a period of 12 months from the
invoice issue date by the factory or distributor / dealer, limited to 18 months from the date of manufacture.
The paragraph above contains the legal warranty periods. If a warranty period is defined in a different way in
the commercial, technical proposal of a particular sale, that will override the time limits set out above.
The periods above are independent of installation date and provided that the following requirements are met:
proper transportation, handling and storage; correct installation in specified environmental conditions free of
aggressive agents; operation within the capacity limits and observation of the Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual; execution of regular preventive maintenance; execution of repairs and/or changes only by
personnel with WEG‘s written authorization; in the occurrence of an anomaly, the product must be available to
the supplier for the minimum period necessary to identify the cause of the anomaly and to repair it properly; the
buyer must immediately notify WEG of any defects occurred and they must be later confirmed as
manufacturing defects by WEG. The warranty does not include assembly and disassembly services at the
buyer’s premises, costs of product transportation, as well as travel, lodging and meals expenses for the
technical assistance staff when requested by the customer. The warranty service will be provided exclusively at
a WEG authorized Technical Assistance or at the plant.
Components, parts and materials whose useful life is usually less than 12 (twelve) months are not covered by
the warranty.
Under no circumstance will warranty services extend the warranty period of the equipment. However, new
warranty equivalent to the original one will be due only to the components repaired or replaced by WEG.
The present warranty is limited to the product supplied. WEG will not be liable for damages to people, third
parties, other equipment and facilities, loss of profits or other incidental or consequential damages.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
12. Ec declaration of conformity
WEG Equipamentos Elétricos S/A

Av. Prefeito Waldemar Grubba, 3000
89256-900 - Jaraguá do Sul - SC - Brazil,
and its authorised representative established in the European Community,

WEGeuro - Industria Electrica SA
Rua Eng Frederico Ulrich, Apartado 6074
4476-908 - Maia - Porto - Portugal
hereby declare that the products:
WEG induction motors and components for using in these motors:
Three-phase
IEC frames 63 to 630
Nema frames 42, 48, 56 and 143 to 9610
……………
Single-phase
IEC frames 63 to 132
Nema frames 42, 48, 56 and 143 to 215
……………
when installed, maintained and used in applications for which they were designed, and in compliance with the relevant
installation standards and manufacturer’s instructions, comply with the requirements of the following European Directives
ENGLISH
and standards where applicable:
Directives:
Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
Regulation (EC) No 640/2009
Directive 2009/125/EC
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC (induction motors are considered inherently benign in terms of electromagnetic compatibility)
Standards:
EN 60034-1/2-1/5/6/7/8/9/11/12/14/30 and 60204-1
From 29/12/2009 on low voltage electric motors are no longer considered under the scope of the current Machinery
Directive 2006/42/EC.
CE marking in: 1996
Milton Oscar Castella

Engineering Director
Jaraguá do Sul, May 31st, 2011

WEG Worldwide Operations
ARGENTINA COLOMBIA MEXICO SINGAPORE
WEG EQUIPAMIENTOS WEG COLOMBIA WEG MEXICO WEG SINGAPORE
ELECTRICOS Bogotá Huehuetoca Singapore
San Francisco - Cordoba Phone: +57 1 416 0166 Phone: +52 55 5321 4231 Phone: +65 68589081
Phone: +54 3564 421 484 info-co@weg.net info-mx@weg.net info-sg@weg.net
info-ar@weg.net www.weg.net/co www.weg.net/mx www.weg.net/sg
www.weg.net/ar
FRANCE VOLTRAN - WEG Group SCANDINAVIA
WEG PINTURAS - Pulverlux WEG FRANCE Tizayuca - Hidalgo WEG SCANDINAVIA
Buenos Aires Saint Quentin Fallavier - Lyon Phone: +52 77 5350 9354 Kungsbacka - Sweden
Phone: +54 11 4299 8000 Phone: +33 4 74 99 11 35 www.voltran.com.mx Phone: +46 300 73 400
tintas@weg.net info-fr@weg.net info-se@weg.net
www.weg.net/fr NETHERLANDS www.weg.net/se
AUSTRALIA WEG NETHERLANDS
WEG AUSTRALIA GERMANY Oldenzaal - Overijssel UK
Victoria WEG GERMANY Phone: +31 541 571 080 WEG ELECTRIC MOTORS U.K.
Phone: +61 3 9765 4600 Kerpen - North Rhine Westphalia info-nl@weg.net Worcestershire - England
info-au@weg.net Phone: +49 2237 9291 0 www.weg.net/nl Phone: +44 1527 513 800
www.weg.net/au info-de@weg.net info-uk@weg.net
www.weg.net/de PERU www.weg.net/uk
AUSTRIA WEG PERU
WATT DRIVE - WEG Group GHANA Lima UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
Markt Piesting - Viena ZEST ELECTRIC GHANA Phone: +51 1 472 3204 WEG MIDDLE EAST
Phone: +43 2633 404 0 WEG Group info-pe@weg.net Dubai
watt@wattdrive.com Accra www.weg.net/pe Phone: +971 4 813 0800
www.wattdrive.com Phone: +233 30 27 664 90 info-ae@weg.net
info@zestghana.com.gh PORTUGAL www.weg.net/ae
BELGIUM www.zestghana.com.gh WEG EURO
WEG BENELUX Maia - Porto USA
Nivelles - Belgium INDIA Phone: +351 22 9477705 WEG ELECTRIC
Phone: +32 67 88 84 20 WEG Electric India info-pt@weg.net Duluth - Georgia
info-be@weg.net Bangalore - Karnataka www.weg.net/pt Phone: +1 678 249 2000
www.weg.net/be Phone: +91 80 4128 2007 info-us@weg.net
info-in@weg.net RUSSIA and CIS www.weg.net/us
BRAZIL www.weg.net/in WEG ELECTRIC CIS
WEG EQUIPAMENTOS ELÉTRICOS Saint Petersburg ELECTRIC MACHINERY
Jaraguá do Sul - Santa Catarina WEG INDUSTRIES INDIA Phone: +7 812 363 2172 WEG Group
Phone: +55 47 3276-4002 Hosur - Tamil Nadu info-ru@weg.net Minneapolis - Minnesota
info-br@weg.net Phone: +91 4344 301 501 www.weg.net/ru Phone: +1 612 378 8000
www.weg.net/br info-in@weg.net www.electricmachinery.com
www.weg.net/in SOUTH AFRICA
CHILE ZEST ELECTRIC MOTORS VENEZUELA
WEG CHILE ITALY WEG Group WEG INDUSTRIAS VENEZUELA
Santiago WEG ITALIA Johannesburg Valencia - Carabobo
Phone: +56 2 784 8900 Cinisello Balsamo - Milano Phone: +27 11 723 6000 Phone: +58 241 821 0582
info-cl@weg.net Phone: +39 02 6129 3535 info@zest.co.za info-ve@weg.net
www.weg.net/cl info-it@weg.net www.zest.co.za www.weg.net/ve
www.weg.net/it
CHINA SPAIN
WEG NANTONG JAPAN WEG IBERIA
Nantong - Jiangsu WEG ELECTRIC MOTORS Madrid
Phone: +86 0513 8598 9333 JAPAN Phone: +34 91 655 30 08
info-cn@weg.net Yokohama City - Kanagawa info-es@weg.net
www.weg.net/cn Phone: +81 45 550 3030 www.weg.net/es
info-jp@weg.net
www.weg.net/jp
The values shown are subject to change without prior notice.
For those countries where there is not a WEG own operation, find our local distributor at www.weg.net.
Cod: 50033244 | Rev: 05 | Date (m/y): 04/2013
Grupo WEG - Motors Business Unit

Jaraguá do Sul - SC - Brazil
Phone: +55 47 3276 4000
motores@weg.net
www.weg.net
ELECTRO ADDA SPA
COSTRUZIONI ELETTROMECCANICHE
ISTRUZIONI D’USO E
MANUTENZIONE
DEI MOTORI ASINCRONI
OPERATING AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MOTORS
BETRIEBS-UND
WARTUNGSANLEITUNG
FÜR ASYNCHRONMOTOREN
MODES D’EMPLOI
ET ENTRETIEN
POUR MOTEURS ASYNCHRONES
INSTRUCCIONES PARA
EMPLEO Y MANUTENCIÓN DE
LOS MOTORES ASÍNCRONOS
MACCHINE ELETTRICHE ROTANTI • ELECTRIC ROTARY
MACHINES • ROTIERENDE ELEKTRISCHE DREH-
MASCHINEN • MACHINES ÉLECTRIQUES TOURNANTES
• MAQUINAS ELÉCTRICAS ROTATORIAS
Motori asincroni trifasi con rotore a gabbia. Costruzione chiusa.
1 Ventilazione esterna. Grandezze 56 ÷ 560. Potenze 0,06 ÷ 1000 kW.

Asynchronous three-phase motors with squirrel cage rotor. Enclosed
construction. External ventilation. Sizes 56 to 560. Power 0,06 to 1000
kW.
Drehstrom-Asynchronmotoren mit Käfigläufer. Geschlossene
Ausführung. Oberflächenkühlung. Baugrössen 56 bis 560. Leistung 0,06 ÷ 1000 kW.
Moteurs asynchrones triphasés avec rotor à cage. Construction fermée.
Ventilation extérieure. Hauter d’axe 56 ÷ 560. Puissances 0,06 ÷ 1000 kW.
Motores asíncronos trifásicos con rotor en jaula. Construcción cerrada. Ventilación
exterior. Tamaños 56 ÷ 560. Potencias 0,06 ÷ 1000 kW.
ca
2 Motori asincroni trifasi autofrenanti. Costruzione chiusa. Ventilazione
esterna. Con freno elettromagnetico in corrente alternata. Grandezze 63
÷ 200. Potenze 0,15 ÷ 37 kW.
Asynchronous three-phase brake motors. Enclosed construction.
External ventilation. With alternate current electromagnetic brake. Size
63 to 200. Power 0,15 to 37 kW.
Drehstrom-Asynchronmotoren mit angebauter Bremse. Geschlossene Ausführung.
Oberflächenkühlung. Mit elektromagnetischer Drehstrom-Federdruck-Scheibenbremse.
Baugrössen 63 bis 200. Leistung 0,15 bis 37 kW.
Moteurs asynchrones triphasés avec frein. Construction fermée. Ventilation extérieure.
Frein électromagnétique en courant alternatif. Hauter d’axe 63 ÷ 200. Puissances 0,15 ÷ 37
kW.
Motores asíncronos trifásicos autofrenantes. Construcción cerrada. Ventilación exterior.
Con freno electromagnético en corriente alterna.Tamaños 63 ÷ 200. Potencias 0,15 ÷ 37
kW.
cc Motori asincroni trifasi autofrenanti. Costruzione chiusa. Ventilazione
2 esterna. Con freno elettromagnetico in corrente continua. Grandezze 63

÷ 160. Potenze 0,15 ÷ 15 kW.
External ventilation. With direct current electromagnetic brake. Sizes 63
to 160. Power 0,15 to 15 kW.
Oberflächenkühlung. Mit elektromagnetischer Gleichstrom-Einflächen-Scheibenbremse.
Baugrössen 63 bis 160. Leistung 0,15 bis 15 kW.
2 Moteurs asynchrones triphasés avec frein. Construction fermée. Ventilation extérieure.
Frein électromagnétique en courant continu. Hauteur d’axe 63 ÷ 160. Puissances
0,15 ÷ 15 kW.
Con freno electromagnético en corriente continua.Tamaños 63 ÷ 160. Potencias 0,15 ÷ 15
kW.
cch
2 Motori asincroni trifasi autofrenanti. Costruzione chiusa.
Ventilazione esterna. Con freno elettromagnetico in corrente continua
ad alta coppia. Grandezze 63 ÷ 112 – Potenze 0,15 ÷ 5,5 kW.
External ventilation. With direct current electromagnetic brake with
high torque. Sizes 63 to 112 – Power 0.,5 to 5,5 kW.
Oberflächenkühlung. Mit elektromagnetischer Gleichstrom-Einflächen-Scheibenbremse mit
höherem Bremsmoment. Baugrössen 63 bis 112 - Leistung 0,15 bis 5,5 kW.
Moteurs asynchrones triphasées avec frein. Construction fermée. Ventilation extérieure.
Frein électromagnétique en courant continu avec couple élevé. Hauteur d’axe 63 ÷ 112 -
Puissances 0,15 ÷ 5,5 kW.
Con freno electromagnético en corriente continua con alta torsion. Tamaños 63 ÷ 112 -
Potencias 0,15 ÷ 5,5 kW.
ccl Motori asincroni trifasi autofrenanti. Costruzione chiusa. Ventilazione
2 esterna. Con freno elettromagnetico in corrente continua ad alta coppia

e bassa rumorosità. Grandezze 63 ÷ 180 - Potenze 0,18 ÷ 25 kW.
External ventilation. With direct current electromagnetic brake with high
torque and low noise execution. Sizes 63 to 180 - Power 0,18 to 25 kW.
Oberflächenkühlung. Mit elektromagnetischer Gleichstrom-Einflächen-Scheibenbremse mit
höherem Bremsmoment und geräuscharmer Ausführung. Baugrössen 63 bis 180 - Leistung
0,18 bis 25 kW.
Moteurs asynchrones triphasés avec frein. Construction fermée. Ventilation extérieure.
Frein électromagnétique en courant continu avec couple élevé et bruit réduit. Hauteur d’axe
63 ÷ 180 - Puissances 0,18 ÷ 25 kW.
Con freno electromagnético en corriente continua con alta torsión y ruido reducido.
Tamaños 63 ÷ 180 - Potencias 0,18 ÷ 25 kW.
Motori asincroni monofasi con rotore a gabbia. Costruzione chiusa.

Ventilazione esterna. Grandezze 56 ÷ 112. Potenze 0,06 ÷ 4 kW.
3 Asynchronous single-phase motors with squirrel cage rotor.

Enclosed construction. External ventilation. Sizes 56 to 112 - Power
0,06 to 4 kW.
Einphasen-Wechselstrommotoren mit Käfigläufer. Geschlossene
Ausführung. Oberflächenkühlung. Baugrössen 56 bis 112 - Leistung 0,06 bis 4 kW.
Moteurs asynchrones monophasés avec rotor à cage. Construction fermée. Ventilation
extérieure. Hauteur d’axe 56 ÷ 112 - Puissances 0,06 ÷ 4 kW.
Motores asíncronos monofásicos con rotor en jaula. Construcción cerrada. Ventilación
exterior. Tamaños 56 ÷ 112 - Potencias 0,06 ÷ 4 kW.
Motori asincroni trifasi con rotore a gabbia antideflagranti.
Costruzione chiusa. Ventilazione esterna. Serie PE-EEx d.
4 Grandezze 71 ÷ 200 - Potenze 0,37 ÷ 37 kW.

Explosion-proof asynchronous three-phase motors with squirrel
cage rotor. Enclosed construction. External ventilation. Series PE-
EEx d. Sizes 71 to 200 - Power 0,37 to 37 kW.
Drehstrom-Asynchronmotoren mit Käfigläufer - Explosionsgeschützt, druckfeste
Kapselung. Geschlossene Ausführung. Oberflächenkühlung. Typenreihe PE-EEx d.
Baugrössen 71 bis 200 - Leistung 0,37 bis 37 kW.
Moteurs asynchrones triphasés avec rotor à cage antidéflagrants. Construction
fermée. Ventilation extérieure. Série PE-EEx d. Hauteur d’axe 71 ÷ 200 - Puissances 0,37 ÷
37 kW.
Motores asíncronos trifásicos con rotor en jaula antideflagrantes. Construcción
cerrada. Ventilación exterior. Serie PE-EEx d. Tamaños 71 ÷ 200 - Potencias 0,37 ÷ 37 kW.
Motori asincroni trifasi con rotore avvolto. Costruzione chiusa.
5 Ventilazione esterna. Grandezze 100 ÷ 500 - Potenze 0,75 ÷ 530 kW.

Asynchronous three-phase motors with wound rotor. Enclosed
construction. External ventilation. Sizes 100 to 500 - Power 0,75 to
530 kW.
Drehstrom-Schleifringläufermotoren. Geschlossene Ausführung.
Oberflächenkühlung. Baugrössen 100 bis 500 - Leistung 0,75 bis 530 kW.
Moteurs asynchrones triphasés avec rotor bobiné. Construction fermée. Ventilation
extérieure. Hauteur d’axe 100 ÷ 500 - Puissances 0,75 ÷ 530 kW.
Motores asíncronos trifásicos con rotor enrollando. Construcción cerrada. Ventilación
exterior. Tamaños 100 ÷ 500 - Potencias 0,75 ÷ 530 kW.
MACCHINE AD ALTA FREQUENZA
6 6* Convertitori di frequenza asincroni trifasi. Costruzione chiusa.

Ventilazione esterna. Grandezze 100 ÷ 355 - Potenze 0,5 ÷ 110 kVA.
6◊ Motori ad Alta Frequenza. Costruzione chiusa. Costruzione
chiusa e ventilata.
HIGH-FREQUENCY MACHINES
6* Asynchronous three-phase frequency converters. Enclosed construction. External
ventilation. Sizes 100 to 355 - Power 0,5 to 110 kVA.
6◊ High-frequency motors. Enclosed construction. Enclosed and ventilated construction.
HOCHFREQUENZMASCHINEN.
6* Rotierende Drehstrom-Frequenzumformer. Geschlossene Ausführung.
Oberflächenkühlung. Baugrössen 100 bis 355 - Leistung 0,5 bis 110 kVA.
6◊ Hochfrequenzmotoren. Geschlossene Ausführung. Geschlossene Ausführung mit
Oberflächenkühlung.
MACHINES À HAUTE FRÉQUENCE
6* Convertisseurs de fréquences asynchrones triphasés. Construction fermée.
Ventilation extérieure. Hauteur d’axe 100 ÷ 355 - Puissances 0,5 ÷ 110 kVA.
◊
6 Moteurs à haute fréquence. Construction fermée. Construction fermée et avec
ventilation.
4
MÁQUINAS DE ALTA FRECUENCIA
6* Convertidores de frecuencia asíncronos trifásicos. Construcción cerrada. Ventilación
exterior. Tamaños 100 ÷ 355 - Potencias 0,5 ÷ 110kVA.
◊

6 Motores de alta frecuencia. Construcción cerrada. Construcción cerrada y con

ventilación.
a Motori asincroni trifasi per seghe circolari. Costruzione chiusa.
7 Ventilazione esterna. Grandezze 71 ÷ 125 - Potenze 0,75 ÷ 25,8 kW.

Asynchronous three-phase motors for circular saws. Enclosed
construction. External ventilation. Sizes 71 to 125 - Power 0,75 to 25,8
kW.
Drehstrom-Flachmotoren (Spezialkreissägemotoren) in der Holz-Kunstoff und
Metallverarbeitung. Geschlossene Ausführung. Oberflächenkühlung. Baugrössen 71 bis
125 - Leistung 0,75 bis 25,8 kW.
Moteurs asynchrones triphasés pour scies circulaires. Construction fermée. Ventilation
extérieure. Hauteur d’axe 71 ÷ 125 - Puissances 0,75 ÷ 25,8 kW.
Motores asíncronos trifásicos para sierras circulares. Construcción cerrada. Ventilación
exterior. Tamaños 71 ÷ 125 - Potencias 0,75 ÷ 25,8 kW.
b Motori asincroni trifasi con rotore a gabbia antishock. Costruzione
7 chiusa. Ventilazione esterna. Esecuzione speciale antishock a norme

M.M.I. Grandezze 71 ÷ 355 - Potenze 0,15 ÷ 250 kW.
Asynchronous three-phase motors with shock-free cage motor.
Enclosed construction. External ventilation. Special shock-free design
to Italian Navy standards. Sizes 71 to 355 - Power 0,15 to 250 kW.
Drehstrom-Asynchronmotoren mit Käfigläufer, schockfest. Geschlossene Ausführung.
Oberflächenkühlung. Schockfeste Spezialausführung nach den Normen der italienischen
Kriegsmarine M.M.I. Baugrössen 71 bis 355 - Leistung 0,15 bis 250 kW.
Moteurs asynchrones triphasés avec rotor à cage antishock. Construction fermée.
Ventilation extérieure. Exécution spéciale antishock suivant normes M.M.I. Hauteur d’axe
71 ÷ 355 - Puissances 0,15 ÷ 250 kW.
Motores asíncronos trifásicos con rotor en jaula antishock. Construcción cerrada.
Ventilación exterior. Ejecución especial antishock según normas M.M.I. Tamaños 71 ÷ 355 -
Potencias 0,15 ÷ 250 kW.
c Altre costruzioni: Motori mandrino. Variatori di tensione. Rulli
7 ruotanti. Elettroventilatori. Convertitori statici di frequenza.

Other constructions: Spindle motors. Voltage changers. Rotary
rollers. Electric fans. Frequency inverters.
Andere Anfertigungen: Spindelmotoren.
Trommelmotoren/Aussenläufer. Ventilatoren. Statische Frequenzumrichter.
Spannungsregler.
Autres constructions: Moteurs mandrin. Variateurs de tension. Rouleaux rotatifs.

Electroventilateurs. Convertisseurs de fréquence statiques.
Otras construcciones: Motores mandril. Variadores de tensión. Rodillos giratorios.
Electroventiladores. Convertidores de frecuencia estáticos.
MOTORI ELETTRICI ASINCRONI TRIFASI
Istruzioni d’esercizio e manutenzione. Le condotta e su tendi-cinghia per poter
presenti istruzioni hanno lo scopo di regolare la tensione delle cinghie. Tenere
indicare agli installatori ed agli utilizzatori ben presente che una tensione eccessiva
le corrette condizioni d’impiego e di è nociva alla durata dei cuscinetti e, nei
manutenzione di motori asincroni trifasi casi più gravi, può provocare la rottura
chiusi con ventilazione esterna e rotore a dell’albero.
gabbia. Equilibratura e montaggio degli accoppia-
Come si ricevono e si immagazzinano i menti e delle pulegge. Salvo diversa indi-
motori. Il motore esce dalla fabbrica dopo cazione, il rotore è equilibrato dinamica-
controlli di qualità durante il ciclo di mente con mezza chiavetta nell’estremo
produzione e un collaudo finale per libero dell’albero.
accertarne la rispondenza alle specifiche I massimi livelli di vibrazione sono:
di progetto, pronto per l’installazione. Al
momento della ricezione si raccomanda Valore efficace
Grandezza
di esaminare il motore per verificare che livello di vibrazione
motore
non abbia subito danni durante il mm/s a 600-3600 g/m
trasporto. Se il motore non viene posto 80 – 132 1,8
immediatamente in servizio dovrà essere 160 – 225 2,8
immagazzinato in un luogo coperto,
pulito, privo di umidità e vibrazioni. 250 – 400 4,5
Installazione. Installare il motore in un
locale ventilato, evitando che le vicinanze Bilanciare accuratamente l’organo di tra-
di pareti o di altre macchine impedisca la smissione con mezza chiavetta prima del
ventilazione. Prevedere la possibilità di montaggio.
ispezioni e manutenzioni durante il Il montaggio degli accoppiamenti e delle
funzionamento. La fondazione del motore pulegge deve essere fatto con particolari
deve essere piana, robusta in modo precauzioni al fine di evitare urti che
d’assorbire le vibrazioni, sufficientemente possano danneggiare i cuscinetti.
rigida da mantenere l’allineamento. Prova di isolamento. Prima della messa
Allineamento. Il motore deve essere in servizio e dopo lunghi periodi di
sempre ben allineato, soprattutto se inattività o immagazzinamento è
accoppiato direttamente alla macchina consigliabile la misura della resistenza
condotta. In caso di vibrazioni o guasti d’isolamento dell’avvolgimento che dovrà
dei cuscinetti controllare immediatamente essere maggiore di 5 M Ω con
l’allineamento che potrebbe essere temperatura ambiente di 25 ° C.
disassato. Se non si riscontra il valore indicato
Accoppiamenti. La trasmissione di l’avvolgimento è umido e lo si dovrà
potenza alla macchina operatrice può essiccare ricorrendo ad una ditta
avvenire con accoppiamento diretto o con specializzata.
cinghie di trasmissione. Nel caso di Collegamento elettrico. Per il collegamen-
accoppiamento diretto si deve usare un to elettrico rispettare le norme di sicurez-
giunto elastico o un giunto flessibile, che za vigenti e verificare che i dati di targa
eviti la trasmissione di eventuali spinte siano conformi alle caratteristiche del
assiali ai cuscinetti. Nel caso di circuito a cui il motore deve essere
accoppiamento con cinghie di collegato.
trasmissione installare il motore con Eseguire il collegamento secondo gli
6
l’albero parallelo a quello della macchina schemi 1 2 3 4 5
Collegamento a terra. All’interno della trasformatore, resistenze o reattanze
scatola morsetti o vicino ad essa è collo- statoriche. In quel modo si può avere una
cato in posizione visibile il morsetto per il riduzione della curva di corrente
collegamento a terra che deve essere linearmente con la tensione.
fatto tramite un filo di rame di sezione Manutenzione. Il motore e gli eventuali
adeguata secondo le norme vigenti. accessori devono essere sempre tenuti
Senso di rotazione. I motori di serie puliti in modo che non presentino tracce
posso funzionare indifferentemente nei di polvere, sporcizia, olio o altre impurità.
due sensi di rotazione. Se si collega la E’ buona regola verificare periodicamente
rete ai morsetti U1 V1 W1 e se la che il motore funzioni senza vibrazioni o
sequenza di fase della rete è 1,2,3, il rumori anomali, che la tensione di
motore gira in senso orario guardando eventuali cinghie di trasmissione sia
dal lato accoppiamento. corretta, che l’ingresso del circuito di
Si può invertire il senso di rotazione ventilazione non sia ostruito con
scambiando tra loro due qualsiasi dei tre possibilità di surriscaldamento degli
conduttori collegati al motore. avvolgimenti.
Protezioni elettriche. I motori devono Cuscinetti – Lubrificazione. I motori con
essere protetti contro gli effetti dei corto cuscinetti stagni autolubrificati a vita non
circuiti, dei sovraccarichi che si verificano richiedono lubrificazione. La durata dei
in esercizio, della marcia monofase cuscinetti varia dai 3 ai 5 anni secondo i
installando a monte un interruttore carichi assiali e radiali applicati all’albero
opportunamente dimensionato provvisto e secondo le condizioni ambientali di
di relè termico tarato per la corrente impiego del motore.
nominale di targa. I motori previsti con il dispositivo di
Per aumentare la sicurezza di esercizio in lubrificazione dei cuscinetti devono
caso di servizi particolarmente gravosi si essere lubrificati con il motore in moto
possono installare, a richiesta, negli secondo gli intervalli di lubrificazione, il
avvolgimenti sensori termici: Klixon, tipo di grasso e la quantità indicati nella
Termistori, Termorilevatori. tabella 7.
Avviamento. I motori asincroni trifasi con Gli intervalli di lubrificazione si riferiscono
rotore a gabbia possono nella maggioran- ad un motore installato in un ambiente
za dei casi essere messi in esercizio con normale. Se le condizioni ambientali sono
avviamento diretto, verificando l’impianto gravose per la presenza di polvere,
in relazione alla corrente assorbita allo acqua, elevate temperature, gli intervalli
spunto. L’avviamento stella-triangolo si devono essere ridotti.
deve impiegare quando si richiedono Nella tabella 6 sono indicati i cuscinetti
coppie e correnti di spunto molto basse, montati sui motori di serie normali. Alle
nell’ordine del 25%-30% dei valori che si pagine 19 – 20 – 21 sono indicate le parti
hanno con l’inserzione diretta. di ricambio per le varie tipologie di motori
La coppia resistente durante l’avviamento normali di serie.
deve essere sufficientemente minore Per altri problemi relativi all’esercizio e
della coppia motrice. alla manutenzione delle macchine
La commutazione da stella a triangolo elettriche rivolgersi al Servizio Tecnico
deve avvenire in prossimità della velocità Electro Adda.
nominale. Non verificandosi queste
condizioni l’avviamento può essere
effettuato riducendo la tensione ai
morsetti del motore mediante
ASYNCHRONOUS THREE-PHASE ELECTRIC MOTORS
Operating and maintenance instructions. An excessive belt tension might cause the
Object of these instructions is to give the bearings to wear out quickly and, in most
installers and users correct operating and serious cases, the shaft to break.
maintenance conditions concerning
asynchronous three-phase motors with Balancing and installation of couplings
enclosed construction, external ventilation and pulleys. Any different indications
and squirrel cage rotor. excepted, the rotor is dynamically balanced
by a half-key in the free shaft end.
Receipt and storage of motors. Every The maximum levels of vibration are as
motor is despatched from the factory ready follows:
for installation, after quality control during
manufacture as well as a final test, that is to Vibration level
verify if the motor is in accordance with all Motor in mm/s, rms value at
required standards. Size 600-3600 rpm
On receipt it is recommended to inspect it to 80 – 132 1,8
find out whether it has got damages during
transportation. 160 – 225 2,8
Should the motor not be installed
immediately, it should be kept indoor, in a 250 – 400 4,5
clean, dry and vibrationless place.
Carefully balance the transmission by a half-
Installation. Set up the motor in a well key before fitting.
cooled place. Couplings and pulleys are to be fitted with
Care should be taken to assure that cooling greatest care, in order to avoid any impacts
is not hindered by any walls or other which may damage the bearings.
machines next to it.
The possibility of inspections and Insulation test. Before starting the motor
maintenance when operating is to be and after long periods of inactivity or storage,
considered. The motor foundation should be the insulation resistance of the winding is to
even, solid in order to absorb vibrations, and be measured that should be higher than 5 M
sufficiently rigid in order to keep alignment. Ω at 25° C ambient temperature.
If this value cannot be obtained, the winding
Alignment. The motor must always be is damp and must be dried by a skilled
carefully aligned, particularly when coupled company.
direct to the driven machine.
Should any vibrations or bearing failures be Electric connection. As to the electric
observed, check the alignment immediately, connection, the security ruling standards are
as it might be faulty. to be complied with. Check that data on the
plate are according to the circuit features, to
Couplings. Output transmission to the which the motor is to be connected.
driven machine may be provided by either Connect according to wiring diagrams 1 2 3 4
direct coupling or by driving belts. 5.
In case of a direct coupling, a flexible
coupling is to be used, which avoids any Earthing. Inside the terminal box or next to
transmission of axial thrusts on the bearings. it, it is connected, in a visible position, a
In case of coupling by driving belts, set up terminal for earthing the motor, this operation
the motor with shaft parallel to that of the should be done by means of a copper lead
driven machine and on belt tensioning slides, with adequate section according to the ruling
in order to adjust belt tension. standards.
8
Direction of rotation. Standard motors can anomalous noises, the tension of possible
indifferently run in both rotation directions. driving belts is correct, the inlet of the
If terminals U1 V1 W1 are connected to the ventilation circuit is not obstructed causing
mains and if the connecting phase sequence overheating of the windings.
of the mains is 1,2,3, the motor runs
clockwise, if seen from the driving end. Bearings - Lubrication. Motors with staunch
The rotation direction can by reversed by bearings, that are self-lubricating for life, do
exchanging any two of three leads which are not require any lubrication. Bearings life vary
connected to the motor. from 3 up to 5 years according to the axial
and radial loads that are charged on the
Electric protections. Motors must be shaft and to the enviromental conditions the
protected against any consequences of short motor is used in.
circuits, of operating overloading, of single- Motors provided with the bearings lubrication
phase running, by installing before them a device are to be lubricated while running
suitably sized switch that must be provided according to the lubricating intervals, the
with a temperature relay and calibrated for grease type and quality as per table 7.
the rated current. The lubricating intervals apply to a motor set
In order to increase the operating security in up in normal surrounding.
case of particularly heavy duties, If the environmental conditions are
temperature sensors may be installed in the particularly severe owing to dust, water, high
windings, upon request: Klixon, Thermistors, temperatures, the intervals are to be
Heating measuring elements. reduced.
Table 6 shows bearings mounted on normal
Starting the motor. In the majority, standard motor types.
asynchronous three-phase motors with Pages 19-20-21 show the spare parts for the
squirrel cage rotor can be operated with different normal standard motor types.
direct starting, checking the plant according Should problems in connection with
to the absorbed current at the start. operating and maintanance of the electric
Star-delta connection is to be used when machines arise, please contact Electro Adda
very low starting torques and currents are Engineering Service.
required, that is 25%-30% of the values it
would have in case of direct-on-line starting.
When starting the stall torque is to be
sufficiently lower than the starting torque.
The commutation from star to delta is to be
converted approaching the rated speed.
Should such conditions not take place,
starting is to be done by reducing the voltage
on the motor terminals by transformer,
resistors or stator reactors.
In this way a reduction of the torque curve by
the voltage square and of the current curve
in accordance with the voltage can be
obtained.
Maintenance. The motor as well as the

possible accessories should always be kept
clean, free of dust traces, dirt, oil or other
grime.
As a good rule it is recommended to
periodically check whether the motor
operates without any vibrations or
DREHSTROM-ASYNCHRONMOTOREN MIT KÄFIGLÄUFER
Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung. Die antreibende Welle und angetriebene Welle
folgenden Anweisungen sollen Monteuren und absolut parallel, also genau fluchtend,
Benutzern rotierender elektrischer Maschinen ausgerichtet werden. Der Riemenzug muß über
wichtige Hinweise zu Drehstrom-Asynchron- Spannrollen kontrolliert werden. Man sollte
motoren mit Käfigläufer und Oberflächenkühlung bedenken, daß eine zu hohe Riemenspannung
geben. und im schlimmsten Fall zu einem Wellenbruch
Eingang und Lagerung der Motoren. Die führen können.
Motoren verlassen die Produktionsstätte nach Auswuchtung und Befestiung der Kupplungs-
eingehenden Qualitätskontrollen während des und Riemenscheibe. Falls keine anders-
Fertigungsprozesses und einer sorgfältigen lautenden Angaben gemacht werden, so ist das
Endkontrolle, welche die Übereinstimmung der freie Wellenende des Motors mit halber Paßfeder
Motoren mit der geforderten (elektrischen und dynamisch ausgewuchtet. Die maximal
mechanischen) Auslegung gewährleisten. Die zulässigen Schwingungswerte sind folgende:
Motoren werden vom Herstellerwerk Motorbaugröße Effektiver Wert des
montagefertig versandt. Es empfiehlt sich, die Schwingungspegels
Motoren sofort nach ihrem Eingang auf eventuell mm/s bei 600-3600 1/min
während des Trasportes entstandene Schäden 80 – 132 1,8
zu untersuchen. Wird der Motor nicht sofort
montiert und in Betrieb genommen, sollte er in 160 – 225 2,8
einem geschlossenen und sauberen Lagerraum
aufbewahrt werden. Man vermeide größere 250 – 400 4,5
Temperaturunterschiede und die damit
verbundene Bildung von Feuchtigkeit sowie das
Auftreten von Schwingungen und Man achte darauf, daß vor der Montage das Teil,
Erschütterungen in der Nähe der Motoren. welches die Kraft überträgt, sehr sorgfältig mit
Aufstellung. Der Motor ist in einem gut halber Paßfeder ausgerichtet wird. Das
belüfteten Raum aufzustellen. Man achte darauf, Aufziehen der Kupplungs- und Riemenscheibe
daß in der Nähe befindliche Mauern oder andere sollte mit der notwendigen Sorgfalt und Vorsicht
Maschinen die Luftzufuhr für den Motor nicht geschehen, um Schläge und Unwuchten zu
behindern. Alle Bedienungsöffnungen und vermeiden, welche leicht zu Lagerschäden
Schmierstellen müssen für Kontroll- und führen können.
Wartungszwecke während des Betriebes leicht Messung des Isolationswiderstandes. Als
zugänglich sein. Die Fundamentierung des letzte Arbeit vor der Inbetriebnahme einer neuen
Motors muß eben, robust und so dimensioniert Maschine oder nach längeren Stillstands- oder
sein, daß sie eventuell auftretende Lagerzeiten empfiehlt es sich, den
Schwingungen aufnehmen kann. Aber sie muß Isolationswiderstand der Wicklungen zu
auch starr und hart genug sein, um eine genaue überprüfen. Dieser sollte bei einer
Ausrichtung zu gewährleisten. Umgebungstemperatur von 25° C höher als 5
Ausrichtung des Motors. Der Motor muß immer Megaohm sein. Ergibt sich bei der Messung nicht
genau ausgerichtet sein; ganz besonders in den der angegebene Wert, liegt der Grund darin, daß
Fällen, in denen er direkt an die anzutreibende sich Feuchtigkeit in den Wicklungen befindet.
Maschine angekuppelt wird. Treten anormale Das Trocknen der Wicklungen sollte in einer
Schwingungen oder Lagerschäden auf, sollte dafür eingerichteten kompetenten Werkstatt
unbedingt sofort die Ausrichtung von Motorwelle ausgeführt werden.
zu angetriebener Riemenscheibe kontrolliert Elektrische Schaltung der Motoren. Die
werden. Es könnte sein, daß sie nicht mehr elektrische Schaltung der Motoren sollte gemäß
fluchten. den geltenden Sicherheitsbestimmungen
Kraftübertragung. Die Kraftübertragung erfolgen. Man achte darauf, daß die
zwischen Motor und Arbeitsmaschine kann über Leistungsdaten auf dem Typenschild mit den
Direktkupplung oder über Riementrieb erfolgen. elektrischen Daten des Stromnetzes, an dem der
Bei Direktkupplung sollte entweder eine Motor angeschlossen wird, übereinstimmen. Man
elastische oder eine flexible Kupplung verwendet führe den Anschluß gemäß den Schaltplänen 1 2
werden, um die Übertragung eventuell 3 4 5 aus.
auftretender axialer Kräfte auf die Lager zu Anschluß von Schutz- und Erdungsleitern. Im
verhindern. Bei Riemenkupplung über Innern des Klemmenkastens oder in seiner Nähe
Treibriemen muß darauf geachtet werden, daß am Gehäuse befindet sich - gut sichtbar - die
10
Anschlußklemme für den Erdungsleiter. Die einwandfreien Betrieb stören könnten. Zur
Erdung sollte in Übereinstimmung mit den Wartung gehört z. B. die Kontrolle daß der Motor
geltenden Vorschriften mit einem entsprechend ohne starke Schwingungen oder anomale
dimensionierten Kupferkabel ausgefürt werden. Geräusschentwicklung funktioniert, daß die
Drehrichtung. Die Motoren der Serien- Zugspannung des möglicherweise eingesetzten
produktion können problemlos in beiden Treibriemens korrekt eingestellt ist und auch daß
Drehrichtungen betrieben werden. Schließt man Ansaug- und Ausblasöffnungen für die
das Stromnetz an die Klemmen U1, V1 und W1 Kühlluftzufuhr nicht zugestellt oder verengt sind,
an und ist die Phasensequenz des Netzes gleich da dies zu einer unnötig hohen Wärmebildung in
1,2,3, dreht sich der Motor im Uhrzeigersinn (von den Wicklungen führen könnte.
der Antriebsseite aus gesehen). Die Drehrichtung Lagerung - Lagerschmierung. Bei Motoren, die
kann umgekehrt werden, indem man zwei mit Lagern mit Fettdauerschmierung ausgestattet
beliebige der drei anderen am Motor ange- sind, ist keine Nachschmierung erforderlich. Die
schlossenen Kabel untereinander tauscht. Lebensdauer beträgt erfahrungsgemäß drei bis
Motorschutzeinrichtungen. Die Motoren fünf Jahre in Abhängigkeit von den auf die Welle
müssen gegen Schäden geschützt werden wie einwirkenden Axial- und Radialkräften und den
sie durch Kurzschlüsse, Überlastbetrieb oder Umgebungs- und Betriebsbedingungen des
einphasigen Lauf des Motors auftreten können, Motors. Bei Motoren mit Nachschmiereinrichtung
indem ausreichend dimensionierte Motor- müssen die Lager während des Betriebes des
schutzschalter oder Schütze mit thermischem Motors nachgeschmiert werden.
Überstromrelais zwischengeschaltet werden. Das Nachschmierintervalle, Fettsorte und Fettqualität
thermische Überstromrelais ist für den auf dem können aus der Tabelle 7 entnommen werden.
Typenschild des Motors angegebenen Die Nachschmierfristen beziehen sich auf
Nennstrom ausgelegt. Bei besonderen Motoren, die unter normalen Betriebs-
Anwendungsfällen kann die Betriebssicherheit bedingungen laufen. Bei besonders ungünstigen
durch zusätzlich montierte Wärmeschutzschalter Betriebsbedingungen, wie z. B. starker
oder -fühler (Bimetallfühler, Kaltleiter, usw.) Staubanfall, hohe Luftfeuchtigkeit oder extrem
erhöht werden (auf Anfrage). hohe Umgebungstemperaturen, sind die
Anlauf von Käfigläufermotoren. In den meisten Nachschmierintervalle zu verkürzen. Tabelle 6
Fällen empfiehlt sich für Drehstrom- zeigt die bei normalen Serienmotoren
Asynchronmotoren mit Käfigläufer das direkte verwendeten Lagertypen. Auf Seiten 19, 20 und
Einschalten als Anlaßverfahren. Die Anlage sollte 21 sind die Ersatzteile für die verschiedenen
in diesem Fall leistungsfähig genug sein, um den Standardmotoren der Serienproduktion
hohen Anlaufstrom zu vertragen. Auf den Stern- zusammengestellt. Sollten Sie weitere
Dreieck-Anlauf wird dann zurückgegriffen, wenn spezifische Fragen zum Betrieb und zur Wartung
sehr niedrige Anlaufströme und -momente unserer Elektromotoren haben, empfehlen wir,
erforderlich sind. Die Werte von Anlaufstrom und sich an unser Technisches Büro zu wenden.
Anlaufmoment sind im Vergleich zu den Werten
bei der direkten Einschaltung etwa um 25%-30%
reduziert. Das Widerstandsmoment muß
während des Anschaltens entsprechend
niedriger als das Drehmoment sein. Die
Umschaltung von der Stern- in die Dreieck-
Schaltung sollte in der Nähe der Nenndrehzahl
erfolgen. Liegen diese Bedingungen nicht vor,
kann der Motor durch Einsatz von
Anlaßtransformatoren, Vorschaltwiderständen
oder Statorwiderständen, welche die Spannung
an den Anschlußklemmen herabsetzen,
angelassen werden. So erreicht man eine
Reduzierung des Drehmoments mit dem Quadrat
der Spannung und des Nennstroms linear mit der
Spannung.
Wartung. Der Elektromotor und eventuell
vorhandene Zubehörteile sollten immer sauber
gehalten werden, sodaß weder Staub, Schmutz,
Öl oder sonstige Verunreinigungen den
MOTEURS ASYNCHRONES ELECTRIQUES TRIPHASES
Modes d’emploi et entretien. L’object de tendeurs de courroies afin de pouvoir régler
ces instructions est d’indiquer aux la tension des courroies.
installateurs et aux utilisateurs les correctes Il faut tenir compte qu’une tension excessive
conditions d’emploi et d’entretien concernant peut occasionner une détérioration rapide
moteurs asynchrones triphasés avec des roulements et, dans un cas extrème, la
construction fermée à ventilation extérieure rupture de l’arbre.
et rotor a cage. Equilibrage et montage des
Réception et stockage des moteurs. Le accouplements et des poulies. Sauf
moteur est expédié par le constructeur prêt à indication différente, le rotor est équilibré
l’installation, après des contrôles de qualité dynamiquement avec une demi-clavette à
pendant le cycle de production ainsi qu’un l’extremité libre de l’arbre.
essai final afin d’en constater la conformité Les niveaux maximums de vibration sont les
aux specifications du projet. suivants:
Dès la réception on recommande d’examiner
le moteur afin de vérifier qu’il n’a pas été Hauteur d’axe Valeur efficace niveau
endommagé pendant le transport. Au cas où moteur de vibration
le moteur ne doit pas être mis en service mm/s à 600-3600 tr/mm
immédiatement, il faut le stocker dans un 80 – 132 1,8
endroit couvert, propre, sec et sans
vibrations. 160 – 225 2,8
Installation. Le moteur doit être installé dans
un endroit bien ventilé. Il faut éviter que la 250 – 400 4,5
ventilation soit empêchée par des murs ou
d’autres machines en proximité. Il faut équilibrer soigneusement la
Il faut prévoir la possibilité d’inspections et transmission avec une demi-clavette avant le
d’entretiens pendant le fonctionnement. montage.
La fondation du moteur doit être plane, Le montage des accouplements et des
robuste afin d’absorber les vibrations, poulies doit être effectué avec tout soin, afin
suffisamment rigide pour maintenir d’eviter des chocs qui peuvent endommager
l’alignement. les roulements.
Alignement. L’alignement du moteur doit se Essai d’isolation. Avant la mise en service
faire toujours avec le plus grand soin, surtout et après de longues périodes d’inactivité ou
lorsqu’il est accouplé directement à la de stockage, on conseille de mesurer la
machine entraînée. résistance d’isolation du bobinage qui devra
Dès qu’on observe des vibrations ou des être au dessus de 5 M Ω à une température
dommages aux roulements, il y a tout lieu de ambiante de 25° C.
croire que l’alignement est défectueux: il faut Si l’on ne peut pas obtenir cette valeur, c’est
alors le vérifier immédiatement. que le bobinage est humide et il faut le
Accouplements. La transmission de la sécher en s’adressant à une Maison
puissance à la machine entraînée a lieu soit spécialisée.
par accouplement direct soit par des Connexion électrique. En ce qui concerne
courroies. la connexion électrique, il vaut bien respecter
En cas d’accouplement direct on conseille les dispositions de sécurité en vigueur et
d’employer un joint élastique ou un joint s’assurer que les données nominales soient
flexible afin d’eviter la transmission de toutes en conformité aux caractéristique du circuit
poussées axiales sur les roulements. auquel le moteur doit être connecté.
En cas d’accouplement avec courroies il faut La connexion doit être effectuée
installer le moteur avec l’axe parallèle à celui conformément aux schémas 1 2 3 4 5.
de la machine entraînée et sur des chariots
12
Mise à la terre. A l’intérieur de la boîte à tension et de la courbe de courant
bornes ou près de celle-ci se trouve en conformement à la tension.
position visible la borne servant à la Entretien. Le moteur et les éventuels
connexion à la terre, qui doit être effectuée appareils doivent être toujours gardés
par un conducteur de cuivre avec section propres et exempts de poussière, saletés,
carrée suivant les normes en vigueur. huile ou d’autres souillures.
Sens de rotation. Les moteurs de série C’est bonne règle de vérifier périodiquement
peuvent fonctionner indifféremment dans les que le moteur fonctionne sans vibrations ou
deux sens de rotation. Si la ligne bruits anomaux, que la tension d’éventuelles
d’alimentation est connectée aux bornes U1 courroies de transmission soit correcte, que
V1 W1, et si la séquence de phase de la l’entrée du circuit de ventilation ne soit pas
ligne est 1,2,3, le moteur tournera dans le obstruée avec possibilité de surchauffage
sens horaire, vu du côté de l’accouplement. des bobinages.
Pour faire tourner le moteur dans le sens Roulements - Graissage. Les moteurs
contraire, interchanger n’importe quels deux aves des roulements étanches autograissés
des trois conducteurs connectés au moteur. à vie ne demandent pas de graissage. La
Protections électriques. Les moteurs durée des roulements varie de 3 à 5 ans
doivent être protégés contre les effects des selon les charges axiales et radiales
courtcircuits, des surcharges qui se appliquées à l’arbre et selon les conditions
produisent pendant le service, de la marche ambiantes où le moteur est utilisé.
monophasée, en installant avant eux un Les moteurs prévus avec dispositif de
interrupteur conformément dimensionné, graissage de roulements doivent être
pourvu de rélais thermique calibré pour le graissés lorsqu’ils tournent, selon les
courant nominal de plaque. intervalles de graissage, le type de la graisse
Afin d’augmenter la sécurité de et la qualité indiqués au tableau 7.
fonctionnement en cas de services Les intervalles de graissage se réfèrent à un
particulièrement lourds, on peut installer, sur moteur installé dans une ambiance normale.
demande, dans les enroulements des Si les conditions ambiantes sont difficiles à
thermostats: Klixon, Thermistors, Eléments cause de la présence de poussière, d’eau,
de mesure de la temperature. d’hautes temperatures, les intervalles doivent
Démarrage. La plupart des moteurs être réduits.
asynchrones triphasés avec rotor à cage Dans le tableau 6 on a indiqué les
peut être mise en service avec démarrage roulements montés sur des moteurs
direct, en verifiant l’installation selon le normaux de série.
courant absorbé au démarrage. Aux pages 19-20-21 on a indiqué les pièces
Le démarrage étoile-triangle doit être utilisé de rechange pour les différents types de
quand on demande des couples et des moteurs normaux de série. En cas de
courants de demarrage trés bas, c' est-à-direproblèmes concernant le service et
25%-30% des valeurs qu’il aurait en cas de l’entretien des machines électriques, prière
démarrage direct. Le couple résistant prendre contact avec le Service Engineering
pendant le démarrage doit être suffisamment de Electro Adda.
inférieur au couple de démarrage.
La commutation de étoile à triangle doit être
effectuée en proximité de la vitesse
nominale. Ces conditions ne se vérifiant pas,
le démarrage peut se faire en reduisant la
tension aux bornes du moteur par
transformateur, résistances ou réactances
statoriques.
De cette façon, on peut obtenir une réduction
de la courbe de couple avec le carré de la
MOTORES ELECTRICOS ASINCRONOS TRIFASICOS
Instrucciones para el empleo y la cojinetes. En caso de acoplamiento
manutención. Estas instrucciones tienen el mediante bandas de transmisión, instalar el
objeto de indicar a los instaladores y a los motor con el eje paralelo al eje de la
utilizadores las correctas condiciones de máquina accionada y sobre correderas para
empleo y de manutención de motores tensar la correa por fin de poder regular la
asíncronos trifásicos cerrados con tensión de las bandas. Tener pesente que
ventilación exterior y rotor en jaula. una tensión demasiado fuerte perjudica la
duración de los cojinetes y en los casos más
Llegada y almacenaje de los motores. graves puede aún producir la ruptura del eje.
Desde la fábrica el motor sale, listo para la
instalación, después de controles de calidad Equilibración y montaje de los
efectuados durante el ciclo de producción y acoplamientos y de las poleas. Excepto
después de una prueba final hecha para indicaciones diferentes, el rotor es
comprobar la conformidad a las equilibrado dinámicamente con media
especificaciones del proyecto. chaveta en la extremidad libre del eje.
Una vez llegado, sírvanse examinar el motor Los niveles máximos de vibración son los
para verificar que no se haya dañdo durante siguientes:
el transporte.
Si el motor no es puesto en función de Tamaño Valor eficaz nivel de
inmediato, el tiene que ser almacenado en motor vibración
un sitio cubierto, limpio, sin humedad y mm/s a 600-3600 rpm
vibraciones. 80 – 132 1,8
Instalación. Instalar el motor en sitio bien 160 – 225 2,8
ventilado, evitar que la proximidad de muros
o de otras máquinas impida la ventilación. 250 – 400 4,5
Prever la posibilidad de inspecciones y
manutención durante el funcionamiento. El órgano de transmisión tiene que ser
La fundación del motor debe ser plana, equilibrado con mucho cuidado con media
resitente para absorber las vibraciones y chaveta antes del montaje. El montaje de los
bastantemente rígida para mantener la acoplamientos tiene que ser hecho con
alineación. cautela particular por fin de evitar choques
que pueden ocasionar daños a los cojinetes.
Alineación. El motor tiene que ser siempre
bien alineado, especialmente si el mismo Prueba de aislamiento. Antes de la puesta
está acoplado directamente a la máquina en función y después de largos períodos de
accionada. inactividad o almacenaje, se aconseja de
Caso que relevan vibraciones o averías en medir la resistencia de aislamiento del
los cojinetes, la alineación tiene que ser bobinado que tiene que ser superior a 5 M Ω
controlada de inmediato porque podría ser con temperatura ambiente de 25° C.
desalineada. Si no se consigue el valor indicado, el
bobinado está húmedo y tiene que ser
Acoplamientos. La transmisión de potencia secado por una empresa especializada.
a la máquina de trabajo puede conseguirse
por acoplamiento directo o mediante bandas Conexión eléctrica. Para la conexión
de transmisión. eléctrica tienen que cumplir con las normas
En caso de acoplamiento directo tiene que de seguridad en vigor y comprobar que los
ser empleado un manchón elástico o un datos de placa sean conformes a las
manchón flexible para evitar la transmisión características del circuito al cual tiene que
14 de eventuales empujes axiales en los
conectarse el motor. La conexión tiene que La conmutación de estrella a triángulo tiene
hacerse conformemente a los esquemas 1 2 que sobrevenir en proximidad de la
3 4 5. velocidad nominal. Si no hay estas
condiciones, puede efectuarse el arranque
Conexión a tierra. Interiormente a la caja de disminuiendo la tensión a los bornes del
bornes o cerca de la misma está conectado motor por medio de transformador,
en posición visible el borne para la conexión resistencias o reactancias estatóricas.
a tierra que tiene que hacerse por medio de De esta manera es posible conseguir una
un conductor en cobre que tenga una reducción de la curva de momento torsional
sección proporcionada, conformemente a las con el cuadrado de la tensión y de la curva
normas en vigor. de corriente linealmente con la tensión.
Sentido de rotación. Los motores normales Manutención. El motor y sus acesorios

pueden funcionar indiferentemente en los eventuales tienen que estar siempre limpios
dos sentidos de rotación. El motor gira en y no llevar residuos de polvo, suciedad,
sentido de las agujas del reloj mirandolo aceite u otras impuridades.
desde el lado acoplamiento, si la red está Es una buena regla la de comprobar
conectada a los bornes U1 V1 W1 y si la periódicamente si el motor marcha sin
secuencia de fase de la red es 1,2,3. vibraciones o ruidos anormales, que la
El sentido de rotación puede ser invertido tensión de eventuales bandas de transmisión
intercambiando entre ellos dos cualquiera de sea correcta, que la entrada del circuito de
los tres conductores que están conectados al ventilación no sea obstruida, con posibilidad
motor. de sobrecalentamiento de los bobinados.
Protecciones eléctricas. Los motores Cojinetes – Lubricación. Los motores

tienen que ser protegidos contra los efectos provistos de cojinetes estancos auto-
de los cortocircuitos, de las sobrecargas que lubricados a vida no necesitan de lubri-
ocurren en el funcionamiento, de la marcha cación. La duración de los cojinetes puede
monofásica, montando antes del motor un variar desde 3 hasta 5 años según las
interruptor correctamente dimensionado, cargas axiales y radiales aplicadas al eje y
provisto de relé térmico calibrado para la según las condiciones ambientales de
corriente nominal de placa. utilización del motor. Los motores planeados
La seguridad de funcionamiento puede ser con dispositivo de lubricación de los coji-
aumentada en el caso de servicios netes tienen que ser lubricados cuando el
particularmente pesados, instalando, sobre motor está en marcha según los intervalos
pedido, catpadores térmicos en el bobinado de lubricación, el tipo de grasa y la calidad
como: Klixon, Termistores, Termodetectores. indicados en la tabla 7. Los intervalos de
lubricación se refieren a un motor instalado
Arranque. Los motores asíncronos trifásicos en ambiente normal. Si las condiciones am-
con rotor en jaula en la mayoría de los casos bientales son gravosas debidas a presencia
pueden ser puestos en funcionamiento con de polvo, agua, temperaturas elevadas, los
arranque directo, comprobando la instalación intervalos tienen que reducirse.
en relación a la corriente absorbida al En la tabla 6 está la indicación de los coji-
arranque. netes montados en los motores normales.
El arranque estrella-triángulo tiene que A pág. 19-20-21 está las indicación de las
emplearse cuando necesitan momentos o piezas de repuesto para los diferentes tipos
corrientes de arranque muy bajas, en el de motores normales. En caso de otros
orden de 25%-30% de los valores que son problemas relativos al funcionamiento y
obtenidos con la conexión directa. La torsión manutención de las máquinas eléctricas
de reposición durante el arranque tiene que sírvanse dirigirse al Servicio Técnico Electro
ser suficientemente menor que el momento Adda.
de torsión desviador.
1 Motori ad una velocità coll. /
Single speed motors conn. /
W2 U2 V2 W2 U2 V2 Motoren mit einer Drehzahl Schalt.
/
Moteurs à une vitesse conn. /
U1 V1 W1
U1 V1 W1
Motores de una velocidad con. /
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
2 Motori a due velocità, unico

avvolgimento coll. /
3 1U 1V 1W 1U 1V 1W Two-speed motors, single winding
2 conn. /
1 Polumschaltbare Motoren mit einer
Wicklung Schalt. /
2U 2V 2W 2U 2V 2W
Moteurs à deux vitesses, un seul
bobinage conn. /
Motores de dos velocidades,
bobinado único con. /
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Motori a due velocità, per aziona-

3 mento ventilatori, unico avvolgimento
2 coll. /
1U 1V 1W 1U 1V 1W Two-speed motors for fan drive,
1 single winding conn. /
Polumschaltbare Motoren für
Lüfterantrieb, mit einer Wicklung
2U 2V 2W 2U 2V 2W Schalt. /
Moteurs à deux vitesses pour
entraînement ventilateurs, un seul
bobinage conn. /
Motores de dos velocidades para
accionar ventiladores, bobinado
16 único con. /
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
4
1U 1V 1W 1U 1V 1W
Motori a due velocità, doppio
avvolgimento
Two-speed motors, double winding
Polumschaltbare Motoren mit zwei
2U 2V 2W 2U 2V 2W getrennten Wicklungen
Moteurs à deux vitesses, double
bobinage
bobinado doble
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
5
1W2 1U2 1V2 1W2 1U2 1V2 Motori a due velocità, doppio avvol-
gimento doppia tensione coll. /
Two-speed motors, double winding
double voltage conn. /
1U1 1V1 1W1 1U1 1V1 1W1 Polumschaltbare Motoren mit zwei
getrennten Wicklungen zwei
Spannungen Schalt. /
Moteurs à deux vitesses, double bo-
2W2 2U2 2V2 2W2 2U2 2V2
binage double tension conn. /
bobinado doble tensión doble con.
2U1 2V1 2W1 2U1 2V1 2W1 /
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
1W2 1U2 1V2 1W2 1U2 1V2
Alta velocità
High speed
Höhere Drehzahl
1U1 1V1 1W1 1U1 1V1 1W1 Grande vitesse
Velocidad alta
2W2 2U2 2V2 2W2 2U2 2V2

Bassa velocità
Low speed
Niedrigere Drehzahl
Petite vitesse
2U1 2V1 2W1 2U1 2V1 2W1 Velocidad baja
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
6 CUSCINETTI – BEARINGS – LAGER – ROULEMENTS – COJINETES
1 2 3 4
Motore tipo Poli Cuscinetto lato accoppiamento Cuscinetto lato opposto accoppiamento
Motor Type Poles Bearing coupling side Bearing opposite coupling side
Motor Typ Polzahl Lager A-Seite Lager B-Seite
Moteur type Pôles Roulement côté accouplement Roulement côte opposé à l’accouplement
Motor tipo Polos Cojinete lado acoplamiento Cojinete lado opuesto a l’acoplamiento
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
56 2-8 6201-2Z 6201-2Z 250M-T 2 6313-C3 6313-C3
63 2-8 6202-2Z 6202-2Z 250M-T 4-8 6314-2Z 6314-2Z
71 2-8 6203-2Z 6203-2Z 280S-T 2 6314-C3 6314-C3
80 2-8 6204-2Z 6204-2Z 280M-T 2 6314-C3 6314-C3
90S 2-8 6205-2Z 6205-2Z 280S-T 4-8 6316-C3 6314-C3
90L 2-8 6205-2Z 6205-2Z 280M-T 4-8 6316-C3 6314-C3
100L 2-8 6206-2Z 6206-2Z 315S-T 2 6314-C3 6314-C3
112M-T 2-8 6206-2Z 6206-2Z 315S-T 4-8 6317-C3 6314-C3
132S 2-8 6208-2Z 6208-2Z 315M 2 6314-C3 6314-C3
132M 2-8 6208-2Z 6208-2Z 315M 4-8 NU317 6317-C3
160M-T 2-8 6309-2Z 6308-2Z 315M-n 4-8 NU320 6317-C3
160M 2-8 6309-2Z 6309-2Z 355L-T 2 6317-C3 6317-C3
160L 2-8 6309-2Z 6309-2Z 355L-a 2 6317-C3 6317-C3
180M-T 2-8 6310-2Z 6309-2Z 355L-b 2 6317-C3 6317-C3
180L-T 2-8 6310-2Z 6309-2Z 355L-T 4-8 NU322 6320-C3
200L-T 2-8 6312-2Z 6311-2Z 355L-a 4-8 NU322 6320-C3
225M-T 2 6312-C3 6312-C3 355L-b 4-8 NU322 6320-C3
225S-T 4-8 6313-2Z 6313-2Z 400L 4-8 NU324 6322-C3
225M-T 4-8 6313-2Z 6313-2Z
INTERVALLI DI Cuscinetto tipo 2-Poli 4-Poli 6-Poli 8-Poli Quantità di grasso in g.

LUBRIFICAZIONE Bearing type 2-Poles 4-Poles 6-Poles 8-Poles Grease qty. in grs.
IN ORE Lager typ 2-Polig 4-Polig 6-Polig 8-Polig Fettmenge in G.
Roulement type 2-Pôles 4-Pôles 6-Pôles 8-Pôles Quantité de graisse en grs.
Cojinete tipo 2-Polos 4-Polos 6-Polos 8-Polos Cantidad de grasa en G.
LUBRICATION 6312-C3 1400 _ _ _ 20
INTERVALS IN
6313-C3 1200 _ _ _ 32
HOURS
6314-C3 1100 3300 5500 7700 26
NACHSCHMIE- 6316-C3 800 2800 4900 7000 33
RINTERVALLE IN
STD. 6317-C3 650 2600 4600 6600 37
6320-C3 _ 2100 3900 5800 51

INTERVALLES
DE 6322-C3 _ 1700 3500 5300 60
LUBRIFICATION
EN HEURES NU417 _ 1300 2300 3300 37
NU320 _ 1000 1900 2900 51

INTERVALOS DE NU322 _ 890 1700 2600 60
LUBRICACIóN
EN HORAS NU324 _ 730 1500 2400 72
Grasso – Grease – Schmierfett – Graisse – Grasa : ESSO BEACON 3 SKF LGHT3

O corrispondenti – Or corresponding – Oder entsprechende – Ou correspondants - O correspondientes
18
ERSATZTEILE
15. Dichtung für Klemmenkastenunterteil
1. A-seitiges Lager 16. Klemmbrett
2. Befestigungsschraube für Lagerschild 17. Gewindestange / Spannbolzen
3. Wicklung 18. Paßfeder A-Seite
4. Ständergehäuse mit Paket 19. Befestigungsschraube für Lagerschild
5. Welle mit Rotor 20. Befestigungsschraube für Lüfterflügel
6. B-seitiges Lager 21. Seegerring für Lüfter
7. Ausgleichsfeder 22. Paßfeder Lüfterseite
8. B-seitiges Lagerschild 23. Seegerring für Kuggellager A-Seite
9. Lüfterflügel 24. Lagerabschlußdeckel innen, A-Seite
10. Lüfterhaube 25. Lagerabschlußdeckel innen, B-Seite
11. Befestigungsschraube für Lüfterflügel 26. Lagerabschlußdeckel außen, A-Seite
12. Befestigungsschraube für Klemmenkasten 27. Lagerabschlußdeckel außen, B-Seite
13. Klemmenkasten 28. “Telecamit” – Nachschmiereinrichtung
14. Kabelverschraubung 29. Lagerschild mit Flansch
PIECES DETACHEES 15. Garniture

16. Bornier
1. Roulement avant 17. Tirant
2. Vis fixation flasque 18. Clavette côté accouplement
3. Bobinage 19. Vis fixation flasque
4. Carcasse avec paquet statorique 20. Vis fixation ventilateur
5. Arbre avec rotor 21. Bague élastique Seeger
6. Roulement arrière 22. Clavette côté ventilateur
7. Ressort de compensation 23. Bague élastique Seeger
8. Flasque arrière 24. Couvercle pare-graisse intérieur avant
9. Ventilateur 25. Couvercle pare-graisse intérieur arrière
10. Capot de ventilateur 26. Couvercle pare-graisse extérieur avant
11. Vis fixation capot ventilateur 27. Couvercle pare-graisse extérieur arrière
12. Vis fixation boîte à bornes 28. Graisseur “Tecalamit”
13. Boîte à bornes 29. Flasque avec bride
14. Presse étoupe
PIEZAS DE REPUESTO 15. Guarnición

1. Cojinete anterior 16. Bloque terminal
2. Tornillo de fijación escudo 17. Tirante
3. Bobinado 18. Chaveta lado acoplamiento
4. Carcasa con paquete estator 19. Tornillo de fijación escudo
5. Eje con rotor 20. Tornillo de fijación ventilador
6. Cojinete posterior 21. Arandela Seeger
7. Muelle de equilibrio 22. Chaveta lado ventilador
8. Escudo posterior 23. Arandela Seeger
9. Ventilador 24. Tapa paragrasa anterior interna
10. Tapa del ventilador 25. Tapa paragrasa posterior interna
11. Tornillo de fijación tapa del ventilador 26. Tapa paragrasa anterior externa
12. Tornillo de fijación caja de bornes 27. Tapa paragrasa posterior externa
13. Caja de bornes 28. Engrasador “Tecalamit”
14. Sujeta-cables 29. Escudo con brida
INDICE ROTIERENDE ELEKTRISCHE DREHMASCHINEN S
CONTENTS Fertigungsprogramm 2
INDEX Betriebsanleitung 10
INDEX Schaltbilder 16
INDICE Lager 18
Nachschmierintervalle für Lager 18
Ersatzteile 19
MACCHINE ELETTRICHE ROTANTI P MACHINES ÉLECTRIQUES TOURNANTES P

Produzione 2 Production 2
Istruzioni d’uso 6 Modes d’emploi 12
Schemi di collegamento 16 Schémas de connexion 16
Cuscinetti 18 Roulements 18
Intervalli di lubrificazione per cuscinetti 18 Intervalles de lubrification pour roulements 18
Parti di ricambio 19 Pièces détachées 19
ELECTRIC ROTARY MACHINES P MAQUINAS ELÉCTRICAS ROTATORIAS P

Production range 2 Producción 2
Operating instructions 8 Instrucciones para empleo 14
Wirings diagrams 16 Esquemas de conexión 16
Bearings 18 Cojinetes 18
Lubrication intervals for bearings 18 Intervalos de lubricación para cojinetes 18
Spare parts 19 Piezas de repuesto 19
ELECTRO ADDA SPA

COSTRUZIONI ELETTROMECCANICHE
8 VIA NAZIONALE, 23883 BEVERATE di BRIVIO LC – ITALY
TELEFONO +39 039 53.20.621, FAX +39 039 53.21.335
info@electroadda.com - www.electroadda.com
1452321099 / 00 / 19.04.2016
We live our values.
Excellence • Passion • Integrity • Responsibility • GEA-versity
GEA Group is a global engineering company with multi-billion euro sales and
operations in more than 50 countries. Founded in 1881, the company is one of the
largest providers of innovative equipment and process technology. GEA Group is
listed in the STOXX® Europe 600 Index.

Tel.: +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
ws.info@gea.com, www.gea.com

Contents - 6 X CU E 5 - LO - EN

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contents - 6 X CU E 5 - LO - EN

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION

EDITION / AUSGABE - 19.04.2016

CUSTOMER / KUNDE: Vard Promar SA_Vard Soeviknes

engineering for a better world www.gea.com

Die Verfasser freuen sich immer über Kommentare und Ratschläge

The authors are always for comments and suggestions for

© GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

4.2 ADJUSTMENT VALUES AND FAULT SIGNALS 373

6.2 GEAR PUMP UNIT WITH MOTOR CPL.

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

9 VALVES, FITTINGS, ASSEMBLY

9.2 3/2 WAY SOLENOID VALVE

9.3 SPRING SAFETY VALVE

9.4 BALL COCK

9.5 SOLENOID-VALVE BLOCK, COMPLETE

9.6 GATE VALVE

9.7 NON-RETURN VALVE

9.8 NON-RETURN VALVE, COMPL.

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

9.9 AIR CONTROL ASSY.

10.2 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

10.3 STOP SWITCH

10.4 PROXIMITY SENSOR

10.5 RESISTANCE THERMOMETER

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

11.2 GEAR PUMP UNIT WITH MOTOR CPL.

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

Designation: Safety precautions

engineering for a better world GEA Mechanical Equipment

GEA Mechanical Equipment

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

For your safety

• Observe the accident prevention regulations!

• Follow the instructions in the manual.

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

1.1 Safety markings ....................................................................................... 5

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

1.1 Safety markings

1.1.1 Safety markings and their meaning

Be sure to adhere to the plant

Disconnect power prior to start-

Before carrying out work on the

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

Frequency converter operation!

Warning of extreme surface

The surfaces of the plant components

Danger due to electrical current!

Before working on electrical com-

• Lock the installation to prevent it from being accidentally switched on.

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

Potential equalisation (protec-

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

1.2 Performing work on a plant

The plant works reliably, provided that

Special attention must be given to:

1.2.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel

Westfalia Separator accepts no liability for damage caused by unqualified

The operator of the plant

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

Westfalia Separator offers a an extensive range of training and advanced train-